Updated October 1, 2014

Updated October 1, 2014

 i

COPYRIGHT
Copyright © 2013 by the U.S. Green Building Council. All rights reserved.

The U.S. Green Building Council, Inc. (USGBC) devoted significant time and resources to create this LEED
Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, 2013 Edition. USGBC authorizes individual use of the
Reference Guide. In exchange for this authorization, the user agrees:
1. to retain all copyright and other proprietary notices contained in the Reference Guide,
2. not to sell or modify the Reference Guide, and
3. not to reproduce, display, or distribute the Reference Guide in any way for any public or commercial purpose,
including display on a website or in a networked environment.

Unauthorized use of the Reference Guide violates copyright, trademark, and other laws and is prohibited.

The text of the federal and state codes, regulations, voluntary standards, etc., reproduced in the Reference Guide is
used under license to USGBC or, in some instances, in the public domain. All other text, graphics, layout, and other
elements of content in the Reference Guide are owned by USGBC and are protected by copyright under both United
States and foreign laws.

NOTE: for downloads of the Reference Guide:

Redistributing the Reference Guide on the internet or otherwise is STRICTLY prohibited even if offered free of
charge. DOWNLOADS OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT BE COPIED OR DISTRIBUTED. THE USER OF
THE REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT ALTER, REDISTRIBUTE, UPLOAD OR PUBLISH THIS REFERENCE GUIDE
IN WHOLE OR IN PART, AND HAS NO RIGHT TO LEND OR SELL THE DOWNLOAD OR COPIES OF THE
DOWNLOAD TO OTHER PERSONS.

DISCLAIMER
None of the parties involved in the funding or creation of the Reference Guide, including the USGBC, its members,
its contractors, or the United States government, assume any liability or responsibility to the user or any third parties
for the accuracy, completeness, or use of or reliance on any information contained in the Reference Guide, or for
any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief ) arising from such use or reliance.
Although the information contained in the Reference Guide is believed to be reliable and accurate, all materials
set forth within are provided without warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited
to warranties of the accuracy or completeness of information contained in the training or the suitability of the
information for any particular purpose.
As a condition of use, the user covenants not to sue and agrees to waive and release the U.S. Green Building
Council, its members, its contractors, and the United States government from any and all claims, demands, and
causes of action for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief ) that the user
may now or hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as a result of the use of, or reliance on, the Reference
Guide.

U.S. Green Building Council

2101 L Street, NW
Suite 500
Washington, DC 20037

TRADEMARK
LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council.
LEED Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction
2013 Edition
ISBN #978-1-932444-19
ii

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
TheLEED Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, 2013 Edition, has been made possible only through
the efforts of many dedicated volunteers, staff members, and others in the USGBC community. The Reference Guide
drafting was managed and implemented by USGBC staff and consultants and included review and suggestions by
many Technical Advisory Group (TAG) members. We extend our deepest gratitude to all of our LEED committee
members who participated in the development of this guide, for their tireless volunteer efforts and constant support
of USGBC’s mission:

LEED Steering Committee

Joel Todd, Chair Joel Ann Todd
Bryna Dunn, Vice-Chair Moseley Architects
Felipe Faria Green Building Council Brasil
Elaine Hsieh KEMA Services
Susan Kaplan BuildingWrx
Malcolm Lewis Cadmus Group
Muscoe Martin M2 Architecture
Lisa Matthiessen Integral Group
Brenda Morawa Integrated Environmental Solutions
Tim Murray Morris Architects
Sara O'Mara Choate Construction Company
Bruce Poe Modus Architecture Collaborative
Alfonso Ponce Deloitte Finance
David Sheridan Aqua Cura
Lynn Simon Thornton Tomasetti
Doug Gatlin (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Scot Horst (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Brendan Owens (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council
Peter Templeton (Non-voting) U.S. Green Building Council

LEED Technical Committee

Susan Kaplan, Chair BuildingWrx
Maureen McGeary Mahle, Vice-Chair Steven Winter Associates
Jennifer Atlee BuildingGreen
Steve Baer Five Winds International
Ted Bardacke Global Green USA
Steve Benz OLIN
Neal Billetdeaux SmithGroupJJR
David Bracciano Alliance for Water Efficiency
Daniel Bruck BRC Acoustics & Audiovisual Design
David Carlson Columbia University
Jenny Carney YR&G
Mark Frankel New Buildings Institute
Nathan Gauthier EA Buildings
George Brad Guy Catholic University of America
Michelle Halle Stern The Green Facilitator
Malcolm Lewis Cadmus Group
John McFarland Working Buildings LLC
Jessica Millman The Agora Group
Neil Rosen North Shore LIJ Health System
Thomas Scarola Tishman Speyer
Chris Schaffner The Green Engineer
Marcus Sheffer 7group
Sheila Sheridan Sheridan Associates
Bob Thompson U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Alfred Vick University of Georgia
 iii

LEED Market Advisory Committee

Lisa Matthiessen, Chair Integral Group
Holley Henderson, Vice-Chair H2Ecodesign
Liana Berberidou-Kallivoka City of Austin
Jeffrey Cole Konstrukt
Walter Cuculic Pulte Homes
Rand Ekman Cannon Design
Richard Kleinman LaSalle Investment Management
Craig Kneeland NYSERDA
Muscoe Martin M2 Architecture
Cindy Quan Goldman Sachs & Co.
Matt Raimi Raimi + Associates
Jon Ratner Forest City Enterprises
Marcus Sheffer 7group
Rebecca Stafford University of California, Office of President
Gary Thomas CB Richard Ellis
Keith Winn Catalyst Partners

Implementation Advisory Committee

Brenda Morawa, Chair Integrated Environmental Solutions
Adam Fransen, Vice-Chair CB Richard Ellis
Michelle Malanca Michelle Malanca Sustainability Consulting
Brad Pease Paladino and Co.
Ken Potts McGough
Richard Schneider U.S. Army Engineer Research and Development Center
Greg Shank Altura Associates
David Sheridan Aqua Cura
Natalie Terrill Viridian Energy & Environmental
Bill Worthen Urban Fabrick Design
Max Zahniser Praxis | Building Solutions

Location and Planning TAG

Jessica Millman, Chair The Agora Group
John Dalzell, Vice-Chair Boston Redevelopment Authority/ City of Boston
Eliot Allen Criterion Planners
Laurence Aurbach Office of Laurence Aurbach
Ted Bardacke Global Green USA
Erin Christensen Mithun
Andy Clarke League of American Bicyclists
Fred Dock City of Pasadena
Bruce Donnelly Auricity
Victor Dover Dover, Kohl, and Partners
Reid Ewing University of Utah
Doug Farr Farr & Associates
Lois Fisher Fisher Town Design
Tim Frank Sierra Club
Randy Hansell Earth Advantage Institute
Justin Horner Natural Resources Defense Council
Ron Kilcoyne Lane Transit District
Todd Litman Victoria Transport Policy Institute
Dana Little Treasure Coast Regional Planning Council
Art Lomenick Parsons Brinckerhoff
Steve Mouzon New Urban Guild
iv

Lynn Richards U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

Harrison Rue ICF International
Shawn Seamen PN Hoffman
Anthony Sease Civitech
Laurie Volk Zimmerman/ Volk Associates
Patricia White Defenders of Wildlife

Sustainable Sites TAG

Jenny Carney, Chair YR&G
Neal Billetdeaux, Vice-Chair SmithGroupJJR
Michele Adams Meliora Environmental Design
Joby Carlson University of Arkansas
Laura Case Southface Energy Institute
Stephen Cook VIKA
Richard Heinisch Acuity Brands Lighting
Heather Holdridge Lake | Flato Architects
Jason King Greenworks, PC
Katrina Rosa The EcoLogic Studio
Kyle Thomas Natural Systems Engineering
Alfred Vick University of Georgia
Teresa Watkins St. John's Water Management District
Steve Benz OLIN

Water Efficiency TAG

Neil Rosen, Chair North Shore LIJ Health System
Doug Bennett, Vice-Chair Las Vegas Valley Water District / Southern Nevada Water Authority
Damann Anderson Hazen & Sawyer
Gunnar Baldwin TOTO USA
Robert Benazzi Jaros Baum & Bolles
Steve Benz OLIN
Neal Billetdeaux SmithGroupJJR
David Bracciano Alliance for Water Efficiency
David Carlson Columbia University
Ron Hand E/FECT. Sustainable Design Solutions
Bill Hoffman H.W. Hoffman and Associates
Winston Huff SSR Engineers
Joanna Kind Eastern Research Group
Heather Kinkade Forgotten Rain
Gary Klein Affiliated International Management
John Koeller Koeller and Company
Shawn Martin International Code Council
Don Mills Clivus Multrum
Geoff Nara Civil & Environmental Consultants
Karen Poff Austin Energy
Shabbir Rawalpindiwala Kohler
Robert Rubin NCSU
Stephanie Tanner US Environmental Protection Agency
David Viola International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
Bill Wall Clivus New England
Daniel Yeh University of South Florida
Rob Zimmerman Kohler
 v

Energy and Atmosphere TAG

Nathan Gauthier, Chair EA Buildings
Jeremy Poling, Vice-Chair Goby
John Adams General Services Administration
Amanda Bogner The Energy Studio
Kevin Bright Harvard University
Lane Burt Natural Resources Defense Council
Allan Daly Taylor Engineering
Charles Dorgan University of Wisconsin-Madison
Jay Enck Commissioning & Green Building Solutions
Ellen Franconi Rocky Mountain Institute
Scott Frank Jaros Baum & Bolles
Gail Hampsmire Low Energy Low Cost
Tia Heneghan ZIA for Buildings
Rusty Hodapp Dallas/Fort Worth International Airport Board
Brad Jones Sebesta Blomberg
Dan Katzenberger Engineering, Energy, and the Environment
Doug King King Sustainability
Chris Ladner Viridian
Richard Lord Carrier Corporation
Bob Maddox Sterling Planet
Rob Moody Organic Think
Brenda Morawa BVM Engineering
Paul Raymer Heyoka Solutions
Erik Ring LPA
David Roberts National Renewable Energy Laboratory
Michael Rosenberg Pacific Northwest National Laboratory
Greg San Martin PG&E
Chris Schaffner The Green Engineer
Marcus Sheffer 7group
Gordon Shymko G.F. Shymko & Associates
Jason Steinbock The Weidt Group
Jorge Torres Coto MBO
Tate Walker Energy Center of Wisconsin

Materials and Resources TAG

Steve Baer, Chair PE INTERNATIONAL/ Five Winds Strategic Consulting
Brad Guy, Vice-Chair Material Reuse
Paul Bertram Kingspan Insulated Panels, North America
Paul Bierman-Lytle Pangeon/ iMCC Management Consulting
Steve Brauneis Rocky Mountain Institute
Amy Costello Armstrong World Industries
Chris Geiger San Francisco Department of the Environment
Barry Giles BuildingWise
Avi Golen Construction Waste Management
Lee Gros Lee Gros Architect and Artisan
Rick Levin Kahler Slater
Joep Meijer The Right Environment
Xhavin Sinha CH2M HILL
Raymond Smith U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Wes Sullens StopWaste.Org of Alameda County
Denise Van Valkenburg Eurofins
vi

Indoor Environmental Quality TAG

Daniel Bruck, Chair BRC Acoustics & Audiovisual Design
Michelle Halle Stern, Vice-Chair The Green Facilitator
Sahar Abbaszadeh The Cadmus Group
Terry Brennan Camroden Associates
Aida Carbo UL Environment
Randal Carter Steelcase
Wenhao Chen California Department of Public Health
Nancy Clanton Clanton & Associates
Dan Dempsey Carrier
Larry Dykhuis Herman Miller
Dwayne Fuhlhage PROSOCO
Stowe Hartridge Beam Scientific Certification Systems
Dan Int-Hout Krueger
Alexis Kurtz The Sextant Group
Matt Latchford Lam Partners
David Lubman David Lubman & Associates
Richard Master USG Corporation
John McFarland WorkingBuildings
Bud Offermann Indoor Environmental Engineering
Reinhard Oppl Eurofins Product Testing A/S
Ozgem Ornektekin New York University
Charles Salter Salter Associates
Chris Schaffner The Green Engineer
Dana Schneider Jones Lang LaSalle
Dennis Stanke Trane Commercial Systems
Don Stevens Panasonic Home and Environment Company
Bob Thompson U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Ellen Tohn Tohn Environmental Strategies
Prasad Vaidya The Weidt Group

Pilot Credit Library Working Group

Marc Cohen (Chair) The Cadmus Group
Lindsay Baker Mary Davidge Associates
Cheryl Baldwin GreenSeal
James Bogdan PPG Industries
Carlie Bullock-Jones Ecoworks Studio
Paul Firth UL Environment
Mick Schwedler Trane
Steve Taylor Taylor Engineering
Richard Young Fisher-Nickel

Integrative Process Task Group

Lindsay Baker Mary Davidge Associates
John Boecker 7group
Penny Bonda Ecoimpact Consulting
Jenny Carney YR&G
Joel Todd Joel Ann Todd
Bill Reed Integrative Design Collaborative
Heather Rosenberg The Cadmus Group
Linda Sorrento National Academy of Environmental Design
Keith Winn Catalyst Partners
Bill Worthen Urban Fabrik
Max Zahniser Praxis | Building Solutions
 vii

A special thanks to USGBC and GBCI staff for their invaluable efforts in developing this reference guide, especially
to the following for their technical expertise: Emily Alvarez, Eric Anderson, Theresa Backhus, Lonny Blumenthal,
Amy Boyce, Steve Brauneis, Sarah Buffaloe, Sara Cederberg, Christopher Davis, Robyn Eason, Corey Enck, Sean Fish,
Asa Foss, Deon Glaser, Scott Haag, Gail Hampsmire, Jason Hercules, Jackie Hofmaenner, Theresa Hogerheide, Mika
Kania, Heather Langford, Christopher Law, Rebecca Lloyd, Emily Loquidis, Chrissy Macken, Chris Marshall, Batya
Metalitz, Larissa Oaks, Lauren Riggs, Jarrod Siegel, Micah Silvey, Ken Simpson, Megan Sparks, Rebecca Stahlnecker,
and Tim Williamson.
A special thanks to Jessica Centella, Selina Holmes, and Dave Marcus for their graphics support and eye for
design.
A thank you also goes to Scot Horst, Doug Gatlin, and Brendan Owens for their vision and support, and Meghan
Bogaerts for her hard work, attention to detail and flair for writing. A very special thanks to Dara Zycherman, staff
lead on the development of the LEED v4 Reference Guide suite, for her unwavering commitment to quality and her
dedication to the production of the guides.
A special thanks to the consultant team which included Arup, CBRE, C.C. Johnson & Malhotra, Criterion
Planners, Goby, Paladino & Co., Post Typography, West Main, and YR&G, and the unique artwork created for this
publication by RTKL Associates.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PREFACE 4

GETTING STARTED 8

MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS 27

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE 33

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS 37
Prerequisite Integrative Project Planning and Design..................................................................... 37
Credit Integrative Process............................................................................................................................43

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION 55

LT Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 55
LT Credit LEED for Neighborhood Development Location.........................................................59
LT Credit Sensitive Land Protection........................................................................................................63
LT Credit High-Priority Site........................................................................................................................... 71
LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses............................................................................. 77
LT Credit Access to Quality Transit..........................................................................................................89
LT Credit Bicycle Facilities............................................................................................................................99
LT Credit Reduced Parking Footprint...................................................................................................... 111
LT Credit Green Vehicles...............................................................................................................................121

SUSTAINABLE SITES 137

SS Overview........................................................................................................................................................137
SS Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention.......................................................139
SS Prerequisite Environmental Site Assessment..............................................................................147
SS Credit Site Assessment..........................................................................................................................153
SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat...........................................................163
SS Credit Open Space...................................................................................................................................177
SS Credit Rainwater Management...........................................................................................................183
SS Credit Heat Island Reduction..............................................................................................................197
SS Credit Light Pollution Reduction..................................................................................................... 207
SS Credit Site Master Plan..........................................................................................................................225
 SS Credit Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines............................................................... 229
SS Credit Places of Respite........................................................................................................................237
SS Credit Direct Exterior Access............................................................................................................ 243
SS Credit Joint Use of Facilities.............................................................................................................. 249
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

WATER EFFICIENCY 257

WE Overview....................................................................................................................................................257
WE Prerequisite Outdoor Water Use Reduction............................................................................ 259
WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction.................................................................................267
WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering............................................................................ 283
WE Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction.........................................................................................287
WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction.............................................................................................297
WE Credit Cooling Tower Water Use................................................................................................... 305
WE Credit Water Metering...........................................................................................................................311

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE 319

EA Overview...................................................................................................................................................... 319
EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification...............................................321
EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance............................................................................. 335
EA Prerequisite Building-Level Energy Metering............................................................................375
EA Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant Management..............................................................381
EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning................................................................................................... 387
EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance..........................................................................................405
EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering................................................................................................. 413
EA Credit Demand Response................................................................................................................... 421
EA Credit Renewable Energy Production.......................................................................................... 429
EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management................................................................................ 441
EA Credit Green Power and Carbon Offsets.................................................................................... 453

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES 465

MR Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 465
MR Prerequisite Storage and Collection of Recyclables...............................................................471
MR Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning..................477
MR Prerequisite PBT Source Reduction—Mercury........................................................................ 483
MR Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction.......................................................................... 493
MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—
Environmental Product Declarations................................................................................................511
MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—
Sourcing of Raw Materials...................................................................................................................523
MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—
Material Ingredients................................................................................................................................ 539
MR Credit PBT Source Reduction—Mercury......................................................................................551
MR Credit PBT Source Reduction—Lead, Cadmium, and Copper..........................................557
MR Credit Furniture and Medical Furnishings................................................................................. 565
MR Credit Design for Flexibility...............................................................................................................575
MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management................................................. 585

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY 595

EQ Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 595
EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance......................................................603
EQ Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control.............................................................621
EQ Prerequisite Minimum Acoustic Performance............................................................................631
EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies....................................................................... 643
EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials......................................................................................................... 655
EQ Credit Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan................................................675
EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment......................................................................................... 683
EQ Credit Thermal Comfort...................................................................................................................... 693
EQ Credit Interior Lighting........................................................................................................................ 709
EQ Credit Daylight..........................................................................................................................................721
EQ Credit Quality Views..............................................................................................................................737
EQ Credit Acoustic Performance............................................................................................................755

INNOVATION 775
IN Overview.......................................................................................................................................................775
IN Credit Innovation.......................................................................................................................................777
IN Credit LEED Accredited Professional............................................................................................ 783

REGIONAL PRIORITY 787

RP Overview......................................................................................................................................................787
RP Credit Regional Priority....................................................................................................................... 789

APPENDICES 793
Appendix 1. Use Types and Categories............................................................................................... 793
Appendix 2. Default Occupancy Counts............................................................................................ 794
Appendix 3. Retail Process Load Baselines...................................................................................... 795
 4
PREFACE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

THE CASE FOR GREEN BUILDING

Green buildings are an integral part of the solution to The impetus behind development of the
the environmental challenges facing the planet. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
Today we use the equivalent of 1.5 Earths to meet the (LEED) rating systems was recognition of those
resource needs of everyday life and absorb the resulting problems, coupled with awareness that the design
wastes. This measure of our planet’s carrying capacity and construction industry already had the expertise,
means that it takes Earth 18 months to regenerate what tools, and technology to transform buildings and
is used in only 12 months. If current trends continue, make significant advances toward a sustainable
estimates suggest, by the year 2030 we will need the planet. LEED projects throughout the world have
equivalent of two planets.1 Turning resources into waste demonstrated the benefits of taking a green design
faster than they can be regenerated puts the planet into approach that reduces the environmental harms of
ecological overshoot, a clearly unsustainable condition buildings and restores the balance of natural systems.
that we all must address. Buildings have a major role to play in
The forces driving this situation are numerous. sustainability through their construction, the lifetime
Human population has increased exponentially in the of their operation, and patterns of development.
past 60 years, from about 2.5 billion in 1950 to more As Earth’s population continues to increase,
than 7 billion today. Our linear use of resources, treating construction and renovation of buildings expand
outputs as waste, is responsible for the toxins that are even more rapidly. For example, estimates for the U.S.
accumulating in the atmosphere, in water, and on the indicate that two-thirds of the structures that will
ground. This pattern of extraction, use, and disposal has exist in 2050 will have been built between now and
hastened depletion of finite supplies of nonrenewable then.4 What we build today and where we build it are
energy, water, and materials and is accelerating the pace profoundly important.
of our greatest problem—climate change. Buildings The green building portion of the construction
account for a significant portion of greenhouse gas market is rapidly expanding. It represented 2% of
emissions; in the U.S., buildings are associated with nonresidential construction starts in 2005, 12%
38% of all emissions of carbon dioxide2; globally, the in 2008, and 28% to 35% in 2010.5 The concept of
figure is nearly one-third.3 The problem is anticipated to green buildings provides a vision for resource equity
worsen as developing countries attain higher standards between developing and developed nations. As green
of living. These forces are bringing us to a tipping point, building practices guide developed nations toward
a threshold beyond which Earth cannot rebalance itself a more responsible use of resources, they enable
without major disruption to the systems that humans developing nations to attain essential improvements
and other species rely on for survival. in quality of life without overtaxing local resources.

1. Global Footprint Network, http://footprintnetwork.org/en/index.php/gfn/page/world_footprint/, accessed 9/11/2012

2. Energy Information Administration (2008). Assumptions to the Annual Energy Outlook
3. unep.org/sbci/pdfs/SBCI-BCCSummary.pdf.
4. Ewing, R., K. Bartholomew, S. Winkleman, J. Walters, and D. Chen, Growing Cooler: The Evidence on Urban Development and Climate Change (Washington,
DC: Urban Land Institute, 2008), p. 8, smartgrowthamerica.org/documents/growingcoolerCH1.pdf.
5. Green Outlook 2011: Green Trends Driving Growth (McGraw-Hill Construction, 2010).
 5

ABOUT LEED
Developed by the U.S. Green Building Council, LEED is a framework for identifying, implementing, and measuring
green building and neighborhood design, construction, operations, and maintenance. LEED is a voluntary, market-
driven, consensus-based tool that serves as a guideline and assessment mechanism. LEED rating systems address
commercial, institutional, and residential buildings and neighborhood developments.
LEED seeks to optimize the use of natural resources, promote regenerative and restorative strategies, maximize

PREFACE
the positive and minimize the negative environmental and human health consequences of the construction
industry, and provide high-quality indoor environments for building occupants. LEED emphasizes integrative
design, integration of existing technology, and state-of-the-art strategies to advance expertise in green building
and transform professional practice. The technical basis for LEED strikes a balance between requiring today’s best
practices and encouraging leadership strategies. LEED sets a challenging yet achievable set of benchmarks that

THE CASE FOR GREEN BUILDING

define green building for interior spaces, entire structures, and whole neighborhoods.
LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations was developed in 1998 for the commercial building industry
and has since been updated several times. Over the years, other rating systems have been developed to meet the
needs of different market sectors.
Since its launch, LEED has evolved to address new markets and building types, advances in practice and
technology, and greater understanding of the environmental and human health effects of the built environment.
These ongoing improvements, developed by USGBC member-based volunteer committees, subcommittees, and
working groups in conjunction with USGBC staff, have been reviewed by the LEED Steering Committee and the
USGBC Board of Directors before being submitted to USGBC members for a vote. The process is based on principles
of transparency, openness, and inclusiveness.

LEED'S GOALS
The LEED rating systems aim to promote a transformation of the construction industry through strategies designed
to achieve seven goals:
·· To reverse contribution to global climate change
·· To enhance individual human health and well-being
·· To protect and restore water resources
·· To protect, enhance, and restore biodiversity and ecosystem services
·· To promote sustainable and regenerative material resources cycles
·· To build a greener economy
·· To enhance social equity, environmental justice, community health, and quality of life

These goals are the basis for LEED’s prerequisites and credits. In the BD+C rating system, the major prerequisites
and credits are categorized as Location and Transportation (LT), Sustainable Sites (SS), Water Efficiency (WE),
Energy and Atmosphere (EA), Materials and Resources (MR), and Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ).
The goals also drive the weighting of points toward certification. Each credit in the rating system is allocated
points based on the relative importance of its contribution to the goals. The result is a weighted average: credits
that most directly address the most important goals are given the greatest weight. Project teams that meet the
prerequisites and earn enough credits to achieve certification have demonstrated performance that spans the goals
in an integrated way. Certification is awarded at four levels (Certified, Silver, Gold, Platinum) to incentivize higher
achievement and, in turn, faster progress toward the goals.

BENEFITS OF USING LEED

LEED is designed to address environmental challenges while responding to the needs of a competitive market.
Certification demonstrates leadership, innovation, environmental stewardship, and social responsibility. LEED
 6

gives building owners and operators the tools they need to immediately improve both building performance and the
bottom line while providing healthful indoor spaces for a building’s occupants.

LEED-certified buildings are designed to deliver the following benefits:

·· Lower operating costs and increased asset value
·· Reduced waste sent to landfills
·· Energy and water conservation
PREFACE

·· More healthful and productive environments for occupants

·· Reductions in greenhouse gas emissions
·· Qualification for tax rebates, zoning allowances, and other incentives in many cities
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

By participating in LEED, owners, operators, designers, and builders make a meaningful contribution to the green
building industry. By documenting and tracking buildings’ resource use, they contribute to a growing body of
knowledge that will advance research in this rapidly evolving field. This will allow future projects to build on the
successes of today’s designs and bring innovations to the market.

LEED CERTIFICATION PROCESS

The process begins when the owner selects the rating system and registers the project (see Rating System Selection).
The project is then designed to meet the requirements for all prerequisites and for the credits the team has chosen
to pursue. After documentation has been submitted for certification, a project goes through preliminary and final
reviews. The preliminary review provides technical advice on credits that require additional work for achievement,
and the final review contains the project’s final score and certification level. The decision can be appealed if a team
believes additional consideration is warranted.

LEED has four levels of certification, depending on the point thresholds achieved:
·· Certified, 40–49 points
·· Silver, 50–59 points
·· Gold, 60–79 points
·· Platinum, 80 points and above
 7

THE CASE FOR GREEN BUILDING PREFACE

 REFERENCE GUIDE OVERVIEW

GUIDE STRUCTURE CREDIT STRUCTURE

GETTING STARTED Each credit category begins with an overview

provides a that discusses sustainability and market factors
recommended specific to the category. For each prerequisite
PREFACE
process for achieving and credit, readers will then find the following
certification and sections:
GETTING STARTED
addresses issues that
cut across the entire INTENT & REQUIREMENTS
MINIMUM PROGRAM outlines the rating system requirements for
rating system.
REQUIRMENTS
STARTED
GETTING

achieving the prerequisite or credit. They were

CATEGORY approved through the rating system development
OVERVIEWS RATING SYSTEM process and can also be found on the USGBC
SELECTION website.
emphasize
sustainability topics,
CATEGORY OVERVIEW BEHIND THE INTENT
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

market factors, and

credit relationships connects credit achievement with larger
CREDITS sustainability issues and provides information
that are specific to a
single credit category on how the credit requirements meet the intent
and information stated in the rating system.
that is applicable to
multiple credits within STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
that category. suggests the implementation and documentation
CATEGORY OVERVIEW steps that can be used by most projects, as well
as generally applicable tips and examples.
CREDITS CREDITS
contain content FURTHER EXPLANATION
that is specific to
provides guidance for lengthy calculations or
the achievement of
for special project situations, such as tips for
that credit.
nonstandard project types or different credit
approaches. It includes a Campus section and,
sometimes, an International Tips section.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
lists the items that must be submitted for
certification review.

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

identifies other credits that may affect a project
team’s decisions and strategies for the credit in
question; the relationships between credits may
imply synergies or trade-offs.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

ICONS THAT MAY APPEAR WITHIN EACH CREDIT is a quick reference of changes from the previous
REFER THE USER TO FOLLOWING SECTIONS: version of LEED.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Getting Started (beginning of book) lists the technical standards related to the credit
and offers weblinks to find them.
Further Explanation (within same credit)
EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
identifies the threshold that must be met to earn
an exemplary performance point, if available.

DEFINITIONS
gives the meaning of terms used in the credit.
 STARTED
GETTING
Getting Started
HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE
This reference guide is designed to elaborate upon and Within each section, information is organized to flow
work in conjunction with the rating system. Written from general guidance to more specific tips and finally
by expert users of LEED, it serves as a roadmap, to supporting references and other information.
describing the steps for meeting and documenting credit Sections have been designed with a parallel structure
requirements and offering advice on best practices. to support way finding and minimize repetition.

CREDIT CATEGORIES

INTEGRATIVE LOCATION AND SUSTAINABLE WATER ENERGY AND

PROCESS TRANSPORTATION SITES EFFICIENCY ATMOSPHERE
(LT) (SS) (WE) (EA)

MATERIALS AND INDOOR INNOVATION REGIONAL

RESOURCES ENVIRONMENTAL (IN) PRIORITY
(MR) QUALITY (EQ) (RP)
 10

MORE ABOUT THE FURTHER EXPLANATION SECTION

Further Explanation contains varied subsections depending on the credit; two of the common subsections are
elaborated upon here.

CAMPUS PROJECTS

Campus refers to the Campus Program for Projects on a Shared Site, which certifies multiple buildings located on
one site and under the control of a single entity. Examples include buildings on a corporate or educational campus
and structures in a commercial development. Only project teams using the Campus Program need to follow the
guidance in the Campus section; the guidance is not applicable to projects that are in a campus setting or are part of a
multitenant complex but not pursuing certification using the Campus Program.
STARTED
GETTING

There are two approaches to certifying multiple buildings under the Campus Program:
·· Group Approach allows buildings that are substantially similar and are in a single location to certify as one
project that shares a single certification.
·· Campus Approach allows buildings that share a single location and site attributes to achieve separate LEED
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

certification for each project, building space, or group on the master site.

For each approach, the reference guide gives any credit-specific information and notes two possible scenarios:
·· Group Approach
°° “All buildings in the group may be documented as one.” The buildings may meet the credit requirements
as a single group by, for example, pooling resources or purchasing, and then submitting a single set of
documentation.
°° “Submit separate documentation for each building.” Each building in the group project must meet the
credit requirements individually for the project to earn the credit.
·· Campus Approach
°° “Eligible.” This credit may be documented once at the level of the master site, and then individual projects
within the master site boundary earn the credit without submitting additional documentation.
°° “Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.” Each project within the campus
boundary may earn the credit but each project must document compliance separately.

PROJECTS OUTSIDE THE US

The International Tips section offers advice on determining equivalency to U.S. standards or using non-U.S.
standards referenced in the rating system. It is meant to complement, not replace, the other sections of the credit.
Helpful advice for projects outside the U.S. may also appear in the Step-by-Step Guidance section of each credit. When
no tips are needed or available, the International Tips heading does not appear.
Units of measurement are given in both Inch-Pound (IP) and International System of Units (SI). IP refers to
the system of measurements based on the inch, pound, and gallon, historically derived from the English system and
commonly used in the U.S. SI is the modern metric system used in most other parts of the world and defined by the
General Conference on Weights and Measures.
Where “local equivalent” is specified, it means an alternative to a LEED referenced standard that is specific to a
project’s locality. This standard must be widely used and accepted by industry experts and when applied, must meet
the credit’s intent leading to similar or better outcomes.
Where “USGBC-approved local equivalent” is specified, it means a local standard deemed equivalent to the listed
standard by the U.S. Green Building Council through its process for establishing non-U.S. equivalencies in LEED.
 11

TAKING AN INTEGRATIVE APPROACH TO DESIGN AND

CONSTRUCTION
The realization of benefits associated with LEED starts with a transformation of the design process itself. Success in
LEED and green building design is best accomplished through an integrative design process that prioritizes cost-
effectiveness over both the short and long terms and engages all project team members in discovering beneficial
interrelationships and synergies between systems and components. By integrating technical and living systems, the
team can achieve high levels of building performance, human performance, and environmental benefits.
Conventionally, the design and construction disciplines work separately, and their solutions to design and
construction challenges are fragmented. These “solutions” often create unintended consequences—some positive,
but mostly negative. The corollary is that when areas of practice are integrated, it becomes possible to significantly
improve building performance and achieve synergies that yield economic, environmental, and human health
benefits.1

STARTED
GETTING
In the conventional design process, each discipline’s practitioner is expected to design the subassemblies
and system components under his or her control for the most benefit and the least cost. In an integrative process,
an entire team—client, designers, builders, and operators—identifies overlapping relationships, services, and
redundancies among systems so that interdependencies and benefits (which otherwise would have gone unnoticed)

HOW TO USE THIS REFERENCE GUIDE

can be exploited, thereby increasing performance and reducing costs.
To work this way requires that project teams, whose members represent various disciplines, come together so
that the knowledge, analyses, and ideas from each discipline can inform and link with the systems and components
of all other disciplines. In this way, LEED credits become aspects of a whole rather than separate components, and
the entire design and construction team can identify the interrelationships and linked benefits across multiple LEED
credits.
The coordination of building and site systems should be addressed early, preferably before schematic design. The
Integrative Process credit formally introduces this way of working into LEED so that the team members’ expertise in
building and site systems can inform the performance, efficiency, and effectiveness of every system.
The strategies in the Integrative Process credit are recommended for all LEED projects because they encourage
integration during early design stages, when it will be the most effective. The credit introduces an integrative process
by focusing on engaging energy- and water-related research and analysis to inform early design decisions through
high levels of collaboration among all project team members.
Approaching certification using an integrative process gives the project team the greatest chance of success. The
process includes three phases:
·· Discovery. The most important phase of the integrative process, discovery can be thought of as an extensive
expansion of what is conventionally called predesign. A project is unlikely to meets its environmental goals
cost-effectively without this discrete phase. Discovery work should take place before schematic design begins.
·· Design and construction (implementation). This phase begins with what is conventionally called schematic
design. It resembles conventional practice but integrates all the work and collective understanding of system
interactions reached during the discovery phase.
·· Occupancy, operations, and performance feedback. This third stage focuses on preparing to measure
performance and creating feedback mechanisms. Assessing performance against targets is critical for
informing building operations and identifying the need for any corrective action.
Achieving economic and environmental performance requires that every issue and all team members (clients,
designers, engineers, constructors, operators) be brought into the project at the earliest point, before anything is yet
designed. The structure to manage this flow of people, information, and analysis is as follows:
·· All project team members, representing all design and construction disciplines, gather information and data
relevant to the project.
·· Team members analyze their information.
·· Team members participate in workshops to compare notes and identify opportunities for synergy.

This process of research, analysis, and workshops is done in an iterative cycle that refines the design solutions. In the
best scenario, the research and workshops continue until the project systems are optimized, all reasonable synergies
are identified, and the related strategies associated with all LEED credits are documented and implemented.

1. Integrative Process (IP) ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities
(February 2, 2012), p. 4, webstore.ansi.org/RecordDetail.aspx?sku=MTS+2012%3a1.
 12

DEVISING A LEED WORK PLAN

It is recommended that LEED applicants follow a series of steps to certification.

STEP 1. INITIATE DISCOVERY PHASE

Begin initial research and analysis (see Integrative Process Credit). When sufficient information has been
gathered, hold a goal-setting workshop to discuss findings.

STEP 2. SELECT LEED RATING SYSTEM

The LEED system comprises 21 adaptations designed to accommodate the needs of a variety of market
sectors (see Rating System Selection Guidance). For many credits, Further Explanation highlights rating
system and project type variations to help teams develop a successful approach.
STARTED
GETTING

STEP 3. CHECK MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

All projects seeking certification are required to comply with the minimum program requirements (MPRs)
for the applicable rating system, found in this reference guide and on the USGBC website.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 4. ESTABLISH PROJECT GOALS

Prioritize strategies for certification that align with the project’s context and the values of the project
team, owner, or organization. Once these values are articulated, project teams will be able to select
appropriate strategies and associated LEED credits to meet the goals.
The recommended method for establishing project goals is to convene a goal-setting workshop (see
Integrative Process Credit) for the project team members and the owner. Understanding the owner’s
goals, budget, schedule, functional programmatic requirements, scope, quality, performance targets, and
occupants’ expectations will promote creative problem solving and encourage fruitful interaction.
To capture the most opportunities, the workshop should occur before any design work and include wide
representation from the design and construction disciplines.

STEP 5. DEFINE LEED PROJECT SCOPE

Review the project’s program and initial findings from the goal-setting workshop to identify the project
scope. Special considerations include off-site or campus amenities or shared facilities that may be used
by project occupants.
Next, map the LEED project boundary along property lines. If the project boundary is not obvious
because of ownership by multiple entities, partial renovations, or other issues, see the minimum program
requirements. Share the final project boundary decision with the entire team, since this site definition
affects numerous prerequisites and credits.
Finally, investigate any special certification programs that may apply based on the project’s scope,
such as the Volume Program or the Campus Program. If the project owner is planning multiple similar
buildings in different locations, Volume may be a useful program to streamline certification. If the project
includes multiple buildings in a single location, Campus may be appropriate.

STEP 6. DEVELOP LEED SCORECARD

Use the project goals to identify the credits and options that should be attempted by the team. The
Behind the Intent sections offer insight into what each credit is intended to achieve and may help teams
align goals with credits that bring value to the owner, environment, and community of the project.
This process should focus the team on those credits with the highest value for the project over the long
term. Once the high-priority credits have been selected, identify related credits that reinforce the priority
strategies and provide synergistic benefits.
Finally, establish the target LEED certification level (Certified, Silver, Gold, or Platinum) and identify
additional credits needed to achieve it. Make sure that all prerequisites can be met and include a buffer of
several points above the minimum in case of changes during design and construction.
 13

STEP 7. CONTINUE DISCOVERY PHASE

Project team members should perform additional research and analysis as the project progresses,
refining the analysis, testing alternatives, comparing notes, generating ideas in small meetings, and
evaluating costs. Examples of research and analysis for energy- and water-related systems are outlined in
the Integrative Process credit.
The project team should reassemble occasionally to discuss overlapping benefits and opportunities
(e.g., how best to use the waste products from one system to benefit other systems). This approach
encourages the discovery of new opportunities, raises new questions, and facilitates testing across
disciplines.

STARTED
GETTING
STEP 8. CONTINUE ITERATIVE PROCESS
The above pattern of research and analysis followed by team workshops should continue until the
solutions satisfy the project team and owner.

STEP 9. ASSIGN ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

LEED WORK PLAN

Select one team member to take primary responsibility for leading the group through the LEED
application and documentation process. This leadership role may change from the design to the
construction phase, but both the design and the construction leaders should be involved throughout the
process to ensure consistency, clarity, and an integrative approach.
Cross-disciplinary team ownership of LEED credit compliance can help foster integrative design
while ensuring consistent documentation across credits. On a credit-by-credit basis, assign primary
and supporting roles to appropriate team members for credit achievement and documentation.
Clarify responsibilities for ensuring that design decisions are accurately represented in drawings and
specifications and that construction details match design documentation.
Establish regular meeting dates and develop clear communication channels to streamline the process
and resolve issues quickly.

STEP 10. DEVELOP CONSISTENT DOCUMENTATION

Consistent documentation is critical to achieving LEED certification.
Data accumulated throughout the construction process, such as construction materials quantities, should
be gathered and assessed at regular intervals to allow the team to track ongoing progress toward credit
achievement and ensure that information is not misplaced or omitted. Maintaining Consistency in the
Application, below, and the credit category overviews discuss the numeric values and meaning of terms
that affect achievement of multiple credits within a credit category.

STEP 11. PERFORM QUALITY ASSURANCE REVIEW AND SUBMIT FOR CERTIFICATION
A quality assurance review is an essential part of the work program. A thorough quality control check
can improve clarity and consistency of the project’s LEED documentation, thereby avoiding errors
that require time and expense to correct later in the certification process. The submission should
be thoroughly proofread and checked for completeness. In particular, numeric values that appear
throughout the submission (e.g., site area) must be consistent across credits.
 14

MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION

Certain issues recur across multiple credits and credit categories and must be treated consistently throughout the
submission.

SPECIAL PROJECT SITUATIONS

Projects with a combination of space types or unusual space types should pay particular attention to how these
characteristics influence credit achievement. Common project programs that require additional consideration
include the following:

Mixed Use
Projects with a mix of uses may find it helpful to consult the Project Type Variations and Rating System Variations
sections in the reference guide for advice. For example, if an office building certifying under BD+C: New
STARTED
GETTING

Construction includes a small data center, the team should follow the data center guidelines for certain credits; these
guidelines are not limited to BD+C: Data Centers projects. Another common scenario is a hotel project certifying
under BD+C: Hospitality; in designing the retail spaces on the hotel’s ground floor, the team could benefit from
guidance for BD+C: Retail projects.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Multitenant Complex
Some projects may be part of a large complex of buildings or a master planned development. Any project can follow
the multitenant complex approach if it is part of a master plan development, regardless of whether the project is
using the LEED Campus approach.

Incomplete Spaces
Buildings and spaces that earn LEED certification should be completed by the time they have submitted their
final application for LEED certification. Complete means that no further work is needed and the project is ready
for occupancy. No more than 40% of the certifying gross floor area of a LEED project may consist of incomplete
space unless the project is using the LEED BD+C: Core and Shell rating system. Additionally, projects that include
incomplete spaces must use Appendix 2 Default Occupancy Counts to establish occupant counts for incomplete
spaces.
For incomplete spaces in projects using a rating system other than LEED BD+C: Core and Shell, the project team
must provide supplemental documentation.
·· Submit a letter of commitment, signed by the owner, indicating that the remaining incomplete spaces will
satisfy the requirements of each prerequisite and credit achieved by this project if and when completed by
the owner. This letter may cover the commitment in general terms and need not address each prerequisite or
credit individually.
·· For incomplete spaces intended to be finished by tenants (i.e., parties other than the owner), submit a set of
nonbinding tenant design and construction guidelines, with a brief explanation of the project circumstances.

For prerequisites with established baselines (e.g., WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use, EA Prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance) and the credits dependent on the calculations in the prerequisites, the proposed design must
be equivalent to the baseline for the incomplete spaces. Project teams that wish to claim environmental performance
or benefit beyond the baseline for incomplete spaces should refer to the Tenant Lease and Sales Agreement section.

Projects with Several Physically Distinct Structures

Primary and secondary school projects, hospitals (general medical and surgical), hotels, resorts, and resort
properties, as defined for ENERGY STAR building rating purposes, are eligible to include more than one physically
distinct structure in a single LEED project certification application without having to use the Campus Program,
subject to the following conditions.
·· The buildings to be certified must be a part of the same identity. For example, the buildings are all part of the
same elementary school, not a mix of elementary school and high school buildings.
 15

·· The project must be analyzed as a whole (i.e., in aggregate) for all minimum program requirements (MPRs),
prerequisites, and credits in the LEED rating system.
·· All the land area and all building floor areas within the LEED project boundary must be included in every
prerequisite and credit submitted for certification.
·· There is no specific limit on the number of structures, but the aggregate gross floor area included in a single
project must not exceed 1 million square feet (92 905 square meters).
Any single structure that is larger than 25,000 square feet (2 320 square meters) must be registered as a separate
project or treated as a separate building in a group certification approach.

RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS

Refer to the minimum program requirements for information on how boundaries should be drawn for renovation
and addition projects. Additionally, use the following guidance for treating energy systems in any project with
mechanical systems.

STARTED
GETTING
·· Separate systems. Mechanical systems are completely separate from those in the existing
building (emergency generators excepted) and can be modeled separately.
·· Shared central systems located outside the project building or space. Each prerequisite and credit section
related to energy modeling offers specific guidance on how to handle this situation; in particular, see the

MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION

guidance for EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.

TENANT SALES AND LEASE AGREEMENT

LEED BD+C: Core and Shell is designed to address the speculatively driven development market where project
teams routinely do not control all aspects of the building’s construction. The scope of Core and Shell is limited to
those elements of the project under the direct control of the owner/developer. At a minimum, the scope includes the
core and the shell of the base building but can vary significantly from project to project.

Given that Core and Shell is limited in its ability to control the design and construction of tenant interior fit-outs,
project teams should pursue credits that address parts of the building within the LEED project scope. Only portions
of the building within the LEED project scope should be used in credit calculations. If a project team wishes to
pursue additional credits or thresholds beyond the construction scope of the LEED project, a binding tenant sales
and lease agreement must be provided as documentation. This must be signed by the future tenant and include
terms related to how the technical credit requirements will be carried out by the tenant. An unsigned or sample
lease agreement is not acceptable. Please note that lease agreements are not required in order to pursue Core and
Shell. They are only used if a project is aiming to earn additional points considered outside of the project design and
construction scope that will be fit-out by a future tenant.

PREVIOUS DEVELOPMENT
Several credits require the assessment of a piece of land to determine whether it has been previously developed,
defined as follows:
previously developed altered by paving, construction, and/or land use that would typically have required
regulatory permitting to have been initiated (alterations may exist now or in the past). Land that is not
previously developed and landscapes altered by current or historical clearing or filling, agricultural or forestry
use, or preserved natural area use are considered undeveloped land. The date of previous development permit
issuance constitutes the date of previous development, but permit issuance in itself does not constitute previous
development.

Tricky lands to assess include those with few buildings present. If the land previously had buildings, then it is
considered previously developed even if those buildings have since been torn down. Another frequently confusing
situation is parkland. Pay careful attention to the type of parkland. Improved parks with manicured landscaping and
constructed features like playgrounds (e.g., a city park) are considered previously developed. Land that has only
been cleared or graded, with no additional improvements, is not considered previously developed. Land maintained
in a natural state (e.g., a forest preserve) is not considered previously developed, even if minor features like walking
paths are present.
 16

DEVELOPMENT FOOTPRINT
A project’s development footprint is all of its impervious surfaces.
development footprint the total land area of a project site covered by buildings, streets, parking areas, and other
typically impermeable surfaces constructed as part of the project

Surfaces paved with permeable pavement (at least 50% permeable) are excluded from the development footprint.

DENSITY
Density can be calculated separately for residential and nonresidential elements or as a single value. The following
definitions apply:
density a ratio of building coverage on a given parcel of land to the size of that parcel. Density can be measured
using floor area ratio (FAR); dwelling units per acre (DU/acre) or dwelling units per hectare (DU/hectare); square
STARTED
GETTING

feet of building area per acre of buildable land; or square meters of building area per hectare of buildable land. It
does not include structured parking.
buildable land the portion of the site where construction can occur, including land voluntarily set aside and
not constructed on. When used in density calculations, buildable land excludes public rights-of-way and land
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

excluded from development by codified law.

Land voluntarily set aside and not built on, such as open space, is considered buildable because it was available for
construction but set aside voluntarily. For example, 5 acres (2 hectares) of park space required by local government
code would be considered nonbuildable, but if a developer voluntarily sets aside an additional 3 acres (1.2 hectares)
for more park space, those 3 acres (1.2 hectares) must be categorized as buildable land.

After determining buildable land, calculate residential or nonresidential density or a combined density. To
calculate residential density, divide the number of dwelling units by the amount of residential land. To calculate
nonresidential density, use floor area ratio (FAR):
floor-area ratio (FAR) the density of nonresidential land use, exclusive of structured parking, measured as
the total nonresidential building floor area divided by the total buildable land area available for nonresidential
buildings.

For example, on a site with 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of buildable nonresidential land area, a building
of 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of floor area would have a FAR of 1.0. On the same site, a building of 5,000
square feet (465 square meters) would have a FAR of 0.5; a building of 15,000 square feet (1 395 square meters) would
have a FAR of 1.5; and a building of 20,000 square feet (1 860 square meters) would have a FAR of 2.0.

To calculate the combined density for residential and nonresidential areas, use FAR.

OCCUPANCY
Many kinds of people use a typical LEED building, and the mix varies by project type. Occupants are sometimes
referred to in a general sense; for example, “Provide places of respite that are accessible to patients and visitors.” In
other instances, occupants must be counted for calculations. Definitions of occupant types are general guidelines
that may be modified or superseded in a particular credit when appropriate (such changes are noted in each credit’s
reference guide section). Most credits group users into two categories, regular building occupants and visitors.
 17

Regular Building Occupants

Regular building occupants are habitual users of a building. All of the following are considered regular building
occupants.
Employees include part-time and full-time employees, and totals are calculated using full-time equivalency
(FTE).
A typical project can count FTE employees by adding full-time employees and part-time employees, adjusted for
their hours of work.

EQUATION 1.

FTE employees = Full-time employees + (Σ daily part-time employee hours / 8)

STARTED
GETTING
For buildings with more unusual occupancy patterns, calculate the FTE building occupants based on a standard
eight-hour occupancy period.

EQUATION 2.

MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION

FTE employees = (Σ all employee hours / 8)

Staff is synonymous with employees for the purpose of LEED calculations.

Volunteers who regularly use a building are synonymous with employees for the purpose of LEED calculations.
Residents of a project are considered regular building occupants. This includes residents of a dormitory. If
actual resident count is not known, use a default equal to the number of bedrooms in the dwelling unit plus one,
multiplied by the number of such dwelling units.
Primary and secondary school students are typically regular building occupants (see the exception in LT
Credit Bicycle Facilities).
Hotel guests are typically considered regular building occupants, with some credit-specific exceptions.
Calculate the number of overnight hotel guests based on the number and size of units in the project. Assume 1.5
occupants per guest room and multiply the resulting total by 60% (average hotel occupancy). Alternatively, the
number of hotel guest occupants may be derived from actual or historical occupancy.
Inpatients are medical, surgical, maternity, specialty, and intensive-care unit patients whose length of stay
exceeds 23 hours. Peak inpatients are the highest number of inpatients at a given point in a typical 24-hour
period.

Visitors
Visitors (also “transients”) intermittently use a LEED building. All of the following are considered visitors:
Retail customers are considered visitors. In Water Efficiency credits, retail customers are considered separately
from other kinds of visitors and should not be included in the total average daily visitors.
Outpatients visit a hospital, clinic, or associated health care facility for diagnosis or treatment that lasts 23 hours
or less (see SS Credit Direct Exterior Access for credit-specific exceptions).
Peak outpatients are the highest number of outpatients at a given point in a typical 24-hour period.
Volunteers who periodically use a building (e.g., once per week) are considered visitors.
Higher-education students are considered visitors to most buildings, except when they are residents of a dorm,
in which case they are residents.
 18

In calculations, occupant types are typically counted in two ways:

Daily averages take into account all the occupants of a given type for a typical 24-hour day of operation.
Peak totals are measured at the moment in a typical 24-hour period when the highest number of a given
occupant type is present.

Whenever possible, use actual or predicted occupancies. If occupancy cannot be accurately predicted, one of the
following resources to estimate occupancy:
a. Default occupant density from ASHRAE 62.1-2010, Table 6-1
b. Default occupant density from CEN Standard EN 15251, Table B.2
c. Appendix 2 Default Occupancy Counts
d. Results from applicable studies.
STARTED
GETTING

If numbers vary seasonally, use occupancy numbers that are a representative daily average over the entire operating
season of the building.

If occupancy patterns are atypical (shift overlap, significant seasonal variation), explain such patterns when
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

submitting documentation for certification.

Table 1 lists prerequisites and credits that require specific occupancy counts for calculations.
 19

TABLE 1. Occupancy types for calculations, by project type variation

REGULAR
PREREQUISITE, AVERAGE DAILY
BUILDING PEAK VISITORS OTHER NOTES
CREDIT VISITORS
OCCUPANTS

LT CREDIT BICYCLE FACILITIES

New Construction,
Core and Shell,
Data Centers,
X X
Warehouses
and Distribution
Centers, Hospitality

Students grade
3 (age 8) and
younger are not
Schools X

STARTED
GETTING
included in regular
building occupants
for this credit.

Retail X

Healthcare X X Exclude patients.

MAINTAINING CONSISTENCY IN THE APPLICATION

LT CREDIT ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

Count primary and

Schools X secondary students
only.

SS CREDIT DIRECT EXTERIOR ACCESS

Count only peak

inpatients and peak
outpatients. For this
credit, outpatients
Healthcare X with clinical length
of stay greater
than 4 hours are
included with
inpatients.

WE PREREQUISITE AND CREDIT INDOOR WATER USE

New Construction,
Core and Shell,
Retail customers
Data Centers,
are considered
Warehouses
X X separately and not
and Distribution
included in average
Centers,
daily visitors.
Hospitality, Retail,
Healthcare

See credit-specific
Schools X X occupancy
guidance.
 20

QUICK REFERENCE

TABLE 2. Credit Attributes

Prerequisite/
Category Credit Name Design/Construction Exemplary Performance
Credit

n/a P Integrated Project Planning and Design D no

n/a C Integrative Process D no

LT
STARTED
GETTING

Location and Transportation

LT C LEED for Neighborhood Development Location D no

LT C Sensitive Land Protection D no

LT C High Priority Site D yes

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

LT C Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses D yes, except WDC

LT C Access to Quality Transit D yes

LT C Bicycle Facilities D no

LT C Reduced Parking Footprint D yes

LT C Green Vehicles D no

SS
Sustainable Sites

SS P Construction Activity Pollution Prevention C no

SS P Environmental Site Assessment D no

SS C Site Assessment D no

SS C Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat D yes

SS C Open Space D no

SS C Rainwater Management D yes

SS C Heat Island Reduction D yes

SS C Light Pollution Reduction D no

SS C Site Master Plan D no

SS C Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines D no

SS C Places of Respite D yes

SS C Direct Exterior Access D no

SS C Joint Use of Facilities D no

 21

Points

Warehouses and
New
Core and Shell Schools Retail Data Centers Distribution Hospitality Healthcare
Construction
Centers

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Req'd

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

STARTED
GETTING
16 20 15 16 16 16 16 9

1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

QUICK REFERENCE
5 6 5 5 5 5 5 1

5 6 4 5 5 5 5 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

n/a n/a Req'd n/a n/a n/a n/a Req'd

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

n/a n/a 1 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

n/a 1 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 1

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 1

n/a n/a 1 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

 22

TABLE 2. Credit Attributes

Prerequisite/
Category Credit Name Design/Construction Exemplary Performance
Credit

WE
Water Efficiency

WE P Outdoor Water Use Reduction D no

WE P Indoor Water Use Reduction D no

WE P Building-Level Water Metering D no

WE C Outdoor Water Use Reduction D no

STARTED
GETTING

WE C Indoor Water Use Reduction D yes

WE C Cooling Tower Water Use D no

WE C Water Metering D no
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EA
Energy and Atmosphere

EA P Fundamental Commissioning and Verification C no

EA P Minimum Energy Performance D no

EA P Building-Level Energy Metering D no

EA P Fundamental Refrigerant Management D no

EA C Enhanced Commissioning C no

EA C Optimize Energy Performance D yes

EA C Advanced Energy Metering D no

EA C Demand Response C no

EA C Renewable Energy Production D yes

EA C Enhanced Refrigerant Management D no

EA C Green Power and Carbon Offsets C no

MR
Materials and Resources

MR P Storage and Collection of Recyclables D no

MR P Construction and Demolition Waste Management

C no
Planning

MR P PBT Source Reduction--Mercury D no

MR C Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction C yes

MR C Building Product Dislosure and Optimization--

C yes
Environmental Product Declarations

MR C Building Product Disclosure and Optimization--Sourcing

C yes
of Raw Materials

MR C Building Product Disclosure and Optimization--Material

C yes
Ingredients

MR C PBT Source Reduction--Mercury D no

MR C PBT Source Reduction--Lead, Cadmium, and Copper C no

MR C Furniture and Medical Furnishings C yes

MR C Design for Flexibility D no

MR C Construction and Demolition Waste Management C yes

 23

Points

Warehouses and
New
Core and Shell Schools Retail Data Centers Distribution Hospitality Healthcare
Construction
Centers

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

STARTED
GETTING
6 6 7 7 6 6 6 7

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

QUICK REFERENCE
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

18 18 16 18 18 18 18 20

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Req'd

5 6 5 5 5 5 5 5

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 1

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 2

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 2

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
 24

TABLE 2. Credit Attributes

Prerequisite/
Category Credit Name Design/Construction Exemplary Performance
Credit

EQ
Indoor Environmental Quality

EQ P Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance D no

EQ P Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control D no

EQ P Minimum Acoustic Performance D no

EQ C Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies D yes

STARTED
GETTING

EQ C Low-Emitting Materials C yes

EQ C Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan C no

EQ C Indoor Air Quality Assessment C no

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EQ C Thermal Comfort D no

EQ C Interior Lighting D no

EQ C Daylight D no

EQ C Quality Views D yes

EQ C Acoustic Performance D no

IN
Innovation

IN C Innovation D/C no

IN C LEED Accredited Professional D/C no

RP
Regional Priority

RP C Regional Priority D/C no

 25

Points

Warehouses and
New
Core and Shell Schools Retail Data Centers Distribution Hospitality Healthcare
Construction
Centers

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd Req'd

n/a n/a Req'd n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

STARTED
GETTING
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 n/a 2 2 2 2 2 2

QUICK REFERENCE
1 n/a 1 1 1 1 1 1

2 n/a 2 2 2 2 2 1

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

1 n/a 1 n/a 1 1 1 2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
 27

Minimum Program
Requirements

MPR
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMNTS
INTRODUCTION
The Minimum Program Requirements (MPRs) are the minimum characteristics or conditions that make a project
appropriate to pursue LEED certification. These requirements are foundational to all LEED projects and define the
types of buildings, spaces, and neighborhoods that the LEED rating system is designed to evaluate.
28

1. MUST BE IN A PERMANENT LOCATION ON EXISTING LAND

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, and neighborhoods in the context of their
surroundings. A significant portion of LEED requirements are dependent on the project’s location, therefore
it is important that LEED projects are evaluated as permanent structures. Locating projects on existing land is
important to avoid artificial land masses that have the potential to displace and disrupt ecosystems.

REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must be constructed and operated on a permanent location on existing land. No project that is
designed to move at any point in its lifetime may pursue LEED certification. This requirement applies to all land
within the LEED project.

ADDITIONAL GUIDANCE

Permanent location
·· Movable buildings are not eligible for LEED. This includes boats and mobile homes.
·· Prefabricated or modular structures and building elements may be certified once permanently installed as part
of the LEED project.
MPR

Existing land
·· Buildings located on previously constructed docks, piers, jetties, infill, and other manufactured structures
in or above water are permissible, provided that the artificial land is previously developed, such that the land
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

once supported another building or hardscape constructed for a purpose other than the LEED project.

2. MUST USE REASONABLE LEED BOUNDARIES

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, or neighborhoods, and all environmental impacts
associated with those projects. Defining a reasonable LEED boundary ensures that project is accurately evaluated.

REQUIREMENTS
The LEED project boundary must include all contiguous land that is associated with the project and supports its
typical operations. This includes land altered as a result of construction and features used primarily by the project’s
occupants, such as hardscape (parking and sidewalks), septic or stormwater treatment equipment, and landscaping.
The LEED boundary may not unreasonably exclude portions of the building, space, or site to give the project an
advantage in complying with credit requirements. The LEED project must accurately communicate the scope of the
certifying project in all promotional and descriptive materials and distinguish it from any non-certifying space.

ADDITIONAL GUIDANCE

Site
·· Non-contiguous parcels of land may be included within the LEED project boundary if the parcels directly
support or are associated with normal building operations of the LEED project and are accessible to the LEED
project’s occupants.
·· Facilities (such as parking lots, bicycle storage, shower/changing facilities, and/or on-site renewable energy)
that are outside of the LEED project boundary may be included in certain prerequisites and credits if they
directly serve the LEED project and are not double-counted for other LEED projects. The project team must
also have permission to use these facilities.
 29

·· The LEED project boundary may include other buildings.

°° If another building or structure within the LEED project boundary is ineligible for LEED certification, it may
be either included or not included in the certification of the LEED project.
°° If another building within the LEED project boundary is eligible for LEED certification, it may be either
included or not included in the certification as outlined in USGBC’s campus guidance.
·· Projects that are phased sites with a master plan for multiple buildings must designate a LEED project
boundary for each building or follow USGBC’s campus guidance.
·· The gross floor area of the LEED project should be no less than 2% of the gross land area within the LEED
project boundary.
Building
·· The LEED project should include the entire building and complete scope of work.
·· Buildings or structures primarily dedicated to parking are not eligible for LEED certification. Parking that
serves an eligible LEED project should be included in the certification.
·· Buildings that are physically connected by programmable space are considered one building for LEED
purposes unless they are physically distinct and have distinct identities as separate buildings or if they are a
newly constructed addition. If separated, the projects should also have separate air distribution systems and
water and energy meters (including thermal energy meters).
·· Buildings that have no physical connection or are physically connected only by circulation, parking, or
mechanical/storage rooms are considered separate buildings and individual projects for LEED purposes, with

MPR
the following exceptions:
°° Primary and secondary school projects, hospitals (general medical and surgical), hotels, resorts, and resort
properties, as defined by ENERGY STAR building rating purposes, may include more than one physically

MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMNTS

distinct building in a single LEED project. For new construction projects, each building in the application
must be less than 25,000 sq. ft. Please contact USGBC if with any questions.
°° For other cases such as buildings that have programmatic dependency (spaces – not personnel – within
the building cannot function independently without the other building) or architectural cohesiveness
(the building was designed to appear as one building), project teams are encouraged to contact USGBC to
discuss their project prior to proceeding.
Interiors
·· The LEED project should be defined by a clear boundary such that the LEED project is physically distinct from
other interior spaces within the building.
Neighborhood
·· The LEED neighborhood includes the land, water, and construction within the LEED project boundary.
·· The LEED boundary is usually defined by the platted property line of the project, including all land and water
within it.
°° Projects located on publicly owned campuses that do not have internal property lines must delineate a
sphere-of-influence line to be used instead.
°° Projects may have enclaves of non-project properties that are not subject to the rating system, but cannot
exceed 2% of the total project area and cannot be described as certified.
°° Projects must not contain non-contiguous parcels, but parcels can be separated by public rights-of-way.
·· The project developer, which can include several property owners, should control a majority of the buildable
land within the boundary, but does not have to control the entire area.
30

3. MUST COMPLY WITH PROJECT SIZE REQUIREMENTS

INTENT
The LEED rating system is designed to evaluate buildings, spaces, or neighborhoods of a certain size. The LEED
requirements do not accurately assess the performance of projects outside of these size requirements.

REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must meet the size requirements listed below.
LEED BD+C and LEED O+M Rating Systems
The LEED project must include a minimum of 1,000 square feet (93 square meters) of gross floor area.
LEED ID+C Rating Systems
The LEED project must include a minimum of 250 square feet (22 square meters) of gross floor area.
LEED for Neighborhood Development Rating Systems
The LEED project should contain at least two habitable buildings and be no larger than 1500 acres.
LEED for Homes Rating Systems
The LEED project must be defined as a “dwelling unit” by all applicable codes. This requirement includes, but
is not limited to, the International Residential Code stipulation that a dwelling unit must include “permanent
provisions for living, sleeping, eating, cooking, and sanitation.”
MPR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMNTS MPR
31
 33

Rating System
Selection Guidance
INTRODUCTION

SELECTION
SYSTEM
This document provides guidance to help project teams select a LEED rating system. Projects are required to use the
rating system that is most appropriate. However, when the decision is not clear, it is the responsibility of the project
team to make a reasonable decision in selecting a rating system before registering their project. The project teams

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE

should first identify an appropriate rating system, and then determine the best adaptation. Occasionally, USGBC
recognizes that an entirely inappropriate rating system has been chosen. In this case, the project team will be asked
to change the designated rating system for their registered project. Please review this guidance carefully and contact
USGBC if it is not clear which rating system to use.
 34

RATING SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

LEED FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
Buildings that are new construction or major renovation. At least 60% of the project’s gross floor area must be
complete by the time of certification (except for LEED BD+C: Core and Shell). Must include the entire building’s
gross floor area in the project.
·· LEED BD+C: New Construction and Major Renovation. New construction or major renovation of buildings
that do not primarily serve K-12 educational, retail, data centers, warehouses and distribution centers,
hospitality, or healthcare uses. New construction also includes high-rise residential buildings 9 stories or
more.
·· LEED BD+C: Core and Shell Development. Buildings that are new construction or major renovation for
the exterior shell and core mechanical, electrical, and plumbing units, but not a complete interior fit-out.
LEED BD+C: Core and Shell is the appropriate rating system to use if more than 40% of the gross floor area is
incomplete at the time of certification.
·· LEED BD+C: Schools. Buildings made up of core and ancillary learning spaces on K-12 school grounds. LEED
BD+C: Schools may optionally be used for higher education and non-academic buildings on school campuses.
·· LEED BD+C: Retail. Buildings used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes both direct
customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer service.
·· LEED BD+C: Data Centers. Buildings specifically designed and equipped to meet the needs of high density
computing equipment such as server racks, used for data storage and processing. LEED BD+C: Data Centers
only addresses whole building data centers (greater than 60%).
·· LEED BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution Centers. Buildings used to store goods, manufactured products,
merchandise, raw materials, or personal belongings, such as self-storage.
·· LEED BD+C: Hospitality. Buildings dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the service
SELECTION
SYSTEM

industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.

·· LEED BD+C: Healthcare. Hospitals that operate twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week and provide
inpatient medical treatment, including acute and long-term care.
·· LEED BD+C: Homes and Multifamily Lowrise. Single-family homes and multi-family residential buildings
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

of 1 to 3 stories. Projects 3 to 5 stories may choose the Homes rating system that corresponds to the ENERGY
STAR program in which they are participating.
·· LEED BD+C: Multifamily Midrise. Multi-family residential buildings of 4 to 8 occupiable stories above grade.
The building must have 50% or more residential space. Buildings near 8 stories can inquire with USGBC about
using Midrise or New Construction, if appropriate.

LEED FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION.

Interior spaces that are a complete interior fit-out. In addition, at least 60% of the project’s gross floor area must be
complete by the time of certification.
·· LEED ID+C: Commercial Interiors. Interior spaces dedicated to functions other than retail or hospitality.
·· LEED ID+C: Retail. Interior spaces used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes both
direct customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer service.
·· LEED ID+C: Hospitality. Interior spaces dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the
service industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.

LEED FOR BUILDING OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE.

Buildings that are fully operational and occupied for at least one year. The project may be undergoing improvement
work or little to no construction. Must include the entire building’s gross floor area in the project.
·· LEED O+M: Existing Buildings. Existing buildings that do not primarily serve K-12 educational, retail, data
centers, warehouses and distribution centers, or hospitality uses.
·· LEED O+M: Retail. Existing buildings used to conduct the retail sale of consumer product goods. Includes
both direct customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer
service.
 35

·· LEED O+M: Schools. Existing buildings made up of core and ancillary learning spaces on K-12 school grounds.
May also be used for higher education and non-academic buildings on school campuses.
·· LEED O+M: Hospitality. Existing buildings dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the
service industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.
·· LEED O+M: Data Centers. Existing buildings specifically designed and equipped to meet the needs of high
density computing equipment such as server racks, used for data storage and processing. LEED O+M: Data
Centers only addresses whole building data centers.
·· LEED O+M: Warehouses and Distribution Centers. Existing buildings used to store goods, manufactured
products, merchandise, raw materials, or personal belongings (such as self-storage).

LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT

New land development projects or redevelopment projects containing residential uses, nonresidential uses, or a
mix. Projects may be at any stage of the development process, from conceptual planning through construction. It
is recommended that at least 50% of total building floor area be new construction or major renovation. Buildings
within the project and features in the public realm are evaluated.
·· LEED ND: Plan. Projects in conceptual planning or master planning phases, or under construction.
·· LEED ND: Built Project. Completed development projects.

CHOOSING BETWEEN RATING SYSTEMS

The following 40/60 rule provides guidance for making a decision when several rating systems appear to be
appropriate for a project. To use this rule, first assign a rating system to each square foot or square meter of the
building. Then, choose the most appropriate rating system based on the resulting percentages.

SELECTION
SYSTEM
The entire gross floor area of a LEED project must be certified under a single rating system and is subject to all
prerequisites and attempted credits in that rating system, regardless of mixed construction or space usage type.

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDANCE

PERCENTAGE OF FLOOR AREA APPROPRIATE
FOR A PARTICULAR RATING SYSTEM

<40% 40% - 60% >60%

SHOULD NOT USE PROJECT’S TEAM SHOULD USE
THAT RATING SYSTEM CHOICE THAT RATING SYSTEM

·· If a rating system is appropriate for less than 40% of the gross floor area of a LEED project building or space,
then that rating system should not be used.
·· If a rating system is appropriate for more than 60% of the gross floor area of a LEED project building or space,
then that rating system should be used.
·· If an appropriate rating system falls between 40% and 60% of the gross floor area, project teams must
independently assess their situation and decide which rating system is most applicable.
 37

PREREQUISITE

Integrative Project
Planning and Design
This prerequisite applies to: Healthcare

INTEGRATIVE PROJECT PLANNING AND DESIGN

INTENT

Maximize opportunities for integrated, cost-effective adoption of green

design and construction strategies, emphasizing human health as a
fundamental evaluative criterion for building design, construction and
operational strategies. Utilize innovative approaches and techniques for
green design and construction.

REQUIREMENTS
Use cross-discipline design and decision making, beginning in the programming and pre-design phase. At a

IP
minimum, ensure the following process:

OWNER’S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS DOCUMENT

Prepare an Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) document. Develop a health mission statement and incorporate it
in the OPR. The health mission statement must address "triple bottom line" values—economic, environmental and
social. Include goals and strategies to safeguard the health of building occupants, the local community and the global
environment, while creating a high-performance healing environment for the building’s patients, caregivers and
staff.

PRELIMINARY RATING GOALS

As early as practical and preferably before schematic design, conduct a preliminary LEED meeting with a minimum
of four key project team members and the owner or owner’s representative. As part of the meeting, create a LEED®
action plan that, at a minimum:
·· Determines the LEED certification level to pursue (Certified, Silver, Gold, or Platinum);
·· Selects the LEED credits to meet the targeted certification level; and
·· Identifies the responsible parties to ensure the LEED requirements for each prerequisite and selected credit
are met.
38

INTEGRATED PROJECT TEAM

Assemble an integrated project team and include as many of the following professionals as feasible (minimum of
four), in addition to the owner or owner’s representative.

·· Owner’s capital budget manager ·· Facility managers

·· Architect or building designer ·· Environmental services staff
·· Mechanical engineer ·· Functional and space programmers
·· Structural engineer ·· Commissioning agent
·· Energy modeler ·· Community representatives
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Equipment planner ·· Civil engineer

·· Acoustical consultant ·· Landscape architect
·· Telecommunications designer ·· Ecologist
·· Controls designer ·· Land planner
·· Food Service Consultant ·· Construction manager or general contractor
·· Infection Control Staff ·· Life cycle cost analyst; construction cost
·· Building science or performance testing agents estimator
·· Green building or sustainable design consultant ·· Lighting Designer
·· Facility green teams ·· Other disciplines appropriate to the specific
·· Physician and nursing teams project type

DESIGN CHARRETTE

As early as practical and preferably before schematic design, conduct a minimum four-hour , integrated design
charrette with the project team as defined above. The goal is to optimize the integration of green strategies across all
aspects of building design, construction and operations, drawing on the expertise of all participants.
IP
 39

BEHIND THE INTENT

The building systems and equipment of modern health care facilities impose large environmental burdens on
regional energy and water resources and contribute significantly to greenhouse gas emissions. Hospitals in the
United States, on average, consume 2.5 times more energy per square foot than the average commercial building,
for example. 1 In addition, health care projects have the mission of improving the health and healing of patients
while preventing the spread of disease. Because of their unique challenges and conditions, health care facilities
especially can benefit from implementing an integrative process that guides the project from visioning to occupancy.
A comprehensive, integrative process accounts for the interactions of all building and site systems, relying on an
iterative cycle of analysis, workshops, implementation, and performance feedback.
This prerequisite focuses on establishing a framework for this process and requires an integrative charrette that
clarifies the strategies and goals for the project’s guiding documents.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

INTEGRATIVE PROJECT PLANNING AND DESIGN

Projects starting after the programming and predesign phase should complete requirements as early as
practical and preferably before the schematic design phase. Projects beginning this process after predesign
are still eligible for Healthcare certification but should complete the requirements as early as possible.

STEP 1. IDENTIFY PROJECT TEAM

During predesign or at the start of the design process, assemble an integrative project team with at least
four members in addition to the owner or owner’s representative.
·· Review the list of eligible project team members in the prerequisite requirements.
·· If possible, include a representative from the builder or construction manager so that cost and
construction considerations are integrated into the development of design concepts.
·· If possible, include a representative from the health care facility’s staff.
·· Ensure that the team members have broad enough experience to contribute meaningfully to the major
areas of focus.

STEP 2. PREPARE FOR INTEGRATIVE DESIGN CHARRETTE

Before the initial integrative design charrette, become familiar with the integrative process and complete
preliminary research and analysis to support effective and informed discussions about potential
integrative design opportunities.

IP
·· Review the Integrative Process (IP) ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and
Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities, which provides step-by-step guidance for
implementing an integrative process.
·· Review the Integrative Process credit, which is derived from the IP ANSI Standard Guide and focuses
on early, iterative analysis of energy- and water-related systems.
·· Collect information about the local climate, site conditions, waste treatment infrastructure, energy load
distribution, water sources, transportation options, and potential building features.

STEP 3. CONVENE INTEGRATIVE DESIGN CHARRETTE

Hold an initial integrative charrette to align the project team around the owner’s goals for the project,
including budget, schedule, functional programmatic requirements, scope, quality and performance
expectations, and occupants’ expectations.
Use the charrette to accomplish the following:
·· Introduce all project team members to the fundamentals of the integrative process
·· Share initial background research and analysis from Step 2
·· Elicit the owner’s and stakeholders’ values, aspirations, and requirements
·· Clarify functional and programmatic goals
·· Establish initial principles, benchmarks, metrics, and performance targets
·· Identify desired LEED certification level and credits to be targeted
·· Generate potential strategies for achieving performance targets

1. U.S. Energy Information Administration, Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS).
eia.gov/consumption/commercial/reports/2007/large-hospital.cfm (accessed June 8, 2013).
40

·· Determine the questions that must be answered to support project decisions

·· Initiate development of the project’s health mission statement
Retain a copy of the action plan.

STEP 4. DOCUMENT GOALS AND PERFORMANCE TARGETS

Prepare the owner’s project requirements (OPR), including the project goals, performance and LEED
targets, and health mission statement (see EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning, Further
Explanation, Owner’s Project Requirements).
·· Ensure that the health mission statement meets the credit requirements and reinforces any existing
corporate and/or institutional commitments to environmental health and community responsibility.
·· Consider continuing the integrative process throughout design.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Narrative explaining how health mission statement addresses credit requirements X

Action plan from preliminary rating goals X

IP

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Integrative Process Credit. The related credit requires implementing a detailed energy and water analysis to
maximize synergies of the building systems through design improvements. Its initial steps will help
Healthcare projects plan and implement a successful design charrette.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The required charrette duration has changed from a full day to four hours.
·· Disciplines have been added to list of eligible professions on the integrative design team.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and Construction of Sustainable Buildings and
Communities (February 2, 2012): ansi.org
 41

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.

INTEGRATIVE PROJECT PLANNING AND DESIGN

IP
IP LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

42
 43

CREDIT

Integrative Process
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1–5 points)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1–5 points)

INTENT

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
To support high-performance, cost-effective project outcomes through
an early analysis of the interrelationships among systems.

REQUIREMENTS
Beginning in pre-design and continuing throughout the design phases, identify and use opportunities to achieve

IP
synergies across disciplines and building systems. Use the analyses described below to inform the owner’s project
requirements (OPR), basis of design (BOD), design documents, and construction documents.

Energy-Related Systems
DISCOVERY

Perform a preliminary “simple box” energy modeling analysis before the completion of schematic design that
explores how to reduce energy loads in the building and accomplish related sustainability goals by questioning
default assumptions. Assess at least two potential strategies associated with the following:
·· Site conditions. Assess shading, exterior lighting, hardscape, landscaping, and adjacent site conditions.
·· Massing and orientation. Assess how massing and orientation affect HVAC sizing, energy consumption,
lighting, and renewable energy opportunities.
·· Basic envelope attributes. Assess insulation values, window-to-wall ratios, glazing characteristics, shading,
and window operability.
·· Lighting levels. Assess interior surface reflectance values and lighting levels in occupied spaces.
·· Thermal comfort ranges. Assess thermal comfort range options.
·· Plug and process load needs. Assess reducing plug and process loads through programmatic solutions (e.g.,
equipment and purchasing policies, layout options).
44

·· Programmatic and operational parameters. Assess multifunctioning spaces, operating schedules, space
allotment per person, teleworking, reduction of building area, and anticipated operations and maintenance.

IMPLEMENTATION
Document how the above analysis informed design and building form decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD and
the eventual design of the project, including the following, as applicable:
·· Building and site program;
·· Building form and geometry;
·· Building envelope and façade treatments on different orientations;
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Elimination and/or significant downsizing of building systems (e.g., HVAC, lighting, controls, Exterior
materials, interior finishes, and functional program elements); and
·· Other systems.

AND

Water-Related Systems
DISCOVERY
Perform a preliminary water budget analysis before the completion of schematic design that explores how to reduce
potable water loads in the building and accomplish related sustainability goals. Assess and estimate the project’s
potential nonpotable water supply sources and water demand volumes, including the following:
·· Indoor water demand. Assess flow and flush fixture design case demand volumes, calculated in accordance
with WE Prerequisite Indoor Water-Use Reduction.
·· Outdoor water demand. Assess landscape irrigation design case demand volume calculated in accordance
with WE Credit Outdoor Water-Use Reduction.
·· Process water demand. Assess kitchen, laundry, cooling tower, and other equipment demand volumes, as
applicable.
·· Supply sources. Assess all potential nonpotable water supply source volumes, such as on-site rainwater and
graywater, municipally supplied nonpotable water, and HVAC equipment condensate.

IMPLEMENTATION
IP

Document how the above analysis informed building and site design decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD. Dem-
onstrate how at least one on-site nonpotable water supply source was used to reduce the burden on municipal supply
or wastewater treatment systems by contributing to at least two of the water demand components listed above.
Demonstrate how the analysis informed the design of the project, including the following, as applicable:
·· plumbing systems;
·· sewage conveyance and/or on-site treatment systems;
·· rainwater quantity and quality management systems;
·· landscaping, irrigation, and site elements;
·· roofing systems and/or building form and geometry; and
·· other systems.
 45

BEHIND THE INTENT

An integrative process is a comprehensive approach to building systems and equipment. Project team members look
for synergies among systems and components, the mutual advantages that can help achieve high levels of building
performance, human comfort, and environmental benefits. The process should involve rigorous questioning and
coordination and challenge typical project assumptions. Team members collaborate to enhance the efficiency and
effectiveness of every system.
The Integrative Process credit goes beyond checklists and encourages integration during early design stages,
when clarifying the owner’s aspirations, performance goals, and project needs will be most effective in improving
performance. An integrative process comprises three phases. The first—discovery—is also the most important and
can be seen as an expansion of what is conventionally called predesign. Actions taken during discovery are essential
to achieving a project’s environmental goals cost-effectively. The second phase, design and construction, begins
with what is conventionally called schematic design. Unlike its conventional counterpart, however, in the integrative
process, design will incorporate all of the collective understandings of system interactions that were found during
discovery. The third phase is the period of occupancy, operations, and performance feedback. Here, the integrative
process measures performance and sets up feedback mechanisms. Feedback is critical to determining success in
achieving performance targets, informing building operations, and taking corrective action when targets are missed.
A fully integrative process accounts for the interactions among all building and site systems; this credit serves
as an introduction to the comprehensive process, rewarding project teams that apply an integrative approach to
energy and water systems. By understanding building system interrelationships, project teams will ideally discover
unique opportunities for innovative design, increased building performance, and greater environmental benefits
that will earn more LEED points. By identifying synergies between systems, teams will save time and money in both
the short and the long term while optimizing resource use. Finally, the integrative process can avoid the delays and

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
costs resulting from design changes during the construction documents phase and can reduce change orders during
construction.
Through the integrative process, project teams can more effectively use LEED as a comprehensive tool for
identifying interrelated issues and developing synergistic strategies. When applied properly, the integrative process
reveals the degree to which LEED credits are related, rather than individual items on a checklist.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

IP
Discovery Steps
STEP 1. BECOME FAMILIAR WITH INTEGRATIVE PROCESS.
Review the Integrative Process (IP) ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and
Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities, which provides step-by-step guidance and
a methodology for improving building design, construction, and operations through a replicable,
integrative process. Although this standard encourages project teams to engage in a comprehensive
integrative process, the credit requirements address only the discovery phase, whose steps are similar to
those described in the ANSI guide for engaging energy and water-related systems.

STEP 2. CONDUCT PRELIMINARY ENERGY RESEARCH AND ANALYSIS

(IN CONCERT WITH STEP 3)
Complete energy-related research and analysis to support effective and informed discussions about
potential integrative design opportunities (see Further Explanation, Recommended Preliminary Data
Collection).
·· Collect information about the local climate, site conditions, energy sources, transportation options,
and potential building features.
·· Use the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Target Finder tool or other data sources to benchmark
energy performance for the project’s type, scope, occupancy, and location.
·· Develop a “simple box” energy model (assuming a simplified building form) to generate a basic
distribution of energy uses and identify dominant energy loads.
46

·· Use this conceptual energy model to analyze design alternatives for potential load reduction strategies
(see Further Explanation, Recommended Preliminary Energy Analysis and Example 1).

STEP 3. CONDUCT PRELIMINARY WATER RESEARCH AND ANALYSIS

(IN CONCERT WITH STEP 2)
Complete water-related research and analysis to support effective and informed discussions about
potential integrative design opportunities.
·· Collect information about waste treatment infrastructure, water sources, and potential building
features (see Further Explanation, Recommended Preliminary Data Collection).
·· Assess expected water demand for indoor, outdoor, and process water using the methodologies for
WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction, WE Prerequisite Outdoor Water Use Reduction, and WE
Credit Cooling Tower Water Use.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Gather data to quantify the project’s potential nonpotable supply sources, such as captured rainwater,
graywater from flow fixtures, or condensate from HVAC cooling equipment.
·· Conduct a preliminary water budget analysis to quantify how fixture and equipment selection and
nonpotable supply sources may offset potable water use for the water demands.

STEP 4. CONVENE GOAL-SETTING WORKSHOP

Engage the project owner in a primary project team workshop to determine the project goals, including
budget, schedule, functional programmatic requirements, scope, quality, performance, and occupants’
expectations. Understanding the owner’s goals promotes creative problem solving and encourages
interaction. This workshop should accomplish the following:
·· Introduce all project team members to the fundamentals of the integrative process.
·· Share initial background research and analysis findings from Steps 2 and 3.
·· Elicit the owner’s and stakeholders’ values and aspirations.
·· Clarify functional and programmatic goals.
·· Establish initial principles, benchmarks, metrics, and performance targets.
·· Identify targeted LEED credits.
·· Generate potential integrative strategies for achieving performance targets.
·· Determine the questions that must be answered to support project decisions.
·· Identify initial responsibilities and deliverables.
·· Initiate documentation of the owner’s project requirements (OPR).
All principal project team members should be present at the goal-setting workshop.

STEP 5. EVALUATE POSSIBLE ENERGY STRATEGIES (IN CONCERT WITH STEP 6)

Evaluate the proposed goals and performance targets for feasibility by exploring possible strategies
IP

for the project’s energy-related systems. Evaluate strategies against the initial performance targets
and targeted LEED credits. It is recommended that project teams engage this initial early research and
analysis by evaluating each subsystem described in the ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0
for Design and Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities.
Conduct preliminary comparative energy modeling using the “simple box” energy model (Step 2) before
completing schematic design to evaluate energy load reduction strategies (see Further Explanation,
Recommended Preliminary Energy Analysis and Example 2). Aspects to consider include the following:
·· Site conditions. Landscape solar shading, exterior lighting, feasibility for natural ventilation, adjacent
site conditions.
·· Massing and orientation. Number of floors, building footprint, configuration, solar orientation.
·· Building envelope attributes. Wall and roof insulation, thermal mass, window size and orientation,
exterior shading devices, window performance (U-values, solar heat gain coefficient, visible light
transmittance).
·· Lighting levels. Lighting power density, lighting needs in workspaces, reflectance values for ceiling
and wall surfaces, high-efficiency lighting fixtures and controls, daylighting.
·· Thermal comfort ranges. Temperature setpoints and thermal comfort parameters.
·· Plug and process loads. Equipment and purchasing policies, other programmatic solutions,
layout options.
·· Programmatic and operational parameters. Hours of operation, space allotment per person,
shared program spaces, teleworking policies.
Conduct such preliminary modeling to assess at least two optional strategies for each of the above seven
aspects.
 47

STEP 6. EVALUATE POSSIBLE WATER STRATEGIES (IN CONCERT WITH STEP 5)

Evaluate the proposed goals and performance targets for feasibility by exploring possible strategies
for the project’s water-related systems. Conduct a preliminary water budget analysis using research on
potential water-use reduction strategies (Step 3). Aspects to consider include the following:
·· Indoor water use demand. Preliminary baseline and design case water consumption inside the
building, based on the building occupants’ use of assumed plumbing fixture flow and flush rates (using
the methodology for WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use).
·· Outdoor water use demand. Preliminary baseline and design case water consumption for landscape
irrigation, based on assumed landscape strategies and irrigation systems (using the methodology for
WE Prerequisite Outdoor Water Use).
Gather data (in addition to that for Step 3) to assess and quantify the project’s potential nonpotable
supply sources, such as captured rainwater, graywater from flow fixtures, and condensate produced by
initially assumed HVAC cooling equipment.
Assess and quantify how potential nonpotable supply sources can be used to offset potable water use
for the water demands calculated above. Identify at least one on-site nonpotable water source that could
supply a portion of at least two demand components.

Implementation Step

STEP 7. DOCUMENT HOW ANALYSIS INFORMED DESIGN AND BUILDING FORM

Document energy-related research and analysis from the discovery phase.
·· Document how the above energy-related analysis informed design and building form decisions in the
project’s OPR and basis of design (BOD), including the following, as applicable:
°° Building and site program
°° Building form and geometry

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
°° Building envelope and façade treatments on different orientations
°° Elimination or significant downsizing of building systems (e.g., HVAC, lighting, controls, exterior
materials, interior finishes, and functional program elements)
°° Other systems
·· Provide narrative explanations of the energy evaluation in the energy analysis section of the
Integrative Process worksheet (provided by USGBC) and identify at least two options for each of the
seven aspects listed in Step 5.
Document water-related research and analysis from the discovery phase.
·· Document how the water-related analysis informed building and site design decisions in the project’s
OPR and BOD, including the following, as applicable:
°° Plumbing systems

IP
°° Sewage conveyance and/or on-site treatment systems
°° Rainwater quantity and quality management systems
°° Landscaping, irrigation, and site elements
°° Roofing systems and/or building form and geometry
°° Other systems
·· Provide narrative explanations of the water evaluation in the water analysis section of the Integrative
Process worksheet.
48

FURTHER EXPLANATION

RECOMMENDED PRELIMINARY DATA COLLECTION

To understand the likely energy load distribution by end use, use a “simple box” energy model to identify initial
annual energy consumption percentages of total energy use for each of the following end uses (Figure 1):
·· Space heating
·· Space cooling
·· Ventilation
·· Domestic hot water
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Lighting
·· Miscellaneous equipment
·· Other, as applicable

Typical energy consumption by end use for a project depends on building type, occupancy, climate, and other
project-specific conditions.

ANNUAL ENERGY CONSUMPTION BY ENDUSE: HOSPITAL

Space cooling 16%

Space heating 26%

Vent fans 6% Task lights 0%

Heat reject 1%
Pumps 3%
Refrig display 0%
Domestic hot water 10% Ht pump supplement 0%
Ext usage 0%

Other 4%

Misc Equipment 25%

IP

Lights 13%

Figure 1. Example energy load distribution graph

Local climate data include annual and hourly dry-bulb temperature, wet-bulb depression, relative humidity, comfort
hours, and average annual and monthly rainfall for the project site.

For Steps 2 and 3, gather the information outlined for SS Credit Site Assessment, including solar and wind capacity,
heating and cooling degree days, seasonal wind velocity and direction, precipitation, microclimate, available energy
sources, utility providers, energy and peak load costs, potential financial incentives, and other issues likely to affect
energy-related systems.

For Step 3, consider the location (distance from site), capacity, and type and level of treatment for the sewage system
serving the site, including any sewage plant facilities. Include data on average water treatment cost.

For Step 3, consider the location, capacity, and type of water sources serving the site, such as reservoirs, aquifers,
wells, lakes, rivers, nonpotable sources, and municipal supply. Include monthly and annual rainfall data and the
average cost of potable (and/or nonpotable) water.
 49

RECOMMENDED PRELIMINARY ENERGY ANALYSIS

Before design of the building form begins, a building massing (“simple box”) energy analysis can be used to evaluate
potential energy and load reduction strategies, such as insulation levels and window performance levels. Initial
modeling iterations should include the strategies in Step 5.

Site conditions. Consider options that integrate landscape components and strategies that reduce exterior lighting.

Massing and orientation. Consider two fundamental building footprint shapes or two building heights (e.g.,
one-story versus two stories for the same total gross square footage). Evaluate how rotating the building 90 degrees
affects energy loads.

Building envelope performance. Consider options for the following aspects:

·· Solar heat gain coefficients, overall U-value of glazing systems, performance criteria for windows in low,
medium, and high ranges
·· R-value (insulation) of walls, roofs, and conditioned below-grade structures in low, medium, and high ranges
·· Effect of orientation on energy loads
·· Effect of percentage of exterior glazing (e.g., 30%, 50%, and 70%) on energy loads

Lighting levels. Consider at least two options for reasonable reductions in lighting power density, including one
aimed at a significant reduction from ASHRAE standards.

Thermal comfort ranges. Consider options for expanding the thermal comfort range.

Plug and process load needs. Consider at least two options for reasonable reductions in plug load density,
including one aimed at a significant reduction from ASHRAE standards.

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
Programmatic and operational parameters. Consider options aimed at reducing building size, hours of
occupancy, and/or number of occupants.

Simple massing sketches of rough configurations can be converted to simple box energy models. In both cases of this
example, only a single wing of each sketch was modeled to simplify this early energy modeling, as depicted in Figures
2 and 3.

IP
`

Figure 2. Simple massing sketches. Image courtesy of The Design Figure 3. Simple model. Image courtesy of 7group.
Alliance Architects, Pittsburgh, PA © 2008. Phipps Center for
Sustainable Landscapes.

The purpose of the modeling at this stage is to evaluate coarse-grain building configuration differences; only options
that have large consequences need to be modeled (Figure 3).
50

Use this early iterative conceptual energy modeling to understand the building’s heating and cooling loads and
determine whether the project’s energy use is likely to be dominated by internal or external loads. Small commercial
and most residential projects are frequently dominated by external loads; that is, exterior conditions tend to affect
the building’s heating and cooling loads more than internal conditions. As a result, the performance of the building’s
envelope tends to have a larger effect than internal loads such as lighting. Large commercial buildings tend to be
dominated by internal loads: occupants, equipment, and ventilation may be far greater contributors to the overall
load than the performance of the building envelope, depending on climatic conditions.

EXAMPLES
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Example 1. Light level analysis1

During the early stages of a Schools project, the team was able to reduce the number of lighting fixtures in classrooms
by 25% compared with standard practice by selecting a paint color whose light reflectance value was 75%, instead of
64% for the initial proposed paint selection, while maintaining adequate illuminance (roughly 50 footcandles) on
work surfaces.

The reduction in the number of light fixtures has multiple benefits, beyond the initial savings in fixture purchases
and installation: the cost of electrical energy for lighting falls by 25% over the life of the building, and since lighting
produces heat, the costs for cooling (roughly 1 watt of energy for every 3 watts of lighting) are reduced.

Example 2. Determining load reduction strategies

Determining effective load reduction strategies is the first step in creating an energy-efficient building. Early focus
on load reduction is important because once the space programming is completed and the building is constructed,
changing certain components that affect loads becomes difficult and expensive, especially for a building dominated
by external or building envelope loads.

An example of a dominant external load is a fully glazed western façade in a mixed climate like New York City. This
type of façade creates large loads for both cooling and heating, resulting in excessive energy use and oversizing
of HVAC systems. Example strategies to decrease envelope loads include increasing insulated opaque wall area
(balanced with daylighting strategies), increasing the insulating value of the glazing and window frame system, and
summer solar shading.

On the other end of the spectrum are large buildings with dominant internal loads, like hospitals. Internal loads are
IP

often cooling loads, created by a combination of heat-producing lighting, equipment, and occupants. Conditioning
of outside air is another big internal load. Load reduction strategies include decreasing lighting power, providing
daylighting, reducing plug loads, using economizers for free cooling, and reducing the amount of ventilation air
during periods of partial occupancy with CO2 sensors.

In both cases, significant energy load reductions can be achieved. The concept model can provide feedback on which
combination of strategies is likely to be the most effective and guide the design team in preparation for modeling
HVAC systems. This allows HVAC systems to be properly sized and equipment efficiency improved in subsequent
models; the team may be able to downsize or even eliminate equipment. The integrated approach can thus save both
energy and capital costs of construction.

EXAMPLE WORKSHEET DOCUMENTATION

Describe how research and analysis uncovered through discovery influenced the project building program, form,
geometry, and/or configuration.
The architect and mechanical engineer both started with the idea that two 100-ton chillers would be necessary for the AC
system but had not thoroughly considered modifications to the building envelope design. Using the energy model to inform
decisions about both, they instead specified two 50-ton chillers. The project also had a “future expansion” component
that was not adequately defined, so the team experienced difficulty planning for design flexibility. The team paused and
specifically addressed adaptability during the goal-setting workshop and then in the OPR, including which materials

1. Adapted from 7group and Bill G. Reed, The Integrative Design Guide to Green Building: Redefining the Practice of Sustainability (John Wiley W Sons, Inc., 2009).
 51

would be reclaimed or reused during the future expansion phase. Although opinions differed on the best way forward,
the team’s interaction added clarity to the process and better defined the expectations for the building’s operations and
future phasing.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
The energy-related systems analysis should include all system loads and occupants required by EA Prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance for Core and Shell projects. The water-related systems analysis should include all
system loads and occupants required by both WE Prerequisite Outdoor Water Use and WE Prerequisite Indoor
Water Use for Core and Shell projects.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Major Renovations
The energy-related systems analysis and water-related systems analysis should include all of the same systems
required for new construction projects, as described above, except for the massing and orientation component.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Integrative Process worksheet (energy and water analysis tabs) X

IP
RELATED CREDIT TIPS
LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. The related credit’s methodology for calculating transit service daily trips can
be used to compare the suitability of project site locations for commuters.

LT Credit Reduced Parking Footprint. Reducing paved area and enlarging the landscaped area can expand the
potential for rainwater infiltration aid the irrigation strategies connected with the preliminary water budget analysis
required for this credit. This credit also requires that at least one on-site nonpotable water supply source contribute
to at least two water demands; for example, a nonpotable water supply source such as harvested rainwater used for
both irrigation and toilet flushing satisfies this requirement.

SS Credit Site Assessment. Addressing the related credit together with this credit will offer a more holistic
perspective on the design opportunities and challenges. For best results, conduct the site assessment at the same
time as the energy and water analyses required by this credit and present findings to the owner in one package.
Climate data research and collection are recommended for both credits.

SS Credit Open Space. A larger landscaped area can increase graywater infiltration and aid irrigation—issues that
relate to the preliminary water budget analysis required for this credit. Integrate vegetated areas (including roofs)
to meet the requirements of SS Credit Rainwater Management, SS Credit Heat Island Reduction, WE Prerequisite
52

and Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction, and WE Prerequisite and Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction as part of a
holistic analysis. Attention to the credits’ interconnections allows optimization of the whole. Also take into account
site design, building location, orientation, and massing, all of which can affect the preliminary energy-related
systems analysis required for this credit—for example, using vegetation to provide solar shading.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. The preliminary water budget analysis required for this credit enables project
teams to see how associated water issues interrelate. In developing the required water analysis, look for synergies
with the related credit, plus SS Credit Open Space, SS Credit Heat Island Reduction, WE Prerequisite and Credit
Indoor Water Use Reduction, and WE Prerequisite and Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction, for achieving both cost
and performance improvements.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction. Many heat island reduction strategies alter both the preliminary water budget
analysis and the preliminary energy-related systems analysis. For example, vegetated roofs that improve the energy
performance of buildings are often paired with rainwater-harvesting systems.

SS Credit Light Pollution Reduction. Reducing exterior lighting power density addresses a site conditions aspect
of the preliminary energy analysis.

WE Prerequisite and Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction. The landscape water requirement calculation
methodology of the related prerequisite and credit must be used for conducting the preliminary water budget
analysis.

WE Prerequisite and Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction. The building water use and appliance and process use
calculation methodologies of the related prerequisite and credit must be used for conducting the preliminary water
budget analysis.

WE Credit Cooling Tower Water Use. For projects with cooling towers or evaporative condensers, the calculation
methodologies in the related credit can be used for conducting the preliminary water budget analysis. This credit
also requires that at least one on-site nonpotable water supply source contribute to at least two water demands; for
example, a nonpotable water supply source such as harvested rainwater used for cooling tower cycling plus one other
demand-side use satisfies this requirement.

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification. The narrative that this credit requires,
describing the preliminary energy-related systems analysis and preliminary water budget analysis, must be included
in the project’s OPR and BOD, both of which are required by the related prerequisite. The purpose here is to give the
IP

commissioning authority an understanding of the process and criteria used to select the designed systems—that is,
the “why,” not just the “what.”

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. The
preliminary energy analysis required for this credit encourages project teams to focus on load reductions before
analyzing system efficiencies. Using “simple box” energy modeling at an early stage, even before determining
building form, gives a project team energy end-use benchmarks that directly inform design decisions during an
iterative process, significantly improving energy performance and reducing operating costs.

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. The preliminary energy analysis requires project
teams to calculate basic energy end use distribution in the earliest design stages. By doing so, teams can compare the
relative energy demands of different ventilation strategies while meeting minimum ventilation requirements.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. The preliminary energy-related systems analysis requires
project teams to calculate basic energy end use distribution in the earliest design stages. By doing so, teams can
compare the relative energy demands of different ventilation strategies, including filtration, exhaust, demand
control ventilation, and natural ventilation.

EQ Credit Thermal Comfort. Adjusting thermal comfort ranges can dramatically affect energy consumption.
The preliminary energy-related systems analysis allows project teams to study the relative energy demands of
adjustments to thermal comfort in the earliest design stages. Thermal comfort depends on many interrelated issues
 53

covered by a preliminary energy-related systems analysis, such as ventilation, internal loads from lighting and
occupants, daylighting strategies, and external loads associated with envelope performance. Early modeling allows
project teams to iteratively adjust and evaluate the associated parameters before schematic design.

EQ Credit Daylight. Effective daylighting, including appropriate levels of natural light with controls that reduce
electric lighting, can dramatically affect energy consumption. The preliminary energy analysis allows project
teams to compare daylighting design strategies, particularly balancing total glazing area with its effect on thermal
performance and human comfort.

EQ Credit Quality Views. The preliminary energy-related systems analysis helps project teams give occupants
exterior views while balancing total glazing area with its effect on thermal performance and comfort.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and Construction of Sustainable Buildings and
Communities (February 2, 2012): ansi.org

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS
EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
basis of design (BOD) the information necessary to accomplish the owner’s project requirements, including

IP
system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes,
standards, regulations, and guidelines

charrette an intensive, multiparty workshop that brings people from different disciplines and backgrounds together
to explore, generate, and collaboratively produce design options

integrated project delivery an approach that involves people, systems, and business structures (contractual and
legal agreements) and practices. The process harnesses the talents and insights of all participants to improve results,
increase value to the owner, reduce waste, and maximize efficiency through all phases of design, fabrication, and
construction. (Adapted from American Institute of Architects).

owner’s project requirements (OPR) a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria determined
by the owner to be important to the success of the project

simple box energy modeling analysis (also known as “building-massing model energy analysis”) a simple base-
case energy analysis that informs the team about the building’s likely distribution of energy consumption and is used
to evaluate potential project energy strategies. A simple box analysis uses a basic, schematic building form.

water budget a project-specific method of calculating the amount of water required by the building and associated
grounds. The budget takes into account indoor, outdoor, process, and makeup water demands and any on site supply
including estimated rainfall. Water budgets must be associated with a specified amount of time, such as a week,
month, or year and a quantity of water such as kGal, or liters.
 55

Location and
Transportation (lt)
OVERVIEW

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION

The Location and Transportation (LT) category rewards thoughtful decisions about building location, with
credits that encourage compact development, alternative transportation, and connection with amenities, such
as restaurants and parks. The LT category is an outgrowth of the Sustainable Sites category, which formerly
covered location-related topics. Whereas the SS category now specifically addresses on-site ecosystem services,
the LT category considers the existing features of the surrounding community and how this infrastructure affects
occupants’ behavior and environmental performance.
Well-located buildings take advantage of existing infrastructure—public transit, street networks, pedestrian
paths, bicycle networks, services and amenities, and existing utilities, such as electricity, water, gas, and sewage. By
recognizing existing patterns of development and land density, project teams can reduce strain on the environment
from the material and ecological costs that accompany the creation of new infrastructure and hardscape. In
addition, the compact communities promoted by the LT credits encourage robust and realistic alternatives to

LT
private automobile use, such as walking, biking, vehicle shares, and public transit. These incremental steps can
have significant benefits: a 2009 Urban Land Institute study concluded that improvements in land-use patterns
and investments in public transportation infrastructure alone could reduce greenhouse gas emissions from
transportation in the U.S. by 9% to 15% by 20501; globally, the transportation sector is responsible for about one-
quarter of energy-related greenhouse gas emissions.2
If integrated into the surrounding community, a building can offer distinct advantages to owners and
building users. For owners, proximity to existing utility lines and street networks avoids the cost of bringing this
infrastructure to the project site. For occupants, walkable and bikeable locations can enhance health by encouraging
daily physical activity, and proximity to services and amenities can increase happiness and productivity. Locating
in a vibrant, livable community makes the building a destination for residents, employees, customers, and visitors,
and the building’s occupants will contribute to the area’s economic activity, creating a good model for future
development. Reusing previously developed land, cleaning up brownfield sites, and investing in disadvantaged areas
conserve undeveloped land and ensure efficient delivery of services and infrastructure.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Smart Growth and Climate Change, epa.gov/dced/climatechange.htm(accessed September 11, 2012).
2. International Council on Clean Transportation, Passenger Vehicles, (accessed March 22, 2013).
56

Design strategies that complement the building’s location are also rewarded in the LT section. For example,
by limiting parking, a project can encourage building users to take alternative transportation. By providing bicycle
storage, alternative-fuel facilities, and preferred parking for green vehicles, a project can support users seeking
transportation options.

CONSISTENT DOCUMENTATION
WALKING AND BICYCLING DISTANCE
Walking and bicycling distances are measurements of how far a pedestrian and bicyclist would travel from a point
of origin to a destination, such as the nearest bus stop. This distance, also known as shortest path analysis, replaces
the simple straight-line radius used in LEED 2009 and better reflects pedestrians’ and bicyclists’ access to amenities,
taking into account safety, convenience, and obstructions to movement. This in turn better predicts the use of these
amenities.
Walking distances must be measured along infrastructure that is safe and comfortable for pedestrian: sidewalks,
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

all-weather-surface footpaths, crosswalks, or equivalent pedestrian facilities.

Bicycling distances must be measured along infrastructure that is safe and comfortable for bicyclists: on-street
bicycle lanes, off-street bicycle paths or trails, and streets with low target vehicle speed. Project teams may use
bicycling distance instead of walking distance to measure the proximity of bicycle storage to a bicycle network in LT
Credit Bicycle Facilities.
When calculating the walking or bicycling distance, sum the continuous segments of the walking or bicycling
route to determine the distance from origin to destination. A straight-line radius from the origin that does not follow
pedestrian and bicyclist infrastructure will not be accepted.
Refer to specific credits to select the appropriate origin and destination points. In all cases, the origin must be
accessible to all building users, and the walking or bicycling distance must not exceed the distance specified in the
credit requirements.

TOTAL VEHICLE PARKING CAPACITY

When determining total parking capacity, include all the off-street spaces available to the project building’s users.
This may include spaces both inside and outside the project boundary.
If parking spaces are shared among two or more buildings (“pooled” parking), determine the share of this parking
allocated to the project. Include this number of spaces in the total parking capacity and provide rationale for the
parking distribution, if necessary.
If no off-street parking is allocated to the project building’s users, the team is eligible to pursue LT Credit
Reduced Parking Footprint but is not eligible for LT Credit Green Vehicles.

The following parking spaces must be included in total parking capacity:

·· New and existing surface parking spaces
LT

·· New and existing garage or multilevel parking spaces

·· Any off-street parking spaces outside the project boundary that are available to the building’s users

The following parking spaces should not be included in total parking capacity:
·· On-street (parallel or pull-in) parking spaces on public rights of way
·· Parking spaces for fleet and inventory vehicles, unless these vehicles are regularly used by employees for
commuting as well as business purposes
·· Motorbike or bicycle spaces
 57

PREFERRED PARKING
Preferred parking spaces have the shortest walking distance to the main entrance of the project, exclusive of spaces
designated for people with disabilities.
If parking is provided on multiple levels of a facility, locate preferred spaces on the level closest to the main
entrance to the building.
If the parking area is subdivided for different kinds of building users (e.g., customers and employees, staff and
students, ranking military officials), a project may distribute the required preferred parking spaces proportionally
across each parking area. This also applies to the provision of fueling stations in LT Credit Green Vehicles.
Alternatively, a project that subdivides its parking area may provide one general preferred parking area with
enough spaces for all user types (based on total parking capacity). In this case, parking areas outside the preferred
parking zone would still be separated by user type. This also applies to the provision of fueling stations in LT Credit
Green Vehicles.
The reservation of preferred parking spaces is required both for carpool and vanpool vehicles in LT Credit
Reduced Parking Footprint and for green vehicles in LT Credit Green Vehicles. Projects pursuing both credits will
need to reserve a higher proportion of preferred parking spaces.
Carpool and vanpool spaces and green vehicle spaces may be placed at the discretion of the project team (i.e.,
green vehicle spaces can be closer to the main entrance than carpool and vanpool spaces, or vice versa), provided the
number of spaces reserved for each type meets credit requirements.
Although not encouraged, preferred parking areas and signage for carpool and vanpool vehicles and green
vehicles may be combined if 10% of total parking capacity is reserved with this signage and both Reduced Parking
Footprint and Green Vehicles credits are achieved.

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION

LT
 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

58
LT
 59

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

LEED for Neighborhood

Development Location
This credit applies to:
New Construction (8–16 points) Data Centers (8–16 points)
Core and Shell (8–20 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (8–16 points)
Schools (8–15 points) Hospitality (8–16 points)
Retail (8–16 points) Healthcare (5–9 points)

LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT LOCATION

INTENT

To avoid development on inappropriate sites. To reduce vehicle

distance traveled. To enhance livability and improve human health by
encouraging daily physical activity.

REQUIREMENTS
Locate the project within the boundary of a development certified under LEED for Neighborhood Development
(Stage 2 or Stage 3 under the Pilot or 2009 rating systems, Certified Plan or Certified Project under the LEED v4
rating system).
Projects attempting this credit are not eligible to earn points under other Location and Transportation credits.

LT
TABLE 1. Points for LEED ND location

Points BD+C Points BD+C Points BD+C

Certification Level Points BD+C
(Core and Shell) (Schools) (Healthcare)

Certified 8 8 8 5

Silver 10 12 10 6

Gold 12 16 12 7

Platinum 16 20 15 9
60

BEHIND THE INTENT

The LEED for Neighborhood Development (LEED ND) rating system combines principles of smart growth, new
urbanism, and green building design and construction to promote sustainable, healthy, and equitable places for
neighborhood residents, workers, and visitors. Neighborhoods following the program must exhibit a wide range
of sustainability features, such as walkability, transit access, sensitive land protection, connectivity, and shared
infrastructure.
Project teams that select a project site in a LEED ND–certified neighborhood or plan have demonstrated a
commitment to the fundamental goals of the Location and Transportation credit category: excellent building
location and linkages with the surrounding community. The requirement for this credit is that the project be
certified (not just registered) under LEED ND, to ensure that all the goals of the LT category are addressed. This
credit thereby provides a streamlined alternative to the pursuit of the individual LT credits

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. IDENTIFY LEED ND NEIGHBORHOOD OR CERTIFIED PLAN AREA FOR POTENTIAL

DEVELOPMENT
Identify a potential project site that is located fully within a LEED ND–certified neighborhood or certified
plan area.
·· Check the USGBC website for up-to-date lists of LEED ND projects.
·· Local USGBC chapters in the United States or other green building councils in other countries
may also serve as valuable resources for identifying certified or soon-to-be-certified LEED ND
neighborhoods.

STEP 2. CONFIRM ELIGIBILITY OF LEED ND PROJECT

Confirm that the LEED ND neighborhood or plan area in which the project is located meets credit criteria
by collecting the following information:
·· Rating system and rating system version
·· Certification designation (Table 2; note differing terminology)
·· Certification level and certification date

TABLE 2. Eligibility by LEED ND certification designation

Version Eligible Ineligible

Stage 2 LEED for Neighborhood

LT

Development Certified Plan

Stage 1 LEED for Neighborhood
LEED ND Pilot Development Pre-reviewed Plan
Stage 3 LEED for Neighborhood
Development Certified Project

Stage 2 Pre-certified LEED for

Neighborhood Development Plan
Stage 1 Conditional Approval of
LEED 2009 LEED ND Plan
Stage 3 LEED ND Certified
Neighborhood Development

LEED for Neighborhood

Development Certified Plan
LEED for Neighborhood
LEED v4 LEED for Neighborhood Development Conditional Approval
Development Certified
Built Project
 61

The LEED ND project must have achieved certification to earn this credit. LEED ND projects that have
only been registered or submitted for certification review do not qualify.
Project teams must consider the certification timelines of related BD+C and ND projects:
·· If an associated neighborhood project is certifying to LEED ND Plan, be sure that the individual
building projects are registered before the LEED ND project submits its application for certification.
·· If an associated neighborhood project is certifying to LEED ND Plan and all building designs are
substantially complete, it is recommended to complete the building design review phase first,
then the LEED ND Plan certification. Major overlap exists between building water and energy
prerequisites. Completing the building certifications first will greatly streamline the LEED ND Plan
review process.
·· If the associated neighborhood project is certifying to LEED ND, both certifications need to be
submitted at approximately the same time, since each depends on the certification (not just
registration) of the other.
Delays or appeals of one or both certification reviews could complicate matters if submission timelines
are not coordinated. Alert USGBC as early in the documentation process as possible when simultaneous
certifications are expected for advice on how to proceed.

STEP 3. DETERMINE POTENTIAL POINTS AVAILABLE FOR LEED ND LOCATION CREDIT AND
INDIVIDUAL LT CREDITS
If the LEED ND project is certified and eligible for this credit, compare the available points offered by the
other LT credits and the LEED ND Location credit.

STEP 4. DETERMINE FINAL CREDIT ACHIEVEMENT PATHWAY

LEED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD DEVELOPMENT LOCATION

Select the preferred credit achievement pathway. Projects achieving the LEED ND Location credit are
ineligible to pursue additional LT credits.
·· LEED ND Location credit is appropriate if the points available for LT Credit LEED for Neighborhood
Development Location exceed the potential points available for individual LT credits. The compliance
path offered by this credit will likely save a project team time in documentation.
·· Individual LT credits are appropriate if the project is in an eligible LEED ND project or certified plan
area but can achieve more points by pursuing multiple LT credits. Evaluate the trade-off between
additional points and the level of effort required to document them.
·· If the prospective LEED ND area is ineligible (Table 2), pursue individual LT credits.

STEP 5. GATHER AND CONFIRM LEED ND PROJECT INFORMATION

Contact members of the LEED ND project team to gather the following information:
·· Project name and ID number
·· Map of certified LEED ND neighborhood or plan boundary

LT
62

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. The entire group boundary must be within the LEED ND
project boundary to earn credit.

Campus Approach
Eligible. The entire campus boundary must be within the LEED ND project boundary to use the campus credit
approach.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

LEED ND project information (name, ID number, rating system and version, certification level, and
X
certification date)

Vicinity base map with LEED project boundary and LEED ND certified neighborhood or plan
X
boundary

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Project teams achieving this credit are not eligible to pursue other LT credits.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.
LT

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
 63

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Sensitive Land
Protection
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To avoid the development of environmentally sensitive lands and reduce

the environmental impact from the location of a building on a site.

SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1.

Locate the development footprint on land that has been previously developed.

OR

LT
OPTION 2.

Locate the development footprint on land that has been previously developed or that does not meet the following
criteria for sensitive land:
·· Prime farmland. Prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local importance as defined by
the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5 (or local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.) and identified in a state Natural Resources Conservation Service soil survey (or local
equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
·· Floodplains. A flood hazard area shown on a legally adopted flood hazard map or otherwise legally designated
by the local jurisdiction or the state. For projects in places without legally adopted flood hazard maps or legal
designations, locate on a site that is entirely outside any floodplain subject to a 1% or greater chance of flooding
in any given year.
64

·· Habitat. Land identified as habitat for the following:

°° species listed as threatened or endangered under the U.S. Endangered Species Act or the state’s endangered
species act, or
°° species or ecological communities classified by NatureServe as GH (possibly extinct), G1 (critically
imperiled), or G2 (imperiled), or
°° species listed as threatened or endangered specifies under local equivalent standards (for projects outside
the U.S.) that are not covered by NatureServe data.
·· Water bodies. Areas on or within 100 feet (30 meters) of a water body, except for minor improvements.
·· Wetlands. Areas on or within 50 feet (15 meters) of a wetland, except for minor improvements.

Minor improvements within the wetland and water body buffers may be undertaken to enhance appreciation of
them, provided such facilities are open all building users. Only the following improvements are considered minor:
·· Bicycle and pedestrian pathways no more than 12 feet wide (3.5 meters), of which no more than 8 feet
(2.5 meters) may be impervious;
·· Activities to maintain or restore native natural communities and/or natural hydrology;
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· One single-story structure per 300 linear feet (90 linear meters) on average, not exceeding 500 square feet
(45 square meters);
·· Grade changes necessary to ensure public access;
·· Clearings, limited to one per 300 linear feet (90 linear meters) on average, not exceeding 500 square feet
(45 square meters) each;
·· Removal of the following tree types:
°° Hazardous trees, up to 75% of dead trees
°° Trees less than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast height
°° Up to 20% of trees more than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast height with a condition rating of
40% or higher.
°° Trees under 40% condition rating
·· The condition rating must be based on an assessment by an arborist certified by the International Society of
Arboriculture (ISA) using ISA standard measures, or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.
·· Brownfield remediation activities.
LT
 65

BEHIND THE INTENT

Ecologically sensitive areas provide a variety of human health and environmental benefits. Agricultural areas
produce food and assist with rainwater management; floodplains support diverse flora and fauna, supply rich
agricultural soil, and provide flood protection; imperiled or endangered species habitat supports biodiversity; and
wetlands and water bodies can buffer against flooding, sequester carbon, and manage rainwater runoff.
The ecosystem services and benefits these sensitive land types provide need to be effectively managed.
Development of this land not only harms the ecology of the area but also places people and property in danger. For
instance, locating a building in a floodplain or close to a marsh increases its risk of damage from floods or rising sea
levels, and the conversion of agricultural land limits local opportunities for producing food.
One strategy for lessening the environmental consequences of a building is to select a site that has previously
been developed and then to limit the building’s footprint to the previously developed area. Building on a previously
developed site also encourages the reuse of existing built infrastructure and investment in existing neighborhoods.
If developing entirely on previously developed land is infeasible, project teams can achieve compliance by not
disturbing sensitive land types.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY PREVIOUSLY DEVELOPED LAND ON SITE

Determine which portions of the site have been previously developed, if any, and map these areas (see
Getting Started, Previous Development).

STEP 2. PRIORITIZE DEVELOPMENT OF PREVIOUSLY DEVELOPED LAND

Compare the project’s proposed development footprint with the previously developed land. Where
possible, locate the development footprint only on portions of the site that have been previously

SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION

developed.
·· If the development footprint does not extend beyond the previously developed portions of the site, or
if the entire site is previously developed, the project has met the requirements of Option 1. No further
action is necessary.
·· If the development footprint extends to any land that has not been previously developed, follow
Steps 3–8 below (for land that has not been previously developed only) to determine compliance with
Option 2.

STEP 3. DETERMINE LOCATION OF PRIME FARMLAND

Confirm that the project’s proposed development footprint does not encroach on prime farmland,
unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local importance, as identified in the Natural Resources
Conservation Service (NRCS) soil survey for the area, or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.
(see Further Explanation, NRCS Soil Surveys and International Tips).

LT
STEP 4. DETERMINE LOCATION OF FLOOD HAZARD AREAS
Consult legally adopted flood hazard maps of the project site area.
·· In the U.S., most local governments, flood management agencies, or other local entities maintain
flood hazard maps, which may include flood hazard areas designated by both the Federal Emergency
Management Agency (FEMA) and a local agency. For FEMA flood hazard zone definitions and map
designations, see Referenced Standards.
·· Projects outside the U.S. may use equivalent standards or determine the flood hazard area with a
qualified professional (see Further Explanation, International Tips).

STEP 5. DETERMINE LOCATION OF THREATENED OR ENDANGERED SPECIES HABITAT

Project teams in the U.S. should contact the state Natural Heritage Program and state wildlife agency to
determine whether any habitat for threatened or endangered species has been or is likely to be found on
the project site.
66

·· Qualifying species include threatened or endangered species under the U.S. Endangered Species Act,
those listed by a state endangered species act, or those classified by NatureServe as GH, G1, or G2 (see
Referenced Standards).
·· Projects teams have several options for gathering imperiled species and communities information from
NatureServe. County-level data is available on the NatureServe website. Team members can reference
the results of the website query as they determine whether ecological communities exist or if there is
habitat necessary to support threatened or endangered species, located on the project site. Teams can
also work with NatureServe directly to find more site-specific information if results are inconclusive or
a more detailed survey is necessary.
·· Project teams outside the U.S. should use local equivalents to these agencies. If an equivalent to
the U.S. Natural Heritage Program or the state wildlife agency cannot be determined, see Further
Explanation, International Tips.

STEP 6. DETERMINE LOCATION OF WETLANDS AND WATER BODIES

Use project site maps to locate any wetlands or water bodies.
·· Include land within 50 feet (15 meters) of wetlands or land within 100 feet (30 meters) of water bodies.
·· U.S. project teams should consult the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers’ Wetlands Delineation Manual for
further guidance on delineating wetlands.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 7. LOCATE DEVELOPMENT FOOTPRINT TO AVOID ANY SENSITIVE AREAS

If the previous steps reveal any prime farmland, flood hazard zone, imperiled species habitat, or wetlands
or water bodies and their surrounding buffers, design the project such that the development footprint
does not encroach on the sensitive areas.

STEP 8. UNDERTAKE ONLY APPROVED MINOR IMPROVEMENTS AROUND WETLANDS AND

WATER BODIES
Ensure that any necessary improvements to enhance appreciation of the wetland or water body and its
buffer are considered minor, per the credit requirements. Project teams should evaluate the trade-offs
between access to the wetlands or water bodies and the ecological consequences of the access for
those areas.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

EXAMPLE
A project site has had no previous development. In consulting with agencies identified in the credit, the project team
determines that an adjacent wetland extends across the project boundary and also finds a small habitat area for an
endangered species within the project boundary.
LT

The project team designs the development footprint such that it does not overlap with the sensitive habitat area
and is not within 50 feet (15 meters) of the wetland. The project team provides an impervious pedestrian pathway
within the wetland buffer that meets the credit requirements. The project earns the credit.

PRIME FARMLAND EXPLANATION

In the U.S., prime farmland (as well as unique farmland and farmland of statewide or local importance) is defined
by the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, as specified in the credit requirements. The definition has multiple parts
that indicate the characteristics necessary for the farmland to be considered prime, unique, or of statewide or local
importance. The complete definition can be found at gpo.gov/fdsys/pkg/CFR-2001-title7-vol6.
This definition is built into NRCS soil surveys; project teams do not need to conduct their own soil surveys unless
seeking local equivalency for a site not covered by NRCS (see International Tips). See below for more information on
obtaining the results of those soil surveys.
 67

NRCS SOIL SURVEYS IN U.S.

Project teams may determine site soil types by visiting the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) website
(see Referenced Standards) and downloading GIS data for the appropriate state and county.
NRCS keeps detailed surveys and maps for every county in the U.S. and provides most of this information online.
The information can be downloaded to GIS mapping programs or may be viewed without GIS directly through the
NRCS website, at websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/.
If NRCS soils data for the project site are unavailable online, contact the state or regional office to determine
whether the site’s soil type is considered prime, unique, or of state significance. It may be necessary to consult with
an agricultural scientist if the soil type for the project site is unclear.

IDENTIFYING SENSITIVE HABITAT

To determine the presence of sensitive habitat, work with the state Natural Heritage Program and/or state fish and
wildlife agencies (or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) to see whether species in any of the listed criteria are found
on the project site. This will ensure that the most comprehensive and accurate data are used and eliminates the need
for the project team to conduct a site survey.
Scientists from the aforementioned agencies specialize in wildlife information and can therefore determine
whether the site has any sensitive habitat.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
A qualified biologist or ecologist may be helpful in determining which local laws and regulations are the most
equivalent to U.S. measures in scope and rigor. A qualified ecological or biological specialist is defined as an
individual who has the following qualifications:
·· Holds a degree in biology, ecology, or a related subject
·· Is a practicing biologist or ecologist with a minimum of three years’ experience in, for example, ecological
impact assessments, habitat surveys, and habitat restoration
·· Understands how construction and the built environment affect ecology and can make recommendations for
ecological protection, enhancement, and mitigation measures

SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION

·· Is covered by a professional code of conduct

Organizations likely to have qualified members include the Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental
Management, the Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management, and the Institute of Environmental
Management and Assessment.

Prime farmland. A local equivalent for identifying prime farmland is acceptable. Reference the U.S. Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5, to ensure that the local equivalent definition is similar.
Use a soil survey with equivalent methodology to the NRCS soil survey that identifies land with characteristics
similar to the definition of prime farmland.

Flood hazard areas. If the project area is covered in flood hazard maps, include the criteria used to delineate flood

LT
hazard area and the name of the authority that produced the maps. If no flood hazard maps are available, work with
an engineer, hydrologist, or other qualified professional to map the flood hazard areas subject to credit requirements.
Flood hazard maps must delineate areas with a 1% or greater chance of flooding in any given year. The professional
hydrologist should also produce a report or an executive summary of findings and supporting documentation, such
as site elevations or topographic maps and sections identifying the flood risk of the project site.

Sensitive habitat. If an equivalent to a U.S. fish and wildlife agency or Natural Heritage Program cannot be
determined, review national or international sources for endangered species or protected habitat to determine what
imperiled species might occur in the area. Global resources include the International Union for Conservation of
Nature Red List (iucnredlist.org). In addition, engage a qualified local biologist or ecologist to conduct a biological
survey.

Tree condition. A local equivalent to an arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) must
be consulted to determine the condition ratings of any trees that might be removed.
68

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Site map(s) showing project boundary, development footprint, any previous development,
X X
any sensitive areas, and any minor improvements in required buffers

Explanation of the previous development on the site X

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Description of how the project team verified prime farmland, flood hazard, and sensitive
X
habitat criteria were met

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit High-Priority Site. Locating the project on any of the site conditions listed in the related credit increases
the likelihood of avoiding the sensitive areas protected under this credit. Brownfield remediation activities pursued
as part of Option 3 of the related credit are considered acceptable minor improvements in wetland and water body
buffers.

LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses. Siting the project building away from sensitive areas increases
the likelihood of locating in areas with surrounding building density or near diverse uses.

LT Credit Reduced Parking Footprint. By limiting the area allowed for development, this credit may reduce the
amount of available land for parking and help teams achieve the related credit.

SS Credit Site Assessment. During an assessment, a project team may find features such as vegetation, land use,
or hydrology that require protection to achieve this credit. The same assessment may be used to identify protection
measures in the related credit.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Sensitive land or previously undeveloped land on the project site that is left
undisturbed may be used to manage runoff and help achieve Option 2 of the related credit.
LT

SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat. Sensitive land or previously undeveloped land on the
project site that is left undisturbed may be counted toward the 40% greenfield protection requirement in the related
credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Floodplain requirements now refer to “flood hazard area shown on a legally adopted flood hazard map” instead
of specifically referencing the 100-year floodplain. Projects must now avoid the flood hazard area instead of
being at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) above the 100-year floodplain.
·· The sensitive habitat requirements have been expanded to include species or ecological communities listed
by NatureServe (in additional to local equivalents for projects outside the U.S. or outside areas covered by
NatureServe).
 69

·· The water body buffer has been changed from 50 feet (15 meters) to 100 feet (30 meters).
·· The wetland buffer has been changed from 100 feet (30 meters) to 50 feet (15 meters).
·· A list of allowable minor improvements in wetland or water body buffers has been added.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
U.S. Department of Agriculture, United States Code of Federal Regulations Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699,
Section 657.5: soils.usda.gov/technical/handbook/contents/part622.html

U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, List of Threatened and Endangered Species: fws.gov/endangered

NatureServe Heritage Program, GH, G1, and G2 species and ecological communities: natureserve.org

FEMA Flood Zone Designations: msc.fema.gov

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
brownfield real property or the expansion, redevelopment, or reuse of which may be complicated by the presence or
possible presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant

SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION

development footprint the total land area of a project site covered by buildings, streets, parking areas, and other
typically impermeable surfaces constructed as part of the project

previously developed altered by paving, construction, and/or land use that would typically have required regulatory
permitting to have been initiated (alterations may exist now or in the past). Land that is not previously developed
and landscapes altered by current or historical clearing or filling, agricultural or forestry use, or preserved natural
area use are considered undeveloped land. The date of previous development permit issuance constitutes the date of
previous development, but permit issuance in itself does not constitute previous development.

water body the surface water of a stream (first-order and higher, including intermittent streams), arroyo, river,
canal, lake, estuary, bay, or ocean. It does not include irrigation ditches.

wetland an area that is inundated or saturated by surface or ground water at a frequency and duration sufficient

LT
to support, and that under normal circumstances does support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for
life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include swamps, marshes, bogs, and similar areas, but exclude
irrigation ditches unless delineated as part of an adjacent wetland.
LT LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

70
 71

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

High-Priority Site
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1-2 points) Data Centers (1-2 points)
Core and Shell (2-3 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1-2 points)
Schools (1-2 points) Hospitality (1-2 points)
Retail (1-2 points) Healthcare (1-2 point)

INTENT

To encourage project location in areas with development constraints

and promote the health of the surrounding area.

REQUIREMENTS

HIGH-PRIORITY SITE
OPTION 1. HISTORIC DISTRICT (1 POINT BD+C EXCEPT CORE AND SHELL, 2 POINTS CORE
AND SHELL)

Locate the project on an infill location in a historic district.

OR

OPTION 2. PRIORITY DESIGNATION (1 POINT BD+C EXCEPT CORE AND SHELL, 2 POINTS
CORE AND SHELL).

LT
Locate the project on one of the following:
·· a site listed by the EPA National Priorities List;
·· a Federal Empowerment Zone site;
·· a Federal Enterprise Community site;
·· a Federal Renewal Community site;
·· a Department of the Treasury Community Development Financial Institutions Fund Qualified Low-Income
Community (a subset of the New Markets Tax Credit Program);
·· a site in a U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development’s Qualified Census Tract (QCT) or Difficult
Development Area (DDA); or
·· a local equivalent program administered at the national level for projects outside the U.S.
72

OR

OPTION 3. BROWNFIELD REMEDIATION (2 POINTS BD+C EXCEPT CORE AND SHELL,

3 POINTS CORE AND SHELL)

Locate on a brownfield where soil or groundwater contamination has been identified, and where the local, state, or
national authority (whichever has jurisdiction) requires its remediation. Perform remediation to the satisfaction of
that authority.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
LT
 73

BEHIND THE INTENT

Many communities and governments have identified high-priority redevelopment sites. Putting these sites back into
productive use has many environmental advantages over development in greenfields and environmentally sensitive
areas. Building a project on a high-priority redevelopment site can revitalize the neighborhood and bring social and
economic benefits to the surrounding community. Such projects also achieve savings because they are served by
existing infrastructure.
Option 1 rewards investing in historic areas, a proven strategy for maintaining and enhancing community
character. Underutilized properties can have a rich history. The redevelopment of sites in historic districts can also
reduce urban sprawl through adaptive reuse.
Many low-income communities have sites that are vacant or underutilized because of perceived stigmas
or economic barriers. Option 2 promotes the social and economic revitalization of economically depressed or
disadvantaged neighborhoods by rewarding the location of certain appropriate projects on such sites.
Option 3 promotes the redevelopment of contaminated sites, where hazardous materials are removed from a
site’s soil or groundwater, thereby reducing2 the exposure of humans and wildlife to environmental pollution and
improving environmental health. Contaminated site redevelopment often reduces the footprint of the project’s
elements, with a redevelopment site using an average of 78% less land than the same project would if it were built
on a greenfield.1

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Option 1. Historic District

STEP 1. CONFIRM INFILL STATUS

Confirm that the project site under consideration is an infill site.
·· To determine infill status, first identify all land within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of the project boundary
that has been previously developed, excluding streets and other rights of way (see Getting Started,
Previous Development).
·· Determine the percentage of land that is previously developed by dividing the previously developed

HIGH-PRIORITY SITE
area by the total land area less streets and rights-of-way within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of the project
boundary. Water bodies are not included in land area. If this percentage is 75% or greater, the location
is considered an infill site.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY AND CONFIRM HISTORIC DISTRICT STATUS

Consult the local planning or permitting agency to identify any historic preservation entity that
designates local historic districts. Work with that entity to determine whether the proposed project site
is in a historic district.
·· Projects in a historic preservation district must often meet additional design or construction criteria.

LT
These restrictions may include use of specific exterior building materials, limitations on total building
height, and restrictions on demolition.
·· Work with the historic preservation entity to determine these restrictions and gain approval through
the local review board where required.

Option 2. Priority Designation

STEP 1. IDENTIFY PRIORITY DEVELOPMENT AREA

Review the high-priority designations identified in the credit requirements and consult each program’s
website to review the areas identified under the program. The priority designations listed most often
overlap with economically disadvantaged areas. These programs are administered in the U.S.; for
information on equivalency, see Further Explanation, International Tips.
·· National Priority Sites are designated by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. They release

1. Deason, J.P., G.W. Sherk, and G.A. Carroll, Public Policies and Private Decisions Affecting the Redevelopment of Brownfields (Environmental and Energy
Management Program, George Washington University, 2001).
74

or threaten to release hazardous substances, pollutants, or contaminants. Projects on the National

Priority List are targets for the federal Superfund program, which cleans up uncontrolled hazardous
waste sites around the country.
·· Empowerment Zone, Enterprise Community, and Renewal Community sites, identified by the U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development, offer various tax incentives to encourage businesses
to open or expand and hire local residents.
·· The Community Development Financial Institutions Fund is a federal grant program that seeks to
expand affordable credit, capital, and financial services for underserved populations through grants
and tax credits. It is a subset of the Treasury’s New Markets Tax Credit Program, which provides a tax
credit for investing in designated “community development entities.”
·· A qualified census tract has a certain percentage of low-income households, as defined under
Section 42 of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code. Difficult development areas are determined annually by
Housing and Urban Development. Owners of rental properties in qualified census tracts and difficult
development areas qualify for the low-income housing tax credit, as defined under Section 42 of the
Internal Revenue Code.

STEP 2. CONFIRM THAT SITE IS IN AREA WITH PRIORITY DESIGNATION

Work with the local economic development, planning, community development, housing, or
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

redevelopment agency or department to determine whether the specified priority designation applies to
the project site.
·· A project site qualifies even if only a portion is in the high-priority designated area.
·· Indicate the site boundaries and priority area on a site map and provide confirmation of the
designation.

Option 3. Brownfield Remediation

STEP 1. IDENTIFY CONTAMINATION

As early as possible in the development process, determine the presence of any on-site soil or
groundwater contamination.
·· To identify contamination, consult local records, conduct a Phase 1 or Phase 2 environmental site
assessment (or a local equivalent), or work with a biologist or environmental scientist.
·· The credit explicitly applies to soil or groundwater contamination. Asbestos and other contaminants
inside buildings (whether demolished or remaining) or in debris do not count as contamination under
this credit requirement. However, it is recommended that project teams consider these factors in an
overall site assessment.
·· If the project is located on a site that has already been completely assessed and remediated, the
results of that assessment and remediation may be used toward achievement of this option if
complete documentation is provided.

STEP 2. DETERMINE APPLICABLE REMEDIATION REQUIREMENTS

LT

Obtain a declaration from the authority having jurisdiction indicating the presence of contamination, and
work with that authority to determine the remediation requirements for the contaminated site.
·· If part of the site is found to have contamination, then the entire area within the LEED project
boundary is considered a contaminated site.
·· In the U.S., the authority having jurisdiction may be the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
a state or local government regulatory agency responsible for identification of contaminants and
remediation protocols.

STEP 3. COMPLETE REMEDIATION

Remediate the project site to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction. Completing remediation
typically involves working with a remediation specialist.
·· Remediation can be a long process. Identifying any contamination and beginning remediation is
often just the first step; a site undergoing remediation may therefore receive credit at the time of
certification.
·· Many local governments or other authorities will not grant entitlement or other planning approvals
until remediation has made the site safe for human occupancy and intended use.
 75

FURTHER EXPLANATION

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Option 1 Historic District. Projects may attempt this option if a local, national, or international designation
indicates that the project site’s neighborhood has significant historic or cultural value.

Option 2 Priority Designation. Most of the priority designations are intended to encourage investment in
economically disadvantaged or low-income areas. Projects outside the U.S. should demonstrate that the site is in a
priority area, as designated by an equivalent, nationally administered program with similar goals and operation.

Option 3 Brownfield Remediation. Identify site contamination by using a government registry or by following a
procedure similar to Phase 1 and Phase 2 Environmental Site Assessments, as specified by ASTM E1527-05 and ASTM
E1903–11. In all cases the authority having jurisdiction must require remediation for this option to be achieved. The
scope of Phase I and II assessments includes determining the likelihood of contamination and identifying potential
contaminants on the site (by such methods as reviewing historical records and interviewing those with knowledge
of the site) as well as collecting and testing samples of soil, soil vapor, ground water and structural materials for
contamination.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings may be documented as one.
Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

HIGH-PRIORITY SITE
Vicinity map indicating previously developed land within
X
½ mile (800 meters) of project boundary

Document from historic preservation entity

X
confirming location in historic district

Vicinity map or other documentation confirming

X
priority site designation

Documentation from authority having jurisdiction declaring existence

of specific contamination and confirming that remediation has been X
or will be completed to its satisfaction

LT
RELATED CREDIT TIPS
MR Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction. Projects reusing the structure, envelope, and interior
nonstructural elements of a historic building may be eligible for Option 1 of the related credit. Projects renovating or
reusing at least half of the structure, enclosure, and interior structural elements of an abandoned or blighted building
may be eligible for Option 2 of the related credit.

SS Prerequisite Environmental Site Assessment: If a Phase 1 environmental site assessment (required for
School and Healthcare projects under the related prerequisite) reveals brownfields or contamination that will be
remediated, the project qualifies for Option 3 of this credit.

LT credit category (all credits): Locating a building on any of the high-priority site types addressed in this credit
significantly increases the likelihood that the project will be in a dense area served by transit and diverse uses,
making other LT credits more achievable.
76

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· This credit adapts many of the concepts formerly found in SS Credit 3 Brownfield Redevelopment.
·· Projects now have options for infill location in a historic district and for locating in a priority
redevelopment area.
·· Projects are no longer limited to officially designated brownfields. Contaminated sites requiring remediation,
as deemed by the authority having jurisdiction, can qualify a project for this credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Priority List: epa.gov/superfund/sites/npl

U.S. Housing and Urban Development, Federal Empowerment Zone, Federal Enterprise Community, and
Federal Renewal Community:
portal.hud.gov/hudportal/HUD?src=/program_offices/comm_planning/economicdevelopment/programs/rc
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

U.S. Department of Treasury, Community Development Financial Institutions Fund: cdfifund.gov

U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, Qualified Census Tracts and Difficult Development
Areas: qct.huduser.org/index.html

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
For exemplary performance, pursue Option 2 or 3 in addition to Option 1. Otherwise, only one option is allowed.

DEFINITIONS
brownfield real property or the expansion, redevelopment, or reuse of which may be complicated by the presence or
possible presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant

historic district a group of buildings, structures, objects, and sites that have been designated or determined to be
eligible as historically and architecturally significant, and categorized as either contributing or noncontributing to
the historic nature of the district.

infill site a site where at least 75% of the land area, exclusive of rights-of-way, within ½ mile (800 meters) of the
project boundary is previously developed. A street or other right-of-way does not constitute previously developed
land; it is the status of property on the other side of right-of-way or the street that matters.
LT

previously developed site a site that, prior to the project, consisted of at least 75% previously developed land
 77

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Surrounding Density
and Diverse Uses
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1-5 points) Data Centers (1–5 points)
Core and Shell (1-6 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–5 points)
Schools (1-5 points) Hospitality (1–5 points)
Retail (1–5 points) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

To conserve land and protect farmland and wildlife habitat by
encouraging development in areas with existing infrastructure. To
promote walkability, and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle
distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging daily
physical activity.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY

LT
OPTION 1. SURROUNDING DENSITY (2–3 POINTS BD+C EXCEPT CORE AND SHELL,
2-4 POINTS CORE AND SHELL).

Locate on a site whose surrounding existing density within a 1/4 mile (400-meter) radius of the project boundary
meets the values in Table 1. Use either the “separate residential and nonresidential densities” or the “combined
density” values.
78

TABLE 1A. Points for average density within 1/4 mile of project (IP units)

Points BD+C
Separate Residential and Points BD+C
Combined Density (except
Nonresidential Densities (Core and Shell)
Core and Shell)

Square feet per acre Residential Nonresidential

of buildable land Density (DU/acre) Density (FAR)

22,000 7 0.5 2 2

35,000 12 0.8 3 4

TABLE 1B. Points for average density within 400 meters of project (SI units)

Points BD+C
Separate Residential and Points BD+C
Combined Density (except
Nonresidential Densities (Core and Shell)
Core and Shell)

Square meters per hectare of Residential Nonresidential

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

buildable land Density (DU/hectare) Density (FAR)

5 050 17.5 0.5 2 2

8 035 30 0.8 3 4

DU = dwelling unit; FAR = floor-area ratio.

SCHOOLS ONLY
Physical education spaces that are part of the project site, such as playing fields and associated buildings used
during sporting events only (e.g., concession stands) and playgrounds with play equipment, are excluded from the
development density calculations.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. DIVERSE USES (1–2 POINTS)

Construct or renovate a building or a space within a building such that the building’s main entrance is within a 1/2
mile (800-meter) walking distance of the main entrance of four to seven (1 point) or eight or more (2 points) existing
and publicly available diverse uses (listed in Appendix 1).

The following restrictions apply.

·· A use counts as only one type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only once even if it sells products in several
LT

categories).
·· No more than two uses in each use type may be counted (e.g. if five restaurants are within walking distance,
only two may be counted).
·· The counted uses must represent at least three of the five categories, exclusive of the building’s primary use.

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS

OPTION 1. DEVELOPMENT AND ADJACENCY (2–3 POINTS)

Construct or renovate the project on a previously developed site that was used for industrial or commercial purposes
(2 points).

OR
 79

Construct or renovate the project on a site that is both a previously developed and an adjacent site. The adjacent sites
must be currently used for industrial or commercial purposes (3 points).

AND/OR

OPTION 2. TRANSPORTATION RESOURCES (1–2 POINTS)

Construct or renovate the project on a site that has two or three (1 point) or four (2 points) of the following
transportation resources:
·· The site is within a 10-mile (16 kilometer) driving distance of a main logistics hub, defined as an airport, seaport,
intermodal facility, or freight village with intermodal transportation.
·· The site is within a 1-mile (1 600-meter) driving distance of an on-off ramp to a highway.
·· The site is within a 1-mile (1 600-meter) driving distance of an access point to an active freight rail line.
·· The site is served by an active freight rail spur.

In all cases, a planned transportation resource must be sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the
certificate of occupancy and complete within 24 months of that date..

HEALTHCARE

OPTION 1. SURROUNDING DENSITY (1 POINT)

Locate on a site whose surrounding existing density within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) radius of the project boundary is:
1. At least 7 dwelling units per acre (17.5 DU per hectare) with a 0.5 floor-area ratio. The counted density must be
existing density, not zoned density, or

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

2. At least 22,000 square feet per acre (5 050 square meters per hectare) of buildable land.

For previously developed existing rural healthcare campus sites, achieve a minimum development density of 30,000
square feet per acre (6 890 square meters per hectare).

OR

OPTION 2. DIVERSE USES (1 POINT)

Construct or renovate a building on a site such that the building’s main entrance is within a 1/2-mile (800-meter)
walking distance of the main entrance of at least seven operational and publicly accessible uses (listed in Appendix 1).

The following restrictions apply.

·· A use may be counted as only one type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only once even if it sells products in
several categories).
·· No more than two uses in each use type may be counted (e.g., if five restaurants are within walking distance,

LT
only two may be counted).
·· The counted uses must represent at least three of the five categories, exclusive of the building’s primary use.
80

BEHIND THE INTENT

Because most people prefer to walk no more than a quarter of a mile (400 meters) or five minutes to casual
destinations and no more than half a mile (800 meters) for regular trips such as a daily commute,1 locating different
kinds of destinations close to each other achieves a long list of documented environmental and social benefits. For
example, doubling residential and nonresidential density reduces the length of vehicular trips and total air pollution
by 30 percent.2 Air particulate levels go down along with greenhouse gas emissions, reducing transportation’s
climate change effects.3 Furthermore, per capita pedestrian and bicycle injuries and deaths tend to be fewer in
denser neighborhoods with more pedestrians and cyclists, since motorists must drive more slowly and carefully in
these areas. The rate of car collision fatalities goes down, too, as the average length of vehicular trips grows shorter.
Moreover, density improves community members’ health. As neighborhoods become more compact, residents who
frequently walk, bike, or use transit are more physically fit and less likely to be overweight.4 One study found that the
probability of being overweight falls around 5% for every half-mile (800 meters) walked per day.5 Finally, compact
development capitalizes on existing infrastructure, saving money and resources while more efficiently using land
and preserving habitat, farmland, and open space on the urban fringe.
For all those reasons, this credit rewards a project location that is surrounded by existing built density and within
walking distance of a variety of services (“uses”). The density thresholds correspond to the minimum densities
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

needed to support bus transit (seven dwelling units per acre, 17.5 DU per hectare) and fixed-rail transit (12 DU per
acre, 30 DU per hectare). Two threshold types are listed, one combining residential and nonresidential densities, the
second separating them. Project teams therefore have flexibility in calculating the surrounding built density based
on the information available to them.
The credit restricts which uses can and cannot count to ensure a diversity of destinations. The more diverse types
of services within walking distance of the project, the more opportunities occupants have to combine their trips
when meeting daily needs—for example, stopping at a dry cleaner on the way to the bank.
In this credit, warehouses and distribution centers have different requirements, reflecting the needs of buildings
devoted to housing goods (and not people). For such projects, proximity to transportation infrastructure matters
more.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE

STEP 1. SELECT PROJECT SITE

Use the criteria in the credit requirements to evaluate potential sites for development. Follow these
suggestions to maximize the chances of identifying an appropriate site:
LT

·· Limit site selection to areas within the central business district of a city or town center.
·· Give preference to areas of development that include residential uses.
·· Identify both infill sites and existing buildings that can meet the needs of the project.

1. Interview with Dan Burden, Walkable Communities, cited in How to Create and Implement Healthy General Plans (Raimi + Associates and Public Health Law
and Policy, 2008), p. B2, changelabsolutions.org/sites/default/files/Healthy_General_Plans_Toolkit_Updated_20120517_0.pdf (accessed June 10, 2013).
2. Raimi, Matthew, and Sarah Patrick with Design Community & Environment, in association with Reid Ewing, Lawrence Frank, and Richard Kreutzer,
Understanding the Relationship between Public Health and the Built Environment, Report prepared for the U.S. Green Building Council LEED-ND Core
Committee and Congress for the New Urbanism (2006), p. 116, usgbc.org/Docs/Archive/General/Docs3901.pdf (accessed June 10, 2013)
3. Ewing, R., et al., Growing Cooler: The Evidence on Urban Development and Climate Change. (Urban Land Institute, 2007),
postcarboncities.net/files/SGA_GrowingCooler9-18-07small.pdf (accessed June 10, 2013).
4. Frank, L., et al., Linking Objectively Measured Physical Activity with Objectively Measured Urban Form: Findings from SMARTRAQ, American Journal of
Preventive Medicine (February 2005): 117–1255.
5. Frank, L. et al., Obesity Relationships with Community Design, Physical Activity, and Time Spent in Cars, American Journal of Preventive Medicine 27(2) (August
2004): 87–96.
 81

STEP 2. IDENTIFY ELIGIBLE OPTIONS

Select the appropriate option(s) for the project.
·· Option 1 is for projects in dense locations. Spot-check density on an aerial map to determine whether
calculations can demonstrate credit achievement.
·· Option 2 is for projects that are close to a variety of amenities and services. If the main entrance is
within easy walking distance of diverse uses, investigate this option in addition to Option 1.
·· Projects except Healthcare may pursue both options; Healthcare projects are eligible for only a single
option.

Option 1. Surrounding Density

STEP 1. IDENTIFY BUILDING SITES AND BUILDABLE LAND WITHIN REQUIRED RADIUS OF
PROJECT SITE
On a map, plot a 1/4 mile (400-meter) radius around the project site from the project boundary.
·· Indicate building site types as residential, nonresidential, or mixed-use.
·· Indicate buildable land (see Getting Started, Previous Development). Do not include project buildings
or nonhabitable space, such as parking garages.

STEP 2. COLLECT INFORMATION ON DENSITY

For each building site location within the radius, determine whether sufficient information is available to
calculate residential and nonresidential building densities separately.
·· If the project team cannot determine the number of dwelling units in the surrounding land, use the
combined density calculation.

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

·· It might not be necessary to determine the total number of dwelling units or building floor area for all
properties within the radius. If the area features a few extremely dense buildings, start with these first
to see whether the threshold can be met without further calculations.
·· Provided that all land area within the radius is accounted for, project teams must collect only enough
density information to demonstrate that values in Table 1 are met or exceeded.

STEP 3. PERFORM SEPARATE RESIDENTIAL AND NONRESIDENTIAL DENSITY

CALCULATIONS, IF APPLICABLE
If the information is available, calculate the density for each building type within the 1/4-mile
(400-meter) radius. Designate each building and its associated land area as residential, nonresidential, or
mixed use (see Getting Started, Density).
·· Calculate total dwelling units per acre or hectare for all residential buildings.
·· Calculate the total floor-area ratio for all nonresidential buildings.
·· For mixed-use buildings within the radius, use Equations 1 and 2 to apply a weighted average of the
residential and nonresidential components.

EQUATION 1. Weighted average applied to residential land use for mixed-use projects

LT
Mixed-use residential land = % residential floor area × Total mixed-use land area (acres or hectares)

EQUATION 2. Weighted average applied to nonresidential land use for mixed-use projects

Mixed-use nonresidential land = % nonresidential floor area × Total mixed-use land area (acres or hectares)

Add the mixed-use buildings’ dwelling units, nonresidential floor area, residential land, and nonresidential
land to the values determined when calculating the densities of purely residential or nonresidential areas
(see Further Explanation, Example 1).
 82

STEP 4. CALCULATE COMBINED DENSITY, IF APPLICABLE

When separate residential or nonresidential density calculations cannot be performed for all areas, use
Equation 3 instead to determine the combined density within the prescribed radius.
·· Exclude parking garages.
·· For buildings with simple, rectilinear footprints, estimate floor area by measuring the building footprint
area and multiplying it by the number of floors.

EQUATION 3. Combined density

Combined density (ft2/acre or m2/hectare) = Total floor area (ft2 or m2) ÷ Total buildable land (acres or hectares)

STEP 5. DETERMINE POINTS EARNED

Refer to Table 1 in the credit requirements to determine points earned, based on the combined or separate
residential and nonresidential densities.
For separate calculations, if the point values for the residential and nonresidential densities are different, the
lowest performing land use is used to determine the number of points achieved.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Option 2. Diversity of Uses

STEP 1. DOCUMENT NEARBY USES

Survey the eligible existing uses in or near the project and classify the use types according to Appendix 1.
·· To be eligible, uses that are planned but not currently operating must be occupied within one year of the
date of the LEED project’s initial certificate of occupancy.
·· Use the credit requirements to determine the number and category of uses that contribute to credit
achievement. Note the restriction on the number of uses of each type (see Further Explanation,
Example 2).

Greater than 1/2 (800m) mile

walking route from
project site to diverse use Project site to bank:
5/8 mile (1 006m) -
DOES NOT QUALIFY
BANK X 1/2 mile (800m) or less
walking route from project site
to diverse use

PHARMACY
Project site to restaurant:
1/4 mile (400m) - DOES QUALIFY Project site to pharmacy:
LAUNDROMAT
RESTAURANT 7/16 mile, (704m) - DOES
QUALIFY
LT

Project site to supermarket:

3/8 mile (604m) - DOES QUALIFY PROJECT
SITE

SUPERMARKET
Project site to laundromat:
3/16 mile, (302m) - DOES QUALIFY

PARK X
Project site to park:
9/16 mile, (905m) - DOES NOT QUALIFY

SCALE:
1/8 mile 1/4 mile 1/2 mile
(200m) (400m) (800m)

Figure 1. Example walking routes to diverse uses

erved. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

 83

STEP 2. MAP WALKING ROUTES TO USES

On a map, label the eligible uses and plot walking routes from the project’s main entrance.
·· Measure the distance along each walking route to determine whether it meets the credit’s distance
requirements (see Figure 1 and LT Overview, Walking and Bicycling Distances).

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS

STEP 1. CHOOSE PROJECT LOCATION

Select a project location that is a previously developed site used for industrial or commercial purposes,
is adjacent to sites currently used for industrial or commercial purposes, or is close to transportation as
outlined in the credit criteria. Determine whether planned transportation will be applicable to the project.

STEP 2. SELECT ONE OR BOTH OPTIONS

Select the appropriate option(s) for the project.
·· Option 1 is for projects located on a previously developed site, with or without adjacency to previous
development.
·· Option 2 is for projects sited near transportation resources as identified in the credit criteria.

Option 1. Development and Adjacency

STEP 1. CONFIRM PREVIOUS DEVELOPMENT AND USE

Map the project site, indicating previous development. Calculate the percentage of the site that
is previously developed; to be considered a previously developed site, the land area must be

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

75% previously developed (see Getting Started, Previous Development).
Confirm that the site was previously used for commercial or industrial purposes.

STEP 2. DETERMINE ADJACENT SITE STATUS, IF APPLICABLE

For an additional point, confirm that the project site is located on an adjacent site (see Definitions).
Adjacent sites must be currently used for industrial or commercial purposes. If necessary, identify the
uses of adjacent parcels using zoning maps, parcel maps, or similar resources to confirm their status.

Option 2. Transportation Resources

STEP 1. MEASURE DRIVING DISTANCES

On a map, plot driving routes from the project to any of the applicable transportation resources
identified in the credit criteria. Indicate driving distances to each resource.

LT
STEP 2. CONFIRM COMPLETION OR CONSTRUCTION OF EXISTING AND PLANNED
TRANSPORTATION RESOURCES
Confirm that any transportation resource counted for Option 2 (such as a seaport, off-ramp to a highway,
or freight rail line) is completed or will be under construction within 24 months of project completion.
84

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Residential and nonresidential density calculations
A new commercial building is surrounded by a variety of residential, nonresidential, and mixed-use buildings within
a 1/4 mile (400-meter) radius of the project boundary.
The project developer does not know the size of many of the residential buildings and therefore chooses to do a
separate density calculation for residential and nonresidential densities. A survey of the area provides the following
information:

TABLE 2. Land area

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Building type All Types Residential Nonresidential Mixed-Use

Land Area
130 acres 60 acres 60 acres 10 acres
(53 hectares) (23 hectares) (23 hectares) (4 hectares)

The project determines that 80% of the total mixed-use building floor area is residential and the other 20% is
nonresidential, and allocates the land area proportionally according to Equations 1 and 2:
Mixed-use residential land = 80% x 10 acres = 8 acres

Mixed-use nonresidential land = 20% x 10 acres = 2 acres

TABLE 3. Adjusted land area

Building
Total Residential Nonresidential
Type

130 acres
Land Area
(53 hectares)
60 acres + 8 acres = 68 acres (28 hectares) 60 acres + 2 acres = 62 acres (25 hectares)

There are 680 dwelling units within 1/4 mile (400 meters) (including all residential units in mixed-use buildings).
The project team calculates density in dwelling units (DU) as follows:
Residential density = 680 DU / 68 acres = 10 DU / acre (24 DU / hectare)
LT

Nonresidential space (including all nonresidential buildings and nonresidential space in mixed-use buildings)
within the radius totals 1,600,000 square feet (148 645 square meters), and the total nonresidential land area is
2,700,720 square feet (250 905 square meters). The team calculates the nonresidential density in floor-area ratio
(FAR) as follows:
Nonresidential density = 1,600,000 / 2,700,720 = 0.59 FAR

(Nonresidential density = 148 645 / 250 905 = 0.59 FAR)

 85

TABLE 4. Summary of densities

Building Type Total Residential Nonresidential

Land Area 130 acres 68 acres 62 acres (25 hectares)

(53 hectares) (28 hectares) 2,700,720 ft2 (250 905 m2)

Dwelling Units 680 DU

Nonresidential
Building Space
1,600,000 ft2 (148 645 m2)

Density
10 DU/acre FAR 0.59
(24 DU/hectare)

Since the density within 1/4 mile (400 meters) is 10 dwelling units per acre (24 dwelling units per hectare) and the
nonresidential FAR is 0.59, the number of points the project earns based on either value would be 2 points (Table 1).

Example 2. Diversity of uses

A multistory apartment building is within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of eight uses in three categories
(Appendix 1).

TABLE 5. Summary of uses

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

Category

Service Food Retail Civic and Community Facilities Total

Use Type Restaurant Grocery Child Care Library

Number of Uses 3 2 1 2 8

Eligible Uses 2 2 1 2 7

Only two uses from any one type are eligible, however. Thus, the project team can count only two of the three
restaurants. This leaves seven allowable uses, so the project scores 1 point.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

LT
Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
86

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

All BD+C except Warehouses

Option 1 Option 2
and Distribution Centers

Area plan or map showing project site and location of existing residential and non-residential build-
X
ings within ¼-mile (400-meter) radius of project site

Description of the previous development on the site X

Area plan or map showing project site, location and type of each use, and walking routes X

Warehouses and Distribution Centers Option 1 Option 2

Area plan or map showing project site, its previous development, and (if applicable) industrial or
X
commercial properties adjacent to project site

Area plan or map showing project site, location and type of transportation resources, and driving
X
distance to each

If planned transportation resources are counted, verification that they will be funded and under
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

X
construction by date of certificate of occupancy and complete within two years of that date

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit High-Priority Site. Projects located in an infill site to meet Option 1 of the related credit may have better
access to nearby uses and may find it easier to meet the densities required for this credit. Projects located in a priority
designation site to meet Option 2 of the related credit may find high surrounding density, since the priority sites are
often in urban locations.

LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. High-density areas are more likely to be served by transit. Density levels
required to support transit services correspond to each density threshold in Option 1 of this credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Points have been redistributed such that the credit’s full value can be earned only if the requirements for both
Options 1 and 2 are met.
·· For all rating systems except Healthcare, there are now two thresholds for each option.
·· There are now thresholds for separate residential and nonresidential densities.
·· Specific requirements for warehouses and distribution centers have been added.
LT

·· The radius for building density calculation is now specified as 1/4 mile (400 meters) from the project boundary.
·· Proximity to the diverse uses is now based on walking distance instead of a radius.
·· Additional restrictions have been added to stipulate how diverse uses can be counted.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.
 87

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
adjacent site a site having at least a continuous 25% of its boundary bordering parcels that are previously developed
sites. Only consider bordering parcels, not intervening rights-of-way. Any fraction of the boundary that borders a
water body is excluded from the calculation.

buildable land the portion of the site where construction can occur, including land voluntarily set aside and not
constructed on. When used in density calculations, buildable land excludes public rights-of-way and land excluded
from development by codified law.

density a measure of the total building floor area or dwelling units on a parcel of land relative to the buildable land
of that parcel. Units for measuring density may differ according to credit requirements. Does not include structured
parking.

diverse use a distinct business or organization that provides goods or services intended to meet daily needs and is
publicly available. Automated facilities such as ATMs or vending machines are not included. For a full list, see the
Appendix.

floor-area ratio (FAR) the density of nonresidential land use, exclusive of parking, measured as the total
nonresidential building floor area divided by the total buildable land area available for nonresidential structures. For

SURROUNDING DENSITY AND DIVERSE USES

example, on a site with 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of buildable land area, an FAR of 1.0 would be 10,000
square feet (930 square meters) of building floor area. On the same site, an FAR of 1.5 would be 15,000 square feet
(1395 square meters), an FAR of 2.0 would be 20,000 square feet (1860 square meters), and an FAR of 0.5 would be
5,000 square feet (465 square meters).

freight village a cluster of freight-related businesses that include intermodal transfer operations. Freight villages
may offer logistics services, integrated distribution, warehousing capabilities, showrooms, and support services.
Such support services may include security, maintenance, mail, banking, customs and import management
assistance, cafeterias, restaurants, office space, conference rooms, hotels, and public or activity center
transportation.

highway a transportation thoroughfare intended for motor vehicles with limited access points, prohibitions on
human-powered vehicles, and higher speeds than local roads. A highway generally connects cities and towns.

intermodal facility a venue for the movement of goods in a single loading unit or road vehicle that uses successively
two or more modes of transportation without the need to handle the goods themselves

LT
previously developed altered by paving, construction, and/or land use that would typically have required regulatory
permitting to have been initiated (alterations may exist now or in the past). Land that is not previously developed
and landscapes altered by current or historical clearing or filling, agricultural or forestry use, or preserved natural
area use are considered undeveloped land. The date of previous development permit issuance constitutes the date of
previous development, but permit issuance in itself does not constitute previous development.

previously developed site a site that, prior to the project, consisted of at least 75% previously developed land
 LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

88
LT
 89

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Access to
Quality Transit
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–5 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1-5 points)
Core and Shell (1–6 points) Hospitality (1-5 points)
Schools (1–4 points) Retail (1-5 points)
Data Centers (1-5 points) Healthcare (1-2 points)

INTENT

To encourage development in locations shown to have multimodal

transportation choices or otherwise reduced motor vehicle use,

ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

thereby reducing greenhouse gas emissions, air pollution, and
other environmental and public health harms associated with motor
vehicle use.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY, RETAIL

LT
Locate any functional entry of the project within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance of existing or planned
bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid
transit stops, light or heavy rail stations, commuter rail stations, or commuter ferry terminals. The transit service at
those stops and stations in aggregate must meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations
may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are
complete within 24 months of that date.

Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met.

·· Qualifying transit routes must have paired route service (service in opposite directions).
·· For each qualifying transit route, only trips in one direction are counted towards the threshold.
·· If a qualifying transit route has multiple stops within the required walking distance, only trips from one stop
are counted towards the threshold.
90

TABLE 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry)

Points BD+C Points BD+C

Weekday Trips Weekend Trips
(except Core and Shell) (Core and Shell)

72 40 1 1

144 108 3 3

360 216 5 6

TABLE 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with commuter rail or ferry service only

Weekday Trips Weekend Trips Points (All Projects)

24 6 1

40 8 2

60 12 3
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one route provides more than 60% of the documented
levels may earn one additional point, up to the maximum number of points.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the
project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with
service at or above the prior level.

SCHOOLS

OPTION 1. TRANSIT-SERVED LOCATION (1–4 POINTS)

Locate any functional entry of the project within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance of existing or planned
bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid
transit stops, light or heavy rail stations, commuter rail stations or commuter ferry terminals. The transit service at
those stops and stations must meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations may count if
they are sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24
months of that date.
·· Qualifying transit routes must have paired route service (service in opposite directions).
·· For each qualifying transit route, only trips in one direction are counted towards the threshold.
·· If a qualifying transit route has multiple stops within the required walking distance, only trips from one stop
are counted towards the threshold.
LT

TABLE 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with multiple

transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry)

Weekday Trips Points

72 1

144 2

360 4

TABLE 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with commuter

rail or ferry service only

Weekday Trips Points

24 1

40 2

60 3
 91

Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one route provides more than 60% of the prescribed levels
may earn one additional point, up to the maximum number of points.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the
project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with
service at or above the prior level.

OR

OPTION 2. PEDESTRIAN ACCESS (1–4 POINTS)

Show that the project has an attendance boundary such that the specified percentages of students live within no
more than a 3/4-mile (1200-meter) walking distance (for grades 8 and below, or ages 14 and below), and 1 1/2-mile
(2400-meter) walking distance (for grades 9 and above or ages 15 and above) of a functional entry of a school
building. Points are awarded according to Table 3.

TABLE 3. Points for student population within walking distance

Percentage of Students Points

50% 1

60% 2

70% or more 4

In addition, locate the project on a site that allows pedestrian access to the site from all residential neighborhoods
that house the planned student population.

HEALTHCARE

Locate any functional entry of the project within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance of existing or planned

ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid
transit stops, light or heavy rail stations, commuter rail stations or commuter ferry terminals. The transit service at
those stops and stations in aggregate must meet the minimums listed in Tables 1 and 2. Planned stops and stations
may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are
complete within 24 months of that date.

Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met.

·· Qualifying transit routes must have paired route service (service in opposite directions).
·· For each qualifying transit route, only trips in one direction are counted towards the threshold.
·· If a qualifying transit route has multiple stops within the required walking distance, only trips from one stop
are counted towards the threshold.

LT
TABLE 1. Minimum daily transit service for projects with multiple transit types (bus, streetcar, rail, or ferry)

Weekday Trips Weekend Trips Points

72 40 1

144 108 2

TABLE 2. Minimum daily transit service for projects with commuter rail or ferry service only

Weekday Trips Weekend Trips Points

24 6 1

40 8 2
92

Projects served by two or more transit routes such that no one route provides more than 60% of the prescribed levels
may earn one additional point, up to the maximum number of points.
If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the
project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with
service at or above the prior level.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
LT
 93

BEHIND THE INTENT

Compact, walkable communities located near transit provide alternatives to driving that benefit the environment as
well as the health and well-being of the community. Access to transit is particularly beneficial for young people, the
elderly, and people who cannot afford to own cars.
Nearly all forms of public transit create fewer greenhouse gas emissions per passenger than single-occupancy
vehicles. Developments in areas near existing transit also consume less land than low-density, auto-oriented
growth, reducing conversion of farmland and open spaces into built development. Investment in transit-oriented
development, a proven strategy for revitalizing downtowns and declining urban neighborhoods, brings a city roughly
twice the economic benefit as would result from the same monetary investment in highways.1
Transit-oriented development locations support transit services by boosting ridership, while project occupants
enjoy access to public transportation. Projects that are within walking distance of multiple transit routes will further
encourage occupants and visitors to use public transportation. Schools should provide pedestrian and bicycle access
to transit or be sited in a neighborhood to reduce busing.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY, AND HEALTHCARE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY TRANSIT STOPS WITHIN 1/2 MILE (800 METERS)

On a site map, identify the location of any transit stops that appear to be within 1/2 mile (800 meters) of
the project.
·· Existing, temporarily rerouted, or planned stops may be eligible, provided they meet the credit

ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

requirements for each situation.
·· Projects counting planned or temporarily rerouted service must provide documentation from the
transit authority indicating that the criteria will be met for those stops.

STEP 2. CLASSIFY TRANSIT BASED ON VEHICLE TYPES

Identify the type of transit vehicles that serve each transit stop, which could include bus, streetcar, bus
rapid transit (BRT), rail, or ferry.
·· Classify the identified transit stops by transit vehicle type (e.g., bus, streetcar, rail).
·· Transit stops for bus, streetcar, or rideshare between the 1/4-mile (400-meter) and 1/2-mile
(800-meter) distance do not contribute to credit compliance.

STEP 3. CONFIRM WALKABILITY

Plot walking routes and distances from transit stops to the project building’s nearest functional entry

LT
(see Figure 1 and LT Overview, Walking and Bicycling Distance).
·· Confirm that each functional entry is located with the required walking distance of one or more transit
stops, according to the maximum distances outlined in the credit requirements.
·· Each point at which a transit vehicle stops to receive or discharge passengers is considered a separate
stop; this includes stops facing each other on opposite sides of a street. If a route has two separate
stops to serve each direction (e.g., on opposite sides of a street or on separated, one-way streets),
choose one stop from which to measure the distance to that route.
·· Any transit stop reaching any functional entry of the project within the specified distance can be
counted toward the credit. Therefore, different stops within walking distances of different functional
entries may count, provided they meet the credit requirements.

1. Newman, P., and J. Kenworthy, Sustainability and Cities: Overcoming Automobile Dependence (Washington, DC: Island Press, 1999).
94

3/16 mile (302m) walking

route from project site
(main entrance) to bus stop BUS
STOP

MAIN ENTRANCE

7/16 mile (704m) walking PROJECT SITE

route from project site
(main entrance) to rail
station
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

RAIL
STATION

SCALE:
1/4 mile (400 m)

BASED ON DETROIT SCHOOL OF ARTS, DETROIT PUBLIC SCHOOLS / PREPARED BY GREENSPACE LLC

Figure 1. Example walking distance map

STEP 4. COUNT AGGREGATE TRIPS AVAILABLE AT ALL QUALIFYING TRANSIT STOPS

A trip is considered the point at which passengers embark or disembark from a transit vehicle at a stop.
For a given route, count trips in only one direction.
For each transit stop within the required walking distance, review transit service schedules to determine
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations
the following: LT2
·· LTc5:
The number of transit vehicle trips on a weekday. If service Access
varies to Quality
by weekday, Transit
count the weekday with
the lowest number of trips.
·· The number of transit vehicle rides on a weekend. If weekend counts are different, use an average.
LT

·· Schools are not required to evaluate weekend transit service if students do not commute to schools on
weekend days (see Further Explanation).
·· An individual transit stop can be counted only once, regardless of the number of entrances within
walking distance of it.

STEP 5. CALCULATE POINTS EARNED

Refer to Table 1 (for multiple transit types) or Table 2 (for commuter rail or ferry only) of the credit
requirements to determine the number of points earned.
·· If weekday and weekend trips meet different point thresholds, then the lowest performing time period
(weekday or weekend) determines the number of points documented.
·· Schools should not count weekend transit service or apply the weighted average calculation unless
students commute to school on weekend days.
·· If there is sufficient diversity of transit service among multiple routes, projects may be eligible to earn 1
bonus point, as outlined in the credit requirements.
 95

SCHOOLS

STEP 1. SELECT ONE OPTION

Select one of the two options.
·· Option 1 is for projects whose students primarily live beyond walking distance.
·· Option 2 is appropriate for schools whose students live within walking distance, with an attendance
boundary clearly demarcated by the school authority.

STEP 2. PROVIDE PEDESTRIAN AND BICYCLE ACCESS TO TRANSIT

Design the site with pedestrian and bicycle paths that extend to at least the school property line to
ensure that students, faculty, and staff have safe, direct access to transit facilities (Option 1) or that
students can safely travel to and from their homes (Option 2).

Option 1. Transit-Served Location

Follow the steps listed above for the other BD+C rating systems.

Option 2. Pedestrian Access

STEP 1. DELINEATE APPLICABLE WALKSHED BOUNDARY

Create a walkshed boundary using mapping software (GIS or CAD) to indicate the areas within a
3/4-mile (1200-meter) walk (for young students, as defined in the credit requirements) or a
1 1/2-mile (2400-meter) walk (for older students).

STEP 2. DETERMINE SHARE OF STUDENTS WITHIN WALKSHED BOUNDARY

ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

Compare the walkshed boundary with the attendance boundary map for the school. The attendance
boundary map or accompanying analysis generally indicates where concentrations of students live
(or are anticipated to live), without indicating precise addresses. Using this information, estimate the
required percentage of students who live within the particular walkshed boundary.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

LT
CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

EXAMPLE
The project, a 75-unit apartment building pursuing BD+C: New Construction, has two functional building entries. A
light rail stop is within a 1/4-mile (400-meter) walking distance of one of the functional building entries. A commuter
rail station is within a 1/2-mile (800-meter) walking distance of the other functional building entry. This project
meets the walkability requirement.
Both the light rail station and the commuter rail station have service in both directions. To determine the number
of trips, the project team counts service in one direction and summarizes the service available at the eligible stops
(Table 4).
96

TABLE 4. Example transit service summary

Weekday Weekend Day A Weekend Day B Weekend Average

Light rail 80 60 54 57

Commuter rail 25 10 10 10

Total 105 67

Point threshold 1 1

Because it has both light rail and commuter rail service, the project earns 1 point (Table 1).
The project team determines that the light rail provides more than 60% of the accessible transit (Table 5). The
bonus point for having no service that exceeds 60% is therefore unavailable.

TABLE 5. Route diversity

Weekday Trips Average Weekend Trips Total

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Light rail 80 57 137 (80% of trips)

Commuter rail 25 10 32 (20% of trips)

Total service 105 67 172

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

For government projects with security restrictions (e.g., military), on-site mass transit can be used to document
credit compliance. Transit service outside secured entrances may contribute to credit compliance, provided it is
within the required walking distance (based on mode type) of a stop along the on-site mass transit service.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
LT
 97

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Schools Schools
Documentation All Projects
Option 1 Option 2

Map showing project, project boundary, transit stop locations, and walking
X X
routes and distances to those stops

Timetables or other service-level documentation X X

If applicable, documentation of planned transit or restoration of temporarily

X X
rerouted service

Map showing walkshed boundary X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit Bicycle Facilities. For schools, bicycle lanes designed to comply with the related credit may be extended
to transit facility locations to meet the dedicated lane requirement for this credit.

ACCESS TO QUALITY TRANSIT

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
·· Transit service frequency is now included in the credit requirements.
·· Access is now measured by walking distance to functional building entries.
·· The credit now addresses both weekday and weekend availability.
·· Point thresholds are now based on the number of transit trips available within the required walking distance.
·· Modes of transportation have been expanded to include ferry, streetcar, bus rapid transit, and rideshare.
·· For Schools projects, Option 2 Pedestrian Access now includes a tiered point system based on the percentage
of students within the walkable attendance area.
·· Private shuttles cannot be used to comply with the requirement.

LT
REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Double the highest transit service point threshold (except for Schools projects using Option 2).
98

DEFINITIONS
attendance boundary the limits used by school districts to determine what school students attend based on where
they live

bus rapid transit an enhanced bus system that operates on exclusive bus lanes or other transit rights-of-way. The
system is designed to combine the flexibility of buses with the efficiency of rail.

functional entry a building opening designed to be used by pedestrians and open during regular business hours. It
does not include any door exclusively designated as an emergency exit, or a garage door not designed as a pedestrian
entrance.

light rail transit service using two- or three-car trains in a right-of-way that is often separated from other traffic
modes. Spacing between stations tends to be 1/2 mile (800 meters) or more, and maximum operating speeds are
typically 40–55 mph (65–90 kmh). Light-rail corridors typically extend 10 or more miles (16 kilometers).

rideshare a transit service in which individuals travel together in a passenger car or small van that seats at least four
people. It can include human-powered conveyances, which must accommodate at least two people. It must include
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

an enclosed passenger seating area, fixed route service, fixed fare structure, regular operation, and the ability to pick
up multiple riders.

streetcar a transit service with small, individual rail cars. Spacing between stations is uniformly short and ranges
from every block to 1/4 mile (400 meters), and operating speeds are primarily 10–30 mph (15–50 kmh). Streetcar
routes typically extend 2–5 miles (3-8 kilometers).

walking distance the distance that a pedestrian must travel between origins and destinations without obstruction,
in a safe and comfortable environment on a continuous network of sidewalks, all weather-surface footpaths,
crosswalks, or equivalent pedestrian facilities. The walking distance must be drawn from an entrance that is
accessible to all building users.
LT
 99

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Bicycle Facilities
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Retail (1 point)
Data Centers (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To promote bicycling and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle

distance traveled. To improve public health by encouraging utilitarian
and recreational physical activity.

BICYCLE FACILITIES
REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY

Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-meter) walking
distance or bicycling distance from a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following:

LT
·· at least 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1);
·· a school or employment center, if the project total floor area is 50% or more residential; or
·· a bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy rail station, commuter rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy
and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date.
100

Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms

Case 1. Commercial or Institutional Projects
Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors, but no fewer than four storage spaces per
building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of all regular building occupants, but no fewer than four
storage spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants and one ad-
ditional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter.

Case 2. Residential Projects

Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors but no fewer than four storage spaces per
building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 30% of all regular building occupants, but no less than one
storage space per residentialunit.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Case 3. Mixed-Use Projects

Meet the Case 1 and Case 2 storage requirements for the nonresidential and residential portions of the project,
respectively.

FOR ALL PROJECTS

Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-term
bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject
facilities cannot also serve project occupants.
Core and Shell projects should refer to Appendix 2, Default Occupancy Counts, for occupancy count
requirements and guidance.

SCHOOLS

Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-meter)
walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following:
LT

·· at least 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1); or

·· a bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy rail station, commuter rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
Provide dedicated bicycle lanes that extend at least to the end of the school property with no barriers
(e.g., fences) on school property.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy
and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date.

Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms

Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of all regular building occupants (excluding students grade 3 and
younger), but no fewer than four storage spaces per building.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants (excluding
students) and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants (excluding students) thereafter.
 101

Long-term storage spaces must be easily accessible to occupants and be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking
distance of any main entrance.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject
facilities cannot also serve project occupants.

RETAIL

Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-meter)
walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following:
·· at least 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1); or
·· a bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy rail station, commuter rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy
and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date.

Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms

Provide at least two short-term bicycle storage spaces for every 5,000 square feet (465 square meters), but no fewer
than two storage spaces per building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular building occupants, but no fewer than two storage
spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants and one
additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter.
Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-
term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double-counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject
facilities cannot also serve project occupants.
Provide a bicycle maintenance program for employees or bicycle route assistance for employees and customers.
Route assistance must be provided in a manner easily accessible to both employees and customers.

BICYCLE FACILITIES
For projects that are part of a multitenant complex only: If bicycle storage spaces have been provided in the
complex in which the project is located, determine the number of spaces that may be attributed to the project by
dividing the project’s floor area by the total floor area of the development (buildings only) and multiplying the
percentage result by the total number of spaces. If this number does not meet the credit requirement, the project
must provide additional bicycle storage.

HEALTHCARE

LT
Bicycle Network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a 200-yard (180-meter)
walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that connects to at least one of the following:
·· at least 10 diverse uses (see Appendix 1); or
·· a bus rapid transit stop, light or heavy rail station, commuter rail station, or ferry terminal.
All destinations must be within a 3-mile (4800-meter) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the certificate of occupancy
and are scheduled for completion within one year of that date.
102

Bicycle Storage and Shower Rooms

Case 1. Commercial or Institutional Projects
Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors, but no fewer than four storage spaces per
building.
Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of regular building occupants (excluding patients), but no
fewer than four storage spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces.
Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants (ex-
cluding patients) and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter.

Case 2. Residential Projects

Provide secure, enclosed bicycle storage for at least 30% of all regular building occupants (excluding patients)
measured at peak periods, but no less than one storage space per residential unit.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

FOR ALL PROJECTS

Short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. Long-term
bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry.
Bicycle storage capacity may not be double counted: storage that is fully allocated to the occupants of nonproject
facilities cannot also serve project occupants.
LT
 103

BEHIND THE INTENT

Bicycling offers many individual and global benefits. For every mile (1 600 meters) pedaled rather than driven,
nearly 1 pound (450 grams) of carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions is avoided.1 People who shift from car to bicycle use
for short trips extend their lives by an estimated three to 14 months, gaining such health benefits as a lower risk of
cardiovascular disease.2 Planners and developers whose investments support bicycling as a transportation option
often win political and popular support.3
To promote bicycle-friendly design, this credit rewards two things: the provision of long- and short-term
bicycle storage, and access to a “bicycle network” (paths, trails, designated bike lanes, and slow-speed roadways).
Short-term and long-term bicycle storage capacity is considered separately because visitors and regular occupants
have different bicycle storage needs. For residential spaces, long-term storage must be provided in an area outside
individual dwelling units, because having to carry a bicycle into a living space is inconvenient and discourages bicycle
use. Finally, being adjacent to a bicycle network means that building occupants can more easily bicycle to and from
the building. The route destinations emphasize the role of bicycles for travel to and from home, work, and errands,
as well as to other transportation modes such as transit.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY BICYCLE NETWORK AND ELIGIBLE DESTINATIONS

Obtain or create a map of bicycle networks in the area surrounding potential project locations.
·· Survey and map schools, employment centers, transit stops, and other eligible uses (Appendix 1).
·· A “bicycle network” is defined to include, in any combination, demarcated bike lanes, bike trails, and
streets with a maximum speed limit of 25 mph (40 kph). Both bike lanes and bike trails must meet the
credit’s width requirements.
·· For differences in eligible destinations for specific project types, see Further Explanation, Rating
System Variations.

STEP 2. SELECT BIKE-FRIENDLY PROJECT LOCATION

BICYCLE FACILITIES
Locate the project close to an existing or planned bicycle network that meets credit requirements for
uses within the specified distance from the project boundary (see Figure 1 and LT Overview, Walking and
Bicycling Distance).
·· The bicycle route connecting the project to the qualifying uses may include any combination of
trails, bike lanes, and slow-speed streets, provided the total distance traveled is less than 3 miles
(5 kilometers).
·· For planned bicycle trails or lanes, confirm the schedule for funding and completion.

STEP 3. GATHER OCCUPANT COUNT INFORMATION

LT
Determine the number of expected regular occupants in the building (see Further Explanation,
Rating System Variations, and Getting Started, Occupancy, on which building users to include in
calculations).
·· For all rating systems except Schools and Retail, also determine the number of expected peak visitors.
·· For mixed-use projects in all rating systems except Schools, Retail, and Healthcare, identify the project
spaces as residential versus commercial or institutional and total the number of regular building
occupants in each space type.
Projects with commercial-institutional space or residential space totaling less than 10% of the total build-
ing floor area may follow the requirements of the predominant use, at the discretion of the project team.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Light-Duty Automotive Technology, Carbon Dioxide Emissions, and Fuel Economy Trends: 1975 through 2012,
epa.gov/OMSWWW/fetrends.htm#summary (accessed June 10, 2013).
2. de Hartog, J.J., H. Boogaard, H. Nijland, and G. Hoek, Do the Health Benefits of Cycling Outweigh the Risks? Environmental Health Perspectives 118(8) (2010).
3. Royal, D., and D. Miller-Steiger, National Survey of Bicyclist and Pedestrian Attitudes and Behavior (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 2008),
nhtsa.gov/DOT/NHTSA/Traffic%20Injury%20Control/.../810972.pdf (accessed June 10, 2013).
 104

2 3/4 mile (4km) biking

route from project site (main
entrance) to rail station

STREET WITH SPEED

LIMIT UNDER 25 MPH BUS
BANK STOP

HARDWARE
PHARMACY

PROJECT SITE
DAY CARE
RESTAURANT

BEAUTY SCHOOL
ON-STREET BIKE LANE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

SUPERMARKET

DEDICATED
BIKE LANE

DENTAL

OFF-STREET
RAIL BIKE TRAIL MEDICAL
STATION

SCALE:
1/2 mile 1 mile
(800m) (1600m)

BASED ON DETROIT SCHOOL OF ARTS, DETROIT PUBLIC SCHOOLS / PREPARED BY GREENSPACE LLC

Figure 1. Example bicycle network

STEP 4. DETERMINE NUMBER OF BICYCLE STORAGE SPACES REQUIRED

Calculate the number of required short-term and long-term bicycle spaces, using the following
equations. Ensure that the project design includes the minimum bicycle storage spaces specified
in the credit requirements (see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations).
N
LT

USGBCEQUATION 1. Short-term bicycle storage

LEED Guide Illustrations LT4
Short-term bicycle storage = Peak visitors × 0.025 LTc6: Bicycle Facilities_2

EQUATION 2. Commercial or institutional long-term bicycle storage (including Retail)

Long-term bicycle storage = Regular building occupants × 0.05

EQUATION 3. Residential long-term bicycle storage

Long-term bicycle storage = (Regular building occupants) x 0.30

OR (# of dwelling units), whichever is greater
 105

EQUATION 4. Retail short-term bicycle storage

Short-term bicycle storage = (2 × [Building floor area (ft2)/ 5000])

OR
Short-term bicycle storage = (2 × [Building floor area (m2)/ 465])

·· For all rating systems except Schools and Retail, calculate the number of required short-term and
long-term bicycle spaces.
°° For commercial or institutional spaces in the project, follow Equations 1 and 2. At least four short-
term storage spaces and four long-term spaces are required.
°° For residential spaces in the project, follow Equations 1 and 3. At least four short-term storage
spaces are required per building, and at least one long-term storage space is required per dwelling
unit.
·· For Schools, calculate the number of required long-term bicycle spaces by following Equation 2 above.
Short-term bicycle storage is not required.
·· For Retail, calculate the number of required long-term (Equation 2) and short-term (Equation 4)
bicycle spaces. Short-term bicycle storage is based on total building floor area.
The following conditions apply to all calculations for short- and long-term bicycle storage:
·· Results must be rounded up to the nearest whole number.
·· Storage spaces must be devoted to the project pursuing LEED certification and cannot be double-
counted. For example, a project team may not count the storage of a nearby building toward its own
storage requirements if that storage is already used by the other building’s occupants. In addition,
if any non-LEED project occupants have access to the storage, then either sufficient spaces must
be provided for all occupants with access to amenities or the storage must be designated for the
occupants of the LEED project only.
·· For mixed-use buildings, identify nonresidential and residential portions of the building and meet
the applicable storage requirements for each space type based on prorated occupancy (see Further
Explanation, Example, Mixed-Use Building).

STEP 5. DETERMINE NUMBER OF SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES REQUIRED

For all rating systems except Schools, use Equation 5 to determine the number of showers with changing
facilities required and incorporate these facilities into the project design (see Further Explanation, Rating

BICYCLE FACILITIES
System Variations).

EQUATION 5. Shower facilities

If regular building occupants ≤ 100, Shower facilities = 1

Regular building occupants - 100

If regular building occupants > 100, Shower facilities = 1 +
150

LT
·· Results must be rounded up to the next whole number. For projects with 100 or fewer regular building
occupants, only one shower is required.
·· Showers are required for commercial or institutional spaces only. For residential spaces, no additional
showers are required beyond those provided inside dwelling units.
·· Projects with hotel guests may exclude these occupants from shower calculations.
·· If space for shower and changing facilities is limited, free access to on-site shower facilities or health
club shower facilities within the LEED project boundary may be provided to all occupants in lieu of in-
house facilities. Health club or shower facilities must be accessible to occupants without their having
to go outdoors and available during the project’s hours of operation.
·· For mixed-use buildings, identify the nonresidential portions of the building and meet the applicable
shower and changing facility requirements for this space type based on prorated occupancy (see
Further Explanation, Example, Mixed-Use Building).
106

FUNCTIONAL
ENTRY

SHORT-TERM
BICYCLE STORAGE

t
fee
40 2m)
(1

60 m)
(1 8
fee
t
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

MAIN ENTRANCE

LONG-TERM BICYCLE
STORAGE

Figure 2. Example bicycle storage locations

STEP 6. INSTALL BICYCLE STORAGE

Locate bicycle storage to meet the credit requirements for the project’s rating system. Both short-term
and long-term storage facilities are more likely to be used if they are located in a well-lit, safe, and
accessible area (see Further Explanation, Selecting Bicycle Storage).
·· For all rating systems other than Schools, locate short-term and long-term storage within 100 feet
(30 meters) of main and functional entrances, respectively.
·· For Schools, locate long-term storage within 100 feet (30 meters) of a main entry to the project.
Short-term storage is not required.

SCHOOLS

STEP 7. ENSURE SAFE ACCESS TO SCHOOL BUILDINGS

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations LT3
LT

Provide on-site dedicated bicycle lanes that safely connect the edge of school property to school
buildings. LTc6: Bicycle Facilities (1)

RETAIL

STEP 7. INSTITUTE PROGRAMS TO SUPPORT BICYCLING USE

Implement a bicycle maintenance program for retail store employees or provide route assistance for
both employees and customers. Consider the best way to promote the bicycling program to create and
sustain participation.
·· Examples of maintenance programs include coupons for yearly bicycle tune-ups for those who ride
to work or on-site supplies for basic self-repairs (e.g., tire pumps, patch kits, basic tools).
·· Examples of route assistance include a map identifying bicycle routes to the project site, posted
online and in a location on the property that is easily accessible to employees and customers.
 107

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

SELECTING BICYCLE STORAGE

Bicycle racks should reflect best practices in design and installation. For example, the rack should support the bicycle
in at least two places, to keep it from falling over, and allow the owner to lock both the bicycle frame and one or
both wheels with a U-lock. The rack must be securely anchored and resistant to cutting, rusting, bending, and other
deformation.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Large retail building
A 30,000-square-foot (2 800 square-meter) retail building project pursuing Retail has met the bicycle network
requirement by being within 3 miles’ (5 kilometers’) bicycling distance of 10 diverse uses on a bicycle network.
The building will have 31 full-time employees plus 18 part-time employees who each work 20 hours per week. To
determine the number of bicycle storage and shower and changing facilities required, the team calculates regular
building occupants for the building (see Getting Started, Occupancy):

(18 part-time employees × 4 hours per day)

31 full-time employees + = 40 regular building occupants
8 hours per day

The team uses Equation 4 to determine the number of short-term bicycle storage spaces:
2 × [30,000 ft2 / 5,000] = 12 spaces

Equation 2 yields the number of long-term bicycle storage spaces:

40 regular building occupants × 0.05 = 2 spaces

Because the project has fewer than 100 regular building occupants, only one shower is required.

BICYCLE FACILITIES
Example 2. Residential apartment building
An 80-unit apartment building has 200 residents, no employees, and 150 peak visitors. The building meets the bicycle
network requirement by being adjacent to an existing 2.5-mile (4-kilometer) bicycle network that connects to a school
and a jobs center. The team uses Equation 1 to determine number of short-term bicycle storage facilities required:

150 visitors × 0.025 = 3.75, rounded to 4 spaces

Equation 3 determines the number of long-term bicycle storage spaces:

LT
200 residents × 0.30 = 60 spaces

That result is less than one space for each of the 80 units (80 spaces), however. The credit requires that the project use
the greater of the two results, so the team installs 80 long-term storage spaces in addition to the four short-term storage
spaces.

Example 3. Mixed-use building with residential, commercial, and retail

A 500,000-square-foot (46 500-square-meter) mixed-use building pursuing BD+C: New Construction includes retail,
office, and residential space. The retail component consists of 50,000 square feet (4 650 square meters) and has 10
employees and 30 peak visitors. The office component has 92 regular building occupants with 10 peak visitors. The
residential component includes 15 units and has 20 residents with 15 peak visitors. The building meets the bicycle
network requirement by being adjacent to an existing 4-mile (6-kilometer) bicycle network that connects to 15 diverse
uses within 3 miles’ (5 kilometers’) bicycling distance of the project boundary.
108

The project team uses Equation 5 to determine the required number of shower facilities for the nonresidential
portion of the building. Following this equation, at least one shower is needed for up to 100 regular building
occupants, a second shower is needed from 100 to 250 regular building occupants, and so on. The aggregate
nonresidential space in this building has a total of 102 regular building occupants, so two showers are required.
These showers are placed so that they are accessible to both retail and office occupants.

The team then uses Equations 1 and 2 to determine short- and long-term bicycle storage spaces for the
nonresidential portion of the building:
30 + 10 peak visitors = 40 peak visitors × 0.025 = 1 short-term space

102 regular building occupants × 0.05 = 5.1, rounded to 6 long-term spaces

Equations 1 and 3 determine the number of short- and long-term bicycle storage spaces for the residential portion
of the building:
15 peak visitors × 0.025 = 0.375, rounded to 1 short-term space

20 residents × 0.30 = 6 long-term spaces

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

That result is less than one space for each of the 15 units (15 spaces), however. The credit requires that the project use
the greater of the two results, so the team installs 15 long-term storage spaces.
The number of short-term bicycle storage totals two spaces, which is less than the minimum four required for
this rating system. Four short-term bicycle storage spaces are installed 80 feet (24 meters) from the main building
entrance. Long-term bicycle storage totals 21 spaces and is placed in the parking garage within 100 feet (30 meters)
of an entrance to the building.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

New Construction, Core and Shell, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality
At least four short-term and four long-term spaces are required.

Schools
At least four long-term spaces are required; short-term bicycle storage is not required. Regular building occupant
calculations for long-term bicycle storage include staff and all full-time students in grade 4 and above (or a local
equivalent class year for students aged 10 and older).

Regular building occupant calculations for shower facilities do not include students.

Employment centers and other schools are not qualifying bicycle network destinations.

Bicycle lanes from the school property entrance to school building entrances are required.
LT

Retail
At least two short-term and two long-term spaces are required. Short-term spaces are based on building floor area,
per Equation 4.

Regular building occupant calculations include employees only.

Employment centers are not a qualifying bicycle network destination.

A bicycle maintenance or route assistance program is required.

 109

Healthcare
At least four short-term and four long-term spaces are required.

Residential spaces with nonbicycling occupants (e.g., assisted living facilities) may exclude a specified number of
occupants from the bicycle storage requirement calculation, provided the team demonstrates that these occupants
are physically incapable of bicycling.

Employment centers and schools are not qualifying bicycle network destinations.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Measure distances from the farthest building.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

New Construction,
Core and Shell, Data Centers,
Documentation Schools Retail
Warehouses and Distribution
Centers, Hospitality, Healthcare

Vicinity map showing bicycle network and route and distance

along network to eligible destination(s). For planned
X X X
bicycle networks, capital improvement plan demonstrating
completion within one year of certificate of occupancy.

Site plan showing bicycle storage locations X X

Site plan showing bicycle storage location with walking route

X
to main entrance and bicycling route to school boundary

BICYCLE FACILITIES
Calculations for storage and shower facilities X X X

Description of programs to support bicycle use X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses. A project in close proximity to 10 diverse uses under the related
credit may apply those uses to the requirements for this credit, provided they are located on a bicycle network that

LT
meets this credit’s requirements.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Requirements for proximity to a bicycle network have been added.
·· Separate short- and long-term bicycle storage requirements have been created.
·· The shower room calculation method has changed.
110

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
bicycling distance the distance that a bicyclist must travel between origins and destinations, the entirety of which
must be on a bicycle network

bicycle network a continuous network consisting of any combination of the following:

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· off-street bicycle paths or trails at least 8 feet (2.5 meters) wide for a two-way path and at least 5 feet
(1.5 meters) wide for a one-way path
·· physically designated on-street bicycle lanes at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide
·· designed for a target speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or less

bus rapid transit an enhanced bus system that operates on exclusive bus lanes or other transit rights-of-way. The
system is designed to combine the flexibility of buses with the efficiency of rail.

diverse use a distinct business or organization that provides goods or services intended to meet daily needs and is
publicly available. Automated facilities such as ATMs or vending machines are not included. For a full list, see the
Appendix.

employment center a nonresidential area of at least 5 acres (2 hectares) with a job density of at least 50 employees
per net acre (at least 125 employees per hectare net)

functional entry a building opening designed to be used by pedestrians and open during regular business hours. It
does not include any door exclusively designated as an emergency exit, or a garage door not designed as a pedestrian
entrance.

light rail transit service using two- or three-car trains in a right-of-way that is often separated from other traffic
modes. Spacing between stations tends to be 1/2 mile (800 meters) or more, and maximum operating speeds are
typically 40–55 mph (65–90 kmh). Light-rail corridors typically extend 10 or more miles (16 kilometers).

long-term bicycle storage bicycle parking that is easily accessible to residents and employees and covered to
LT

protect bicycles from rain and snow

short-term bicycle storage non-enclosed bicycle parking typically used by visitors for a period of two hours or less

walking distance the distance that a pedestrian must travel between origins and destinations without obstruction,
in a safe and comfortable environment on a continuous network of sidewalks, all weather-surface footpaths,
crosswalks, or equivalent pedestrian facilities. The walking distance must be drawn from an entrance that is
accessible to all building users.
 111

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Reduced Parking
Footprint
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Retail (1 point)
Data Centers (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To minimize the environmental harms associated with parking

facilities, including automobile dependence, land consumption, and

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

rainwater runoff.

REQUIREMENTS

Do not exceed the minimum local code requirements for parking capacity.
Provide parking capacity that is a percentage reduction below the base ratios recommended by the Parking
Consultants Council, as shown in the Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Transportation Planning Handbook,
3rd edition, Tables 18-2 through 18-4.

LT
Case 1. Baseline Location
Projects that have not earned points under LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit Access to
Quality Transit must achieve a 20% reduction from the base ratios.

Case 2. Dense and/or Transit-Served Location

Projects earning 1 or more points under either LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit Access
to Quality Transit must achieve a 40% reduction from the base ratios.
112

FOR ALL PROJECTS

The credit calculations must include all existing and new off-street parking spaces that are leased or owned by the
project, including parking that is outside the project boundary but is used by the project. On-street parking in public
rights-of-way is excluded from these calculations.
For projects that use pooled parking, calculate compliance using the project’s share of the pooled parking.
Provide preferred parking for carpools for 5% of the total parking spaces after reductions are made from the base
ratios. Preferred parking is not required if no off-street parking is provided.
Mixed-use projects should determine the percentage reduction by first aggregating the parking amount of each
use (as specified by the base ratios) and then determining the percentage reduction from the aggregated parking
amount.
Do not count parking spaces for fleet and inventory vehicles unless these vehicles are regularly used by
employees for commuting as well as business purposes.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
LT
 113

BEHIND THE INTENT

Inefficient parking systems result in increased congestion and carbon emissions, lost productivity and economic
opportunities, and unnecessary paved areas. For example, the United States has roughly two to three times more
parking spaces than people. Parking lots’ concrete and asphalt cover approximately 2,000 to 6,000 square miles
(5 180 to 15 000 square kilometers)1,2,3 comprising about 35% of the surface area in the average U.S. residential
neighborhood and 50% to 70% of the average nonresidential area.4
The impervious surface of most parking spaces has environmental and financial downsides. Runoff from
impervious surfaces can overwhelm municipal stormwater systems and flushes contaminants into waterways.
Dark-colored parking lot surfaces trap heat, raising ambient air temperatures, which in turn necessitate more energy
for cooling. Parking is also expensive, costing landowners and developers an average of about $15,000 per space in
the U.S.5
Parking demand can be reduced by locating projects in high-density, mixed-use areas or in places well served
by transit, or by instituting transportation demand management strategies, such as providing preferred parking for
carpools. To complement the use of these alternative modes or vehicle-sharing arrangements, vehicular parking
itself can be limited by designing fewer spaces. This credit uses the Transportation Planning Handbook base ratios
as a baseline against which reductions in parking supply can be compared. When combined with a requirement to
provide no more parking than is necessary by code, this baseline ensures that meaningful reductions are achieved.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS

Identify the minimum amount of parking required by local code. Confirm that the project’s maximum
allowable parking is less than or equal to minimum code requirements.

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

·· In some cases, local codes do not establish minimum thresholds. Projects located in areas without a
code minimum automatically meet this requirement.
·· Projects with no associated off-street parking automatically achieve credit compliance; no calculations
or preferred parking spaces are required.

STEP 2. CALCULATE BASE RATIOS AND BASELINE PARKING CAPACITY

Based on the project’s space use type(s) and size, determine the parking capacity base ratio using the
Transportation Planning Handbook (see Further Explanation, Base Ratios).
For projects with multiple space types, calculate and separately track the base ratio for each use. Use
the equations provided in the reference table to determine the baseline parking capacity for each space
type, and compute the total project baseline capacity.

STEP 3. IDENTIFY APPROPRIATE CASE

LT
Case 2 is appropriate for projects that expect to earn at least 1 point in either LT Credit Surrounding
Density and Diverse Uses or LT Credit Access to Quality Transportation. Otherwise, use Case 1.

1. Chester, Mikhail, Arpad Horvath, and Samer Madanat, Parking Infrastructure: Energy, Emissions, and Automobile Life-Cycle Environmental Accounting,
Environmental Research Letters 5(3) (2010), dx.doi.org/10.1088/1748-9326/5/3/034001 (accessed June 10, 2013).
2. Ben-Joseph, Eran, ReThinking a Lot: The Design and Culture of Parking (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2012).
3. Delucchi, Mark, Annualized Social Cost of Motor-Vehicle Use in the U.S., 1990–1991, vol. 6 (Institute of Transport Studies, 1997), Table 6-A.1,
its.ucdavis.edu/?page_id=10063&pub_id=571 (accessed June 10, 2013).
4. Akbari, Hashem, L. Shea Rose, and Haider Taha, Analyzing the Land Cover of an Urban Environment Using High-Resolution Orthophotos, Landscape and
Urban Planning 63(1) (2003): 1–14, sciencedirect.com/science/journal/01692046 (accessed June 10, 2013).
5. Victoria Transportation Policy Institute, Transportation Cost and Benefit Analysis II: Parking Costs (2012), Table 5.4.3-1, vtpi.org/tca/tca0504.pdf (accessed June
10, 2013).
114

STEP 4. ESTIMATE PARKING DEMAND

Estimate how many cars are likely to drive to and from the project, and determine whether this number is
less than the local code minimum and the capacity calculated from the base ratios.
The Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Trip Generation Handbook provides estimates for the number
of car trips generated by building type.

STEP 5. DEVELOP AND IMPLEMENT STRATEGIES TO REDUCE PARKING DEMAND

Design the project to reduce parking demand. Consider both new and existing parking. Based on esti-
mated demand, if significant reductions are likely to be necessary, consider implementing multiple strate-
gies for a cumulative effect.
·· Choose a project site that maximizes the opportunities for building occupants to travel via transit,
walking, bicycle, and other modes that reduce off-street parking demand.
·· Integrate transportation demand management (TDM) strategies to reduce parking demand (see
Further Explanation, TDM Strategies).
Incorporate the selected strategies into the project design.
·· Projects that do not provide additional parking must meet the credit requirements for the existing
parking.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· If the project’s parking capacity falls below the local code minimum design thresholds, work with the
municipality to secure zoning variances. Referencing the requirements of this LEED credit may prove
helpful in discussion with local governments.

STEP 6. DETERMINE PROJECT’S REDUCED PARKING CAPACITY

Compute the project’s total parking capacity, including both new and existing spaces, and ensure that it
does not exceed the local code minimum.
·· Use Equation 1 to determine whether the project complies with the credit requirements for the
appropriate case, based on the designed capacity and the baseline capacity determined using the
base ratio method for each space type (see Further Explanation, Example).
·· If the project type does not fit any base ratio category or if the tenant is not yet known, select the best
approximation and provide a narrative justifying this selection.

EQUATION 1. Percentage of parking capacity reduction

Parking reduction = (Total baseline capacity – Total provided capacity) / Total baseline capacity × 100

·· Include pooled parking used by the project building (as a proportionate share of total pooled parking;
see LT Overview, Total Vehicle Parking Capacity) and any parking used by the project both inside and
outside the project boundary, as indicated in the credit requirements.
·· Exclude fleet and inventory vehicles and parking in public rights-of-way, as indicated in the credit
requirements.

STEP 7. PROVIDE CARPOOL PARKING

LT

Based on the project’s reduced parking capacity design, reserve at least 5% as preferred parking for car-
pools (see LT Overview, Preferred Parking).
 115

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

BASE RATIOS

TABLE 1. Base ratios for parking spaces, by building type

Use Size or condition Parking spaces
Arena 0.33/seat
Assisted living 0.35/DU
Boarding house, B&B, convent, and other 1/unit or room plus 2 for owner and staff
sleeping rooms
Church 0.4/seat
College, university School population: students, faculty and staff 0.4/school population
Condo, townhouse Use Owned Apartment ratios
Consumer services (including banks) 4.6/1,000 ft2 (5.0/100 m2 )
Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel < 25,000 ft2 (2 325 m2 ) 30/1,000 ft2 (32.29/100 m2 )
but exceeding 50 ft2 per guest room
(4.65 m2 per guest room)
Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel 25,000 ft2 to 50,000 ft2 Scaled
but exceeding 50 ft2 per guest room (2 325 m2 to 4 650 m2 ) If x is ft2 , 30-[10 x (x-25,000)/25,000]
(4.65 m2 per guest room) spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 per room, 32.3-[10.8 x
(y-2325)/2325] spaces per 100 m2 GLA

Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel 50,000 ft2 to 100,000 ft2 ( Scaled
but exceeding 50 ft2 per guest room 4 650 to 9 300 m2 ) If x is ft2 , 20-(10 x (x-50,000)/50,000)

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

(4.65 m2 per guest room) spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 per room, 10.8-[10.8 x
(y-4650)/4650] spaces per 100 m2 GLA

Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel 100,000 to 250,000 ft2 (9 300 to 23 225 m2 ) Scaled
but exceeding 50 ft2 per guest room If x is ft2 , 10-(4 x (x-100,000)/150,000)
(4.65 m2 per guest room) spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 per room, 10.8-[4.3 x (y-9300)/13
925] spaces per 100 m2 GLA

Convention centers not in hotel, or in hotel More than 250,000 ft2 (23 225 m2 ) 6/1,000 ft2 (6.5/100 m2 )
but exceeding 50 ft per guest room
(4.65 m per guest room)
Data processing, telemarketing 6.0/1,000 ft2 (6.5/100 m2 )
Day care 0.3/licensed student

LT
Dry cleaners Use General and Convenience Retail ratio
Elderly housing 0.5/DU
Elementary school Higher of 0.2/auditorium or gym seat, or
0.25/student
Fast food With or without drive-through 15/1,000 ft2 (16/100 m2 )
Free-standing discount super store 5.5/1,000 ft2 (5.92/100 m2 ), including
outdoor sales areas
General and convenience retail Not in shopping center 2.75/1,000 ft2 (2.96/100 m2 )
General light industrial, industrial park, and 1.85/1,000 ft2 (1.99/100 m2 )
manufacturing
Government office building Use Office Building radio if general office
only; otherwise, parking study prepared for
complex
Health, fitness club 7/1,000 ft2 (7.5/100 m2 )
116

TABLE 1 (CONTINUED). Base ratios for parking spaces, by building type

Use Size or condition Parking spaces
Heavy, hard goods, furniture store, 2.5/1,000 ft2 (2.7/100 m2 )
carpet store
High school Higher of 0.3/auditorium or gym seat, or
0.3/student
High-turnover restaurant No bar 15/1,000 ft2 (16/100 m2 )
High-turnover restaurant With bar 20/1,000 ft2 (21.5/100 m2 )
Hospital 1.1/employee
Hotel, motel 1.25/room. Add 10/1,000 ft2 (10.8/100 m2 ) for
lounge/restaurant. Add conference/banquet
at following rates:
1. < 20 ft2 /room (1.86 m2 /room): none
2. 20 ft2 /room (1.86 m2 /room) to 50 ft2 /room
(4.65 m2 /room): Scaled
If x is ft2 per room, 30-[10 x (x-20)/30]
spaces per 1,000 ft2 GLA conference
banquet.
If y is m2 per room, 32.3-[10.8 x (y-1.86)/2.79]
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

spaces per 100 m2 GLA conference banquet

3. > 50 ft2 /room (4.65 m2 /room): 20/1,000
ft2 (21.5/100 m2 )

Junior or community college School population: students, faculty and staff 0.25/school population

Live theater 0.4/seat

Medical, dental office building Not on hospital campus 4.5/1,000 ft2 (4.8/100 m2 )

Medical, dental office building On hospital campus 4/1,000 ft2 (4.3/100 m2 )

Mini-warehouse 1.75/100 units

Movie theater with matinee 1 screen 0.5/seat

Movie theater with matinee 2 to 5 screens 0.33/seat

Movie theater with matinee 5 to 10 screens 0.3/seat

Movie theater with matinee More than 10 screens 0.27/seat

Nightclub 19/1,000 ft2 (20.5/100 m2 )

Nursing home 0.5/bed

Office building < 25,000 ft (2 325 m )

2 2
3.8/1,000 ft2 (4.1/100 m2)

Office building 25,000 to 100,000 ft2 (2 325 to 9 300 m2 ) Scaled

If x is ft2 , 3.8-[0.4 x (x-25,000)/75,000]
spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 , 4.1-[0.43 x (y-2325)/6975] spaces
LT

per 100 m2

Office building 100,000 ft2 (9 300 m2 ) 3.4/1,000 ft2 (3.67/100 m2 )

Office building 100,000 to 500,000 ft2 (9 300 to Scaled

46 500 m2 ) If x is ft2 : 3.4-[0.6 x (x-100,000)/400,000]
spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 : 3.67-[0.67 x (y-9300)/37 200]
spaces per 100 m2

Office building More than 500,000 ft2 2.8/1,000 ft2 (3.0/100 m2 )

(more than 46 500 m2 )
Other public assembly 0.25/person in permitted capacity where not
seated, or 0.3/seat where seated
Owned accessory dwelling unit 1/Accessory DU. Den must be counted as
bedroom if it has closet. Ratios include 0.15
space per unit for visitors.
 117

TABLE 1 (CONTINUED). Base ratios for parking spaces, by building type

Use Size or condition Parking spaces
Owned apartment Efficiency 1/DU for efficiency units. Den must be
counted as bedroom if it has closet. Ratios
include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Owned apartment With bedroom 1.75/DU for first bedroom plus 0.25 space
for each additional bedroom. Den must be
counted as bedroom if it has closet. Ratios
include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Pharmacy With or without drive-through Use General and Convenience Retail ratio

Pro baseball stadium 0.35/seat

Pro football stadium 0.31/seat

Quality restaurant 20/1,000 ft2 (21.5/100 m2 )

Rental apartment Efficiency 1/DU for efficiency units. Den must be

counted as bedroom if it has closet. Ratios
include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Rental apartment With bedroom 1.5/DU for first bedroom plus 0.25 space
for each additional bedroom. Den must be
counted as bedroom if it has closet. Ratios
include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Rental apartment In college or university housing district 1/DU for efficiency and 1 bedroom units plus
0.5 space for each additional bedroom. Den
must be counted as bedroom if it has closet.
Ratios include 0.15 space per unit for visitors.
Shopping center, not more than 10% GLA in < 400,000 ft2 (37 200 m2 ) GLA 4/1,000 ft2 (4.3/100 m2 )
nonretail uses
Shopping center, not more than 10% GLA in 400,000 to 600,000 ft2 Scaled:
nonretail uses (37 200 m2 to 55 750 m2 ) GLA If x is ft2 , 4+[0.5 x (x-400,000)/200,000]
spaces per 1,000 ft2
If y is m2 , 4.3+[0.5 x (y-37 200)/18 550]

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

spaces per 100 m2

Shopping center, not more than 10% GLA in More than 600,000 ft2 (55 750 m2 ) GLA 4.5/1,000 ft2 (4.8/100 m2 )
nonretail uses
Shopping center, more than 10% GLA in Shared parking analysis
other uses
Single-family detached residential < 2000 ft2 (186 m2 ) 1/DU

Single-family detached residential 2,000 to 3,000 ft2 (186 to 279 m2 ) 2/DU

Single-family detached residential More than 3,000 ft2 (280 m2 ) 3/DU

Specialty super stores, home improvement 4.5/1,000 ft2 (4.8/100 m2 ), including outdoor
sales areas

LT
Supermarket, convenience market 6.75/1,000 ft2 (7.3/100 m2 )

Video rental Use General and Convenience Retail ratio

Warehousing 0.67/1,000 ft2 (0.72/100 m2 )

DU = dwelling unit
GLA = gross leasable area

Adapted from PCC Recommended Zoning Ordinance Provisions (2006), by Parking Consultants Council (PCC),
National Parking Association, published by Institute of Transportation Engineers, Transportation Planning
Handbook, 3rd edition, Tables 18-2 through 18-4. Use authorized by the Institute of Transportation Engineers,1627 I
Street, NW, Suite 600, Washington, DC 20006 www.ite.org
118

TRANSPORTATION DEMAND MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES

Examples of transportation demand management strategies include the following.
·· Telecommuting. Allow employees to work remotely on certain days.
·· Shuttles. Provide shuttle service between transit stops and/or commercial and residential centers. Although
shuttles can help reduce parking demand, they cannot be used to earn LT Credit Access to Quality Transit.
·· Shared parking between uses. Size the parking supply so that surrounding uses with different peak
occupancies can all use the parking. For example, a commercial office with daytime peak occupancy can share
its parking supply with an adjacent movie theater with evening peak occupancy. Doing so will ensure that the
parking is maximized throughout the day.
·· Residential units rented or sold separately from parking. Conventionally, a dwelling unit’s rent or for-sale
price includes one or more parking spaces. Instead, rent or sell parking separately so that occupants internalize
the cost of parking and those without automobiles can opt not to have parking spaces.
·· Transit subsidy. Provide building occupants with a subsidy to help pay for transit trips.
·· Compressed workweek schedule. Structure employees’ schedules such that some work longer days in
exchange for not working on a particular day every one to three weeks.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EXAMPLE
A 50-unit rental student housing project with one-bedroom apartments is adjacent to a university and within
walking distance of a high-frequency light rail line, earning 1 point under LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. The
project narrowly missed achieving LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses because of a lack of nearby
neighborhood uses, but it still must comply with Case 2, since it achieved LT Credit Access to Quality Transit.
Table 1 indicates a baseline of one parking space per dwelling unit for rental apartments in a university housing
district, creating a baseline of 50 parking spaces for the project. To comply with the Case 2 requirements, the project
needs to provide no more than 30 spaces (a 40% reduction from 50 baseline spaces).
The project reduces overall parking demand by advertising for student residents without cars, providing secure
bicycle storage, leasing parking spaces separately from dwelling units; the team has already chosen a location within
walking distance to transit and the university that most of its residents attend.
The project secures 15 spaces on one level of an adjacent, off-site, multilevel parking garage that can be leased
and used by project occupants, and provides no other parking. This parking reduction of 70% earns the credit under
Case 2.
The project also ensures that one of the 15 spaces is preferred parking for carpool use, exceeding the required 5%
minimum.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Military Installations
Parking for ranking officials may be separated from regular parking, but the proportion of preferred parking for
carpools must be applied to each pool of parking.
LT

Separated Employee or Visitor Parking

Projects with separate parking areas for visitors, employees, or students must apply the proportion of preferred
parking for carpools to each pool of parking.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. All the parking located within the LEED project boundary
must be included in the calculations. Submit a site plan that illustrates a reasonable distribution of preferred parking
spaces for the buildings or spaces seeking LEED certification.
 119

Campus Approach
Eligible. All the parking located within the LEED campus boundary must be included in the calculations (including
parking associated with projects that are not pursuing LEED certification). Submit a site plan that illustrates a
reasonable distribution of preferred parking spaces for the projects seeking LEED certification.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All Projects

Site plan indicating parking areas and preferred parking spaces X

Calculations demonstrating threshold achievement X

Drawings or photographs of signage or pavement markings indicating reserved status X

of preferred parking areas

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses. Projects that earn the related credit are required to further
reduce parking to achieve this credit.

LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. Projects that earn the related credit are required to further reduce parking to

REDUCED PARKING FOOTPRINT

achieve this credit.

LT Credit Green Vehicles. Reducing the total amount of parking in the project by achieving this credit will result
in fewer required total spaces allocated to green vehicles under the related credit. Project teams may choose to
aggregate or separately reserve the preferred parking for carpools and green vehicles. If aggregated, the total supply
must meet the thresholds for both carpools and green vehicles and be closest to a functional entry (exclusive of
spaces designated for disabled persons). If separated, both carpool and green vehicle parking should be in preferred
locations (e.g., on either side of a functional entry such that both are closest, excluding parking for the disabled). If
this arrangement is not feasible, preferred parking for one vehicle type may be located between the other preferred
parking and the functional entry.

LT
CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
·· The requirements are now the same for nonresidential and residential, and for New Construction and Core
and Shell.
·· A baseline reference to a third-party standard (ITE Transportation Planning Handbook, 3rd edition, Tables
18-2 through 18-4) has been added.
·· The credit is no longer awarded for providing no new parking. If there is existing parking that will continue to
be used by the project, it must also comply with credit requirements.
120

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Institute of Transportation Engineers, Transportation Planning Handbook, 3rd edition, Tables 18-2 through
18-4: ite.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Case 1. Achieve a 60% parking reduction from the base ratios.

Case 2. Achieve a 80% parking reduction from the base ratios.

DEFINITIONS
preferred parking the parking spots closest to the main entrance of a building (exclusive of spaces designated
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

for handicapped persons). For employee parking, it refers to the spots that are closest to the entrance used by
employees.
LT
 121

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION CREDIT

Green Vehicles
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Retail (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)
Data Centers (1 point) Schools (1 point)
Hospitality (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)

INTENT

To reduce pollution by promoting alternatives to conventionally fueled

automobiles.

REQUIREMENTS

GREEN VEHICLES
NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, RETAIL, HEALTHCARE

Designate 5% of all parking spaces used by the project as preferred parking for green vehicles. Clearly identify and
enforce for sole use by green vehicles. Distribute preferred parking spaces proportionally among various parking
sections (e.g. between short-term and long-term spaces).
Green vehicles must achieve a minimum green score of 45 on the American Council for an Energy Efficient
Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
A discounted parking rate of at least 20% for green vehicles is an acceptable substitute for preferred parking

LT
spaces. The discounted rate must be publicly posted at the entrance of the parking area and permanently available to
every qualifying vehicle.
In addition to preferred parking for green vehicles, meet one of the following two options for alternative-fuel
fueling stations:

OPTION 1. ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING

Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in 2% of all parking spaces used by the project. Clearly identify
and reserve these spaces for the sole use by plug-in electric vehicles. EVSE parking spaces must be provided in
addition to preferred parking spaces for green vehicles.
122

The EVSE must:

·· Provide a Level 2 charging capacity (208 – 240 volts) or greater.
·· Comply with the relevant regional or local standard for electrical connectors, such as SAE Surface Vehicle
Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler or IEC 62196 of the
International Electrotechnical Commission for projects outside the U.S.
·· Be networked or internet addressable and be capable of participating in a demand-response program or time-
of-use pricing to encourage off-peak charging.

OR

OPTION 2. LIQUID, GAS, OR BATTERY FACILITIES

Install liquid or gas alternative fuel fueling facilities or a battery switching station capable of refueling a number of
vehicles per day equal to at least 2% of all parking spaces.

SCHOOLS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

OPTION 1. GREEN PASSENGER VEHICLES

Designate 5% of all parking spaces used by the project as preferred parking for green vehicles. Clearly identify and
enforce for sole use by green vehicles. Distribute preferred parking spaces proportionally among various parking
sections (e.g. between short-term and long-term spaces).
Green vehicles must achieve a minimum green score of 45 on the American Council for an Energy Efficient
Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.)
A discounted parking rate of at least 20% for green vehicles is an acceptable substitute for preferred parking
spaces. The discounted rate must be publicly posted at the entrance of the parking area and permanently available to
every qualifying vehicle.
In addition to preferred parking for green vehicles, meet one of the following two options for alternative-fuel
fueling stations:

Path 1. Electric Vehicle Charging

Install electrical vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) in 2% of all parking spaces used by the project. Clearly identify
and reserve these spaces for the sole use by plug-in electric vehicles. EVSE parking spaces must be provided in
addition to preferred parking spaces for green vehicles.
The EVSE must:
·· Provide a Level 2 charging capacity (208 – 240 volts) or greater.
·· Comply with the relevant regional or local standard for electrical connectors, such as SAE Surface Vehicle
Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler or IEC 62196 of the
International Electrotechnical Commission for projects outside the U.S.
·· Be networked or internet addressable and be capable of participating in a demand-response program or time-
LT

of-use pricing to encourage off-peak charging.

OR

Path 2. Liquid, gas, or battery facilities

Install liquid or gas alternative fuel fueling facilities or a battery switching station capable of refueling a number of
vehicles per day equal to at least 2% of all parking spaces.

OR

OPTION 2. GREEN BUSES AND SCHOOL-OWNED VEHICLES

Develop and implement a plan for every bus serving the school to meet the following emissions standards within
seven years of the building certificate of occupancy:
·· nitrogen oxide (NOx) emissions of 0.50 grams or less per brake horsepower-hour; and
·· particulate matter emissions of 0.01 grams or less per brake horsepower-hour.
 123

Emission standards must be met for each bus and not by an average of the entire fleet serving the school.
Develop and implement a plan for 100% of all other (non-bus) vehicles owned or leased to serve the school to be
green vehicles. Green vehicles must achieve a minimum green score of 45 on the American Council for
an Energy Efficient Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide (or local equivalent for projects outside
the U.S).

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS

OPTION 1. ALTERNATIVE-FUEL VEHICLES (1 POINT)

Provide an on-site fleet with at least one yard tractor that is powered by electricity, propane, or natural gas. Provide
on-site charging or refueling stations for the vehicles. Liquid or gas refueling stations must be separately ventilated
or located outdoors.

OR

OPTION 2. REDUCED TRUCK IDLING (1 POINT)

Provide an electrical connection for at least 50% of all dock door locations to limit truck idling at the dock.

GREEN VEHICLES
LT
124

BEHIND THE INTENT

In 2010, transportation accounted for 27% of the total U.S. greenhouse gas emissions from combustion of
petroleum-based fuels. More than half of those emissions came from passenger vehicles and light-duty trucks.1
Globally, greenhouse gas emissions from transportation increased 17.5% from 1990 to 2010.2
Beyond climate change effects, conventional-fuel vehicles pose public health risks. Diesel exhaust from idling
buses releases fine particulates, which can be especially harmful for children.3 Idling delivery trucks at warehouse
loading docks and diesel-powered yard tractors used to move cargo containers4 emit nitrogen oxides (NOx), sulfur
oxides (SOx), and particulate matter (PM).
This credit addresses vehicle emissions by rewarding local and regional infrastructure that incentivizes the
purchase of green vehicles. The provision of preferred parking spaces closest to a building’s entrance rewards
building users who drive green vehicles. To qualify for these spaces, green vehicles must meet third-party standards
that comprehensively measure both fuel efficiency and emissions. Projects must also provide infrastructure (e.g.,
electric charging stations) for alternative-fuel vehicles. Electric vehicle supply equipment must have effective
charging speeds, align with local or regional standards, and take advantage of future improvements to the utility grid.
School projects may address employees’ and visitors’ vehicle use, as in other rating systems, or have the option of
meeting emissions and green vehicle standards for their bus and non-bus vehicle fleets. Warehouses and distribution
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

center projects may purchase alternative-fuel yard tractors to move trailers around the facility or provide electrical
connections at loading dock doors, a strategy that allows truck drivers to operate in-cab comfort settings and
appliances by plugging into grid power rather than by idling their engines unnecessarily.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, RETAIL, HEALTHCARE

STEP 1. DETERMINE TOTAL VEHICLE PARKING CAPACITY

Total vehicle parking spaces must include all new and existing off-street parking spaces leased or owned
by the project, including any parking allocated to the project that is outside the project boundary
(see LT Overview, Total Vehicle Parking Capacity).

STEP 2. CALCULATE NUMBER OF PREFERRED PARKING SPACES AND ALTERNATIVE-FUEL

FUELING STATIONS
Use Equation 1 to determine the number of preferred spaces required for green vehicles. Use Equation
2 for the number of fueling stations required. Projects must provide both preferred parking spaces and
alternative-fuel fueling stations. In lieu of preferred parking, projects may provide discounted parking
rates for all green vehicles (see Further Explanation, Discounted Parking Rates).
LT

EQUATION 1. Required number of preferred parking spaces

Preferred spaces = Total parking spaces × .05

EQUATION 2. Required number of fueling stations

Fueling stations = Total parking spaces × .02

STEP 3. INCORPORATE PREFERRED PARKING INTO DESIGN

On the site plan, identify the location of preferred parking spaces for green vehicles (see LT Overview,
Preferred Parking, and Further Explanation, Examples).

1. epa.gov/climatechange/ghgemissions/sources/transportation.html (accessed June 10, 2013).

2. cta.ornl.gov/data/chapter11.shtml, Table 11.7 (accessed June 10, 2013).
3. epa.gov/cleanschoolbus/antiidling.htm (accessed June 10, 2013).
4. cleanairactionplan.org/civica/filebank/blobdload.asp?BlobID=2516 (accessed June 10, 2013).
 125

STEP 4. SELECT ALTERNATIVE-FUEL FUELING STATIONS

Consider legal, technical, and safety issues associated with each fuel type. Projects selecting electric
vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) must follow Option 1. Projects selecting all other alternative fuel types
must follow Option 2.
·· Survey future building occupants to determine which alternative fuel is in highest demand. Regional
availability of a given fuel type may be a factor.
·· Compare the equipment associated with alternative fuels. The cost and complexity of designing and
installing the fueling station vary with the type of fuel.
·· Learn about the safety and maintenance issues associated with alternative fuels. Building personnel
need to be trained to operate and maintain the fueling stations.
·· Review local codes and standards for fueling facilities to determine whether other requirements must
be met.

STEP 5. CONFIRM COMPLIANCE OF ANY ELECTRIC VEHICLE SUPPLY EQUIPMENT

For Option 1, select EVSE that meets the credit requirements for charge capability, standard compliance,
and network features; all three must be documented for credit compliance. This information can often be
found on the manufacturer’s website.
·· Only Level 2 and 3 chargers qualify for this credit.
·· The SAE J1772 standard is common among U.S.-based EVSE manufacturers. IEC 62196 of the
International Electrotechnical Commission is an equivalent standard that is common outside the U.S.
·· The EVSE must have a Wi-Fi, ethernet, cellular modem, or other Internet communication mechanism
that allows the device to send usage data to a server. This enables participation in demand response
programs (e.g., SmartGrid) or time-of-use pricing. Specifications must demonstrate, at minimum, that
the product is IP-addressable.
·· A direct connection between the EVSE and on-site renewable energy is acceptable in lieu of network
capability if the EVSE will draw solely from that energy source. Documentation must be provided.

STEP 6. INSTALL ALTERNATIVE-FUEL FUELING STATIONS

On the site plan, identify the location of each alternative-fuel fueling station (see Further Explanation,
Examples).
·· For Option 1, EVSE for plug-in electric vehicles or battery switching stations may be located in any
area of the parking facility. Parking spaces reserved for EVSE may not contribute toward preferred
parking spaces for green vehicles.
·· For Option 2, liquid or gas fueling stations should be located outdoors if possible. If a liquid or gas
fueling station cannot be located outdoors, provide dedicated exhaust connected directly to the

GREEN VEHICLES
outdoors.

STEP 7. ENSURE EFFECTIVE USE OF PARKING SPACES

Provide clear and permanently installed signage or pavement markings to reserve the preferred parking
spaces for green vehicles only (see Further Explanation, Signage for Green Vehicles). In addition, clearly
indicate the type of fueling station provided. For projects pursuing Option 1, provide signage that the
parking space is reserved for plug-in electric vehicles only.
Projects providing discounted parking in lieu of preferred parking must communicate the discounted rate

LT
to users (see Further Explanation, Discounted Parking Rates).
Work with the property manager or parking management to review the policy for green vehicle parking
and alternative-fuel facilities and ensure that the correct vehicles are using these spaces. Enforcement
strategies will vary by project but should include consequences for violations by building users.

SCHOOLS
Determine which option the project will pursue.
Option 1 is best for schools whose vehicle fleets are not within reasonable control of the school manage-
ment, and for those without vehicle fleets.
Option 2 is best for schools that are served by an outdated aged vehicle fleet and if the school manage-
ment, project team, or owner has reasonable control over the vehicle fleet serving the building.
126

Option 1. Green Passenger Vehicles

Follow Steps 1 through 6 above; all references to Option 1 and Option 2 equate to Path 1 and Path 2 for
Schools, respectively.

Option 2. Green Buses and School-Owned Vehicles

STEP 1. INVENTORY SCHOOL FLEET

Work with the school’s fleet manager to identify the make, model, and year of each bus and each non-
bus vehicle that serves the project building. All vehicles that serve the project building must be included
in the inventory, including privately owned and leased vehicles.
·· If the project building is part of a campus with a shared fleet, the inventory must include all buses in
the campus bus fleet.
·· If the project building has a dedicated bus fleet, inventory only the buses in the dedicated fleet.

STEP 2. EVALUATE BUS FLEET EMISSIONS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Review manufacturers’ data for each vehicle to find the NOx and PM emissions values and identify each
bus that exceeds the emissions in the credit requirements.
·· If manufacturers’ data are not available or do not include the emissions information, estimate NOx and
PM emissions based on the vehicles’ engine specifications and model years, using Table 1.
·· Project teams outside the U.S. should use a local equivalent table of estimated emissions by model
year, if one exists, or refer to manufacturers’ data. Include the data source and any supporting
calculations with the submittal documentation.

TABLE 1. Estimated emissions, by vehicle model year

Model Year NOX (g/bhp-hr) PM (g/bhp-hr)

1974–1978 10.7 0.60

1979–1984 10.7 0.60

1985–1987 10.7 0.60

1988–1989 10.7 0.60

1990 6.0 0.60

1991–1993 5.0 0.25

1994–1997 5.0 0.10

1998–2003 4.0 0.10

LT

2004–2006 4.0 0.10

2007 ON 0.2 0.01

Source: EPA’s historical exhaust emissions standards for heavy-duty highway compression-ignition engines and urban buses:
epa.gov/otaq/standards/heavy-duty/hdci-exhaust.htm.

STEP 3. EVALUATE VEHICLES OTHER THAN BUSES

Evaluate each vehicle to determine whether it qualifies as a green vehicle, per the rating system
definition.

STEP 4. IDENTIFY PHASE-OUT AND RETROFIT STRATEGIES

If the fleet includes buses or other vehicles that do not meet credit requirements, determine whether to
retrofit or phase out these vehicles to meet the emissions standards.
·· Buses should be retrofitted using emissions control strategies approved by a relevant third party, such
as the California Air Resources Board or a local equivalent. Confirm that each bus will meet credit
emissions criteria by applying the emissions control strategies to the manufacturer’s data or Table 1
estimates.
 127

·· Non-bus vehicles that do not meet green vehicle criteria must be phased out.

STEP 5. DOCUMENT PLANS TO ADDRESS ALL NONCOMPLIANT VEHICLES

Develop a plan to retrofit or phase out all noncompliant vehicles within seven years of the school’s
certificate of occupancy date. Include the following in the plan:
·· Emissions evaluation of each vehicle in the current bus fleet serving the school
·· Phase-out strategy or retrofit products for each bus that does not meet the emissions criteria
·· Make, model and year of each non-bus vehicle, and whether it meets the green vehicle criteria
·· Phase-out strategy for each non-bus vehicle that is not a green vehicle, including types of replacement
vehicles
·· Timeline and responsible parties for each stage of the plan
·· For projects in which bus service is contracted, the policy governing scheduled contact bidding or
unscheduled changes to the bus company contract
·· Signed commitment from the school (or other entity with control over the fleet) to implement the plan
If bus or non-bus vehicle fleets used by the school already meet the credit requirements, supply the
emissions evaluations for buses as well as make, model, and year information for non-bus vehicles.

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS

Option 1. Alternative-Fuel Vehicles

STEP 1. SELECT ALTERNATIVE-FUEL YARD TRACTOR

Purchase at least one yard tractor to be used at the project site facilities that is powered by electricity,
propane, or natural gas.
·· Before selecting a model, compare the environmental and economic costs and benefits of each fuel
type. Regional availability of a given fuel type may also be a factor.
·· Review local codes and standards for the type of fueling station that would be required.
·· Compare the equipment associated with alternative fuels. The cost and complexity of designing and
installing the fueling station vary with the type of fuel.
·· Learn about the safety and maintenance issues associated with alternative fuels. Building personnel
need to be trained to operate and maintain the fueling stations.

GREEN VEHICLES
·· If the project owner already owns an alternative-fuel yard tractor that will be dedicated to the facility,
it is not necessary to purchase a new yard tractor to comply with the credit requirements.

STEP 2. PROVIDE ALTERNATIVE-FUEL FUELING STATION TO SUPPORT YARD TRACTOR(S)

·· Work with the owner, civil engineer, mechanical engineer, and other team members to select an
appropriate location for the alternative-fuel fueling station(s).
·· Liquid or gas fueling stations should be located outdoors if possible. If a liquid or gas fueling station
cannot be located outdoors, provide dedicated exhaust connected directly to the outdoors.

LT
Option 2. Reduced Truck Idling
Install electrical connectors for at least 50% of loading dock doors. Indicate the locations on an electrical
plan.
·· When identifying the placement of electrical connectors, consider such factors as the frequency with
which the door is used, the type of product carried at the door, the length of time trucks are idling,
and project design elements that may require a reduction in engine idling (e.g., proximity to places of
congregation or building entrances).
·· Electrical connectors must allow drivers to shut down truck engines while maintaining use of in-cab
heating, air-conditioning, communications, and entertainment systems.
·· Although demonstrating this compatibility is not required, vehicles supplying the project will need
adapters to take advantage of the electrical connectors. Contact rebate programs such as the
Shorepower Truck Electrification Project in the U.S. (the-step-project.org) for potential assistance in
subsidizing or supplying adapter kits.
128

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

DISCOUNTED PARKING RATES

Discounted parking rates for green vehicles may be used to achieve this credit in lieu of preferred parking if the
following requirements are met:
·· The discount must be at least 20%.
·· The discount policy must be publicly posted at the entrance to the parking area and any other locations that
may serve to inform building users of the discount. The discount must also be included in building policy
documents and occupant advertisements.
·· Projects cannot limit the discounted parking passes available; the discounted parking rate must be available to
all building users who drive green vehicles.
·· The discounted rate must be made available to all building users in perpetuity after the project’s completion.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

This approach is best applied when a large share of the parking capacity is devoted to monthly or yearly parking
passes and car owners can receive the discounted rate when buying a pass. The application should ask for the car
make and model so that the building operator can verify its compliance with the LEED definition of a green vehicle.
Ensure that building personnel responsible for collecting parking fees are aware of the discount policy and the
vehicles that are eligible.

SIGNAGE FOR GREEN VEHICLES

Language used on reserved parking signage must reflect the spirit of the American Council for an Energy Efficient
Economy (ACEEE) Green Book methodology (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
In addition to this basic language, project teams are encouraged to share the definition of a green vehicle per the
ACEEE Green Book (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). This information may be included with the
preferred parking signage, near the preferred parking area, at the parking attendant booth or building entrance, or in
educational material readily available to building users.
If a local green vehicle code or standard requires specific signage, this alternative language may be used, provided
the standard has been approved by USGBC as equivalent to the ACEEE Green Book (see International Tips ).

Figure 1. Example signage for green vehicle reserved parking

GREEN GREEN
VEHICLES VEHICLES
ONLY ONLY
PERMIT PERMIT
REQUIRED REQUIRED
LT
 129

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Location of preferred parking and alternative-fuel fueling stations (single lot)
A new construction project building has a total parking capacity of 335 spaces. The project calculates 5% of the total
to determine the number of preferred parking spaces:
335 total spaces × .05 = 16.75 preferred parking spaces

The result is rounded up to 17 preferred parking spaces. The project team decides to install EVSE in parking spaces
reserved for plug-in electric vehicles and calculates the required spaces:

335 total spaces × .02 = 6.7 plug-in spaces

The team must provide seven plug-in spaces. Figure 2 shows the arrangement of preferred parking spaces and
alternative-fuel fueling spaces.

Figure 2. Example of preferred parking locations

Main entrance

GREEN VEHICLES
LT

Total parking capacity = 335 spaces

Minimum preferred spaces required = 17 (5% of total)
Minimum EVSE spaces required = 7 (2% of total)
130

Example 2. Location of preferred parking in separated parking areas

A new construction project is a mixed-use building with a ground-level grocery store and office floors above. The
parking area includes 108 spaces with separate parking areas for long- and short-term parking. Short-term parking,
intended for the grocery store customers, numbers 36 spaces; long-term parking for office occupants numbers 72
spaces. The project team calculates the required preferred parking spaces as 5% of the total:
108 total spaces × .05 = 5.4 preferred parking spaces

The result is rounded up to six preferred parking spaces. The project team must proportionally distribute these six
preferred parking spaces between the short- and long-term parking areas. Because short-term parking accounts for
one-third and long-term for two-thirds of the total parking, two short-term spaces (one-third of six) and four long-
term spaces (two-thirds of six) are required. Figure 3 illustrates the result.
In addition, the project is providing natural gas fueling facilities. To determine the number of alternative-fuel
vehicles to accommodate per day, the team makes the following calculation:
108 total spaces × .02 = 2.16 vehicles to be supported by refueling facilities

The result is rounded up. Thus the refueling facilities must have sufficient volume and rate to support three vehicles
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

per day.

Figure 3. Example of proportionate distribution of preferred parking spaces

Main entrance
LT

Total parking capacity = 108 spaces

Short term parking = 36 spaces
Long term parking = 72 spaces
Short term preferred spaces required = 2 spaces (5% of short term total)
Long term preferred spaces required = 4 spaces (5% of long term total)
 131

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Military Installations
Parking for ranking officials may be separated from regular parking, but the proportion of preferred parking for
carpools must be applied to each pool of parking.

Separated Employee or Visitor Parking

Projects with separate parking areas for visitors, employees, or students must apply the proportion of preferred
parking for carpools to each pool of parking.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Local equivalent standards to the American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy’s (ACEEE) Green Book must
comprehensively address vehicle fuel economy and vehicle emissions ratings, including particulate matter (PM),
nitrogen oxides (NOx), hydrocarbons, and carbon monoxide (CO). Complete and submit a side-by-side comparison
of the selected local standard and ACEEE methodologies.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
New Construction, Core and Shell, Data Centers, Hospitality, Retail, Healthcare, Schools
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. All the parking located within the LEED project boundary
must be included in the calculations. Submit a site plan that illustrates a reasonable distribution of preferred parking
spaces for the buildings or spaces seeking LEED certification.

Warehouses and Distribution Centers

Option 1. All buildings in the group may be documented as one.
Option 2. Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
New Construction, Core and Shell, Data Centers, Hospitality, Retail, Healthcare, Schools
Eligible. Submit a site plan that illustrates a reasonable distribution of preferred parking spaces for the projects
seeking LEED certification.

GREEN VEHICLES
Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Option 1. Eligible.
Option 2. Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

LT
132

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

New Construction, Core and

Shell, Data Centers, Hospitality, Schools
Documentation Retail, Healthcare

Option 1 Option 2 Option 1 Option 2

Parking or site plan indicating main building entrance, preferred

X X X
parking spaces, and alternative-fuel fueling stations

Calculations based on total parking capacity X X X

For preferred parking spaces, photographs of signage or

X X X
pavement marking

For electric vehicle charging spaces, photographs of signage or

X X
pavement marking

For discounted parking rate, copy of communication to building

X X X
occupants or photograph of signage
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For electrical connectors, manufacturers’ product specifications

indicating charge level, compliance with relevant standard, and X X
Internet addressability

For liquid or gas fueling stations, manufacturers’ product

X X
specifications indicating fuel type and refueling rate

Phase-in plan for emissions-compliant bus fleet, including

emissions evaluation of current fleet, retrofit strategies, timeline, X
responsible parties

Phase-in plan for green non-bus vehicles, including types of

X
vehicles, timeline and responsible parties

Warehouses and Distribution Centers

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Manufacturer’s documentation of yard tractor model and fuel type X

Site plan showing electrical connector locations at loading dock doors X

Calculations for number of dock doors with electrical connection X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT

LT Credit Reduced Parking Footprint. Project teams also pursuing the related credit must reserve 12% of total
parking capacity for preferred vehicles (with a required 7% for green vehicles in LT Credit Green Vehicles and 5% for
carpools or vanpools in LT Credit Reduced Parking Footprint). Guidance for locating preferred parking is the same
for both credits.

EA Credit Demand Response. Any electric charging stations should align with the existing demand response
program or infrastructure to comply with the related credit.

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Air Quality Performance. Consider separate ventilation for liquid or gas alternative-
fuel fueling facilities alongside development of the mechanical plan and indoor air quality strategy to comply with
the related prerequisite.
 133

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

New Construction, Core and Shell, Data Centers, Hospitality, Retail, Healthcare
·· The term “low-emitting and fuel-efficient vehicles” has been changed to “green vehicles.”
·· Options 1 and 2 have been reorganized such that all projects must provide preferred parking for green vehicles
and alternative-fuel fueling stations.
·· The minimum ACEEE green score, which determines classification as a fuel-efficient vehicle, has been raised
to 45.
·· The requirement for alternative-fuel stations has been lowered to 2% of total parking capacity.
·· Electrical connectors must comply with SAE Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric
Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler (or a regional or local equivalent standard) and must also be capable of
dynamic interaction with the utility grid.
·· Credit can no longer be earned by providing green vehicles or a car-sharing program for building occupants.

Schools
·· See section above for changes in Option 1.
·· A designated carpool drop-off area for green vehicles (formerly “low-emitting and fuel-efficient vehicles”) is
no longer required.
·· Option 2 now requires an implementation plan to meet NOx and particulate emissions standards for school
buses and green vehicle designation for vehicles other than buses.

Warehouses and Distribution Centers

·· Credit requirements specific to warehouses and distribution centers have been added.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy (ACEEE) Green Book: greenercars.org

Society of Automotive Engineers, SAE Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772, SAE Electric Vehicle
Conductive Charge Coupler: standards.sae.org/j1772_201001

GREEN VEHICLES
International Electrotechnical Commission 62196: iec.ch

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

LT
DEFINITIONS
alternative fuel low-polluting, nongasoline fuels such as electricity, hydrogen, propane, compressed natural gas,
liquid natural gas, methanol, and ethanol

demand response (DR) a change in electricity use by demand-side resources from their normal consumption
patterns in response to changes in the price of electricity or to incentive payments designed to induce lower
electricity use at times of high wholesale market prices or when system reliability is jeopardized
134

electric vehicle supply equipment the conductors, including the ungrounded, grounded, and equipment
grounding conductors, the electric vehicle connectors, attachment plugs, and all other fittings, devices, power
outlets or apparatuses installed specifically for the purpose of delivering energy from the premises wiring to the
electric vehicle. (National Electric Codes and California Article 625)

grams per brake horsepower hour metric used to communicate how many grams of emissions (e.g., nitrogen oxide
or particulate matter) are emitted by an engine of a specific horsepower rating over a one-hour period

preferred parking the parking spots closest to the main entrance of a building (exclusive of spaces designated
for handicapped persons). For employee parking, it refers to the spots that are closest to the entrance used by
employees.

time-of-use pricing an arrangement in which customers pay higher fees to use utilities during peak time periods and
lower fees during off-peak time periods

yard tractor a vehicle used primarily to facilitate the movement of truck trailers and other types of large shipping
containers from one area of a site to another. It does not include forklift trucks. Also known as terminal tractor, yard
truck, utility tractor rig, yard goat, or yard hustler.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
LT
LT GREEN VEHICLES
135
 137

SS
SUSTAINABLE SITES
Sustainable
Sites (ss)
OVERVIEW
The Sustainable Sites (SS) category rewards decisions about the environment surrounding the building, with credits
that emphasize the vital relationships among buildings, ecosystems, and ecosystem services. It focuses on restoring
project site elements, integrating the site with local and regional ecosystems, and preserving the biodiversity that
natural systems rely on.
Earth’s systems depend on biologically diverse forests, wetlands, coral reefs, and other ecosystems, which are
often referred to as “natural capital” because they provide regenerative services. A United Nations study indicates
that of the ecosystem services that have been assessed worldwide, about 60% are currently degraded or used
unsustainably.1 The results are deforestation, soil erosion, a drop in water table levels, extinction of species, and
rivers that no longer run to the sea. Recent trends like exurban development and sprawl encroach on the remaining
natural landscapes and farmlands, fragmenting and replacing them with dispersed hardscapes surrounded by
nonnative vegetation. Between 1982 and 2001 in the U.S. alone, about 34 million acres (13 759 hectares) of open
space (an area the size of Illinois) was lost to development—approximately 4 acres per minute, or 6,000 acres a day.2
The rainwater runoff from these hardscape areas frequently overloads the capacity of natural infiltration systems,
increasing both the quantity and pollution of site runoff. Rainwater runoff carries such pollutants as oil, sediment,
chemicals, and lawn fertilizers directly to streams and rivers, where they contribute to eutrophication and harm
aquatic ecosystems and species. A Washington State Department of Ecology study noted that rainwater runoff from
roads, parking lots, and other hardscapes carries some 200,000 barrels of petroleum into the Puget Sound every
year—more than half of what was spilled in the 1989 Exxon Valdez accident in Alaska.3
Project teams that comply with the prerequisites and credits in the SS category protect sensitive ecosystems by
completing an early site assessment and planning the locations of buildings and hardscape areas to avoid harming
habitat, open space, and water bodies. They use low-impact development methods that minimize construction
pollution, reduce heat island effects and light pollution, and mimic natural water flow patterns to manage rainwater
runoff. They also remediate areas on the project site that are already in decline.

1. UN Environment Programme, State and Trends of the Environment 1987–2001, Section B, Chapter 5, unep.org/geo/geo4/report/05_Biodiversity.pdf.
2. U.S. Forest Service, Quick Facts, fs.fed.us/projects/four-threats/facts/open-space.shtml (accessed September 11, 2012).
3. Cornwall, W., Stormwater’s Damage to Puget Sound Huge, Seattle Times (December 1, 2007), seattletimes.com/html/localnews/2004045940_ecology01m.html
(accessed September 14, 2012).
138

In LEED v4, the SS category combines traditional approaches with several new strategies, including the
backlight-uplight-glare (BUG) method (Light Pollution Reduction credit), working with conservation organizations
to target financial support for off-site habitat protection (Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat credit),
replicating natural site hydrology (Rainwater Management credit), and using three-year aged SRI values for roofs
and SR values for nonroof hardscape (Heat Island Reduction credit).
SS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 139

SUSTAINABLE SITES PREREQUISITE

SS
Construction Activity
Pollution Prevention

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION

This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

INTENT

To reduce pollution from construction activities by controlling soil

erosion, waterway sedimentation, and airborne dust.

REQUIREMENTS
Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan for all construction activities associated with the
project. The plan must conform to the erosion and sedimentation requirements of the 2012 U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) Construction General Permit (CGP) or local equivalent, whichever is more stringent.
Projects must apply the CGP regardless of size. The plan must describe the measures implemented.
140

BEHIND THE INTENT

This prerequisite promotes environmental protection measures that reduce construction project disturbances to
neighboring properties, rainwater systems, and the site itself. Throughout most of the United States and elsewhere,
local codes often regulate construction activity pollution; however, some project sites may not be subject to
such codes. To ensure that all projects implement erosion and sedimentation control (ESC) measures during
construction, LEED applies a U.S.-based national standard, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
construction general permit (CGP).
SS

Local jurisdictions typically look to this standard when writing their own code requirements and adopt ESC
measures that are applicable to local soils, weather, natural waterways, and municipal rainwater systems. Therefore,
projects that follow local codes derived from the CGP can often demonstrate compliance with the prerequisite.
Project teams outside the U.S. can use a local equivalent (see Further Explanation, International Tips).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DESIGNATE RESPONSIBLE PARTY

The civil engineer is typically responsible for developing an erosion and sedimentation control (ESC)
plan, but in some cases, the landscape architect, project hydrologist, geologist, earthworks contractor, or
general contractor will undertake the plan’s development.

STEP 2. REVIEW LOCAL CODE AGAINST EPA CGP

Projects within the U.S. should determine whether the local jurisdiction requires an official
construction general permit (CGP) based on the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
(NPDES) program criteria.
·· If a permit is required, develop the CGP according to typical regional practices. Projects already using
the CGP thus have a streamlined path to compliance.
·· If local codes do not reference the CGP, determine whether local code requirements meet or exceed
the CGP (see Further Explanation, About NPDES and the CGP).
For all projects, conformance to local standards or code is required in lieu of the CGP when the code is
equally or more stringent.
·· To determine equivalence, compare elements of the local code that cover the requirements in the CGP,
Section 2, and ensure that all relevant categories listed are covered by local code. If local codes are
less stringent, address gaps by following the CGP.

STEP 3. EVALUATE SITE FOR ESC PLAN NEEDS

Each project site is unique, and not all ESC measures identified in the CGP may be applicable or
necessary. Assess which ESC measures are needed based on a simple site evaluation that identifies the
following:
·· The slope of the project site and where water will drain
·· The total area and duration of ground disturbance to identify air quality and rainwater runoff effects
on neighboring properties
·· The location of existing rainwater management systems that must be protected
·· Planned construction sequencing that may require additional ESC measures over time
·· Weather and soil conditions that could cause rainwater runoff or generate dust
·· Construction entrances and their erosion and sedimentation effects on local roads servicing the
project site

STEP 4. CREATE ESC PLAN

During the project’s construction documentation phase, develop the plan based on the ESC requirements
of the CGP or local equivalent and the unique needs of the project site. This prerequisite applies to all
sites, even those smaller than 1 acre (0.4 hectare) (see Further Explanation, About NPDES and the CGP,
and CGP Requirements).
 141

The ESC plan is generally prepared as part of the project plans, specifications, or a combination of both.
The plan includes erosion and sedimentation control measures and activities to be implemented and
phased throughout construction.
·· All projects must have an ESC plan that meets the prerequisite requirements even if a plan is not
required by local code. Teams for such projects must describe the specific situation and how the plan
applies.
·· Zero lot line projects and projects that cause no exterior site disturbance can instead develop a
narrative that describes why no ESC plan is necessary for the site.
·· If the team registers for LEED after the project has started, see Further Explanation, Compliance in

SS
Late Design or Early Construction.

STEP 5. IMPLEMENT ESC PLAN

Establish control measures before construction begins. Implement additional measures as needed based

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION

on site conditions and as construction progresses. The establishment and maintenance of ESC measures
are generally the responsibility of the general contractor or builder.
·· Monitor control measures periodically through site inspections and record maintenance activities taken
during construction.
·· Inspections must be recorded regularly via date-stamped photographs, inspection reports, or other
recording processes.
The following actions are also recommended:
·· Any problems identified in site inspections should be resolved in a timely manner.
·· Inspections should follow the requirements the CGP, Section 4.1.
·· All subcontractors should promptly notify the responsible party if they see damage to an ESC
measure.
·· Generate and save documentation as the plan is implemented for eventual use in the certification
submission (see Further Explanation, Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan Narrative).
142

FURTHER EXPLANATION

ABOUT NPDES AND THE CGP

The National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) is a U.S. program that regulates stormwater
discharges from construction activities that disturb 1 acre (0.4 hectare) or more; it also applies to smaller sites
that are part of a larger development or sale. This LEED prerequisite applies to all sites, even those smaller than
SS

1 acre (0.4 hectare). In the U.S., the EPA or a local authority, depending on the project’s location, administers the
permitting process associated with the NPDES program using the CGP.1 Projects outside the U.S. may use a local
equivalent to NPDES.
Based on the project’s location and conditions, some U.S. projects may be required to acquire an NPDES permit.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Refer to EPA’s CGP website to determine whether a permit is required. A permit is not required to meet this LEED
prerequisite, but all projects (regardless of size or NPDES status) must conform to the applicable erosion and
sedimentation control requirements of the CGP or a local equivalent.

CGP REQUIREMENTS
Whether they follow the CGP or a local equivalent, all projects must meet the requirements outlined in the CGP,
Section 2:

Section 2.1, erosion and sedimentation control

·· Providing natural buffers
·· Installing perimeter controls
·· Minimizing sediment track-out
·· Controlling discharges from stockpiled sediment or soil
·· Minimizing dust
·· Minimizing the disturbance of steep slopes
·· Preserving topsoil
·· Minimizing soil compaction
·· Protecting storm drain inlets
·· Maintaining control measures

Section 2.2, stabilization

·· Deadlines for initiating and completing stabilization
·· Criteria for stabilization

Section 2.3, pollution prevention

·· Prohibited discharges
·· General maintenance requirements
·· Pollution prevention standards
·· Emergency spill notification
·· Fertilizer discharge restrictions

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PLAN NARRATIVE

Track implementation of the ESC plan by keeping written records or date-stamped photographs. A narrative
description of ESC plan implementation should include the following:
·· Timing of the implementation of the plan
·· Specific control measures applied on site
·· Maintenance protocols used to ensure the proper function of control measures

Example ESC plan documentation narrative and graphic (see Figure 1):
The ESC plan was maintained throughout the duration of the project, from initial site mobilization through project
closeout. Specific control measures included site perimeter silt fence maintenance, inlet protection, soil stockpiling, dust

1. This information paraphrased from EPA, cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/cgp.cfm.

 143

control, visual inspection of all vehicle tires coming to and from the job site, and a designated concrete washout. The
implementation of the plan was maintained daily by the general contractor and inspected weekly by the civil engineer
for the duration of the project.

Inlet Tree protection Existing trees to remain

Inlet protection

Construction entrance

SS
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION
Construction entrance

Inlet
Inlet protection

Silt fencing at perimeter

of construction area

LEED PROJECT
BOUNDARY

Existing road

Buffer to protect existing

stream channel to remain

Vehicle tracking pads at construction entrance

Buffer to protect existing stream channel
Dedicated concrete wash out area
Existing water body / stream channel to remain

Figure 1. Example ESC measures in plan

COMPLIANCE IN LATE DESIGN OR EARLY CONSTRUCTION

ON
Projects that decide to pursue LEED certification during the design phase may develop or modify the ESC plan at
that stage. However, projects that decide to pursue LEED during early construction must have had a compliant ESC
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS1
plan in place before construction began to meet the prerequisite requirements.
SSp Construction Activity Pollution
INTERNATIONAL TIPS Prevention Plan (Batch 1)
Local code requirements may be followed if they are equally stringent or more stringent than the CGP and NPDES.
Projects outside the U.S. do not have to comply with the permitting aspects of the CGP.
Construction pollution prevention priorities may differ based on locality or region. Provide information on the
issues that are important to the project’s region. For example, if rainwater is not a major concern but dust control is,
information on dust control should be included in the project’s construction activity pollution prevention plan.
144

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
SS

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Projects Using Local

Documentation Projects Using 2012 EPA CGP
Standards and Codes

Description of compliance with EPA CGP X

For zero lot line projects and projects with minimal or

no exterior work: Description of special conditions and X X
compliance with any applicable ESC measures

Comparison of local standards and codes with EPA CGP X

Description of how project complies with local standards

X
and codes

Drawings depicting erosion and sedimentation control

X
measures implemented

Written declaration from general contractor or builder

who implemented plan
OR
X
Date-stamped photos
OR
A description of plan implementation.

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat. Implementing an ESC plan that limits site
disturbances such as vehicle traffic, grading, equipment storage, erosion, and sedimentation on greenfield areas
during construction will contribute to the greenfield requirement in this related credit. Implementing an ESC plan
that protects existing soils will make it unnecessary to restore soils to meet Option 1 requirements of the related
credit.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Implementing an ESC plan that minimizes soil compaction where vegetation
will be planted or where infiltration measures will be installed will support reducing runoff volumes, in accordance
with the related credit’s requirements.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The referenced version of the EPA CGP standard has changed from 2003 to 2012.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Construction General Permit (CGP):
cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/cgp.cfm
 145

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
greenfield area that has not been graded, compacted, cleared, or disturbed and that supports (or could support)

SS
open space, habitat, or natural hydrology.

previously disturbed areas that have been graded, compacted, cleared, previously developed, or disturbed in any
way. These are areas that do not qualify as 'greenfield.'

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY POLLUTION PREVENTION

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SS

146
 147

SUSTAINABLE SITES PREREQUISITE

SS
Environmental Site
Assessment

ENVIRONMENTAL SITE ASSESSMENT

This prerequisite applies to:
Schools
Healthcare

INTENT

To protect the health of vulnerable populations by ensuring that the site

is assessed for environmental contamination and that any environmental
contamination has been remediated.

REQUIREMENTS
Conduct a Phase I Environmental Site Assessment as described in ASTM E1527–05 (or a local equivalent) to
determine whether environmental contamination exists at the site. If contamination is suspected, conduct a Phase
II Environmental Site Assessment as described in ASTM E1903–11 (or a local equivalent).
If a site is contaminated, remediate the site to meet local, state, or national environmental protection agency
region residential (unrestricted) standards, whichever are most stringent.
148

BEHIND THE INTENT

Many sites may contain contaminants that could harm the health and well-being of future occupants. Soil or
groundwater may have been polluted by previous uses, for example, or existing structures might contain hazardous
materials, such as lead. Contaminants can harm the health of future users of the site, especially sensitive populations
such as children or hospital patients. Children, who are more sensitive to toxic substances than adults are, can be
afflicted with learning disabilities, chronic and acute respiratory diseases, cancer, or other illnesses after exposure
to toxins. People using health care facilities have greater sensitivity to environmental stressors during their
SS

illnesses and treatments. Identifying and remediating contaminated sites can help ensure a safe environment for all
occupants.
The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) environmental site assessment (ESA) is a methodology
for investigating and identifying a site’s environmental contamination. This prerequisite promotes the protection
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

of human health by requiring an ESA (or local equivalent) and, if necessary, remediation of any confirmed site
contamination. Project teams may use local assessment standards if they are at least as stringent as ASTM Phase I
and II ESAs.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE WHETHER PHASE I ESA (OR LOCAL EQUIVALENT) IS REQUIRED

·· ASTM Standard E1527–05, Section 4.8, considers a Phase I ESA valid for 180 days; projects that have a
valid assessment should skip to Step 3.
·· If a site’s Phase I ESA is more than 180 days but less than one year old, the standard requires that
updates be made to certain sections.
·· If a Phase I ESA is more than one year old, a new assessment is required.

STEP 2. CONDUCT PHASE I ESA (OR LOCAL EQUIVALENT)

·· Contract with an environmental professional to complete the Phase I ESA.
·· If a local equivalent assessment is being considered, the environmental professional must ensure
that any local equivalent assessment is equivalent to ASTM E1527–05 (see Further Explanation, Local
Equivalent Assessments).
·· For projects in the U.S. that are following the All Appropriate Inquiries Final Rule, this regulation is
considered consistent with ASTM E1527–05 (see Further Explanation, Scope of the ESA Phases).

STEP 3. DETERMINE WHETHER PHASE II ASSESSMENT IS REQUIRED

·· If the Phase I (or local equivalent) report indicates that no contamination is suspected, retain the full
report, with its findings and conclusions. No further action is necessary.
·· If the Phase I report indicates that a “recognized environmental condition” (REC) exists, or the report
recommends additional assessment activities (e.g., because of potential or historical conditions, data
gaps), then a Phase II ESA (or local equivalent assessment) is required.

STEP 4. CONDUCT PHASE II ASSESSMENT (OR LOCAL EQUIVALENT)

Contract with an environmental professional to complete the Phase II ESA.
·· If a local equivalent is being considered, the environmental professional must ensure that it is
equivalent to ASTM E1903–11 (see Further Explanation, Local Equivalent Assessments).
·· Projects with known contamination may wish to move directly to a Phase III ESA (or local equivalent).
Although not required for LEED certification, this further assessment helps determine the scope of
remediation process and is more extensive than a Phase II ESA. For the purpose of this prerequisite, a
Phase III fulfills the requirement for a Phase II ESA. See Further Explanation, Scope of the
ESA Phases.
 149

STEP 5. DETERMINE WHETHER REMEDIATION IS REQUIRED

·· If the Phase II (or Phase III, if the project team chooses) assessment or local equivalent indicates soil
or groundwater contaminant levels that exceed regulatory criteria, or the report recommends
additional action based on the qualitative or quantitative findings of the investigation, remediation
may be necessary.
·· An environmental regulatory agency (local or national) may also require remediation based on
the findings.

STEP 6. REMEDIATE SITE

SS
·· Contract with an environmental professional to prepare and implement a remediation plan. This may
include additional investigation and must be completed with the approval of environmental regulatory
agencies as necessary.
·· Collect documentation indicating that the site is “ready for reuse” from the environmental professional

ENVIRONMENTAL SITE ASSESSMENT

or regulatory agencies as necessary. The site must meet the residential (unrestricted) use standards
for the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) region (or local equivalent) or be otherwise suitable
for the project’s intended use in the project’s EPA region. Proper engineering and institutional use
controls, ongoing remediation, and monitoring may be acceptable, provided these activities meet the
requirements set forth by the local or national environmental regulatory agency.
·· EPA’s residential (unrestricted) use standards represent the most rigorous level of cleanup; local
equivalent standards must have a similar level of rigor. After remediation, land use must be suitable for
residential, school, or hospital use.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

SCOPE OF THE ESA PHASES

A Phase I environmental site assessment (ASTM E1527–05) is a nonintrusive survey that identifies potential or
existing site contamination. It determines the likelihood of contamination in the soil, groundwater, and surface
water and considers potential contaminants in buildings and structures on the site. A Phase I ESA includes the
following:
·· A review of historical records (e.g., chain of title, site plans, permits, maps, aerial photographs, previous
reports)
·· A site visit to visually identify potential contamination sources and signs
·· Interviews with individuals who have knowledge of the history of the site
·· An executive summary that indicates whether a Phase II ESA is required and a full report documenting
the findings

A Phase II ESA (ASTM E1903–11) involves collection and testing soil, soil vapor, groundwater, and building material
samples to determine whether and how much contamination exists on the site.
A Phase III ESA (not an ASTM standard) can be a first step in the site remediation process. It includes more
extensive sampling and testing than a Phase II ESA to determine the extent of the contamination identified in the
Phase II assessment. Because the report includes an evaluation of remediation options, costs, and logistics, it may be
more useful than a Phase II ESA for projects with known site contamination.
Any contaminants not typically included in the scope of Phase I and Phase II ESAs should be considered if the site
is at risk for such contamination. If non-scope “recognized environmental conditions” (RECs) (asbestos-containing
materials, radon, mold, lead, etc) are identified, these contaminants must be addressed in the scope of the Phase I
and Phase II ESAs, as applicable.
150

LOCAL EQUIVALENT ASSESSMENTS

Local equivalents to ESAs are acceptable, provided they are equal to or more stringent than the Phase I ESA and
Phase II ESA. The environmental professional must complete a side-by-side comparison of the local standards to the
ESA standards.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.
SS

Campus Approach
Eligible.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Contamination, as
No contamination, as No contamination, as
confirmed by Phase II
Documentation confirmed by Phase I ESA confirmed by Phase II ESA
or III ESA
(or local equivalent) (or local equivalent)
(or local equivalent)

Phase I ESA or local equivalent assessment X X X

Phase II or III ESA or local equivalent

X X
assessment

Description of contamination
X
and remediation

Verification that site has been remediated to

X
residential use standards

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit High-Priority Site. If the site is classified as a brownfield and remediation is completed to the satisfaction
of the authority having jurisdiction, the project is eligible to achieve the related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The blanket exclusion of former landfill sites has been removed.
·· Local equivalent assessments are available to all project teams as an alternative to Phase I and II ESAs.
·· Projects are no longer allowed to achieve the prerequisite based on an asbestos sampling plan and remediation
report.
 151

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASTM E1527—05 Standard Practice for Environmental Site Assessments: Phase I Environmental Site
Assessment Process: astm.org

ASTM E1903—11 Standard Practice for Environmental Site Assessments: Phase II Environmental Site
Assessment Process: astm.org

40 CFR Part 312: Standards and Practice for All Appropriate Inquiries; Final Rule: epa.gov/brownfields/aai

SS
EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE

ENVIRONMENTAL SITE ASSESSMENT

Not available.

DEFINITIONS
site assessment an evaluation of an area’s above ground and subsurface characteristics, including its structures,
geology, and hydrology. Site assessments typically help determine whether contamination has occurred and the
extent and concentration of any release of pollutants. Remediation decisions rely on information generated during
site assessments.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SS

152
 153

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Site Assessment

SITE ASSESSMENT
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To assess site conditions before design to evaluate sustainable options

and inform related decisions about site design.

REQUIREMENTS

Complete and document a site survey or assessment1 that includes the following information:
·· Topography. Contour mapping, unique topographic features, slope stability risks.
·· Hydrology. Flood hazard areas, delineated wetlands, lakes, streams, shorelines, rainwater collection and reuse
opportunities, TR-55 initial water storage capacity of the site (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
·· Climate. Solar exposure, heat island effect potential, seasonal sun angles, prevailing winds, monthly
precipitation and temperature ranges.
·· Vegetation. Primary vegetation types, greenfield area, significant tree mapping, threatened or endangered
species, unique habitat, invasive plant species.
·· Soils. Natural Resources Conservation Service soils delineation, U.S. Department of Agriculture prime
farmland, healthy soils, previous development, disturbed soils (local equivalent standards may be used for
projects outside the U.S.).
·· Human use. Views, adjacent transportation infrastructure, adjacent properties, construction materials with
existing recycle or reuse potential.
·· Human health effects. Proximity of vulnerable populations, adjacent physical activity opportunities,
proximity to major sources of air pollution.

The survey or assessment should demonstrate the relationships between the site features and topics listed above
and how these features influenced the project design; give the reasons for not addressing any of those topics.

1. Components adapted from the Sustainable Sites Initiative: Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009, Prerequisite 2.1: Site Assessment.
154

BEHIND THE INTENT

A site assessment evaluates environmental features that the design of a sustainable site and building should take
into consideration. It identifies assets, such as favorable climate conditions, good solar access, and healthy plant
populations, as well as liabilities, such as unhealthy soils, blighted structures, pollution sources, steep slopes, and
extreme climate patterns.
Performing a site assessment is part of an integrative design process that incorporates a site’s ecological and
historical contexts. A site assessment informs good design decisions, such as locating community gardens in areas
SS

with fertile soils, placing outdoor gathering spaces near large trees or desirable water features, orienting buildings to
take advantage of prevailing winds and solar access, and optimizing the location of rainwater management features.
A well-developed assessment conducted before or during the conceptual design phase may reduce project costs and
risks, promote occupants’ health, and honor a site’s unique characteristics.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Understanding a site’s topography, climate, soil types, water availability, and ambient air quality is important
because such features can significantly influence a project’s design and its ultimate performance.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. PREPARE FOR ASSESSMENT

Identify the team that will do the assessment.
·· Typically, the team consists of the landscape architect, land planner, and architect. Team members
should begin by collecting a wide range of information, such as climate data, topographical maps,
nearby building types, and soil survey data.
·· Engage local experts and specialists to help inventory any items listed in the credit requirements
that extend beyond the core team’s expertise (see Further Explanation, Features to Include in the Site
Assessment).
·· Plan to complete the assessment before conceptual design starts because the findings will inform
the location and orientation of major program elements. A previous site assessment can be used
(including an assessment completed for a campus in which the project is located), provided it
accurately reflects the current site and surrounding property conditions.

STEP 2. CONDUCT SITE INVENTORY

Using a variety of data sources, site visits, and local experts, survey and inventory the existing site
conditions and surroundings, according to the credit requirements, and compile the information for the
site assessment.
·· It may be useful to record site elements in a single document as the inventory progresses. See
USGBC’s site assessment worksheet, a spreadsheet that teams can use to fulfill a portion of the
documentation requirements.
·· Consider preparing a list of credits that could be influenced by a site assessment, and indicate which
site elements are applicable to each credit. For example, SS Credit Rainwater Management may be
influenced by topography and the location of existing water bodies on the site.
·· Document the site and ecological features (and relevant associated details) that will be important for
the design team to understand to meet the project goals. For example, in addition to documenting the
location of existing vegetation, consider also collecting information on the size, species, health, root
structure, and shade potential of trees so that their attributes can be integrated with planned program
elements.
·· Consider the proposed initial design to ensure that appropriate features are analyzed (see Further
Explanation, Design Opportunities).
·· If a feature listed in the credit requirements is not relevant for the site, explain why it has been
excluded.
·· Include such man-made features as buildings, roads, pathways, and existing infrastructure.
·· Consider talking to local experts and visiting regional historical societies to collect site information that
may not be visible or obvious. For example, Chapman School in Portland, Oregon, has an abandoned

2. audubonportland.org/local-birding/swiftwatch.
 155

chimney that provides shelter for tens of thousands of migratory birds every fall.2
A design team renovating the school would not know this from property drawings or soil studies but
could learn about the chimney’s environmental importance from a neighborhood group or community
organization.

STEP 3. CONDUCT SITE ANALYSIS

Prepare a site plan that includes the required information gathered during the site inventory. Analyze the
effect of the site features on the project design.
·· Overlaying the site information on a map will allow the features to be seen in relation to each other so

SS
that a site assessment can be conducted (see Further Explanation, Example).
·· Various types of information can be differentiated by color, line type, line weight, contrast, icons, and
imagery to make the analysis clear and understandable.
·· Highlight important relationships between site features and elements that may influence the project

SITE ASSESSMENT
design.
·· If regional context outside the items listed in the credit requirements is important for understanding
the site and evaluating sustainable design options, it may be helpful to develop an assessment at
multiple scales.

STEP 4. COMPLETE SITE ASSESSMENT WORKSHEET OR PREPARE SITE ASSESSMENT

NARRATIVE
Complete the USGBC site assessment worksheet, or develop a narrative.
·· The worksheet or narrative must indicate which site features were evaluated, what was found, and how
the findings influenced the project design.
·· If certain features were not assessed, describe why they were excluded.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

FEATURES TO INCLUDE IN THE SITE ASSESSMENT

Topography. Include sufficiently detailed site contours to show the general topography of the site and its regional
surroundings. Show unique or significant topographic features, such as rock outcroppings (which may help the
design team consider views), irregular topography (which could affect grading), and the direction of overland water
flows (which will determine drainage). Identify any steep slopes or areas that are at risk for slope failure. Conduct a
site visit. Table 1 lists other possible sources of information.

TABLE 1. Topography sources

Source Description

Site survey Physical property inspection to determine slopes

U.S. Geological Survey maps

Topographical and historical maps for U.S. projects
usgs.gov

UN Educational, Scientific and

Cultural Organization (UNESCO) Global mapping sources for projects outside U.S.
unesco.org

Geographic information system

GIS files containing many layers of site condition information
data from local governments
156

Hydrology. A sustainable approach to rainwater management involves finding ways to harvest it on site for irrigation
and other water uses, create beneficial water features, prevent rainwater overflows, and recharge the groundwater
and aquifers. Show existing surface water resources, such as lakes, streams, estuaries, and delineated wetlands, and
their associated buffers. Identify flood hazard areas, coastal hazard zones, or other flood-prone areas of the site.
Include existing rainwater infrastructure, collection, and reuse opportunities that support water-use reduction.
Estimate the water storage capacity of the site using Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds Technical Release 55
(TR-55) (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S). Table 2 lists other possible sources of information.
SS

TABLE 2. Hydrology sources

Source Description
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Site survey Physical property inspection to determine hydrology

Geographic information system data from local governments GIS files containing many layers of site condition information

U.S. Geological Survey maps Topographical and historical maps showing water flow, water
usgs.gov bodies, and watersheds for U.S. projects.

U.S. EPA Surf Your Watershed Information on U.S. watersheds, watershed data, and organizations
epa.gov supporting water quality

UN Environmental Program (UNEP)

Global source of water quality information
unep.org

National Wetlands Inventory

Inventory of U.S. wetland maps and data
fws.gov

Ramsar Convention on Wetlands

Global inventory of protected wetlands and data
ramsar.org

Federal Emergency Management Agency

Database of U.S. flood maps
fema.gov

Computer program with simplified procedures to calculate storm

Natural Resources Conservation Service TR-55 program
runoff volume, peak rate of discharge, hydrographs, and storage
nrcs.usda.gov
volumes required for floodwater reservoirs

Food and Agricultural Organization of the United Nations, Aquastat

Global source of rainfall data
fao.org

Climate. Understanding the local climate is a first step in designing climate-appropriate outdoor spaces,
incorporating effective passive design strategies, and planning for well-integrated mechanical systems. Climate
indicators include high, low, and average monthly temperature and relative humidity. Identify the solar exposure
using seasonal sun angles, solar access and shading, solar intensity, and amount of direct sun versus ambient light on
cloudy days. Determine the seasonal prevailing winds, including range of wind speeds, and average wind speed and
direction. Collect the annual and monthly precipitation patterns and determine whether the rain tends to fall in a
few large events or in more frequent but smaller events. Survey pavement and roof surfaces to identify the potential
heat island effect of any existing structures. Conduct a site visit. Table 3 lists other possible sources of information:
 157

TABLE 3. Climate sources

Source Description

National Oceanic and Atmospheric

Administration (NOAA) Source for U.S. climate data and future climate trends
noaa.gov

U.S. Department of Energy, Energy

SS
Efficiency and Renewable Energy (EERE) Historical weather data for more than 2,100 locations around world
energy.gov

Weather Analytics
Global mapping sources for projects outside U.S.

SITE ASSESSMENT
weatheranalytics.com

DOE-2 software
DOE-2 energy modeling weather files
doe2.com

National Solar Radiation Database

Database of historical solar radiation for U.S.
rredc.nrel.gov

Vegetation. Vegetation provides a wide range of environmental services: rainwater management, filtration,
groundwater recharge, soil structure, soil organic matter, erosion prevention, carbon storage, and oxygen
production. Inventory the location and type (by scientific name) of significant trees, invasive plants, and any
threatened or endangered species. Also indicate the location and limits of greenfield areas and habitat corridors that
may support local wildlife. Conduct a site visit. Table 4 lists other possible sources of information.

TABLE 4. Vegetation sources

Source Description

Site survey and basic vegetation survey Physical property inspection to gather plant information

U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Endangered species list

List of U.S. endangered species
fws.gov

International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN)

Global database of endangered species
Redlist iucnredlist.org

Geographic information system data from local GIS files identifying many layers of site condition
governments or independent sources information

Google maps
maps.google.com
Aerial photographs for determining site vegetation
Bing maps
bing.com/maps

U.S. EPA ecoregions Maps identifying North American ecoregions and their
epa.gov associated ecosystems and vegetation types

Local zoning maps showing stream buffers, riparian zones,

Local land-use and zoning code maps
wetlands, and other vegetated habitat areas

Soils. Healthy soils allow natural rainwater infiltration, which helps prevent runoff, sedimentation, erosion, and
flooding. Soils also aid in cleaning, storing, and recharging groundwater. By storing water and making it available
to plants, soils play a significant role in vegetation health. Healthy soils also provide habitat, aid in carbon storage,
and serve as structural foundations for buildings. Determine whether the site is designated as prime farmland and
identify its soil classification by the Natural Resources Conservation Service (projects outside the U.S. can use a local
equivalent). Identify the location of healthy soils as well as previously disturbed soils. Develop a soils management
plan to improve poor soils and support vegetation. Table 5 lists other possible sources of information.
158

TABLE 5. Soils sources

Source Description

Soil map that classifies soil types and properties of

Soil survey
project site

Natural Resources Conservation Service

SS

Survey of U.S. soil types and classifications

usda.gov

Human use. Document the previous, current, and future known uses surrounding the site to establish a context
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

for human use. Include the location and condition of on-site buildings and infrastructure. Culturally significant
resources are not required to be included in the inventory and assessment, but if these elements are an important
part of the site, they may be added. If existing structures cannot be easily restored for a new use, inventory the
materials that can be reused or recycled. Identify view corridors that can enhance occupants’ experience in outdoor
gathering spaces and buildings. Also include planned infrastructure adjacent to the site, such as future roadways,
bicycle networks, mass transit, and major pedestrian facilities. Conduct a site visit. Table 6 lists other possible
sources of information; if public information on past land uses is not readily available, teams can request documents
under the Freedom of Information Act (foia.gov) but should know that the FOIA process can take several months.

TABLE 6. Human use sources

Source Description

Existing site, local, and regional maps Framework for current human use

Aerial maps
maps.google.com
Aerial photographs for determining adjacent uses and infrastructure
Bing maps
bing.com/maps

Local land-use and zoning code maps Land uses, open space, habitat areas, density requirements

Historical and current maps of town and building information for U.S.
Sanborn maps
cities and towns

Local comprehensive planning documents Information about planned uses and future development

Human health effects. Research indicates that the natural environment plays a very important role in human health
and well-being. Site design, however, sometimes ignores the human benefits of healthful, green environments and
fails to provide opportunities for physical activity, restorative and aesthetic experiences, and social interaction.
Identify opportunities for physical activity on or adjacent to the site, such as trails, playgrounds, athletic fields,
and gyms. Locate major sources of air, water, and noise pollution that may affect future planning. Identify nearby
hospitals, rehabilitation facilities, child care centers, schools, and senior centers whose occupants may be vulnerable
to on-site pollution. Table 7 lists possible sources of information.
 159

TABLE 7. Human health effects sources

Source Description

Aerial maps
maps.google.com
Aerial photographs for determining land uses and distances to pollution sources
Bing maps
bing.com/maps

SS
Local land-use and
Land uses, open space, habitat areas, density requirements
zoning code maps

Geographic information system

SITE ASSESSMENT
data from local governments or GIS files identifying many layers of site condition information
independent sources

U.S. EPA national-scale air toxics

assessment (NATA) DOE-2 energy modeling weather files
epa.gov/nata

DESIGN OPPORTUNITIES
The site assessment may yield many considerations for the design team. View corridors, transportation
infrastructure, and adjacent properties, for example, may indicate the best orientation of buildings. If incorporated
into the design, prevailing winds and seasonal wind patterns may allow natural ventilation to reduce energy use.
Occupants can be protected from noise or air-borne particulates if operable windows are on the lee side, away from
pollution sources. Annual, seasonal, and daily precipitation trends as well as potential evaporation are inputs for
sizing rainwater collection systems. Information on site topography, soil types, precipitation, and vegetation can
help optimize on-site rainwater management. If retained, existing trees and landscape features can make outdoor
gathering spaces attractive. Soil types and solar access will determine the location of any community gardens.

EXAMPLE
Sample documentation narrative for topography and contours:
An assessment of the site topography was conducted using data found on U.S. Geological Survey maps. The results of
the slope analysis show that the site is generally sloping to the northeast with slopes of 4% to 6% over most of the site,
and some steep slopes located at the southern edge of the property. The project has elected to avoid building near the
steep slopes and established a 300-foot (90-meter) buffer for all construction activity. Building structures have been
located on slopes less than 5% to minimize site disturbance. Using the information discovered in the slope analysis,
rainwater management measures (a rain garden and bioswale) have been placed in low areas on the site.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
A local equivalent for the U.S. Natural Resources Conservation Service TR-55 is acceptable, provided it is at least as
stringent.

A local equivalent standard for identifying prime farmland is acceptable, provided the definition is equivalent to the
U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5. The soil survey used to identify
prime farmland must follow a methodology equivalent to that of the U.S. Natural Resources Conservation Service.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
160

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All Projects

Site survey or assessment plan or map X

Site assessment worksheet or equivalent narrative X

SS

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Integrative Process Credit. Assessing the site will help project teams meet the site condition and building and site
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

program requirements of the related credit.

LT Credit Sensitive Land Protection. Information gathered for the related credit may be used if wetlands, habitat,
flood hazard area, or prime soils are investigated on site.

LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses. Analyzing the surrounding sites and diverse uses may help meet
the human use and human health requirements of the related credit.

LT Credit Access to Quality Transit. Analyzing the surrounding transportation infrastructure will help achieve the
human use portion of the related credit.

LT Credit Bicycle Facilities. Analyzing the surrounding bicycle network will help achieve the human use and
human health portions of this credit. Assessing existing bicycle facilities and potential future facility needs will aid in
the location of bike facilities for the related credit.

SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat. Assessing the site will identify the greenfield areas
on site, a portion of which must be protected to meet the criteria for the related credit. Protecting existing soils will
make it unnecessary to restore soils to meet the Option 1 requirements for this credit. Protecting habitat and native
vegetation will reduce the amount of disturbed, graded, or compacted area that is required to be restored in Option 1
of the related credit.

SS Credit Open Space. Identification and quantification of applicable outdoor spaces can help achieve the
requirements of the related credit.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Studying the climate, rainfall, and hydrology of the site and watershed will help
determine applicable strategies to earn the related credit.

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction. Site assessment can lead to identification of paving, shading, or roofing materials
that can contribute to requirements of the related credit.

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. An analysis of
the climate, including solar access, temperatures, diurnal swings, wind patterns, humidity, and rainfall will support
more effective passive and active energy efficiency strategies.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. An evaluation of the climate, wind patterns, and solar exposure can
influence the siting and orientation of solar panels, wind turbines, and other renewable energy systems.

EQ Credit Daylight. Topography, vegetation, and solar exposure will influence the orientation of the building and
location of windows.

EQ Credit Quality Views. An analysis of the available viewsheds may influence the location of windows.
 161

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Natural Resources Conservation Service, Soils: soils.usda.gov

SS
TR-55 initial water storage capacity: nrcs.usda.gov

SITE ASSESSMENT
EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
greenfield area that has not been graded, compacted, cleared, or disturbed and that supports (or could support)
open space, habitat, or natural hydrology.

Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) soils delineation a U.S.-based soil survey that shows the
boundaries of different soil types and special soil features on the site

previously disturbed areas that have been graded, compacted, cleared, previously developed, or disturbed in any
way. These are areas that do not qualify as 'greenfield.'

prime farmland land that has the best combination of physical and chemical characteristics for producing food,
feed, forage, fiber, and oilseed crops and that is available for these uses, as determined by the U.S. Department
of Agriculture’s Natural Resources Conservation Service (a U.S.-based methodology that sets criteria for highly
productive soil). For a complete description of what qualifies as prime farmland, see U.S. Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5.

Technical Release (TR) 55 an approach to hydrology in which watersheds are modeled to calculate storm runoff
volume, peak rate of discharge, hydrographs, and storage volumes, developed by the former USDA Soil Conservation
Service.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SS

162
 163

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Site Development—
Protect or Restore

SITE DEVELOPMENT — PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT

Habitat
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To conserve existing natural areas and restore damaged areas to provide

habitat and promote biodiversity.

REQUIREMENTS
Preserve and protect from all development and construction activity 40% of the greenfield area on the site (if such
areas exist).

AND

OPTION 1. ON-SITE RESTORATION (2 POINTS EXCEPT HEALTHCARE, 1 POINT HEALTHCARE)

Using native or adapted vegetation, restore 30% (including the building footprint) of all portions of the site
identified as previously disturbed. Projects that achieve a density of 1.5 floor-area ratio may include vegetated roof
surfaces in this calculation if the plants are native or adapted, provide habitat, and promote biodiversity.

Restore all disturbed or compacted soils that will be revegetated within the project’s development footprint to meet
the following requirements1:
·· Soils (imported and in situ) must be reused for functions comparable to their original function.
·· Imported topsoils or soil blends designed to serve as topsoil may not include the following:
°° soils defined regionally by the Natural Resources Conservation Service web soil survey (or local equivalent
for projects outside the U.S.) as prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local
importance; or
°° soils from other greenfield sites, unless those soils are a byproduct of a construction process.

1. Components adapted from the Sustainable Sites Initiative: Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009, Credit 7.2:
Restore Soils Disturbed During Construction
164

·· Restored soil must meet the criteria of reference soils in categories 1–3 and meet the criteria of either category
4 or 5:
1. organic matter;
2. compaction;
3. infiltration rates;
4. soil biological function; and
5. soil chemical characteristics.
SS

Project teams may exclude vegetated landscape areas that are constructed to accommodate rainwater infiltration
from the vegetation and soils requirements, provided all such rainwater infiltration areas are treated consistently
with SS Credit Rainwater Management.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

SCHOOLS ONLY

Dedicated athletic fields that are solely for athletic uses are exempted from the soil restoration criteria. These areas
may not count toward the minimum required area.

OR

OPTION 2. FINANCIAL SUPPORT (1 POINT)

Provide financial support equivalent to at least $0.40 per square foot (US$4 per square meter) for the total site area
(including the building footprint).
Financial support must be provided to a nationally or locally recognized land trust or conservation organization
within the same EPA Level III ecoregion or the project’s state (or within 100 miles of the project [160 kilometers] for
projects outside the U.S.). For U.S. projects, the land trust must be accredited by the Land Trust Alliance.
 165

BEHIND THE INTENT

Preservation and conservation of intact or high-quality native ecosystems, including their soils, native vegetation,
sensitive species habitat, wildlife corridors, and hydrology, contributes to maintaining overall ecosystem health.
Projects should endeavor to situate buildings in ways that protect undeveloped land.
When building on previously disturbed sites or sites with previously disturbed areas, a project team should
consider restoring soils, hydrology, and native plants, all of which improve the viability of ecological communities,
manage and filter rainwater, and fulfill other ecosystem functions. This credit encourages project teams to first

SS
consider on-site restoration.
When site constraints prevent on-site restoration, consider off-site conservation and restoration. An off-site
approach may provide greater total ecosystem benefits than could otherwise be achieved on site. For projects that
are unable to provide large, contiguous parcels of on-site land for long-term conservation, providing financial

SITE DEVELOPMENT — PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT

support to a recognized land trust or conservation organization can be an effective tool. Funds may be earmarked for
activities that protect or restore habitat, such as acquiring crucial land parcels, restoring habit that is essential
to certain species, protecting water bodies, and preserving urban green space.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY GREENFIELD AREA WITHIN PROJECT

Before siting any buildings, work with a landscape architect, restoration ecologist, or other site
professional to identify greenfields within the project boundary.
·· Greenfield areas are areas that have not been graded, compacted, cleared, or disturbed and that
support (or could support) open space, habitat, or natural hydrology.
·· All areas within the project boundary must be categorized as either greenfield or previously disturbed,
based on their status at the beginning of the project. If no greenfield areas exist on site, continue to
Step 4.
·· Areas that naturally do not contain vegetation can count toward greenfield or restored area. For
example, natural rock outcrops, ponds, and natural desert all qualify under this credit.
·· Project teams do not need to vegetate areas that are not naturally vegetated but must submit
documentation showing that the area contains naturally existing unvegetated land or water bodies.

STEP 2. DETERMINE GREENFIELD AREA TO PRESERVE AND PROTECT

If greenfield area exists on the site, work with site professionals to identify at least 40% of the total
greenfield area to be preserved and protected from all development and construction activity.
·· Ideally, prioritize greenfields that are biodiverse (e.g., a shrub thicket) over monoculture plantings (e.g.,
turf grass) for preservation and protection.
·· Consider the project scope, program, and owner’s project goals in determining which areas to
preserve and protect.
·· Preserve and protect greenfield areas for long-term conservation if possible; this credit does not
specify the duration of protection (see Further Explanation, Best Practices for Habitat Protection).
·· If the entire project site is greenfield, preserve 40% of the total project area.

STEP 3. DEVELOP CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR GREENFIELD

PROTECTION
If applicable, establish and clearly delineate construction buffer zones with the project contractors early
in the process to avoid soil compaction and other construction damage to greenfields.
·· Limiting disturbance during construction helps minimize the need for additional soil and habitat
restoration.
·· Refer to strategies listed in SS Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention.
166

STEP 4. SELECT OPTION

Select the appropriate option for the project.
·· Option 1 may be feasible for projects that have sufficient land to meet the credit requirements for
restoration. Project teams must restore both the habitats and soils that will be revegetated. This
restoration will likely happen in parallel (see Further Explanation, Option 1 Timeline).
·· Option 2 is for projects that are 100% greenfield sites, or cannot meet the requirements for on-site
restoration, or choose not to conduct restoration. If choosing Option 2, skip to Option 2, Financial
Support, below. If unsure, continue with Steps 5 and 6 to gather more information before making a
decision.
SS

STEP 5. IDENTIFY ALL PREVIOUSLY DISTURBED SITE AREA

Work with site professionals to determine the total site area that has been graded, compacted, cleared,
or disturbed, if any. Include the building footprint if it is located on previously disturbed land.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 6. DETERMINE ANTICIPATED RATIO OF BUILDING FOOTPRINT TO PREVIOUSLY

DISTURBED SITE AREA
Determine the density of the project and surrounding areas by estimating the projected size of the
building footprint and comparing it with the site area.
·· Building vertically can significantly reduce a building footprint while increasing site density.
·· If the project meets the floor-area ratio (FAR) density minimum, vegetated roofs may be considered
part of the restored area (see Further Explanation, Vegetated Roofs).

Option 1. On-Site Restoration

STEP 1. DETERMINE AREAS FOR RESTORATION

Early in the design process, work with site professionals to determine the portions of the site that are the
best candidates for restoration. Use Equation 1 to verify that at least 30% of previously disturbed areas
will be restored.
·· Restoration and enhancement of natural site elements can include existing ponds, riparian buffers,
vegetation, and other natural features.
·· Consider restoring areas adjacent to greenfield, bordering natural areas, and contiguous parcels to
increase the environmental benefit.

EQUATION 1. Percentage of restoration area

Percentage of restoration area = (Restoration area / Total previously disturbed site area) × 100

The total previously disturbed site area includes the building footprint if it is located on previously
disturbed land.
·· A vegetated roof may be eligible to be included as part of the total restoration area in Equation 1,
provided the project density meets the minimum floor-area ratio threshold (see Further Explanation,
Vegetated Roofs).

STEP 2. DETERMINE RESTORATION STRATEGIES

Develop and prioritize strategies to restore the previously disturbed site areas identified in Step 1.
Restoration must use native or adapted vegetation (see Further Explanation, Best Practices for Habitat
Restoration).

STEP 3. IDENTIFY DISTURBED AREAS TO BE REVEGETATED

Determine which areas have been disturbed or compacted by previous development and will be
revegetated.
·· Heavy wheeled traffic, previous grading, compacted dirt roads, equipment storage areas, and parking
are examples of uses that disturb soils.
·· Only soils that will be revegetated need to comply with this requirement.
·· Consider the owner’s project requirements and work with environmental consultants to help determine
which areas to revegetate.
 167

STEP 4. RESEARCH SOIL CONDITIONS AND REFERENCE SOILS

For the areas that will be restored, compile existing information on such characteristics as compaction
level, organic matter, infiltration rates, soil biological function, soil chemistry, soil texture, and soil bulk
density (see Further Explanation, Reference Soils).

STEP 5. RESTORE SOILS IN AREAS TO BE REVEGETATED

·· Imported soil may be used as long as it meets all credit requirements (see Further Explanation, Soil
Restoration).
·· Conduct basic soil tests to demonstrate that the restored soils achieve criteria specified in the

SS
requirements (see Further Explanation, Soil Testing Guidelines).
·· Schools projects that exclude athletic fields from the soils requirements must ensure that the fields are
dedicated solely for athletic use (see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations).

SITE DEVELOPMENT — PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT

STEP 6. RESTORE PREVIOUSLY DISTURBED SITE AREAS
Carry out the restoration strategies identified in Step 2.
·· A project that constructs vegetated landscape areas to accommodate rainwater infiltration may
exclude these areas from the vegetation or soil restoration requirements. However, ensure that all such
areas are treated consistently between SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat and
SS Credit Rainwater Management.
·· Lawns (turf grasses) qualify as adapted vegetation only if they are able to survive without mowing,
fertilization, pesticides, and irrigation.

Option 2. Financial Support

STEP 1. DETERMINE AMOUNT OF FINANCIAL SUPPORT

Using Equation 2, establish the minimum financial support that must be dedicated to a qualifying land
trust or conservation organization.

EQUATION 2. Financial contribution for conservation

Minimum financial contribution = Total site area ft2 × $0.40/ft2

OR

Minimum financial contribution = Total site area m2 × $4/m2

STEP 2. IDENTIFY QUALIFYING PARTNER ORGANIZATION

Work with an accredited land trust or conservation organization to identify a use for the contribution and
establish an agreement with the organization, detailing the use of the funding (see Further Explanation,
Working with Conservation Organizations).
·· The partnering organization must provide financial support to a project that meets the proximity
criteria indicated in the credit requirements (see Further Explanation, Identifying the Project’s
Ecoregion).
·· Examples of projects include land acquisition or management for natural processes; native habitat
restoration; watershed management, restoration, or protection; and public urban green space
restoration or revitalization.
168

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

BEST PRACTICES FOR HABITAT PROTECTION

SS

Define the use of the natural habitat. Will it be available to residents or employees only, or will there be public uses,
such as birdwatching? Will there be a pathway or route to enable safe use by pedestrians?

Clearly delineate the boundary of the area to be protected on plans that are part of the site or facilities maintenance
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

documents. Also indicate the boundary on the site with signage or markers.

Monitor habitat areas for invasive species and remove them when they are identified.

Do not use protected habitat areas to store equipment or materials or dispose of waste, whether organic or inorganic.
Do not harvest live vegetation, fallen trees, or dead standing trees, unless they pose a danger to human safety or
create a fire hazard, or as prescribed by a certified forester for the purposes of advancing habitat protection.

Establish a five- to seven-year site management plan that includes fire management, flooding, and invasive species
monitoring and management, if necessary.

BEST PRACTICES FOR HABITAT RESTORATION

Have a certified professional perform a preconstruction site assessment of soils, water sources, and vegetation,
and wildlife species (native, adapted, invasive) to determine the current site conditions, historical ecological
communities, and the preferred restored site condition.
Any wetland that has been destroyed or damaged prior to commencement of construction should be rebuilt or
remediated with the help of professionals. Any wetland damaged or destroyed as a result of construction must be
rebuilt or remediated.
Cleared land can become a meadow of native grasses and forbs or be planted with native bareroot trees and
shrubs. Forests may require removal of invasive plants to allow native species to become reestablished.
Plan for environmental conditions specific to the site (even a native species will not thrive if planted in an
inappropriate microclimate). Use local ecotypes for new plantings.
Source plants from reputable nurseries that can attest to the plant origins, ideally nursery-propagated specimens
that originated in the same ecoregion as the project site. Ask suppliers about their sources, and avoid plants that
are taken from wild areas. Keep records of the origins of the plant material used, which will help with ongoing
management of the site.
The Society for Ecological Restoration International provides additional guidance on best practices for restoring
degraded habitat.
 169

OPTION 1 TIMELINE
Restoration of soils and vegetation will likely happen in parallel following the sequence laid out in Table 1.

TABLE 1. Restoration Timeline

Action Target

SS
Step 1. Identify all previously disturbed areas on project site Habitat

Step 2. Determine which of those areas to restore Habitat

SITE DEVELOPMENT — PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT

Step 3. Identify restoration strategies Habitat

Step 4. Identify disturbed soils and soil areas to be revegetated Soils

Soils
Step 5. Research soil conditions and site’s reference soils for these areas only

Step 6. Restore soils in areas to be revegetated Soils

Step 7. Restore previously disturbed site areas Habitat

VEGETATED ROOFS
If the density of the project and the roof vegetation meet the credit requirements, the vegetated roof may be counted
toward the overall restored area calculation.
Determine the density of the project and surrounding areas by calculating the ratio of the anticipated building
footprint to the total project area (including both greenfield and previously disturbed areas). This calculation, the
floor-area ratio (FAR), is used in many LEED credits.
A vegetated roof is a strategy that can be applied to other SS credits as well. Green roofs count as open space
in SS Credit Open Space if the project meets the same density requirement. In SS Credit Rainwater Management,
green roofs contribute to water runoff management for zero lot line projects. A vegetated roof is one of the main
strategies for achieving Option 1 in SS Credit Heat Island Reduction. Roofs can be either extensive or intensive
systems. Maintenance will be needed to keep plants healthy and the structure in good condition. Artificial turf is not
an acceptable strategy for vegetated roofs.

REFERENCE SOILS
Reference soils are native to a site, as described in Natural Resources Conservation Service soil surveys (or a local
equivalent for projects outside the U.S.), or undisturbed native soils within the project’s region that have native
vegetation, topography, and soil textures similar to the project site.
For project sites with no existing reference soil, reference soils are defined as undisturbed native soils within the
project’s region that support appropriate native plant species similar to those intended for the new project. In some
cases, reference soils may differ from the existing soils on the site (if soils were imported).
170

SOIL RESTORATION2
In areas that will be revegetated, restore soil characteristics necessary to support the selected native vegetation types
(Table 2).

TABLE 2. Soil restoration guidelines

Soil criterion Restoration to reference soil conditions Required

SS

Amend soils with mature, stable compost material such that

top 12 inches (300 mm) of soil (at minimum) contains at
1 Organic matter Yes
least 3% organic matter OR organic matter levels and organic
matter depth are comparable to site’s reference soil
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Ensure bulk densities within 100% of root zone, defined

2 Compaction as minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) in depth OR depth Yes
comparable to site’s reference soil

Achieve infiltration rates (inches/hour) or saturated hydraulic

3 Infiltration rate conductivity (millimeters/second) comparable to site’s Yes
reference soil

Establish capacity of biotic community to decompose

organic matter and release mineral (plant available) nitrogen;
4 Biological function
potentially mineralizable nitrogen is used as proxy (see Table
7.2-B, SITES Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009) Meet either or
both of 4 or 5
Match pH, cation-exchange capacity, and nutrient profiles of
5 Chemistry original undisturbed soil or site’s reference soil; salinity must
be suitable for regionally appropriate vegetation

Example methods to restore soils include stockpiling and reusing topsoil from the site, with organic amendment if
needed; amending site soils in place with organic matter and mechanically correcting compaction if needed (e.g., by
ripping); and importing a topsoil or soil blend designed to serve as topsoil.
For on-site amendment or blending of imported soils, select organic materials from sources that are renewable
within a 50-year cycle. Compost is recommended for its stability, biological qualities, and ability to build soil
structure. If mature, stable compost is not locally available, look for locally available organic residuals that can be
composted on- or off-site to produce a mature composted organic amendment. Involve a qualified horticultural or
soil professional in selecting and balancing amendments for healthy plant growth.

Compost that enhances soil’s ability to support vegetation has the following characteristics:
·· A carbon to nitrogen ratio below 25:1. Higher C:N ratios may be acceptable if specified by a qualified
professional as more appropriate for the type of vegetation to be established.
·· Low pollutant concentrations. Do not exceed the limits established by U.S. EPA in the 40 CFR Part 503
Biosolids Rule, Section 503.13, Table 3, Pollutant Concentrations, or any applicable state or local regulations.
·· No weed seeds. Compost should not contain viable weed seeds or invasive plant propagules.

SOIL TESTING GUIDELINES

Project teams can take samples of the soils and send them to a laboratory for testing. Local government agencies may
offer inexpensive testing of soil samples and guidance around sampling procedures.
Samples must be taken from soils that are disturbed or compacted and will be revegetated. (Soils that will not
be revegetated can be excluded from the test.) If the soils test shows that the restored soil meets reference soil
attributes, the project meets the requirements.
Typically, multiple samples of the same soil are taken. If a project site has more than one type of soil that will be
revegetated, taking multiple samples from each soil type provides a comprehensive picture of the soil condition.
Soil sample test results may include the components listed in Table 3.

2. SITES Guidelines and Performance Benchmarks 2009, Credit 7.3.

 171

TABLE 3. Soil components

Soil sample Soil sample

Test result components Test result components

pH
Base Conductivity (measure of soil salinity)
Organic matter

Sulfur

SS
Anions Phosphorus
Nitrate-N

Potassium
Calcium

SITE DEVELOPMENT — PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT

Cations
Magnesium
Sodium

Iron
Zinc
Minor Manganese
elements Copper
Boron
Aluminum

WORKING WITH CONSERVATION ORGANIZATIONS (OPTION 2)

For U.S. projects, the land trust must be accredited by the Land Trust Alliance and be in the same Level III ecoregion
or within the same state as the project.
For projects outside the U.S., the land trust or conservation organization must be located within 100 miles (160
km) of the project.
If there are multiple options for recipients of financial support, project teams may wish to consult with
potential recipients to determine the financial need of the organization, the intended use of the contribution, and
compatibility with the project’s own conservation goals.

IDENTIFYING THE PROJECT’S ECOREGION

Project teams in the U.S. can use the classification system of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to identify
their Level III ecoregion and its characteristic native vegetation and soils. Refer to EPA’s ecoregion map for more
information, at epa.gov/wed/pages/ecoregions/level_iii_iv.htm. If EPA ecoregion information is not available for the
project’s area, ask the state government’s environmental agency for comparable information.
Project teams outside the U.S. should also determine their ecoregion to help inform decisions about habitat
protection and restoration.

EXAMPLE
The project illustrated in Figure 1 is pursuing Option 1 by restoring previously disturbed area. Tables 4 and 5 show the
team’s calculations for demonstration of compliance.
 172

TABLE 4. Example calculation for minimum greenfield and restored area requirements

Preserved or
Area Percentage of site area
restored area

Total site area (greenfield and previously 280,000 ft2

disturbed) (26 000 m2)

180,000 ft2 135,000 ft2 75%

Minimum greenfield area on site
(16 700 m2) (12 500 m2) (minimum 40% required)
SS

Total previously disturbed area of site 100,000 ft2

(including building footprint) (9 290 m2)

Rainwater management area

20,000 ft2
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

(excluded from total previously

(1 900 m2)
disturbed)

80,000 ft2 30,000 ft2 37.5%

Net previously disturbed area
(7 400 m2) (2 800 m2) (minimum 30% required)

180,000 ft2 135,000 ft2 75%

Greenfield area on site
(16 700 m2) (12 500 m2) (minimum 40% required)

Yellow Twig Dogwood and Azalea

Hickory, Elm, and Birch trees

Red Twig Dogwood,

Amelanchier, and
Hydrangea

Building footprint (non-vegetated roof), not restored with native or adapted species
Non-vegetated, pedestrian oriented hardscape, not restored with native or adapted species
Previously disturbed area to be restored
Greenfield area to be preserved
Site areas restored with native and adapted vegetative plants
Soil area to be restored = 130,00 sq ft (12,077 sq m)
Rainwater management area = 5,500 sq ft (511 sq m)
Athletic field = 10,000 sq ft (930 sq m)
Vegetated roof area = 11,000 sq ft (1,022 sq m)

Figure 1. Example protection and restoration site plan

OR CONSTRUCTION

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS6

BD+C SSc Site Development- Protect or
 173

TABLE 5. Example calculation for minimum revegetation and soils restoration requirement

Area Notes

30,000 ft2
Area to be restored See Table 4, row 5
(2 800 m2)

Because FAR > 1.5, vegetated roof can be included in

Building FAR 1.7
revegetation area

SS
8,000 ft2 Because FAR > 1.5, vegetated roof can be included in
Green roof area
(740 m2) revegetation area

20,000 ft2
Area of soils to be restored Area of soils restoration excludes vegetated roof areas
(1 900 m2)

SITE DEVELOPMENT — PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT

FAR = floor-area ratio

SAMPLE DOCUMENTATION NARRATIVES3

Removal and Storage of Topsoil and Duff
Describe strategies employed for the removal of the topsoil and duff to preserve native seed stock and materials for
future use. Best practice for the storage of soils for reuse is to store them in shallow piles to allow air movement and
protection of soil microorganisms.
Prior to disturbance, the Contractor shall salvage existing litter, duff, and upper 3 inches (75 mm) of topsoil from areas to
be graded or disturbed on the project site and store until it can be incorporated back into the revegetation project. Litter and
duff can be stockpiled together, but must be kept away from topsoil, in piles that are shallow and narrow. Protect stockpiles
from precipitation. At no time shall materials be stockpiled for more than 3 months without approval of the engineer. See
the attached schedule for specific timing of this treatment.

Grading and Slope Shaping

Describe what grading or earth moving activities are required for the revegetation project. Soil preparation on slopes
may require physical modification or surface roughening. Consider evaluating site complexity of undisturbed areas
relative to grades. For example, there may be “microsites” that have depressions or texture changes that can help
provide a greater diversity in habitats that need to be mimicked in the restored areas.
Areas to be graded or excavated and revegetated include the base of slope to accommodate a retaining wall and installation
of the shallow infiltration basin as permitted. For planting areas, scarify the top 6 inches (150 mm) of subgrade before fill
placement. Subgrade depths plus specified depth of topsoil should equal finished grade. Contractor shall establish finished
grades to blend with existing grades and eliminate uneven areas resulting from rough-grading operations. See the attached
schedule for specific timing of these treatments.

Soil Loosening
Describe physical activities required to restore infiltration capacity and aeration to compacted soil areas.
To reduce soil compaction, loosen subgrade of compacted soil areas to an average depth of 12 inches (300 mm). Soil
loosening may be performed with hand tools or a mini excavator equipped with backhoe bucket. Soil shall be loosened but
not turned or inverted. Soil loosening should be uneven in depth by at least 1–2 inches (25–50 mm) to reduce the chance
of soil slumping. Avoid existing plants and tree roots wherever loosening takes place. See the attached schedule for specific
timing of this treatment.

Soil Amendments and Fertilizer

Describe the type, quantity, and application rate of any soil amendments or fertilizers used to improve physical,
chemical, or biological properties of the soil.
Apply aged wood chips to a depth of 1 inch (25 mm) on the surface of soil loosened areas. Incorporate compost to a depth
of 3–4 inches (75–100 mm) and organic phosphorus-free fertilizer at a rate of 270 lbs per acre (50 kg per hectare) into
areas where topsoil is to be replaced and into areas compacted during construction activities. Evenly spread compost and

3. Example text for soils restoration adapted from tahoebmp.org/Documents/BMPHandbook/Chapter%205/Ch5_2_RevPlnEx.pdf.

174

fertilizer on topsoil and incorporate it within using hand tools or mini excavator. After fertilizer application, water area
slowly to help incorporate fertilizer into the soil. Water only until soil is moist to avoid runoff of fertilizer off-site. See the
attached schedule for specific timing of these treatments.

Soil Stabilization
Describe soil stabilization practices, which may include reapplication of salvaged duff material collected and stored
during the site preparation process, bare soil protection using inorganic and organic mulch, and use of tackifiers, soil
binders, and hydromulch.
SS

Replace topsoil in disturbed areas (from which topsoil was removed before construction), spread to a uniform depth of 3
inches (75 mm), and gently compact into place. Topsoil shall be dry. This operation shall be conducted during dry weather.
All debris, roots, weeds, and other materials in excess of 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter shall be removed while topsoil is
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

being spread. Place wood chips to a 1-inch (25-mm) depth on the surface of loosened areas and incorporate during soil
loosening. After seeding, salvaged duff and wood chips shall be evenly applied to the soil surface to a 1-inch (25-mm) depth.
Then apply pine needles to increase depth to 2 inches (50 mm). After duff replacement and wood chip and pine needle
application, apply tackifier according to manufacturer’s specifications in said area on the same working day. Tackifiers
shall be chosen with consideration of the sources of these resins: avoid hydro-carbon based products, and prefer organic,
natural, and nontoxic materials .

Soil Reuse
Describe how soils have been reused for functions comparable to their original function.
Soil that will be reused on site was collected from the existing site, which contained three main types of uses: vegetation soil
in plant beds, structure foundations, and athletic fields. These soils have been preserved separately and will be placed on
the project in similar spaces with similar functions. The plant bed soils will be used in planter boxes located throughout
the project near the plazas. The foundation soils will be used as part of the material for the foundation of the main project
building. Finally, the soils from the former athletic fields will be used in the project’s open turf multipurpose area.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Schools
·· Athletic fields are exempt from the soils requirements if they are used solely for athletic purposes.
·· Athletic fields cannot be used toward the 30% restoration requirement.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Project teams must identify the agency in their country that is responsible for land conservation issues. U.S. federal
agencies may be a good resource to identify counterparts in other countries. Local entities can provide guidance
on restoration activities and information regarding land trust projects and conservation organizations within the
required distance from the project for teams pursuing Option 2.
Groups that work internationally include NatureServe Natural Heritage Program, Conservation International,
and World Land Trust.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
 175

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All Projects Option 1 Option 2

Greenfield area calculations X

Description of greenfield area protection (if applicable) X

Native or adapted vegetation calculations X

SS
Site plan depicting project boundary, building footprint, preserved greenfield
area(s) (if applicable), previously disturbed area, restored area, native and
X
adapted vegetation, plant species, other ecologically appropriate features,
and any other relevant site conditions

SITE DEVELOPMENT — PROTECT OR RESTORE HABITAT

Description of disturbed or compacted soils to be revegetated X

Reference soil characteristics and soil test results X

Projects with vegetated roofs: provide the floor area ratio (FAR) X

Financial support calculations X

Agreement with land trust or conservation organization X

U.S. projects: Confirmation that land trust is accredited by Land Trust Alliance X

Projects outside U.S.: Verification that conservation organization

is nationally or locally recognized; description of qualifications X
and mission of conservation organization

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SS Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention. This credit and the related prerequisite have the
same purpose: to preserve and protect greenfields during construction activity. Projects may be able to use some of
the same techniques for both.

SS Credit Site Assessment. Opportunities identified in the related credit can be used to preserve habitat and soils.

SS Credit Open Space. Greenfield, protected, and restored areas can be counted for both credits.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Landscaped areas designed for rainwater management can be excluded from
soils requirements if the areas use native or adapted vegetation and meet the restoration requirements.

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction. Vegetated roofs can be counted for both credits.

LT Credit High-Priority Site. When planning for habitat restoration on brownfield or contaminated sites, special
consideration should be given to the potential interaction and spreading of contaminants through attracted species
and site hydrology.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The setback requirements were replaced with preservation and restoration requirements.
·· Soil requirements have been modified to include disturbed or compacted soils.
·· The off-site option was replaced with an option for financial support.
176

REFERENCED STANDARDS
U.S. EPA ecoregions: epa.gov

Land Trust Alliance accreditation: landtrustalliance.org

Natural Resources Conservation Service, web soil survey: websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov

Sustainable Sites Initiative (SITES™): sustainablesites.org

SS

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Option 1. Double the 30% restoration requirement (restore at least 60%).

Option 2. Double the financial donation requirement (provide at least $0.80 per square foot or $8.00 per square
meter).

DEFINITIONS
density a measure of the total building floor area or dwelling units on a parcel of land relative to the buildable land
of that parcel. Units for measuring density may differ according to credit requirements. Does not include structured
parking.

development footprint the total land area of a project site covered by buildings, streets, parking areas, and other
typically impermeable surfaces constructed as part of the project

greenfield that has not been graded, compacted, cleared, or disturbed and that supports (or could support) open
space, habitat, or natural hydrology.

land trust a private, nonprofit organization that, as all or part of its mission, actively works to conserve land
by undertaking or assisting in conservation easement or land acquisition, or by its stewardship of such land or
easements (Adapted from Land Trust Alliance)

native vegetation a species that originates in, and is characteristic of, a particular region and ecosystem without
direct or indirect human actions. Native species have evolved together with other species within the geography,
hydrology, and climate of that region.

previously disturbed areas that have been graded, compacted, cleared, previously developed, or disturbed in any
way. These are areas that do not qualify as 'greenfield.'

prime farmland land that has the best combination of physical and chemical characteristics for producing food,
feed, forage, fiber, and oilseed crops and that is available for these uses, as determined by the U.S. Department
of Agriculture’s Natural Resources Conservation Service (a U.S.-based methodology that sets criteria for highly
productive soil). For a complete description of what qualifies as prime farmland, see U.S. Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts 400 to 699, Section 657.5.

reference soil a soil native to the project site, as described in Natural Resources Conservation Service soil surveys
(or a local equivalent survey outside the United States), or undisturbed native soils within the project’s region that
have native vegetation, topography, and soil textures similar to the project site. For project sites with no existing soil,
reference soils are defined as undisturbed native soils within the project’s region that support appropriate native
plant species similar to those intended for the new project.
 177

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Open Space

OPEN SPACE
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To create exterior open space that encourages interaction with the

environment, social interaction, passive recreation, and physical activities.

REQUIREMENTS
Provide outdoor space greater than or equal to 30% of the total site area (including building footprint). A minimum
of 25% of that outdoor space must be vegetated (turf grass does not count as vegetation) or have overhead vegetated
canopy.

The outdoor space must be physically accessible and be one or more of the following:
·· a pedestrian-oriented paving or turf area with physical site elements that accommodate outdoor social
activities;
·· a recreation-oriented paving or turf area with physical site elements that encourage physical activity;
·· a garden space with a diversity of vegetation types and species that provide opportunities for year-round visual
interest;
·· a garden space dedicated to community gardens or urban food production;
·· preserved or created habitat that meets the criteria of SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat
and also includes elements of human interaction.

For projects that achieve a density of 1.5 floor-area ratio (FAR), and are physically accessible, extensive or intensive
vegetated roofs can be used toward the minimum 25% vegetation requirement, and qualifying roof-based physically
accessible paving areas can be used toward credit compliance.
Wetlands or naturally designed ponds may count as open space if the side slope gradients average 1:4 (vertical :
horizontal) or less and are vegetated.

FOR PROJECTS THAT ARE PART OF A MULTITENANT COMPLEX ONLY

Open space can be either adjacent to the building or at another location in the site master plan. The open space may
be at another master plan development site as long as it is protected from development. If the open space is not
adjacent to the building, provide documentation showing that the requirements have been met and the land is in a
natural state or has been returned to a natural state and conserved for the life of the building.
178

BEHIND THE INTENT

When building occupants have opportunities to connect with the outdoors, they exhibit improved well-being and
productivity. 1 Open spaces also provide many positive environmental benefits—habitat creation, linked habitat
corridors in urban areas, increased rainwater infiltration, and reduced heat island effect.
An open space’s features can influence both its use by people and its environmental benefits. For example,
turf and paved plazas can encourage group activities that foster social interaction, and including vegetation in at
least some portion of the open space offers direct benefits to the environment. Open spaces with qualities that
SS

support environmental goals could include community gardens, vegetated roofs, preserved habitats with learning
opportunities, and gardens that provide visual interest all year long.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE TOTAL AREA WITHIN PROJECT BOUNDARY

Calculate the total site area within the project’s boundary.

STEP 2. CALCULATE OPEN SPACE AND VEGETATED AREA REQUIRED

Use Equation 1 to determine the amount of required open space, and Equation 2 to determine the
amount of open space that must be vegetated (see Further Explanation, Example 1).

EQUATION 1. Required open space

Required open space ≥ 30% × Total site area

EQUATION 2. Vegetated space

Vegetated space ≥ 25% × Required open space

STEP 3. PROGRAM SITE

Identify and designate open space features early in the planning and programming of the site to optimize
building placement and landscape design. Ensure that open and vegetated spaces meet or exceed the
minimum required areas. Consider the following strategies to optimize open space use:
·· Coordinate open space features early in the planning and programming phase to optimize building
placement and landscape design. Master planning occurs well before the conceptual design phase of
the building development. Facilitating a charrette with the future building occupants, design team, and
community members may help in planning for open space that meets the needs of the users.
·· Design a compact parking and road footprint layout to preserve open land and provide connections to
adjacent ecosystems.
·· Tighten program needs and stack floor plans to reduce the building footprint.
·· Maximize floor-area ratio (FAR) and accessibility for the greatest range of open space credit options,
as outlined in the credit requirements (see Getting Started, Density, for an example FAR calculation).

STEP 4. DESIGN OPEN SPACE AREAS

Design each open space area to comply with one or more of the criteria listed in the credit requirements.
All open space must be physically accessible and encourage use by occupants of the building and site,
but it does not have to be active space (see Further Explanation, Example 2).

1. Parker, D.C., The Corporate Garden, in D. Relf (ed.), The Role of Horticulture in Human Well-Being and Social Development
(Portland, Oregon: Timber Press, 1990).
 179

Turf areas, including areas of turf grass under overhead tree canopies, can be counted in total open
space but do not qualify as vegetated open space.
·· Extensive or intensive vegetated roofs can be used toward the minimum 25% vegetation requirement.
Vegetated roof area can also be counted as open space if it is accessible to the building occupants
and the project has a density of 1.5 FAR or greater. Roofs can be either extensive or intensive systems.
Maintenance will be needed to keep plants healthy and the structure in good condition. Artificial turf is
not an acceptable strategy for vegetated roofs.
·· Design open spaces for the specific project location. For example, a xeriscape area might be
appropriate in arid locations.

SS
·· Open spaces must be usable; a small strip of turf in a parking lot does not meet the intent of the
credit. Artificial turf does not count as vegetation or hardscape.
·· Determine where overhead vegetation (trees and shrubs), rather than ground cover, would be
appropriate.

OPEN SPACE
·· Projects may count ponds or wetlands that occur naturally or are designed to function similarly to
natural site hydrology and land cover, provided they meet the credit requirements.
·· Consider encouraging human interaction with wetlands and natural areas through features such as
educational signage, walking trails, and observation stations.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

EXAMPLE 1. REQUIRED SPACE

Equations 1 and 2 (see Step-By-Step Guidance) are used to determine the required open space and vegetated area of a
100,000-square-foot (9 295-square-meter) site.

TABLE 1. Example open space summary

Total site area (including building footprint) 100,000 ft2

Open space required 30,000 ft2 = 100,000 x (0.3)

Vegetated area required 7,500 ft2 = 30,000 x (0.25)

Remaining designated outdoor open space 22,500 ft2 = 30,000 – 7,500

Total building floor area 175,000 ft2 FAR 1.75

Vegetated roof counts toward

Yes
vegetation requirement?
 180

EXAMPLE 2. SITE DESIGN

The site illustrated below includes a variety of social gathering spaces and areas that encourage interaction
with the environment.
Fence LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY Lawn

Open space A: Tot Lot

Open space B:
Athletic Field
SS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Lawn Parking

Open space D: Vegetated roof and hardscape

Open space C: Plaza and gardens Open space E: Vegetated roof and hardscape

Total site area = 450,00 sq ft (10 ac)

= 41,806 sq m (4 ha)
Open space A = 78,500 sq ft (7,293 sq m)
Open space B = 32,400 sq ft (3,010 sq m)
Figure 1. Example site design Open space C = 112,600 sq ft (10,461 sq m)
Open space D = 7,840 sq ft (728 sq m)
Open space E = 6,700 sq ft (623 sq m)

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

es Inc. All Rights Reserved. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
Multitenant Projects
·· A projectUSGBC LEED
can follow theGuide Illustrations
multitenant SS21 of
complex approach if it is part of a master plan development, regardless
whether the project is using the LEED Campus Program. SSc Site Development - Open Space
·· If the open space is located at a nonadjacent site within the development master plan, it must be protected
from development and must be returned to a natural state (e.g., with native vegetation, close to original
hydrology).
·· A combination of adjacent open space and nonadjacent open space may be used.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. The open space does not have to be adjacent to the individual
buildings but it must be contained within the LEED project boundary.

Campus Approach
Eligible. The open space does not have to be adjacent to the individual buildings but it must be contained within the
LEED campus boundary.
 181

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Projects with
Documentation All Projects
Vegetated Roofs

Site plan that indicates project boundary and campus or master plan
boundary (if applicable), highlighting location and size of any open spaces,
X
vegetated areas, plant species, wetlands or naturalistic man-made ponds
(with side slopes noted), and vegetated roofs

SS
Open space and vegetated area calculations X

Description of how open space is physically accessible and meets area

X
type criteria

OPEN SPACE
Floor-area ratio X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat. Preserved or created habitat, including vegetated
roofs, that meets the criteria of the related credit and includes elements of human interaction can also count towards
this credit.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Wetlands or naturalistic ponds designed for rainwater collection may count as
open space for this credit.

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction. Vegetated roofs and high reflectance paving on roof decks and terraces can
contribute to requirements for the related credit. Vegetated roofs can also be counted as open space if the roof areas
are accessible and the project has a density of 1.5 FAR or greater.

SS Credit Site Assessment. A site assessment can identify open space opportunities and vegetated areas to
preserve, which will support achievement of this credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The credit is no longer tied to presence of a local zoning code; the same open space requirement applies to all
projects.
·· The credit has been revised to emphasize the quality of the open space in addition to the quantity.
·· The intent of the credit has been modified to encourage physical connection to open space and to reduce the
focus on biodiversity (which is covered in SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
182

DEFINITIONS
extensive vegetated roof a roof that is covered with plants and typically not designed for general access. Usually an
extensive system is a rugged green roof that requires little maintenance once established. The planting medium in
extensive vegetated roofs ranges from 1 to 6 inches in depth. (Adapted from U.S. Environmental Protection Agency)

floor-area ratio (FAR) the density of nonresidential land use, exclusive of parking, measured as the total
nonresidential building floor area divided by the total buildable land area available for nonresidential structures. For
example, on a site with 10,000 square feet (930 square meters) of buildable land area, an FAR of 1.0 would be 10,000
SS

square feet (930 square meters) of building floor area. On the same site, an FAR of 1.5 would be 15,000 square feet
(1395 square meters), an FAR of 2.0 would be 20,000 square feet (1860 square meters), and an FAR of 0.5 would be
5,000 square feet (465 square meters).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

intensive vegetated roof a roof that, compared with an extensive vegetated roof, has greater soil volume, supports
a wider variety of plants (including shrubs and trees), and allows a wider variety of uses (including human access).
The depth of the growing medium is an important factor in determining habitat value. The native or adapted plants
selected for the roof should support the site’s endemic wildlife populations. (Adapted from Green Roofs for Healthy
Cities)

multitenant complex a site that was master-planned for the development of stores, restaurants and other
businesses. Retailers may share some services and common areas.

site master plan an overall design or development concept for the project and associated (or potentially associated)
buildings and sites. The plan considers future sustainable use, expansion, and contraction. The site master plan is
typically illustrated, with building plans (if applicable), site drawings of planned phased development, and narrative
descriptions.
 183

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Rainwater Management

RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
This credit applies to:
New Construction (2–3 points) Data Centers (2–3 points)
Core and Shell (2–3 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (2–3 points)
Schools (2–3 points) Hospitality (2–3 points)
Retail (2–3 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

INTENT

To reduce runoff volume and improve water quality by replicating the

natural hydrology and water balance of the site, based on historical
conditions and undeveloped ecosystems in the region.

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. PERCENTILE OF RAINFALL EVENTS

Path 1. 95th Percentile (2 points except Healthcare, 1 point Healthcare)

In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes, manage on site the runoff from the developed site for
the 95th percentile of regional or local rainfall events using low-impact development (LID) and green infrastructure.

Use daily rainfall data and the methodology in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Technical Guidance
on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under Section 438 of the Energy
Independence and Security Act to determine the 95th percentile amount.

OR

Path 2. 98th Percentile (3 points except Healthcare, 2 points Healthcare)

Achieve Path 1 but for the 98th percentile of regional or local rainfall events, using LID and green infrastructure.

OR

Path 3. Zero Lot Line projects only—85th Percentile (3 points except Healthcare, 2 points Healthcare)
The following requirement applies to zero lot line projects in urban areas with a minimum density of 1.5 FAR. In a
manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes, manage on site the runoff from the developed site for the
85th percentile of regional or local rainfall events, using LID and green infrastructure.
184

OR

OPTION 2. NATURAL LAND COVER CONDITIONS

(3 POINTS EXCEPT HEALTHCARE, 2 POINTS HEALTHCARE)
Manage on site the annual increase in runoff volume from the natural land cover condition to the postdeveloped
condition.

PROJECTS THAT ARE PART OF A MULTITENANT COMPLEX ONLY

SS

The credit requirements may be met using a coordinated approach affecting the defined project site that is within the
master plan boundary. Distributed techniques based on a watershed approach are then required.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 185

BEHIND THE INTENT

Conventional site development disrupts natural hydrological systems and watersheds through impervious surfaces,
soil compaction, loss of vegetation, and loss of natural drainage patterns. The cumulative effect of these changes
is disruption to the natural water balance and a loss of water resources. Typically, a conventional site’s rainwater
management technique is to address runoff as a byproduct to be disposed of by piping and conveying it as quickly as
possible into centralized, large facilities at the base of drainage areas. However, such a strategy, although intended to
prevent flooding and promote efficient drainage, can harm watersheds: it increases the volume, temperature, peak
flow, and duration of runoff, eroding streams reducing groundwater recharge and stream baseflow, and increasing

SS
the amount and types of pollutants discharged to surface waters.
The v4 credit addresses the management of both the quantity and quality of rainwater runoff. This is done
through the required use of green infrastructure (GI) and low-impact development (LID) strategies, which improve

RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
upon the conventional approach by mimicking a site’s natural hydrology and managing water as close to the source
as possible. Rainwater is treated as a resource rather than a waste product. The approaches and techniques in this
credit involve minimizing disturbed areas on the project site, limiting the amount of impervious cover on a site, and
then infiltrating, filtering, storing and reusing, evaporating, or detaining rainwater runoff at or close to its source.
The approaches also focus on restoring or designing landscapes to function hydrologically more like the natural,
undisturbed landscape of a given location.
This credit’s process is iterative in nature, which means that the project will need to conceptualize, calculate, and
refine the design until the requirements are achieved to ensure that both the intent of the credit and the project’s
goals are met. As such, the Step-by-Step Guidance is intended to be a guide only. The steps may need to be repeated
or revisited throughout the design process. The rainwater management professional(s) may also have other steps
that they typically follow to achieve the requirements.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Select the appropriate option and path (if applicable) for the project. First investigate data sources for
natural land cover conditions, and choose Option 1 if information is not available.
·· Option 1 is for projects that elect to manage rainfall on their project site such that there is no
immediate surface discharge after development for all rainfall events of a given depth. The specific
rainfall depth is based on a statistical analysis of rainfall records for that project location. If the
project is zero lot line and meets the credit’s required density, Path 3 can be selected. Otherwise, it is
recommended that the rainfall values for both the 95th and 98th percentile events are calculated to
determine whether Path 1 or Path 2 is more appropriate for the project.
·· Option 2 is for projects that elect to evaluate the site hydrologic response based on both natural,
undisturbed (i.e. pre-settlement) conditions, and proposed developed conditions. The proposed
rainwater management design will implement measures that replicate the natural, undisturbed
hydrology for the full range of hydrologic events. This will require hydrologic analysis and comparison
of the site under both natural and proposed conditions, using representative rainfall data such as an
analysis of all rainfall events during a statistically representative period of time.

Option 1. Percentile of Rainfall Events

STEP 1. DETERMINE IF PROJECT QUALIFIES FOR ZERO LOT LINE PATH (PATH 3)
If the project does not qualify for Path 3, move directly to Step 2.
·· Determine if the project meets the definition of “zero lot line.” If the project does not exactly meet this
definition, but the project team feels that it should be considered zero lot line, provide justification for
why it qualifies for this path.
·· Calculate the average density of the area within a ¼-mile (400-meter) radius of the project building. If
the density, expressed in terms of floor-area ratio (FAR) is less than 1.5, the project is ineligible for the
zero lot line path.
186

STEP 2. OBTAIN RAINFALL DATA FOR PROJECT LOCATION

Obtain at least 10 years of historical rainfall data, or as much historical data as possible, representative of
the project climate conditions based on proximity to site, elevation, region, etc. If the team submits less
than 10 years’ worth of information, explain why additional historical data are not available.
·· The rainfall record should be substantially complete, meaning that it is not missing data for extensive
periods of time.
·· For projects in the U.S., long-term rainfall data for many locations are available through the National
Climatic Data Center. Use this database or another source to identify the reference location closest to
the project site where similar precipitation patterns are expected (see Further Explanation, Percentile
SS

of Rainfall Events).
·· For project locations outside the U.S. or other locations not covered by the National Climatic Data
Center, obtain information from local airports, universities, water treatment plants, or other facilities
that maintain long-term precipitation records (see Further Explanation, International Tips).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Data must include the location of the monitoring station, the recording time (usually daily 24-hour
time periods), and the total precipitation depth during the time-step.

STEP 3. DETERMINE VALUE FOR CHOSEN PERCENTILE OF RAINFALL EVENTS

Using the historical rainfall data collected, calculate the rainfall value for the 95th, 98th, or 85th percentile
(in inches or millimeters). This is the precipitation amount that 95 percent (or 98 percent, or 85 percent)
of all rainfall events for the period of record do not exceed and will be represented by a rainfall depth
(see Further Explanation, Percentile of Rainfall Events).
·· Only calculate the 85th percentile if the project meets the criteria in Path 3.
·· If the project does not meet the criteria in Path 3, choose which percentile- either the 95th or the
98th- is most appropriate for the project.

STEP 4. ANALYZE EXISTING SITE PERFORMANCE

Prior to calculating the runoff volume from the proposed site design, analyze how the current site is
performing relative to the management of precipitation.
·· A reduction in the volume of runoff can be achieved by protecting existing natural resources that
serve to reduce the generation of runoff.
·· The site analysis may reveal existing areas that, with no or minimal alterations, could contribute to the
management of rainwater runoff.
·· Examples of areas to preserve include healthy un-compacted soils, riparian buffers, tree canopy, etc.
·· These areas must be protected from disturbance during the construction period. If protected from
disturbance during construction, these natural areas may be excluded from the project area and hence
excluded from runoff volume management

STEP 5. DESIGN THE SITE

Conceptually design the site, including rainwater management strategies, using the site performance
analysis to inform the design. Include any preserved site features that could contribute to a reduction in,
or the management of, runoff volume.
·· Roughly locate, layout, and size rainwater management features in relation to the buildings,
topography, soils, and other site features and the overall site program.
·· It is recommended that a conceptual design be developed first, as projects frequently change and
refine the design later after calculating runoff in order to manage the required volume.

STEP 6. CALCULATE RUNOFF VOLUME TO BE MANAGED ON SITE

Use the conceptual design to calculate the total volume of runoff (in cubic feet or cubic meters)
corresponding to the chosen percentile of rainfall events for the site in its developed condition. This is the
amount of precipitation that the project will need to manage entirely on site through green infrastructure
and low-impact development techniques.
·· Different methods can be used to calculate the runoff volume. The land use runoff coefficients for
small rainfall depths, as developed by Dr. Robert Pitt in Table 5 of Small Storm Hydrology Method, are
recommended.
·· Runoff volume should be calculated by land use type and depends on the specific developed site
conditions of the project, such as amount of paving, permeability of different surfaces, roof area, and
vegetated areas (see Further Explanation, Calculations and Further Explanation, Example).
 187

STEP 7. MANAGE RUNOFF VOLUME ON SITE

Incorporate green infrastructure and low-impact development strategies into the site design to manage,
on site, 100% of the total volume of runoff calculated for the chosen percentile rainfall event and the
project’s developed conditions (the proposed design).
·· Work with the project’s civil engineer, landscape architect, or other qualified professionals to choose
and size the design strategies (see Further Explanation, Green Infrastructure and Low-Impact
Development Strategies).
·· The chosen GI and LID measures should completely manage the required runoff volume for the chosen
rainfall percentile.

SS
·· Calculations must account for the site-specific soil characteristics, the soil infiltration rate, and the
storage capacity of all GI and LID measures.
·· For projects following Path 3, green roofs and rainwater harvesting approaches are the most likely
GI and LID strategies to help zero lot line projects meet the credit requirements. Roofs can be either

RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
extensive or intensive systems. Maintenance will be needed to keep plants healthy and the structure in
good condition. Artificial turf is not an acceptable strategy for vegetated roofs. In some cases, zero lot
line projects can also use infiltration planters, porous pavement, and tree boxes.
·· For projects that are part of a multitenant complex, see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations.

STEP 8. ANALYZE AND REFINE PROPOSED SITE DESIGN

Refine the site design using the calculated runoff and proposed management strategies from the
conceptual design. Determine if the proposed design is performing sufficiently enough to manage the
required volume of runoff onsite using GI/LID strategies. Continue to tweak and refine the design, by
repeating steps 5, 6, and 7 as many times as necessary, in order to achieve the credit requirements and
meet project’s goals.
·· Rainwater management design is an iterative process that involves analyzing schematic designs,
roughly calculating runoff volumes managed, and revising the layout and sizing of management
strategies multiple times before finalizing the overall site design.
·· See Further Explanation, Examples for an example of this process.

Option 2. Natural Land Cover Conditions

STEP 1. OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT NATURAL CONDITIONS

Gather information about how the site (or the site’s immediate region) functioned prior to any alteration
or human activity. A sense of the natural conditions can be deduced through an analysis of land cover
and general hydrologic function.
·· Natural land cover conditions refer to the vegetation and soil conditions that existed in the area prior
to development activities.
·· Natural hydrology refers to the partitioning of rainfall into components of infiltration,
evapotranspiration, and runoff in amounts and patterns that replicate the natural hydrology.
·· Examples of alterations, development, and human activities include large-scale tree clearing and
grading, industry, agriculture, mining, construction, municipal development, commercial development,
and residential development.
·· Natural vegetation maps, soil maps, or a description of typical land cover conditions in the project’s
region may be helpful to evaluate. Determination of the natural land cover conditions can also be
based on the historical context of the site (e.g., forested, grassland) and an assessment of the soil
conditions.
·· For the purposes of this Option, an estimate of the natural conditions is acceptable.
·· Sources of information include local governments and state environmental agencies, conservation or
water resource organizations, historical societies or historic preservation groups, libraries, colleges and
universities, private historical mapping companies, and (in the U.S.) EPA, Department of the Interior,
U.S. Geological Survey, Oak Ridge National Laboratory (NASA), National Center for Atmospheric
Research, and Department of Agriculture.
188

STEP 2. CALCULATE NATURAL CONDITIONS

Evaluate the full range of hydrologic rainfall events over a 10-year time period. Alternatively, an “average”
representative rainfall year may be developed (continuous modeling simulation is required).
·· The goal of this step is to determine the pattern and distribution of natural conditions in order to
understand how the site functioned and thus what amount of runoff needs to be managed on site.
In other words, to understand hypothetically how the site has performed over a period of record.
·· All variables needed to complete this step are estimated based on the historical land cover conditions.
For example, runoff curve numbers for the site are estimated based on the historical vegetation cover
and soil conditions.
SS

STEP 3. CALCULATE RUNOFF VOLUME TO BE MANAGED ON SITE

Calculate the runoff volume under the developed (proposed design) conditions, and compare it to the
runoff volume under the natural conditions. If there is an increase in runoff volume between natural and
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

developed conditions over the time period evaluated, manage the difference on site.
·· In rare cases, the natural land cover conditions would manage less than the 95th percentile. In this
case, the project is only requiired to manage the runoff volume that the natural land cover conditions
would manage.

STEP 4. MANAGE RUNOFF VOLUME ON SITE

Similar to Option 1, incorporate green infrastructure and low-impact development strategies into the site
design to manage, on site, the required volume of runoff.
·· Portions of the site that are natural or close to natural may mitigate rainwater runoff and supplement
other best management practices to achieve the goal of natural hydrologic performance.
·· Work with the project’s civil engineer, landscape architect, or other qualified professionals to choose
and size the design strategies (see Further Explanation, Green Infrastructure and Low-Impact
Development Strategies).
·· Confirm that the chosen GI and LID measures will completely manage the required runoff volume.
·· For projects that are part of a multitenant complex, see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
The land use runoff coefficients for small rainfall depths in the Small Storm Hydrology Method are recommended
(runoff coefficients express the fraction of rainfall which is converted into runoff). The project team may choose the
runoff volume calculation methodology most appropriate for the project, provided sufficient documentation and
justification to demonstrate that the intent of the credit is being met.
The U.S. EPA Stormwater Management Model (SWMM) and National Stormwater Calculator is a general tool
that is available for compliance overview; it is not recommended for use in design. It can be used in the project’s
conceptual design phase for estimating rainwater and runoff, and choosing initial management strategies.
The use of the Cover Complex Method is not recommended at this time for the calculation of runoff volume from
small rainfall events (i.e. less than 2.5 in [63.5 mm] of precipitation in 24 hours).
Many rainwater software programs include calculation methodologies. Computer modeling programs based on
the Small Storm Hydrology Method, such as WinSLAMM, are acceptable tools.
 189

Small Storm Hydrology Method1

Large impervious areas– This category describes impervious areas with an average dimension greater than 24 feet
(7.3 meters) in any direction. Examples of large impervious areas include parking lots with curbs, roads with curbs,
highways, etc.
Small impervious areas – This category describes impervious areas with an average dimension no greater than 24
feet (7.3 meters) in any direction. Examples of small impervious areas include roads without curbs, small parking lots
without curbs, and sidewalks.
For each land use type, runoff volume is calculated based on land use area and land use coefficient using the

SS
following equation:
IP units
P

RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
Runoff Volume = × Rv × A
12
where:
Runoff Volume is from the percentile rainfall event (ft3)
P = percentile rainfall depth (in)

Rv = Small Storm Hydrology Method runoff coefficient (alternatively, Rv can be calculated using
the following equation: Rv = 0.05 + 0.009(I), where I = percent impervious area expressed as a
whole number)

A = area of land use (ft2)

For a site with multiple land uses, Runoff Volume can be calculated as follows:

P P P
Runoff
volume = 12 × Rvi × Ai + 12 × Rvi+1 × Ai+1 +...+ 12 × Rvn × An

i=1

SI units
P
Runoff Volume = × Rv × A
1000
where:
Runoff Volume is from the percentile rainfall event (m3)
P = percentile rainfall depth (mm)

Rv = Small Storm Hydrology Method runoff (alternatively, Rv can be calculated using the following
equation: Rv = 0.05 + 0.009(I), where I = percent impervious area expressed as a whole number)

A = area of land use (m2)

For a site with multiple land uses, Runoff Volume can be calculated as follows:

P P P
Runoff
volume = 1000
× Rvi × Ai + 1000
× Rvi+1 × Ai+1 +...+ 1000
× Rvn × An

i=1

1. Robert Pitt, P.E., Ph.D., DEE, Small Storm Hydrology and Why it is Important for the Design of Stormwater Control Practices In: Advances in Modeling the
Management of Stormwater Impacts, Volume 7. (Edited by W. James). Computational Hydraulics International, Guelph, Ontario and Lewis Publishers/
CRC Press. 1999.
190

PERCENTILE OF RAINFALL EVENTS2

A percentile rainfall event represents a precipitation amount that the chosen percent of all rainfall events for the
period of record do not exceed. For example, the 95th percentile of rainfall events is the measured precipitation
depth accumulated over 24 hours that ranks as the 95th-percent rainfall depth based on the range of all daily event
occurrences during the period of record. The 24-hour period is typically defined as 12:00:00 A.M. to 11:59:59 P.M.

Use the following steps to determine the 95th percentile of rainfall events:
1. Obtain a long-term daily precipitation data set for the project location (e.g., for U.S. projects, from the National
SS

Climatic Data Center website; for projects outside the U.S., see International Tips). In general, a 30-year period of
rainfall record is preferred for the analysis. The raw data are collected by most airports. At least 10 years of data
must be included if available.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

2. Import the data into the USGBC rainfall events calculator or another spreadsheet. If using another spreadsheet,
organize daily precipitation records in a single column, in any order.
3. Review the records, looking for anomalies, and identify and remove any erroneous or flagged data points.
4. Remove rainfall events of less than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm). The amount of precipitation from these small events
generally produces no measurable runoff because of absorption by permeable surfaces and interception and
evaporation by impermeable and vegetated surfaces.
5. The USGBC calculator determines the various percentile rainfall amounts. If using another spreadsheet
software, apply a percentile function (or similar) to obtain results.

Detailed explanation regarding calculation of the percentile event using daily rainfall records can be found in EPA
841-B-09-001, December 2009, www.epa.gov/owow/nps/lid/section438.

GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE AND LOW-IMPACT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGIES

The goal of low impact development is to manage water as close to the source as possible using soil and vegetation-
based systems. In addition to mimicking natural hydrologic cycle processes, green infrastructure and low-impact
development help integrate the site with the surrounding watershed, are appropriate to the local ecosystem and
climate, and deliver such other benefits as water reuse, habitat creation, and species diversity.
Prior to calculating the runoff volume from the project area, the project is encouraged to reduce the volume
of runoff by protecting existing natural resources that serve to reduce the generation of runoff. Examples include
healthy uncompacted soils, riparian buffers, tree canopy, etc. These areas must be protected from disturbance
during the construction period in order to be effective. If protected from disturbance during construction, these
natural areas can be excluded from runoff volume management.
All runoff from the chosen percentile of precipitation events must be managed such that there is no surface
discharge from the site. Techniques include, but are not limited to, infiltration, storage and re-use, bioretention,
open-grid pavement, and the reduction of impervious area. Infiltration may not be feasible in some cases based
on the soil or geological conditions of the site. Karst geology and areas where water infiltrates at less than 1/2 inch
(25 mm) per hour are two examples of situations that can be unfavorable for infiltration. The engineer, landscape
architect, or rainwater professional will ultimately determine the best solution for the project’s unique conditions.
Continued maintenance of all rainwater management strategies is important in order for them to remain effective
over time.
Project teams should consult EPA’s National Menu of Stormwater Best Practices and consider the following
questions when selecting measures for the project:
·· Which GI and LID measures will best mimic natural site hydrology?
·· How can multiple measures be used together (in a “treatment train” approach) to manage rainwater?
·· What are the infiltration rates and capacities of the most practical measures and how might the site’s soil
conditions affect their efficiency?
·· What are the types and infiltration rates of existing soil conditions, and what design modifications might need
to be made, if any, to the best management practices to satisfy performance goals?

2. Components adapted from Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under Section 438 of the Energy
Independence and Security Act.
 191

·· How effective are the measures at removing contaminants from the rainwater runoff?
·· How will the measures be maintained?

EXAMPLES
Example 1.

Bioretention Area C:

SS
Prunus americana,
Impervious roof area LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY groundcovers, etc. See plant
schedule for full
Impervious entry plaza list of species used.

RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
58

56

56
56

54

54
54
54

52 52
52

52 52
50

+
48 LP 51.5
50 +
48 52
LP 46
46
+ +
LP 44 HP 51.5 +
HP

54

Bioretention Area A: Prunus

americana, Andropogon scoparius,
Existing trees to remain Iris sp., etc. See plant schedule for Lawn
full list of species used.
Porous paving
Bioretention Area B: Prunus Overflow drain: downspout (drive aisle and
americana, Andropogon scoparius, directed to bioretention area parking area)
Iris sp., etc. See plant schedule for
full list of species used. Curb cut

Proposed impervious area (roof and sidewalk) = 11,000 sq ft (1022 sq m)

Existing vegetated roof area = 9,000 sq ft (836 sq m)
Existing pervious concrete patio = 4,000 sq ft (372 sq m)
Proposed porous paving = 10,000 sq ft (929 sq m)
Proposed Bioretention Area A: 750 sq ft (70 sq m)
Proposed Bioretention Area B: 750 sq ft (70 sq m)
Proposed Bioretention Area C: 300 sq ft (28 sq m)

Figure 1. Example site plan

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS16

BD+C SSc Rainwater Management (Batch 2)
192

The project team has selected Option 1, Path 1, and pulled daily rainfall data from the National Climatic Data Center
for the previous 10 years. Based on the historical data, the 95th-percentile storm delivers 1.1 inches (28 mm) of rain.

TABLE 1. Example percentiles of rainfall events

Rainfall amount Percentile of rainfall events

1.33 inches (34 millimeters) 99

1.29 (33) 98
SS

1.22 (31) 97

1.15 (29) 96
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

1.1 (28) 95

1.05 (27) 94

1.01 (26) 93

0.96 (24) 92

To supplement the capacity of the pervious landscaped area, the project team has identified several conceptual GI
and LID measures- bioretention areas, porous paving, a rain garden, and pervious decking- to capture rainwater
from impervious surfaces. To ensure that the designed site manages all the rainwater runoff generated during the
95th percentile storm, the team calculates how the GI and LID measures manage the runoff, and it is verified that all
required runoff is managed on site.

Sample documentation narrative describing GI and LID measures:

The bioretention facilities incorporated into the site design are soil- and plant-based filtration systems that
receive runoff from the developed site areas. They are located at low points on the site, where rainfall collects
(see site plan). Rainfall runoff infiltrates into a sandy medium that temporarily holds the rainwater, facilitating
numerous physical, biological, and chemical processes. Vegetation planted in the bioretention facilities, including
Andropogon scoparius, Iris sp., and Prunus americana, help filter particles in the runoff, assimilate nutrients and
contaminants from the neighboring roadway, degrade engine oil, and oxygenate conditions to promote beneficial
microorganisms. Bioretention mimics natural site hydrology by facilitating natural processes such as infiltration and
evapotranspiration. The area of bioretention in this project meets the 95th percentile criteria, managing rainwater
runoff via natural processes.

Example 2.
Example 2 follows a project located in Maryland that attempted Option 1, Percentile of Rainfall Events. It gives an
overview of the project, and then details the iterative rainwater management design process and calculations used to
achieve the credit requirements. It is broken into two modules, both of which are located in the web-based reference
guide on the right side of the “Guide” page.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
If rainfall data for the project location are not available through the National Climatic Data Center database, the
databases of the UN Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) and Aquastat can be good sources of information for
country-level rainwater data. Local rainfall data are best; use country-level data if necessary.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
 193

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Multitenant Complex Projects, Master Plan
The requirements may be met using a coordinated approach for multiple-building projects. This could include a
group of distributed LID techniques within the boundary of the master plan to manage rainwater generated from the
project site (Figure 2).
If a coordinated approach is used for the multitenant or multiple-building areas, distributed LID techniques
based on a watershed approach are required. Accordingly, highly centralized approaches such as large ponds or
wetlands that manage all of the runoff from the master plan site do not meet the intent of this credit. Instead, design

SS
LID strategies to manage runoff as close as possible to the source and in such a way that the strategies best maintain
or restore the watershed’s hydrological and ecological functions.
There are LID strategies that may be easier to implement for master planned developments with more open

RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
space opportunities.
Examples include using swales instead of piping, promoting sheet flow to natural areas, and reducing the width of
paved roadways.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All Projects Option 1, Path 3 Option 2

Rainfall data X

Rainfall events calculator or calculations for the chosen percentile storm X

Runoff volume calculations X

Plans, details, or cross sections depicting site conditions and GI or LID

strategies, highlighting topography, soil qualities, direction of water flow, X
and area of site that each facility addresses

Narrative confirming measures qualifyas GI or LID X

Calculations for volume of rainwater managed by GI

X
or LID strategies

Explanation for why 10 years of historic rainfall data are not available
X
for the project location (if applicable)

Description of conditions that make the project zero lot line X

Floor area ratio X

Documents illustrating natural land cover conditions X

Multitenant complex projects only:summary of centralized approach

X
and associated distributed techniques

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Integrative Process Credit. GI and LID measures, such as harvesting and reusing rainwater for indoor and/or
outdoor water use, will contribute to the preliminary water budget analysis required for the related credit.

SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat. Vegetated areas used as part of GI and LID approaches
can be excluded from the calculations for the related credit.

SS Credit Open Space. Some vegetated GI and LID areas may qualify as open space areas for the related credit.
Specifically, wetlands or naturally-designed ponds may count as open space if the side slope gradients are vegetated
and average 1:4 (vertical:horizontal) or less.
194

SS Credit Site Assessment. The assessment of site hydrology and soils conducted for the Site Assessment Credit
may inform appropriate GI and LID measures for SS Credit Rainwater Management.

SS Credit Site Master Plan. If project teams have the opportunity to plan the school property’s overall rainwater
strategy or watershed approach in the master planning phase, the rainwater management option for multitenant
complex strategies may be applied to the entire school property area.

WE Prerequisite and WE Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction. GI and LID measures that harvest and reuse
rainwater for irrigation may help achieve the related credit by reducing the potable water demand.
SS

WE Prerequisite and WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction. GI and LID measures that harvest and reuse
rainwater to supplement plumbing fixture water use may help reduce potable water demand.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction. Vegetated roofs installed for achievement of this credit will also qualify for the
related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Stormwater quality and quantity management credits have been combined into a single Rainwater
Management credit.
·· Projects must use GI and LID rainwater management techniques on site.
·· A specific path has been created to accommodate reduced rainwater management opportunities in zero lot
line urban projects.
·· The multitenant complex path has been expanded to all projects types in addition to retail projects.
·· The metric by which to test compliance is now the total volume of runoff calculated for the 95th percentile of
regional or local storm events, rather than the one-year and two-year storm events.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
U.S. EPA Technical Guidance on Implementing the Rainwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects
under Section 438 of the Energy Independence and Security Act: epa.gov

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Manage 100% of rainwater that falls within the project boundary.

DEFINITIONS
green infrastructure a soil- and vegetation-based approach to wet weather management that is cost-effective,
sustainable, and environmentally friendly. Green infrastructure management approaches and technologies
infiltrate, evapotranspire, capture and reuse stormwater to maintain or restore natural hydrologies. (Adapted from
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency)

low-impact development (LID) an approach to managing rainwater runoff that emphasizes on-site natural features
to protect water quality, by replicating the natural land cover hydrologic regime of watersheds, and addressing runoff
close to its source. Examples include better site design principles (e.g., minimizing land disturbance, preserving
vegetation, minimizing impervious cover), and design practices (e.g., rain gardens, vegetated swales and buffers,
permeable pavement, rainwater harvesting, soil amendments). These are engineered practices that may require
specialized design assistance.
 195

manage (rainwater) on site to capture and retain a specified volume of rainfall to mimic natural hydrologic
function. Examples of rainwater management include strategies that involve evapotranspiration, infiltration, and
capture and reuse.

master plan boundary the limits of a site master plan. The master plan boundary includes the project area and may
include all associated buildings and sites outside of the LEED project boundary. The master plan boundary considers
future sustainable use, expansion, and contraction.

natural site hydrology the natural land cover function of water occurrence, distribution, movement, and balance

SS
zero lot line project a project whose building footprint covers 90% of the site area within the LEED project
boundary, and whose unbuilt area does not exceed 5,000 square feet (464.5 square meters)

RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SS

196
 197

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Heat Island Reduction

HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION

This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1-2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To minimize effects on microclimates and human and wildlife habitats

by reducing heat islands.

REQUIREMENTS
Choose one of the following options:

OPTION 1. NONROOF AND ROOF (2 POINTS EXCEPT HEALTHCARE, 1 POINT HEALTHCARE)

Meet the following criterion:

Area of Area of High- Area of

Nonroof Reflectance Vegetated
Measures Roof Roof
Total Site
+ + ≥ Paving Area
+ Total Roof Area
0.5 0.75 0.75

Alternatively, an SRI and SR weighted average approach may be used to calculate compliance.

Use any combination of the following strategies.

Nonroof Measures
·· Use the existing plant material or install plants that provide shade over paving areas (including playgrounds)
on the site within 10 years of planting. Install vegetated planters. Plants must be in place at the time of
occupancy permit and cannot include artificial turf.
·· Provide shade with structures covered by energy generation systems, such as solar thermal collectors,
photovoltaics, and wind turbines.
·· Provide shade with architectural devices or structures that have a three-year aged solar reflectance (SR) value
of at least 0.28. If three-year aged value information is not available, use materials with an initial SR of at least
0.33 at installation.
198

·· Provide shade with vegetated structures.

·· Use paving materials with a three-year aged solar reflectance (SR) value of at least 0.28. If three-year aged value
information is not available, use materials with an initial SR of at least 0.33 at installation.
·· Use an open-grid pavement system (at least 50% unbound).

High-Reflectance Roof
Use roofing materials that have an SRI equal to or greater than the values in Table 1. Meet the three-year aged SRI
value. If three-year aged value information is not available, use materials that meet the initial SRI value.
SS

TABLE 1. Minimum solar reflectance index value, by roof slope

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Slope Initial SRI 3-year aged SRI

Low-sloped roof ≤ 2:12 82 64

Steep-sloped roof > 2:12 39 32

Vegetated Roof
Install a vegetated roof.

OR

OPTION 2. PARKING UNDER COVER (1 POINT)

Place a minimum of 75% of parking spaces under cover. Any roof used to shade or cover parking must (1) have a
three-year aged SRI of at least 32 (if three-year aged value information is not available, use materials with an initial
SRI of at least 39 at installation), (2) be a vegetated roof, or (3) be covered by energy generation systems, such as
solar thermal collectors, photovoltaics, and wind turbines.
 199

BEHIND THE INTENT

Dark, nonreflective surfaces used for parking, roads, roofs, walkways, and other hardscapes absorb the sun’s warmth
and radiate heat, creating heat islands. Urban areas can have temperatures 1.8º to 5.4ºF (1º to 3ºC) warmer than
surrounding suburban and undeveloped areas, and as much as 22ºF (12ºC) warmer in evenings. These heat islands
may contribute to regional average warming trends.1 A study of surface warming resulting from rapid urbanization
in east China found urban heat islands responsible for 24.2% of regional warming.2 Urban heat island effects have
numerous negative consequences: plants and animals sensitive to temperature fluctuations may find habitat affected

SS
by heat islands inhospitable. Human health may suffer because exposure to ground-level pollution is often worse
in places affected by heat islands. Additionally, heat islands increase cooling loads in the summer, necessitating
larger, more powerful air-conditioners that use more electricity, in turn increasing cooling costs, producing more
greenhouse gases, and generating pollution.

HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION

According to a study of the metropolitan areas of Baton Rouge, Chicago, Houston, Sacramento, and Salt Lake
City by the Department of Energy’s Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, the energy savings potential of heat
island reduction measures ranges from $4 million to $15 million per year.3 Efforts to reduce heat islands can have
a reasonable payback period when included as part of an integrated systems approach to improving building
performance, such as by installing solar panels on shading devices or using a vegetated roof to insulate a building and
extend the life of the roof.
The most effective measure of a roofing material’s ability to reject solar heat is the solar reflectance index (SRI).
However, to measure the solar heat rejection of components that are not roofing materials, or “nonroof”—for
example, vegetation, shading devices, and other less reflective components—solar reflectance (SR) is used in this
credit instead. SR is a more appropriate way to measure nonroof materials, which have more thermal mass. In
addition to a product’s initial SRI or SR value, this credit considers a product’s three-year-aged SRI or SR values,
which measure material performance over time. The credit encourages project teams to adopt a variety of strategies,
including reducing hardscape and incorporating high-SRI or high-SR materials such as vegetation and shaded
parking, which minimize a project’s overall contribution to heat island effects.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Determine which option the project will pursue. Exemplary performance is available to teams that pursue both
options and locate 100% of parking under cover.

·· Option 1 is for projects with compliant roofs and at-grade (i.e., nonroof) systems, but no
covered parking.
·· Option 2 is for projects with only covered or underground parking.

Option 1. Nonroof and Roof

STEP 1. MINIMIZE HARDSCAPE

In early design, look for opportunities to limit the amount of hardscape on the project site. Increasing the
landscaped portion of the site is the most effective strategy for reducing overall heat island effects and
supports achievement of other credits (see Further Explanation, Heat Island Mitigation Strategies and
Related Credit Tips).

STEP 2. IDENTIFY HARDSCAPE AND ROOF AREA

On a site plan, determine the total hardscape area and the total applicable roof area within the project
boundary.

1. U.S Environmental Protection Agency, Heat Island Effect, epa.gov/heatisland/index.htm (accessed May 2013).
2. Yang, X., Y. Hou, and B. Chen, Observed Surface Warming Induced by Urbanization in East China, J. Geophys. Res., 116 (2011), D14113,
doi:10.1029/2010JD015452.
3. U.S Environmental Protection Agency, Heat Island Effect: Urban Heat Island Pilot Project (UHIPP), epa.gov/hiri/pilot/index.html (accessed May 2013).
200

·· Hardscape area includes all paved roads, sidewalks, courtyards, and parking lots.
·· Applicable roof area excludes roof area covered by mechanical equipment, solar energy panels,
skylights, and any other appurtenances.
·· The top level of multilevel parking structures is considered nonroof surface if it has parking spaces, but
roof area if it has no parking spaces.

STEP 3. SELECT ROOFING MATERIALS

To the extent feasible, incorporate vegetated roof systems or high-reflectance roofing materials that
comply with Table 1 of the rating system requirements. On the site plan, determine the areas of vegetated
SS

and high-reflectance roof. For all applicable roof areas, gather manufacturer’s documentation of SRI to
verify compliance with credit requirements.
·· Roof reflectance is the focus on sites that are designed to minimize hardscape.
·· Roofing material selection is typically the most economical way to mitigate heat island effect.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Consider how roof surfaces will be maintained. For example, regular cleaning will be needed to
maintain the reflectivity of high-SRI surfaces.
·· Selected materials may meet either the initial SRI threshold or the 3-year aged SRI threshold.
They are not required to meet both.

STEP 4. IDENTIFY AREA OF PLANTERS AND SHADED, PERMEABLE, AND REFLECTIVE

HARDSCAPE
On the site plan, determine the area of hardscape that is mitigated by one of the eligible nonroof
measures listed in the credit requirements. Gather manufacturer’s documentation of SR and paving
permeability, as applicable, to verify compliance with credit requirements.
·· Calculate the area of each nonroof measure in plan view.
·· Count each hardscape surface only once, even if it is addressed through multiple strategies (e.g.,
permeable paving that is also shaded).
·· Selected materials may meet either the initial SR threshold or the 3-year aged SR threshold.
They are not required to meet both.

STEP 5. EVALUATE COMPLIANCE AGAINST CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Determine credit compliance using Equation 1 (standard) or Equation 2 (weighted) (see Further
Explanation, Examples 1 and 2).
·· Equation 1 determines the combined compliance of roof and nonroof measures for the whole project.
·· Equation 2 weights the SR and SRI for total hardscape and roof area, showing its overall consequence
on heat island effect. This equation is useful for projects that have multiple roof angles and nonroof or
roof materials that fall both above and below the required SR and SRI values.
·· Project teams should first evaluate compliance with Equation 1. If the project does not achieve
compliance with Equation 1, the team should move to Equation 2.

EQUATION 1. Standard nonroof or roof calculation

Area of Area of High- Area of

Nonroof Reflectance Vegetated
Measures Roof Roof
Total Site
+ + ≥ Paving Area
+ Total Roof Area
0.5 0.75 0.75

EQUATION 2. Weighted nonroof or roof calculation

SR of high SRI of high

reflectance reflectance

( ) ( )
1 2
Area of high nonroof A Area of Area of high roof A Area of
reflectance × ——————— other nonroof reflectance × ——————— vegetated
nonroof A Required SR measures roof A Required SR roof Total
Total
Site
+ + + ≥ Paving + Roof
Area
0.5 0.5 0.75 0.75 Area

1. Summed for all high-reflectance nonroof areas.

2. Summed for all high-reflectance roof areas.
 201

STEP 6. INCORPORATE ADDITIONAL MITIGATION STRATEGIES IF NECESSARY

If the project does not meet the credit requirements with either calculation, revise the project design
to extend or incorporate additional nonroof or roof mitigation strategies. Then recalculate to confirm
compliance.
Once the credit strategy is finalized, include performance requirements in the applicable specification
sections, or specify particular systems and products that meet credit requirements.

SS
Option 2. Parking under Cover

STEP 1. DETERMINE TOTAL VEHICLE PARKING SPACES IN PROJECT

HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION

Calculate the number of parking spaces within the LEED project boundary. This value must be consistent
with the parking spaces used for other credits.
·· Include motorcycle parking as vehicle parking spaces.
·· Do not count bicycle parking spaces.

STEP 2. LOCATE AT LEAST 75% OF PARKING SPACES UNDER COVER

Where possible, locate parking spaces underground, under a deck, under a roof, or under a building.
·· Indicate covered parking on a site map.
·· Count uncovered parking at the top level of a multilevel parking structure as uncovered spaces in the
credit calculations.

STEP 3. DESIGN PARKING COVER TO MEET CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Ensure that the roof over the parking area meets the credit requirements for eligible types of parking
cover (see Further Explanation, Heat Island Mitigation Strategies).
·· Uncovered parking at the top level of a multilevel parking structure is not required to meet the
prescribed roof criteria because it is considered nonroof surface.
·· If there are no parking spaces on the top level of a multilevel parking structure, this area is considered
roof area and must comply with the criteria listed in the credit requirements.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.
202

HEAT ISLAND MITIGATION STRATEGIES

TABLE 2. Roof strategies

Strategy Rules and tips

• Consider effects of glare on traffic, pedestrians, and adjacent buildings, especially if project has steep-
sloped roofs
High-reflectance roof
• Consider high-reflectance materials’ need for maintenance (e.g., regular cleaning) required to keep
SS

these materials from losing reflectivity over time

• Artificial turf grass does not count

• Plants must be in place at occupancy
Vegetated roof • Extensive or intensive vegetated roofs are eligible; roof planters contribute only if part of a vegetated
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

roof system
• Consider maintenance required for both plants and structural integrity

TABLE 3. Nonroof strategies

Strategy Rules and tips

• Plants must be in place at occupancy

Shading with new or existing plant material • Assume 10-year canopy width at noon (i.e., in plan view, plant canopy width has no
extending shadows, regardless of time of year)

• Artificial turf grass does not count

Vegetated planters
• Plants must be in place at occupancy

Paved area (not roof area) shaded by covering with energy generation equipment
Shading structures with energy generation
(e.g., solar thermal collectors, photovoltaics, wind turbines) is eligible

Shading architectural devices or structures Materials must have 3-year aged SR value of at least 0.28, or initial SR of at least 0.33

Vegetated shading structures Plants must be in place at occupancy

• Materials must have 3-year aged SR value of at least 0.28, or initial SR of at least
0.33
High-reflectance paving
• Consider maintenance (e.g., regular cleaning) required to keep these materials
from losing reflectivity over time

Open-grid paving Must be at least 50% unbound

TABLE 4. Covered parking strategies

Strategy Rules and tips

• May be underground, under deck, under roof, or under building

• Stacked parking is considered covered parking
Undercover parking
• Any roof used to shade or cover parking must meet criteria listed in credit
requirements

EXAMPLES
Figure 1 illustrates a project that is seeking to achieve Options 1 and 2.
 203
Driving aisle with a 3-year aged SR Parking area with an SR of 0.34
of 0.28 (contributes towards credit (contributes toward credit achievement)
achievement)

Sidewalk (does not contribute Shaded area (contributes

towards credit) towards credit achievement)

Building Mechanical Walkway with a 3-year aged SR of 0.30

footprint equipment (contributes towards credit acheivement)

SS
HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION
Lawn

Elm shade trees Elm shade trees

Vegetation at the ground plane (ilex sp.) LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

Vegetated roof area = 1,200 sq ft (110 sq m) Total nonroof hardscape area = 3,900 sq ft
(360 sq m)
High-reflectance roof area (3 year aged
SRI of 90) = 1,050 sq ft (100 sq m) Total roof area = 2,450 sq ft (230 sq m)
Parking structure under cover = 3,800 sq ft (350 sq m) Mechanical equipment on roof = 200 sq ft
Surface parking (compliant) (20 sq m)

High-reflectance paving area (3-year aged SRI of 90) =

2,600 sq ft (240 sq m)
Vegetation at the ground plane = 1,920 sq ft (180 sq m)
Figure 1. Example site plan Tree cover/shade = 1,000 sq ft (95 sq m)

Example 1. Standard nonroof or roof calculation

ONSTRUCTION
The project includes 3,900 square feet (360 square meters) of hardscape. The total roof area is 2,450 square feet (230
square meters), of which 200 square feet (20 square meters) is covered by mechanical equipment, making the total
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations
applicable roof area 2,250 square feet (210 square meters). The following heat island mitigation strategies have been
SS13
included in the project design: BD+C SSc Heat Island Reduction (Batch 2)
·· 400 ft (35 m ) of sidewalk with 3-year aged SR of 0.30
2 2

·· 600 ft2 (55 m2) parking canopy covered with photovoltaic panels
·· 1,000 ft2 (95 m2) of shading by tree canopy
·· 1,200 ft2 (110 m2) vegetated roof
·· 1,050 ft2 (100 m2) of high-reflectance roof with 3-year aged SRI of 90
204

The project team calculates compliance using Equation 1, as follows:

400 ft2 (35 m2)
+
600 ft2 (55 m2)
+ 1,050 ft2 1,200 ft2
1,000 ft2 (95 m2) (100 m2) (110 m2)
3,900 ft2 2,250 ft2
+ + ≥ (360 m2)
+ (210 m2)
0.5 0.75 0.75
SS

The total calculated area of nonroof and roof mitigation strategies (7,000 square feet [650 square meters]) exceeds
the sum of total site hardscape and total applicable roof area (6,150 square feet [570 square meters]), so the project
achieves the credit.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Example 2. Weighted nonroof or roof calculation

The project includes 3,900 square feet (360 square meters) of hardscape. The total roof area is 2,450 square feet (230
square meters), of which 200 square feet (20 square meters) is covered by mechanical equipment, making the total
applicable roof area 2,250 square feet (210 square meters). The following heat island mitigation strategies have been
included in the project design:
·· 400 ft2 (35 m2) of permeable sidewalks that are 55% unbound
·· 600 ft2 (55 m2) parking canopy covered with vegetated roofing system
·· 1,000 ft2 (95 m2) of shading by tree canopy
·· 1,200 ft2 (110 m2) vegetated roof
·· 400 ft2 (35 m2) of steep-sloped roof with initial SRI of 42
·· 650 ft2 (60 m2) of steep-sloped roof with initial SRI of 34

The project team calculates compliance using Equation 2, as follows:

400 ft2 (35 m2)

+
600 ft2 (55 m2)
+
1,000 ft2 (95 m2)
+
( 400 ft2
(35 m2)
×
SRI 42
———————
SRI 39 ) (
+ 650 ft2
(60 m2)
×
SRI 34
———————
SRI 39 ) +
1,200 ft2
(110 m2)
≥
3,900 ft2
+
2,250 ft2
(360 m2) (210 m2)
0.5 0.75 0.75

The total calculated area of nonroof and roof mitigation strategies (6,929 square feet, 636 square meters) exceeds
the sum of total site hardscape and total applicable roof area (6,150 square feet, 570 square meters), so the project
achieves the credit.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Projects outside the U.S. can contact manufacturers directly and ask for SRI information. If manufacturers do
not provide this information, the project team can identify a similar material from the Cool Roof Rating Council
standard for comparison to show that the project’s material meets the intent of the credit.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
 205

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Nonroof and roof area calculations X

Site plan(s) with elements and measurements, including LEED project boundary, building footprint,
X
roof and hardscape area, and area of each roof and nonroof measure

SS
Manufacturer’s documentation of SRI, SR, and paving permeability X X

Parking space calculations X

HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION

RELATED CREDIT TIPS
SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat. Minimizing the amount of hardscape increases the
amount of site area available to meet the 30% site restoration threshold for the related credit’s Option 1 (On-Site
Restoration). Vegetated roofs can also contribute to Option 1 if the plant material meets the criteria for native or
adapted.

SS Credit Open Space. Vegetated roofs can be counted as open space if the project has a development density of 1.5
floor-area ratio and the vegetated roofs are extensive or intensive and are accessible to occupants. Qualifying roof-
based, physically accessible paving areas can also count toward the related credit if the project has a development
density of 1.5 floor-area ratio. The site assessment process in SS Credit Open Space can be used to identify the best
opportunities for mitigating heat islands.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Vegetated roofs can contribute to rainwater management. Reducing a site’s
hardscape area and/or using open-grid paving will improve infiltration rates.

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Vegetated roofs
help insulate buildings, and the cooler surrounding microclimate may lower a building’s cooling load and improve
energy performance. High-reflectance roofs experience less solar heat gain and may therefore lower cooling loads
(but increase heating loads in low-rise buildings in cold climates).

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The credit combines the roof and nonroof heat island credits from LEED 2009.
·· Vegetated roofs and high-reflectance roofs now have equal weight when calculating compliance.
·· Tree canopy shade area is now calculated after 10 years of growth rather than five years.
·· The initial SRI thresholds for roofing material have increased.
·· Credit compliance for nonroof hardscape is now calculated using SR values instead of SRI values.
·· The credit now takes into account the three-year aged SRI values for roofing material.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASTM Standards E903 and E892: astm.org

Cool Roof Rating Council Standard (CRRC-1): coolroofs.org

206

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Achieve both Options 1 and 2. Locate 100% of parking under cover.

DEFINITIONS
appurtenance a built-in, nonstructural portion of a roof system. Examples include skylights, ventilators, mechanical
SS

equipment, partitions, and solar energy panels.

heat island effect the thermal absorption by hardscape, such as dark, nonreflective pavement and buildings,
and its subsequent radiation to surrounding areas. Other contributing factors may include vehicle exhaust, air-
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

conditioners, and street equipment. Tall buildings and narrow streets reduce airflow and exacerbate the effect.

infrared (thermal) emittance a value between 0 and 1 (or 0% and 100%) that indicates the ability of a material to
shed infrared radiation (heat). A cool roof should have a high thermal emittance. The wavelength range for radiant
energy is roughly 5 to 40 micrometers. Most building materials (including glass) are opaque in this part of the
spectrum and have an emittance of roughly 0.9, or 90%. Clean, bare metals, such as untarnished galvanized steel,
have a low emittance and are the most important exceptions to the 0.9 rule. In contrast, aluminum roof coatings
have intermediate emittance levels. (Adapted from Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory)

open-grid pavement system pavements that consist of loose substrates supported by a grid of a more structurally
sound grid or webbing. Pervious concrete and porous asphalt are not considered open grid as they are considered
bounded materials. Unbounded, loose substrates do not transfer and store heat like bound and compacted materials
do.

solar reflectance (SR) the fraction of solar energy that is reflected by a surface on a scale of 0 to 1. Black paint has
a solar reflectance of 0; white paint (titanium dioxide) has a solar reflectance of 1. The standard technique for its
determination uses spectrophotometric measurements, with an integrating sphere to determine the reflectance
at each wavelength. The average reflectance is then determined by an averaging process, using a standard solar
spectrum, as documented by ASTM Standards E903 and E892.

solar reflectance index (SRI) a measure of the constructed surface’s ability to stay cool in the sun by reflecting solar
radiation and emitting thermal radiation. It is defined such that a standard black surface (initial solar reflectance
0.05, initial thermal emittance 0.90) has an initial SRI of 0, and a standard white surface (initial solar reflectance
0.80, initial thermal emittance 0.90) has an initial SRI of 100. To calculate the SRI for a given material, obtain its
solar reflectance and thermal emittance via the Cool Roof Rating Council Standard (CRRC-1). SRI is calculated
according to ASTM E 1980. Calculation of the aged SRI is based on the aged tested values of solar reflectance and
thermal emittance.

thermal emittance the ratio of the radiant heat flux emitted by a specimen to that emitted by a blackbody radiator at
the same temperature (adapted from Cool Roof Rating Council)

three-year aged SR or SRI value a solar reflectance or solar reflectance index rating that is measured after three
years of weather exposure

undercover parking vehicle storage that is underground, under deck, under roof, or under a building
 207

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Light Pollution
Reduction

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To increase night sky access, improve nighttime visibility, and reduce the
consequences of development for wildlife and people.

REQUIREMENTS
Meet uplight and light trespass requirements, using either the backlight-uplight-glare (BUG) method (Option 1) or
the calculation method (Option 2). Projects may use different options for uplight and light trespass.

Meet these requirements for all exterior luminaires located inside the project boundary (except those listed under
“Exemptions”), based on the following:
·· the photometric characteristics of each luminaire when mounted in the same orientation and tilt as specified
in the project design; and
·· the lighting zone of the project property (at the time construction begins). Classify the project under one
lighting zone using the lighting zones definitions provided in the Illuminating Engineering Society and
International Dark Sky Association (IES/IDA) Model Lighting Ordinance (MLO) User Guide.

Additionally, meet the internally illuminated signage requirement.

Uplight

OPTION 1. BUG RATING METHOD

Do not exceed the following luminaire uplight ratings, based on the specific light source installed in the luminaire, as
defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A.
208

TABLE 1. Maximum uplight ratings for luminaires

MLO lighting zone Luminaire uplight rating

LZ0 U0

LZ1 U1

LZ2 U2

LZ3 U3
SS

LZ4 U4

OR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

OPTION 2. CALCULATION METHOD

Do not exceed the following percentages of total lumens emitted above horizontal.

TABLE 2. Maximum percentage of total lumens emitted above horizontal, by lighting zones

Maximum allowed percentage of total luminaire

MLO lighting zone
lumens emitted above horizontal

LZ0 0%

LZ1 0%

LZ2 1.5%

LZ3 3%

LZ4 6%

AND

Light Trespass

OPTION 1. BUG RATING METHOD

Do not exceed the following luminaire backlight and glare ratings (based on the specific light source installed in the
luminaire), as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, based on the mounting location and distance from the lighting
boundary.
 209

TABLE 3. Maximum backlight and glare ratings

MLO lighting zone

Luminaire mounting LZ0 LZ1 LZ2 LZ3 LZ4

Allowed backlight ratings

> 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary B1 B3 B4 B5 B5

SS
1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary
B1 B2 B3 B4 B4
and properly oriented

0.5 to 1 mounting height to lighting boundary and

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

B0 B1 B2 B3 B3
properly oriented

< 0.5 mounting height to lighting boundary and

B0 B0 B0 B1 B2
properly oriented

Allowed glare ratings

Building-mounted > 2 mounting heights from any

G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
lighting boundary

Building-mounted 1–2 mounting heights from any

G0 G0 G1 G1 G2
lighting boundary

Building-mounted 0.5 to 1 mounting heights from

G0 G0 G0 G1 G1
any lighting boundary

Building-mounted < 0.5 mounting heights from

G0 G0 G0 G0 G1
any lighting boundary

All other luminaires G0 G1 G2 G3 G4

The lighting boundary is located at the property lines of the property, or properties, that the LEED project occupies.
The lighting boundary can be modified under the following conditions:
·· When the property line abuts a public area that includes, but is not limited to, a walkway, bikeway, plaza, or
parking lot, the lighting boundary may be moved to 5 feet (1.5 meters) beyond the property line.
·· When the property line abuts a public street, alley, or transit corridor, the lighting boundary may be moved to
the center line of that street, alley, or corridor.
·· When there are additional properties owned by the same entity that are contiguous to the property, or
properties, that the LEED project is within and have the same or higher MLO lighting zone designation as the
LEED project, the lighting boundary may be expanded to include those properties.

Orient all luminaires less than two mounting heights from the lighting boundary such that the backlight points
toward the nearest lighting boundary line. Building-mounted luminaires with the backlight oriented toward the
building are exempt from the backlight rating requirement.

OR

OPTION 2. CALCULATION METHOD

Do not exceed the following vertical illuminances at the lighting boundary (use the definition of lighting boundary in
Option 1). Calculation points may be no more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) apart. Vertical illuminances must be calculated
on vertical planes running parallel to the lighting boundary, with the normal to each plane oriented toward the
property and perpendicular to the lighting boundary, extending from grade level to 33 feet (10 meters) above the
height of the highest luminaire.
210

TABLE 4. Maximum vertical illuminance at lighting boundary, by lighting zone

MLO lighting zone Vertical illuminance

LZ0 0.05 FC (0.5 LUX)

LZ1 0.05 FC (0.5 LUX)

LZ2 0.10 FC (1 LUX)

SS

LZ3 0.20 FC (2 LUX)

LZ4 0.60 FC (6 LUX)

FC = footcandle
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

AND

Internally Illuminated Exterior Signage

Do not exceed a luminance of 200 cd/m2 (nits) during nighttime hours and 2000 cd/m2 (nits) during daytime hours.

Exemptions from Uplight and Light Trespass Requirements

The following exterior lighting is exempt from the requirements, provided it is controlled separately from the
nonexempt lighting:
·· specialized signal, directional, and marker lighting for transportation;
·· lighting that is used solely for façade and landscape lighting in MLO lighting zones 3 and 4, and is automatically
turned off from midnight until 6 a.m.;
·· lighting for theatrical purposes for stage, film, and video performances;
·· government-mandated roadway lighting;
·· hospital emergency departments, including associated helipads;
·· lighting for the national flag in MLO lighting zones 2, 3, or 4; and
·· internally illuminated signage.
 211

BEHIND THE INTENT

Artificial exterior lighting not only provides human safety and comfort, it enables us to productively use more hours
of the day. If done correctly, exterior lighting offers safety, security, building identification, aesthetics, and way
finding. However, poor lighting design causes light pollution.
Light pollution is the misdirection or misuse of light, generally resulting from an inappropriate application of
exterior lighting. Backlight creates light trespass onto adjacent sites by directing light in the opposite direction of the
area intended to be lighted. Uplight causes artificial sky glow. Glare is caused by high-angle front light.

SS
Light pollution creates an abundance of environmental problems. Wildlife species that hunt or forage at night
may be unable to feed. Some flora and fauna are unable to adjust to seasonal variations when exposed to light
pollution. Migratory birds that rely on stars to guide them during migration may become disoriented. Even human
health can be damaged by misuse of light. Studies have shown that overexposure to artificial lighting, particularly at

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

night, may disrupt our circadian rhythms and melatonin production, impair night vision, and lead to sleep disorders.1
Finally, light pollution directed into the sky or into areas that do not need illumination is a waste of both energy and
money.
Good lighting design involves reducing three forms of light pollution: uplight, glare, and light trespass. This
credit addresses all three with requirements for specifying only the necessary lighting, selecting the right luminaires
(lamp-ballast combinations), locating them appropriately on the project site, and implementing an appropriate
control strategy. So that designers have flexibility, this credit offers two compliance options—a calculation method
(as in LEED 2009) and a new backlight, uplight, and glare (BUG) rating method.
Thoughtful selection of lighting results in luminaires that are not only aesthetically pleasing but also generate
well-shielded, well-directed light. Minimizing direct views of lamps avoids glare, and gradually changing light levels
allows the human eye to adapt. Efficient design specifies both luminaire distribution and lighting controls, including
motion sensors, photocells, time clocks, and other devices that reduce the amount of light at times and places it is
not needed.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ESTABLISH EXTERIOR LIGHTING PROJECT GOALS

Determine which team members will be responsible for the lighting design, luminaire selection, and
overall lighting concept. Prepare a schematic site lighting design by doing the following:
·· Identify the desired lighted areas on site.
·· Consult the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Lighting Handbook recommendations to establish
target light levels and uniformities for the identified areas.
·· Identify any areas of the site where it may be difficult to meet the credit requirements because of light
level needs, proximity to a boundary, or other factors.

STEP 2. DETERMINE LIGHTING ZONE

Identify the project’s lighting zone. The lighting designer (or someone with knowledge of the project site
and lighting zone classifications) is responsible for classifying the lighting zone.
·· Refer to the IES Model Lighting Ordinance (MLO) User Guide for information on determining the
project’s lighting zone (see Further Explanation, Lighting Zones).
·· Classify the entire project as one lighting zone.
·· Provide justification for the lighting zone chosen for the project.

STEP 3. ESTABLISH LIGHTING BOUNDARY

Determine the lighting boundary for the project and create a lighting boundary site plan. Provide
justification for any modification of the lighting boundary (e.g., if the lighting boundary was moved from
the project boundary to the center line of an adjacent public street).
1. American Medical Association, House of Delegates, Report 4 of the Council on Science and Public Health (A-12), Light Pollution: Adverse Health Effects of
Nighttime Lighting (2009), ama-assn.org/resources/doc/csaph/a12-csaph4-lightpollution-summary.pdf (accessed March 2013).
212

STEP 4. PREPARE SITE LIGHTING DESIGN

Prepare a site lighting plan based on the lighting zone designation and develop a luminaire schedule for
the project, selecting luminaires that eliminate or minimize uplight and light trespass off site (see Further
Explanation, Choosing Luminaires).
·· Designate all exterior luminaires (both exempt and nonexempt) within the project boundary, and
indicate locations, including pole heights.
·· Depict the project boundary, the property line (if different from the project boundary), the lighting
boundary, any additional properties included in the lighting boundary, and any relevant project site
conditions.
SS

·· Indicate the total number of each luminaire type in the project.

·· Identify the manufacturer, model number, lamp type, orientation, tilt angle (if applicable), and input
wattage for each luminaire type.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

This is only a preliminary design; the project team may need to revisit the design after completing the
subsequent steps and determining the uplight and light trespass values.

STEP 5. DETERMINE EXEMPTIONS

·· Identify any luminaires that are exempt from the uplight and light trespass requirements and provide
justification for the exemptions.
·· Examples of exempt lighting include emergency lighting, government-mandated roadway lighting,
theatrical lighting, and lighting of the national flag in certain lighting zones.
·· If no lighting is required except what is listed in exemptions (see credit requirements) the project
achieves the credit, provided the team justifies the exemptions.

STEP 6. SELECT COMPLIANCE OPTION FOR NONEXEMPT LIGHTING

Determine which method of compliance documentation the project team will follow for all nonexempt
lighting, and for each of the two sets of requirements (uplight and light trespass). The two compliance
options are the BUG Rating Method (Option 1) or the Calculation Method (Option 2). Project teams can
also combine the two options.
·· Option 1 may be the easier compliance path if BUG ratings are available for all or most project
luminaires (see Further Explanation, About the BUG Method).
·· Option 2 is for projects with some luminaires that would not comply or would be difficult to include
under the BUG rating method. Examples include a particular luminaire that, in itself, would not meet
the BUG thresholds but when used in concert with other luminaires can pass based on the calculation
method; and adjustable luminaires tilted from their nominal position, such that it is difficult to
determine the BUG rating.
·· A project can pursue different options for the uplight and trespass requirements. For example, Option
1’s BUG rating method can be applied to uplight and Option 2’s calculation method can be used for
light trespass, and vice versa. However, project teams cannot mix compliance paths within uplight or
light trespass: only one option may be used to demonstrate uplight, and only one option may be used
to demonstrate light trespass.

STEP 7. GATHER DATA ON LUMINAIRES

Option 1
·· List the backlight, uplight, and glare ratings of each unique luminaire for the orientation and tilt
specified in the project design.
·· Ratings for luminaires without published BUG rating can be determined via software (see Further
Explanation, Calculating BUG Values).

Option 2
·· Show the total lumens per luminaire and lumens emitted above horizontal by each luminaire
(lamp-ballast combination) for the orientation and tilt specified in the project design.
·· Show the performance for each angular position (tilt) if there are multiple angular positions
for a luminaire type.
·· Identify all auxiliary shielding specified.
 213

STEP 8. EVALUATE UPLIGHT COMPLIANCE

Determine compliance with the uplight requirements and make any necessary adjustments to the
preliminary lighting design.

Option 1
Consult Table 1 of the credit requirements for the maximum luminaire BUG uplight rating for the
project’s lighting zone. Ensure that all luminaires, when positioned in the specified design position,
do not exceed this maximum uplight rating (see Further Explanation, Example 1).

SS
Option 2
Calculate the percentage of total lumens emitted above horizontal (see Further Explanation,
Example 2). Ensure that the selected luminaires, cumulatively, do not exceed the maximum allowable
uplight percentage listed in Table 2 of the credit requirements, based on the project’s lighting zone.

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

·· The requirements apply not to each individual luminaire but to the total uplight generated by all
luminaires.
·· Use manufacturer’s data sheets or IES files for each luminaire to identify the total luminaire lumens
emitted plus the total luminaire lumens emitted above 90 degrees (horizontal). This information is
typically shown in catalogue cutsheets or in IES files.

STEP 9. EVALUATE LIGHT TRESPASS COMPLIANCE

Determine compliance with the light trespass requirements and make any necessary adjustments to the
preliminary lighting design (see Further Explanation, Calculating Light Trespass).

Option 1
Consult Table 3 of the credit requirements for the maximum luminaire BUG rating for the project’s
lighting zone and the luminaire location and angular position. Ensure that all luminaires do not exceed
the maximum backlight and glare ratings.
·· Consider mounting location, distance from the lighting boundary, and light source when choosing
the luminaires that meet the backlight and glare ratings. Luminaires mounted at the highest height
and located closest to the lighting boundary constitute the worst-case scenario and may not
comply (see Further Explanation, Mounting Heights).
·· Consider trade-offs when choosing luminaires. Compared with traditional light sources, for example,
LEDs are more directional and brighter and can therefore produce more glare, but they are also
more controllable.
·· Ensure that the luminaires chosen are located appropriately in relation to the lighting boundary,
as stipulated in the credit requirements. A building-mounted luminaire with its backlight oriented
toward the building can be exempted from the backlight requirement. In this case, the luminaire
must meet only the light trespass requirements for glare.

Option 2
Calculate the vertical illuminance at the lighting boundary to ensure that the illuminance does not
exceed the maximum allowance shown in Table 4 of the credit requirements (see Further Explanation,
Vertical Illuminance).
·· Calculate the vertical illuminances on all vertical planes as they extend upward from the lighting
boundary at grade level to a height at least 33 feet (10 meters) above the tallest luminaire on the
project. Calculation points on each plane must be no more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) apart. For each
plane, ensure that the greatest vertical illuminance does not exceed the threshold indicated in the
credit requirements.
·· Retain point-by-point calculation output for the vertical plane containing the greatest vertical
illuminance (the worst-case scenario).

STEP 10. SELECT COMPLIANT, INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED EXTERIOR SIGNAGE

Choose luminaires that meet the threshold requirements for light pollution and light trespass given in the
credit requirements. If the signage company does not have any data for the manufactured sign, assess
compliance in other ways. For example,
·· Take a measurement of the sign’s maximum luminance.
·· Have the lighting consultant construct the sign in calculation software by putting an automatic
placement grid on the luminous surface(s) of the object with a transmission assigned to the surface(s)
and setting the measurement type to diffuse luminance to get the results.
214

FURTHER EXPLANATION

LIGHTING ZONES
The Model Lighting Ordinance establishes five lighting zones, ranging from natural environments with no artificial
lighting (Lighting Zone 0) to areas of very high ambient lighting, such as Times Square in New York City (Lighting
Zone 4).
The MLO lighting zone for the project is based on the lighting zone of the immediately adjacent property at the
SS

time construction begins.

TABLE 5. Model Lighting Ordinance lighting zones*

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Lighting zone Definition Recommended uses

Areas where natural environment will be seriously and

adversely affected by lighting. Effects include disturbing
biological cycles of flora and fauna and/or detracting from Typically includes undeveloped areas of open
0
human enjoyment and appreciation of natural environment. space, wilderness parks and preserves, areas near
No ambient
Human activity is subordinate in importance to nature. astronomical observatories, or any other area where
lighting
Vision of human residents and users is adapted to darkness, protection of dark environment is critical.
and they expect to see little or no lighting. When not
needed, lighting should be extinguished.

Areas where lighting might harm flora and fauna or disturb

Typically includes single- and two-family residential
character of area. Vision of human residents and users
1 communities, rural town centers, business parks, and
is adapted to low light levels. Lighting may be used for
Low ambient other commercial, industrial, orstorage areas with
safety and convenience but is not necessarily uniform
lighting limited nighttime activity. May also include developed
or continuous. After curfew, most lighting should be
areas in parks and other natural settings.
extinguished or reduced as activity levels decline.

Typically includes multifamily residential uses,

institutional residential uses, schools, churches,
Areas of human activity where vision of human residents
hospitals, hotels, motels, and commercial or
2 and users is adapted to moderate light levels. Lighting may
businesses areas with evening activities in
Moderate typically be used for safety and convenience but is not
predominately residential areas. Also includes
ambient lighting necessarily uniform or continuous. After curfew, lighting
neighborhood recreational and playing fields, and
may be extinguished or reduced as activity levels decline.
mixed-use development with predominance of
residential uses.

Typically includes commercial corridors, high-intensity

Areas of human activity where vision of human residents
suburban commercial areas, town centers, mixed-
and users is adapted to moderately high light levels.
3 use areas, industrial uses and shipping and rail yards
Lighting is generally desired for safety, security and/or
Moderately high with high nighttime activity. Also includes high-use
convenience and it is often uniform and/or continuous. After
ambient lighting recreational and playing fields, regional shopping
curfew, lighting may be extinguished or reduced in most
malls, car dealerships, gas stations, and other
areas as activity levels decline.
nighttime active exterior retail areas.

Areas of human activity where vision of human residents Areas of very high ambient lighting levels, used only
and users is adapted to high light levels. Lighting is for special cases and not appropriate for most cities.
4
generally considered necessary for safety, security and/or May be used for extremely unusual installations such
High ambient
convenience and it is mostly uniform and/or continuous. as high-density entertainment districts and heavy
lighting
After curfew, lighting may be extinguished or reduced in industrial uses. (Currently only Times Square has this
some areas as activity levels decline. classification in the U.S.)

* Adapted from Model Lighting Ordinance User Guide.

LIGHTING BOUNDARY
The lighting boundary typically coincides with the property lines of the property that the LEED project occupies.
However, in certain situations the lighting boundary may be modified:
·· When the property boundary abuts a public area that includes, but is not limited to, a walkway, bikeway, plaza,
or parking lot, the lighting boundary may be moved to 5 feet (1.5 meters) beyond the property line.
·· When the property boundary abuts a public roadway or public transit corridor, the lighting boundary may be
moved to the center line of that roadway or corridor.
 215

·· When additional properties owned by the same entity responsible for the LEED project are contiguous to the
project site and have the same or a higher lighting zone as the project, the lighting boundary may be expanded
to include those properties. In these cases, it is best if a lighting master plan is developed.

CHOOSING LUMINAIRES
Once the appropriate lighting zone and boundaries are established, the project’s lighting professional needs to pay
close attention to quantity, types, and locations of luminaires and the geometry of the site. The closer the luminaire
to the lighting boundary, the more likely it is that light extends beyond the boundary. For a location with a narrow

SS
distribution, select a luminaire with a lower pole height, or move it away from the boundary to reduce light trespass.
Use manufacturer’s luminaire data or IES files to obtain the necessary information for determining compliance
with this credit. Luminaires without photometric distribution data must be assumed to have 100% of their initial

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

lamp lumens at or above 90 degrees. For adjustable tilt luminaires, consider the angular position when determining
a BUG rating or calculating compliance. A luminaire in its nominal position may have minimal light trespass and
low illumination to the night sky (e.g., a U rating of U1). But if the designer tilts the luminaire to achieve the desired
pattern of illuminance, more light may be emitted above the horizon and change the U rating to a U2 or even higher.
Determine the BUG ratings or calculations for each unique combination of luminaire and its angular position in
the lighting design. Luminaires with limited field adjustability must be assumed to have maximum tilt applied and
lumens at or above 90 degrees must be calculated from maximum tilted orientation. To more easily meet the credit
requirements, avoid adjustable luminaire types as a primary lighting source.
The Illuminating Engineering Society has established recommendations for exterior lighting levels for varioush
applications. Light source selection has a significant effect on how much light is needed and how comfortable it
feels. A cooler (whiter) light source (above 2500 degrees Kelvin color temperature) with higher color rendering
index (above 80 CRI) makes it easier for people to see and to distinguish detail. By following the recommendations,
projects may be able to use lower light levels. However, to ensure acceptability and minimize liability, light levels
lower than recommended should be approved by the owner and possibly by the local jurisdiction.

ABOUT THE BUG METHOD

Backlight, uplight, and glare (BUG) are used to classify luminaires and their likelihood of generating light pollution.
This comprehensive system takes into account uplight shielding (Figure 2), glare shielding, and backlight shielding
(Figure 1), and it limits lamp lumens to values appropriate for a given lighting zone. The system includes a table
of consensus acceptable values against which the photometric data of a luminaire can be compared. BUG ratings
provide a much more detailed picture of the overall lumen distribution of a luminaire than cut-off designations.
If BUG values are available for the project’s luminaires, the team is likely to find Option 1 the easier
compliance path.
216

Uplight shield: full cutoff

180°
SS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

UH UH

UL UL
90° 90°
BVH FVH
80° 80°

BH FH

60° 60°
BM FM

BL FL

30° 30°

Back / Back Light Front / Forward Light Uplight

Backlight
Glare

Figure 1. Backlight, uplight, and glare

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS11

SSc (EBOM, BD&C), GIBc Light Pollution
Reduction (Batch 2)
 217

Non-compliant light spill Non-compliant light spill

above 90° from horizontal above 90° from horizontal

90°

SS
FVH Very High
90°
80° FVH Very High
FH High

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

FH High

60°
FM Mid

FM Mid
FL Low
30° FL Low

0° 0°

View 1 View 2 - Detail

LEED PROJECT
BOUNDARY
Backlight Uplight

UH High

100° 100°
90° UL Low UL Low 90°

0°

View 3

Non-compliant light
Backlight

Figure 2. Compliant and noncompliant light

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS12

SSc GIBc Light Pollution Reduction (Batch 2) BD+C
218

CALCULATING BUG VALUES

BUG values are typically published by product manufacturers. If published BUG data do not address the design
position of the luminaire (or are not available at all), ratings can be calculated by reviewing a luminaire’s photometric
test data and zonal lumen distribution and comparing the data with the maximum zonal lumens for backlight,
uplight, and glare established in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A. Software is also available that will calculate the BUG
rating using the IES file for the luminaire.
·· For the backlight rating, determine the lowest rating where the lumens for all of the secondary solid angles do
not exceed the threshold lumens from IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, Table A-1.
SS

·· For the uplight rating, determine the lowest rating where the lumens for all secondary solid angles do not
exceed the threshold lumens from IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, Table A-2.
·· For the glare rating, determine the lowest rating where the lumens for all of the secondary solid angles do not
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

exceed the threshold lumens from IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, Table A-3. For building-mounted luminaires
only, the BVH and BH zonal lumens do not need to be considered in determining the G rating.

CALCULATING LIGHT TRESPASS

To calculate light trespass, use lighting design software and develop a photometric site plan (Figure 3) showing
all installed exterior lighting luminaires. Set a vertical calculation grid at each segment of the project’s lighting
boundary and the extent of the lighting zone allowances. The vertical illuminance calculation points must be no
more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) apart and extend from grade level up to at least 33 feet (10 meters) above the tallest
luminaire in the project (Figure 4).

LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

10'-0" Lighting boundary - LZ2
(3m)
Photometric calculation points
0.0 spaced 5’x5’ (1.5m x 1.5m)
1.1 2.4 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.7
Light fixture (type A)
0.0 1.4 2.7 2.6 2.0 12.5’ (3.8m) from lighting boundary
2.6 2.7
Orientation: backlight points toward the lighting boundary line
0.0 1.7 2.9 3.1
2.7 3.0 2.6
Planting strips
0.0 1.9 2.8 2.9 3.0 2.9 2.5 Proposed trees
0.0 1.5 2.6 2.7 2.6 2.8 2.2 Sidewalk

0.0 1.2 2.2 2.4 2.1 2.0 1.7

Public street
0.0 1.0 1.9 2.1 1.8 1.7 1.4
Centerline of street
0.0 0.8 1.4 1.9 1.8 1.5 1.2

0.0 1.2 1.9 2.4 2.1 1.9 1.5

0.0 2.0 2.5 2.8 2.7 2.4 2.2

0.0 2.4 3.1 3.2 3.0 2.7 2.5 Light fixture (type B)
12.5’ (3.8m) from lighting boundary
0.0 2.2 3.4 3.5 3.4 3.0 2.8 Orientation: backlight points toward the lighting boundary line

0.0 2.6 3.9 3.7 3.5 3.3

3.9
0.0 2.2 3.7 3.9 3.8 3.4 3.1

Plan (NTS)

Figure 3. Photometric site plan

 219

VERTICAL ILLUMINANCE
Illuminance is the total quantity of light, or luminous flux, that falls on a surface, as measured in footcandles or lux.
This measurement is usually taken on the horizontal plane, at either the ground or the workplane, but measuring
vertical illuminance is helpful for understanding how much light is hitting a building façade, a human face, or the
vertical plane at a property boundary. Simply put, vertical illuminance can be explained as standing outside the
boundary looking straight into the site at eye level (or horizontal if you are on the ground looking up).
In calculation software, a vertical calculation grid is placed at the location where the measurements need to be
taken. In person, measurements are taken using a light meter held vertically. For the purposes of LEED, only the

SS
calculation grid for the one vertical plane with greatest vertical illuminance is required to be submitted, and not
more. Projects must still assess all of the areas on the boundary for vertical illuminance, but create documentation
for only the worst case scenario because all other vertical planes will show lower illuminance values, and thus will

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

comply with the requirements. If there are unique situations, like sensitive areas that require different thresholds,
calculation grid documentation for those scenarios should also be submitted.
In Figure 4, the vertical illumination at a point P on a vertical surface parallel to and extending straight up from
the lighting boundary is the component of the illumination that is normal to this surface at that point. Since this
vertical illuminance must be calculated for a grid of multiple points on the lighting boundary up to 33 feet above the
height of the luminaire, it is usually done with a commercially available lighting software program.
The threshold values in Table 4 of the credit requirements must be compared with the cumulative vertical
illuminance contributed by all luminaires on the site.

33'-0"
(10m)

Vertical calculation points spaced

no more than 5ft (1.5m) apart

Tallest Luminaire

Intensity (I) of the luminaire

in the direction of the point

I
Angle (A) between the
incoming intensity and
the normal to the plane
P A

One of points (P) calculated

on this plane

Perpendicular (normal) to the

plane above the boundary

One portion of the

lighting boundary

Figure 4. Measuring vertical illuminance

 220

MOUNTING HEIGHTS
The height of the photometric center of a luminaire is considered the mounting height. Measured in distance above
grade, it informs the appropriate spacing between poles and distance from the lighting boundary (Figure 5).
For example, if the photometric center of a luminaire is 20 feet (6 meters) above grade, the unit of mounting
height is 20 feet (6 meters). If a pole must be two mounting heights from the lighting boundary based on the
classified zone and BUG rating, then the pole must be 40 feet (12 meters) from the nearest lighting boundary. The
mounting height and pole location need to be calculated for each luminaire.
SS

Property line Area for lighting Vertical illuminance in the Light pollution
plane of property line concern area
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Less 0.5mh
0.5mh to 1 mh
1 to 2 mh

mh = mounting height

0.5mh
1mh
2mh

Figure 5. Mounting heights

EXAMPLES

Example 1. BUG rating

The project site is in lighting zone 2 and the preliminary design includes two exterior luminaire types—a building-
mounted wallpack luminaire and a pole-mounted site-lighting luminaire.
Based on their location on the building relative to the lighting boundary, the wallpacks fall under the category of
“building-mounted >2 mounting heights from any lighting boundary.” The pole-mounted luminaires throughout the
site fall under two referenced categories, “>2 mounting heights from lighting boundary” and “1 to 2 mounting heights
from lighting boundary and properly oriented.”
ON Based on the lighting zone and locations within the lighting boundary and following Tables 1 and 3 in the credit
requirements, the following maximum luminaire BUG ratings apply:
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS24
SSc Light Pollution Reduction (Batch 2)
TABLE 6. Maximum uplight ratings for luminaires, by MLO lighting zone

MLO lighting zone Luminaire uplight rating

LZ2 U2
 221

TABLE 7. Maximum backlight and glare ratings, by MLO lighting zone

MLO lighting zone

Luminaire mounting LZ0 LZ1 LZ2 LZ3 LZ4

Allowed backlight ratings

> 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary B1 B3 B4 B5 B5

SS
1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary
B1 B2 B3 B4 B4
and properly oriented

Allowed glare ratings

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

Building-mounted > 2 mounting heights from any
G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
lighting boundary

All other luminaires G0 G1 G2 G3 G4

The BUG ratings for the two specified products are as follows:
·· Wallpack, B2 U2 G2
·· Pole-mounted luminaires, B1 U0 G1
Based on the allowable maximum luminaire BUG ratings in the tables above, the specified luminaires do not exceed
the maximum allowances and thus comply with the credit requirements.

Example 2. Calculating uplight

A project team has determined that their site falls within MLO Lighting Zone 2 and is pursuing Option 2 Calculation
Method for uplight. The maximum allowable percentage of total luminaire lumens emitted above horizontal is 1.5%.
The project must demonstrate that 1.5% or less of total luminaire lumens are emitted above horizontal.
Based on the manufacturer’s data and IES files for the various luminaires chosen for the project, the project has
prepared the following table:

TABLE 8. Luminaire tracking

Total luminaire
Lumens per Lumens above Total luminaire
Luminaire Quantity lumens above
luminaire horizontal lumens
horizontal

Type 1 10 3,000 0 30,000 0

Type 2 2 1,000 100 2,000 200

32,000 200

The team calculates compliance as follows:

Total luminaire lumens = 32,000

Total lumens above 90° from horizontal = 200

200 / 32,000 = 0.6%

Because 0.6% is below the maximum allowable 1.5% of total lumens above horizontal, the project achieves
compliance.
222

Example 3. Example site lighting plan

Adjacent property’s LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

parking lot and Lighting Boundary
(outside of Lighting Parking
Light fixture
Boundary) Lot
Type I (typical)

Sidewalk
SS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Light fixture
Type II (typical)

Adjacent property: LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY

Lighting Zone 1 and Lighting Boundary

Project building
Light Fixture Schedule
Adjacent property building
Type I
Pole-Mounted Street Light
Quantity: 15

Type II
Illuminated Bollard
Quantity: 11

Project Light Zone Designation: 2

Figure 6. Example lighting plan

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS8
BD+C SSc Light Pollution Reduction (Batch 2)
 223

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Option 1, Option 2,
All Option 1, Option 2,
Documentation Light Light
Projects Uplight Uplight
Trespass Trespass

Site lighting plan with boundaries, elements,

X
location of fixtures, and applicable measurements

Projects with internally illuminated exterior signage

SS
X
only: provide maximum luminance data

Luminaire schedule showing uplight ratings X

Luminaire schedule showing backlight and glare

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

X
ratings and mounting heights

Calculations for lumens per luminaire and lumens

X
emitted above horizontal

Greatest vertical illuminance value for each vertical

calculation plane at lighting boundary; calculation
grid for one vertical plane with greatest vertical X
illuminance (worst-case scenario), highlighting
point of greatest illuminance

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SS Credit Site Assessment. The site and the project conditions may provide opportunities to reduce lighting needs.
There may also be special circumstances, such as a project site located near a sensitive habitat that requires lower
lighting zone designations or adjusting the lighting design to fit these conditions.

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. In some cases,
earning this credit will require the team to install more luminaires at lower lamp heights to meet the boundary
restrictions and BUG requirements, which could impair energy performance. A proper lighting design both
minimizes light pollution and maximizes energy efficiency.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· A new compliance option, based on BUG ratings, has been added.
·· The lighting power density requirements have been relocated to EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance.
·· The interior lighting requirements have been relocated to EA Prerequistie Minimum Energy Performance.
·· The photometric information now needs to include only vertical illuminance calculations. Also, point-by-
point calculation output documentation needs to be provided only for the worst-case vertical plane, not all site
lighting.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Illuminating Engineering Society and International Dark Sky Association (IES/IDA) Model Lighting
Ordinance User Guide and IES TM-15-11, Addendum A: ies.org
224

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
BUG rating a luminaire classification system that classifies luminaires in terms of backlight (B), uplight (U), and
SS

glare (G) (taken from IES/IDA Model Lighting Ordinance). BUG ratings supersede the former cutoff ratings.

emergency lighting a luminaire that operates only during emergency conditions and is always off during normal
building operation
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

light pollution waste light from building sites that produces glare, is directed upward to the sky, or is directed off the
site. Waste light does not increase nighttime safety, utility, or security and needlessly consumes energy.

light trespass obtrusive illumination that is unwanted because of quantitative, directional, or spectral attributes.
Light trespass can cause annoyance, discomfort, distraction, or loss of visibility.

mounting height the distance between ground level (or the workplane) and the center of the luminaire (light
fixture); the height at which a luminaire is installed.

ornamental luminaire a luminaire intended for illuminating portions of the circulation network that also serves an
ornamental function, in addition to providing optics that effectively deliver street lighting, and has a decorative or
historical period appearance

vertical illuminance illuminance levels calculated at a point on a vertical surface, or that occur on a vertical plane
 225

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Site Master Plan

SITE MASTER PLAN

This credit applies to: Schools (1 point)

INTENT

To ensure that the sustainable site benefits achieved by the project

continue, regardless of future changes in programs or demographics.

REQUIREMENTS
The project must achieve at least four of the following six credits, using the associated calculation methods. The
achieved credits must then be recalculated using the data from the master plan.
·· LT Credit: High Priority Site
·· SS Credit: Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat
·· SS Credit: Open Space
·· SS Credit: Rainwater Management
·· SS Credit: Heat Island Reduction
·· SS Credit: Light Pollution Reduction

A site master plan for the school must be developed in collaboration with school authorities. Previous sustainable
site design measures should be considered in all master-planning efforts so that existing infrastructure is retained
whenever possible. The master plan must therefore include current construction activity plus future construction
(within the building’s lifespan) that affects the site. The master plan development footprint must also include
parking, paving, and utilities.
Projects where no future development is planned are not eligible for this credit.
226

BEHIND THE INTENT

Schools must continually adapt to changes in demographics, curriculum, and program needs. To accommodate such
adaptations, school buildings or campuses often must be expanded or modified. Lack of a long-range vision and
constrained timeframes for project planning can result in missed opportunities for integrating new construction
into existing site features and facilities.
This credit promotes the use of a master plan to support cohesive, long-term, sustainable development
strategies. Furthermore, it ensures that the site infrastructure components of a current LEED project are maintained
SS

during and after future developments.

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. CONFIRM FUTURE DEVELOPMENT

Engage with school authorities early in the design process for the project to determine whether future
development projects are being considered.
·· Only sites where future development is planned are eligible for this credit.
·· Future development includes expansions due to changes in program or demographics.
·· A specific commitment of the future development, such as a contract, guaranteed funding, or
scheduled construction, is not required.

STEP 2. CONFIRM THAT PROJECT IS PURSUING AT LEAST FOUR ELIGIBLE CREDITS

Review the credit requirements and Step-by-Step instructions for the following six credits to determine
which will be earned by the current project. The project must earn at least four of the six credits using
the current project boundary to achieve this credit.
·· LT Credit High Priority Site
·· SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat
·· SS Credit Open Space
·· SS Credit Rainwater Management
·· SS Credit Heat Island Reduction
·· SS Credit Light Pollution Reduction

STEP 3. DETERMINE STATUS OF ANY MASTER PLAN

Once eligible credits have been selected and confirmed, determine whether the school authority has
developed or is currently developing a master plan.
·· If a master plan exists or is under development and includes both the current project and the future
construction project, the plan could contribute to the achievement of this credit.
·· If no master plan has been written or if the current or future project is not yet included in an existing
master plan, engage with school authorities to create or update the master plan.

STEP 4. CREATE OR UPDATE SITE MASTER PLAN

Include the current project, the future construction project, parking, paving and utilities in the master
plan (see Further Explanation, Example).
·· Consider how sustainable site design measures and infrastructure included in the scope of the current
project can be maintained or enhanced.
·· If the future needs of students and the community are uncertain, incorporate flexibility into the master
plan to accommodate a range of scenarios and fluctuations in demographics.
·· Potential future development is typically determined by the school authorities and design team; it may
include changes in program or demographics leading to expansions, projections for supplementary
spaces, or other additional structures.

STEP 5. CONFIRM COMPLIANCE FOR SELECTED ELIGIBLE CREDITS

Complete calculations for the selected eligible credits based on the current project site. Recalculate
these values for the site master plan, incorporating future development conditions and data. Refer to the
appropriate credit sections for explanation of credit-specific calculations.
 227

FURTHER EXPLANATION

EXAMPLE
Existing tree stand LEED PROJECT BOUNDARY
to remain School district property line,
future expansion scope limits
Track and field facility Parking lot

SS
Existing road to remain

E Proposed future school

SITE MASTER PLAN

expansion: gymnasium
E

E E Proposed future lighting

fixtures and utilities

Proposed future sewer

E E expansion

S S
Proposed future road

Proposed future baseball field

Proposed future practice field

Existing building
Future (proposed) building, paving, field

Figure 1. Example site master plan

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS4

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
SSc Site Master Plan (Batch 1)
Duplicate the documentation used to achieve the contributing credits, changing the input information so that it is based
on the site master plan instead of the project boundary. Refer to the appropriate credit sections for information on
credit-specific documentation.

Documentation All projects

Site plan with elements and measurements, including current and future phases of development X

Credit forms and documentation for selected eligible credits, rewritten using data for site master plan X

Description of documentation updates made for future development X

228

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Integrative Process Credit. To earn the related credit, projects facilitate a charrette that identifies and uses
opportunities to achieve synergies across disciplines and building systems to inform the site master plan.

SS Credit Joint Use of Facilities. Opportunities to share building space or formalize other community partnerships
may reduce the need for future expansion, which could affect the site master plan. Stakeholder charrettes held as
part of the site master plan development may inspire community partnerships, which could help the project achieve
the related credit.
SS

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

None.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
master plan boundary the limits of a site master plan. The master plan boundary includes the project area and may
include all associated buildings and sites outside of the LEED project boundary. The master plan boundary considers
future sustainable use, expansion, and contraction.

school authority the authority responsible for decision making about school operations, districts, personnel,
financing, and future development. Examples include school boards, local governments, and religious institutions.

site master plan an overall design or development concept for the project and associated (or potentially associated)
buildings and sites. The plan considers future sustainable use, expansion, and contraction. The site master plan is
typically illustrated, with building plans (if applicable), site drawings of planned phased development, and narrative
descriptions.
 229

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Tenant Design and
Construction Guidelines

TENANT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES

This credit applies to: Core and Shell (1 point)

INTENT

To educate tenants in implementing sustainable design and construction

features in their tenant improvement build-outs.

REQUIREMENTS
Publish for tenants an illustrated document with the following content, as applicable:
·· a description of the sustainable design and construction features incorporated in the core and shell project and
the project’s sustainability goals and objectives, including those for tenant spaces;
·· recommendations, including examples, for sustainable strategies, products, materials, and services; and
·· information that enables a tenant to coordinate space design and construction with the building systems when
pursuing the following LEED v4 for Interior Design and Construction prerequisites and credits:
°° WE Prerequisite: Indoor Water Use Reduction
°° WE Credit: Indoor Water Use Reduction
°° EA Prerequisite: Minimum Energy Performance
°° EA Prerequisite: Fundamental Refrigerant Management
°° EA Credit: Optimize Energy Performance
°° EA Credit: Advanced Energy Metering
°° EA Credit: Renewable Energy Production
°° EA Credit: Enhanced Refrigerant Management
°° MR Prerequisite: Storage and Collection of Recyclables
°° EQ Prerequisite: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
°° EQ Prerequisite: Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control
°° EQ Credit: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies
°° EQ Credit: Low-Emitting Materials
°° EQ Credit: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan
°° EQ Credit: Indoor Air Quality Assessment
°° EQ Credit: Thermal Comfort
230

°° EQ Credit: Interior Lighting

°° EQ Credit: Daylight
°° EQ Credit: Quality Views
°° EQ Credit: Acoustic Performance

Provide the guidelines to all tenants before signing the lease.

SS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 231

BEHIND THE INTENT

Core and Shell project teams may have limited influence on how the final tenant space is fitted out. This credit
requires the team to prepare guidelines for extending the sustainable design intent of the base building into tenants’
individual spaces.
Design and construction guidelines help tenant design teams understand and use a LEED building’s systems and
design features to achieve significant reductions in energy and resource consumption (particularly important where
water and energy are submetered and tenants pay for their own usage). Suggestions for sustainable products and

SS
strategies encourage tenants to make sustainable choices.
The document also helps Core and Shell teams fully consider tenants’ needs. Furthermore, a carefully thought-
out set of sustainable guidelines gives a project a marketing advantage with tenants who wish to occupy a healthful
building or pursue LEED for Interior Design and Construction. The time invested in developing guidelines may be

TENANT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES

well spent if the document helps attract lessees.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. CONSIDER TENANTS’ CHARACTERISTICS AND NEEDS

Before drafting the guidelines, consider the type and number of tenants. Think about how the needs of
different tenants might vary and be sure that all uses in the building are covered by the guidelines.
·· If tenant uses vary significantly, as in a mixed-use building with both hospitality and retail spaces,
consider developing separate tenant guidelines.
·· Consider how the guidelines can be used to support marketing of the building and leasing of specific
spaces.

STEP 2. DEVELOP GUIDELINES CONTENT

During the design phase of the Core and Shell project, begin compiling a list of items and strategies
to include in the guidelines. Starting early may help the base building design team optimize systems
to support high-performing tenant spaces. When complete, compile guidelines into a comprehensive
document(s).

STEP 3. DISTRIBUTE GUIDELINES

Provide the guidelines to all potential tenants during lease negotiations and before any tenant design
and construction work begins. The guidelines do not constitute requirements for the tenants and are not
binding on lessees.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

ECONOMIC CONSIDERATIONS
Some strategies and recommendations may require upfront investments on the part of the tenant. For example,
tenants choosing to certify their build-out projects under the LEED for Interior Design and Construction rating
system may incur additional costs for commissioning and certification. It may be helpful to indicate in the guidelines
which features are likely to entail upfront costs but deliver long-term savings through, for example, lower operating
costs.
232

SUBJECT-SPECIFIC GUIDANCE
Depending on the Core and Shell design and scope, consider including the following information in the tenant
guidelines. (Related LEED for Interior Design and Construction credits are noted in parentheses.)

Water Use
Specify the building water-use reduction goals. Provide information and/or recommendations for plumbing fixtures,
flow rates and systems, and product cutsheets. (Related credits: WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction, WE
Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction.)
SS

Energy Performance
Highlight the energy-saving features of the base building and provide recommendations for tenants to further
reduce energy use. The HVAC system that the Core and Shell design team chooses will affect the tenant buildout.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Describe the HVAC system, including energy efficiency features and suggestions for how they can be best used.
Provide recommendations or performance requirements for supplemental HVAC equipment and independent
tenant systems. (Related credits: EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance.)

Refrigerant Management
Include recommendations for refrigerants in cooling equipment. (Related credits: EA Prerequisite Fundamental
Refrigerant Management, EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management.)

Energy Use and Metering

Provide information on the building’s expected energy use. Describe how the building and tenant energy uses are
submetered, if applicable, and how further submetering of tenant uses can encourage energy conservation. (Related
credit: EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering.)

Renewable Energy
Provide information on any on-site renewable energy systems, like photovoltaic systems, wind energy systems, solar
thermal systems, and geothermal systems. (Related credit: EA Credit Renewable Energy Production.)

Commissioning
Provide details on the Core and Shell commissioning process, including the commissioning plan or report and the
building’s design intent, so that the tenant can evaluate whether the space is functioning as designed. Core and Shell
commissioning documents can also serve as a model for tenants’ own commissioning efforts. (Related credits: EA
Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification, EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning.)

Measurement and Verification

Describe the building’s measurement and verification plan, including the International Performance Measurement
and Verification Protocol option and how the Core and Shell measurement and verification plan will be carried out.
Provide information about protocols that tenants can use to create their own measurement and verification plans.

Ventilation and Outdoor Air Delivery

Provide design and operational information for the ventilation system, such as how air is provided to the space (e.g.,
underfloor, overhead, displacement, or natural ventilation) and the amount of outside air that each system is capable
of providing, so that tenants can determine how much outside air is available to them. Describe the ventilation
control systems and identify opportunities for the tenant to add monitoring devices, such as CO2 sensors, and other
enhancements. (Related credit: EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance.)

Construction Indoor Air Quality Management

Highlight areas of the Core and Shell construction indoor air quality management plan that are applicable to the
tenant buildout, particularly where tenant work may be sequenced at the same time. (Related credit: EQ Credit
Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan.)
 233

Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control

Because multiple tenants may share air return and supply systems, describe how to isolate hazardous gases or
chemicals, such as by providing separate exhaust for janitor’s closets. (Related credits: EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality
Assessment, EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies.)

Interior Lighting
Lighting often represents the greatest opportunity for tenants to reduce energy consumption. Core and Shell
projects that offer good natural light will enable tenants to reduce lighting power without compromising light

SS
quality. Controls and fixture selection are also critical. Guidelines might include recommendations for keeping
windows clear for daylight penetration, locating workspaces or gathering spaces near windows to minimize the
need for lights, using energy-efficient fixtures and lamps, and installing daylight-responsive lighting controls and
occupancy sensors. (Related credits: EQ Credit Interior Lighting, EQ Credit Daylight.)

TENANT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES

Thermal Comfort
Explain how the building’s HVAC system will help maintain thermal comfort in the building. Provide the design
criteria of the system (including indoor and outdoor conditions) and document any other assumptions made for the
thermal comfort calculations (including space internal loads, clothing, and metabolic rate of the people in the space).
Describe the building’s HVAC control systems. If the building incorporates natural ventilation, describe how it can be
used and how it works with the building’s other systems. For a completely mechanical system, provide details on how
the tenants can regulate the thermal comfort in their spaces. (Related credit: EQ Credit Thermal Comfort.)

Views
Consider views in addition to the daylighting strategies mentioned under Interior Lighting. Prepare sample layouts
and illustrations so that tenant design teams can understand how to take full advantage of this amenity. (Related
credit: EQ Credit Quality Views.)

Environmental Tobacco Smoke

Include the building’s smoking policy as part of the tenant guidelines. If smoking is permitted in the building, the
required strategies for separation, exhaust, and pressurization must be clearly communicated so that they can be
included in the tenant’s scope of construction. (Related credit: EQ Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke
Control.)

Low-Emitting Materials
Provide a detailed list of all specified interior paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, flooring, composite wood,
ceilings, walls, and thermal and acoustic insulation that meet the requirements. If possible, include manufacturer’s
documentation confirming the compliance for each product. (Related credit: EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials.)

Acoustic Performance
Provide information on the background noise level of base building’s HVAC system. (Related credit: EQ Credit
Acoustic Performance.)

Storage and Collection of Recyclables

Include information regarding the building’s recycling policy and procedures. Note any centralized collection
and storage areas. Encourage activities to reduce and reuse materials before recycling, to decrease the volume of
recyclables handled. (Related credit: MR Prerequisite Storage and Collection of Recyclables.)

Sustainable Products, Materials, and Services

Describe recommended materials, products, strategies, and services to use in the tenant buildout. Sustainable
material suppliers, manufactures, local salvaged material retailers, and construction waste recycling facilities may
also be listed. (Materials and Resources credits.)
234

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION OPTIONS

The following supporting documentation may assist tenants in implementing sustainable strategies in their
buildouts:

LEED for Interior Design and Construction Scorecard

Include a scorecard for one of the ID+C rating systems to demonstrate how base building contributions and
relatively easy-to-achieve tenant space credits can support ID+C certification.

Specifications or Cutsheets
SS

Provide performance guidance or cutsheets for plumbing fixtures, paints, finishes, and other products used in the
core and shell to help tenants specify green materials in their own buildouts. Sample specification language could
also be included.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Policies and Descriptions

Provide tenants with the building recycling and smoking policies, and describe any energy monitoring or metering in
place for the base building.

Documentation from the LEED for Core and Shell Submittal

Tenants interested in pursuing LEED for Interior Design and Construction certification will benefit from having
copies of the Core and Shell submittals to reduce duplication of documentation.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All Projects

Tenant design and construction guidelines document X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

All Core and Shell credits with performance thresholds. Projects may choose to adopt some or all of the
guidelines as tenant requirements to support achievement of other

LEED for Core and Shell credits. For example, core and shell projects that require tenants to demonstrate a 5%
reduction in lighting power density below ASHRAE 90.1 2010 (or a USGBC-approved equivalent for projects outside
the U.S.) can include the assumed tenant reduction in the core and shell energy model. Such requirements must be
incorporated into the tenant lease; however, it is not necessary to require tenants’ compliance with all guidelines to
earn this credit.
 235

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

Tenant guidelines are no longer required to include information on LEED for Commercial Interiors or explain how
the core and shell building contributes to achieving these credits.

REFERENCED STANDARDS

SS
None.

TENANT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION GUIDELINES

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SS

236
 237

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Places of Respite

PLACES OF RESPITE
This credit applies to: Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To provide patients, staff, and visitors with the health benefits of the
natural environment by creating outdoor places of respite on the
healthcare campus.

REQUIREMENTS
Provide places of respite that are accessible to patients and visitors, equal to 5% of the net usable program area
of the building.
Provide additional dedicated places of respite for staff, equal to 2% of the net usable program area of
the building.
Places of respite must be outdoors, or be located in interior atria, greenhouses, solaria, or conditioned spaces;
such interior spaces may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area if 90% of each qualifying space’s gross floor
area achieves a direct line of sight to unobstructed views of nature.

All areas must meet the following requirements.

·· The area is accessible from within the building or located within 200 feet (60 meters) of a building entrance or
access point.
·· The area is located where no medical intervention or direct medical care is delivered.
·· Options for shade or indirect sun are provided, with at least one seating space per 200 square feet (18.5 square
meters) of each respite area, with one wheelchair space per five seating spaces.
·· Horticulture therapy and other specific clinical or special-use gardens unavailable to all building occupants
may account for no more than 50% of the required area.
·· Universal-access natural trails that are available to visitors, staff, or patients may account for no more than
30% of the required area, provided the trailhead is within 200 feet (60 meters) of a building entrance.

Additionally, outdoor areas must meet the following requirements.

·· A minimum of 25% of the total outdoor area must be vegetated at the ground plane (not including turf grass) or
have overhead vegetated canopy.
·· The area is open to fresh air, the sky, and the natural elements.
·· Signage must meet the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities (Section
1.2-6.3 and Appendix A1.2-6.3:Wayfinding).
·· Places of respite may not be within 25 feet (7.6 meters) of a smoking area (see EQ Prerequisite Environmental
Tobacco Smoke Control).

Existing places of respite on the hospital campus may qualify if they otherwise meet the credit requirements.
238

BEHIND THE INTENT

Access to fresh air, daylight, and outdoor vegetation can deliver important health benefits. Natural vegetated
elements allow patients, visitors, and staff to connect with nature and experience “relaxed wakefulness,” a state that
has been attributed to a decrease in negative emotions such as anger and anxiety.1
Studies have shown that patients with a view of nature recover faster, need fewer painkillers, and have fewer
complications after leaving the hospital.2 For staff, having access to nature relieves stress and enhances well-being,
and workers who are able to connect with nature also report fewer illnesses and higher levels of job satisfaction.3
SS

Caregivers who work long hours in a fast-paced, stressful, and physically demanding environment especially value
staff-only outdoor places of respite. Moreover, reducing patients’ length of stay and improving staff recruitment and
retention confer economic benefits.
This credit rewards quality spaces that include vegetation, have exposure to the elements, and allow
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

opportunities for exercise and movement. Such spaces must protect patients from bad weather and poor air quality
while accommodating those with limited mobility. When outdoor space provision is impossible, interior spaces with
unobstructed views of nature can grant similar benefits.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE REQUIRED AREA FOR PLACES OF RESPITE

Calculate the net usable program area of the project by summing all the interior areas available to
house the project’s program. Exclude areas for building equipment, vertical circulation, or structural
components (see Further Explanation, Qualifying Spaces, and ANSI/BOMA Z65.1–2010, Office Buildings:
Standard Methods of Measurement, boma.org, for more information about calculating net usable
program area).
Determine the required area for places of respite for patients and visitors and for staff. The area for
patients and visitors must be 5% of the net usable program area, and the area for staff must be 2% of the
net usable program area. For example, if the net usable program area is 10,000 square feet (930 square
meters), the total required area for patients and visitors is 500 square feet (46 square meters), and the
total required area for staff is 200 square feet (18 square meters).

STEP 2. DETERMINE TYPES AND SIZES OF PLACES OF RESPITE

Work with the owner, stakeholders, and designers to determine the types and areas of spaces that could
be designed as places of respite.
·· During the concept and schematic design phases, ensure that the project massing and the basic
interior layout allow for integrated exterior spaces.
·· Ensure that each type of designed space does not exceed the maximum allowed percentage of the
total places of respite area (Table 1).

TABLE 1. Places of respite criteria

Maximum % of total places

Type of space Special conditions
of respite area

90% of each qualifying

space’s gross floor area must
Interior atria, greenhouses, solaria, or conditioned spaces 30%
achieve direct line of sight to
unobstructed views of nature

Horticulture therapy and other specific clinical or special-use

50% None
gardens unavailable to all building occupants

Trailhead access must be

Universal-access natural trails 30% within 200 feet (60 meters)
of building entrance

1. Rohde, C.L.E., and A.D. Kendle, Report to English Nature—Human Well-Being, Natural Landscapes and Wildlife in Urban Areas: A Review
(Department of Horticulture and Landscape and the Research Institute for the Care of the Elderly, University of Reading, Bath, 1994).
2. Ulrich, R.S., View through a Window May Influence Recovery from Surgery, Science 224 (1984): 420–421.
3. Kaplan, R., and S. Kaplan, The Experience of Nature: A Psychological Perspective (New York and Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989).
 239

STEP 3. DETERMINE LOCATIONS AND QUALITIES OF PLACES OF RESPITE

Ensure that each area of respite is appropriately located and complies with any requirements for seating,
vegetation, and signage (see Further Explanation, Qualifying Spaces).

STEP 4. INCORPORATE QUALIFYING SPACES INTO THE DESIGN

If there are insufficient qualifying spaces in the existing facility or planned design, or the spaces do not
embody the qualities listed in the credit requirements, redesign the site to include more spaces with
these qualities.
·· Separation of spaces for staff from spaces for visitors and patients is not required but may be

SS
appropriate in some cases.
·· Some places of respite might have restricted access if they are intended for use by patients with
specific conditions or needs, or as a break area for staff.

PLACES OF RESPITE
FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

QUALIFYING SPACES
All areas must meet these requirements:
·· The area is accessible from within the building or located within 200 feet (60 meters) of a building entrance or
access point. Areas outside the project boundary can qualify as places of respite, provided they are within 200
feet (60 meters).
·· No medical intervention or direct medical care is delivered in the respite area.
·· For each 200 square feet (18 square meters) of respite area, at least one seating space and one wheelchair space
for every five seating spaces are placed in shade or indirect sunlight. Examples of qualifying features include
trellises and tree-shaded, wheelchair-accessible seating areas.

Outdoor spaces must meet these additional requirements:

·· At least 25% of the total outdoor area must be vegetated at the ground plane (not including turf grass) or have
vegetated canopy (trees and shrubs).
·· The area is open to fresh air, the sky, and the natural elements.
·· Signage must meet the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities (Section 1.2-
6.3 and Appendix A1.2-6.3, Wayfinding).
·· Places of respite may not be within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of a smoking area (see EQ Prerequisite Environmental
Tobacco Smoke Control).
240

EXAMPLE

Figure 1. Example site plan

Building Roof Terrace Open courtyard Consider balcony locations away

exhaust from building equipment
air location
SS

Dedicated wheelchair
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

seating space

Greenhouse =
1,000 sq ft
(95 sq m)

Shrubs =
250 sq ft
(23 sq m) total

Loading dock

Respite areas are within

200 ft (60m) of building entrance Ma
x2
00
Shade '-0
" (6
0m
) 25
'
(7. -0" 25'-0" (7.5m)
5m
)

Required seating must be located in shade

or indirect sun

Designated smoking area must be located

at least 25 ft (7.5m) away from places of respite

Signage meeting 2010 FGI Guidelines

300 sq ft (30 sq m) universal

access nature trail
Shade or indirect sun area = 2,000 sq ft (186 sq m)
Areas of respite
Staff dedicated area

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

USGBCCampus
LEEDApproach
Guide Illustrations
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
SS3
SSc Connection to the Natural World-
Places of Respite (Batch 1)
 241

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All Projects

Area, patient, visitor, staff, shading, and vegetation calculations X

Site plan highlighting qualifying outdoor and/or indoor places of respite, identified by user (patient and visitor
versus staff), and indicating their access points and distances, proximity to smoking areas, planes of vegetation and X
vegetated canopy, and shaded seating spaces (showing shade pattern throughout day)

SS
Drawings or photographs of wayfinding signage X

PLACES OF RESPITE
RELATED CREDIT TIPS
SS Credit Direct Exterior Access. Outdoor places of respite qualify as exterior access spaces for patients if they
meet the location requirements of the related credit.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Rain gardens and other rainwater management features may also serve as
outdoor places of respite.

SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat. Outdoor places of respite may also provide places to
restore or conserve habitat.

SS Credit Open Space. Meeting the vegetation requirements of this credit will help meet the requirements of the
related credit. Similar qualities of open space are required for both credits.

EQ Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control. To confirm compliance with the nonsmoking
requirement, ensure that the project has completed documentation for the related prerequisite.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

A requirement that 25% of all qualifying outdoor space be vegetated at the ground plane or with overhead vegetated
canopy (trees and shrubs only) was added to ensure that vegetation is present to provide additional benefits.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities: fgiguidelines.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Projects may earn exemplary performance by demonstrating both of the following:
·· Provide 10% of net usable program area as places of respite for patients and visitors
·· Provide 4% of the net usable program area as places of respite for staff

DEFINITIONS
net usable program area the sum of all interior areas in the project available to house the project’s program. It does
not include areas for building equipment, vertical circulation, or structural components.

place of respite an area that connects healthcare patients, visitors, and staff to health benefits of the natural
environment. (Adapted from Green Guide for Health Care Places of Respite Technical Brief)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SS

242
 243

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Direct Exterior Access

DIRECT EXTERIOR ACCESS

This credit applies to: Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To provide patients and staff with the health benefits associated with
direct access to the natural environment.

REQUIREMENTS
Provide direct access to an exterior courtyard, terrace, garden, or balcony. The space must be at least 5 square feet
(0.5 square meters) per patient for 75% of all inpatients and 75% of qualifying outpatients whose clinical length of
stay (LOS) exceeds four hours.
Patients whose length of stay exceeds four hours, and whose treatment makes them unable to move, such as
emergency, stage 1 surgical recovery, and critical care patients, may be excluded.
Places of respite outside the building envelope that meet the requirements of SS Credit Places of Respite that are
immediately adjacent to clinical areas or with direct access from inpatient units may be included.
Qualifying spaces must be designated as nonsmoking The spaces must also meet the requirements for outdoor
air contaminant concentrations enumerated in EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 and be
located more than 100 feet (30 meters) from building exhaust air locations, loading docks, and roadways with idling
vehicles.
244

BEHIND THE INTENT

Time spent outdoors and views of nature provide important health benefits to all people, but especially hospital
patients. Being outside allows people to connect with nature and experience “relaxed wakefulness,” a state
attributed to a decrease in negative emotions such as anger and anxiety.1
Studies have shown that patients with a natural view or access to nature recover faster, need fewer painkillers,
and have fewer complications after leaving the hospital.2 Quiet areas where people can reconnect to the natural
cycles of day and night, seasonal changes, and weather patterns provide relief from stressful environments.
SS

This credit rewards designs that include easy access to nature. Direct access can be critical for patients with
limited mobility or short times between treatments. Furthermore, access that allows for privacy encourages patients
to go outside at times when they do not wish to cross through public areas.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE NUMBER OF PATIENTS

Use the peak number of inpatients and peak number of qualifying outpatients to determine the minimum
required outdoor area. The peak number of inpatients used for credit calculations should correspond to
the total peak inpatients used across all credits (see Definitions and Getting Started, Occupancy).
To determine the peak number of qualifying outpatients, begin with the total peak outpatients in the
project and make the following adjustments:
·· Outpatients whose length of stay is less than four hours are considered nonqualifying. Do not include
these outpatients in credit calculations.
·· Outpatients whose length of stay exceeds four hours and whose treatment makes them immobile may
be excluded from calculations. These patients include those in emergency, stage 1 surgical recovery,
stage 2 recovery, and similar spaces. For the purposes of credit documentation, these patients are
“excluded outpatients.”
·· Qualifying outpatients are all nonexcluded patients whose length of stay is four hours or more.
Examples of qualifying outpatients may include patients undergoing renal dialysis, infusion therapies,
ambulatory surgery intake, and stage 2 recovery.
In the preliminary design phases of a project, the peak number of inpatients can be estimated by
approximating the total number of inpatient beds. To estimate the peak number of qualifying outpatients,
consider the types of outpatients that the facility serves. Use the number of qualifying outpatient beds,
treatment room capacity, or similar information to estimate the number of qualifying outpatients.

STEP 2. DETERMINE REQUIRED OUTDOOR AREA

Use Equation 1 to calculate the required outdoor area. At least 5 square feet (0.5 square meters) of space
must be provided per patient for 75% of peak inpatients and 75% of peak qualifying outpatients.

EQUATION 1. Required outdoor area

Required outdoor area = 5 ft2 × (.75) peak inpatients + 5 ft2 × (.75) qualifying outpatients

OR
Required outdoor area = 0.5 m2 × (.75) peak inpatients + 0.5 m2 × (.75) qualifying outpatients

STEP 3. DETERMINE OUTDOOR SPACE NEEDS AND QUALITIES

Work with the owner, stakeholders, and designers to determine the types and areas of outdoor spaces
that will meet project goals and the credit intent.
·· Unlike SS Credit Places of Respite, interior spaces do not count toward this credit.

1. Rohde, C.L.E., and A.D. Kendle, Report to English Nature—Human Well-Being, Natural Landscapes and Wildlife in Urban Areas: A Review (Department of
Horticulture and Landscape and the Research Institute for the Care of the Elderly, University of Reading, Bath, 1994).
2. Ulrich, R.S., View through a Window May Influence Recovery from Surgery, Science 224 (1984): 420–421 .
 245

·· Private balconies must meet the minimum size requirement. For example, a balcony for one patient
must be at least 5 square feet (0.5 square meter).
·· The exterior areas can be shared patient spaces, provided the total area meets the required size based
on the number of patients using the space.
·· Consult the outdoor air contaminant concentration requirements in EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air
Quality Strategies, Option 2, and ensure that contaminants do not exceed the National Ambient Air
Quality Standards thresholds (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
·· Identify the locations of building air exhausts, loading docks, and potential vehicle idling areas (e.g.,
designated delivery areas, waste disposal locations) and locate the outdoor spaces at least 100 feet

SS
(30 meters) away.

STEP 4. INCORPORATE DIRECT ACCESS TO QUALIFYING SPACES INTO PROJECT DESIGN

If there are insufficient qualifying spaces in the existing facility or planned design, or the spaces do not

DIRECT EXTERIOR ACCESS

embody the qualities listed in the credit, redesign the site to include more spaces that provide direct access
to an exterior courtyard, terrace, garden, or balcony.
·· During the concept and schematic design phases, ensure that the project massing and the basic
interior layout allow for integrated exterior spaces. For patients with limited mobility, ensure that
respite areas are accessible and close to patients’ rooms. Areas outside the project boundary can
qualify, provided they meet the requirements of the credit.
·· Patients must have access to these spaces directly from their rooms or treatment areas. Shared
exterior connections are allowed, but interior connections (e.g., through a patient’s room) are not.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.
 246

EXAMPLE
Loading dock Consider balcony locations away
from building equipment
Building exhaust
air location
SS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Min
10
fro 0'-0"
me
xha (30m
ust )

Direct access to shared outdoor space

Direct access from clinical area

Outdoor space meets SSc Places of Respite

Balcony = minimum 5 sq ft (.5 sq m)

Figure 1. Direct access
Garden = 2,000 sq ft (186 sq m)
to places of respite

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

s Reserved. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION Campus Approach

Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations SS2
SSc Connection to the Natural World-
Direct Exterior Access for Patients (Batch 1)
REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All Projects

Area and patient calculations X

Site plan indicating locations of accessible outdoor areas, area takeoffs, building air exhausts, exterior exhaust vents,
X
and access points and distances to outdoor areas
 247

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SS Credit Places of Respite. Outdoor places of respite can qualify as exterior access spaces for patients if there is
direct access.

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Rain gardens and other rainwater management features may also serve as
outdoor spaces that meet the requirements of this credit.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2. Achieving the outdoor air contaminant

SS
concentrations in this related credit satisfies the outdoor air quality component of SS Credit Direct Exterior Access
for Patients.

DIRECT EXTERIOR ACCESS

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
None.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
direct access a means of entering a space without having to leave the floor or pass through another patient’s room,
dedicated staff space, service or utility space, or major public space. Patients’ and public circulation corridors,
common sitting areas, and waiting and day space may be part of a direct access route.

inpatient an individual admitted to a medical, surgical, maternity, specialty, or intensive-care unit for a length of stay
exceeding 23 hours

length of stay the amount of time a person remains in a health care facility as an admitted patient

outpatient a patient who is not hospitalized for 24 hours or more but who visits a hospital, clinic, or associated
healthcare facility for diagnosis or treatment

place of respite an area that connects healthcare patients, visitors, and staff to health benefits of the natural
environment. (Adapted from Green Guide for Health Care Places of Respite Technical Brief)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SS

248
 249

SUSTAINABLE SITES CREDIT

SS
Joint Use of Facilities

JOINT USE OF FACILITIES

This credit applies to: Schools (1 point)

INTENT

To integrate the school with the community by sharing the building and
its playing fields for nonschool events and functions.

REQUIREMENTS

OPTION 1. MAKE BUILDING SPACE OPEN TO THE GENERAL PUBLIC (1 POINT)

In collaboration with the school authorities, ensure that at least three of the following types of spaces in the school
are accessible to and available for shared use by the general public:
·· auditorium;
·· gymnasium;
·· cafeteria;
·· one or more classrooms;
·· playing fields and stadiums; and
·· joint parking.

Provide access to toilets in joint-use areas after normal school hours.

OR

OPTION 2. CONTRACT WITH SPECIFIC ORGANIZATIONS TO SHARE BUILDING SPACE (1

POINT)

In collaboration with the school authorities, contract with community or other organizations to provide at least two
types of dedicated-use spaces in the building, such as the following:
·· commercial office;
·· health clinic;
·· community service centers (provided by state or local offices);
·· police office;
·· library or media center;
·· parking lot; and
·· one or more commercial businesses.

Provide access to toilets in joint-use areas after normal school hours.

250

OR

OPTION 3. USE SHARED SPACE OWNED BY OTHER ORGANIZATIONS (1 POINT)

In collaboration with the school authorities, ensure that at least two of the following six types of spaces that are
owned by other organizations or agencies are accessible to students:
·· auditorium;
·· gymnasium;
·· cafeteria;
SS

·· one or more classrooms;

·· swimming pool; and
·· playing fields and stadiums.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Provide direct pedestrian access to these spaces from the school. In addition, provide signed joint-use agreements
with the other organizations or agencies that stipulate how these spaces will be shared.
 251

BEHIND THE INTENT

A joint-use agreement encourages community organizations and businesses to share existing amenity spaces.
Doing so brings social benefits to the local community; it also may reduce the need for new development, thereby
preserving previously undeveloped land and avoiding the financial costs and environmental consequences of new
construction.
Local communities benefit most when multiple organizations share the costs of constructing, operating, and
maintaining a facility. Joint-use agreements allow buildings and sites that would typically go unused after normal

SS
business or operating hours to offer to host community programs, thereby maximizing the useful life of the building.
In addition, communities may enjoy new or more convenient services.

JOINT USE OF FACILITIES

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ENGAGE SCHOOL AUTHORITIES

Initiate preliminary discussions with the school authorities, ideally before or during the design phase of
the project, to identify the best opportunities for shared use in the school.
School expansion limits, parking capacity limits, resource availability, and the pros and cons of shared
spaces are among the points to discuss when meeting with the school authorities.

STEP 2. SELECT ONE OPTION

·· Option 1 is for projects with multiple assembly spaces that could be made accessible to the
general public.
·· Option 2 is for projects that could be designed to include spaces for external groups or companies.
·· Option 3 is for projects that will provide student access to spaces owned by other organizations and
located off site.

Option 1. Make Building Space Open to the General Public

STEP 1. ALLOCATE SHARED SPACES

Work with the school authorities to identify and allocate at least three types of eligible shared spaces
within the project that are to be made available to the general community.
·· Discuss community needs with the school authorities to determine which types of spaces will be made
available.
·· Obtain written confirmation from the school authorities that these spaces will be made available to the
public.

STEP 2. DESIGNATE FACILITIES FOR SHARED SPACES

Designate restroom facilities that are accessible to shared-space users after normal school hours.

STEP 3. ESTABLISH TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF USAGE

Meet with the school authorities to establish terms and conditions surrounding the usage of the shared
spaces (see Further Explanation, Examples). Draft a shared-use policy stipulating that at least three
types of dedicated-use spaces will be available for public use. Alternatively, demonstrate that an existing
policy is in place that meets the criteria. Also describe the specific facilities for use by the general public,
and their terms and conditions. Indicate how the availability of the spaces will be communicated to the
community. There is no minimum length of contract required. Fees for access to the shared spaces may
be determined at the discretion of involved parties.
252

Option 2. Contract with Specific Organizations to Share Building Space

STEP 1. ALLOCATE DEDICATED-USE SHARED SPACES

Work with school authorities to identify and allocate at least two types of eligible dedicated-use spaces
within the project that will be made available to specific outside organizations.
·· Together with school authorities, identify community organizations, companies, or government
organizations that need assembly space.
·· Collaborate with the school authorities and the chosen outside organization(s) to determine which
SS

spaces in the project will be shared.

STEP 2. DESIGNATE FACILITIES FOR DEDICATED-USE SHARED SPACES

Designate restroom facilities that are accessible to shared-space users after normal school hours.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 3. ESTABLISH TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF USAGE

Meet with the school authorities and the organization(s) that will use the dedicated spaces to establish
terms and conditions of usage. Alternatively, demonstrate that an existing policy is in place that meets
the criteria. Ensure that a signed contract (joint agreement) is in place between the school authorities
and the organization(s); this joint agreement must stipulate that at least two types of dedicated-use
spaces will be shared with the organization(s). There is no minimum length of contract required. Fees for
access to the shared spaces may be determined at the discretion of involved parties.

Option 3. Use Shared Space Owned by Other Organizations

STEP 1. DETERMINE WHICH SPACES WILL BE ACCESSIBLE TO STUDENTS

Collaborate with school authorities, neighboring agencies, and outside companies to identify eligible
facilities owned by organizations in the community that could be made accessible to students.
·· Discuss students’ needs and planned school facilities with the school authorities to determine which
types of additional spaces would be desirable or necessary. Jointly identify local community groups,
companies, or government organizations that may have the desired facilities.
·· Collaborate with the school authorities and the identified community organizations to confirm
accessibility of at least two types of eligible spaces to students.
·· The facilities must be accessible on foot. An example is a park across the street from the school to
which students can walk on a continuous sidewalk. Ineligible examples are a park across a busy road
without crosswalks, and a pool three miles—an infeasible distance for pedestrians—from the school.

STEP 2. ESTABLISH TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF USAGE

Meet with the school authorities and community organization(s) providing the shared spaces to establish
terms and conditions of usage (see Further Explanation, Examples). Alternatively, demonstrate that an
existing policy is in place that meets the criteria. Ensure that a signed contract is in place between the
school authorities and the outside organization(s). This joint agreement must stipulate that at least two
types of dedicated-use spaces will be shared with the students. Describe the accessibility of the shared
spaces. There is no minimum length of contract required. Fees for access to the shared spaces may be
determined at the discretion of involved parties.
 253

FURTHER EXPLANATION

EXAMPLE
Building entrance During design, this library was located
at the front of the campus, and adjacent
to stairs and restrooms, to accommodate
and encourage use by several community
members.

SS
JOINT USE OF FACILITIES
Building entrance

Auditorium / Theatre
Classrooms
Gym
Sidewalk
Library
Restrooms

Figure 1. Sample floor plan for shared-use spaces

s Reserved. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

Sample documentation narrative for Option 1

USGBC
School LEED Guide Illustrations
X has established an agreement with the local land-use planning agency to use specified spaces SS20
within the school
Joint
for meetings and activities. The use of the school by external organizations mayUse of Facilities
not interfere (BD+C)
with school programs
and must occur after school hours and on weekends. Spaces available for use by community organizations are the
Auditorium, Classroom B, Restrooms, and Parking Lot 1. These spaces are identified on the accompanying drawings.

Sample documentation narrative for Option 3

School X has established an agreement with the local government to use the gymnasium and swimming pool in the
public recreation center. The public recreation center is located approximately 1,000 feet (305 meters) from the school
and is accessible by a sidewalk; students will cross one two-lane road at a traffic light that has a walk signal. Use of the
recreation spaces will take place before and during normal school operating hours. These spaces are identified on the
accompanying site plan as G1(gymnasium) and S1 (swimming pool).
254

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
SS

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

Floor plan highlighting joint-use spaces, restroom facilities, and room names X X

Shared-use policy with terms, conditions, and description of communication to

X
public

Signed agreement between school authorities and occupying organization(s) X

Signed agreement stipulating how spaces will be shared with students X

Site plan showing pedestrian access route and distance from school to joint-use
X
spaces

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses. A project that is located in a dense area with multiple uses is
more likely to be able to achieve compliance with Option 3 of this credit.

SS Credit Site Master Plan. Documented opportunities to share building space or formalize other community
partnerships may reduce the need for future expansion, which could affect the site master plan. Stakeholder
charrettes held to comply with the related credit may inspire community partnerships, which could help the project
achieve this credit.

LT Credit Reduced Parking Footprint. Shared school parking lots or parking lots on neighboring sites used for
school functions may reduce the number of new parking spaces for the related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

None.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.
 255

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.

SS
JOINT USE OF FACILITIES
 257

WE
Water

WATER EFFICIENCY
Efficiency (WE)
OVERVIEW
The Water Efficiency (WE) section addresses water holistically, looking at indoor use, outdoor use, specialized
uses, and metering. The section is based on an “efficiency first” approach to water conservation. As a result, each
prerequisite looks at water efficiency and reductions in potable water use alone. Then, the WE credits additionally
recognize the use of nonpotable and alternative sources of water.
The conservation and creative reuse of water are important because only 3% of Earth’s water is fresh water, and of
that, slightly over two-thirds is trapped in glaciers.1 Typically, most of a building’s water cycles through the building
and then flows off-site as wastewater. In developed nations, potable water often comes from a public water supply
system far from the building site, and wastewater leaving the site must be piped to a processing plant, after which it is
discharged into a distant water body. This pass-through system reduces streamflow in rivers and depletes freshwater
aquifers, causing water tables to drop and wells to go dry. In 60% of European cities with more than 100,000 people,
groundwater is being used faster than it can be replenished.2
In addition, the energy required to treat water for drinking, transport it to and from a building, and treat it
for disposal represents a significant amount of energy use not captured by a building’s utility meter. Research in
California shows that roughly 19% of all energy used in this U.S. state is consumed by water treatment and pumping.3
In the U.S., buildings account for 13.6% of potable water use,4 the third-largest category, behind thermoelectric
power and irrigation. Designers and builders can construct green buildings that use significantly less water than
conventional construction by incorporating native landscapes that eliminate the need for irrigation, installing water-
efficient fixtures, and reusing wastewater for nonpotable water needs. The Green Building Market Impact Report
2009 found that LEED projects were responsible for saving an aggregate 1.2 trillion gallons (4.54 trillion liters) of
water.5 LEED’s WE credits encourage project teams to take advantage of every opportunity to significantly reduce
total water use.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Water Trivia Facts, water.epa.gov/learn/kids/drinkingwater/water_trivia_facts.cfm (accessed September 12, 2012).
2. Statistics: Graphs & Maps, UN Water, http://www.unwater.org/statistics/en/ (accessed July 9, 2014).
3. energy.ca.gov/2005publications/CEC-700-2005-011/CEC-700-2005-011-SF.PDF
4. USGBC, Green Building Facts, http://www.usgbc.org/articles/green-building-facts.
5. Green Outlook 2011, Green Trends Driving Growth (McGraw-Hill Construction, 2010), aiacc.org/wp-content/uploads/2011/06/greenoutlook2011.pdf
(accessed on September 12, 2012).
258

CROSS-CUTTING ISSUES
The WE category comprises three major components: indoor water (used by fixtures, appliances, and processes,
such as cooling), irrigation water, and water metering. Several kinds of documentation span these components,
depending on the project’s specific water-saving strategies.

Site plans: Plans are used to document the location and size of vegetated areas and the locations of meters and
submeters. Within the building, floorplans show the location of fixtures, appliances, and process water equipment
(e.g., cooling towers, evaporative condensers), as well as indoor submeters. The same documentation can be used in
credits in the Sustainable Sites category.

Fixture cutsheets: Projects must document their fixtures (and appliances as applicable) using fixture cutsheets or
manufacturers’ literature. This documentation is used in the Indoor Water Use Reduction prerequisite and credit.

Alternative water sources: A project that includes graywater reuse, rainwater harvesting, municipally supplied
WE

wastewater (purple pipe water), or other reused sources is eligible to earn credit in WE Credit Outdoor Water Use
Reduction, WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction, WE Credit Cooling Tower Water Use, and WE Credit Water
Metering. But the team cannot apply the same water to multiple credits unless the water source has sufficient volume
to cover the demand of all the uses (e.g., irrigation plus toilet-flushing demand).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Occupancy calculations: The Indoor Water Use Reduction prerequisite and credit require projections based on
occupants’ usage. The Location and Transportation and Sustainable Sites categories also use project occupancy
calculations. Review the occupancy section in Getting Started to understand how occupants are classified and
counted. Also see WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction for additional guidance specific to the WE section.
 259

WATER EFFICIENCY PREREQUISITE

Outdoor Water Use

Reduction

WE
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers

OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

INTENT

To reduce outdoor water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS

Reduce outdoor water use through one of the following options. Nonvegetated surfaces, such as permeable or
impermeable pavement, should be excluded from the landscape area calculations. Athletic fields and playgrounds (if
vegetated) and food gardens may be included or excluded at the project team’s discretion.

OPTION 1. NO IRRIGATION REQUIRED

Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation system beyond a maximum two-year establishment
period.

OR

OPTION 2. REDUCED IRRIGATION

Reduce the project’s landscape water requirement by at least 30% from the calculated baseline for the site’s peak
watering month. Reductions must be achieved through plant species selection and irrigation system efficiency, as
calculated by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) WaterSense Water Budget Tool.
260

BEHIND THE INTENT

Landscape irrigation practices consume large quantities of potable water, sometimes accounting for 30% to 70%
of the water consumed in nonagricultural use. Potable water is a precious resource globally. For example, in many
European cities, groundwater is being used at a faster rate than it can be replenished, according to the World
Business Council for Sustainable Development.1 Good landscape design and use of native, adapted, and drought-
tolerant plants can dramatically reduce and even eliminate the need for irrigation while better integrating the
building site into its surroundings and attracting native wildlife. Native plants also tend to require less fertilizer and
fewer chemical pesticides, which degrade water quality when carried away in stormwater runoff.
The landscape water requirement (LWR) can be estimated by developing a water budget that allows landscape
professionals to consider the effects of the many design variables, such as plant types, planting density, and irrigation
system elements. Using a water budget optimizes water use in landscape designs.
WE

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Projects with no landscape area are exempt from this prerequisite.

For U.S. projects, the WaterSense Water Budget Tool automatically derives rainfall and evapotranspiration
from the project’s zip code. Skip Step 1 and go to Step 2.

STEP 1. PROJECTS OUTSIDE U.S. ONLY: OBTAIN PRECIPITATION AND

EVAPOTRANSPIRATION DATA TO DETERMINE IRRIGATION REQUIREMENTS
Gather average monthly precipitation data and evapotranspiration rates (ETo) for the project area to
determine the site’s potential irrigation needs. Precipitation data and ETo can be found for most locations
around the world (see Further Explanation, International Tips).
·· An Excel version of the WaterSense Water Budget Tool can be found under the Resources tab for this
credit, at usgbc.org/credits.
·· Project teams outside the U.S. must complete the tool using IP rather than SI units. Use the conversion
calculator found under the Resources tab.

STEP 2. DETERMINE VEGETATED AREAS

On a map, indicate all areas on the project site that will have vegetation.
·· The following landscape types may be included or excluded from landscape calculations: vegetated
playgrounds, athletic fields, food gardens, and urban agricultural areas.
·· When planning the site layout, consider factors such as proximity to water source for optimized
irrigation, distance from water meter, and so on.

STEP 3. SELECT PLANT TYPES AND COVERAGE

Identify plant types and coverage that will balance water use efficiency with the area’s intended function.
·· Reserve grass for play fields or other activities that require turf; using turf for groundcover will make it
very difficult to meet prerequisite and credit thresholds.
·· Once established, native and drought-tolerant plants generally require little to no irrigation.
·· Consider the U.S. Department of Agriculture’s plant database and the Lady Bird Johnson Wildflower
Center’s native plant database as resources. Both databases provide standardized information about
native plants—for example, moisture requirements and preferred growing conditions—along with
distribution data, plant images, and references.

STEP 4. SELECT ONE OPTION

Select the appropriate option for the project’s irrigation needs, as described in the credit requirements.
·· Option 1 is for projects that do not require irrigation, based on the location and landscape design.
Projects that have no landscape area automatically achieve this prerequisite.
·· Option 2 is for projects that require irrigation.

1. unwater.org/statistics_use.html.
 261

Option 1. No Irrigation Required

STEP 1. DEVELOP THE PLANT SPECIES AND WATER REQUIREMENT NARRATIVE

·· Describe the plantings and explain why they will not require irrigation beyond their specified
establishment periods. Indicate why average rainfall will be sufficient.
·· A landscaping plan showing native plants may be provided to confirm that irrigation will not be
required, based on local rainfall and plants’ water demands.

Option 2. Reduced Irrigation

STEP 1. REDUCE IRRIGATION NEEDS BY ALTERING DESIGN

Project teams can dramatically alter irrigation demand by selecting plants that are appropriate for their

WE
intended uses.
·· Reserve grass for play fields or other activities that require turf; using turf for groundcover will
dramatically affect the ability to meet prerequisite and credit thresholds.
·· Restore or plant native species to replace areas requiring intensive irrigation.

OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

STEP 2. CALCULATE LANDSCAPE WATER BUDGET
Calculate water use as a percentage of total irrigation and peak-month irrigation demand using the
WaterSense Water Budget Tool (see Further Explanation, About WaterSense, Examples, and International
Tips).
·· Use the tool for vegetated areas only. Do not include hardscapes (whether pervious or impervious) or
unvegetated softscapes, such as mulched paths and playgrounds.
·· Resolve uncertainties about plants’ water requirements by referring to local resources such as plant
guides, the state agricultural extension service, or nurseries to classify each plant type as a low,
medium, or high water user.
·· Projects may not enter zero landscape water consumption for any landscaped area.
·· If only part of the lot is irrigated, complete the calculation twice—once for the irrigated section, and
again for the unirrigated area—and sum the results.
·· Additional savings gained by using alternative water sources and smart sensor technologies are
addressed in WE Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction. No credit is given for alternative water sources
in this prerequisite.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

ABOUT WATERSENSE
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s WaterSense website includes this reference for native vegetation in
various parts of the U.S.: epa.gov/watersense/outdoor/what_to_plant.html.
Use the WaterSense Water Budget Data Finder to estimate the evapotranspiration rate (ETo) in inches per
month for the critical month of the year, based on a project’s zip code. ETo, a measurement of water lost from a well-
maintained expanse of average-height green grass and the surrounding soil, varies with a location’s sunshine, wind,
humidity, and temperature. Hot, dry, and windy locations have higher ETo values than cool, humid locations. Data for
these variables are based on 30-year historical averages. Data for projects outside the U.S. are not included in
this tool.
262

The WaterSense Water Budget Tool (epa.gov/watersense/water_budget/) calculates a baseline landscape water
requirement of a typical landscape, as described above. Different plant species and their arrangement in the
landscape can be entered, and the tool estimates the effect of these design variables on LWR. Project teams outside
the U.S. may use this tool with local data.
Design decisions about the different components of irrigation water delivery systems also factor into the
estimates the tool provides.
WaterSense irrigation controller specifications (epa.gov/WaterSense/products/controltech.html) outline the
requirements for weather-based irrigation controller systems. These systems earn projects a standard 15% reduction
in landscape water requirement for WE Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction.

Trees: drip irrigation Groundcover: low water need native species

L
WE

L
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Building footprint = 9,000 sq ft (835 sq m)

Hardscape = 18,000 sq ft (1 670 sq m)
Groundcover = 10,000 sq ft (930 sq m)
Trees = 6,000 sq ft (557 sq m)

Figure 1. Example Site Plan

 263

EXAMPLES
Each location’s rainfall and evapotranspiration levels determine how much water a project needs. Consider two
projects using Option 2, each with a fairly water-efficient landscape around an office building, one in Livingston, New
Jersey, and one in Palo Alto, California (Figure 1).

Example 1. Livingston, New Jersey

The location is a typical suburban community in northern New Jersey. Its zip code is 07039. The team uses the EPA
WaterSense Water Budget Data Finder:
·· Enter Zip Code: 07039
·· Peak Month: Jun
·· ETo Value: 6.30 inches/month
·· Rainfall: 3.40 inches/month

When landscape area is entered, the tool offers these results (Figure 2):

WE
·· Total: 16,000 sq ft
·· 10,000 sq ft of groundcover—low water need, native species, drip irrigation
·· 6,000 sq ft of trees—medium water need, drip irrigation

OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Figure 2. Water Budget Calculation for Livingston, NJ Location. Screenshot taken from http://www.epa.gov/watersense

The landscape water allowance (30% below baseline minimum) equals 43,980 gallons a month. The LWR for this
design in this location is 15,939 gallons a month. The total savings from the baseline amounts to 75%. Since only 30%
is required to meet the prerequisite, the project easily achieves compliance.

Example 2. Palo Alto, California

Palo Alto is in a fairly dry region of the country. The team uses the EPA WaterSense Water Budget Data Finder
(Figure 3):
·· Enter Zip Code: 94301
·· Peak Month: Jul
·· ETo Value: 6.00 inches/month
·· Rainfall: 0.00 inches/month
264
WE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 3. Water Budget Calculation for Palo Alto, CA Location. Screenshot taken from http://www.epa.gov/watersense

With a total landscape area of 16,000 square feet—10,000 square feet of groundcover (low water need, native
species, drip irrigation) and 6,000 square feet of trees (medium water need, drip irrigation)—the tool now calculates
a landscape water allowance of 41,886 gallons a month, or 30% below the baseline minimum. Compared with the
New Jersey example above, the landscape water requirement for this design has increased to 26,713 gallons a month.
The total savings from baseline is now 55%, but since only 30% is required, the project still achieves the prerequisite.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
The World Meteorological Organization website (worldweather.wmo.int) and other sources provide annual
precipitation data for many sites. If precipitation data for the project location are unavailable, they must be
estimated.
Evapotranspiration data are available through various government and academic sources. The Food and
Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (fao.org/nr/water/eto.html) calculates reference evapotranspiration
using a variety of algorithms based on monthly average weather data. The month with the largest deficit between
reference evapotranspiration and rainfall is the peak watering month.
The international version of the WaterSense Water Budget Tool can be found on the USGBC website under this
credit’s resources section.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Use the total landscaped area of the entire campus. The results
of the Water Budget Tool apply to all buildings within the group.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
 265

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Site plan showing vegetated areas X

Narrative for plant species and water requirements X

Site plan showing location and size of landscape zones X

Water Budget Tool report X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

WE
WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering. Projects that meter landscape irrigation separately will find it
easier to meet this prerequisite and subsequent credits for outdoor water use and water metering.

OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
·· Modified calculator used for this credit
·· Moved alternative water source credit and smart sensor irrigation to the credit

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
adapted plant vegetation that is not native to a particular region but that has characteristics that allow it to live in
the area. Adapted plants do not pose the same problems as invasive species.

combination oven discharge water released from an oven that includes a steam cycle or option

conventional irrigation a region’s most common system for providing water to plants by nonnatural means. A
conventional irrigation system commonly uses pressure to deliver water and distributes it through sprinkler heads
above the ground.

cooling tower blowdown the water discharged from a cooling tower typically because increased salinity or
alkalinity has caused scaling. Cooling tower blowdown may be too saline for use in landscape irrigation.

evapotranspiration the combination of evaporation and plant transpiration into the atmosphere. Evaporation
occurs when liquid water from soil, plant surfaces, or water bodies becomes vapor. Transpiration is the movement of
water through a plant and the subsequent loss of water vapor.
266

foundation drain the water discharged from a subsurface drainage system. If a building foundation is below the
water table, a sump pump may be required. Discharge from the sump may be stored and used for irrigation.

graywater “untreated household waste water which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Graywater includes
used water from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, and water from clothes-washers and laundry tubs. It
must not include waste water from kitchen sinks or dishwashers” (Uniform Plumbing Code, Appendix G, Gray
Water Systems for Single-Family Dwellings); “waste water discharged from lavatories, bathtubs, showers, clothes
washers and laundry sinks” (International Plumbing Code, Appendix C, Gray Water Recycling Systems). Some states
and local authorities allow kitchen sink wastewater to be included in graywater. Other differences can likely be found
in state and local codes. Project teams should comply with the graywater definition established by the authority
having jurisdiction in the project area.

hardscape the inanimate elements of the building landscaping. It includes pavement, roadways, stonewalls, wood
and synthetic decking, concrete paths and sidewalks, and concrete, brick, and tile patios.
WE

hydrozone a group of plantings with similar water needs

industrial process water any water discharged from a factory setting. Before this water can be used for irrigation, its
quality needs to be checked. Saline or corrosive water should not be used for irrigation.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

landscape water requirement (LWR) the amount of water that the site landscape area(s) requires for the site’s
peak watering month

native vegetation an indigenous species that occurs in a particular region, ecosystem, and habitat without direct or
indirect human actions. Native species have evolved to the geography, hydrology, and climate of that region. They
also occur in communities; that is, they have evolved together with other species. As a result, these communities
provide habitat for a variety of other native wildlife species. Species native to North America are generally recognized
as those occurring on the continent prior to European settlement. Also known as native plants.

peak watering month the month with the greatest deficit between evapotranspiration and rainfall. This is the
month when the plants in the site’s region potentially require the most supplemental water typically a mid-summer
month. (Sustainable Sites Initiative)

potable water water that meets or exceeds U.S. Environmental Protection Agency drinking water quality standards
(or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities
having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems

rainwater harvesting the capture, diversion, and storage of rain for future beneficial use. Typically, a rain barrel or
cistern stores the water; other components include the catchment surface and conveyance system. The harvested
rainwater can be used for irrigation.

reclaimed water wastewater that has been treated and purified for reuse

reference evapotranspiration rate the amount of water lost from a specific vegetated surface with no moisture
limitation. Turf grass with height of 120 mm is the reference vegetation.

softscape the elements of a landscape that consist of live, horticultural elements

xeriscaping landscaping that does not require routine irrigation

 267

WATER EFFICIENCY PREREQUISITE

Indoor Water Use

Reduction

WE
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

INTENT

To reduce indoor water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS

Building Water Use

For the fixtures and fittings listed in Table 1, as applicable to the project scope, reduce aggregate water consumption
by 20% from the baseline. Base calculations on the volumes and flow rates shown in Table 1.

All newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads that are eligible for labeling must be
WaterSense labeled (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).

TABLE 1. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings

Fixture or fitting Baseline (IP units) Baseline (SI units)

Toilet (water closet)* 1.6 gpf 6 lpf

Urinal* 1.0 gpf 3.8 lpf

0.5 gpm at 60 psi all others except 1.9 lpm at 415 kPa, all others
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet
private applications except private applications

Private lavatory faucets 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa

Kitchen faucet (excluding faucets used

2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
exclusively for filling operations)

Showerhead* 2.5 gpm at 80 psi per shower stall 9.5 lpm at 550 kPa per shower stall

*WaterSense label available for this product type

gpf = gallons per flush gpm = gallons per minute psi = pounds per square inch
lpf = liters per flush lpm = liters per minute kPa = kilopascals
268

Appliance and Process Water Use

Install appliances, equipment, and processes within the project scope that meet the requirements listed in the tables
below.

TABLE 2. Standards for appliances

Appliance Requirement

Residential clothes washers ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent

Commercial clothes washers CEE Tier 3A

Residential dishwashers (standard and compact) ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent

Prerinse spray valves ≤ 1.3 gpm (4.9 lpm)

WE

ENERGY STAR or performance equivalent and use either air-cooled

Ice machine
or closed-loop cooling, such as chilled or condenser water system

gpm = gallons per minute lpm = liters per minute

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

TABLE 3. Standards for processes

Process Requirement

No once-through cooling with potable water for any equipment or

Heat rejection and cooling
appliances that reject heat

Equip with
• makeup water meters
• conductivity controllers and overflow alarms
Cooling towers and evaporative condensers
• efficient drift eliminators that reduce drift to maximum of 0.002%
of recirculated water volume for counterflow towers and 0.005%
of recirculated water flow for cross-flow towers

gpm = gallons per minute lpm = liters per minute

 269

HEALTHCARE, RETAIL, SCHOOLS, AND HOSPITALITY ONLY

In addition, water-consuming appliances, equipment, and processes must meet the requirements listed in Tables 4
and 5.

TABLE 4. Standards for appliances

Kitchen equipment Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units)

Dishwasher Undercounter ≤ 1.6 gal/rack ≤ 6.0 liters/rack

Stationary, single tank, door ≤ 1.4 gal/rack ≤ 5.3 liters/rack

Single tank, conveyor ≤ 1.0 gal/rack ≤ 3.8 liters/rack

WE
Multiple tank, conveyor ≤ 0.9 gal/rack ≤ 3.4 liters/rack

Flight machine ≤ 180 gal/hour ≤ 680 liters/hour

Food steamer Batch ≤ 6 gal/hour/pan ≤ 23 liters/hour/pan

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Cook-to-order ≤ 10 gal/hour/pan ≤ 38 liters/hour/pan

Combination oven Countertop or stand ≤ 3.5 gal/hour/pan ≤ 13 liters/hour/pan

Roll-in ≤ 3.5 gal/hour/pan ≤ 13 liters/hour/pan

TABLE 5. Process requirements

Process Requirement

Where local requirements limit discharge temperature of fluids into

drainage system, use tempering device that runs water only when
equipment discharges hot water
OR
Discharge water temperature tempering Provide thermal recovery heat exchanger that cools drained
discharge water below code-required maximum discharge
temperatures while simultaneously preheating inlet makeup water
OR
If fluid is steam condensate, return it to boiler

Use no device that generates vacuum by means of water flow

Venturi-type flow-through vacuum generators or aspirators
through device into drain
270

BEHIND THE INTENT

Potable water usage in buildings constitutes a large portion of freshwater consumption. Strategies to reduce potable
water use in buildings entail the selection of efficient plumbing fittings, fixtures, and equipment. Fixtures that use
20% to 50% less water than code-required levels are now widely available. The WaterSense label was developed by
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency to identify these efficient fixtures and ensure that higher efficiency does
not come at the cost of performance. The WaterSense label has been incorporated as a requirement for this credit to
ensure that fixtures in a LEED building are both water efficient and high performing.
In some buildings, intensive appliance and process water use can exceed water use from fixtures and landscape
combined. This is especially true for buildings with cooling towers or evaporative condensers. Appliance and process
water use is therefore addressed specifically with a separate set of requirements.
Because the WE section is designed around an “efficiency first” model, the prerequisite deals only with the
efficiency of fixtures and fittings; alternative or nonpotable water sources that offset potable water demand are also
addressed in the corresponding credit.
WE

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. SELECT COMPLIANCE PATH

Determine the appropriate compliance path(s) for the project.
·· Compliance Path 1 Prescriptive Achievement is for projects whose installed fixtures do not exceed
WaterSense maximum levels. Compliance is documented through product cutsheets or fixture
schedules.
·· Compliance Path 2 Usage-Based Calculation is for projects that cannot demonstrate the 20%
reduction for each fixture, based on manufacturers’ documentation. Using the indoor water use
calculator provided by USGBC, the project team must perform calculations to show that, in aggregate,
the fixtures comply with prerequisite requirements. Projects pursuing points under WE Credit Indoor
Water Use Reduction must use this compliance path.

STEP 2. SELECT WATERSENSE-LABELED PRODUCTS

Select WaterSense-labeled products for all newly installed fixtures that are eligible for labeling by
verifying that the manufacturer and model are listed on the WaterSense website. The WaterSense label
can be found for fixtures in the following product categories:
·· Tank-type toilet (water closet)
·· Water-using urinals
·· Private lavatory faucets
·· Showerheads
The following fixture types are not labeled by WaterSense and must comply with the percentage
reduction criteria:
·· Tankless toilets
·· Composting toilets and waterless toilets
·· Waterless urinals
·· Public lavatory faucets
Using aerators is an acceptable water savings strategy.
·· Newly installed aerators or flow restrictors added to private lavatories or showers must be WaterSense
labeled.
·· For private lavatories, WaterSense requires a maximum flow rate of 1.5 gallons per minute at 60
pounds per square inch and a minimum flow rate of 0.8 gallons per minute at 20 pounds per square
inch. The installed fixtures in the design case must use the rated flow rate from the manufacturer, and
the underlying assumptions must remain consistent between the baseline and design cases.
For projects in countries where WaterSense-labeled products are not readily available, see Further
Explanation, International Tips.
 271

STEP 3. SELECT HIGH-EFFICIENCY FIXTURES

For all product categories, including those covered by WaterSense, specify low-flow fixtures.
Where possible, select fixtures that meet or exceed the 20% reduction indicated in the prerequisite
requirements.
·· Some equipment does not need to meet the 20% reduction threshold (see Further Explanation,
Excluded Water-Using Equipment).
·· The distinctions between public and private determine which thresholds each fixture and fitting must
meet (see Further Explanation, Public versus Private Lavatories).
·· For guidance on unusual fixtures, see Further Explanation, Unique or Nonstandard Water Closets.
·· Sinks can be defined as public, private, kitchen, or process, depending on use and location. Kitchen
sinks include all sinks in public or private buildings that are used with patterns and purposes similar to
residential kitchen sinks. Hotel or motel kitchenette sinks, office kitchenette sinks, staff lounge sinks,
pantry or nutrition station sinks, school classroom sinks (if used similarly to residential kitchen sinks),
and commercial (food service) kitchen hand sinks that do not pass through a grease interceptor are
considered kitchen sinks.

WE
STEP 4. SELECT HIGH-EFFICIENCY APPLIANCES
Select appliances that meet the labeling or performance requirements outlined in the prerequisite
requirements.

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

·· ENERGY STAR may not be readily available in all areas (see Further Explanation, International Tips).
·· Commercial projects with noncommercial, standard-sized dishwashers must comply with the
residential dishwasher requirements.
·· Residential criteria include all noncommercial-grade clothes washers in office spaces, daycare centers,
and so on.
·· Ice machines that are ineligible for the ENERGY STAR label—for example, ice machines within
refrigerators—do not need to comply with the prerequisite requirement.

STEP 5. DESIGN PROCESS WATER SYSTEMS

Where applicable, select and design appliances and equipment that meet the standards for process
water in the prerequisite requirements.
·· For heat rejection, the requirements apply to systems such as sterilizers, autoclaves, ice machines,
x-ray machines, MRI machines, CT scanners, and other medical equipment the cooling for which
involves large amounts of water and energy.
·· Design equipment-cooling systems to limit or eliminate potable water use and to capture and reuse
excess generated heat. Install air-cooled or closed-loop cooling instead of open-loop (i.e., once-
through) systems for medical equipment. Redundancy for cooling in critical applications may be
required; as emergency backups, consider recirculating systems, draining technology, and holding
tanks, as well as nonpotable water sources for air-cooled vacuum pumps and once-through cooling
systems.
·· For medical equipment, consider designing and installing a dedicated nonpotable water loop to serve
multiple pieces.
·· If discharge waste temperature is regulated, consider recovering and reusing the system’s waste heat
for low-temperature heating (e.g., domestic water preheating).
272

STEP 6. DEVELOP COOLING TOWER NARRATIVE, IF APPLICABLE

Describe the cooling tower or evaporative condenser system, and address the meters, controllers, alarms,
and features indicated in the credit requirements.

COMPLIANCE PATH 1. PRESCRIPTIVE ACHIEVEMENT (PREREQUISITE ONLY)

STEP 1. CONFIRM PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE

Ensure that all selected fixtures meet the following prescriptive flush or flow rate thresholds.

TABLE 6. Maximum installed flush or flow rates for prescriptive path

Maximum installed Maximum installed

Fixture or fitting Threshold below code baseline
flush or flow rate (IP) flush or flow rate (SI)

Toilet (water closet)* 1.28 gpf** 4.8 lpf** 20%

WE

Urinal* 0.50 gpf 1.9 lpf 50%

Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.40 gpm 1.5 lpm 20%

Private lavatory faucets* 1.50 gpm 5.7 lpm 32%

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Kitchen faucet 1.75 gpm 6.7 lpm 20%

Showerhead* 2.00 gpm 7.6 lpm 20%

* The WaterSense label is available for this fixture type.

**The average flush rate for dual-flush toilets must be calculated as the average flush volume of one full flush and two reduced flushes, using a
1:2 (high flush:low flush) ratio.
gpf = gallons per flush gpm = gallons per minute lpf = liters per flush lpm = liters per minute

STEP 2. COLLECT MANUFACTURERS’ INFORMATION

Compile fixture cutsheets or manufacturers’ information for all fixtures and appliances. The fixture data
must highlight the flush or flow rates. A plumbing fixture schedule is acceptable, provided it contains the
flush or flow rate information.

COMPLIANCE PATH 2. USAGE-BASED CALCULATION

STEP 1. COMPILE CUTSHEETS OR PREPARE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

For each fixture, compile manufacturer’s data that indicate its flush or flow rate.
·· To simplify the collection of calculation data, consider creating a table or plumbing fixture schedule
that indicates the flush or flow rate information for each fixture.
·· For ease of documentation, collect fixture model, flush or flow rate, percentage of occupants with
access to the fixture, and so on.

STEP 2. GATHER INFORMATION FOR CALCULATOR

The indoor water use calculator requires the following information:
·· Project occupancy. Count occupants consistently across all LEED credits (see Further Explanation,
Occupant Types).
°° If the project has different sets of fixtures for different parts of the building, create a separate table
for each subset. If fixtures are uniform across the project and restroom access is unrestricted, multiple
calculations are not necessary; one calculation can cover all building fixtures and occupants.
°° A separate calculation to accommodate visitors is not necessary because the calculator
automatically assigns them a lower daily usage rate. For example, it assumes that visitors do not use
kitchen faucets.
·· Gender ratio. The default gender mix is half male and half female. Assumptions that differ from the
default must be supported by a narrative and supporting data (see Further Explanation,
Gender Ratio).
·· Days of operation. The default number of days of operation per year is 365.
°° If the project is in use for only a portion of the year or closes on specific days, the days of operation
can be reduced.
°° The same number of days of operation must be applied to both the baseline and the design cases.
°° Ensure that the number of days of use is consistent with the building’s operating schedule and
prepare supporting documentation.
·· Fixture types used in the project.
 273

STEP 3. COMPLETE CALCULATIONS

Complete the calculations for the design case (installed) flush and flow fixtures. The following
information is required:
·· Fixture type
·· Flush or flow rate
·· Fixture manufacturer and model (which should match cutsheets)
·· Percentage of occupants using each fixture model. The total for all fixtures of each type must total
100% of occupants for standard fixture types.
The calculator determines usage based on Equation 1 (see Further Explanation, Calculations and Default
Durations and Uses).

EQUATION 1. Basic indoor water use reduction calculation

Daily water use for Fixture flush Uses per person

= × × ×

WE
Duration of use Users
each fixture type or flow rate per day

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

·· The duration of use, number of users, and uses per person per day must be the same in both the
baseline and the design cases.
·· Dual-flush toilet flush rates must be calculated as the average using a 1:2 (high flush:low flush) ratio.
·· Metering faucets measured in gallons (liters) per cycle (gpc, lpc) and cycle duration in manufacturer’s
documentation must be converted to a flow rate in gallons (liters) per minute (gpm, lpm). Use
Equation 2 to perform the conversion.

EQUATION 2. Faucet flow rate conversion

Flow rate (gpm) =

{ Gallons per cycle (gpc) ×
Cycle duration (seconds)
60 sec

}
Flow rate (lpm) =
{ Liters per cycle (lpc) ×
Cycle duration (seconds)
60 sec

}
For example, convert a 0.2 gpc metering faucet with a 12-second cycle duration as follows:

{ 0.2 gpc ×
12 sec
60 sec

} = 1 gpm

Likewise, convert a 0.76 lpc metering faucet with a 12-second cycle duration as follows:

{ 0.76 lpc ×
12 sec
60 sec

} = 3.8 lpm

Provide manufacturer’s documentation to confirm the flow rate conversion.

274

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See equations in Step-by-Step Guidance. Calculations are built into the indoor water use calculator; the following is
provided for reference.
The usage-based calculation for the project is the difference between the calculated design case and a baseline
case. The percentage is determined by dividing the design case reduction by the baseline reduction. In traditional
plumbing design, calculations are based on fixture counts; the methodology under this prerequisite calculates water
use according to fixture consumption rates and estimated use. Occupants’ estimated use is determined by counting
full-time-equivalent and transient occupants and applying appropriate fixture use rates to each. The calculator
estimates the percentage reduction of potable water use, compared with the baseline, using the following equation
(see Further Explanation, Default Durations and Uses for more about this equation’s variables).
WE

EQUATION 1. Basic indoor water use reduction calculation

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Daily water use for Fixture flush Uses per person

each fixture type = or flow rate × Duration of use × Users × per day

The calculator produces the following:

·· Annual baseline water consumption (gallons or liters per year)
·· Annual design case water consumption (gallons or liters per year)
·· Percentage savings between baseline and design cases

EQUATION 3. Indoor water-use reduction

% improvement
from baseline =
{ Baseline volume − Performance volume

Baseline Volume
} × 100

This prerequisite deals only with the water efficiency of fittings and fixtures, appliances, and processes that use
potable water. Water derived from alternative sources, such as captured rainwater, is not considered under this
prerequisite but can be used to document additional savings in WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction.

EXCLUDED WATER-USING EQUIPMENT

Appliances and equipment that use water on materials intended for human consumption may be excluded. For
example, bread and produce misters, soda machines, coffee-making machines, and fixtures used to fill sinks for
washing produce are excluded.
Fixtures whose flow rates are regulated by health codes may be excluded from the calculation. For example,
regulated medical equipment is considered a process water user and is excluded from fixture calculations. Process
water sinks are excluded from the fixture water-use reduction calculations.
The following list provides examples of process water sink fixtures that are excluded.

Specialized
·· Janitor sinks
·· Laboratory sinks regulated for medical or industrial purposes
 275

Commercial kitchens (food service)

·· Commercial kitchen (food service) sinks and prep sinks, including pot filling sinks, wash-down, and cleaning
sinks

Health care
·· Surgical scrub sinks
·· Exam or procedure room sinks for clinical use
·· Medication room sinks

General
·· Janitor closet sinks
·· Soiled utility room flushing rim sinks
·· Soiled utility room hand-washing sinks
·· Clean utility room hand-washing sinks

WE
PUBLIC VERSUS PRIVATE LAVATORIES
Lavatory faucets must be classified as public or private. The Uniform Plumbing Code, International Plumbing Code,

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

and the National Standard Plumbing Code each define private as those fixtures in residences, hotel or motel guest
rooms, and private rooms in hospitals. All other applications are deemed to be public.
Fixtures used by residential occupants and fixtures used by residential-type occupants who use the building for
sleeping accommodations fall into the private classification. Resident bathrooms in dormitories, patient bathrooms
in hospital and nursing homes, and prisoner bathrooms are considered private use.
If it is unclear whether the classification should be public or private, default to public use flow rates in performing the
calculations.
Lavatory faucets are intended for hand washing (Table 7). Private lavatory faucets are subject to the federal
standard of 2.2 gallons per minute at 60 pounds per square inch (8.3 liters per minute at 415 kilopascals). Public
lavatory faucets are subject to the federal standard of 0.5 gallons per minute at 60 pounds per square inch (1.9 liters
per minute at 415 kilopascals).

TABLE 7. Typical public and private lavatory faucet applications

Lavatory faucet Classification

Restroom sink
Public (baseline: 0.5 gpm, 1.9 lpm)
School classroom sinks (if used primarily for hand washing)

Residential bathroom sink

Hotel or motel bathroom sink

Dormitory bathroom sink Private (baseline: 2.2 gpm, 8.3 lpm)

Patient room sink

Patient bathroom sink in hospital or nursing home

gpm = gallons per minute lpm = liters per minute

Unique or Nonstandard Water Closets

For unique or nonstandard toilets and fixtures, the following may apply:
·· Toilets with flush valve control and separate bowls. The flush rates should be based on installed flush valve.
Confirm that bowl and flush valve rates are compatible to ensure performance.
·· Prison fixtures. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design standards as
commercial toilets.
276

·· Children’s toilets. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design standards as
commercial toilets. Confirm that the flush rates of the flush valves are compatible with the bowl sizes to ensure
performance.
·· Squat (floor-mounted) toilets. Flow rates and flushing mechanisms must conform to the same design
standards as commercial toilets.

OCCUPANT TYPES
Identify the daily average number of building users by type (see Getting Started, Occupancy). The indoor water use
calculator requires total occupant counts in the following categories:
·· Employees and staff, expressed as full-time-equivalent (FTE) employees
·· Residents
Determine the number of residents—residential occupants in dormitories, hospital in-patients, prisoners, hotel
guests, and any other people who use the building for sleeping accommodations. For apartments or multifamily
WE

residences where resident occupancy is unknown, estimate the default resident number as the total number of
bedrooms + 1 for each residential unit. For example, assume two residents per one-bedroom unit, three residents
per two-bedroom unit, and so forth, unless a different assumption is warranted.
°° Include inpatients at health care facilities with residents.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

°° Include hotel guests with residents. Calculate the number of overnight hotel guests based on the number
and size of units in the project. Assume 1.5 occupants per guest room and multiply the resulting total by 60%
(average hotel occupancy, per American Hotel and Lodging Association).
·· K–12 students. See Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.
·· Retail customers
·· Visitors (excluding retail customers)
°° Include outpatients and higher education students.
°° Report visitors as a daily average total.
If occupancy is known, use the actual occupant counts for calculating occupancy. Use occupancy numbers that
are a representative daily average over the course of the year. If the occupancy is not known, see Getting Started,
Occupancy).
Tables 8 and 9 (see Further Explanation, Default Duration and Uses) provide default fixture use values for
different occupancy types. These values should be used in the calculations unless special circumstances warrant
modifications (see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations).

GENDER RATIO
The default gender ratio for full-time-equivalent occupants is 50:50. In special circumstances, where an alternative
ratio may be justified, provide a narrative and supporting documentation. Modifications to the 50:50 ratio must be
shown to apply for the life of the building.
Acceptable special circumstances include projects specifically designed for an alternative gender ratio—for
example, a single-gender educational facility. Such projects must show that flush and flow fixtures have been
distributed to account for the modified ratio. Project teams must provide documentation of the code-required
plumbing fixture counts per gender so that the review team can verify that the flush-fixture ratio installed in the
project supports the alternative gender ratio.
Gender ratio affects water usage only when urinals are installed. If the project does not include urinals, a 50:50 or
0:100 male:female ratio should yield the same usage results.
 277

DEFAULT DURATIONS AND USES

Duration of use and uses per day are calculated using defaults (Tables 8 and 9).

TABLE 8. Nonresidential default fixture uses

Uses per day

Fixture type Duration (sec)

Employees (FTE) Visitors Retail customers Students

Water closet (female) n/a 3 0.5 0.2 3

Water closet (male) n/a 1 0.1 0.1 1

Urinal (female) n/a 0 0 0 0

WE
Urinal (male) n/a 2 0.4 0.1 2

Public lavatory faucet 30 3 0.5 0.2 3

Shower 300 0.1 0 0 0

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Kitchen sink 15 1 0 0 0

TABLE 9. Residential default fixture uses

Equipment Duration (sec) Uses per day

Water closet (female) n/a 5

Water closet (male) n/a 5

Private lavatory Faucet 60 5

Shower 480 1

Kitchen sink 60 4

For residents, hospital inpatients, hotel guests, prisoners, or any other residential occupants who use the building for
sleeping accommodations, use the default residential fixture usage assumptions.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell

Include in the prerequisite documentation only plumbing fixtures, appliances, and process water installed as
a part of the Core and Shell project’s scope of work (i.e., what the developer is installing in the project). Do not
include as-yet-uninstalled (future) plumbing fixtures, appliances, and process water. If no eligible plumbing
fixtures, appliances, and process water are installed as part of the Core and Shell project scope of work, the project
automatically achieves this prerequisite.
If plumbing fixtures are installed by the developer in otherwise-incomplete tenant spaces, include those
plumbing fixtures installed as part of the Core and Shell project scope and use the default occupancy counts to
account for their usage in the calculations if pursing Compliance Path 2. If the occupancy is not known, see Getting
Started, Occupancy. Use code occupancy to determine the project occupancy.
278

Schools
Appliance and process water-use equipment installed in the project must meet the requirements of Tables 4 and 5 of
the prerequisite.
For K–12 schools that close on weekends, holidays, and for eight weeks of school vacation, assume 195 days of
operation.
For occupancy calculations (Table 10), in deciding whether to count individuals as employees, students,
or visitors, consider their fixture-use patterns. For example, a volunteer who serves four hours each day in an
elementary school will likely have the same plumbing usage patterns as full-time staff. Such a volunteer could
therefore be considered to have an FTE value of 0.5. On the other hand, an individual who attends a high school
basketball game may be expected to use the water closets and lavatory faucets in the school building infrequently and
therefore should be counted as a visitor. Report visitors as average daily totals.

TABLE 10. Default fixture uses in schools, by occupancy type

WE

Fixture Type FTE Student Visitors

Water Closet

Female 3 3 0.5
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Male 1 1 0.1

Urinal

Female 0 0 0

Male 2 2 0.4

Lavatory faucet 3 3 0.5

Shower 0.1 0 0

Kitchen Sink 1 0 0

When calculating annual occupancy for schools with multiple sessions, consider a session a discrete period of school
building operation. A session can be defined by a season or by other variations in building occupancy and usage, such
as weekend programming by a community organization. If the school building is used for more than one session
annually, calculate the percentage for each session, based on the number of days in the session divided by the total
number of days during which the school building operates annually, using Equation 4.

EQUATION 4. School session as percentage of annual operation

Session % = Days in session / Annual days of operation

Then calculate the annual occupants of each gender by multiplying the number of occupants in each session by the
session percentage (from Equation 1) and adding the results of all sessions together, using Equation 5:

EQUATION 5. Annual occupancy for Schools projects

Annual occupants,
by gender

FTE = full-time equivalent

=
{ Session A FTEs,
by gender × Session %

}{ +
Session B FTEs,
by gender × Session %

}
 279

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Mixed-Use Projects
If a mixed-use project uses the same fixtures throughout the building, complete one calculation for building water
use. If the spaces use different fixtures or have dramatically different patterns of occupancy, complete the indoor
water use calculator separately for each space type.

Additions
All fixtures within the project boundary must be included in the prerequisite calculations. If the project boundary
includes only the addition, the fixtures or fittings outside the addition do not need to be included in the calculations
for prerequisite compliance, even if used by project occupants.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For fixtures that require the WaterSense label in countries where the label is unavailable, look up acceptable
WaterSense substitutes at usgbc.org. Project outside the U.S. must meet WaterSense flush and flow rates.

WE
For appliances that require the ENERGY STAR label, a project outside the U.S. may install products that are not
labeled under the ENERGY STAR program if they meet the ENERGY STAR product specifications, available on the
ENERGY STAR website. All products must meet the standards of the current version of ENERGY STAR as of the date

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

of their purchase.
For appliances that require the Consortium for Energy Efficiency (CEE) label, a project outside the U.S. may
purchase products that have not been qualified or labeled by CEE if they meet the CEE product criteria for efficiency.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

All projects
Projects with
Documentation appliance or
Usage-based
Prescriptive process water
calculation

Product cutsheets, manufacturers’ information X X X

Indoor water use calculator X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering. Metering of potable water usage will allow facilities
management staff to monitor changes in water usage as efficiency measures are implemented.

WE Credit Water Metering. Additional submetering of water-using systems will give facilities management staff
actual performance data on specific water efficiency measures so that they can make adjustments to reduce water
consumption. The credit builds on the prerequisite by requiring a higher level of water efficiency. In this prerequisite,
projects may demonstrate compliance through product cutsheets showing that all fixtures meet or exceed the
minimum reduction threshold; in the credit, a usage-based calculation is mandatory.
280

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· This prerequisite now includes requirements for water-using appliances and processes, as well as cooling
towers and evaporative condensers.
·· The WaterSense label requirements were recommended in LEED 2009. They are now mandatory in the U.S.,
with local equivalents allowed outside the U.S.
·· The prescriptive compliance path, based on demonstrating that all fixtures are 20% below baseline, is new.
·· Duration-based savings from autocontrol faucets with automatic fixture sensors or metering controls are no
longer allowed in the design case. Studies have shown that autocontrol faucets do not save water because users
frequently reactivate the faucet after initial use or stop washing before the cycle ends.
·· Applying nonpotable water is no longer allowed as an alternative compliance path in the prerequisite.
Alternative water sources can, however, earn points in the corresponding credit.
WE

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 1992 and as amended: eere.energy.gov/femp/regulations/epact1992.html
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EPAct 2005: eere.energy.gov/femp/regulations/epact2005.html

International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Publication IAPMO/ANSI UPC 1-2006,
Uniform Plumbing Code 2006, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings: iapmo.org

International Code Council, International Plumbing Code 2006, Section 604, Design of Building Water
Distribution System: iccsafe.org

ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov

Consortium for Energy Efficiency: cee1.org

WaterSense: epa.gov/watersense

IgCC/ASHRAE 189.1 cooling tower and evaporative condenser requirements:

ashrae.org/resources--publications/bookstore/standard-189-1

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
closed-loop cooling a system that acts as a heat sink for heat-rejecting building and medical equipment by
recirculating water. Because the water is sealed within the system, some closed-loop cooling systems use nonpotable
water (such as recycled process water harvested from an air handler's cooling coil condensate).

conductivity the measurement of the level of dissolved solids in water, using the ability of an electric current to pass
through water. Because it is affected by temperature, conductivity is measured at 25°C for standardization.

drift water droplets carried from a cooling tower or evaporative condenser by a stream of air passing through the
system. Drift eliminators capture these droplets and return them to the reservoir at the bottom of the cooling tower
or evaporative condenser for recirculation.
 281

makeup water water that is fed into a cooling tower system or evaporative condenser to replace water lost through
evaporation, drift, bleed-off, or other causes

metering control a regulator that limits the flow time of water, generally a manual-on and automatic-off device,
most commonly installed on lavatory faucets and showers

nonpotable water water that does not meet drinking water standards

potable water water that meets or exceeds U.S. Environmental Protection Agency drinking water quality standards
(or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities
having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems

process water water that is used for industrial processes and building systems, such as cooling towers, boilers,
and chillers. It can also refer to water used in operational processes, such as dishwashing, clothes washing, and ice
making.

WE
INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
 283

WATER EFFICIENCY PREREQUISITE

Building-Level
Water Metering

WE
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers

BUILDING-LEVEL WATER METERING

Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

INTENT

To support water management and identify opportunities for additional

water savings by tracking water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS

Building Water Use

Install permanent water meters that measure the total potable water use for the building and associated grounds.
Meter data must be compiled into monthly and annual summaries; meter readings can be manual or automated.

Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting whole-project water usage data for a five-year period beginning on the
date the project accepts LEED certification or typical occupancy, whichever comes first.
This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building changes ownership or lessee.
284

BEHIND THE INTENT

Disparities often exist between how buildings are designed to operate and how they actually perform. Numerous
factors may be responsible: flaws in energy modeling, inadequate commissioning, inaccurate assumptions about
occupants’ behavior, lack of coordination during the transition from construction to operations, or the everyday
operation of the building systems. By collecting and analyzing performance data, USGBC aims to compare building
performance across the LEED portfolio to identify common traits among high and low performers, and share these
findings to help project teams improve building performance.
One system often subject to gaps between projected and actual performance is water use. As a first step in
improving efficiency, the project team must install water metering to track water consumption by both the project
building and any associated grounds.
WE

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL POTABLE WATER END USES

Determine all end uses of potable water in the project building and on the grounds. These could include
water consumption for plumbing fixtures, cooling towers and evaporative condensers, laundering,
dishwashing, indoor and outdoor water features, irrigation, exterior cleaning, and manufacturing
processes.
Examples of potable water sources that must be metered include the following:
·· Public water supply
·· On-site well
·· On-site potable water treatment system

STEP 2. DETERMINE SCOPE OF PUBLIC WATER SUPPLY METERING, IF APPLICABLE

If all water comes from a public water supply and the utility’s water meter provides monthly consumption
data, that system’s meter meets the prerequisite requirements. However, the project team may have little
influence on the location and function of the meter, so the building owner should confirm the following
with the public water supplier:
·· Location: where the meter will be located (e.g., inside the building, under or above ground outside)
·· Accessibility: how the building manager will reach the meter
·· Reporting: how the meter will be read (e.g., manually or via remote transmission)
If the public water supplier restricts access to the meter or uses proprietary remote reporting technology,
the project team may meet the prerequisite requirement by tracking water usage through monthly billing.
To collect more frequent or accurate data, the team may elect to install a private meter downstream of
the public water supply meter.

STEP 3. DETERMINE NUMBER, LOCATION, AND TYPE OF ALL METERS

If the project is not served by a public water supply, or if the project uses multiple sources of potable
water, two or more meters may be required. A single meter installed downstream of multiple potable
water supply systems may be used if it is upstream of all project water uses.
·· In some cases, projects may elect to use multiple meters to gain additional information on water use.
·· Select locations with easy access for reading and maintenance.
·· There are no requirements for the type of meters except that they be permanent.
·· Additional meters may be needed to satisfy the requirements for WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use
Reduction and WE Credit Water Metering (see Related Credit Tips).
Prepare a narrative describing the location of the building level water meter(s) serving the project and
site, as applicable. If nonpotable water is included in the metered water volume, note this in the narrative
and describe how volumes can be managed and tracked separately.
 285

STEP 4. TRACK WATER CONSUMPTION

Begin tracking water use when the project achieves LEED certification or at occupancy, whichever
occurs first. To place water use data in the context of building operations, consider tracking building
occupancy changes and maintenance activities concurrently. The additional information may help explain
fluctuations in usage patterns.

STEP 5. SHARE WATER CONSUMPTION DATA WITH USGBC

Commit to sharing with USGBC the whole-project water usage data acquired from permanent meters
installed in accordance with the prerequisite requirements. The project owner must commit to sharing
water use data with USGBC for five years in one of two ways:
·· USGBC-approved data template
·· Third-party data source
To see the most recent list of data-sharing pathways, visit USGBC’s credit library, at usgbc.org/credits.

WE
FURTHER EXPLANATION

BUILDING-LEVEL WATER METERING

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS
Core and Shell
Metering and data collection are the same for Core and Shell projects. Data may be collected from the spaces that the
LEED project team did not fit out as part of the project scope. Water data sharing must continue following fit-out and
occupancy of the project unless there is a change of ownership or lessee.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Multifamily Residential
Either use a whole-building meter or, provided all potable water uses are accounted for, aggregate data from
submeters for each unit and common spaces.

Additions
A single meter that covers both old and new portions of the building may be installed, but submetering for the
addition is encouraged.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Project teams outside the U.S. may use ENERGY STAR Portfolio Manager or the manual tracking template to track
and report their energy and water consumption to USGBC.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building. Potable water used for landscape irrigation must be tracked in any
of three ways: by including it with a single building, by installing a dedicated meter, or by installing multiple meters.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
286

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All projects

Meter declaration X

Sharing commitment X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. The related prerequisite requires separate water submeters for
cooling tower makeup and blowdown and for evaporative condensers.
WE

WE Credit Water Metering. The related credit encourages project teams to install submeters on certain systems
serving the building.

EA Prerequisite Building-Level Energy Metering. Water meters may be tracked by a building automation system
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

(BAS) that also records energy consumption. Data sharing for both this and the related prerequisite can be achieved
through ENERGY STAR’s Portfolio Manager.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new prerequisite. The ongoing tracking and reporting components were previously required under
Minimum Program Requirement 6 for all LEED 2009 projects.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
potable water water that meets or exceeds U.S. Environmental Protection Agency drinking water quality standards
(or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities
having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems

private meter a device that measures water flow and is installed downstream from the public water supply meter or
as part of an on-site water system maintained by the building management team

public water supply (PWS) a system for the provision to the public of water for human consumption through pipes
or other constructed conveyances. To be considered public, such system must have at least 15 service connections or
regularly serve at least 25 individuals. (Adapted from U.S. Environmental Protection Agency)
 287

WATER EFFICIENCY CREDIT

Outdoor Water Use

Reduction

WE
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)

OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To reduce outdoor water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS

Reduce outdoor water use through one of the following options. Nonvegetated surfaces, such as permeable or
impermeable pavement, should be excluded from landscape area calculations. Athletic fields and playgrounds (if
vegetated) and food gardens may be included or excluded at the project team’s discretion.

OPTION 1. NO IRRIGATION REQUIRED (2 POINTS EXCEPT HEALTHCARE,

1 POINT HEALTHCARE)
Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation system beyond a maximum two-year establishment
period.

OR

OPTION 2. REDUCED IRRIGATION (2 POINTS EXCEPT HEALTHCARE, 1 POINT HEALTHCARE)

Reduce the project’s landscape water requirement (LWR) by at least 50% from the calculated baseline for the site’s
peak watering month. Reductions must first be achieved through plant species selection and irrigation system
efficiency as calculated in the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) WaterSense Water Budget Tool.

Additional reductions beyond 30% may be achieved using any combination of efficiency, alternative water sources,
and smart scheduling technologies.
288

TABLE 1. Points for reducing irrigation water

Percentage reduction from baseline Points (except Healthcare) Points (Healthcare)

50% 1 1

100% 2 —
WE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 289

BEHIND THE INTENT

See WE Prerequisite Outdoor Water Use Reduction, Behind the Intent. Potable water consumption may be further
reduced by reusing potable water and using nonpotable water sources.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. FOLLOW METHODOLOGY IN WE PREREQUISITE OUTDOOR WATER USE

REDUCTION

STEP 2. SELECT ONE OPTION

WE
Select the appropriate option for the project’s irrigation needs, as described in the credit requirements.
·· Option 1 is for projects that do not require irrigation, based on the project location and landscape
design. This credit can also be achieved by projects that have no landscape area.
·· Option 2 is for projects that require irrigation.

OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Option 1. No Irrigation Required
Develop the plant species and water requirement narrative.
·· Include a description of the plantings and explain why they will not require irrigation beyond their
specified establishment periods. Indicate why average rainfall will be sufficient.
·· A landscaping plan showing native plants may be provided to confirm that irrigation will not be
required, based on local rainfall and plants’ water demands.

Option 2. Reduced Irrigation

STEP 1. REDUCE IRRIGATION NEEDS BY ALTERING DESIGN

Project teams can dramatically alter irrigation demand by selecting plants that are appropriate for their
intended uses.
·· Reserve grass for play fields or other activities that require turf; using turf for groundcover will make it
very difficult to meet the credit thresholds.
·· Restore or plant native species to replace areas requiring intensive irrigation.

STEP 2. CONSIDER ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES

Site-derived alternative water sources or treated wastewater provided by a municipal agency can offset
potable water used for irrigation (see Further Explanation, Alternative Water Sources).

STEP 3. CONSIDER ALTERNATIVE IRRIGATION CONTROLS

Smart-sensor technology irrigation controls can deliver additional water savings.

STEP 4. CALCULATE LANDSCAPE WATER BUDGET

Determine water savings as a percentage of total irrigation and peak-month irrigation demand by
using the WaterSense Water Budget Tool (see Further Explanation, About WaterSense, Examples, and
International Tips).
·· Use the tool for vegetated areas only. Do not include hardscapes (whether pervious or impervious) or
unvegetated softscapes, such as mulched paths and playground areas.
·· The following landscape types may be included or excluded from landscape calculations: vegetated
playgrounds, athletic fields, food gardens, and urban agricultural areas.
290

·· When planning the site layout, consider factors such as proximity to water source for optimized
irrigation, distance from water meter, and so on. Resolve uncertainties about plants’ water
requirements by referring to local resources, such as plant guides, state agricultural extension services,
or nurseries to classify each plant type as a low, medium, or high water user.
·· Projects may not enter zero landscape water consumption for any landscaped area. If only part of
the lot is irrigated, complete the calculation twice—once for the irrigated section and again for the
unirrigated area—and sum the results.

STEP 5. CALCULATE ADJUSTED LANDSCAPE WATER REQUIREMENT

Calculate monthly supply from alternative sources.
·· Determine water quantity from alternative sources (e.g., using historical rainfall data) or from projected
demand when water is reused. Rainwater harvesting volume can be calculated using Equations 1 and 2.
·· Ensure that the rainwater needed in the peak month can be stored on-site.
·· Alternative calculations for rainwater cistern sizing may be used.
WE

EQUATION 1. Rainwater harvesting from roof

Gallons per 1 inch of rain = Roof area in ft2 × 0.6

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EQUATION 2. Monthly harvested rainwater volume

Final LWR = LWR or adjusted LWR − (.15 × LWR or Adjusted LWR)

Determine the adjusted landscape water requirement using Equation 3.

EQUATION 3. Adjusted monthly landscape water requirement (LWR)

Adjusted LWR (volume/month) = LWR (volume/month) − Alternative water quantity (volume/month)

STEP 6. CALCULATE ADDITIONAL REDUCTION FROM BASELINE FOR SMART IRRIGATION

CONTROLS
Count only irrigation controls whose smart-sensor technology meets the WaterSense criteria. These
controls result in an additional 15% reduction that project teams can take from the baseline.

EQUATION 4. Adjusted monthly landscape water requirement (LWR)

Final LWR = (Prerequisite LWR or adjusted LWR) − (.15 × Prerequisite LWR)

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES

Alternative water sources include reclaimed wastewater, graywater, swimming pool backwash filter, refrigeration
system condensate, captured rainwater, stormwater and foundation drain water, steam system condensate, fluid
cooler discharge, food steamer discharge, combination oven discharge, industrial process water, fire pump test
water, municipally supplied treated wastewater, and ice machine condensate.
 291

Testing site-derived alternative water to confirm its suitability for irrigation uses is recommended. Salinity is
one concern. Irrigation with saline water in an arid environment causes salt buildup in the soil, eventually degrading
it. Condensate and cooling tower blowdown in particular may have salinity levels precluding use for irrigation. A
second concern is that alternative water supplies must be stored until needed for irrigation; the timing and reliability
of the supply must be assessed.
When calculating alternative water source annual projections, follow these guidelines:
·· Depending on supply timing and availability, monthly water budget calculations may be necessary to show how
much potable water may be replaced. Calculate irrigation water demand during each month of the irrigation
season.
·· Assume that alternative water will be used for irrigation as it is available. The contribution of alternative water
to the peak month irrigation demand must be based on having excess alternative water available and stored
before the peak month.

ABOUT WATERSENSE

WE
EPA’s WaterSense website includes this reference for native vegetation in various parts of the US:
epa.gov/watersense/outdoor/what_to_plant.html.
Use the WaterSense Water Budget Data Finder (epa.gov/watersense/new_homes/wb_data_finder.html) to

OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

estimate the evapotranspiration rate (ETo) in inches per month for the critical month of the year based on a project’s
zip code. ETo, a measurement of the amount of water lost from a well-maintained expanse of average-height green
grass and the surrounding soil, varies with a location’s sunshine, wind, humidity, and temperature. Hot, dry, and
windy locations have higher ETo values than cool, humid locations. Data for these variables are based on 30-year
historical averages. Data for projects outside the U.S. are not included in this tool.
The WaterSense Water Budget Tool (epa.gov/watersense/water_budget/) calculates a baseline landscape
water requirement of a typical landscape, as described above. Different plant species and their arrangement in the
landscape can be entered, and the Water Budget Tool estimates the effect of these design variables on LWR. Projects
outside the U.S. may use this tool with local data.
Varying elements of irrigation water delivery systems can help in estimating how design decisions affect water
requirements.
WaterSense irrigation controller specifications (epa.gov/WaterSense/products/controltech.html) outline the
requirements for weather-based irrigation controller systems. These systems earn projects a standard 15% reduction
in landscape water requirements for this credit.

EXAMPLES
A location’s rainfall and evapotranspiration levels determine how much water a project needs. Consider two
projects using Option 2, each with a fairly water-efficient landscape around an office building, one in Livingston, New
Jersey, and one in Palo Alto, California (Figure 1).

Example 1. Livingston, New Jersey

The location is a typical suburban community in northern New Jersey. The team uses the EPA WaterSense Water
Budget Data finder:
·· Enter Zip Code: 07039
·· Peak Month: Jun
·· ETo Value: 6.30 inches/month
·· Rainfall: 3.40 inches/month
292

Figure 1. Example Site Plan

Trees: drip irrigation Groundcover: low water need native species

L
WE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Building footprint = 9,000 sq ft (835 sq m)

Hardscape = 18,000 sq ft (1 670 sq m)
Groundcover = 10,000 sq ft (930 sq m)
Trees = 6,000 sq ft (557 sq m)

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations WE3

WEp Outdoor Water Use Reduction (BD+C)
 293

When landscape area is entered, the tool offers these results (Figure 2):
·· Total: 16,000 sq ft
·· 10,000 sq ft of groundcover—low water need, native species, drip irrigation
·· 6,000 sq ft of trees—medium water need, drip irrigation

WE
OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION
Figure 2. Water Budget Calculation for Livingston, NJ Location. Screenshot taken from http://www.epa.gov/watersense

The landscape water allowance (30% below baseline minimum) equals 43,980 gallons a month. The landscape water
requirement for this design in this location is 15,939 gallons a month. The total savings without alternative water
sources equals 75%. The project achieves the credit and earns 1 point.
The team has determined that rainwater harvested from the building’s roof will supply all the project’s outdoor
water needs. Given the average monthly rainfall in this location and the roof’s area, average monthly rainwater
available for harvesting is 21,217 gallons per month. The team installs a rainwater cistern capable of holding 20,000
gallons of rainwater for irrigation. The rainwater cistern would be full during the peak watering month. With
an adjusted landscape water requirement of 15,939 gallons a month minus 20,000 gallons a month available for
harvesting, the project uses—4,061 gallons a month (i.e., it has a rainwater surplus). The total savings is 100%, for 2
points.

Example 2. Palo Alto, California

Palo Alto is in a fairly dry region of the country. The team uses the EPA WaterSense Water Budget
Data Finder (Figure 3):
·· Enter Zip Code: 94301
·· Peak Month: Jul
·· ETo Value: 6.00 inches/month
·· Rainfall: 0.00 inches/month
294
WE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 3. Water Budget Calculation for Palo Alto, CA Location. Screenshot taken from http://www.epa.gov/watersense

With a total landscape area of 16,000 square feet—10,000 square feet of groundcover (low water need, native
species, drip irrigation) and 6,000 square feet of trees (medium water need, drip irrigation)—the tool now calculates
a landscape water allowance of 41,886 gallons a month, or 30% below the baseline minimum. Compared with the
New Jersey example above, the landscape water requirement for this design has increased to 26,713 gallons a month.
The total savings is now 55%, for 1 point.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Project teams outside the U.S. may obtain monthly average rainfall and reference evapotranspiration data from the
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations. If the data are unavailable, teams must provide estimates.
Monthly rainfall should be an average value based on data from a reliable source, such as the World Meteorological
Organization.
Reference evapotranspiration may be calculated from weather data. REF-ET software uses a variety of algorithms
based on monthly average weather data to calculate reference evapotranspiration.
The month with the largest deficit between reference evapotranspiration and rainfall is the peak month. These
estimates may then be used in the EPA WaterSense Water Budget Tool to calculate the landscape water requirement
for the site.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Use the total landscaped area of the entire campus. The results
of the Water Budget Tool apply to all buildings in the group.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
 295

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Alternative water source and controls calculations X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

SS Credit Rainwater Management. Rainwater management can aid in the recovery of rainwater as an alternative
irrigation source.

WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. Graywater is a potential source for reducing outdoor potable
water use.

WE
WE Credit Cooling Tower Water Use. Cooling tower blowdown water and other cooling tower process water are
potential alternative water sources for meeting outdoor water demand.

OUTDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering. Landscape water meters can aid in achieving this credit and
prepare the project for certification under LEED for Building Operations and Maintenance. The landscape may be
metered separately or with the whole building.

WE Credit Water Metering. Metering the landscape separately contributes to achieving the related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· This is a new credit.
·· The WaterSense Water Budget Tool is now listed as the referenced calculation tool.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
conventional irrigation a region’s most common system for providing water to plants by nonnatural means. A
conventional irrigation system commonly uses pressure to deliver water and distributes it through sprinkler heads
above the ground.

evapotranspiration the combination of evaporation and plant transpiration into the atmosphere. Evaporation
occurs when liquid water from soil, plant surfaces, or water bodies becomes vapor. Transpiration is the movement of
water through a plant and the subsequent loss of water vapor.

graywater “untreated household waste water which has not come into contact with toilet waste. Graywater includes
296

used water from bathtubs, showers, bathroom wash basins, and water from clothes-washers and laundry tubs. It
must not include waste water from kitchen sinks or dishwashers” (Uniform Plumbing Code, Appendix G, Gray
Water Systems for Single-Family Dwellings); “waste water discharged from lavatories, bathtubs, showers, clothes
washers and laundry sinks” (International Plumbing Code, Appendix C, Gray Water Recycling Systems). Some states
and local authorities allow kitchen sink wastewater to be included in graywater. Other differences can likely be found
in state and local codes. Project teams should comply with the graywater definition established by the authority
having jurisdiction in the project area.

hardscape the inanimate elements of the building landscaping. It includes pavement, roadways, stonewalls, wood
and synthetic decking, concrete paths and sidewalks, and concrete, brick, and tile patios.

industrial process water any water discharged from a factory setting. Before this water can be used for irrigation, its
quality needs to be checked. Saline or corrosive water should not be used for irrigation.

hydrozone a group of plantings with similar water needs

WE

native vegetation an indigenous species that occurs in a particular region, ecosystem, and habitat without direct or
indirect human actions. Native species have evolved to the geography, hydrology, and climate of that region. They
also occur in communities; that is, they have evolved together with other species. As a result, these communities
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

provide habitat for a variety of other native wildlife species. Species native to North America are generally recognized
as those occurring on the continent prior to European settlement. Also known as native plants.

peak watering month the month with the greatest deficit between evapotranspiration and rainfall. This is the
month when the plants in the site’s region potentially require the most supplemental water typically a mid-summer
month. (Sustainable Sites Initiative)

potable water water that meets or exceeds U.S. Environmental Protection Agency drinking water quality standards
(or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities
having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems

rainwater harvesting the capture, diversion, and storage of rain for future beneficial use. Typically, a rain barrel or
cistern stores the water; other components include the catchment surface and conveyance system. The harvested
rainwater can be used for irrigation.

reclaimed water wastewater that has been treated and purified for reuse

reference evapotranspiration rate the amount of water lost from a specific vegetated surface with no moisture
limitation. Turf grass with height of 120 mm is the reference vegetation.

softscape the elements of a landscape that consist of live, horticultural elements

xeriscaping landscaping that does not require routine irrigation

 297

WATER EFFICIENCY CREDIT

Indoor Water Use

Reduction

WE
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–6 points) Data Centers (1–6 points)
Core and Shell (1–6 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–6 points)

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

Schools (1–7 points) Hospitality (1–6 points)
Retail (1–7 points) Healthcare (1–7 points)

INTENT

To reduce indoor water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS

Further reduce fixture and fitting water use from the calculated baseline in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use
Reduction. Additional potable water savings can be earned above the prerequisite level using alternative water
sources. Include fixtures and fittings necessary to meet the needs of the occupants. Some of these fittings and
fixtures may be outside the project boundary. Points are awarded according to Table 1.

TABLE 1. Points for reducing water use

Points
Percentage reduction Points (BD+C)
(Schools, Retail, Hospitality, Healthcare)

25% 1 1

30% 2 2

35% 3 3

40% 4 4

45% 5 5

50% 6 —
298

SCHOOLS, RETAIL, HOSPITALITY, AND HEALTHCARE ONLY

Meet the percentage reduction requirements above.

AND

APPLIANCE AND PROCESS WATER

Install equipment within the project scope that meets the minimum requirements in Table 2, 3, 4, or 5 . One point is
awarded for meeting all applicable requirements in any one table. All applicable equipment listed in each table must
meet the standard.
Schools, Retail, and Healthcare projects can earn a second point for meeting the requirements of two tables.
To use Table 2, the project must process at least 120,000 lbs (57 606 kg) of laundry per year.

TABLE 2. Compliant commercial washing machines

WE

Points
Washing machine Requirement (IP units)
(Schools, Retail, Hospitality, Healthcare)

On-premise, minimum capacity 2,400 lbs

Maximum 1.8 gals per pound * Maximum 7 liters per 0.45 kilograms *
(1 088 kg) per 8-hour shift
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

* Based on equal quantities of heavy, medium, and light soil laundry.

To use Table 3, the project must serve at least 100 meals per day of operation. All process and appliance
equipment listed in the category of kitchen equipment and present on the project must comply with the standards.

TABLE 3. Standards for commercial kitchen equipment

Kitchen equipment Requirement (IP units) Requirement (SI units)

Dishwasher Undercounter ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Stationary, single tank, door ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Single tank, conveyor ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Multiple tank, conveyor ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Flight machine ENERGY STAR ENERGY STAR

or performance equivalent

Food steamer Batch (no drain connection) ≤ 2 gal/hour/pan including ≤ 7.5 liters/hour/pan including
condensate cooling water condensate cooling water

Cook-to-order (with drain ≤ 5 gal/hour/pan including ≤ 19 liters/hour/pan including

connection) condensate cooling water condensate cooling water

Combination oven Countertop or stand ≤ 1.5 gal/hour/panincluding ≤ 5.7 liters/hour/pan including

condensate cooling water condensate cooling water

Roll-in ≤ 1.5 gal/hour/pan including ≤ 5.7 liters/hour/pan including

condensate cooling water condensate cooling water

Food waste disposer Disposer 3-8 gpm, full load condition, 11–30 lpm, full load condition,
10 minute automatic shutoff; or 10-min automatic shutoff; or
1 gpm, no-load condition 3.8 lpm, no-load condition

Scrap collector Maximum 2 gpm makeup water Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup water

Pulper Maximum 2 gpm makeup water Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup water

Strainer basket No additional water usage No additional water usage

gpm = gallons per minute gph = gallons per hour lpm = liters per minute lph = liters per hour
 299

To use Table 4, the project must be a medical or laboratory facility.

TABLE 4. Compliant laboratory and medical equipment

Points
Lab equipment Requirement (IP units)
(Schools, Retail, Hospitality, Healthcare)

Reverse-osmosis water purifier 75% recovery 75% recovery

For 60-inch sterilizer, 6.3 gal/U.S. tray For 1520-mm sterilizer, 28.5 liters/DIN tray
Steam sterilizer
For 48-inch sterilizer, 7.5 gal/U.S. tray For 1220-mm sterilizer, 28.35 liters/DIN tray

Sterile process washer 0.35 gal/U.S. tray 1.3 liters/DIN tray

X-ray processor, 150 mm or more in any

Film processor water recycling unit
dimension

Digital imager, all sizes No water use

WE
To use Table 5, the project must be connected to a municipal or district steam system that does not allow the
return of steam condensate.

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

TABLE 5. Compliant municipal steam systems

Steam system Standard

Cool municipally supplied steam condensate (no return)

Steam condensate disposal
to drainage system with heat recovery system or reclaimed water

OR

Reclaim and use steam condensate 100% recovery and reuse

300

BEHIND THE INTENT

See Behind the Intent in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. COMPLETE CALCULATIONS IN PREREQUISITE

Follow the instructions in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction to determine water savings
resulting from efficiency of fixtures and fittings.

STEP 2. CONSIDER ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES

WE

Alternatives to potable water include municipally supplied reclaimed water (“purple pipe” water),
graywater, rainwater, stormwater, treated seawater, condensate, foundation dewatering water, used
process water, and reverse osmosis reject water.
·· Untreated water sources ineligible for this credit include raw water from naturally occurring surface
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

bodies of water, streams, rivers, groundwater, well water, and water discharged from an open-loop
geothermal system.
·· When choosing alternative sources of water, target the uses that require the least treatment first. In
most cases, water can be reused outside the building (for irrigation) or inside (for toilet flushing) with
minimal treatment, but other uses will require more energy-intensive treatment.

STEP 3. CALCULATE ADDITIONAL SAVINGS FROM USING NONPOTABLE WATER

If the project is using an alternative, nonpotable water source, calculate the total annual projected water
savings, using Equation 1.

EQUATION 1. Indoor water-use reduction with nonpotable supply

{ ( )
}
Annual
Annual Annual
baseline water − design − nonpotable
case water
consumption water supply
consumption
Total water savings = × 100

Annual baseline water consumption

·· Prepare documentation, including a narrative describing the nonpotable water source, plumbing
system design drawings that highlight the nonpotable water system, and supply and demand
calculations that confirm the available quantity of nonpotable water.
·· Address any change to the calculated usage demand of seasonal availability or storage capacity. If
the nonpotable water is used for multiple applications—for example, flush fixtures and landscape
irrigation—a sufficient quantity must be available to meet the demands of all uses. The amount of
nonpotable water meant for indoor and outdoor uses cannot exceed the total annual nonpotable
water supply.

STEP 4. SELECT HIGH-EFFICIENCY SPECIALIZED APPLIANCE AND PROCESS WATER

SYSTEMS, WHERE APPLICABLE (RETAIL, HEALTHCARE, HOSPITALITY & SCHOOLS
PROJECTS ONLY)
Retail, Healthcare, and Schools projects may earn 1 point (up to 2 points) by meeting the requirements of
one or two of the appliance and process water tables in the credit requirements (see Further Explanation,
Example). Hospitality projects may earn 1 point for meeting the requirements of one of the appliance and
process water tables in the credit requirements. In all cases, appliance and process water-use equipment
installed in the project must meet the requirements of Table 2 of the prerequisite requirements.
 301

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance and in the indoor water use calculator provided by USGBC.

EXAMPLE
Foxhill School has a cafeteria that serves about 600 meals per day and a gymnasium with a commercial washing
machine for washing uniforms, towels, and other linens with a capacity of more than 120,000 pounds per year (54 431
kilograms per year) of laundry.
·· The school meets the qualification requirements for Tables 2 and 3 of the credit requirements.
·· The kitchen includes some but not all of the items listed in Table 3 of the credit requirements:
°° Dishwasher, under counter (1), ENERGY STAR-labeled

WE
°° Dishwasher, single tank, conveyor (1), ENERGY STAR-labeled
°° Combination oven, roll-in (2), using 1.0 gallons per hour per pan (3.8 liters per hour per pan), including
condensate cooling water
°° No food steamer

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

°° No food waste disposer
·· The gymnasium laundry uses 1.6 gallons per pound of laundry (12.4 liters per kilogram of laundry).
The school can earn 2 points for appliance and process water savings, in addition to the savings from its fixtures.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
Include in the credit documentation all plumbing fixtures necessary to meet the occupants’ needs whether they will
be installed as part of the project’s scope of work or not. For example, include at a minimum all necessary restroom
fixtures (toilets, urinals, and lavatories) to meet the project occupants’ needs, and showers when seeking LT Credit
Bicycle Facilities. Assume that the as-yet-uninstalled (future) fixtures have the baseline water consumption rates.
Kitchen sinks must be included in the credit calculations if installed in the project’s scope of work or if addressed in
a tenant sales or lease agreement. However, if future kitchen sinks are not installed as part of the project’s scope of
work or are not addressed in a tenant sales or lease agreement, they may be excluded from the credit calculations.
A core and shell project can earn credit for the plumbing fixtures installed as part of the project’s scope if all fixtures
necessary to meet occupants’ needs are included in the calculations and if all occupants of the incomplete tenant
spaces are included in the calculations.
A project team may earn credit for the efficiency of not-yet-installed future plumbing fixtures by submitting
a legally binding tenant sales or lease agreement. The agreement, signed by both owner and tenant, must state
the performance requirements for the future fixtures, including the maximum water flush or flow rates and the
WaterSense label (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) for all newly installed fixtures eligible for
labeling. The project cannot earn credit this way unless the tenant sales or lease agreement is fully executed.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Additions
For credit compliance, include in the credit documentation all plumbing fixtures necessary to meet the occupants’
needs whether they will be installed as part of the project’s scope of work or not. Include at a minimum all necessary
restroom fixtures (toilets, urinals, and lavatories) to meet the project occupants’ needs, and showers when seeking
LT Credit Bicycle Facilities. The WaterSense label requirement does not apply to fixtures that are outside of the
scope of the LEED project.

Mixed-Use Projects
If a mixed-use project uses the same fixtures throughout the building, complete a single calculation of building water
use. If the spaces use different fixtures or have very different patterns of occupancy, complete the indoor water use
calculator separately for each space type.

Multifamily Residential
Use residential occupancy.
302

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For fixtures that require the WaterSense label in countries where the label is unavailable, look up acceptable
WaterSense substitutes at usgbc.org. Projects in unlisted countries must comply with the 20%-below-baseline
requirement but have no additional performance requirements.
For appliances that require the ENERGY STAR label, a project outside the U.S. may install products that are not
labeled under the ENERGY STAR program if they meet the ENERGY STAR product specifications, available on the
ENERGY STAR website. All products must meet the standards of the current version of ENERGY STAR as of the date
of their purchase.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building. If nonpotable water systems will be shared by multiple projects,
ensure adequate supply to meet the demands of all projects using nonpotable water. The nonpotable water may not
WE

be double-counted among projects.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Appliances Process water

Documentation Fixtures
(Retail, Healthcare, Hospitality,
and Schools projects only)

Alternative water source calculations (if applicable) X

Plumbing system design drawings (if applicable) X

Alternative water narrative X

Cutsheets, manufacturers’ information X X X

Indoor water use calculator X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering. Metering of potable water usage allows facilities management
staff to monitor changes as efficiency measures are implemented.

WE Credit Water Metering. Submetering of water-using systems provides water efficiency performance data so
that facilities operators can optimize water consumption.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Appliance and process water savings can earn credit under the Retail, Healthcare, Hospitality, and Schools
rating systems.
·· The WaterSense label requirements, merely recommended in LEED 2009, are now mandatory in the U.S., with
local equivalencies allowed elsewhere.
·· Duration-based savings from autocontrol faucets with automatic fixture sensors or metering controls are no
longer allowed in the design case. Studies have shown that autocontrol faucets do not save water because users
frequently reactivate the faucet after initial use or stop washing before the cycle ends.
 303

·· To earn points, project teams must include fixtures necessary to meet the occupants’ needs. When no facilities
are available within project boundaries, the closest available restrooms must be included in credit calculations.
These additional restrooms can be excluded from prerequisite compliance requirements.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
The Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 1992 and as amended: eere.energy.gov/femp/regulations/epact1992.html

EPAct 2005: eere.energy.gov/femp/regulations/epact2005.html

International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Publication IAPMO / ANSI UPC 1-2006,
Uniform Plumbing Code 2006, Section 402.0, Water-Conserving Fixtures and Fittings: iapmo.org

International Code Council, International Plumbing Code 2006, Section 604, Design of Building Water

WE
Distribution System: iccsafe.org

ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov

INDOOR WATER USE REDUCTION

WaterSense: epa.gov/watersense

IgCC/ASHRAE 189.1 – cooling tower and evaporative condenser requirements:

ashrae.org/resources--publications/bookstore/standard-189-1

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Achieve 55% water use reduction.

DEFINITIONS
alternative water source nonpotable water from other than public utilities, on-site surface sources, and subsurface
natural freshwater sources. Examples include graywater, on-site reclaimed water, collected rainwater, captured
condensate, and rejected water from reverse osmosis systems (IgCC).

baseline water consumption a calculated projection of building water use assuming code-compliant fixtures and
fittings with no additional savings compared with the design case or actual water meter data

potable water water that meets or exceeds U.S. Environmental Protection Agency drinking water quality standards
(or a local equivalent outside the U.S.) and is approved for human consumption by the state or local authorities
having jurisdiction; it may be supplied from wells or municipal water systems

nonpotable water water that does not meet drinking water standards

process water water that is used for industrial processes and building systems, such as cooling towers, boilers,
and chillers. It can also refer to water used in operational processes, such as dishwashing, clothes washing, and ice
making.
 305

WATER EFFICIENCY CREDIT

Cooling Tower
Water Use

WE
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)

COOLING TOWER WATER USE

Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

INTENT

To conserve water used for cooling tower makeup while controlling

microbes, corrosion, and scale in the condenser water system.

REQUIREMENTS

For cooling towers and evaporative condensers, conduct a one-time potable water analysis, measuring at least the
five control parameters listed in Table 1.

TABLE 1. Maximum concentrations for parameters in condenser water

Parameter Maximum level

Ca (as CaCO3) 1000 ppm

Total alkalinity 1000 ppm

SiO2 100 ppm

Cl -
250 ppm

Conductivity 2000 µS/cm

ppm = parts per million

µS/cm = micro siemens per centimeter

Calculate the number of cooling tower cycles by dividing the maximum allowed concentration level of each
parameter by the actual concentration level of each parameter found in the potable makeup water. Limit cooling
tower cycles to avoid exceeding maximum values for any of these parameters.
306

TABLE 2. Points for cooling tower cycles

Cooling tower cycles Points

Maximum number of cycles achieved without exceeding any filtration levels

or affecting operation of condenser water system (up to maximum of 10 1
cycles)

Achieve a minimum 10 cycles by increasing the level of treatment in

condenser or make-up water

OR 2

Meet the minimum number of cycles

to earn 1 point and use a minimum 20% recycled nonpotable water
WE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 307

BEHIND THE INTENT

Refrigeration systems remove heat, usually from air, to cool interior building spaces. This heat is expelled into either
the atmosphere or another medium. A cooling tower or evaporative condenser removes heat in part by evaporating
water; as the water absorbs heat, it changes from a liquid to a vapor. As the water evaporates, however, dissolved
solids become more concentrated in the remaining water and eventually begin to deposit scale on cooling tower or
evaporative condenser elements, making such systems less efficient. To prevent buildup of deposits, cooling tower
and evaporative condenser systems remove a portion of the water through a process called blowdown. Makeup water
is then added to replace evaporative losses and blowdown volume. Cooling towers can therefore account for large
portions of a building’s total water use.
To significantly reduce makeup water inputs, it is important to achieve target cycles of concentration (see
Further Explanation, Cycles of Concentration). Cooling tower or evaporative condenser water efficiency is measured in
the number of recirculation cycles before water must be removed by blowdown.
Increasing the number of cycles can save thousands of gallons of potable water during a building’s peak cooling

WE
periods. Chemically analyzing makeup water allows for calculation of optimal cycles. Cycles can also be increased
by treating water to remove or sequester dissolved solids rather than relying only on blowdown and input of fresh
makeup water.

COOLING TOWER WATER USE

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Only projects served by cooling towers or evaporative condensers are eligible for this credit.

STEP 1. OBTAIN WATER ANALYSIS

Whether the project uses 100% potable or 100% nonpotable water for cooling, the first step is to obtain a
chemical analysis.
·· Engage a water treatment professional to perform the analysis. If a potable water analysis has already
been completed, it must be no more than five years old.
·· At a minimum, the analysis must measure the concentration parameters identified in the credit
requirements. Highlight each parameter in the documentation.
·· Describe the analysis. The narrative must identify the source of the makeup water and the process for
analysis.

STEP 2. CALCULATE CYCLES OF CONCENTRATION

Determine how many times the cooling tower or evaporative condenser water can circulate through
the system without creating performance or operational problems by using Equation 1, based on the
maximum concentrations indicated in the credit requirements.

EQUATION 1. Indoor water-use reduction

Acceptable maximum concentrations in condenser water

Cycles of
concentration =
Parameter concentrations in makeup water

STEP 3. IDENTIFY LIMITING FACTOR

Identify which concentration parameter has the fewest calculated cycles before it exceeds the maximum
concentration. That parameter’s number of cycles, the limiting factor, will determine the maximum
number of cycles for the cooling tower or evaporative condenser.
308

STEP 4. SET COOLING TOWER OR EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER CYCLES

Adjust the cooling tower or evaporative condenser settings for the maximum number of cycles without
exceeding concentration levels or affecting condenser operation.

STEP 5. INCREASE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

Increase the number of cycles by treating the water or, if the project is using 100% potable water,
supplementing it with water from a nonpotable source.
·· Evaluate whether greater potable water efficiency could be achieved by treating makeup water to
reduce or sequester some of the dissolved solids.
·· Nonpotable water derived from the site can offset a portion of the potable water used for makeup
(see Further Explanation, Selecting Nonpotable Sources).
WE

FURTHER EXPLANATION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

CYCLES OF CONCENTRATION
Cycles of concentration are the number of times that a volume of water can circulate through a cooling tower system
before dissolved minerals become so concentrated (as water is lost to evaporation) that they precipitate and cause
scaling—deposits that reduce the efficiency of the cooling system. To dilute the concentration of minerals, some
water must be removed (blowdown) and replaced with fresh makeup water, or the water must be chemically treated,
or both. The number of times water can cycle through the system before scaling becomes a problem depends on the
amount of total dissolved solids (TDS) in the original water and the temperature of the water and heat exchange
surfaces. Low-temperature water with low initial TDS levels can be circulated through more cycles than very hot,
mineral-laden (“hard”) water.
More technically, a cycle of concentration is defined as the ratio of TDS levels in makeup water to TDS levels in
water removed through blowdown, evaporative loss, and drift (windage). A higher number of cycles indicates better
water efficiency because less makeup water is required.
Building maintenance staff can monitor cycles of concentration by comparing the amount of soluble chloride
ions (measured in parts per million, ppm) in makeup water with that in the recirculating water. A test kit is typically
available through the cooling tower or evaporative condenser manufacturer or the service contractor responsible for
maintaining makeup water chemistry. The minimum number of cycles would be a once-through system that runs the
makeup water through the heat exchange media once, without recirculating it. For obvious reasons, this wasteful use
of water is discouraged. Yet as cycles increase, the amount of TDS also increases, resulting in potential fouling of the
system. Optimizing the number of cycles avoids both of these scenarios.

SELECTING NONPOTABLE SOURCES

When selecting a nonpotable source, consider the factors that affect makeup water quality. Acceptable sources
should have relatively low levels of dissolved solids. Stormwater runoff from the ground surface or graywater
may contain contaminants, including dissolved chlorides that may need treatment. In contrast, air-conditioning
condensate and rainwater collected from building roofs have relatively low mineral content.
Good nonpotable water sources include the following:
·· Air-conditioner condensate
·· Rainwater
·· Steam system condensate
·· Food steamer discharge water
·· Fire pump test water
·· Ice machine condensate
Other factors to consider are ease of transport to the cooling tower and required volume of makeup water.
 309

EXAMPLE
Analysis of the makeup water for a cooling tower or evaporative condenser at an office building reveals the following
concentrations:

TABLE 3. Analysis of makeup water

Parameter Maximum allowable concentrations Makeup water concentrations

Calcium (as CaCO3) 1,000 ppm 100 ppm

Alkalinity 1,000 ppm 200 ppm

SiO2 100 ppm 20 ppm

Chloride 250 ppm 50 ppm

Conductivity 2,000 µS/cm 300 µS/cm

WE
The cycles of concentration based on each of these parameters are as follows:

COOLING TOWER WATER USE

TABLE 4. Cycles of concentration

Calcium (as CaCO3) 1,000 / 100 = 10 cycles

Alkalinity 1,000 / 200 = 5 cycles

SiO2 100 / 20 = 5 cycles

Chloride 250 / 50 = 5 cycles

Conductivity 2,000 / 300 = 6.7 cycles

The lowest number—five cycles—is therefore the maximum cycles of concentration for this makeup water.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group project may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation 1 point 2 points

Potable water analysis results X X

Potable water analysis narrative X X

Cycles of concentration calculations X X

Nonpotable water calculations X

Water treatment calculations X

Nonpotable water analysis (if using 100% nonpotable water) X

310

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. The related prerequisite requires makeup meters, conductivity
controllers and overflow alarms, and efficient drift eliminators that reduce drift to a maximum of 0.002% of
recirculated water volume for counterflow towers, 0.005% of recirculated water flow for cross-flow towers. These
performance and tracking measures allow for better ongoing maintenance of efficient cooling tower or evaporative
condenser systems.

WE Credit Water Metering. Subsystem meters to measure cooling tower or evaporative condenser makeup water
can assist in water management and can help optimize cycles of concentration.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

WE

This is a new credit.

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
blowdown the removal of makeup water from a cooling tower or evaporative condenser recirculation system to
reduce concentrations of dissolved solids

makeup water water that is fed into a cooling tower system or evaporative condenser to replace water lost through
evaporation, drift, bleed-off, or other causes
 311

WATER EFFICIENCY CREDIT

Water Metering
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)

WE
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

WATER METERING
INTENT

To support water management and identify opportunities for additional

water savings by tracking water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS

Install permanent water meters for two or more of the following water subsystems, as applicable to the project:

·· Irrigation. Meter water systems serving at least 80% of the irrigated landscaped area. Calculate the percentage
of irrigated landscape area served as the total metered irrigated landscape area divided by the total irrigated
landscape area. Landscape areas fully covered with xeriscaping or native vegetation that requires no routine
irrigation may be excluded from the calculation.
·· Indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings. Meter water systems serving at least 80% of the indoor fixtures and
fitting described in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction, either directly or by deducting all other
measured water use from the measured total water consumption of the building and grounds.
·· Domestic hot water. Meter water use of at least 80% of the installed domestic hot water heating capacity
(including both tanks and on-demand heaters).
·· Boiler with aggregate projected annual water use of 100,000 gallons (378 500 liters) or more, or boiler of
more than 500,000 BtuH (150 kW). A single makeup meter may record flows for multiple boilers.
·· Reclaimed water. Meter reclaimed water, regardless of rate. A reclaimed water system with a makeup water
connection must also be metered so that the true reclaimed water component can be determined.
·· Other process water. Meter at least 80% of expected daily water consumption for process end uses, such as
humidification systems, dishwashers, clothes washers, pools, and other subsystems using process water.
312

HEALTHCARE PROJECTS ONLY

In addition to the requirements above, install water meters in any five of the following:
·· purified water systems (reverse-osmosis, de-ionized);
·· filter backwash water;
·· water use in dietary department;
·· water use in laundry;
·· water use in laboratory;
·· water use in central sterile and processing department;
·· water use in physiotherapy and hydrotherapy and treatment areas;
·· water use in surgical suite;
·· closed-looped hydronic system makeup water; and
·· cold-water makeup for domestic hot water systems.
WE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 313

BEHIND THE INTENT

Metering water usage by subsystem helps facilities managers better gauge a building’s water efficiency. Submetering
the major building water systems provides a way to formulate independent system baselines, track usage against
those baselines, isolate and identify potential sources of waste, and take corrective action. Moreover, submetering
helps track periodic changes in water usage and provides the data necessary to calculate opportunities for water
savings at a systemwide level.
This credit expands on WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering, which requires a main water meter to
measure the total quantity of water entering the building.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

WE
STEP 1. IDENTIFY CANDIDATE SYSTEMS FOR SUBMETERING
Identify all systems serving the project building and grounds. These subsystems may include irrigation,

WATER METERING
indoor plumbing fixtures, domestic hot water, process water, reclaimed water, and boiler water. Cooling
tower submeters are addressed separately, under WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction.
·· Consider those subsystems that consume the most water, are the most expensive to operate, or most
closely align with the goals of the building management.
·· Consider not only the number, types, and sizes of meters but also the effort required to take meter
readings.
·· The cost of a wet meter (a meter installed in the pipe) increases with pipe size; many external, clamp-
on meters are adaptable to a range of pipe sizes. Clamp-on meters are more costly on small-diameter
pipes, but initial cost differences are reduced for larger pipes.
·· The higher cost of a larger meter may be offset by reduced operations and maintenance costs if
facilities staff will be making manual readings.
·· Automatic data logging also adds to initial cost, but it may be cost-effective if it reduces the effort of
obtaining and recording readings.
·· Plumbing system layout affects where submeters can be installed. New construction projects may
facilitate submetering during plumbing system design.
·· Some projects may require more than one submeter to measure 80% to 100% of flow in some systems.

STEP 2. DETERMINE SCOPE OF SUBMETERING

Identify which subsystems are most appropriate to submeter based on the project objectives.
·· As noted in WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering, consider location and accessibility when
placing submeters, particularly for taking manual readings.
·· If the project team is claiming credit for irrigation, indoor plumbing fixtures, domestic hot water, or
other process water submeters, at least 80% of water distribution must be submetered. If 100% of the
water used by a subsystem is metered, no calculation is necessary.
·· Determine how much of the total water system will be submetered by comparing the submetered
portions with total landscape area, number of indoor fixtures, domestic water heating units, or process
use quantities, as follows:

EQUATION 1. Landscape area

Metered irrigated landscape area

≥ 0.8
Total irrigated landscape area

Unirrigated landscape areas should not be included in either the numerator or denominator of this
equation.
314

EQUATION 2. Fixtures

Number of metered indoor fixtures and fittings

≥ 0.8
Total number of indoor fixtures

EQUATION 3. Domestic hot water

Heating capacity of metered domestic water heating units

≥ 0.8
Total heating capacity of all domestic water heating units
WE

EQUATION 4. Other process water

Daily metered gallons (or liters) for process-type end uses

≥ 0.8
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Total expected daily gallons (or liters) for process-type end uses

·· If the team is using reclaimed water for irrigation, 100% of this water must be submetered. The meter
for reclaimed water may also be the same meter that is counted for irrigation, fixtures, or process
water. If reclaimed water is used in multiple applications in the project (e.g., for irrigation, flush fixtures,
or process water), then all reclaimed water use must be metered; the team may report data from
multiple submeters, as applicable.
·· Discuss water efficiency goals with the building operations and maintenance team to ensure that the
metered systems reflect needs.
·· Healthcare projects have specific requirements. See Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

STEP 3. SELECT METERING EQUIPMENT

Choose a submeter type if no existing meters are present or if existing meters need replacing.
·· Submeters may be manually read or connected to a building information system. The meters may be
equipped with data logging capability independent of a building information system.
·· If meters are to be read manually, consider digital indicators, which may reduce errors in recording.
·· Wet meters will likely be the most cost-effective approach. However, clamp-on meters may be simpler
to install.
Prepare a narrative describing the subsystems metered, including the location and model of each
installed submeter.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Healthcare
Healthcare projects must meter five additional subsystems, as outlined in the credit requirements. For example,
submetering all laundry water use counts as one metered subsystem.
 315

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Multifamily
Water use in common areas can be submetered to earn this credit. Metering in residential units may be included or
excluded, but should be done uniformly. Multifamily projects still need to meter full subsystems (for common areas
or the whole building) to earn credit.

Additions
For additions to existing buildings, the submetered systems may either follow the project boundary or include both
the addition and the original building.
If the original building is included within the project boundary, then all submeters must account for old and new
building water use. If the project boundary includes only the addition, the project team may choose to submeter the
water use of only the addition.
If the fixtures used by the addition are all within the original building, the project boundary must include the
original building for the team to earn credit for the fixture submeter.

WE
CAMPUS
Group Approach

WATER METERING
Submit separate documentation for each building. Each building in the group must have an individual whole-
building water meter. Each individual building in the group must meet the credit requirements for submetering of
indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings, domestic hot water, and other process water. All buildings in the group can be
served by the same submeter for irrigation systems, boilers, and reclaimed water, provided all the water used by the
group is captured.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Water metering strategy narrative X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

WE Prerequisite Building-Level Water Metering. For this credit, submetered systems must be within the
boundaries of the whole-building water meter required for the related prerequisite.

WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. If fixtures and fittings submeters are used to earn this credit, meter
the water systems serving at least 80% of the indoor fixtures and fittings described in the related prerequisite—
either directly or by deducting all other measured water use from the measured total water consumption of the
building and grounds.

WE Prerequisite Outdoor Water Use Reduction. If irrigation submeters are used to earn this credit, meter the
water systems serving at least 80% of the irrigated landscaped area identified in the related prerequisite.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.
316

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
external meter a device installed on the outside of a water pipe to record the volume of water passing through it.
WE

Also known as a clamp-on meter.

reclaimed water wastewater that has been treated and purified for reuse

wet meter a device installed inside a water pipe to record the volume of passing water
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
WATER METERING WE
317
 319

Energy and
Atmosphere (ea)

EA
ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE
OVERVIEW
The Energy and Atmosphere (EA) category approaches energy from a holistic perspective, addressing energy use
reduction, energy-efficient design strategies, and renewable energy sources.
The current worldwide mix of energy resources is weighted heavily toward oil, coal, and natural gas.1 In addition
to emitting greenhouse gases, these resources are nonrenewable: their quantities are limited or they cannot be
replaced as fast as they are consumed.2 Though estimates regarding the remaining quantity of these resources vary,
it is clear that the current reliance on nonrenewable energy sources is not sustainable and involves increasingly
destructive extraction processes, uncertain supplies, escalating market prices, and national security vulnerability.
Accounting for approximately 40% of the total energy used today,3 buildings are significant contributors to these
problems.
Energy efficiency in a green building starts with a focus on design that reduces overall energy needs, such as
building orientation and glazing selection, and the choice of climate-appropriate building materials. Strategies such
as passive heating and cooling, natural ventilation, and high-efficiency HVAC systems partnered with smart controls
further reduce a building’s energy use. The generation of renewable energy on the project site or the purchase of
green power allows portions of the remaining energy consumption to be met with non–fossil fuel energy, lowering
the demand for traditional sources.
The commissioning process is critical to ensuring high-performing buildings. Early involvement of a
commissioning authority helps prevent long-term maintenance issues and wasted energy by verifying that the
design meets the owner’s project requirements and functions as intended. In an operationally effective and efficient
building, the staff understands what systems are installed and how they function. Staff must have training and be
receptive to learning new methods for optimizing system performance so that efficient design is carried through to
efficient performance.
The EA category recognizes that the reduction of fossil fuel use extends far beyond the walls of the building.
Projects can contribute to increasing the electricity grid’s efficiency by enrolling in a demand response program.

1. iea.org/publications/freepublications/publication/kwes.pdf
2. cnx.org/content/m16730/latest/
3. unep.org/sbci/pdfs/SBCI-BCCSummary.pdf
320

Demand response allows utilities to call on buildings to decrease their electricity use during peak times, reducing the
strain on the grid and the need to operate more power plants, thus potentially avoiding the costs of constructing new
plants. Similarly, on-site renewable energy not only moves the market away from dependence on fossil fuels but may
also be a dependable local electricity source that avoids transmission losses and strain on the grid.
The American Physical Society has found that if current and emerging cost-effective energy efficiency measures
are employed in new buildings and in existing buildings as their heating, cooling, lighting, and other equipment is
replaced, the growth in energy demand from the building sector could fall from a projected 30% increase to zero
between now and 2030.4 The EA section supports the goal of reduced energy demand through credits related to
reducing usage, designing for efficiency, and supplementing the energy supply with renewables.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

4. Energy Future: Think Efficiency (American Physical Society, September 2008), aps.org/energyefficiencyreport/report/energy-bldgs.pdf
(accessed September 13, 2012).
 321

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE PREREQUISITE

Fundamental
Commissioning and
Verification
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers

EA
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

INTENT

To support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a project

that meets the owner’s project requirements for energy, water, indoor
environmental quality, and durability.

REQUIREMENTS

Commissioning Process Scope

Complete the following commissioning (Cx) process activities for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and renewable
energy systems and assemblies, in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 and ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007 for
HVAC&R Systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability.
Requirements for exterior enclosures are limited to inclusion in the owner’s project requirements (OPR) and
basis of design (BOD), as well as the review of the OPR, BOD and project design. NIBS Guideline 3-2012 for Exterior
Enclosures provides additional guidance.
·· Develop the OPR.
·· Develop a BOD.
The commissioning authority (CxA) must do the following:
·· Review the OPR, BOD, and project design.
·· Develop and implement a Cx plan.
·· Confirm incorporation of Cx requirements into the construction documents.
·· Develop construction checklists.
·· Develop a system test procedure.
322

·· Verify system test execution.

·· Maintain an issues and benefits log throughout the Cx process.
·· Prepare a final Cx process report.
·· Document all findings and recommendations and report directly to the owner throughout the process.
The review of the exterior enclosure design may be performed by a qualified member of the design or construction
team (or an employee of that firm) who is not directly responsible for design of the building envelope.

Commissioning Authority
By the end of the design development phase, engage a commissioning authority with the following qualifications.
·· The CxA must have documented commissioning process experience on at least two building projects with
a similar scope of work. The experience must extend from early design phase through at least 10 months of
occupancy;
·· The CxA may be a qualified employee of the owner, an independent consultant, or an employee of the design or
construction firm who is not part of the project’s design or construction team, or a disinterested subcontractor
of the design or construction team.
°° For projects smaller than 20,000 square feet (1 860 square meters), the CxA may be a qualified member of
the design or construction team. In all cases, the CxA must report his or her findings directly to the owner.
Project teams that intend to pursue EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning should note a difference in the CxA
qualifications: for the credit, the CxA may not be an employee of the design or construction firm nor a subcontractor
EA

to the construction firm.

Current Facilities Requirements and Operations and Maintenance Plan

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Prepare and maintain a current facilities requirements and operations and maintenance plan that contains the
information necessary to operate the building efficiently. The plan must include the following:
·· a sequence of operations for the building;
·· the building occupancy schedule;
·· equipment run-time schedules;
·· setpoints for all HVAC equipment;
·· set lighting levels throughout the building;
·· minimum outside air requirements;
·· any changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons, days of the week, and times of day;
·· a systems narrative describing the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment;
·· a preventive maintenance plan for building equipment described in the systems narrative; and
·· a commissioning program that includes periodic commissioning requirements, ongoing commissioning tasks,
and continuous tasks for critical facilities.

DATA CENTERS ONLY

For small projects with computer room peak cooling loads less than 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW) or a total computer
room peak cooling load less than 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW), the CxA may be a qualified employee of the design or
construction team.
 323

BEHIND THE INTENT

The commissioning (Cx) process is an integrated set of activities intended to ensure that the project meets both
the design intent and the owner’s operational needs. An owner’s goals and objectives should drive the project team.
The value of Cx lies in its power to verify that those goals and objectives are met and that building systems perform
as intended.
A properly executed Cx process clearly expresses the owner’s project requirements, often leading to fewer
change orders and system deficiencies, fewer corrective actions implemented while contractors are on-site,
improved planning and coordination, reduced energy consumption during building operation, and overall lower
operating costs. Another potential benefit of Cx is occupants’ health and comfort because of better temperature
and ventilation control. For a mission-critical facility like a data center, the most significant benefit is the reduced
risk of information technology (IT) equipment downtime caused by power or cooling system design or performance
issues, faulty installation or calibration, or software programming errors that go undetected until after the
building is on line.
The qualified commissioning authority (CxA) chosen to represent the owner’s needs should be brought in early
in the design process. As a third party, the CxA can verify early on that the architects’ and engineers’ designs meet the
owner’s project requirements. During the construction phase, the commissioning team, led by the CxA, will verify
that contractors install and program the systems correctly according to the design.

EA
STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

STEP 1. DEVELOP OWNER’S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
The owner, with the help of the design team and other stakeholders, should develop the initial owner’s
project requirements (OPR) in the predesign stage (see the Integrative Process Credit and Further
Explanation, Owner’s Project Requirements).
·· This document establishes the owner’s goals and the building’s intended function and operation.
·· The owner will use this document as the foundation for all design, construction, acceptance, and
operational decisions.
·· The OPR must include all systems to be commissioned plus the building envelope, even if full envelope
commissioning is not pursued.

STEP 2. DEVELOP BASIS OF DESIGN

Create a basis of design (BOD) to provide clear technical guidance for the project. Start this in the
schematic design phase and update it throughout the design and construction process (see Further
Explanation, Basis of Design).
·· The BOD is the project team’s interpretation of the OPR.
·· Any revisions to the OPR should also be reflected in the BOD so that both documents align.
·· The BOD must include all systems to be commissioned plus the building envelope, even if full envelope
commissioning is not pursued. The project engineer, architect, structural engineer, and other team
members must work together to document building envelope thermal performance, load-bearing
capabilities, and construction.

STEP 3. ENGAGE COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY

Identify a CxA with the proper experience and credentials to develop and implement effective
commissioning. Though the CxA must be engaged by the design development phase, earlier engagement
allows the CxA to be involved in the development of the OPR and BOD and see the design intent through
to completion.
·· The CxA should have direct experience with at least two similar projects and must have been
involved from the early design phase through at least 10 months after occupancy begins (see Further
Explanation, Commissioning Authority Qualifications).
·· CxA requirements differ depending on the scope and size of the project. The project team should
engage a CxA that has appropriate qualifications for the goals of the program.
324

·· The CxA will facilitate and ultimately oversee the Cx process for all systems to be commissioned,
including the building envelope, if pursued; additional expertise may be brought in (see Further
Explanation, Systems to Be Commissioned).
·· Work with the CxA to determine the systems that need to be commissioned for compliance with the
OPR and the credit requirements.

STEP 4. DEVELOP PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING PLAN

Establish a preliminary plan for the Cx to outline the scope of commissioning and systems to be tested
(see Further Explanation, Cx Plan).
·· Project roles and responsibilities, the commissioning team’s project directory, and schedule of
commissioning activities should all be included in the Cx plan.
·· The Cx plan is a living document that is updated throughout the life of the project and will become the
basis for the final commissioning report.

STEP 5. REVIEW OPR, BOD, AND DESIGN DOCUMENTS

The CxA completes a review of the OPR, BOD, and design documents to verify that the program’s goals
are properly included in the design documents.
·· The intent of the review is to have a third party, acting as an advocate for the owner, ensure that the
BOD reflects the OPR and that the design documents reflect the BOD and the OPR.
·· The review should be conducted on middesign documents so that the project team has time to make
any necessary changes.
·· Earlier and additional reviews at other project milestones are advisable and often beneficial to project
performance but are not required.
EA

·· Record the review comments in an issues log that details the drawing set or document version that
was used for performing the review (see Further Explanation, Issues Log).

STEP 6. DEVELOP CX REQUIREMENTS AND INCORPORATE INTO CONSTRUCTION

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

DOCUMENTS
Before construction begins, develop commissioning requirements based on the systems included in the
design and incorporate them into the construction documents.
·· Cx specifications inform the contractors of their roles and responsibilities throughout the
commissioning process.
·· ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, Table L-1, identifies titles, contents, and scopes for each commissioning-
related specification section and may be used as guidance (see Further Explanation, Example Issues
Log).

STEP 7. UPDATE OPR, BOD, AND CX PLAN

If necessary, the owner should update the OPR, the design team should update the BOD, and the CxA
should update the Cx plan. Items such as design changes, value engineering modifications, new or
reassigned team members, or updated operating conditions would warrant an update.

STEP 8. CONDUCT CX KICKOFF MEETING

Assemble the team of stakeholders and hold a kickoff meeting to introduce the team members, review
roles and responsibilities, and review all remaining Cx activities. The CxA should provide information on
the process and requirements for the following:
·· Installation verification (construction) checklists
·· Functional performance tests
·· Issues log
·· Team meetings
·· Contractors’ and subcontractors’ participation on the Cx team
·· Schedule
The CxA should update and redistribute the Cx plan as necessary. The CxA is also responsible for setting
up periodic Cx meetings, developing a communication protocol, and managing the schedule for all Cx-
related activities.

STEP 9. DEVELOP CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

The CxA, the design team, or the contactor prepares construction checklists (also known as installation
verification checklists and prefunctional checklists) for the project.
 325

·· Checklists provide confirmation to the CxA that the systems have been installed, started up,
programmed, tested, and balanced, and that the team is ready to proceed with functional testing.
·· In general, contractors are responsible for filling out the checklists and returning them to the CxA.
·· Construction checklists must be completed for all equipment, assemblies, and systems included in Cx
scope. Sampling strategies are not permitted.

STEP 10. CONDUCT PREFUNCTIONAL INSPECTIONS

Communicate with the contractors to determine the exact schedule for prefunctional inspections to
verify proper installation and handling of systems to be commissioned. Several activities that can be
considered prefunctional inspections include site visits, field observations, and review of start-up forms,
construction checklists, and complete test-and-balance reports.
·· The CxA may conduct site visits as necessary to inspect the installation of individual systems and
components. Site visits are an important opportunity to observe equipment installation and identify
issues before a system becomes difficult to access or change.
·· It is good practice to document the site visit findings in a field observation report that is distributed
to the relevant parties. The CxA should report any noncompliance to the owner and project team for
them to help resolve.
·· The number of site inspections depends on the project’s size and scope.

STEP 11. DEVELOP FUNCTIONAL TEST SCRIPTS

The CxA, with the design team or contractor, must write and develop the functional test scripts for the
project.
·· Functional testing scripts typically follow the sequence of operations developed by the engineer.

EA
If a controls contractor created the sequence of operations, the design engineer must approve the
controls submittal to ensure it adheres to the BOD.
·· Provide contractors and design engineers with the functional tests before testing to allow them the
opportunity to review the scripts, verify proper operating modes, and comment on any modifications

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

to match actual operation (see Further Explanation, Functional Performance Tests).

STEP 12. EXECUTE FUNCTIONAL TESTING

Perform functional performance testing once all system components are installed, energized,
programmed, balanced, and otherwise ready for operation under part- and full-load conditions.
·· Some systems may require deferred or seasonal testing or verification for proper operation in each
mode.
·· The systems or modes that require seasonal or deferred testing must be noted in the Cx report. A
report addendum discusses the deferred testing results can then be issued.
·· The functional performance testing follows the functional performance test scripts developed by the
CxA in Step 11.
·· The CxA generally oversees the testing; the contractors execute the testing.
·· Sampling strategies may be implemented for functional testing. An acceptable sampling rate is “10 or
10%,” meaning that for multiple units of the same type with the same components and sequences (e.g.,
fan coil units or variable air volume systems), the commissioning team may test only 10 units or 10% of
the units, whichever is greater.
·· When possible, include the building engineer or owner in the testing execution to provide training for
future operation of the systems.

STEP 13. DOCUMENT FINDINGS

Use the issues log to track any deficiencies discovered and any benefits identified through
functional testing.
·· The CxA is responsible for documenting the test results and maintaining the issues log.
·· Documentation should include the status and responsible party for the correction or
improvement actions.

STEP 14. PREPARE CX REPORT

The CxA should write the Cx report after installation inspections and functional performance test
verification. The report covers all components of the commissioning process, including the following:
·· Executive summary of commissioning process and results, system deficiencies identified and
resolution, and outstanding issues
·· Project directory
326

·· Cx process overview
·· Owner’s project requirements
·· Basis of design
·· Submittals
·· Design review log
·· Cx specifications
·· List of systems commissioned
·· Installation verification checklists
·· Functional performance tests
·· Issues log, detailing open and closed issues

STEP 15. COMPILE CURRENT FACILITY REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATIONS AND

MAINTENANCE PLAN
Prepare and maintain a current facility requirements (CFR) and operations and maintenance (O&M) plan
that contains the information necessary to operate the building efficiently. This information is covered in
the OPR, BOD, and functional test scripts, but more information may be taken from specific submittals or
equipment operations and maintenance manuals. The plan must include the following:
·· Sequences of operation for the building
·· Building occupancy schedule
·· Equipment run-time schedules
·· Setpoints for all HVAC equipment
·· Lighting levels throughout the building
EA

·· Minimum outside air requirements

·· Changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons, days of the week, and times of day
·· Systems narrative describing the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Preventive maintenance plan for building equipment described in the systems narrative
·· Cx program that includes periodic Cx requirements, ongoing Cx tasks, and continuous tasks for critical
facilities

FURTHER EXPLANATION

SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
The rating system refers to commissioning of HVAC&R systems “as they relate to energy, water, indoor
environmental quality, and durability.” That is, energy- and water-consuming equipment must operate efficiently
and according to the design intent and owner’s operational needs.
Efficient operations can be defined as the controlling of equipment such that it uses the minimum amount
of energy or water to maintain setpoints and comfort levels. Control is generally accomplished via a building
automation system and per the sequences of operation, with setpoints that are correct for the design and equipment
schedules.
For indoor environmental quality, the equipment must meet the OPR, BOD, and environmental codes and
standards. For durability, the equipment must not cause unnecessary wear and tear on the system.
Systems that must be commissioned for this prerequisite include the following:
·· Mechanical, including HVAC&R equipment and controls
·· Plumbing, including domestic hot water systems, pumps, and controls
·· Electrical, including service, distribution, lighting, and controls, including daylighting controls
·· Renewable energy systems

The envelope must be covered in the OPR and BOD, but full envelope commissioning is not required unless the
project team pursues EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning, Option 2.
 327

Systems that are not required to be commissioned under this prerequisite but may be added to the Cx scope at
the request of the owner include the following:
·· Envelope
·· Life safety systems
·· Communications and data systems
·· Fire protection and fire alarm systems
·· Process equipment

COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY (CXA) QUALIFICATIONS

The CxA must have documented commissioning process experience on at least two building projects with a similar
scope of work. The experience must extend from early design phase through at least 10 months of occupancy. The
similar scope of work may be defined by the size of building, the types of equipment being commissioned, or the
function of the space. However, the appropriate or acceptable level of “similar experience” should be defined by the
owner. Examples include the following:
·· New construction commercial building, less than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters), with direct
expansion rooftop units.
·· New construction commercial building, more than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters), with built-up
air-handling units and chilled water central plant.
·· New construction school, less than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters), with mixed-mode ventilation

EA
and steam boilers.
·· New construction refrigerated warehouse with ammonia chillers for process cooling, solar thermal domestic
hot water heating, photovoltaic solar panels and commercial-grade wind turbine.

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

If the project is pursuing fundamental commissioning only, the CxA may be a qualified employee of the owner, an
independent consultant, an employee of the design or construction firm who is not part of the project’s design or
construction team, or a disinterested subcontractor of the design or construction team. Special circumstances
include the following:
·· For projects smaller than 20,000 square feet (1 860 square meters), the CxA may be a qualified member of the
design or construction team.
·· If specialized knowledge of specific systems is required (e.g., manufacturing, data centers), the CxA may be a
qualified employee of the design or construction team, provided the project has a computer room peak cooling
load of less than 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW) or a total computer room peak cooling load less than 600,000
Btu/h (175 kW).
·· If an owner requires a single contract through one entity (such as a government agency contracting through
a general contractor), the CxA may be a qualified employee of the design or construction team for this
prerequisite. If the project team is also attempting the enhanced commissioning credit, however, the CxA must
be independent of the design or construction firm.

In all cases, the CxA must report findings directly to the owner.
328

TABLE 1. Who can be the CxA?

be CxA for …
Can … who is …
fundamental Cx? enhanced Cx?

a member of the design team (e.g., a No, unless project is

project architect, engineer, or energy under 20,000 ft2 No
modeler who is also the HVAC designer) (1 860 m2)
an employee of the architecture or
engineering firm
not a member of the design team (e.g.,
a LEED administrator or energy modeler Yes No
who is not participating in the design)

a member of the design team (e.g., a No, unless project is

project engineer subcontracted to the under 20,000 ft2 No
architect) (1 860 m2)
a subconsultant to the architecture or
engineering firm
not a member of the design team (e.g., a
LEED administrator, Cx specialist, energy Yes Yes
modeler)

No, unless project is

an employee or subcontractor of the a member of the construction team under 20,000 ft2 No
general contractor or construction (1 860 m2)
manager
not a member of the construction team Yes No

an employee of the owner or an

EA

independent consultant contracted to Yes Yes

the owner
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

OWNER’S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

The owner, CxA, and project team must complete the OPR before any contractor submittals for Cx equipment or
systems are approved. Ideally, the initial document is completed at the early stages of predesign. Updates during the
design and construction process are the primary responsibility of the owner.
The OPR details the functional requirements as well as the expectations of the building’s use and operation.
The intention is to document the owner’s requirements and objectives for the project to verify that those goals are
carried through the life of the project. There is no required format; an OPR outline might include the following:
·· Key project requirements. Items that the Cx process will focus on and that the owner has deemed critical to
the project.
·· Occupant requirements. Functions, number of occupants, and schedules for the building.
·· Budget considerations and limitations. The expected cost restrictions and considerations for the project’s
design, construction, and commissioning process.
·· Target goals. The owner’s overall goals, such as energy efficiency and sustainability.
·· Performance criteria. The standards by which the project will be evaluated by the Cx team. Each criterion
should be measurable and verifiable. Potential topics include general, economic, user requirements,
construction process, operations, systems, and assemblies.
·· Operations and maintenance requirements. Established criteria for ongoing operations and maintenance,
as well as training requirements for personnel.

BASIS OF DESIGN
The design team must document the basis of design before any contractor submittals for commissioned equipment
or systems are approved. Updates during the design and construction process are the primary responsibility of the
design team.
The BOD explains how the construction and other details will execute the OPR. The intention is to document the
thought processes and assumptions behind design decisions made to meet the OPR. There is no required format; a
BOD outline might include the following:
 329

·· Systems and assemblies. A general overview of the systems and assemblies and how they are intended to
meet the OPR.
·· Performance criteria and assumptions. The standards that the system was designed to meet and the
expectations regarding system operation and maintenance, both linked to the OPR.
·· Descriptions. A description of the general building, envelope, HVAC, electrical, water, and other systems, and
a statement of operation that describes how the facility is expected to operate under various situations and
modes.
·· Governing codes and standards. Specific codes, standards, and guidelines considered during the design of
the facility and the designer’s response to these requirements.
·· Owner directives. Assumptions regarding usage of the facility.
·· Design development guidelines. Concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections; the specific
design methods, techniques, and software used in design; information regarding ambient conditions (climatic,
geologic, structural, existing construction) used during design; and specific manufacturer makes and models
used as the basis of design for drawings and specifications.
·· Revision history. A summary of changes made throughout the project phases.

CX PLAN
The commissioning team develops the Cx plan with input from the project team. Updates during the design and
construction process are the primary responsibility of the CxA.

EA
The Cx plan begins with a program overview:
·· Goals and objectives
·· General project information

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

·· Systems to be commissioned

It describes the Cx team:

·· Team members, roles, and responsibilities
·· Communication protocol, coordination, meetings, and management

Finally, it summarizes the Cx process activities:

·· Reviewing the OPR
·· Reviewing the BOD
·· Developing systems functional test procedures
·· Verifying system performance
·· Reporting deficiencies and the resolution process
·· Accepting the building systems

ISSUES LOG FOR THE DESIGN REVIEW

It is useful to include the following information in the design review issues log:
·· Date of the review
·· Drawing number or page where the issue was found
·· Comments
·· Party responsible for addressing the issue
·· Response
·· Date the issue was closed

FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS

The functional performance test reports typically have the following sections:
·· Date and time of test
·· Individuals present during testing
330

·· Visual inspection observations. Before testing, the CxA should perform a visual inspection and document
any issues or relevant observations.
·· Sensor checks. The sensors are checked individually to make sure they are reading properly and are in the
correct locations, per the design documents.
·· Device checks. Each device is checked to verify that it can open, close, modulate, start, stop, energize in
stages, etc.
·· Operating mode tests. A system is run through each type of operating mode including but not limited to
start up, shutdown, capacity modulation, emergency and failure modes, alarm scenarios, occupied mode and
unoccupied mode, and interlocks with other equipment.
·· Results. Indicate whether the system passed, failed, or requires retesting.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Data Centers
Select a CxA who meets the credit requirements for commissioning data centers.
The OPR should address the overall energy efficiency goals of the project, including the partial- and full-load
power usage effectiveness (PUE). Information on how the data center will be operated and by whom will help ensure
quality operation of complex systems. Clear and concise documentation of the BOD—including the cooling systems’
level of power, redundancy, reliability, and ability to support data center operations and energy efficiency during
preventive or unscheduled maintenance—will help the CxA evaluate performance.
EA

PUE should be evaluated at both start-up and full-load conditions, to correspond to modeled performance.
Critical equipment should be tested in both normal and failure modes. Include this information in the final
commissioning report. A wide variety of methods may be used to simulate and evaluate whether the system performs
as expected. For data centers, it is highly recommended that partial- and full-load testing use commercially available
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

heaters specifically designed for this purpose, to simulate the actual IT equipment’s heat load.

District Energy Systems

All downstream equipment is included in the scope of this prerequisite. Such equipment includes heat exchangers,
steam pressure reduction stations, pumps, valves, pipes, building electrical services, and controls. All upstream
equipment is excluded from the scope of this prerequisite.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
 331

TABLE 2. Example Issues Log

LEED design review of commissioned systems

Mechanical

Comment Final review

Sheet Comment Design team response
number comment, status

M-1 01M-0.0 LEED EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering equipment is being installed to
Metering is being pursued. Verify proper monitor (on floor-by-floor basis) lighting,
metering devices are installed. HVAC, computer power, water heating. We
will also be installing water meter on main
domestic water line and on cooling tower
makeup line. Additionally, building already
has monitoring for VFDS, chiller efficiency,
cooling load, economizer cycles, static
pressures, OA volumes, and process energy
systems.

M-2 BOD BOD discusses using demand-controlled Central outside air riser supplies floor-by-floor
ventilation in conference rooms as well as VAV boxes that measure outside air delivery
return ducts to “monitor” outside air for via integral flow measurement. See comment
each floor to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. 4 below for sequence of operation.
Clarify how “monitoring” of outside air is
achieved and how it’s going to be reset
based on demand.

EA
M-3 08M-2.0 Note 4 indicates, “install CO2 sensors New CO2 sensors for high-occupancy spaces
per LEED EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor along with existing return air CO2 sensors will
Air Quality Strategies” but BOD states be monitored by BAS. If any zone rises to
that CO2 sensors will be used to maintain more than 700 ppm above 400 ppm ambient
ASHRAE 62.1. Note 4 also states that CO2 CO2 threshold, OA damper will be opened in

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

levels must be maintained at 400 ppm stages with appropriate time delays using PID
or less in most critical zone. ASHRAE 62.1 control to satisfy critical zone CO2 setpoint.
allows for CO2 levels to be controlled up We will add this credit to sustainable design
to 1400 ppm or more depending on type requirements listing.
of space. Codes sometimes restrict this
down to 1000 ppm. Should include EQ
credit requirements under specification
section. “Maximum allowable CO2 levels”
should be defined.

E-1 01E-2.0 No lighting controls, including occupancy Design intent is to provide daylight sensors
sensors or daylight sensors, appear to and step dimming. Design documents will be
be provided for lobby. BOD indicates modified to reflect this.
that all lighting within perimeter
will have daylight sensors and step
dimming. Clarify how this lighting will be
controlled.

P-1 BOD LEED criteria for sink faucet do not Will update document.
match description of SK-1 or SK-2.

P-2 BOD SH-1 and SH-1A identified in BOD were Will be included in later design as required.
not included on plumbing drawings.
332

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

CxA previous experience X

Confirmation of OPR and BOD contents X

List of systems to be commissioned X

Verification of CxA activities and reviews X

Cx plan X

Documentation of testing and verification X

CFR, O&M plan X

Cx report X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA

Integrative Process Credit. Early analysis of energy- and water-related systems can affect site parameters,
programming, geometry, envelope and façade treatments, HVAC capacities and quantities, lighting control
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

strategies, landscape irrigation design, or fixture specifications. The related credit can inform the OPR, BOD, and
design documents.

EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering. Meeting the related credit requirements will help projects teams achieve
the ongoing commissioning portions of this prerequisite.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Renewable energy systems installed on-site must be commissioned
under this prerequisite.

EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning. If a project team wishes to pursue Enhanced Commissioning, confirm
that the CxA chosen for this prerequisite is appropriate. Additionally, since this prerequisite’s fundamental
commissioning activities and documents include the building envelope (one component of enhanced
commissioning), teams may find it feasible to pursue the related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· LEED v4 now requires the CxA to be engaged before the design development phase is complete.
·· The electrical and plumbing scopes have been expanded.
·· Elements of envelope commissioning are now incorporated in the OPR and BOD.
·· One design review and one operations and maintenance plan are now required.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, The Commissioning Process: ashrae.org

ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process: ashrae.org

NIBS Guideline 3–2012, Exterior Enclosure Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process:
wbdg.org/ccb/NIBS/nibs_gl3.pdf
 333

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
basis of design (BOD) the information necessary to accomplish the owner’s project requirements, including
system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes,
standards, regulations, and guidelines

commissioning (Cx) the process of verifying and documenting that a building and all of its systems and assemblies
are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner’s project requirements

commissioning authority (CxA) the individual designated to organize, lead, and review the completion of
commissioning process activities. The CxA facilitates communication among the owner, designer, and contractor to
ensure that complex systems are installed and function in accordance with the owner’s project requirements.

district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that

EA
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

downstream equipment the heating and cooling systems, equipment, and controls located in the project building

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING AND VERIFICATION

or on the project site and associated with transporting the thermal energy of the district energy system (DES) into
heated and cooled spaces. Downstream equipment includes the thermal connection or interface with the DES,
secondary distribution systems in the building, and terminal units.

operations and maintenance (O&M) plan a plan that specifies major system operating parameters and limits,
maintenance procedures and schedules, and documentation methods necessary to demonstrate proper operation
and maintenance of an approved emissions control device or system

owner’s project requirements (OPR) a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria determined
by the owner to be important to the success of the project

systems manual provides the information needed to understand, operate, and maintain the systems and assemblies
within a building. It expands the scope of the traditional operating and maintenance documentation and is compiled
of multiple documents developed during the commissioning process, such as the owner’s project requirements,
operation and maintenance manuals, and sequences of operation.

upstream equipment a heating or cooling system or control associated with the district energy system (DES) but
not part of the thermal connection or interface with the DES. Upstream equipment includes the thermal energy
conversion plant and all the transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal
energy to the project building or site.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EA

334
 335

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE PREREQUISITE

Minimum Energy
Performance
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

EA
INTENT

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

To reduce the environmental and economic harms of excessive energy
use by achieving a minimum level of energy efficiency for the building
and its systems.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, HEALTHCARE, WAREHOUSES AND
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY

OPTION 1. WHOLE-BUILDING ENERGY SIMULATION

Demonstrate an improvement of 5% for new construction, 3% for major renovations, or 2% for core and shell
projects in the proposed building performance rating compared with the baseline building performance rating.
Calculate the baseline building performance according to ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G,
with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), using a simulation model.
Projects must meet the minimum percentage savings before taking credit for renewable energy systems.
The proposed design must meet the following criteria:
·· compliance with the mandatory provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a
USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.);
·· inclusion of all energy consumption and costs within and associated with the building project; and
·· comparison against a baseline building that complies with Standard 90.1–2010, Appendix G, with errata (or a
USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.).

Document the energy modeling input assumptions for unregulated loads. Unregulated loads should be modeled
accurately to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building.
336

If unregulated loads are not identical for both the baseline and the proposed building performance rating, and
the simulation program cannot accurately model the savings, follow the exceptional calculation method (ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, G2.5). Alternatively, use the COMNET Modeling Guidelines and Procedures to
document measures that reduce unregulated loads.

RETAIL ONLY

For Option 1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation, process loads for retail may include refrigeration equipment,
cooking and food preparation, clothes washing, and other major support appliances. Many of the industry standard
baseline conditions for commercial kitchen equipment and refrigeration are defined in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4. No
additional documentation is necessary to substantiate these predefined baseline systems as industry standard.

OR

OPTION 2. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: ASHRAE 50% ADVANCED ENERGY DESIGN GUIDE

Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata
(or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.).
Comply with the HVAC and service water heating requirements, including equipment efficiency, economizers,
EA

ventilation, and ducts and dampers, in Chapter 4, Design Strategies and Recommendations by Climate Zone, for the
appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide and climate zone:
·· ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Small to Medium Office Buildings, for office buildings
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

smaller than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters);

·· ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Medium to Large Box Retail Buildings, for retail buildings
with 20,000 to 100,000 square feet (1 860 to 9 290 square meters);
·· ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for K–12 School Buildings; or
·· ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Large Hospitals. Over 100,000 square feet (9 290 square
meters)

For projects outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendixes B and D, to
determine the appropriate climate zone.

OPTION 3. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: ADVANCED BUILDINGS™ CORE PERFORMANCE™

GUIDE

Comply with the mandatory and prescriptive provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010, with errata
(or USGBC approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.).
Comply with Section 1: Design Process Strategies, Section 2: Core Performance Requirements, and the following
three strategies from Section 3: Enhanced Performance Strategies, as applicable. Where standards conflict, follow
the more stringent of the two. For projects outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010,
Appendixes B and D, to determine the appropriate climate zone.

3.5 Supply Air Temperature Reset (VAV)

3.9 Premium Economizer Performance
3.10 Variable Speed Control

To be eligible for Option 3, the project must be less than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters).

Note: Healthcare, Warehouse or Laboratory projects are ineligible for Option 3.

 337

DATA CENTERS

Whole-Building Energy Simulation

Demonstrate a 5% improvement in the proposed performance rating over the baseline performance rating. To
determine total energy cost savings, create two models, one for building energy cost and the other for IT equipment
energy cost. Calculate the baseline building performance according to ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010,
Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), using a
simulation model for the whole building and data center modeling guidelines.
Determine the power utilization effectiveness (PUE) value of the proposed design.

For this prerequisite, a minimum of 2% of the 5% energy savings must come from building power and cooling
infrastructure.
Projects must meet the minimum percentage savings before taking credit for renewable energy systems.
The proposed design must meet the following criteria:
·· compliance with the mandatory provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a
USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.);
·· inclusion of all energy consumption and costs within and associated with the building project; and
·· comparison against a baseline building that complies with ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010,
Appendix G, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.), and data
center modeling guidelines.

EA
For data centers, regulated energy includes cooling units for computer and data processing rooms, critical power
conditioning equipment, critical distribution equipment, heat rejection plants, and mechanical and electrical
support rooms.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Include in process loads both the unregulated load and the IT equipment load. The IT load comprises critical
systems and electrical power transformation, which may include servers, storage and networking power use, and
operations affecting monthly server CPU utilization percentages.
Develop two sets of IT load models using two scenarios, one at the maximum estimated IT load rating and the
second at the startup IT rating expected at the time of commissioning.
Document the energy modeling input assumptions for unregulated loads. Unregulated loads should be modeled
accurately to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building.
If unregulated loads are not identical for both the baseline and the proposed building performance rating, and the
simulation model cannot accurately model the savings, follow the exceptional calculation method (ANSI/ASHRAE/
IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, G2.5) to document measures that reduce unregulated loads.
338

BEHIND THE INTENT

An optimized building design can substantially reduce energy use—often for a modest initial cost with a short
payback period—when it includes load reduction, improved mechanical system efficiency, and smart operational
strategies. An integrated building design can lower operating and maintenance costs and improve indoor air quality,
thermal comfort, and access to daylight. Either a prescriptive or a performance approach may be used to attain such
results.
A simplified, prescriptive approach—applicable to smaller buildings and certain building types, such as offices,
retail stores, and schools—presents a limited set of system choices with mandatory performance characteristics.
Best suited to projects with smaller budgets, straightforward design, and packaged equipment, the prescriptive
approach provides energy-saving guidance for many simple buildings with typical energy systems. Not all projects
will be eligible for a prescriptive approach, which can be inflexible, given that all listed requirements must be
achieved to attain the prerequisite. Two prescriptive options are available, depending on building size and other
factors.
Alternatively, the performance path offers a more flexible, tailored way to evaluate the interactive effects
of efficiency measures. This option uses energy modeling to simulate the energy performance of the building
as a whole. Design teams can then assess complex systems and make efficiency trade-offs among systems and
components that the prescriptive options do not allow.
Partnering with the design team, qualified energy modelers can interpret the results of these complicated
analyses to maximize the benefits to the project. When initiated early in the design process, an energy simulation
EA

serves as a design tool instead of a compliance check. One of the greatest benefits of early energy modeling is better
integration of interrelated design issues, which encourages dialogue about assumptions concerning building
components and systems. Information on energy use and costs thereby plays a bigger role as design decisions are
made.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

ASHRAE 90.1–2010 was chosen as the standard on which to base the requirements because it continues to push
building design toward greater energy efficiency. Specifically, a study by the U.S. Department of Energy showed an
average improvement of 18% across all building types 1 when ASHRAE 90.1–2010 was applied instead of ASHRAE
90.1–2007.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE CLIMATE ZONE

Identify the project’s climate zone according to ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix B (see Further Explanation,
Climate Zone Determination).

STEP 2. REVIEW AND ADDRESS ASHRAE MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS

Early in the design process, review the mandatory provisions of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–
2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.). Read through
Sections 5.4, 6.4, 7.4, 8.4, 9.4, and 10.4 to understand how the building design must respond to these
requirements.
·· Typically, the architect is responsible for Section 5.4, Building Envelope; the mechanical engineer and
plumbing designer are responsible for Sections 6.4, HVAC, and 7.4, Service Water Heating; and the
electrical engineer is responsible for Sections 8.4, Power, and 9.4, Lighting. Compliance with Section
10.4 requires coordination across multiple disciplines.
·· Ensure that the project complies with the mandatory measures throughout the design, construction,
and commissioning process, particularly when major design decisions are implemented.
·· Confirm that compliant components are included in the final construction documents.

1. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1–2010 Final Determination Quantitative Analysis, p. 29, https://www.energycodes.gov/sites/default/files/documents/BECP_Final

QuantitativeAnalysisReport901-2010Determination_Oct2011_v00.pdf (accessed July 11, 2014).
 339

STEP 3. IDENTIFY ENERGY USE TARGET FOR BUILDING

Set an energy goal for the project early in the design process. Identifying an energy goal can help
prioritize efficiency strategies, integrate systems, reduce first costs, and improve building performance.
·· For EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Option 3, the energy performance target must be
established using ENERGY STAR’s Target Finder and must be greater than a score of 90.
·· For EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance, the target must be established as energy use intensity
(EUI) in kBtu per square foot-year (kWh per square meter-year) of source energy use.
·· Consider using ENERGY STAR’s Target Finder to develop the EUI goal that will meet the credit
requirements.

STEP 4. SELECT ONE OPTION

Select the appropriate option for the project (see Further Explanation, Selecting an Option).
Review the requirements for EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance before making a selection,
and consult Figure 1.

START

If Office, is it under
100,000 sq ft (9 290 m2)?

Is the building an If Retail, is it from

Project may follow

EA
office, retail, a school, Yes 20,000 (1 860 m2) to Yes
OPTION 2
or a hospital? 100,000 sq ft (9 290 m2)?

If Office, is it over
100,000 sq ft (9 290 m2)?

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Does the project
team want to pursue
No No the maximum points in EA Yes
Credit Optimize Energy
Performance?

Is the building
Project must follow
a warehouse or Yes
OPTION 1
laboratory?

No

Is the building under

100,000 sq ft No
(9 290 m2)?

Does the project

Yes team want to pursue EA
Yes
Credit Optimize Energy
Performance?

Project may follow

OPTION 3

Figure 1. Selecting option

340

·· Option 1 is available to all projects. Consider this option if the project team wants to continually
review the energy effects of design decisions, or if the team is pursuing EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance, since energy modeling makes the project eligible to earn more points.
°° Select Option 1 if the building or building systems are complex and cannot comply with standard
prescriptive requirements.
°° Select Option 1 if the project includes on-site renewable energy and intends to use the energy
produced for additional points in EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance.
·· Option 2 is for projects that have minimal opportunity or no need for unique designs and systems,
beyond the simple upgrades to mechanical, envelope, and lighting systems that are listed in the
ASHRAE prescriptive components. Under this option, project teams will use ASHRAE 50% Advanced
Energy Design Guide (AEDG) for HVAC and service water-heating systems. Project teams may pursue
a limited number of points under EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. The eligible project types
for Option 2 include the following:
°° Small to medium office buildings, less than 100,000 square feet (9 290 meters)
°° Medium to large box retail buildings, 20,000 to 100,000 square feet (1 860 to 9 290 square meters)
°° School buildings, any size
°° Large hospitals, more than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters)
·· Option 3 uses the Advanced Buildings™ Core Performance™ Guide and offers an alternative for
projects that are less than 100,000 square feet (9 290 square meters) and not a school, healthcare,
warehouse, or laboratory. The Core Performance Guide requires that the project comply with
prescriptive criteria and also demonstrate that a process is in place for considering energy efficiency
alternatives early in the design phase. Projects that use Option 3 cannot achieve points under EA
Credit Optimize Energy Performance.
EA

Option 1. Whole-Building Energy Simulation

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. REVIEW PREREQUISITE AND CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Thoroughly review the criteria and referenced standards for both EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance before beginning the simulation.
·· The prerequisite and credit are integrally linked. Teams that intend to pursue the credit should focus
on the expanded scope necessary for credit achievement.
·· Buildings that meet the requirements for earning points under the credit, including mandatory
requirements and excluding any credits from renewable energy, automatically achieve the
prerequisite.
·· Review the Integrative Process Credit to identify the requirements for concept-level energy
modeling.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY ENERGY MODELER

Engage an energy modeler to perform the energy analysis.
·· It is recommended that the qualifications of the energy modeler be carefully reviewed to ensure
that the simulation will be performed accurately and according to the prerequisite requirements.
·· Qualified energy modelers who have experience with numerous simulations for a variety of building
types can help the design team interpret the results to develop an efficient building design (see
Further Explanation, Energy Modeler Qualifications).

STEP 3. DEVELOP PRELIMINARY ENERGY MODEL

Consider creating preliminary energy models to analyze building design configuration and heating and
cooling load reduction strategies. The preliminary models use information from the design to create a
rough projection of energy usage in various scenarios (see Further Explanation, Developing a Preliminary
Energy Model).
·· A preliminary energy model is not required; however, developing an early model of the proposed
design will help the design team explore the energy consequences of design options and will
provide an early estimate of energy performance.
·· An analysis of various efficiency measures, which may take the form of a preliminary model, is
necessary for the achievement of the related credit.
 341

·· When evaluating energy usage in different scenarios, consider strategies for lighting and
daylighting, envelope, orientation, and passive conditioning and ventilating systems, in terms of
projected energy savings and capital costs as they relate to all building systems. If pursuing the
Integrative Process Credit, evaluate these parameters at a concept level early in design.

STEP 4. MODEL POTENTIAL HVAC SYSTEM TYPES

After building design configuration and load reduction strategies have been assessed and implemented,
use the energy model to analyze the performance of HVAC system alternatives for the project (see
Further Explanation, Modeling HVAC Systems).
·· For best HVAC system performance, ensure that the system is properly sized. More effective system
types, such as radiant heating and cooling or displacement ventilation, may be feasible when the
loads are smaller, so begin the analysis by exploring ways to reduce the load.
·· Analysis of HVAC systems in early design is optional for this prerequisite but is required for
achievement of the related credit.

STEP 5. DEVELOP ENERGY MODEL FOR PROPOSED DESIGN

Once the HVAC system and other design parameters are established, build or update the proposed
building energy model to reflect the anticipated design (see Further Explanation, Building the Proposed
Energy Model).
·· Update the proposed model to reflect changes that occur throughout the design process to
optimize energy performance and assist with design decisions.
·· Ensure that all efficiency strategies are analyzed well before design documents are finalized.

EA
STEP 6. CREATE BASELINE ENERGY MODEL
Build a baseline model that reflects the minimum requirements according to ASHRAE 90.1–2010,
Appendix G (see Further Explanation, Building the Baseline Energy Model).
·· When modifications are made to the proposed energy model, update the baseline accordingly.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

·· Consider constructing the baseline model early in the design process so that the design team
can see the effect of design changes on the percentage savings relative to ASHRAE 90.1. This will
contribute toward achieving more points under the related credit.
·· Use the energy modeling inputs and quality control checklists spreadsheet (Appendix G) to help
create the baseline model. This tool was designed to help project teams create a baseline model in
alignment with Appendix G requirements.

STEP 7. UPDATE BASELINE AND PROPOSED MODELS BASED ON FINAL DESIGN

Update the proposed energy model to reflect final construction details and specifications and make any
necessary corresponding updates to the baseline model (see Further Explanation, Finalizing the Energy
Models).
·· For elements or systems that cannot be readily modeled by the software, use the exceptional
calculation method or COMNET modeling guidelines for unregulated loads (see Further Explanation,
Exceptional Calculation Method and Common Issues with Energy Modeling).

STEP 8. DETERMINE ENERGY COST SAVINGS

Compare the proposed model with the baseline model to determine the anticipated energy cost savings
(see Further Explanation, Energy Cost Savings).
·· Ensure compliance with the prerequisite criteria for energy savings based on the building type (i.e.,
new construction, major renovation, or core and shell).
·· Energy costs offset by on-site renewable energy systems do not count toward energy savings for
compliance with the prerequisite. Renewable energy may be included in the model for achievement
of points under the related credit.

Option 2. Prescriptive Compliance: ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy

Design Guide

STEP 1. SELECT APPROPRIATE GUIDE AND ENSURE AREA REQUIREMENTS ARE MET
Choose the appropriate building type (office, retail, school, or hospital) from the ASHRAE 50% Advanced
Energy Design Guides (AEDG) and review the area requirements. If the project does not meet both
building type and size criteria, the team must select Option 1 or Option 3.
342

STEP 2. ASSESS ASHRAE PRESCRIPTIVE REQUIREMENTS

Work with the architect and engineers to assess the prescriptive requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA
Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the
U.S.) and ensure that the design will comply with envelope, HVAC, service water-heating, and lighting
requirements, per Sections 5.5, 6.5, 7.5, and 9.2.2.
The ASHRAE 90.1–2010 prescriptive requirements should not be confused with the requirements of the
AEDGs. Although projects must meet only the HVAC and service water-heating prescriptive requirements
of the applicable AEDG to earn this prerequisite, all the ASHRAE 90.1–2010 prescriptive requirements
must be met, including building envelope, HVAC, service water heating, and lighting.
·· Ensure that the lighting calculations include all task lighting except where specifically exempted by
ASHRAE 90.1, and appropriately account for the total luminaire wattage for each fixture consistent
with ASHRAE 90.1 requirements. Note that the luminaire wattage is not necessarily the sum of the
lamp wattages but accounts for the ballast factor (standard luminaires) and the total circuit power
or current-limited power (track lighting).

STEP 3. ASSESS HVAC AND SERVICE WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT PRESCRIPTIVE

REQUIREMENTS
Work with the mechanical and plumbing engineer to ensure that the project’s HVAC and service water-
heating equipment will meet all the prescriptive requirements of the applicable AEDG. Specify qualifying
equipment in the construction documents.
·· The HVAC scope includes equipment efficiency, economizers, ventilation, and ducts and dampers as
discussed in AEDG, Chapter 4, Design Strategies and Recommendations by Climate Zone.
EA

·· Consider the capacity needs for the project and identify potential equipment that will meet those
requirements. AEDG does not address some types and sizes of equipment, and these constraints
may make certain equipment inappropriate for the project.
·· As a best practice, use the AEDG compliance checklists to track the requirements, review this list
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

with the project team, and include these requirements in the OPR (see EA Prerequisite Fundamental
Commissioning and Verification).
·· Once the design is complete, a project that cannot meet all AEDG requirements will find it difficult
to switch to Option 1 or Option 3; therefore, these requirements should be established early in
design.

STEP 4. CONFIRM THAT CREDIT CRITERIA WILL BE MET, IF APPLICABLE

If the project team is planning to achieve points under the related credit, consider the appropriate
additional AEDG requirements. Points are available for complying with additional requirements not
included in this prerequisite (see EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance, Option 2).

Option 3. Prescriptive Compliance: Advanced Buildings™ Core

Performance™ Guide

STEP 1. ASSESS ASHRAE PRESCRIPTIVE REQUIREMENTS

Work with the design team to understand the prescriptive requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA
Standard 90.1–2010 to ensure that the design will comply. This also includes Sections 5.5 (envelope), 6.5
(HVAC), 7.5 (service water heating), and 9.2.2 (lighting).

STEP 2. REVIEW REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 1, DESIGN PROCESS STRATEGIES

Develop an implementation strategy for achieving the requirements for Section 1, Design Process
Strategies, as outlined in the Core Performance Guide (CPG).
·· Consider the scheduling necessary to accommodate additional meetings and design time during
the design process.
·· Consider the scheduling and resource implications of postconstruction activities, such as system
verification, operator training and documentation, and ongoing measurement.
·· Projects that select Option 3 must meet all criteria listed in Section 1 of the CPG. Many of these
criteria are components of other credits and prerequisites. Sections 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, and 1.6, for example,
are addressed elsewhere in the rating system and are therefore not described here.
·· For Sections 1.2, 1.5, and 1.6, see EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification and
EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning.
·· For Section 1.3, see the Integrative Process Credit.
 343

STEP 3. DISCUSS CPG REQUIREMENTS AND IMPLEMENTATION IN DESIGN TEAM MEETINGS

Engage the design team in discussions about meeting the requirements of all three sections of the CPG,
implementing strategies for achieving the ENERGY STAR Target Finder goal, and documenting the
process to ensure that the design intent is clearly communicated.

STEP 4. REVIEW PRESCRIPTIVE REQUIREMENTS

Starting early in the design process, review the required prescriptive elements outlined in Section 2, Core
Performance Requirements, and the three required elements from Section 3, Enhanced Performance
Strategies. Consider alternatives for lighting, HVAC, envelope, and water-heating systems
Engage appropriate design team members to confirm compliance with each prescriptive criterion.
Projects must meet all prescriptive requirements.
·· Consider the effects of continuous air barriers, below-grade exterior insulation, and enhanced
economizer operation as well as common upgrades, such as improved insulation for walls, roofs,
and windows.
·· In addition to meeting the requirements of the CPG, projects must meet all local energy code
requirements or the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010, whichever is more stringent.

STEP 5. ANALYZE PASSIVE AND ACTIVE ENERGY LOAD REDUCTION OPPORTUNITIES

As described in Section 1 of the CPG, as part of design development, analyze at least three alternative
building configurations to maximize passive reduction of building energy loads. When a preferred
configuration has been selected, perform an analysis of the mechanical systems.
·· Undertake and document load calculations. Consider referencing ASHRAE 55 to identify thermal

EA
comfort design conditions.
·· In the first iteration of load calculations, include fan-sizing calculations based on zone-by-zone
loads.
·· Perform a second set of load calculations using part-load conditions. Describe features of the

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

design that will enable efficient operation at these conditions.
·· Document the passive and active analyses and calculations according to Sections 1.3 and 1.4 of the
CPG. Teams pursuing the Integrative Process Credit do not need to document Section 1.3 separately.

STEP 6. DESIGN TO MEET SECTION 2, CORE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Select the optimal design indicated by the load calculations and confirm that each of the requirements
listed in Section 2 of the CPG are met or exceeded. If any design revisions require upgrades to envelope
or lighting components, redo HVAC load calculations.
·· Confirm with the architect that envelope-related efficiency measures included in the plans and
specifications meet or exceed the CPG requirements.
·· Confirm with the mechanical engineer that the specifications of the mechanical system meet or
exceed the CPG requirements.
·· Confirm with the electrical engineer or lighting designer that lighting power densities calculations
do not exceed the CPG requirements.
·· Sections 2.3, 2.7, 2.9, and 2.11 are addressed elsewhere in the rating system and are therefore not
covered here. However, teams must demonstrate compliance with each section and meet the LEED
requirements as well if they are more stringent than the CPG.
·· For Sections 2.3 and 2.11, see EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance and EQ
Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies.
·· Sections 2.7 and 2.9 are already mandated through the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE
90.1–2010, as indicated in the criteria for Option 3 of this prerequisite.

STEP 7. DESIGN FOR COMPLIANCE WITH SECTION 3, ENHANCED PERFORMANCE

STRATEGIES
Work with the mechanical engineer to include the following three strategies from the CPG Section 3,
Enhanced Performance Strategies, in the plans and specifications, as applicable:
·· 3.5 Supply Air Temperature Reset (VAV). Confirm that the selected air-handling units can reset
temperature and that the building automation system (BAS) can process inputs that allow proper
reset operation, such as humidity, outdoor air temperature, and VAV damper position.
·· 3.9 Premium Economizer Performance. Confirm that the controls can accommodate a dedicated
thermostat stage, that appropriate sensors are installed in the correct location within the air
streams, and that the BAS can adequately implement the requirements.
·· 3.10 Variable Speed Control. Confirm that pumps serving variable flow systems and VAV fans
having a motor of 5 horsepower (3.73 kW) or larger can be upgraded to VFD with performance
characteristics matching those listed in the standard.
344

STEP 8. INCLUDE DESIGN CRITERIA IN OWNER’S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

Develop a checklist of all the requirements needed to comply with the CPG, review this list with
the project team, and include these requirements in the OPR (see EA Prerequisite Fundamental
Commissioning and Verification).

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
If a project consists of both an existing building renovation and new construction, use Equation 1 to determine the
appropriate target percentage savings for meeting the prerequisite or achieving a specific point goal:

EQUATION 1. Target energy savings for additions to existing buildings

{ existing floor area target percentage

}{ new floor area target percentage

}
EA

target percentage = × of savings for + × of savings for new

total floor area existing building total floor area building
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CLIMATE ZONE DETERMINATION

Determining the right climate zone for the project is essential, since the requirements are specific to each climate
zone. ASHRAE 90.1–2010 defines eight climate zones (Miami is in climate zone 1; Anchorage is in climate zone 8) and
three climate types: A (moist), B (dry), and C (marine).
To find the project’s climate zone and type, consult ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix B, for the appropriate state and
county. If the project’s county is not listed, use the climate zone listed for the state as a whole. For projects outside the
U.S., see Further Explanation, International Tips.

SELECTING AN OPTION
Determining which option is most appropriate for the project requires knowing the extent of energy performance
feedback desired during the design process.
·· If detailed feedback is important during the design process, then the performance option (1) may be
appropriate. Energy modeling generates information on the potential savings associated with various efficiency
measures, both in isolation and in combination with other measures. Often this includes estimates of overall
energy use or cost savings for the project, which can help gauge progress toward an energy savings goal or
achievement of points under the related credit.
·· If the owner or design team requires only limited feedback, then one of the prescriptive options (2 or 3) may be
more appropriate. These options are best suited for projects with standard systems and provide only limited
feedback, in that all efficiency measures must be incorporated to achieve the prescribed threshold for energy
performance.

Performance path
The following factors could indicate that Option 1 would be advantageous to the project:
·· Neither of the prescriptive pathways is available to the project because of the building’s type or size.
·· The project has an HVAC system that is not covered by one of the prescriptive options.
·· The project team wants to explore the energy performance and load reduction effects of several envelope and
lighting designs and mechanical systems.
 345

·· The project team is planning to maximize the number of points available through EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance.
·· The project team wants to achieve efficiency trade-offs between systems, offsetting the lower efficiency of one
system by the improved efficiency of another.
·· The owner is interested in commercial building federal tax credits or state, local, or utility incentives that
require energy modeling. The modeling requirements for such incentive programs may be different from the
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 requirements, however.
·· The owner wants an estimate of the carbon reductions or lower operating costs (energy savings, demand
charge savings) from energy strategies, beyond a simple calculation for individual energy conservation
measures.

Before undertaking energy modeling as part of the performance path, consider the timing of the simulation
preparation and presentation, and understand the costs and benefits of energy modeling as it relates to the project.
When energy modeling is conducted late in design, its value is very limited, except as a compliance tool: the model
can only estimate the energy savings of the design.
In contrast, if initiated early and updated throughout the design process, energy modeling can be a decision-
making tool, giving feedback as part of the larger analysis of building systems and components. The best value will
be seen when energy modeling is used as a tool in an integrated design process because it enables a more informed,
cost-effective selection of efficiency strategies.
Develop clear expectations for the presentations of modeling results and their integration into the project

EA
schedule. Ideally, iterations of the model will be presented to the team during each stage of design, beginning as
early as possible, when the project goals are incorporated into preliminary plans. Updates should be presented as the
design is developed further to incorporate engineering and architectural details, and again when the construction
documents are being prepared.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Regardless of the project design phases, energy modeling can still be performed as the design progresses.
However, the potential benefit of energy modeling decreases as the design becomes finalized and opportunities for
incorporating changes are lost (see Further Explanation, Energy Modeling Process Overview). Ask the project’s energy
modeler to provide a schedule that integrates energy modeling into the design process, with appropriate milestones.
To develop an accurate and compliant energy model, it is important that the energy modeler read and understand
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 (Appendix G in particular) in its entirety, not just the portions that apply to the project. This
will enable a more complete understanding of the energy modeling protocols and methodologies required for LEED
projects (see Further Explanation, ASHRAE 90.1, 2010 versus 2007). The energy modeler should also consider reading
the ASHRAE 90.1–2010 User’s Manual, which expands on the Appendix G requirements.

Prescriptive paths
The following factors could indicate that Option 2 or Option 3 would be advantageous to the project:
·· The project type is covered under one or both prescriptive options and incorporates conventional systems and
energy efficiency strategies.
·· The project budget and timeline would benefit from simplified decision making and analysis during the project
design.
·· The additional cost of energy modeling would not be warranted.

Although the prescriptive paths are applicable to some large projects, such as schools and hospitals, they were
designed primarily for smaller projects, for which the cost of energy modeling would represent a high percentage of
the project budget.
The prescriptive paths are available only for projects that meet certain criteria. Review the project’s eligibility
for the ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guides and/or the Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide. If
neither prescriptive option fits the project type, the team must pursue Option 1.
If the project is eligible for both of the prescriptive options, determine which is more appropriate based on the
specific option requirements as well as future credit goals. The building type, for example, may not match those in
the AEDGs, or the CPG prescriptive requirements may align better with the project’s goals and design.
346

Option 2, ASHRAE 50% AEDG, delivers a 50% savings over ASHRAE 90.1–2004 when all requirements in
all categories are met. A project must meet all the HVAC and service water-heating requirements to earn the
prerequisite under Option 2.
Option 3, Advanced Buildings CPG, achieves 20% to 30% savings over ASHRAE 90.1–2004, depending on climate
zone and building type. Have the mechanical engineer review the applicable AEDG requirements for the project
type. If the project is expected to have unique systems, potential equipment is not listed, or the system capacity is
not likely to not fall within the ranges in the AEDG, then the project team cannot pursue Option 2, and must pursue
Option 1 or Option 3.

ENERGY MODELER QUALIFICATIONS

The energy modeler should have the following competences:
·· Comprehensive understanding of all the building systems related to energy performance and the information
needed to construct a model using the selected software
·· Ability to understand and explain capabilities and limitations of modeling software in regards to the strategies
the team would like to pursue
·· Awareness of how much time the design team needs to provide information, feedback, and responses to the
modeling exercise
·· Experience with design phase modeling
·· Ability to demonstrate how energy modeling can be used to perform cost benefit analysis
EA

·· Experience in modeling projects using ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G, performance rating method, or a thorough
understanding of this approach
·· Ability to perform quality control to ensure that the modeling inputs accurately reflect the proposed design
and Appendix G baseline
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Ability to evaluate the simulation results for reasonableness in relation to the energy modeling inputs,
including energy consumption by end-use, cost, and the performance savings claimed
·· Ability to validate the model through review of the actual utility bills during the occupancy phase

DEVELOPING A PRELIMINARY ENERGY MODEL

Although not required for this prerequisite, preparation of a preliminary model can facilitate achievement of the
related credit, which requires analysis of efficiency measures. Past analyses of similar buildings or published data,
such as the AEDGs, may also be used to guide decision making, though the results will be less project-specific.
A preliminary model includes design elements identified during schematic design and design development and
generates a preliminary estimate of energy consumption and an end-use profile.
Evaluate how changes to the following elements affect HVAC sizing, energy consumption, lighting, renewable
energy opportunities, and other aspects of energy performance:
·· Program and operations (multifunctioning spaces, operating schedules, space allotment per person,
teleworking, reduction of building area, operations and maintenance)
·· Site conditions (shading, exterior lighting, hardscape, landscaping, adjacent site conditions)
·· Massing and orientation
·· Envelope (insulation values, window-to-wall ratios, glazing characteristics, shading, and window operability)
·· Lighting levels and interior surface reflectance
·· Thermal comfort range options
·· Passive conditioning and natural ventilation strategies

When examining alternative strategies, also consider the effect on human performance. For example, increasing
daylighting may cause glare.

Typical steps in preliminary energy modeling are as follows:

1. Gather information about building loads and systems. Investigate case studies of similar building in similar
climates and contact local utilities for energy rates and demand charges. Determine applicable building energy
codes, including any local variations. For existing buildings, review drawings, specifications, operations and
 347

maintenance manuals, commissioning reports, energy audit reports, and utility bills. The AEDGs may provide
useful information regarding design practices specific to building types and climate zones.
2. Engage the design team early to investigate opportunities for load reduction. Coordinate with the architect
to identify options for envelope insulation values, building orientation, and shading—variables that can
affect load, especially on externally load-dominated buildings. Some strategies, such as building massing and
orientation, are most effectively evaluated during the concept phase of design, before the preliminary energy
model, and is not required for this prerequisite. However, a concept-level mass model is a component of the
Integrative Process Credit.
3. Analyze several design alternatives to investigate the combined load reduction potential of multiple
strategies. How strategies alter energy consumption varies by building type and climate zone. Examine energy
use by end use and heating and cooling load distribution to identify effective load reduction and energy
efficiency opportunities.
4. Investigate interconnected strategies. The additional costs of high-performance envelope elements may
be offset by smaller, less costly HVAC systems. For example, energy modeling could evaluate the effect of a
fenestration and shading configuration, with daylight harvesting controls, on cooling, heating and fan loads,
HVAC system capacities, and total building energy consumption and cost. A life-cycle cost analysis for this
scenario would indicate the net increase or decrease in capital costs and the potential savings over multiple
years. When evaluating the capital cost, consider trade-offs between the higher capital cost for the shading and
daylight harvesting controls and the lower capital costs for a smaller HVAC system.
5. Use the model to compare potential performance with the project’s energy goals.

EA
MODELING HVAC SYSTEMS
Although not required for this prerequisite, an evaluation of HVAC system alternatives can help the design team

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

optimize energy consumption. This exercise is a requirement for achievement of points under the related credit.
The modeler should analyze the performance of several efficient HVAC systems to understand the potential
energy savings associated with each one. This information enables the design team to compare life-cycle costs,
rather than just first costs. The life-cycle cost analysis should follow the analysis of load reductions, which may affect
the life-cycle cost.
The chosen HVAC system can then be further optimized through additional energy modeling that analyzes the
potential efficiency gains of the system components and/or assigns different systems to different zones.
Typical steps for HVAC system type modeling include the following:
1. Coordinate with the mechanical engineer, since decreased loads may affect mechanical system sizing or
potential system types. Compare high-efficiency HVAC systems with typical systems for reductions in
operating costs (energy, maintenance). Weigh this against the higher first costs of more efficient equipment.
Evaluate the potential for reducing the first cost of HVAC equipment by reducing the loads. Include not only
the smaller equipment but also the infrastructure related to HVAC—ductwork, piping, controls, and in some
cases, building volume or floor area for these components.
2. For the selected system, analyze and optimize additional HVAC energy efficiency measures, including
equipment efficiency, energy recovery, economizers, and demand-controlled ventilation.
3. Coordinate with the architect and structural engineer, since different system types may influence space,
height, or structural requirements. For example, under-floor air-conditioning may influence the exterior
envelope design and could increase or decrease the height of the building.

BUILDING THE PROPOSED ENERGY MODEL

An energy model of the proposed design is required for prerequisite compliance under Option 1. A team that has
already prepared a preliminary model may update it to reflect the newest design information throughout the project.
Create or update proposed building characteristics based on the latest information and specifications on
systems, assemblies, and equipment in the current design. This can be accomplished as early as design development
to estimate projected savings, and later updated when the construction documents are complete. Then analyze
348

remaining efficiency strategies that the team would like to consider before the design documents are finalized. For
example, the proposed energy model could be used to evaluate the performance and cost implications of value
engineering decisions.

BUILDING THE BASELINE ENERGY MODEL

Developing a baseline energy model is a detailed process that requires a good working knowledge of ASHRAE 90.1–
2010, Appendix G, and familiarity with the relevant sections of the standard. The baseline model represents a typical
design for a building of the same size and use as the proposed building. It meets but does not exceed the performance
requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and is used as a comparison to calculate the percentage energy cost savings for
the project design.
In general, baseline development begins by changing the inputs for all the components, assemblies, and systems
of the proposed design energy model to minimally compliant input values, in accordance with 90.1–2010 Appendix
G. Determine or update baseline values for each system, assembly, and piece of equipment for the appropriate
climate zone, building type, and fuel type(s).
If the energy simulation software automates some or all the baseline generation, review the automated baseline
model inputs against the expected baseline values and confirm consistency (see Further Explanation, Common Issues
with Energy Modeling).
Preparation of the initial baseline model is best undertaken during the design development phase, after major
design decisions have been made, so that modeling can evaluate whether the project is likely to meet energy savings
targets (or achieve points under the related credit). The baseline model will typically need to be updated based on
EA

the final project design.

FINALIZING THE ENERGY MODELS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Update the proposed model based on the information and specifications for systems, assemblies, and equipment
in the final construction documents. Confirm that all efficiency measures claimed have been incorporated into the
design. Include all energy consumption and costs within and associated with the building project.
Ensure that assumptions used in earlier versions of the model are replaced with actual data from the
construction documents. For example, if proposed chiller control sequences were assumed in the preliminary
model, use the actual control sequences from the construction documents for the final version. Update the baseline
model as necessary based on the project’s final construction documents, including changes in occupant density,
required outdoor airflow, thermostat setpoints, and system or fuel types. The model will have to be updated again if
any changes during construction affect efficiency measures.
Schedules must be modeled correctly for both the proposed and baseline models (see Further Explanation,
Schedules).
Perform a quality control check to verify that all Appendix G and LEED modeling guidelines have been followed.
Record both the proposed and baseline values in the Appendix G energy modeling inputs and quality control
checklists spreadsheet. This record of energy conservation measures is a good tool for confirming that proposed
building characteristics and baseline values have been selected properly.
Document the input assumptions for receptacle and process loads. These loads should be modeled accurately
to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building. Per ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G3.1-12, receptacle
and process loads must be modeled identically in both the proposed and baseline models, unless there are specific
efficiency requirements listed in Sections 5 through 10 that allow a less stringent baseline requirement (e.g., motor
efficiency).
If the project claims savings for variations in power requirements, schedules, or control sequences, the burden
of proof is on the project team to document that the design represents a significant departure from conventional
practice. If an energy efficiency measure cannot be explicitly modeled, the team may use Section G2.5, Exceptional
Calculation Method (see Further Explanation, Exceptional Calculation Method).
Verify the final energy cost savings. Evaluate the energy savings by end use for reasonableness based on the
differences in the modeling inputs between the baseline and proposed models (see Further Explanation, Energy Cost
Savings). Use Figure 2 to help verify proposed energy savings.
 349

PROJECT & CONTENT

Check Space Summary for Check for simulation program,

the building size, space types, climate zone, weather file, Check total points Check narratives are
conditioned vs. unconditioned reference standard used, heating attempted and Target included describing
spaces. Check the number of source and whether the project finder score special conditions
stories includes existing renovation.

INPUTS

Check HVAC and Evaluate

Check Building Check Lighting Check Process special cases
DNW system
Envelope input input Energy input (DES & CHP)
input

OUTPUTS

Check unmet load hours and Check simulation output to verify Verify if the results of 4 orientations
simulation output reports consistency were reported

END-USE CONSISTENCY

EA
Evaluate whether Identify efficiency
Verify that end- Verify whether Evaluate whether
energy consumption measures and verify
use demand and energy consumption and
and demand differences if savings are justified
energy use are consumption is demand savings are
between proposed and for the measures with

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

consistent with reasonable for consistent between
baseline cases are highest absolute
inputs major end uses linked end-uses
justified savings

BUILDING LEVEL CONSISTENCY SPECIAL OUTPUTS

Cross-check For each fuel type, if cost and enery savings Review Verify
with benchmark differ significantly, verify that virtual utility rates exceptional renewable energy
consumption are justified based on utility rate schedule calculations calculations

Figure 2. Steps to verify proposed energy savings Model Inputs Model Outputs Consistency
350

SCHEDULES
For optimal results, ensure that the schedule inputs into the model accurately reflect the project building’s
operation. If anticipated operating schedules are unknown, helpful guidance for determining model inputs for
occupancy, lighting, HVAC system, receptacle power, and service hot water consumption values can be found in the
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 User’s Manual, Appendix G.
Schedules must be identical in both the baseline and the proposed cases unless documented in an exceptional
calculation or specifically allowed by ASHRAE 90.1–2010 Appendix G (see Further Explanation, Exceptional
Calculation Method).
Certain space types may require specific schedules based on anticipated operation and may vary by space type.
For example, a server room may have different temperature schedules than an occupied space.
Exceptions to Section G3.1.1 may require modeling of a different baseline HVAC system type in spaces with
schedules that vary significantly from the rest of the building.
Different lighting schedules may be used for a project with both office and retail occupancy when the space-by-
space method is used or when the building area method is used with multiple building type classifications. Different
schedules cannot be used, however, if an average lighting power density is applied to the whole project.
Ventilation and infiltration schedules should also be adjusted to ensure the same amount of outside air delivery
and infiltration between baseline and proposed cases, except for specific exceptions allowed by Appendix G.

ENERGY COST SAVINGS

For EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance, modeled energy
EA

savings must be reported on an energy cost basis using actual utility rates or the state’s average energy prices.
Using energy cost savings as a metric for overall building energy efficiency is important for several reasons. It
aligns with the energy modeling procedures in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, and provides a uniform metric for all
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

fuel types. It captures the relative effects of various efficiency measures on energy demand and long-term operating
costs—valuable metrics for the owner in determining the overall cost-effectiveness of selected efficiency strategies.
And finally, the energy cost savings metric can help designers understand energy consumption because in many
cases, cost and carbon emissions of each fuel source are closely correlated.

EXCEPTIONAL CALCULATION METHOD

In ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, Section G2.5, an exceptional calculation method (ECM) is used when the
simulation program that is generating the energy model is incapable of modeling a certain design, material, or device
of the proposed design. LEED has adopted and slightly expanded use of exceptional calculations to cover any savings
claimed for a nonregulated load, defined as any building load, end use, or control without an Appendix G baseline
modeling requirement that allows the load, end use, or control to be modeled differently in the proposed and
baseline buildings.

Energy savings limitations

Section G2.5 indicates that exceptional calculation methods cannot constitute more than half of the difference (i.e.,
savings) between the proposed and baseline buildings. This will be enforced for the ASHRAE definition of an ECM.
However, in LEED, this rule will not be applied to savings attempted on nonregulated loads unless the nonregulated
load cannot be modeled in the simulation program.

Elements that cannot be simulated by modeling program

One type of ECM is creating a representation of an element that cannot be modeled directly by the chosen energy
modeling software. Examples include innovative external shading devices, under-floor air systems, and the heat
recovery performance of a variable refrigerant flow system. Whether a particular strategy is considered an ECM may
depend on the modeling program and whether the energy modeler can simulate an approximation of the system in
the software. If the methodology for approximation has not been previously published by ASHRAE or USGBC as an
acceptable modeling path, it is the responsibility of the energy modeler to submit a narrative explanation describing
the simulation and providing the calculations for the energy savings if necessary.
 351

Documentation for nonregulated loads

Examples of nonregulated load savings include manufacturing equipment not regulated by 90.1–2010, a unique
manufacturing process, or any refrigeration or kitchen equipment (including operation) not specifically covered
in the LEED Appendix 3. Retail Process Load Baselines, Tables 1–4. Energy savings for nonregulated loads require
additional documentation. ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G3.1-12, indicates that “variations of the power requirements,
schedules, or control sequences” are allowed by the “rating authority,” provided the proposed design “represents
a significant verifiable departure from documented conventional practice.” Project teams must document the
following information to prove that the savings represent a departure from conventional practice and are not
required by local code:
·· A narrative describing all baseline and proposed assumptions
·· The calculation methodology used to determine the savings
·· A document verifying that the efficiency measure is not conventional practice. This is generally accomplished
either by documenting the baseline comparison system/schedule/control as standard practice, or by showing
that the savings claimed for the efficiency measure are incentivized by a local utility program. Examples of
documents used to verify that the efficiency measure is not conventional practice may include the following:
°° A recent study with researched tabulations or monitored data establishing standard practice for the given
application in similar newly constructed facilities
°° A new-construction utility or government program that provides incentives for the measure
°° A document showing the systems used to perform the same function in similar facilities built within the

EA
past five years; these systems are treated as the baseline system in the analysis, and evidence must show how
the energy use for the baseline and proposed buildings is determined

Alternatively, the project team may use any of the prescriptive requirements from ASHRAE 90.1–2010 as the baseline

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

requirement without further justification to substantiate conventional practice, but only for the specific component.

Additional guidance
Sources of typical efficiency measures include the COMNET manual, which has a calculation methodology for
determining savings for process or receptacle loads, especially savings from ENERGY STAR equipment. These are
offered in Section 6.4.5, Receptacle and Process Loads, and Appendix B.
Always provide a narrative explanation of the methodology used to calculate savings for exceptional calculation
methods. Separate calculations are not necessary when the energy saving are found easily in the modeling results.

Changes from earlier versions of ASHRAE and LEED

Some efficiency measures that no longer need to be modeled using an exceptional calculation method include garage
fan demand-controlled ventilation, low-flow water fixtures, kitchen equipment, and kitchen ventilation.
·· Enclosed parking garage ventilation. Modulating fan airflow rates based on contaminant levels are now
required to be installed, unless certain exceptions apply, per Section 6.4.3.4.5. Any design that goes beyond
these minimum baseline requirements may be counted. Two factors can affect the energy consumption:
°° The baseline fan power (in energy per flow) must be consistent with the proposed installed fan power at
full-load conditions. The project team may count higher fan motor efficiencies in the proposed building.
°° The ventilation rate, and thus fan power, can also be reduced if the project team’s design allows the fans
to reduce the ventilation rate below 50%. The baseline ventilation rate must be set at the minimum
requirements of ASHRAE 62.1–2010, which is 0.75 cfm per square foot (3.8 L/s per square meter). This must
be the baseline ventilation rate, regardless of any local code.

The same requirements apply to demand-controlled ventilation for outdoor air control sequences that provide
ventilation for building occupants.
·· Low-flow service water-heating fixtures. The flow rates given in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction
set the allowable baseline values. Provide sufficient information to justify energy savings from efficient fixtures
and appliances that use hot water.
·· Kitchen equipment. All project types may count energy savings from efficient refrigeration equipment,
cooking and food preparation, clothes washing, and other major support appliances. LEED Appendix 3. Retail
352

Process Load Baselines Tables 1–4, defines the baseline conditions. Provide sufficient information to justify
all the savings. Savings for a piece of equipment (or its operation) not covered in Appendix 3 must be modeled
using the ECM described above.
·· Kitchen ventilation. ASHRAE 90.1–2010 now addresses kitchen ventilation, so it is no longer considered
a nonregulated load. Section G3.1.1, exception (d) requires a kitchen with more than 5,000 cfm (2360 L/s)
of total exhaust airflow to be modeled with its own separate system. Include demand ventilation on 75% of
the exhaust air, and reduce exhaust and replacement air by 50% for half the kitchen occupied hours in the
baseline design. Additionally, the maximum exhaust flow rates for hoods must meet the requirements of
Section 6.5.7.1.3. The exhaust flow rate must be modeled identically in the baseline and proposed case at design
conditions unless Appendix G indicates otherwise. Any design that goes beyond these minimum baseline
requirements may be counted. Provide sufficient information to justify all kitchen ventilation savings, with
consistent assumptions and operating schedules. Project teams that count kitchen ventilation savings must
separate the savings from each end use (e.g., fan, heating, cooling) when reporting the energy outputs.

ASHRAE 90.1-2010 VERSUS 2007

The referenced standard for building the baseline model for this prerequisite has been updated to ASHRAE 90.1–
2010, which represents a substantial increase in efficiency from the previous version, ASHRAE 90.1–2007. The major
changes are described in Tables 1 and 2.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 353

TABLE 1. Comparison of ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory requirements, 2007 and 2010

Building envelope requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

Air barriers
NA Continuous on entire building envelope
5.4.3.1.2

HVAC requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

Garage fans Auto-adjust fan speed with contaminant

NA
6.4.3.4.5 levels to 50% or less of capacity

Chiller efficiencies
NA Increased for all chiller types
6.4.1.1

Required to have VFD or two-speed motors

Single-zone VAV
NA for DX >9.2 tons (32.3 kW), and chilled
6.4.3.10
water AHUs >5 hp (3.7 kW) fan motors

Water and evaporatively cooled unitary

AC units and heat pump efficiency NA 3–5% more stringent
Table 6.8.1A and B

PTAC and PTHP efficiency increased

12 EER (3.52 COP) 13.8 EER (4.05 COP)
6.4.1.1; Table 6.8.1D

Water to water heat pump, CRAC, and

VRF

EA
Not covered Now covered by 90.1
Table 6.8.1B; Table 6.8.1K; Table 6.8.1J
respectively

Power requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

At least 50% of all receptacles installed in
Automatic receptacle control
private offices, open offices, and computer
8.4.2 NA
classrooms must be controlled by automatic
control device

Lighting requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

Alterations that involve less than 50% of

connected lighting load in space or area need
Threshold for retrofit compliance
not comply with lighting power density or Less than 10% of connected load
9.1.2
auto-shutoff requirements, provided that such
alterations do not increase installed LPD

Lighting power density Reduced; average 17% in space types, more

NA
9.4.5; 9.4.6 for retail display lighting

Automatic shutoff
Required in buildings >5,000 ft2 (465 m2) Required in all spaces
9.4.1.1

All spaces are required to have vacancy

Additional control All spaces to have general lighting controls,
sensors or occupancy sensors to 50% or
9.4.1 manual or automatic
less of lighting power

Classrooms, conference rooms, and break More space types added, including offices,
Space controls
rooms must have occupancy sensor or time restrooms, dressing rooms, and training,
9.4.1.2
switch that turns light off within 30 minutes copy, and storage rooms

Spaces must have controls that reduce

Light level reduction
None power level by 30–70% of connected load in
9.4.1.2
addition to off mode.

Automatic, multilevel daylighting controls

Lighting in daylit zones
None installed in sidelit areas >250 ft2 (23 m2) and
9.4.1.4
toplit areas >900 ft2 (84 m2)

Auto-shutoff, power must be reduced by

Parking garage lighting
None 30% when no motion for 30 minutes,
9.4.1.3
auto-daylight control on perimeter

Exterior lighting Lighting must be controlled by At night light must either be off or operated
9.4.1.7 photosensor or time switch at reduced level

Functional testing
None All installed controls must be tested
9.4.4
354

TABLE 2. Comparison of ASHRAE 90.1 prescriptive requirements, 2007 and 2010

Requirement ASHRAE 90.1–2007 ASHRAE 90.1–2010

For all HVAC system types,

Economizer exemptions Only for unitary equipment, EER/SEER (COP/
must meet % efficiency improvement,
Table 6.3.2 SCOP) rating
now required in most climate zones

Lighting power density Reduced, average 17% in space types,

NA
9.2.1 more for retail display lighting

COMMON ISSUES WITH ENERGY MODELING

Thoroughly review both ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and the 90.1–2010 User’s Manual. The manual presents extended
explanations and also includes examples of the concepts and requirements within the standard. Table 3 addresses
many of the most common issues but is not a comprehensive list.

TABLE 3. Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section

Scope

Inclusion of Unfinished spaces must be included in the energy model if they are part of the project scope of work. In core and
unfinished spaces shell projects, a large portion of the space may be unfinished; in new construction and major renovation projects
in project scope these spaces must not make up more than 40% of the total space. In addition, all projects other than core and shell
that have incomplete spaces must submit a letter of commitment, signed by the owner, confirming that the remaining
EA

incomplete spaces will satisfy the requirements of each prerequisite and credit achieved by this project if and when
completed by the owner.

Modeling HVAC, Refer to ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Tables G3.1.6(c), G3.1.10(c) and (d), and G3.1.11(c), for unfinished space modeling
lighting, hot requirements. If a lighting, HVAC, or service hot water system has not yet been designed, the system required in the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

water systems baseline building for that unfinished space must also be modeled in the proposed building. Refer to Table G3.1.8 on
for unfinished how to model thermal zones for such space.
spaces Example 1. A two-story office building has a ground-floor retail area that is entirely unfinished. The building contains
a chase for future ductwork and a location on the roof for the mechanical equipment for the future tenant, but no
system exists or has been specified.
In this case, the proposed HVAC system for that space must be modeled using the same HVAC system type, capacity
ratios, efficiencies, and controls as those modeled for the baseline building.
Example 2. The same hypothetical two-story office building now includes chilled and hot water connections for the
future unfinished retail space. A portion of the HVAC system has been designed.
The proposed building may be modeled as a system that uses the chilled and heating hot water (e.g., 4-pipe fan coil
unit). However, because the air-handling units and terminal distribution have not yet been designed, the cooling and
heating capacities, design fan volume, minimum volume, fan power, fan controls, etc., must be modeled identically in
both the baseline and proposed model, and equal to the requirements of the baseline model.

Additions to Project teams wishing to certify an addition to an existing building must follow the Appendix G requirements in Table
existing buildings G3.1.2, the most important of which is (b). If the existing building will be excluded, then the HVAC system serving the
addition to the building must be entirely separate from the systems serving the existing building. Refer to the table
for all requirements.

Building envelope

Baseline Construction type and maximum U-factors for baseline walls, roofs, and floors are specified by Table G3.1-5 Baseline
building (b). The constructions for walls, roofs, and floors are specified by the standard and do not depend on the proposed
envelope design. For example, if a building will have concrete masonry walls, the baseline model will still have steel-framed walls.

Existing building For an existing building that was conditioned before major renovation and will be conditioned postrenovation, the
envelope baseline building envelope should reflect the existing conditions, before the scope of work (Table G3.1-5 Baseline (f)).
However, for an existing building (or spaces in the building) that was previously unconditioned and is being renovated
to include conditioning, the baseline building envelope (or the envelope for any previously unconditioned spaces in the
building) must be modeled as if the building is new construction (i.e., according to Table 5.5).

Proposed model The proposed model must reflect the building as designed or built. To the extent possible, construction assemblies
U-values need to match the dimension and U-value inputs in the model.
Apply Appendix A to the proposed envelope. Provide the assembly U-value, rather than a point U-value, by
determining the overall construction assembly U-value that takes into account for thermal bridging as shown in
Appendix A.
Ensure that window U-values are input as the assembly U-value, which takes into account the U-value of the framing
system. The center-of-glass value is not acceptable.

Baseline model For the baseline envelope properties, use the semiheated requirements to model surfaces that adjoin unconditioned
U-values, semi- spaces to conditioned spaces (e.g., a wall separating a semiheated warehouse from a conditioned office) or
exterior surfaces semiheated space to conditioned space (e.g., the slab separating an unconditioned parking garage from the
conditioned ground floor of the building). Figure 5.1 in 90.1–2010 illustrates this requirement.
 355

TABLE 3 (CONTINUED). Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section

HVAC

Baseline HVAC The HVAC system for the baseline model must be selected based on requirements in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Section
system selection G3.1.1. The system selected will depend on the proposed building type, size, and heat source. Building type must
be based on predominant conditions (i.e., those that account for the majority or plurality of the building area), and
no space types can be excluded from the model. Building size is determined from conditioned area. Once the floor
area of the predominant condition is known, consult Table G3.1.1A to determine the predominant baseline HVAC
system.
Section G3.1.1 also specifies whether HVAC systems must be modeled with a system per floor or a system per
thermal block. Systems 1–4 are modeled with one system per thermal block and systems 5–10 with one system per
floor, using systems 9 and 10 where applicable.
When multiple floors have identical thermal blocks, those floors may be combined in the energy model.
Note that a floor with a roof and a floor without a roof do not have identical thermal blocks and cannot be
combined. A multistory building with identical thermal blocks would need to be modeled with no fewer than three
floors: a ground floor, a middle floor with appropriate multiplier, and a top floor.
There are six exceptions to the baseline HVAC system determination. These exceptions are mandatory and must be
taken if they are applicable to the project.
G3.1.1 exception (a). Check for nonpredominant conditions, such as nonresidential in a primarily residential
building, or where a portion of a building is supplied by electric heat but the rest is from fossil fuels. The area of
nonpredominant conditions can be deducted from the total area when determining the baseline HVAC system. If
nonpredominant conditions apply to more than 20,000 ft2 (1860 m2), use exception (a) and select an additional
baseline HVAC system type to serve those spaces.
Example. A 210,000 ft2 (19 510 m2) multifamily high-rise has 23,000 ft2 (2140 m2) of ground-floor retail space. The
residential units are served by heat pump units with supplemental electric heat, and the retail areas are served by a

EA
split DX unit with fossil fuel furnace. The required baseline HVAC system for the residential spaces would be System
2–PTHP, but for the retail areas it would be System 3–Packaged DX with fossil fuel furnace, since the nonresidential
spaces meet the 20,000 ft2 (1860 m2) exception (a) in G3.1.1.
G3.1.1 exception (b). If using systems 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10, individual zones with atypical thermal loads or occupancy
profiles must be modeled with individual single-zone systems of type 3 or 4, according to exception (b). Examples

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

for this include computer server rooms, natatoriums, and school gymnasiums.
If this exception is not properly incorporated into the baseline model, the model results may show an unusually
high number of unmet load hours or significantly oversize the baseline case systems. A good practice is to check
the baseline output reports and verify that the thermal loads for each thermal block do not vary by more than 10
Btuh/ft2 (31.5 W/m2) from the average of the other thermal zones on the floor, and adjust the baseline model as
necessary to include this exception.

Baseline HVAC G3.1.1 exception (c). If laboratory spaces in the building have a total laboratory exhaust rate greater than 5,000 cfm
system selection (2360 L/s), a single system of type 5 or 7 must be modeled to serve only those spaces. Section G3.1.2.11 requires
(laboratory spaces) exhaust air energy recovery in accordance with Section 6.5.6.1, which is likely to include laboratories.

Baseline HVAC G3.1.1 exception (d). If kitchens in the building have a total exhaust hood airflow rate greater than 5,000 cfm (2360
system selection L/s), system type 5 or 7 must be modeled and must include demand-controlled ventilation.
(kitchens)

Baseline HVAC G3.1.1 exception (e). Heating-only systems serving rooms not exhausting or transferring air from mechanically
system selection: cooled spaces, such as storage rooms, stairwells, or mechanical rooms, should be modeled as system 9 or 10.
heated-only G3.1.1 exception (f). When the predominant system is type 9 or 10, any fully conditioned spaces (such as an small,
storage or fully conditioned office in a heated-only warehouse) should be modeled using the appropriate system type for the
circulation spaces size, number of floors, occupancy type, and heating type for the nonpredominant area of the building.

Baseline HVAC Any project with a combination of fossil fuel and electric heat serving the same space must use the fossil fuel
system fuel type baseline HVAC system (systems 1, 3, 5, and 7) unless it meets one of the exceptions to G3.1.1.
Example. A building has been designed with electric water-source heat pumps for the space loads. A 100% outdoor
air gas-fired rooftop unit provides ventilation. The spaces are served by both electric heating from the heat pumps
and ventilation air from the gas-fired unit; therefore, the spaces are considered hybrid heating and must model the
baseline HVAC system type as “Fossil Fuel, Fossil/Electric Hybrid, and Purchased Heat” (from Table G3.1.1a).
In the case of electric heating equipment designed with a fossil fuel preheat coil, or a backup fossil fuel boiler, the
intent is that the equipment will be used; thus it is considered hybrid heating, and the team must use the fossil fuel
baseline heating system.
356

TABLE 3 (CONTINUED). Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section

HVAC (Continued)

Baseline fan power The baseline fan power is calculated according to Section G3.1.2.10, which indicates that the system fan power
is based on the supply airflow and distributed to supply, return, exhaust, and relief fans. If the proposed system
has additional return, exhaust, and/or relief fans, the team may not adjust the baseline model to account for the
additional fan power. Section G3.1.2.10 also includes Table G3.1.2.9, whose value A is calculated according to Section
6.5.3.1.1 using pressure drop adjustments. Pressure drop adjustments may not be taken for system types 1, 2, 9, or
10.
The calculations are straightforward, but a common issue involves pressure credits. Table G3.1.2.9 allows pressure
drop adjustments for evaporative coolers or heat recovery devices only when they are required in the baseline
building system. Also, the pressure drop adjustment is applicable only to the design airflow through each device.
For example, if only the ventilation air is filtered with a MERV 13 filter, then only the ventilation airflow rate may
apply the 0.9 in. w.c. (224.2 Pa) adjustment, not the entire supply airflow rate.
Pressure credit may be taken only for those systems present in the proposed building.
For fully ducted return or exhaust air systems, the credit for fan power allowance cannot be based on plenum
return. The credit can be applied only when the return is fully ducted; systems that have a combination of ducted
and nonducted may not use this pressure credit.
For return or exhaust airflow control devices (which maintain a specific pressurization relative to other spaces),
a project team claiming this credit in spaces other than a laboratory, hospital, or similar space type must provide
evidence of this control device. The credit may be applied only for the amount of airflow passing through the
control device.
A project team using the modeling software to automatically determine the baseline building fan power must
ensure that the correct allowance has been calculated. Publicly available fan power calculators can be used to verify
and determine the correct fan power.
EA

Proposed HVAC Table G3.1.1(a) requires that the proposed building be consistent with the design documents, including envelope,
system sizing lighting, HVAC, and service hot water systems. Additionally, all end-use load components within and associated
with the building must be modeled.
Table G3.1.10(b) requires that the HVAC model be consistent with the design documents. All modeled HVAC system
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

parameters (e.g., fan volumes, fan powers, efficiencies, heating and cooling capacities) must be consistent with the
mechanical schedules and drawings. The simulation should never be allowed to automatically size the HVAC system
for the proposed case model when there is a complete design.

Heat pumps Section G3.1.3.1 describes the operation of baseline building heat pumps. The heat pump and auxiliary heat should
(operation) operate together at low-temperature conditions, with the compressor as the lead machine. The outside air cutoff
temperature for the compressor must be no greater than the temperature associated with the low-temperature
heating efficiency requirements of Table 6.8.1B (17°F) (–8.3°C). The HSPF rating for packaged heat pump units
smaller than 65,000 Btu/h (19 kW) and packaged terminal heat pumps accounts for electric auxiliary operation
and includes test conditions at 17 degrees F (–8.3°C). The heat pump efficiency curves in the model should reflect
the heat pump ratings that account for simultaneous operation of the electric resistance and heat pump elements
below 40°F (4.4°C).

Unitary heating and Use the correct Table 6.8.1 to determine equipment efficiencies:
cooling efficiencies Table 6.8.1A for system types 3, 5 and 6
Table 6.8.1B (with electric resistance heating section) for system Type 4
Table 6.8.1D for system types 1 and 2
These efficiencies are based on the capacity of each system individually, not a sum of all units. It is important
to correctly adjust efficiencies of each piece of equipment to separate fan power at AHRI rating conditions, per
Section G3.1.2.1. Most simulation software programs can perform this step automatically.

Humidity controls Humidification must be modeled identically in the baseline and the proposed models, since it is not addressed in
Appendix G. Use the exceptional calculation method if claiming savings.
If the proposed design includes dehumidification controls, they must be modeled as designed. Dehumidification
controls may be modeled in the baseline only if one of the exceptions to Section 6.5.2.3 applies. Exception (d) for
process dehumidification does not apply to computer rooms.
Table G3.1.4 requires that identical schedules be used in both models, and this includes humidity setpoints. A
problem may arise if the proposed building has a dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS) that maintains proper
humidity. PTAC or small DX systems in the baseline design may not be able to maintain both temperature and
humidity simultaneously in the same way that the proposed system can. The project team may then incur a penalty
for higher humidity levels in the baseline building.
In this situation, model a DOAS in the baseline design using the same volume of outdoor air as for the proposed
design, but with the same efficiency and efficiency curves as the baseline HVAC systems. Additionally, the baseline
fan power allowance would be separated between the DOAS and the baseline system using the same ratio as the
proposed system.
 357

TABLE 3 (CONTINUED). Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section

Ventilation

Ventilation rate Table G3.1.10(b) requires that the proposed building ventilation rate be consistent with the rate indicated on the
inputs mechanical schedule. Section G3.1.2.6 requires that the ventilation rate be identical between the proposed and
baseline buildings and states that reduced ventilation “is not considered an opportunity for energy savings under
the Performance Rating Method”; ventilation is energy neutral, per the User’s Manual. However, there are exceptions
to this requirement.

Ventilation (above Exception (c) penalizes projects for providing more ventilation air to the space than is required by ASHRAE 62.1–
minimum required) 2010 or a local code, whichever requires more ventilation air. If the proposed project provides outdoor air in excess
of the amount required, the baseline must be modeled with the required ventilation rates, which will be lower than
the proposed ventilation rate. This creates an “energy penalty” for the additional fan and conditioning energy.
For various reasons, however, it is common practice to specify slightly more ventilation air than required. A project
team that has specified up to 5% more total ventilation air than required may model identical ventilation rates.
If exhaust requirements dictate the amount of ventilation air that must be provided to the building, as indicated in
Section 5.9.2 of ASHRAE 62.1–2010, provide an explanation, documentation, and calculations as necessary to show
that exhaust requirements exceed the minimum ventilation flows, and model the ventilation rate identically in both
buildings.

Demand-control Exception (a) allows credit for demand-control ventilation when it is not required by Sections 6.3.2(p) or 6.4.3.9.
ventilation If demand-control ventilation is being modeled for credit, Table G3.1.4 (baseline) indicates that schedules may be
and nighttime modified and allowed to differ to take it into account, provided the schedules are approved by the rating authority.
ventilation In this instance, project teams must submit both proposed and baseline ventilation schedules.
requirements ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.4.3.4.3, requires shutoff dampers that automatically shut during unoccupied periods when
the HVAC system cycles on and off to meet loads except when ventilation reduces energy costs (e.g., night purge),

EA
or when ventilation must be supplied to meet local requirements (such as minimum flow requirements for hospital
or chemical storage rooms during unoccupied periods).
Therefore, the demand-control ventilation schedules presented for both the baseline and proposed cases should
show zero outside airflow during unoccupied periods unless the supplemental documentation supports that
ventilation during unoccupied periods reduces energy cost or is required by local code, in which case the baseline

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

and proposed ventilation rates during unoccupied periods must be modeled with identical flow rates. Additionally,
the baseline ventilation flow must be modeling using minimum required rates.

Ventilation (zone Exception (b) allows for lower ventilation rates in the proposed building for efficient ventilation system designs that
air distribution have high zone air distribution effectiveness (Ez >1.0), as determined by ASHRAE 62.1–2010.
effectiveness) In this case, the baseline ventilation levels can be based on the proposed calculations, only with reduced zone air
distribution effectiveness (Ez = 1.0). This makes the baseline outdoor airflow rates higher than the proposed outdoor
airflow rates, so ventilation calculations must be submitted to claim the exception for a higher Ez in the proposed
case.
If a lower ventilation flow rate is an aspect of the design, the project team must provide ventilation rate procedure
calculations for both the proposed and baseline designs, with the proposed design using the actual Ez value and
the baseline design using an Ez value of 1.0 in each zone where the Ez value is greater than 1.0, but equal to the
proposed building for all other zones where the Ez value is not greater than 1.0.
If ASHRAE 62.1, Section 6.2, Ventilation Rate Procedure, is not used for the ventilation design, then this exception
may not be used.
Credit may not be taken, via ventilation flows, for any other ventilation design, such as a 100% outdoor air unit.
Additionally, credit may not be taken for increased system ventilation efficiency, Ev, of a proposed ventilation
system compared with a baseline ventilation system; Appendix G does not allow this. The only exception would be
a different Ev value due to an Ez greater than 1.0, as described above.

Natural ventilation The ASHRAE User’s Manual indicates that an exceptional calculation method is not required for natural ventilation
and gives some further examples.
Perform sufficient analysis to document that loads can be met when credit is taken for passive cooling and natural
ventilation using a simulation tool capable of ensuring thermal conditions are met with natural ventilation. A simple
load calculation is not sufficient.
358

COMMON ISSUES WITH ENERGY MODELING (CONTINUED)

TABLE 3 (CONTINUED). Common issues with energy modeling, by ASHRAE 90.1 section

Service water heating

Hot water demand Hot water demand savings from low-flow fixtures must be derived from WE Prerequisite or Credit Indoor Water Use
Reduction calculations.

Lighting

Lighting power Lighting power must be determined using the same categorization procedure (building area or space-by-space
density, method method) in both the proposed and baseline designs.

Lighting power ASHRAE 90.1–2010 does not allow credit for lighting within dwelling units. Therefore, the lighting within these
density, multifamily units must be modeled identically in both cases unless an exceptional calculation method is pursued. If credit is
attempted, the lighting must meet prescribed illuminance levels. Refer to the ENERGY STAR’s Multifamily High Rise
Program Simulation Guidelines for examples.

Lighting power Table G3.1.6 requires that the proposed lighting power include all components shown on the plans and be
density, luminaire determined in accordance with Sections 9.1.3 and 9.1.4. Ensure that the lighting calculations include all task lighting
wattage except where specifically exempted by ASHRAE 90.1 and that all power used by the luminaires, including lamps,
ballasts, transformers, and controls, is taken into account. For track and other flexible lighting systems, use the
specified wattage of the transformer supplying the system. The sum of lamp wattages will not necessarily meet the
requirements of G3.1.6.

Lighting power ASHRAE 90.1, Section 9.6.2, addresses the use of additional lighting power for decorative lighting, in retail areas, or
EA

density, additional when additional controls have been installed.

lighting power Additional lighting is allowed only when using the space-by-space method and if it is “installed and automatically
controlled, separately from the general lighting, to be turned off during nonbusiness hours.”
Therefore, the general lighting system must be separate and capable of providing general illumination to the space,
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

and the additional lighting must have automated controls that shut it off during nonbusiness hours even when the
general lighting remains on.
In retail applications, a common mistake is that the lighting may not be used for any purpose other than to highlight
the merchandise.
Project teams can model the additional lighting power up to what has actually been designed, and no more; the
baseline building must be modeled equal to what has been designed or up to the lighting allowance from ASHRAE
90.1, Section 9.6.2, whichever is less (i.e., credit may not be taken for unclaimed additional lighting power).
Note that only the sales area can be used in the lighting power allowance. For example, do not use the entire
project floor area (which may include space with other purposes, such as checkout areas, corridors, or dressing
rooms) to determine the allowance.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 now allows an additional lighting power allowance based on the application of additional
controls and using the control factors found in Table 9.6.2. This additional allowance may be used anywhere in the
building and is based on the total wattage in the given space to which the control method is being applied.
Unlike the retail allowance, this allowance is earned with the application of the control methods and may be added
to the baseline whether or not the project designs up to the full allowance.

Automatic lighting ASHRAE 90.1, Table G3.1(g), indicates that only automatic lighting controls, such as occupancy sensors, that are in
controls addition to the required minimum control (Section 9.4.1) may be taken for credit.
One of the most common errors is taking credit for an occupancy sensor located in a conference room; this is
already a requirement of the baseline building. ASHRAE 90.1–2010 lists additional spaces that must have occupant
sensors or timer switches that automatically turn off lighting.
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 has added requirements for the lighting system and controls for buildings. Project teams are
encouraged to read the standard, the User’s Manual, and the lighting compliance forms to ensure that all mandatory
measures have been met; these are prerequisites to LEED certification.

Exterior lighting Exterior lighting is divided into allowances for tradable and nontradable surfaces. No credit may be taken for
lighting reductions on nontradable surfaces. A lighting power allowance cannot be claimed in the baseline building
for surfaces that are not provided with lighting in the actual design, and lighting fixtures cannot be double-counted
for different exterior surfaces.

Energy rates

Energy rates Project teams must consistently use either actual utility rates or their state’s average energy prices, published by
the U.S. Department of Energy’s Energy Information Administration for commercial building customers. The sources
may not be mixed.
 359

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
Energy cost savings are based on a building’s total annual energy consumption, rather than on the owner’s scope of
work, so the owner of a core and shell project may have only a limited opportunity to improve energy savings. The
thresholds for the prerequisite are therefore adjusted from 5% to 2%.
In a typical core and shell building, the owner provides base-building HVAC, whereas the tenant often installs
light fixtures and other equipment. If the energy use of the base-building HVAC accounts for only a third of the
overall building energy use, the building owner must find sufficient savings within that third needed to meet the
prerequisite or require additional savings of the tenant in the lease agreement (see Further Explanation, Common
Issues in Energy Modeling).
Because the owner cannot control the effect of future improvements on the total energy consumption of the core
and shell project, for LEED energy modeling, items such as lighting or equipment loads for areas that are under the
tenants’ control must be identical in the proposed building and in the baseline, as specified by Appendix G. However,
projects can claim credit for energy reductions in tenant spaces if those reductions (such as lighting power density
reductions or improved HVAC efficiency) are required through a tenant lease agreement or other legally binding
document. For example, if a 20% reduction in lighting power density is required by the tenant lease agreement, those
savings can be claimed in the proposed model.
Zoning must be identical between the baseline and the proposed models. If HVAC zones are not defined in a
tenant space, energy modelers should follow ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Table G.3.1.8:
·· A typical rectangular floor plate must be composed of at least five zones: one perimeter zone for each

EA
orientation and one interior zone.
·· Separately zone spaces such as mechanical rooms or bathrooms that can be confidently identified as differing
from typical tenant use.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

·· To easily distinguish between energy use from owner and tenant spaces, projects must model separate electric
meters for tenant lighting and plug loads.

Retail
Option 1. For projects using whole-building energy simulation, include all relevant process loads in the energy model
and ensure that they are modeled accurately. Typical retail process loads include refrigeration equipment, cooking
and food preparation, ice machines, display lighting for merchandise, clothes washing, and other major support
appliances. Compare the energy consumption of each piece of equipment with the value indicated in Appendix 3,
Tables 1–4. If the item is not included and the project team wishes to take credit, the exceptional calculation method
must be followed.
For hard-wired refrigeration, the modeling software may be used if the system can be modeled explicitly.
Otherwise, a thermodynamically similar component model must be used, in accordance with Table G3.1.13. An
example of this would be an analysis prepared using 8760 hourly weather data.
For commercial kitchen equipment and refrigeration defined in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, no additional
documentation is necessary to substantiate these predefined baseline systems as industry standard. Supporting
documentation is still needed to verify that the proposed equipment includes the claimed energy-efficient features.

Option 2. If the project team is using prescriptive compliance, ASHRAE 50% AEDG, and intends to earn points under
EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance, also comply with the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, for
90% of total energy consumption for all process equipment.

Data Centers
The guidance in this section is geared toward dedicated data centers and is not applicable to server closets or other
small computer rooms. Mixed-use data centers, in which the data center takes up only a portion of the building
space, may use this information as the basis of an exceptional calculation method.
The power requirements and energy use of the IT equipment in a data center typically dwarf the energy use of the
cooling system and must be considered for optimizing energy use. The energy consumption of a data center’s cooling
system typically ranges from 15% to 25% of its total energy use, whereas in other commercial buildings, the HVAC
energy consumption approaches 50% of the total energy consumption.1

1. U.S. Department of Energy, 2011 Buildings Energy Data Book, March 2012.
360

Data centers use special systems and equipment, such as large uninterruptible power supply (UPS), whose
energy efficiency requirements are not defined by ASHRAE 90.1. Some of these systems will cause inefficiencies
that can cascade through the power delivery chain, leading to increased energy usage in systems beyond those that
support IT and, in most cases, creating additional cooling loads.
Stipulations for equipment reliability and maintenance often result in redundant equipment and systems. And
the typical phased installation schedule for IT equipment (e.g., servers, storage, and networking gear) results in
power and cooling systems that operate at a fraction of the design load. To gain a more accurate understanding of
energy usage, teams should demonstrate the effects of partial-load conditions on the overall energy efficiency of the
data center.

Modeling requirements
Energy modeling is required for all data center projects. As with other building types, projects must meet the
minimum percentage savings before taking credit for renewable energy systems. The energy models are used to
determine the data center’s predicted power usage effectiveness (PUE) (see Power Usage Effectiveness, below).
The PUE must be reported for two operating conditions: one assuming a fully fit-out data center with all
anticipated IT equipment, and one assuming the initial IT equipment loads in the project. This requires the
project team to submit the results of one additional energy model beyond the two required by ASHRAE 90.1,
Appendix G, for all data center projects.

IT equipment energy and electrical infrastructure energy savings

Because of the high process loads associated with IT equipment and its electrical infrastructure, many project
EA

teams look to these traditionally unregulated energy end uses for energy savings. Though not required, if the
project team is attempting to claim energy savings from these end uses, the data center calculator may provide a
simplified method (see Data Center Calculator, below).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The reduced energy consumption of the IT and electrical equipment can help reduce HVAC energy usage.
Project teams have the option of claiming the process load savings in isolation or creating an additional energy
model based on the adjusted loads to capture the associated HVAC energy savings.
To determine total energy cost savings, it may be necessary to create more than just the three energy models
required. Below is a list of the models that may need to be created. The specific requirements of each model are
detailed below.
1. Proposed model with full IT loading (normal performance rating method, PRM, model)
2. Proposed model with initial IT loading
3. ASHRAE model with full IT loading (normal PRM model)
4. ASHRAE model with initial IT loading (optional)
5. ASHRAE model with “baseline” IT loading (optional)
Although 5% energy savings is still required to meet the prerequisite requirements, a minimum of 2% energy cost
savings must come from building systems, independent of IT equipment, and need to be demonstrated between
models 1 and 3 (model 2 is used for the initial loading PUE condition).
If the project team is claiming energy savings related to the IT systems, the total energy savings are
calculated between models 1 and 5. Alternatively, the project team may calculate the percentage savings based on
the average of the savings under full IT loading (model 1 and either model 3 or 5) and the savings under initial IT
loading (models 2 and 4). Although this is not required, it is intended to reward project teams for minimizing the
losses associated with operating redundant equipment at low partial loads during initial IT loading.

Proposed model with full IT loading (model 1)

The model of the building’s energy cost must include all regulated energy end uses as listed in the prerequisite
criteria, as well as any unregulated energy that is building-specific. The proposed design must use the IT loads
and schedule developed for the project. The IT loads should be at the values for the intended final buildout
of the facility. All electrical system components—examples include incoming transformers, switchgear, UPS
systems, and power distribution units—must be modeled. Power losses associated with this equipment should
 361

be assigned to the spaces that house the equipment as an electrical load and as a thermal load input to the energy
model. Model the quantity of power and cooling equipment designed to run during normal operation to include
the effects of operating redundant equipment at partial loading on energy use.
In addition to the ASHRAE 90.1 mandatory compliance requirements, provide energy efficiency data for the
following items:
·· Generator block heaters (wattage required to keep the block at the design temperature)
·· Power distribution wiring
·· Battery charging
Submit documentation for the following items, showing efficiency data at initial and full system loading points
(loading values are a percentage of total IT load):
·· Service transformers
·· Switchgear
·· Uninterruptible power systems
·· Power distribution units

Proposed model with initial IT loading (model 2)

This model represents the proposed data center operating at its intended initial buildout. The proposed model
with initial IT loading should contain everything that is in the proposed model with full IT loading, with the
following modifications:

EA
·· The proposed model with initial IT loading must use the IT loads and schedule as developed for the project,
at the expected initial loading of the data center.
·· All electrical system components that will be installed in the first phase of the data center must be modeled.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

The losses associated with this equipment should be calculated based on their partial loading while taking
into account any redundant equipment. Use the USGBC data center calculator to help with the calculation
of the electrical losses for this equipment based on the partial loading conditions.
Model the quantity of power and cooling equipment designed to run during normal operation to include the
effects of operating redundant equipment at partial loading on energy use.

ASHRAE model with full IT loading (model 3)

For the baseline models, the air temperature at the inlet of the server should be within ASHRAE’s recommended
values, from 80.6°F (27°C) dry bulb and 59.0 °F (15°C) dew point to 64.4°F (18°C) dry bulb and 41.9°F (5.5°C)
dew point, unless justification can be provided for an alternative minimum supply air temperature at the server
inlet. The baseline system airflow must be sized based on a 20°F (approximately 11°C) difference between the
supply air and the return air.

ASHRAE model with initial IT loading (model 4)

This model is necessary only if the project team is claiming savings for the efficiency of the electrical support
infrastructure when operating at low partial loads, as is common during initial startup. This model should be
very similar to the ASHRAE model with “baseline” IT loading (model 5), except that the IT loads are reduced
by the same percentage as in the proposed model with initial IT loading, and the losses due to the electrical
infrastructure are calculated based on this IT loading. The USGBC data center calculator can help with the
calculation of the electrical losses for this equipment based on the partial-load conditions.

ASHRAE model with “baseline” IT loading (model 5)

This model is used to calculate IT energy savings due to low-energy servers, virtualization, and efficient electrical
system design. In contrast to the standard application of exceptional calculation methods to the proposed model,
for data center projects, the exceptional calculation is applied to the baseline (model 3). Rather than reducing the
energy used in the proposed design, the baseline is increased to reflect the energy usage typical of a data center.
For IT equipment, the USGBC data center calculator provides baseline documentation; if used, additional
justification for the baseline IT loads is not necessary. IT equipment input is defined as the IT load as measured
at the point of connection of the IT device to the electrical power system. IT equipment input captures the actual
power load of the IT device exclusive of any power distribution losses and loads beyond IT devices, such as rack-
mounted fans.
362

The losses associated with all UPS equipment, including that which serves mechanical equipment to achieve
continuous cooling during a loss of power (e.g., pumps, air-handling units, and compressors), is considered not
part of the IT energy usage but part of the energy consumption required to operate the data center.
If a hydronic cooling system is used for IT cabinets or computers, the energy consumed by the fans built into
the cabinet and coolant distribution pumps should be considered HVAC energy use, not IT energy use.

Data center calculator

The data center calculator provided by USGBC creates a representative IT energy baseline based on the proposed
design. The calculator consists of two main modules: one for the efficiency of the server equipment that
comprises the IT system and one for the efficiency of the electrical system that delivers power to the IT system.
The calculator provides values that can be used as inputs for the electrical system energy consumption and
heat loss for the proposed model with initial IT loading to calculate the initial PUE. The calculator generates the
following two sets of values that may be used to determine energy savings:
·· Annual energy consumption savings values, which can then be claimed directly, in isolation of any effects
the reduced electrical load would have on the HVAC system
·· Input values for the ASHRAE model with “baseline” IT loading and the ASHRAE model with initial IT
loading that can then be used during simulation
The calculator’s IT systems module compares energy use of a proposed IT equipment design with a predefined
baseline. The current calculator analyzes energy use of computer servers only. Mainframes, storage, and
networking equipment are not included in the overall energy demand calculation (as it relates to the reduction in
EA

energy). To claim savings from other types of IT equipment, the exceptional calculation method must be used.
Based on the entered values for total IT load and percentage breakdowns, the calculator generates kilowatt
(kW) values for servers, storage, and networking equipment. The kW number for the servers, combined with the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

server utilization and the average power draw of the server, is used to calculate the number of physical servers
that will be in the data center. Server power is based on ENERGY STAR’s Computer Server Qualified Product
List. If the number of physical servers and their power draw are known, enter these values.
Next, enter the percentage of servers that will host virtual machines in the data center and the average
consolidation ratio. This rate of virtualization is used to calculate the server utilization percentage and then
compared with a typical virtualization rate, which is used to calculate the number of servers in the baseline case.
Finally, indicate whether a power management strategy will be used. This input takes the percentage of
servers that can go into sleep mode and the percentage of the time those servers can be in sleep mode. With
these inputs, the calculator determines the energy demand for the IT system in kW and also generates the annual
energy use in kWh of both the baseline case and the proposed case.
If desired, the calculated server demand value for the baseline IT load can be entered into the ASHRAE
model, with baseline IT loading as the server demand in the data center. The baseline model should use the same
schedules as the proposed model.
The data center calculator’s electrical systems module uses the peak demand of the IT system to determine
the size and power draw of the equipment. Peak IT demand values are automatically imported from the IT
systems module. For the purposes of the calculator, the electrical system comprises the following elements:
·· Incoming utility service transformer
·· Uninterruptible power supply
·· Power distribution unit
Based on the topology selected by the user, some of the energy that flows through the component is lost as heat,
which must be included in the building energy model.
The heat loss differs at varying loads. Although it is important to benchmark operation at 100% load, it may
be more important to benchmark at partial loads because electrical and cooling equipment, especially legacy
equipment, will have much lower efficiencies at partial loads.
After determining the efficiency of the baseline electrical system, the calculator provides annual energy
consumption in kWh. If desired, the losses associated with the system can be assigned to the supporting
infrastructure rooms of the appropriate energy models.
 363

Power usage effectiveness

PUE is the metric for characterizing and reporting the overall infrastructure efficiency of a building. Determine
the PUE value of the proposed design using Equation 2.2 This calculation should be performed twice: once for the
proposed initial loading model and once for the proposed model with full IT loading.

EQUATION 2. Power usage effectiveness

total data center energy

consumption or power
PUE =
IT energy consumption
or power

For example, if a facility uses 2,000,000 kWh of total energy, of which 1,600,000 kWh is attributable to IT
equipment, its PUE is as follows:

2,000,000 kWh
PUE = = 1.25
1,600,000 kWh

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

EA
Healthcare, Warehouses, and Laboratories
These projects are not eligible to pursue Option 3.

District Energy Systems

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Projects that are served by district energy systems (DES) may demonstrate compliance with EA Prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance by following one of the following
methods.
·· Option 1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation. The project team may choose Path 1 ASHRAE 90.1-10 Appendix
G, Path 2 Full DES performance accounting, or Path 3 Streamlined DES modeling. The modeling path chosen
by the project team may depend on the relative efficiency of the DES to which the project is connected, how
much DES information is available, or whether an energy model already exists for the system.Whenever
possible, incorporate system and equipment performance parameters directly into the energy simulation.
Potential methods include developing efficiency curves and scheduling equipment operation and curves.
Postprocessing of DES performance is acceptable if reasonable simulation methods are not available or are too
onerous. All postprocessing methodologies must be fully documented.
·· Option 2 Prescriptive Compliance: ASHRAE 50% AEDG, and Option 3 Prescriptive Compliance: Advanced
Buildings Core Performance Guide. The project team must include or exclude effects of upstream DES
equipment as specified in the applicable referenced standard for the selected option. If the referenced
standard does not specify either approach, the upstream effects must be excluded.

All Options: Scope of DES Equipment Inclusion

All downstream equipment must be included in the scope of EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and
EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Downstream equipment includes heat exchangers, steam pressure
reduction stations, pumps, valves, pipes, building electrical services, and controls. Upstream equipment is
included or excluded depending on the chosen option and path.

Option 1, Path 1. ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G

Model the proposed and baseline designs using purchased energy according to ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G.
Energy rates
All virtual DES energy rates must be identical in the baseline and proposed cases. If tariffs or rates are not
available from the district plant serving the project, such as for campus or military plants, calculate the rates
based on the virtual electric and fossil fuel rates from the model.

2. Recommendations for Measuring and Reporting Overall Data Center Efficiency, Version 2, Measuring PUE at Data Centers.
364

If a flat rate structure, in which the cost per unit of energy is the same throughout the year and there are no
demand charges, is being used for all energy sources, then those flat rates become the virtual energy rates for the
project.
If all energy rate structures are not flat, a preliminary run of the Option 1 baseline case energy model must
first be completed to identify the virtual electric and fossil fuel rates for the project. For this preliminary run only,
the rate for the DES-supplied energy may be left blank or entered as any value.
Once all the virtual energy rates are known for electricity and fossil fuel, calculate the virtual DES rates for
both the baseline and proposed case per the values in the minimum energy performance calculator.
Exception: to obtain the virtual fuel rate when the connected building does not use fossil fuel but the DES
central plant does, use a flat rate consistent with the central plant rates or the historical average local market
rates. No preliminary model run is needed. Input the virtual DES rates into the modeling software for each
DES source and use for the remainder of the process. Alternatively, calculate the DES energy costs directly by
multiplying the DES energy consumption for each DES source by its virtual DES rate.

Option 1, Path 2. Full DES Performance Accounting

Path 2 is available to projects connected to DES that wish to account for average efficiency across a smaller time
step. The energy model scope accounts for both downstream equipment and upstream equipment and requires
calculation of the district energy average efficiencies using either modeling or monitoring.
Energy rates
All DES energy rates must be identical in both the baseline and the proposed cases. Use local rates as they would
EA

normally apply to the building for the energy sources under consideration. For energy sources used by the DES
but not normally available to the building, such as diesel fuel, use the rates charged to the DES. If this information
is not available, use representative market rates.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Exception: For DES plants that operate under specific and atypical rate structures and actively take
advantage of those rates through strategies such as load management or energy storage, use the rate structures as
they apply to the DES.
Baseline building plant
Model the baseline case with an on-site plant that is compliant with ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, baseline
requirements for site-generated thermal energy. Model the baseline building plant with conventional equipment
using performance parameters and efficiencies per ASHRAE 90.1–2010, using energy sources corresponding to
the DES.
Proposed building plant
Model the proposed case with a virtual DES-equivalent plant. Model a virtual plant with the same efficiencies
as the entire upstream DES heating, cooling, and combined heat and power (CHP) systems, including all
distribution losses and energy use. Equipment efficiencies, distribution losses, and distribution pumping energy
may be determined using any of the following methods:
·· Monitored data
·· Engineering analysis
·· Default values
Efficiencies and losses may be determined and modeled at any level of time resolution, from hourly to
annual. However, the time resolution must be sufficiently granular to capture and reasonably represent any
significant time- or load-dependent interactions between systems, such as thermal storage or CHP.
Monitoring and analytical methods may be combined as necessary and appropriate.
Monitoring data for heating, cooling, pumping, and cogeneration may be used only if the thermal loads
that are monitored represent at least 90% of the load on the campus or district plant predicted after building
occupancy.
Whether using monitoring or an analytical method, the methodologies must be fully documented. The
following specific requirements apply.
Heating and cooling plants
Efficiencies, whether determined through monitoring or analytically, must include all operational effects, such as
standby, equipment cycling, partial-load operation, internal pumping, and thermal losses.
 365

Thermal distribution losses

Use monitored data or an engineering analysis.
Monitored data determine the distribution losses for the DES by measuring the total thermal energy leaving
the plant and comparing it with the total thermal energy used by the buildings connected to the DES. Rate the
plant efficiency accordingly in the energy model:

% plant efficiency × { 100% - % distribution loss {

An engineering analysis takes into consideration all distribution losses between the DES and the building. For
distribution main losses, use a prorated amount based on load. For dedicated branch losses, use the total losses
of the branch that feeds the building, including heat losses and steam trap losses. Compare the total losses with
the total load of the building to get a percentage distribution loss relative to load and downgrade the plant’s
efficiency accordingly in the energy model.
Pumping energy
Whether through monitored data or engineering analysis, determine pumping energy for the project by prorating
the total pump energy of the DES by the ratio of the annual thermal load of the building to the total annual
DES thermal load. Model the pump energy as auxiliary electrical load. Pumping energy must be determined or
estimated where it applies (i.e., there is no default value).
Default efficiencies and losses

EA
Actual efficiency performance data on the DES serving the project building is preferred. If the project team
cannot obtain or determine the actual performance data, use the following default values. These values are
conservative and are intended to represent a DES with relatively low efficiency; a well-designed, well-operated
DES generally performs better.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

·· DES heating plant: 70% (higher heating value, HHV) for the total boiler plant average efficiency
·· DES cooling plant: coefficient of performance (COP) of 4.4 for the total cooling plant average efficiency
(including cooling towers and primary pumps)
·· Thermal distribution losses including minor leaks or condensate losses:
°° Chilled water district cooling, 5%
°° Hot water district heating, 10%
°° Closed-loop steam systems, 15%
°° Open-loop steam systems, 25%
For steam systems that are partially open and partially closed, prorate between the above 15% and 25% losses
in accordance with the fraction of expected or actual condensate loss.
The above guidance assumes that DES-generated heat is used for heat in the connected building, and
DES-generated cooling is used for cooling in the connected building. If the DES produces heating that is then
converted to cooling for the connected building using absorption chillers or other similar technology, this
guidance must be modified (see CHP Modeling Guidance).

Option 1, Path 3. Streamlined DES Modeling

Path 3 is applicable for simple district energy systems. The energy model scope accounts for both downstream
equipment and upstream equipment and also requires calculation of the district energy average efficiencies using
either modeling or monitoring.
Energy rates
Use the streamlined DES modeling in the calculator provided by USGBC to allocate the energy costs to the
results of the model for each district energy source, in lieu of the purchased energy rates, to determine the
baseline and proposed case energy costs.
Baseline building plant
Calculate the average annual efficiency values for each district energy fuel source used to generate and distribute
the thermal energy based on ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, baseline case requirements. These values depend
on the ASHRAE 90.1–2010 system type that would be selected for the building if the baseline case were modeled
366

with on-site equipment. The calculations for baseline cost per district energy source are the same as those for the
proposed case model, except that the average efficiency is constant.
Proposed building plant
Determine a single value for average annual efficiency, including thermal losses and distribution energy, for each
district fuel energy source used to generate and distribute the thermal energy. For example, for chilled water:

COST (CHW)BUILDING = CHWBUILDING × ∑ ( Cost i × η i )

i
where
COST(CHW) = proposed case cost of chilled water
BUILDING

CHWBUILDING = building energy model metered data for chilled water consumption
i =  ach fuel source used at the district plant to generate or distribute chilled water (e.g.
e
electricity, diesel oil)
Cost =  irtual energy rate for each fuel source (in $/unit energy). This should match the
v
i
proposed case virtual energy rate for fuel sources present in the building, and should
be supported by local energy tariffs for fuel sources not present in the building.

ηi = average efficiency calculated for each fuel source

EA

Special Situations for DES Energy Models

CHP Modeling Guidance

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The baseline case is modeled as described in ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G, and as summarized in the steps for
each path. The baseline model assumes separate production of electricity and thermal energy. Although not
modeled as CHP, the baseline case is charged with extra energy use for CHP energy accounting purposes in some
situations.
The proposed case may be modeled in various ways.
·· The average electricity generation, fuel input, and heat recovery of the CHP must be determined, or the
defaults for electric and thermal efficiency (below) must be used in conjunction with capacity ratings of the
equipment.
·· Calculate annual electricity generation using one of the following methods:
°° Monitor the total annual gross electricity generation. Also monitor the total annual parasitic loads, such
as the annual electricity used for cooling the intake air for a turbine. Calculate the net annual electricity
generation by subtracting all parasitic loads from the annual gross electricity generated.
°° Model the generators in energy simulation software per Appendix G. Use peak electricity efficiencies
and generator curves that match the installed generators. Apply measured or estimated load profiles
as process loads to reflect the estimated total electric and thermal loads on the district energy CHP
system. Use the total energy generated and total fuel input from this analysis. Any parasitic loads must be
included in the analysis and subtracted from the annual electricity generation.
·· Calculate annual fuel input using one of the following methods:
°° Monitor the total annual fuel input to the generators.
°° Model the generators in energy simulation software per Appendix G. Use peak electricity efficiencies and
generator curves that match the installed generators.
·· Calculate waste heat recovery using one of the following methods:
°° Monitor the total waste heat recovered.
°° Model the generators in energy simulation software per Appendix G. Use peak electricity efficiencies and
generator curves that match the installed generators. Model the thermal equipment served by the CHP
waste heat, such as boilers and absorption chillers, using the installed equipment capacities, efficiencies,
and efficiency curves, and reflecting the total heating and cooling loads on the plant as a process load. Use
the energy modeling outputs to identify the total heat recovered.
 367

For baseline CHP electricity output, follow the general procedures described in this section for the proposed
case, and adjust the results as follows depending on the results of the DES electricity allocation and the
total modeled electricity use of the building in the Path 2 or Path 3 proposed case, including the electricity
consumption of district plant equipment serving the building:
·· Scenario A. If the building’s allocation of CHP-generated electricity is less than or equal to its modeled
electricity consumption, no adjustment is necessary. The baseline building is charged with the energy used
by its (non-CHP) systems at market rates using standard procedures.
·· Scenario B. If the building’s allocation of CHP-generated electricity exceeds its modeled electricity
consumption, the amount of excess CHP electricity allocated to the building is considered process energy
in the energy model. Adjust the input fuel associated with this excess CHP electricity in the baseline case as
described in CHP fuel input.
For the proposed design’s CHP electricity output, allocate the electricity generation to the building based on the
fraction of thermal loads to the building for the DES sources that use recovered waste heat. For each DES source
supplied to the building, determine the fraction of the recovered waste heat applied to that source as well as the
amount serving the project building. For relatively simple DES systems, in which the recovered waste heat is
used directly in the DES, and for which waste heat serves only heating loads in the connected buildings, use the
formula for simple systems:

CHP_ELECBLDG (simple systems) = (XHEAT × BLDGHEAT ) × CHP_ELECTOTAL

EA
where

CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

XHEAT = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to the DES directly
BLDGHEAT = fraction of total district heat provided to building

CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant

For CHP plants in which a portion of the recovered heat is used to drive absorption chillers that provide cooling
through a DES chilled-water loop, or a portion of the recovered heat is used for a third, separate district energy
source (e.g., if the building connects to both a steam loop and a hot-water loop), calculate the electricity
generation assigned to each building using the formula for heat recovery-driven chillers.

CHP_ELECBLDG (heat recovery-driven chillers) = ( XHEAT × BLDGHEAT ) + ( YCHW × BLDGCHW ) + ( ZSOURCE × BLDGSOURCE ) × CHP_ELECTOTAL

where

CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building

XHEAT = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to the DES
directly
BLDGHEAT = fraction of total district heat provided to building
YCHW = fraction of CHP plant’s total production of waste heat applied to producing
chilled water in DES
BLDGCHW = fraction of total district chilled water provided to building
ZSOURCE = fraction of third district energy source provided to building
BLDGSOURCE = fraction of third district energy source provided to building
CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant

When modeling CHP fuel input, allocate the CHP input fuel to the project building based on a proration and
assignment of the total input fuel according to the results of the CHP electricity allocation described above for
368

CHP electricity output. Use the prevailing energy rates as they apply to the project. Any additional energy used by
the proposed design is also charged at market rates.
For the proposed case (all projects), calculate the CHP input fuel allocated to the building as follows:

Proposed BLDGFUEL

where
=
( CHP_ELECBLDG

CHP_ELECTOTAL ) × CHPFUEL

Proposed CHP_ELECBLDG = proposed case CHP input fuel allocated to building

CHP_ELECTOTAL = CHP electricity generation allocated to building (from previous calculations)
CHPFUEL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant

CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP fuel input for electricity generation at DES plant

For the baseline (scenario B in CHP electricity output only): calculate the CHP input fuel allocated to the
building as follows:

Baseline BLDGFUEL

with
=
( PROCESS_ELECBLDG

CHP_ELECTOTAL ) × CHPFUEL
EA

PROCESS_ELECBLDG = CHP_ELECBLDG - PROPOSED_ELECBLDG

where
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Baseline BLDGFUEL = baseline case CHP input fuel charged to building

PROCESS_ELECBLDG = amount of allocated CHP electricity in excess of building’s modeled annual
electricity consumption (treated as process energy in model)
CHP_ELECTOTAL = total CHP electricity generated at DES plant
CHPFUEL = total CHP fuel input for electricity generation at DES plant
CHP_ELECBLDG = CHP electricity generation allocated to building (from previous calculations)
PROPOSED_ = modeled electricity consumption for building from proposed case
ELECBLDG

The model must include CHP generator default efficiencies. Actual efficiency performance data on the
CHP serving the project building is preferred, based on either ongoing operations (existing CHP) or design
specifications (new CHP). If the project team cannot obtain the actual performance data, use the following
default seasonal performance values. These values are conservative, intended to represent a CHP system with
relatively low efficiency. A well designed, maintained, and operating CHP system will generally offer better
performance than the defaults listed below.
·· Generator electrical efficiency, 22%
·· Generator thermal efficiency, 25%
·· Single-effect absorption chillers, 0.60 COP
·· Double-effect absorption chillers, 0.90 COP
·· Absorption cooling plant electrical efficiency, including cooling towers and primary pumps, 40 COP

Service water heating

If service water is heated in full or in part by DES-supplied heat, consider modeling the energy source as
purchased energy to hold the DES cost-neutral for service water heating. If desired, project teams using Path 2 or
Path 3 may use an exceptional calculation method to document DES-related savings from service water heating.
Project teams that elect to document savings must fully justify and support the annual energy consumption and
cost in both the baseline and the proposed models. Use a reasonable, well-founded purchased energy rate in the
models, such as the actual rate paid to the DES supplier or a virtual rate.
 369

Heating converted to cooling

Sometimes the district or campus system heating energy supply is converted to chilled water using absorption
chillers or other similar technologies to serve cooling loads. In this circumstance, the equipment that converts
heating to cooling may reside within the DES itself, (i.e., DES provides cooling to the building) or within the
connected buildings (i.e., DES provides heating to the building; building converts heating to cooling). When the
equipment that converts DES-supplied heat into cooling is part of the LEED project’s scope of work, the DES
guidance is modified for Option 1, Whole Building Simulation, as follows:
·· Model the district heating source servicing the chilled water generation equipment as follows:
°° For Path 1, use purchased heat in both the baseline and proposed cases.
°° For Path 2 or 3, use a virtual upstream DES plant for the proposed case and compare it with code-
compliant on-site equipment for the baseline case.
·· For Path 1, model absorption chillers in the baseline case as follows:
°° When the purchased heating is hot water with average supply temperatures below 300°F (148.9°C), the
chillers must be modeled as single-effect absorption chillers (0.7 COP).
°° When the purchased heating is steam or hot water with average temperatures greater than or equal to
300°F (148.9°C), the chillers must be modeled as double-effect absorption chillers (1.0 COP).
°° If the building peak cooling load is less than 300 tons (1050 kW), model one water-cooled absorption
chiller.
°° If the building peak cooling load is between 300 tons (1050 kW) and 600 tons (2100 kW), model two

EA
water-cooled absorption chillers, sized equally.
°° If the building peak cooling load is more than 600 tons (2100 kW), model a minimum of two water-cooled
absorption chillers, with chillers added such that no chiller is larger than 800 tons (2800 kW), all sized
equally.

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

°° For a project with both absorption chillers driven by purchased hot water and electric chillers on site, the
type and quantity of absorption chillers must be as identified above, and the type and quantity of electric
chillers must be as in Table G3.1.3.7 (or DX equipment as specified), but the total capacity ratio of electric
to absorption cooling must be identical to that of the proposed design.
°° For a project including both district chilled water and absorption chillers on-site driven by purchased
heating, the type and quantity of absorption chillers must be as identified above, and purchased cooling
must also be modeled in accordance with the district energy modeling guidance. However, the total
capacity ratio of the on-site cooling to purchased cooling must be identical to that of the proposed design.
·· Model the baseline case cooling towers, pumps, chilled water loop configurations, and loop temperature
controls as indicated in Appendix G.
·· Model the absorption chillers in the proposed case based on the as-designed type and capacity of chillers.

Other atypical systems

DES also often incorporate unconventional features, such as thermal storage, ground or surface water cooling,
and waste heat recovery. These features should be incorporated into the proposed virtual plant to the greatest
extent practical using the general principles presented in this guidance.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Option 1. Whole-Building Energy Simulation. If ASHRAE 90.1 is not applicable, Option 1 requirements can be met
with a USGBC-approved equivalent standard.

All options. Consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, Appendices B and D, to find the project’s climate
zone. Use Table B-2 (Canada) or Table B-3 (International) if the location is listed. For locations not listed in Table
B-3, use Table B-4, along with the climate type definitions in Section B2, plus Appendix D to determine climate zone.
For example, a team working on a project in Beijing consults ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010,
Appendix B, to determine the appropriate climate zone. Table B-3 does not give a climate zone for Beijing.
The project team finds Beijing in Table D-3, which lists the values for heating degree-days to base 65°F or 18°C
(HDD65 or HDD18) as 5252, and cooling degree-days to base 50°F or 10°C (CDD50 or CDD10) as 4115. The team uses
these values to determine Beijing’s climate zone as defined in Appendix B, Section B2 and Table B-4.
370

Beijing is in a “moist climate” because its warmest month has a mean temperature higher than 72°F (22.2°C) and
is therefore too warm to be a “marine climate,” and annual rainfall data indicate that the city is not in a “dry climate.”
Finally, the project team uses the values found in Table D-2 for HDD65 (5252) and CDD50 (4115) in Table B-4 and
determines that Beijing is in Zone 4A (mixed-humid) because the CDD50 value is 4500 or less, and the HDD65 value
is between 3600 and 5400.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

Appendix G energy modeling inputs X

EA

Input-output reports from modeling software X

Exceptional calculations (if applicable) X

Energy consumption and demand for each building end use and fuel type X
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Fuels rates X

AEDG compliance tables X

Target Finder results, summary X

Confirmation that all aspects of CPG Sections 1 and 2 were met X

Building configuration analysis X

Building loads and mechanical system design capacity X

Insulation installation details X

Building envelope details X

Domestic hot water efficiency X

Narrative or calculations for CPG enhanced performance strategies X

Data center calculator (if applicable) X

Retail process energy calculator (if applicable) X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Only Options 1 and 2 of this prerequisite allow the project team to
pursue the related credit. Developing an energy model that reduces load and establishes an energy savings goal in an
early phase will ensure that the project is eligible to earn points under the related credit for any energy cost savings
beyond this prerequisite’s minimum threshold. Consider the requirements for the related credit before initiating the
energy model to ensure that the project will meet the criteria for both this prerequisite and the related credit.

Integrative Process Credit. Project teams intending to pursue the related credit must create a concept model
during predesign to understand how various load reduction strategies affect a building’s energy use. The model will
inform the project team’s approach to achieving this prerequisite through Option 1. The concept model should be
 371

prepared during the schematic design phase, while the building orientation and form is still in early development,
and before undertaking a preliminary energy model.

EA Credit Demand Response. If the team is pursuing Option 1 of this prerequisite, the energy model can be used to
project the peak energy demand and timing. This will provide some insight into the potential energy demands and
cost savings when demand response is implemented.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Consider renewable energy production for the project during early
design. Although renewables cannot be counted toward this prerequisite, they are a viable energy cost savings
measure that can achieve points for two related EA credits, Renewable Energy Production and Optimize Energy
Performance.

EA Credit Green Power and Carbon Offsets. If the team is pursuing Option 1 of this prerequisite, the energy model
output will be used to calculate the amount of green power required to meet the related credit requirements.

WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction. For projects pursuing Option 1 of this prerequisite, hot water
demand savings from low-flow fixtures must be derived from the related prerequisite’s calculations.

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. For projects pursuing Option 1 of this prerequisite,
as-designed ventilation flow rates reported in the related prerequisite must correspond to the inputs in the proposed
energy model.

EA
CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Option 1. Whole Building Energy Simulation
·· ASHRAE 90.1–2010 replaces ASHRAE 90.1–2007.
·· Process energy is no longer required to make up 25% of overall building energy for the baseline and proposed
models.
·· Prerequisite compliance must now be achieved without accounting for the cost offset by site-generated
renewable energy.
·· For data centers, 2% of the required 5% energy cost reductions must come from building power and cooling
infrastructure energy use.

Option 2. ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide, and Option 3. Advanced Buildings Core Performance
Guide
·· For Option 2, the standard for compliance with the prerequisite has been changed from the 30% savings
version of the AEDG to the 50% savings version. This represents 50% expected savings over ASHRAE 90.1–
2004.
·· For Options 2 and 3, the project must now comply with mandatory and prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE
90.1–2010 to achieve the prerequisite.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and ASHRAE 90.1–2010 User’s Manual: ashrae.org

ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guides: ashrae.org

Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide: advancedbuildings.net/core-performance

COMNET Commercial Buildings Energy Modeling Guidelines: comnet.org/mgp-manual

372

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
baseline building performance the annual energy cost for a building design, used as a baseline for comparison with
above-standard design

combined heat and power an integrated system that captures the heat, otherwise unused, generated by a single
fuel source in the production of electrical power. Also known as cogeneration. (Adapted from U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency)

district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

downstream equipment the heating and cooling systems, equipment, and controls located in the project building
or on the project site and associated with transporting the thermal energy of the district energy system (DES) into
heated and cooled spaces. Downstream equipment includes the thermal connection or interface with the DES,
EA

secondary distribution systems in the building, and terminal units.

IT annual energy electricity consumption by information technology and telecom equipment which includes
servers, networking, and storage equipment over the course of a year
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

plug load or receptacle load the electrical current drawn by all equipment that is connected to the electrical system
via a wall outlet.

power distribution unit output the electrical power from a device that allocates power to and serves information
technology (IT) equipment. Power distribution unit (PDU) output does not include efficiency losses of any
transformation that occurs within the PDU, but it can include downstream non-IT ancillary devices installed in
IT racks, such as fans. If the PDU system supports non-IT equipment (e.g., computer room air-conditioning units,
computer room air handlers, in-row coolers), this equipment must be metered and subtracted from the PDU output
reading. The metering approach should be consistent with the metering required for the power usage efficiency
(PUE) category (e.g., continuous consumption metering for PUE categories 1, 2, and 3).

power utilization effectiveness (PUE) a measure of how efficiently a data center uses its power; specifically, how
much power is used by computing equipment rather than for cooling and other overhead

process energy power resources consumed in support of a manufacturing, industrial, or commercial process other
than conditioning spaces and maintaining comfort and amenities for building occupants of a building. It may include
refrigeration equipment, cooking and food preparation, clothes washing, and other major support appliances.
(ASHRAE)

process load or unregulated load the load on a building resulting from the consumption or release of process
energy (ASHRAE)

regulated load any building end use that has either a mandatory or a prescriptive requirement in ANSI/ASHRAE/IES
Standard 90.1–2010

server input the information technology (IT) load as measured at the point of connection (e.g., power receptacle )
of the IT device to the electrical power system. Server input captures the actual power load of the IT device exclusive
of any power distribution losses and non-IT loads (e.g., rack-mounted fans).
 373

uninterruptible power supply (UPS) output the electricity provided by a unit that keeps information technology
(IT) equipment functioning during a power outage. UPS output does not include efficiency losses from the unit
itself but does include losses from downstream electrical distribution components, such as power distribution units,
and it may include non-IT ancillary devices installed in IT racks, such as fans. If the UPS system supports non-IT
equipment (e.g., computer room air-conditioning units, computer room air handlers, in-row coolers), this usage
must be metered and subtracted from the UPS output reading. The metering approach should be consistent with the
metering required for the power usage efficiency (PUE) category (e.g., continuous consumption metering for PUE
categories 1, 2 and 3).

upstream equipment a heating or cooling system or control associated with the district energy system (DES) but
not part of the thermal connection or interface with the DES. Upstream equipment includes the thermal energy
conversion plant and all the transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal
energy to the project building or site.

EA
MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EA

374
 375

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE PREREQUISITE

Building-Level Energy
Metering
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

EA
INTENT

BUILDING-LEVEL ENERGY METERING

To support energy management and identify opportunities for
additional energy savings by tracking building-level energy use.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE

Install new or use existing building-level energy meters, or submeters that can be aggregated to provide building-
level data representing total building energy consumption (electricity, natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel oil,
propane, biomass, etc). Utility-owned meters capable of aggregating building-level resource use are acceptable.
Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting energy consumption data and electrical demand data (if
metered) for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification. At a minimum, energy
consumption must be tracked at one-month intervals.
This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building changes ownership or lessee.

CORE AND SHELL

Install new or use existing base building-level energy meters, or submeters that can be aggregated to provide base
building-level data representing total building energy consumption (electricity, natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel
oil, propane, etc.). Utility-owned meters capable of aggregating base building-level resource use are acceptable.
Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting energy consumption data and electrical demand data (if metered)
for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification or typical occupancy, whichever
comes first. At a minimum, energy consumption must be tracked at one-month intervals.
This commitment must carry forward for five years or until the building changes ownership or lessee.
376

BEHIND THE INTENT

Whole-building metering lets building operators track energy consumption over time, illustrating variations in
usage patterns that can be used to develop energy conservation measures over the lifetime of the building. Once such
conservation measures are in place, metering then allows staff to track energy savings and used to justify additional
investments with calculable payback periods. Building operators gain detailed feedback, enabling them to precisely
calibrate operational parameters, depending on the needs of changing occupancy groups, while continuing to
operate building systems efficiently.
Disparities between how buildings are designed to operate and how they actually perform are common. Even
green buildings exhibit this gap between projected and actual performance. Numerous factors can explain the
incongruity: flaws with energy modeling, inadequate commissioning, inaccurate assumptions regarding occupants’
behavior, lack of coordination during the transition from construction to operations, or the everyday operation
of the building systems. To reduce such disparities, USGBC collects and analyzes performance data, comparing
building performance across the LEED portfolio to identify common traits among high and low performers, then
shares the findings to help LEED registrants improve their buildings’ performance.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
EA

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL ENERGY SOURCES THAT SERVE BUILDING

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Identify all sources of energy delivered to the building. Sources of energy that must be metered include
all energy supplied by a utility company or campus central plant, such as the following:
·· Electricity
·· Natural gas, synthetic natural gas, propane, fuel oil, diesel fuel, other fossil fuels
·· Biofuels
·· District chilled water, steam, and hot water
This prerequisite does not require metering of locally generated sources of energy that are dedicated to
the project building, such as the following:
·· Solar photovoltaic–generated electricity
·· Wind-generated electricity
·· Solar hot water generation for domestic hot water or heating hot water

STEP 2. DETERMINE SCOPE OF UTILITY COMPANY METERING

If all energy provided to the building is supplied by one or more utility companies and the utility meters
provide monthly consumption data, those meters meet the prerequisite requirements. However, the
project team may have little influence on the location and function of utility company meters, so the
building owner should confirm the following with the utility company:
·· Location: where the meter will be located (e.g., inside the building, or under or above ground outside)
·· Accessibility: how the building manager will reach the meter
·· Reporting: how the meter will be read (e.g., manually or via remote transmission)
If the utility company restricts access to the meter or uses proprietary remote reporting technology, the
project team may meet the prerequisite requirements by tracking energy usage through monthly billing.
To collect more frequent or accurate data, the team may elect to install a private meter downstream of
the utility company meter.

STEP 3. DETERMINE NUMBER, TYPE, AND LOCATION OF ALL METERS

If the project is not served by a utility company, or if the project uses multiple sources of energy,
additional meters may be required. Identify the location of primary building-level meters for each energy
source. If the project shares utility meters with other buildings or includes energy sources that are not
metered by the supplier, install submeters that will provide the required data.
·· Projects may use a single meter at the utility entrance or multiple submeters that account for whole
building energy use in aggregate (see Further Explanation, Examples).
 377

·· Areas within the project boundary that are served by separate utility feeds, such as parking garages,
must also be metered.
·· Some projects may elect to use multiple submeters to gain more insight into energy uses.
·· Select locations with easy access for reading and maintenance.
·· There are no requirements for the type of meters except that they be permanent (see Further
Explanation, Meter Selection).
·· Additional meters and meter capabilities will be needed if the project team pursues EA Credit
Advanced Energy Metering (see Related Credit Tips).
·· Meters installed by the owner must be maintained and calibrated per the manufacturer’s
recommendations.

STEP 4. TRACK ENERGY CONSUMPTION DATA

Begin tracking energy use when the project achieves LEED certification or at occupancy, whichever
occurs first.
·· Measure and record energy consumption on at least a monthly basis (see Further Explanation,
Measurement Intervals).
·· Consider tracking building occupancy, use, and maintenance concurrently to help place energy use
data in context and understand anomalies in usage patterns.

STEP 5. SHARE WHOLE-BUILDING ENERGY CONSUMPTION

Commit to sharing with USGBC the whole-project energy usage data acquired from permanent installed
meters in accordance with the prerequisite requirements. The project owner must commit to sharing

EA
energy use data with USGBC for five years in one of two ways:
·· USGBC-approved data template
·· Third-party data source
To see the most recent list of data-sharing pathways, visit USGBC’s credit library, at usgbc.org/credits.

BUILDING-LEVEL ENERGY METERING

FURTHER EXPLANATION

EXAMPLES
Example 1. An office building within an office park is directly served by the local electric utility, which has installed
a meter. The building receives monthly bills for the electricity consumed. The project meets the requirements for
electrical energy.

Example 2. The same office building receives chilled water from a central utility plant, which is owned and operated
by the office park management company. The office building pays a flat fee for chilled water, included as part of
the lease. The management company does not meter or invoice for actual chilled water consumption. To meet the
requirements for chilled water, the building must install a chilled water meter at each service point.

Example 3. A stand-alone data center building on a corporate campus receives electricity from a campus central
utility plant, and there are no meters at the electrical service entrances. The data center includes a sophisticated real-
time advanced energy monitoring and reporting system, comprising submeters on all end devices downstream of a
whole-building uninterruptable power supply (UPS) system backed up by diesel generators. The project meets the
requirements for electrical energy.

Example 4. An office building in the central business district of a large city shares a boiler system with another
building across the street. The building housing the boiler system sells steam to the other building, which pays for the
associated energy on a square-foot-prorated basis. To meet the requirements for steam, the building must install a
steam meter at each service point.
378

METER SELECTION
Utility-provided meters are typically regulated by code or law to establish their accuracy. Utility meters are often
called “revenue-grade” because their measurement results directly in a charge to the customer. However, the
accuracy of commercial meters and submeters available to building owners varies, and incorrect meter application
or installation can further affect measurement accuracy. Meter selection is an important component of this
prerequisite for owners to consider because of its implications for data quality.
Standards and regulations vary by location, and there is no single standard for revenue-grade accuracy (see
Referenced Standards). For building-level meters located at the fuel source point of entry, projects should aim to
provide meters that conform to one of the referenced resources or to a local law or regulation governing revenue-
grade metering, or are otherwise defensible as sufficiently accurate. For more information regarding system
submeters, see EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering.

METER LOCATION
For projects served by a utility, the utility generally owns the meter, so all energy required to power the building is
accounted for. If the meter is owned by the building, the best location for the purposes of determining building-level
energy consumption is generally at the point where energy enters the building.
The location of the meter affects whether conversion losses are included. Ideally, building-level measurement
will include losses from conversion and distribution of power within the building via transformer or heat exchangers.
For example, in a data center, the UPS is a point of power conversion, meaning the energy consumption metered at
EA

the UPS output does not include conversion losses; therefore the meter should be located upstream of the UPS.

MEASUREMENT INTERVALS
Projects with utility-owned energy meters may meet the monthly measurement requirement through one of two
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

strategies: either the utility provides monthly energy consumption data in the form of invoices or online reporting
tools, or building staff can read monthly cumulative energy usage directly from the meter.
Projects with owner-provided energy meters may meet the monthly measurement requirement through one of
two strategies: either data are collected through the building automation system or other energy-reporting software
on a monthly basis, or building staff can read monthly cumulative energy usage directly from the meter.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems (DES)
This prerequisite is not applicable to upstream equipment. However, it is applicable to the energy source entering
the building produced by upstream equipment. Building-level metering does not need to account for inefficiencies of
the central plant or energy delivery methods.

Additions
If the original building has building-level meters and the addition’s energy use is fully covered by those meters, the
requirements of the prerequisite are met. If the original building is not metered, the project needs to install meters to
cover only the entirety of the addition’s energy use to meet the prerequisite requirements.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 379

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Confirmation of permanently installed meters X

Letter of commitment X

Confirmation of data sharing source X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering. The advanced metering credit expands on the requirements of this
prerequisite by requiring building-level energy meters to have advanced capabilities; the credit also includes
additional submetering requirements. An early decision on whether to pursue the credit will help inform
prerequisite compliance.

EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning Option 1, Path 2. Data gathered from the metering system will help the
commissioning authority during the evaluation of energy and water performance.

EA
CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
·· This prerequisite is new.

BUILDING-LEVEL ENERGY METERING

·· Minimum program requirements: The ongoing energy tracking and reporting components were previously
required under MPR 6 for all LEED 2009 projects.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Electricity. American National Standards Institute, ANSI C12.20, Class 0.2 (± 0.2): ansi.org

Natural gas. American National Standards Institute, ANSI B109: ansi.org

Thermal energy (Btu meter or heat meter). EN Standard, EN-1434: cen.eu

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
380

DEFINITIONS
district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

revenue-grade meter a measurement tool designed to meet strict accuracy standards required by code or law.
Utility meters are often called revenue grade because their measurement directly results in a charge to the customer.

upstream equipment a heating or cooling system or control associated with the district energy system (DES) but
not part of the thermal connection or interface with the DES. Upstream equipment includes the thermal energy
conversion plant and all the transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal
energy to the project building or site.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 381

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE PREREQUISITE

Fundamental
Refrigerant Management
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

EA
INTENT

FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

To reduce stratospheric ozone depletion.

REQUIREMENTS
Do not use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in new heating, ventilating, air-conditioning, and
refrigeration (HVAC&R) systems. When reusing existing HVAC&R equipment, complete a comprehensive CFC
phase-out conversion before project completion. Phase-out plans extending beyond the project completion date will
be considered on their merits.
Existing small HVAC&R units (defined as containing less than 0.5 pound [225 grams] of refrigerant) and other
equipment, such as standard refrigerators, small water coolers, and any other equipment that contains less than 0.5
pound (225 grams) of refrigerant, are exempt.
382

BEHIND THE INTENT

Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and other refrigerants contribute to the depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer. The
thinning of this ozone layer is linked to many human health problems, such as skin cancer, to ecological effects, such
as reduced crop yields, and to damage to the marine food chain.1 To address these issues, the 1987 Montreal Protocol
established an international agreement to phase out use of the most harmful ozone-depleting substances, including
CFCs.
Production of CFCs was phased out in industrialized nations that signed the Montreal Protocol before December
1995 and in most other countries by 2010. Accordingly, new construction projects cannot install new CFC-based
refrigeration. However, CFCs may still be used in previously installed HVAC equipment.
To further progress, LEED requires that CFCs be phased out of existing building equipment before major
renovation projects are complete. Though both hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) and CFCs contribute to ozone
depletion, only CFCs must be addressed to meet this prerequisite.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
EA

STEP 1. SELECT NEW EQUIPMENT THAT CONTAINS NO CFC REFRIGERANTS

Identify all new HVAC&R equipment in the project that contains refrigerant and confirm that CFC
refrigerants are not used.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· The mechanical engineer is typically responsible for specifying equipment that meets the prerequisite
requirements.
·· Older or retrofit equipment with higher efficiency ratings are the most likely to have CFCs, but it is
important to check the refrigerant type for all new equipment.

Major Renovations

STEP 1. IDENTIFY CFCS IN EXISTING EQUIPMENT

Inventory all existing HVAC&R equipment in the project and determine whether any items use CFC
refrigerants.

STEP 2. PHASE OUT CFCS IN EXISTING EQUIPMENT

Replace or retrofit all existing CFC-based equipment in the base building HVAC&R before the project’s
completion. Existing small equipment with less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant is exempt from
the prerequisite requirements.
·· If the CFC phaseout cannot be completed before occupancy, see Further Explanation, Postoccupancy
CFC Phaseout.
·· Projects that retain CFCs past initial occupancy, even if a phase-out plan is in progress, are ineligible
for EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management. The credit calculations must account for all
refrigerants present at time of occupancy, except those contained in existing small equipment with
less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant.
·· Projects that retain CFCs after occupancy must reduce refrigerant leakage (see Further Explanation,
Minimizing Refrigerant Leakage).

1. Questions and Answers about the Environmental Effects of the Ozone Layer Depletion and Climate Change: 2010 Update. URL: http://
ozone.unep.org/Assessment_Panels/EEAP/eeap-report2010-FAQ.pdf
 383

FURTHER EXPLANATION

POSTOCCUPANCY CFC PHASEOUT

If all CFC-based equipment cannot be replaced or retrofitted before the project’s completion, adopt a CFC phase-
out plan with a schedule. Develop a narrative that describes the circumstances that prevent CFC phaseout before
the project concludes. Consider obtaining preapproval for a postoccupancy phase-out plan before submission for
certification.

MINIMIZING REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE

When CFC-containing equipment is retained, project teams must adhere to the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency Clean Air Act, Title VI, Section 608 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) to minimize leakage in
the building. Apply the following best practices in addition to the requirements of Section 608 (or local equivalent):
·· Require that the maximum amount of ozone-depleting compounds (including both CFCs and HCFCs) are
recycled during the servicing and disposal of air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment.
·· Set certification requirements for recycling and recovery equipment and technicians, and prohibit the sale of
refrigerants to uncertified technicians.
·· Require those who service or dispose of air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment to confirm with EPA (or
the authority having jurisdiction for projects outside the U.S.) that they have acquired recycling or recovery

EA
equipment and are complying with the requirements of the rule.
·· Require the repair of substantial leaks in air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment with a charge of greater
than 50 pounds (23 kilograms).
·· Establish safe disposal requirements to ensure removal of refrigerants from goods that enter the waste stream

FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

with the charge intact (e.g., refrigerators, room air-conditioners).
·· Prohibit individuals from knowingly venting ozone-depleting compounds that are used as refrigerants
(generally CFCs and HCFCs) into the atmosphere while maintaining, servicing, repairing, or disposing of air-
conditioning or refrigeration equipment (including appliances).

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems (DES)
All applicable downstream equipment must meet the prerequisite requirements. Either all applicable upstream
systems must be CFC-free, or a commitment must be in place to phase out CFC-based refrigerants with a firm
timeline of five years from substantial completion of the LEED project. Before phaseout, reduce annual leakage
of CFC-based refrigerants to 5% or less, following EPA Clean Air Act, Title VI, Rule 608 procedures governing
refrigerant management and reporting (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
384

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All equipment Phaseout required

Equipment type X

Refrigerant type X

CFC conversion or replacement plan X

Refrigerant leakage rate, quantity X

Phase-out completion date X

Confirmation that no new or existing equipment contains CFCs X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management. Selecting equipment that has low ozone depletion potential
(ODP) and global warming potential (GWP), as well as no CFCs, will help achieve the related credit.
EA

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Alternatives to CFC and HCFC refrigerants, such as HFC-410A, have
lower refrigerant impacts but may require higher levels of energy use. Some energy-efficient systems, like variable
refrigerant flow (VRF), may increase the overall refrigerant impact because of the relatively higher amount of
refrigerants their operation requires.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

None.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
U.S. EPA Clean Air Act, Title VI, Section 608, Refrigerant Recycling Rule: epa.gov/air/caa/

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerant a fluid, containing hydrocarbons, that absorbs heat from a reservoir
at low temperatures and rejects heat at higher temperatures. When emitted into the atmosphere, CFCs cause
depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer.

downstream equipment the heating and cooling systems, equipment, and controls located in the project building
or on the project site and associated with transporting the thermal energy of the district energy system (DES) into
heated and cooled spaces. Downstream equipment includes the thermal connection or interface with the DES,
secondary distribution systems in the building, and terminal units.
 385

upstream equipment a heating or cooling system or control associated with the district energy system (DES) but
not part of the thermal connection or interface with the DES. Upstream equipment includes the thermal energy
conversion plant and all the transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal
energy to the project building or site.

EA
FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EA

386
 387

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Enhanced
Commissioning
This credit applies to:
New Construction (2-6 points) Data Centers (2-6 points)
Core and Shell (2-6 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (2-6 points)
Schools (2-6 points) Hospitality (2-6 points)
Retail (2-6 points) Healthcare (2-6 points)

EA
ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
INTENT

To further support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a

project that meets the owner’s project requirements for energy, water,
indoor environmental quality, and durability.

REQUIREMENTS
Implement, or have in place a contract to implement, the following commissioning process activities in addition to
those required under EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification.

Commissioning Authority
·· The CxA must have documented commissioning process experience on at least two building projects with
a similar scope of work. The experience must extend from early design phase through at least 10 months of
occupancy;
·· The CxA may be a qualified employee of the owner, an independent consultant, or a disinterested
subcontractor of the design team.

OPTION 1. ENHANCED SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING (3-4 POINTS)

Path 1: Enhanced Commissioning (3 points)

Complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and renewable
energy systems and assemblies in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005 and ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007 for
HVAC&R systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability.
388

The commissioning authority must do the following:

·· Review contractor submittals.
·· Verify inclusion of systems manual requirements in construction documents.
·· Verify inclusion of operator and occupant training requirements in construction documents.
·· Verify systems manual updates and delivery.
·· Verify operator and occupant training delivery and effectiveness.
·· Verify seasonal testing.
·· Review building operations 10 months after substantial completion.
·· Develop an on-going commissioning plan.

Include all enhanced commissioning tasks in the OPR and BOD.

OR

Path 2: Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning (4 points)

Achieve Path 1.

AND

Develop monitoring-based procedures and identify points to be measured and evaluated to assess performance of
EA

energy- and water-consuming systems.

Include the procedures and measurement points in the commissioning plan. Address the following:
·· roles and responsibilities;
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· measurement requirements (meters, points, metering systems, data access);

·· the points to be tracked, with frequency and duration for trend monitoring;
·· the limits of acceptable values for tracked points and metered values (where appropriate, predictive
algorithms may be used to compare ideal values with actual values);
·· the elements used to evaluate performance, including conflict between systems, out-of-sequence operation of
systems components, and energy and water usage profiles;
·· an action plan for identifying and correcting operational errors and deficiencies;
·· training to prevent errors;
·· planning for repairs needed to maintain performance; and
·· the frequency of analyses in the first year of occupancy (at least quarterly).

Update the systems manual with any modifications or new settings, and give the reason for any modifications from
the original design.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. ENVELOPE COMMISSIONING (2 POINTS)

Fulfill the requirements in EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification as they apply to the
building’s thermal envelope in addition to mechanical and electrical systems and assemblies.
Complete the following commissioning process (CxP) activities for the building’s thermal envelope in
accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005 and the National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS) Guideline
3–2012, Exterior Enclosure Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process, as they relate to energy, water,
indoor environmental quality, and durability.

Commissioning authority must complete the following:

·· Review contractor submittals.
·· Verify inclusion of systems manual requirements in construction documents.
·· Verify inclusion of operator and occupant training requirements in construction documents.
 389

·· Verify systems manual updates and delivery.

·· Verify operator and occupant training delivery and effectiveness.
·· Verify seasonal testing.
·· Review building operations 10 months after substantial completion.
·· Develop an on-going commissioning plan.

DATA CENTERS ONLY

Projects that select Option 1 must complete the following commissioning process.

For small projects with peak cooling loads less than 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW), or a total computer room peak
cooling load less than 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW), the CxA must perform the following activities:
·· conduct at least one commissioning verification review of the owner’s project requirements, basis of design,
and design documents before mid-construction documents development;
·· back-check the review comments in all subsequent design submissions; and
·· conduct an additional full verification review at 95% completion of the design documents and basis of design.

For projects with peak cooling loads 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW) or more, or a total computer room peak cooling load

EA
600,000 Btu/h (175 kW) or more, the CxA must conduct at least three verification reviews of the basis of design:
·· one verification review of design documents before the start of design development;
·· one verification review of design documents before midconstruction documents; and

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
·· one final verification review of 100% complete design documents, verifying achievement of the owner’s
project requirements and adjudication of previous review comments.
390

BEHIND THE INTENT

Enhanced commissioning is a natural extension of the fundamental commissioning (Cx) process. It provides
owners, via the commissioning authority (CxA), further oversight and verification that the building will meet their
expectations and requirements beyond the first day of occupancy. Enhanced commissioning gives the CxA the
power to act as the owner’s advocate by conducting in-depth reviews of the basis of design, design documents, and
construction submittals. Training and a postconstruction verification visit are some of the enhancements that
contribute to ongoing quality building control and operations.
The CxA may make additions to the Cx plan to verify that the building operators will have the proper tools to
manage the building’s equipment efficiently and effectively. Monitoring-based commissioning (MBCx) gives the
building owner, operators, and the CxA a continual stream of information that helps them identify operational issues
as they occur, thereby saving time, money, and energy consumption over the lifetime of the building.
A second option in this credit is building envelope commissioning (BECx) to test and verify the building’s
thermal envelope, achieving better building performance and less energy expenditure over its lifetime. Adding
envelope commissioning ensures not only that active energy-consuming systems are considered but also that
passive load-defining envelope systems are understood and verified. Early introduction of BECx helps meet an
owner’s requirements for envelope performance through the review of design documents and contractor submittals.
Such actions can help prevent problems with envelope design and construction that would be costly or impossible
to address after construction. Additional benefits of BECx include improving occupants’ comfort through glare
control, infiltration testing, and reduced solar heat gain.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. SELECT ONE OR BOTH OPTIONS

Use input from the CxA and the project team and select one or both options. Review the building
type, the assumed occupancy type, and the project goals and scope. The team should be familiar with
the credit requirements so that any gaps in scope or skill can be addressed (see Further Explanation,
Planning the Cx Process and Choosing an Appropriate CxA).
·· Option 1 has two compliance paths.
°° Path 1, Enhanced Commissioning
°° Path 2, Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning. This is often appropriate for projects
that are energy-intensive and will benefit from real-time data and the ability to track trends. The
additional first costs may be offset by maintaining the proper energy usage over time.
·· Option 2 is beneficial for most projects but especially for those that are envelope dominated, located
in an extreme climate or microclimate, or subject to potential leakage or infiltration of contaminants.

STEP 2. UPDATE DOCUMENTS TO INCLUDE ENHANCED CX ACTIVITIES

Project documents should reflect the enhanced commissioning activities included in the project scope.
·· Update the owner’s project requirements (OPR), basis of design (BOD), and Cx plan (see Further
Explanation, Enhanced Commissioning Plan).
·· The CxA must ensure that the OPR, the BOD, and the Cx plan include all additional commissioning
activities that will be conducted throughout the design and construction phases of the project.

Option 1, Path 1. Enhanced Systems Commissioning

STEP 1. DEVELOP SYSTEMS MANUAL SCOPE AND FORMAT

During the design development phase, outline the scope and format for the project systems manual
to include all the information necessary to operate, maintain, and recommission all energy-consuming
systems within the building.
 391

·· The CxA is responsible for working with the owner to develop and outline the requirements of the
systems manual. Include operating staff in preparing the manual if the team is in place during design.
·· Information for the systems manual is generally collected during construction and after completion of
a project.
The basic scope and format of a systems manual are outlined in ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, Annex O;
the manual usually includes the following:
·· Executive summary
·· Owner’s project requirements
·· Basis of design
·· System single-line diagrams
·· Construction record documents and specifications
·· Approved submittals
·· As-built drawings
·· As-built sequence of operation
·· Original setpoints for all systems commissioned
·· Recommended schedule for recommissioning
·· Recommended schedule for sensor recalibration
·· Equipment operations and maintenance manuals
·· Equipment preventive maintenance schedules
·· Confirmation of completed training for the owner and occupants
·· Ongoing system optimization procedures

EA
·· Final commissioning report

STEP 2. DEVELOP TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

Create training requirements. Verify that they meet the scope of the owners’ requirement for the

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
operator training.
·· Training requirements must be completed before the bid documents are final.
·· Integrate requirements into the commissioning specifications, to be issued as part of the bid package
during the construction document phase.
Training requirements include the following:
·· List of those who should receive operational training, by position or name
·· List of systems that require operator training
·· Level of instruction required for each system
·· Determination of whether the training provided by the equipment manufacturer is acceptable
·· Tracking method to ensure that all required positions or persons receive training

STEP 3. ENSURE ENHANCED CX SCOPE ITEMS ARE INCLUDED IN CONSTRUCTION

DOCUMENTS
Confirm that the following items are included in the construction documents to be issued for bid:
·· System manual requirements
·· Operator and occupant training requirements

STEP 4. REVIEW CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS

Ensure ongoing compliance with the OPR, BOD, and Cx requirements by reviewing the HVAC&R
contractor’s submittals.
·· Conduct a submittal review by the CxA concurrently with the design team’s review or, at the latest,
before final acceptance by the engineer or architect of record.
·· The CxA must document all issues discovered during the review process in a log, to be distributed to
the project’s design and construction teams (see Further Explanation, Examples, Table 4).
·· The CxA must also confirm that all issues recorded in the log are addressed or resolved by the owner,
design, or construction teams.
·· Establish the submittal review process at the commissioning kickoff meeting included in the
fundamental commissioning steps.

STEP 5. VERIFY TRAINING

Confirm that the training program has been completed according to the owner’s requirements for all
commissioned equipment.
392

·· Training is required to ensure that the building’s operating staff is fully knowledgeable about
operating the equipment and systems. Typically, it is provided by the equipment manufacturer, general
contractor, or subcontractors.
·· A good training program covers all new HVAC&R equipment and associated controls as well as
monitoring equipment and software (if Option 1, Path 2 is pursued).
·· It is recommended that the training cover all operating scenarios to help the building engineering team
understand the most effective and efficient way to operate the building.
As outlined in ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, a robust training program will address the following:
·· Emergency instructions and procedures
·· Operation instructions and procedures
·· Troubleshooting procedures
·· Maintenance and inspection procedures
·· Repair procedures
·· Upkeep of the systems manual and associated maintenance documentation logs

STEP 6. DELIVER POSTCONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Complete and deliver the necessary operating documents and reports to the owner before building
occupancy to ensure a smooth transition from construction to operation. The project CxA must confirm
delivery, and the final package must include the following:
·· Up-to-date systems manual, including operations and maintenance manuals for all commissioned
equipment
·· Documentation of operator training on all commissioned systems
EA

·· Completed functional performance test reports

·· Up-to-date issues log detailing closed and open issues
·· Updated Cx plan that outlines commissioning completed to date, plan for seasonal testing, plan for
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

10-month operational review, and plan for addressing open issues identified after the initial round of
commissioning.

STEP 7. PERFORM SEASONAL TESTING, IF REQUIRED

Determine whether seasonal testing will be necessary, based on the project schedule.
·· Both projects that reach substantial completion during peak heating or cooling months and projects
that are occupied and operational before all equipment has been installed must create Cx plans and
complete all necessary tests.
·· The project CxA must be involved in seasonal testing, even if it occurs after the project is completed.
The results of seasonal testing and the issues log must be included in the final commissioning report
(preferred) or issued as an addendum to the owner.

STEP 8. REVIEW BUILDING OPERATIONS 10 MONTHS AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Perform the 10-month review of building operations after substantial completion to ensure that the
building is being operated according to the owners’ requirements. The 10-month review may include the
following:
·· Interviews with the operations and maintenance staff
·· Interviews with occupants
·· Status of outstanding commissioning-related issues
·· Comparison of current operations with the operations and maintenance plan that was documented as
part of EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning
·· Follow-up functional performance testing, when required
·· Trends in building operations, as indicated by the building automation system, system submeters, or
whole-building utility meters

STEP 9. DEVELOP ONGOING CX PLAN

Before or as part of the 10-month review of building operations, the CxA must issue an ongoing
commissioning plan. The plan should provide the building’s operating staff with procedures, blank test
scripts, and a schedule for ongoing Cx activities. It may be executed either by the building operators,
in addition to their normal preventive maintenance activities, or by an independent CxA (see Further
Explanation, Ongoing Commissioning Basics).
The plan must include the following:
·· Definition of the ongoing commissioning process
 393

·· Defined roles and responsibilities

·· Recommended schedule for recommissioning as-built systems
·· Continuous documentation and updating of building operating plan and current facility requirements
throughout the building’s lifetime
·· Blank testing materials, including functional performance tests for all commissioned as-built systems in
the building, as well as an issues log
·· Direction for testing new and retrofitted equipment

Option 1, Path 2. Enhanced and Monitoring-Based Commissioning

STEP 1. ACHIEVE OPTION 1, PATH 1

Ensure that the requirements for Path 1 have been met.

STEP 2. UPDATE CX PLAN TO INCLUDE MONITORING-BASED COMMISSIONING (MBCX)

REQUIREMENTS
During the design development phase, incorporate the MBCx requirements and activities into the
project’s Cx plan (see Further Explanation, Monitoring-Based Commissioning Basics).
·· Define analysis procedures, including frequency during year one.
·· Outline the evaluation process and determine the procedure for handling system conflicts, usage

EA
profiles, and out-of-sequence operations.
·· Include preventive planning and maintenance procedures necessary to meet performance goals.
·· Determine measurement requirements and decide whether predictive algorithms can be used in
conjunction with metered points.

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
STEP 3. CONFIRM THAT MBCX IS FULLY INCORPORATED INTO ENHANCED CX
Ensure that requirements for MBCx are included in all commissioning documents. Items to look for may
include the following:
·· Owner’s requirements, such as specific trends to track, reflected accurately in the engineer’s BOD
·· Metering and monitoring required for MBCx, included in the BOD
·· Single-line or riser diagrams for location of building and system meters
·· Controls sequences for specification of appropriate monitoring points
·· Cx specifications for contractors and building operators
·· Submittal reviews of meters, energy analysis software, and drawings of controls for compliance with
the owner’s MBCx metering and monitoring requirements
·· Creation and completion of prefunctional tests for MBCx-related equipment, such as meters and
energy analysis software programs, by the CxA and contractors
·· MBCx operator education regarding measurement techniques, energy analysis software tools, fault
detection and fault resolution, all incorporated into training requirements

STEP 4. IMPLEMENT MBCX PLAN

Execute, concurrently whenever possible, MBCx monitoring and analysis with the functional performance
testing completed for EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning.
The equipment and tools required for MBCx must be installed, and the electrical and controls contractor
should submit construction checklists for review by the CxA. The benefits of implementing MBCx
functional testing after construction but before occupancy include the following:
·· More robust documentation of functional performance tests
·· Verification that the energy meters and monitoring points have been properly installed and
programmed
·· CxA oversight of monitoring procedures and energy analysis, to ensure that the owner’s requirements
for ongoing monitoring are executed correctly
·· Verification that energy analysis software tools, if installed, are appropriately identifying faults and
producing the correct reports
It is recommended that the CxA confirm execution of the MBCx commissioning plan during the 10-month
review. Confirmation of execution includes the following:
·· Review of metering and trend logs
394

·· Review of the issues log showing results of the MBCx

·· Confirmation of issue resolution
·· Confirmation of ongoing operator training
·· Updating of the systems manual with any modifications or new settings that differ from design, with
explanations for the changes
·· See Further Explanation, Bridging the Gap between LEED BD+C and LEED O+M.

Option 2. Envelope Commissioning

Incorporate envelope commissioning into the Cx plan by extending the requirements of EA Prerequisite
Fundamental Commissioning and Verification to cover the building’s thermal envelope and completing
EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning (Option 1, Path 1) as it relates to the building envelope. It is not
necessary to complete the enhanced commissioning for building systems to meet the requirements of
this option. However, doing so will help to ensure a better-performing building.
Ensure that the building envelope is fully accounted for in all commissioning documents and testing
procedures (see Further Explanation, Building Envelope Commissioning Basics).
EA

FURTHER EXPLANATION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

PLANNING THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS

Table 1 outlines the tasks required to meet the intent of EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and
Verification, EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning, Option 1 Path 1, Option 1 Path 2, and Option 2, as well as suggested
timing.

TABLE 1. Commissioning activities

Enhanced
Phase Cx task Responsible party Cx MBCx BECx
Cx

Predesign Develop OPR Owner X X X X

Schematic design Develop BOD, including Design team X X X X

envelope requirements

Include general monitoring, Design team X

metering, and trending
requirements

Design Engage CxA Owner X X X X

Documents Develop initial CxA X X X X

commissioning plan

Include monitoring CxA X

requirements, equipment

Include envelope CxA X

requirements

Conduct OPR, BOD, and CxA, owner, design X X X X

design document review team
 395

TABLE 1. (CONTINUED) Commissioning activities

Enhanced
Phase Cx task Responsible party Cx MBCx BECx
Cx

Documents Prepare systems manual CxA, owner X X X

outline

Include monitoring CxA, owner X

requirements, equipment

Include envelope CxA, owner X

requirements

Document training CxA, owner X X X

requirements

Update OPR and BOD as CxA, owner, design X X X X

necessary team

Construction Documents Issue Cx specifications for CxA X X X X

inclusion in bid/permit
documents

Include enhanced Cx CxA X X X

requirements

Include monitoring-based Cx CxA X

EA
requirements

Include envelope based Cx CxA X

requirements

Update OPR and BOD as CxA, owner, design X X X X

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
necessary team

Conduct design review CxA, design team X X X X

(recommended)

Construction Update OPR and BOD as CxA, owner, design X X X X

necessary team

Perform prefunctional CxA X X X X

inspections

Complete submittal reviews CxA X X X

concurrently with or before
acceptance by design team

Update OPR, BOD, Cx plan CxA X X X X

and systems manual as
necessary

Issue owner’s training CxA to contractor X X X

requirements

Issue construction checklists CxA X X X X

Issue functional performance CxA, contractor X X X X

test scripts for contractor
review

Issue/review verified TAB Contractor, CxA X X X X

report

Issue/review completed Contractor, CxA X X X X

construction checklists

Execute functional CxA, contractor X X X X

performance tests

Document issues in issues CxA X X X X

log

Compile final systems manual CxA X X X

396

TABLE 1. (CONTINUED) Commissioning activities

Enhanced
Phase Cx task Responsible party Cx MBCx BECx
Cx

Construction Complete final CxA X X X X

commissioning report

Verify training plan has been CxA, contractor, X X X

implemented building operators

Occupancy and Complete Cx report CxA X X X X

operations
Compile operations and CxA X X X X
maintenance plan

Compile final systems manual CxA X X X

Perform seasonal testing CxA, contractor, X X X

building operators

Perform 10-month review CxA, contractor, X X X

building operators

Develop ongoing Cx plan CxA, building X X X

operators
EA

BECx = building envelope commissioning process

BOD = basis of design
Cx = commissioning process
CxA = commissioning authority
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

MBCx = monitoring-based commissioning process

OPR = owner’s project requirements

CHOOSING AN APPROPRIATE CXA

Review the guidance on qualifications for commissioning authorities in EA Prerequisite Fundamental
Commissioning, including Table 1, Who can be the CxA? The following points also apply:
·· Different CxAs can be engaged to complete the fundamental, enhanced, monitoring, or envelope portions
of the commissioning scope. However, one CxA must oversee and coordinate all activities and deliverables
provided by the commissioning team.
·· The CxAs can be employees of the same company or employees of separate firms, provided they all meet the
basic requirements for the task to which they are assigned.
·· Not all CxAs are qualified to perform all aspects and types of commissioning activities. For example, HVAC&R
commissioning specialists may not have the experience or equipment to commission building envelopes in
accordance with the NIBS guideline. The owner and the design team must carefully review the qualifications of
all potential CxAs.

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING PLAN

The CxA develops the commissioning plan with input from the project team. Updates during the design and
construction process are the primary responsibility of the CxA. A sample table of contents for the enhanced
commissioning plan is provided in ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, Informative Annex G, Commissioning Plan. The
recommended components of the commissioning plan are the following:
·· Commissioning program overview
°° Goals and objectives
°° General project information
°° Scope of commissioning
»» Systems (Option 1, Path 1)
»» Monitoring, which may include points, meters, and trending logs (Option 1, Path 2)
»» Envelope (Option 2)
»» Commissioning team
 397

°° Team members, roles, and responsibilities

°° Communication protocol, coordination, meetings, and management
·· Commissioning process activities
°° Reviewing the OPR
°° Reviewing the BOD
°° Documenting the systems commissioning review process (Option 1, Path 1)
°° Documenting the monitoring-based commissioning review process (Option 1, Path 2)
°° Documenting the envelope commissioning review process (Option 2)
°° Developing the systems manual
°° Developing systems functional test procedures documentation
°° Verifying system performance via functional performance testing
°° Reporting deficiencies and the resolution process: monitoring system analysis (Option 1, Path 2) must be
conducted at least quarterly on an ongoing basis during occupancy.
°° Verifying the training of operations personnel: monitoring system training (Option 1, Path 2) must be
conducted on an ongoing during building occupancy.
°° Reviewing building operation after 10 months of operations

ONGOING COMMISSIONING BASICS

EA
Ongoing Cx, an extension of enhanced Cx process, is essentially a repetition of the functional performance testing
and reporting procedures that occurred immediately after construction, during the initial occupancy and operations
phase. Ongoing testing is required to ensure that the building continues to perform according to the OPR, BOD,
and approved design and construction documents. The commissioning activities should occur approximately twice

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
a year, to correspond with the summer and winter seasons. Those who conduct the Cx activities should use the
functional performance tests and issues log templates provided as part of the original Cx report.
Ongoing Cx activities can be conducted either by in-house operating staff (in addition to their normal preventive
maintenance activities) or by a third-party CxA who is responsible for all testing and issues reporting. Using
the operating staff to perform the functional performance tests may be beneficial to their understanding of the
building operations. However, as the facility requirements change or as systems are retrofitted over the lifetime
of the building, a CxA may need to be retained to ensure all test scripts and procedures are up to date and properly
documented.

MONITORING-BASED COMMISSIONING BASICS

Monitoring-based commissioning is the integration of three components: permanent energy monitoring systems,
real-time energy analysis, and ongoing commissioning. Ongoing Cx is a component of MBCx but should not be
confused with it. When executed independently or without MBCx capabilities, ongoing Cx is a process of discrete
functional performance testing and reporting over the lifetime of a building. In comparison, MBCx is an ongoing
performance analysis of an operational building that provides real-time equipment performance information to the
building operators. In other words, MBCx allows the user to track energy consumption, detect faulty equipment
operations, and identify unusual energy or power consumption patterns as they occur.
MBCx can be accomplished via systems submetering, operational points trending, and real-time analyses, such
as fault detection and sequence verification. The real-time analyses can be performed by either a service provider
or an on-site energy manager who uses software to monitor data from building meters and the building automation
system.

Additions to the commissioning plan may include the following:

·· Roles and responsibilities for maintaining an MBCx plan throughout the first year of occupancy
·· Monitoring requirements
°° Meters and meter locations
°° Points to be tracked
°° Frequency and duration of trend monitoring
°° Software
°° Hardware
°° Data access
398

·· Limits of acceptable values for tracked points and metered values

·· Specification of fault diagnostics or predictive algorithms for tracked points and metered values, if appropriate
·· Elements used to evaluate performance, including the following:
°° Conflict between systems, such as simultaneous heating and cooling
°° Out-of-sequence operation of systems components
°° Unexpected energy and water usage profiles
·· Action plan for identifying and correcting operational errors and deficiencies, including the ongoing
documentation of an issues log
·· Ongoing operator and occupant training to prevent errors
·· Planning ongoing monitoring device calibration to maintain performance
·· Frequency of analyses in the first year of occupancy (at least quarterly)

MBCx is most cost-effective when the metering and energy analysis software are integrated into the initial design of
a building.

BRIDGING THE GAP BETWEEN LEED BD+C AND LEED O+M

Much of the documentation created for EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning, EA Credit Enhanced
Commissioning, and the LEED certification process in general can be the basis for documenting compliance for
LEED O+M, particularly EA Prerequisite Existing Building Best Management Practices, EA Credit Existing Building
EA

Commissioning, Analysis, EA Credit Existing Building Commissioning, Implementation, and EA Credit Ongoing
Commissioning.
Table 2 identifies which documents created during a building’s design and construction phases can be adapted
and integrated into an ongoing building management plan.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

TABLE 2. Comparison of LEED BD+C and LEED O+M documentation

LEED BD+C document LEED O+M document Example components

Owner’s project requirements Current facility requirements • Building occupancy schedule

• Lighting level requirements
• Space use requirements

Systems manual Operations and maintenance plan • Sequence of operation

• Preventive maintenance plan
• HVAC equipment setpoints
• Equipment run-times
• Operations and maintenance manuals

Basis of design Systems narrative Descriptions of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing

and envelope systems and equipment

If MBCx is implemented during initial operations and occupancy, project teams that apply for LEED O+M
certification will find it easier to achieve the energy conservation tracking and measurement requirements of EA
Credit Existing Building Commissioning, Implementation, and EA Credit Ongoing Commissioning.

BUILDING ENVELOPE COMMISSIONING BASICS

Building envelope commissioning (BECx) is used to validate that the design and performance of materials,
components, assemblies and systems achieve the objectives and requirements of the owner. The process comprises
modeling, observing, testing, documenting, and verifying materials, components, assemblies, and systems to
validate that both their use and installation meet the owner’s requirements. It uses performance-oriented practices
and procedures to verify that the project is achieving the owner’s project requirements.
To complete BECx, the CxA should have access to the equipment required for completing all envelope-testing
 399

activities, including the following:

·· Infrared camera
·· Tracer smoke
·· Water bottle
·· Calibrated water hose
·· Moisture meter
·· Field mock-up
·· Blower door assembly

Examples of envelope systems tests include the following:

·· Air infiltration
·· Water infiltration
·· Exhaust reentrainment
·· Thermal performance
·· Building envelope pressure
·· Building envelope air leakage
·· Daylighting glare control

Ideally, the CxA should have experience working with different envelope types and buildings of various sizes. The

EA
type of envelope and size of building will determine what tests are conducted and the equipment required.
For example, performing a blower door test to determine the air-tightness of an envelope may be appropriate for
a 20,000-square-foot (1 860-square-meter) facility with brick façade and recessed windows. However, this type of
test would be impractical for a 500,000-square-foot (46 450-square meter) commercial building with a curtain wall

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
façade. For large structures, field mock-up or thermal imaging of the installed façade may better prevent or detect
envelope leaks.
See NIBS Guideline 3–2006 2012 Building Enclosure Commissioning Process BECx, Annex U for additional
guidance regarding envelope systems testing equipment and procedures.

EXAMPLES

TABLE 3. Example training plan

Hours Training Theory of Hands-on

System, subsystem Spec Section Remarks
per class date(s) operation demo

Rooftop unit 01783 - O&M 2 4/5/2011 YES YES Engage factory-authorized service
representative to train maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain rooftop units

Makeup air unit 01783 - O&M 1 4/5/2011 YES YES Engage factory-authorized service
representative to train maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain the makeup air unit

Kitchen exhaust fans 01783 - O&M 0.5 4/5/2011 YES YES Engage factory-authorized service
representative to train maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain kitchen exhaust fans

General exhaust fans 01783 - O&M 0.5 4/5/2011 YES YES Engage factory-authorized service
representative to train maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain general in-line exhaust fans

Packaged booster 01783 - O&M 0.5 4/26/2011 YES YES Engage factory-authorized service
pumps representative to train maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain controls and pumps
400

TABLE 4. Example submittal review log

Design team
Final review comment,
Comment Sheet Comment comments,
status
response

1 M2-1 FF 1C and 2C call for 30 kBtu/h at 3 gpm with 180°F Acceptable to Item closed
entering and 160°F leaving and 300 cfm. Transmittal engineer
312037-0031 states 34.8 kBtu/h at 3 gpm with 180°F and
156.82°F leaving, and 320 cfm. Designer to comment if
slight deviation in parameters is acceptable.

2 M2-1 FC 1F and CU 1F specified as 12 mbh at 95°F entering air Acceptable to Item closed
temperature to the condenser. Transmittal 312037-0026 engineer
shows 11.9 kBtu/h at AHRI standard conditions. Design to
comment if rating is acceptable.

3 M1-1C AV 1 minimum cfm specified as 600, heating as 4,000. Noted by Final approved submittal
Transmittal 312037-0022 lists each as 800 cfm. Designer engineer on needed
to check cfm discrepancy. submittal

4 M1-1C AV 2 minimum cfm specified as 360, heating as 2,400. Noted by Final approved submittal
Transmittal 312037-0022 lists each as 800 cfm. Designer engineer on needed
to check cfm discrepancy. submittal

5 M1-1C TB-CO3 minimum cooling cfm specified as 100 on M1-1c. Noted by Final approved submittal
Transmittal 312037-0022 states as 250 cfm. Designer to engineer on needed
EA

confirm fm discrepancy. submittal

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Core and Shell

Systems to be commissioned include only those that are included in the design team’s scope of work.

Data Centers
For small projects with computer room peak cooling loads of less than 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW), or a total
computer room peak cooling load of less than 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW), the CxA must perform the following
activities:
·· During the design development or early construction documents phase, review the OPR, BOD, and design
documents.
·· Review the design documents and the BOD at 95% completion of the design documents.
·· From construction documents through construction, back-check the review comments to ensure that they
were addressed.

For projects with peak cooling loads of 2,000,000 Btu/h (600 kW) or more, or a total computer room peak cooling
load of 600,000 Btu/h (175 kW) or more, the CxA must conduct at least three verification reviews of the BOD:
·· During schematic design, conduct one verification review of design documents.
·· During the design documents or early construction documents phase, complete one verification review of
design documents.
·· At the end of the construction documents phase, conduct one final verification review of 100% complete
design documents, verifying achievement of the OPR and adjudication of previous review comments.

Functional testing for data centers often includes rigorous failure mode testing, including prime power backup,
also known as mission-critical functional testing. The requirements of this type of commissioning often exceed the
requirements of this credit.
The CxA should work with the owner to ensure that the requirements of the mission critical testing are
appropriately addressed in the OPR. Additionally, the CxA should be aware of the mission-critical component of
commissioning a data center and account for those differences in the contract with the owner.
Mission-critical testing for a data center can be completed by a CxA other than the CxA who completes the
fundamental and enhanced commissioning.
 401

Healthcare
Health care facilities may have additional testing requirements for life safety equipment, including prime power
backup that would not be addressed under the LEED fundamental and enhanced commissioning scope of work.
The CxA should work with the owner to ensure that the requirements of the life safety testing are appropriately
addressed in the OPR. Additionally, the CxA should be aware of the life safety component of commissioning a health
care facility and account for those differences in the contract with the owner.
Life safety testing for a health care facility can be completed by a CxA other than the CxA who completes the
fundamental and enhanced commissioning.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems (DES)

All downstream equipment is included in the scope of this credit. Such equipment includes heat exchangers, steam
pressure reduction stations, pumps, valves, pipes, building electrical services, and controls.

All upstream equipment associated with serving the building is included in the scope if the project is taking credit
for the efficiency of the DES under EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance using Option 1 (Path 2 or 3); if not,
upstream equipment is excluded from the scope of this credit.
Commissioning applies only to the DES services used by the project building. For example, if the building is using
only the heating services of a district heating and cooling plant, only the heating systems of the DES must be included

EA
in the scope. However, commissioning of upstream equipment applies to that entire portion of the DES, including
both the central plant and the transmission and distribution systems.

All upstream DES equipment associated with serving the project building subject to EA Credit Enhanced

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
Commissioning requirements may show compliance using either of the following approaches, depending on
whether the DES is “new” or “preexisting.”

New DES. If the DES is new, being substantially upgraded, or has new additions, show that commissioning or
recommissioning of all relevant DES equipment has taken place within three years of the date of the project
building’s substantial completion.
A DES that is three years old or less at the date of the project building’s substantial completion is considered
“new” construction and should be commissioned in accordance with the requirements of EA Credit Enhanced
Commissioning. Similarly, any new equipment additions to an existing plant along with any controls or plant
distribution equipment that have changed as a result of the additions must be commissioned in accordance with the
requirements of EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning.

Preexisting DES. If the DES is in operation, show that preventive maintenance, corrective maintenance, and
efficiency monitoring programs have been in place for all relevant DES equipment, ensuring that its energy efficiency
meets or exceeds the DES design intent. Show that DES performance has been tested, recorded, and improved as
needed under those programs within the past three years. Any reasonable efficiency metric may be used for this
purpose, such as overall system coefficient of performance or kW/ton.
A DES more than three years old with no substantial new equipment additions is considered “preexisting.” Show
proof that it was commissioned in accordance with the requirements of LEED O+M EA Credit Existing Building
Commissioning—Implementation within the past three years or that the requirements of LEED O+M EA Credit
Existing Building Commissioning—Ongoing Commissioning have been applied.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
402

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1, Path 1 Option 1, Path 2 Option 2

List of all tasks completed as part of Cx activities X X X

Training outline and participation list X X X

Confirmation of systems manual delivery X X X

Ongoing Cx plan X X X

Inclusion of monitoring and tracking in Cx plan X

Inclusion of envelope in Cx plan X

Verification of additional reviews per Data Center

X X
requirements (data centers only)

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification. Enhanced commissioning is an extension of
fundamental commissioning and cannot be completed if the scope of fundamental commissioning is not fulfilled.
EA

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Renewable energy systems installed on site must be commissioned
under this credit.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EA Credit Demand Response. Meeting the requirements for demand response will help project teams achieve the
ongoing commissioning portions of this credit.

EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering. Although not a requirement of this credit, achievement of the related credit
will ease the execution of the MBCx plan. Conversely, if a project is pursuing the related credit, MBCx is a powerful
tool for extracting additional value from the existing advanced metering system.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This credit now includes monitoring-based commissioning and building envelope commissioning options.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE Guideline 0–2005, The Commissioning Process: ashrae.org

ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process: ashrae.org

NIBS Guideline 3–2012, Exterior Enclosure Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process: nibs.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
 403

DEFINITIONS
basis of design (BOD) the information necessary to accomplish the owner’s project requirements, including
system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes,
standards, regulations, and guidelines

commissioning (Cx) the process of verifying and documenting that a building and all of its systems and assemblies
are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the owner’s project requirements

commissioning authority (CxA) the individual designated to organize, lead, and review the completion of
commissioning process activities. The CxA facilitates communication among the owner, designer, and contractor to
ensure that complex systems are installed and function in accordance with the owner’s project requirements.

district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

downstream equipment the heating and cooling systems, equipment, and controls located in the project building
or on the project site and associated with transporting the thermal energy of the district energy system (DES) into
heated and cooled spaces. Downstream equipment includes the thermal connection or interface with the DES,
secondary distribution systems in the building, and terminal units.

EA
operations and maintenance (O&M) plan a plan that specifies major system operating parameters and limits,
maintenance procedures and schedules, and documentation methods necessary to demonstrate proper operation
and maintenance of an approved emissions control device or system

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
owner’s project requirements (OPR) a written document that details the ideas, concepts, and criteria determined
by the owner to be important to the success of the project

systems manual provides the information needed to understand, operate, and maintain the systems and assemblies
within a building. It expands the scope of the traditional operating and maintenance documentation and is compiled
of multiple documents developed during the commissioning process, such as the owner’s project requirements,
operation and maintenance manuals, and sequences of operation.

upstream equipment a heating or cooling system or control associated with the district energy system (DES) but
not part of the thermal connection or interface with the DES. Upstream equipment includes the thermal energy
conversion plant and all the transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal
energy to the project building or site.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EA

404
 405

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Optimize Energy
Performance
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–18 points) Data Centers (1–18 points)
Core and Shell (1–18 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–18 points)
Schools (1–16 points) Hospitality (1–18 points)
Retail (1–18 points) Healthcare (1–20 points)

EA
OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE
INTENT

To achieve increasing levels of energy performance beyond the

prerequisite standard to reduce environmental and economic harms
associated with excessive energy use.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE

Establish an energy performance target no later than the schematic design phase. The target must be established as
kBtu per square foot-year (kW per square meter-year) of source energy use.

Choose one of the options below.

OPTION 1. WHOLE-BUILDING ENERGY SIMULATION (1–18 POINTS EXCEPT SCHOOLS AND

HEALTHCARE, 1–16 POINTS SCHOOLS, 1–20 POINTS HEALTHCARE)

Analyze efficiency measures during the design process and account for the results in design decision making. Use
energy simulation of efficiency opportunities, past energy simulation analyses for similar buildings, or published
data (e.g., Advanced Energy Design Guides) from analyses for similar buildings.
Analyze efficiency measures, focusing on load reduction and HVAC-related strategies (passive measures are
acceptable) appropriate for the facility. Project potential energy savings and holistic project cost implications related
to all affected systems.
406

Project teams pursuing the Integrative Process credit must complete the basic energy analysis for that credit
before conducting the energy simulation.
Follow the criteria in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance to demonstrate a percentage improvement
in the proposed building performance rating compared with the baseline. Points are awarded according to Table 1.

TABLE 1. Points for percentage improvement in energy performance

Points (except
Points
New Construction Major Renovation Core and Shell Schools, Points (Schools)
(Healthcare)
Healthcare)

6% 4% 3% 1 3 1

8% 6% 5% 2 4 2

10% 8% 7% 3 5 3

12% 10% 9% 4 6 4

14% 12% 11% 5 7 5

16% 14% 13% 6 8 6

18% 16% 15% 7 9 7

20% 18% 17% 8 10 8

EA

22% 20% 19% 9 11 9

24% 22% 21% 10 12 10

26% 24% 23% 11 13 11

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

29% 27% 26% 12 14 12

18% 16% 15% 7 9 7

20% 18% 17% 8 10 8

22% 20% 19% 9 11 9

24% 22% 21% 10 12 10

26% 24% 23% 11 13 11

29% 27% 26% 12 14 12

32% 30% 29% 13 15 13

35% 33% 32% 14 16 14

38% 36% 35% 15 17 15

42% 40% 39% 16 18 16

46% 44% 43% 17 19 -

50% 48% 47% 18 20 -

 407

RETAIL ONLY

For all process loads, define a clear baseline for comparison with the proposed improvements. The baselines in
Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, represent industry standards and may be used without additional documentation. Calculate
the baseline and design as follows:
·· Appliances and equipment. For appliances and equipment not covered in Tables 1–4, indicate hourly energy use
for proposed and budget equipment, along with estimated daily use hours. Use the total estimated appliance/
equipment energy use in the energy simulation model as a plug load. Reduced use time (schedule change) is
not a category of energy improvement in this credit. ENERGY STAR ratings and evaluations are a valid basis
for performing this calculation.
·· Display lighting. For display lighting, use the space-by-space method of determining allowed lighting power
under ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010, with errata (or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for
projects outside the U.S.), to determine the appropriate baseline for both the general building space and the
display lighting.
·· Refrigeration. For hard-wired refrigeration loads, model the effect of energy performance improvements with a
simulation program designed to account for refrigeration equipment.

··
·· OR
OPTION 2. PRESCRIPTIVE COMPLIANCE: ASHRAE ADVANCED ENERGY DESIGN GUIDE

EA
(1–6 POINTS)

To be eligible for Option 2, projects must use Option 2 in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.

OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE

Implement and document compliance with the applicable recommendations and standards in Chapter 4, Design
Strategies and Recommendations by Climate Zone, for the appropriate ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design
Guide and climate zone. For projects outside the U.S., consult ASHRAE/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2010,
Appendixes B and D, to determine the appropriate climate zone.

ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Small to Medium Office Buildings
·· Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors, and continuous air barriers (1 point)
·· Building envelope, glazing: vertical fenestration (1 point)
·· Interior lighting, including daylighting and interior finishes (1 point)
·· Exterior lighting (1 point)
·· Plug loads, including equipment and controls (1 point)

ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Medium to Large Box Retail Buildings
·· Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors, and vestibules (1 point)
·· Building envelope, glazing: fenestration - all orientations (1 point)
·· Interior lighting, excluding lighting power density for sales floor (1 point)
·· Additional interior lighting for sales floor (1 point)
·· Exterior lighting (1 point)
·· Plug loads, including equipment choices and controls (1 point)

ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for K–12 School Buildings
·· Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, and doors (1 point)
·· Building envelope, glazing: vertical fenestration (1 point)
·· Interior lighting, including daylighting and interior finishes (1 point)
·· Exterior lighting (1 point)
·· Plug loads, including equipment choices, controls, and kitchen equipment (1 point)
408

ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide for Large Hospitals

·· Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, doors, vestibules, and continuous air barriers (1 point)
·· Building envelope, glazing: vertical fenestration (1 point)
·· Interior lighting, including daylighting (form or nonform driven) and interior finishes (1 point)
·· Exterior lighting (1 point)
·· Plug loads, including equipment choices, controls, and kitchen equipment (1 point)

RETAIL ONLY

Meet the requirements of Option 2 and comply with the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, for 90% of
total energy consumption for all process equipment.

DATA CENTERS
Whole-Building Energy Simulation
Analyze efficiency measures focused on IT load reduction and HVAC-related strategies (air-side economizers, hot
aisle–cold aisle, etc.). Project the potential energy savings and cost implications for all affected systems.
Follow the criteria in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance to demonstrate a percentage improvement
in the proposed performance rating compared with the baseline.
EA

Use energy cost savings from both the building and IT to determine the total percentage reduction.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 409

BEHIND THE INTENT

See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Behind the Intent.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. REVIEW REQUIREMENTS FOR EA PREREQUISITE MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

·· Ensure that the related prerequisite will be achieved before pursuing the credit.
·· Follow the initials steps of the prerequisite.
·· The option pursued in the prerequisite must also be pursued in the credit.
·· Projects that achieved the prerequisite under Option 3 (Prescriptive Compliance: Advanced Buildings™
Core Performance™ Guide) are not eligible to pursue this credit.

Option 1. Whole-Building Energy Simulation

EA
STEP 1. REVIEW PREREQUISITE AND CREDIT REQUIREMENTS
Read the requirements and referenced standards for both the related prerequisite and this credit
before beginning the simulation. If pursuing the Integrative Process Credit, identify the requirements for
concept-level energy modeling to determine how to coordinate the overall model development.

OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE

STEP 2. CONFIRM ENERGY USE TARGET FOR BUILDING
Ensure that an energy use intensity (EUI) target has been developed, as outlined in the prerequisite. For
credit compliance, the target must be established as EUI in kBtu per square foot-year (kWh per square
meter-year) of source energy use.

STEP 3. DEVELOP PRELIMINARY ENERGY MODEL

Determine whether preliminary energy models will be prepared, as outlined in the prerequisite. A
preliminary model may satisfy the credit requirement for analysis of energy efficiency measures and can
assist with estimating the energy implications of early design alternatives.
·· A concept model prepared for compliance with the Integrative Process Credit can form the basis for
the preliminary energy model.
·· Project teams must perform an analysis of efficiency measures. Past analyses of similar buildings or
published data, such as the ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guides (AEDGs), may also be used to
guide decision making in lieu of a preliminary energy model, though the results will be less project-
specific.
·· The AEDGs were designed around specific building types and sizes by climate zone, making the
recommendations most appropriate for projects with attributes similar to those specified types, sizes,
and locations.

STEP 4. MODEL POTENTIAL HVAC SYSTEM TYPES

Create an energy model of the proposed design, or expand the scope of the preliminary model, to
analyze HVAC system alternatives early in the design process (see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance, Further Explanation, Modeling Potential HVAC Systems).

STEP 5. UPDATE PROPOSED MODEL

Throughout the design process, add details to the proposed building model to reflect changes that may
affect the energy efficiency of other systems (see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further
Explanation, Building the Proposed Energy Model).
410

STEP 6. UPDATE BASELINE AND PROPOSED ENERGY MODELS BASED ON FINAL DESIGN
DOCUMENTS
Update the proposed and baseline energy models to reflect final construction details and specifications
(see Further Explanation, Finalizing the Energy Models for Credit Compliance) and review the table of
common mistakes to avoid (see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation,
Common Issues with Energy Modeling).

STEP 7. DETERMINE ENERGY COST SAVINGS

Compare the proposed model with the baseline model to determine the anticipated energy cost savings
(see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Energy Cost Savings). Apply
any savings from on-site renewable energy systems after minimum compliance has been demonstrated
(see Further Explanation, Applying Renewable Energy Savings).

Option 2. ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guides (AEDGs)

STEP 1. CONFIRM PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS

Ensure that all HVAC and service water-heating equipment meets the requirements of the appropriate
AEDG, determined in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.

STEP 2. DETERMINE WHICH POINTS TO PURSUE UNDER AEDGS

EA

Consider the AEDG requirements for additional points.

·· Points can be achieved for building glazing and envelope, including opaque elements such as roofs
and walls, interior and exterior lighting, and plug loads.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Retail projects are subject to the prescriptive retail criteria listed in Appendix 3, Tables 1–4, but have an
additional point opportunity addressing sales floor lighting.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

FINALIZING THE ENERGY MODELS FOR CREDIT COMPLIANCE

Update the proposed model based on the information and specifications for systems, assemblies, and equipment
in the final construction documents (see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation,
Finalizing the Energy Models). Ensure that all changes made to the design have been captured in the model. If changes
occur during construction that could affect efficiency measures, the model information will have to be updated
accordingly. Value engineering exercises may affect building efficiency as well as credit achievement.
Document the energy modeling input assumptions for receptacle and process loads. These loads should be
modeled accurately to reflect the actual expected energy consumption of the building (see EA Prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Exceptional Calculation Method).
Verify the final energy cost savings. Evaluate the energy savings by end use for reasonableness based on the
differences in the modeling inputs between the baseline and proposed models. Ensure that renewable energy savings
have been properly credited (see Further Explanation, Applying Renewable Energy Savings).

APPLYING RENEWABLE ENERGY SAVINGS

Only projects pursuing Option 1 of this credit may count savings from renewable energy systems.
Calculate the total amount of energy generated by the system and convert this value into the equivalent cost
using either utility rates or virtual energy rates (see EA Credit Renewable Energy Production). Apply the equivalent
cost directly to the energy model through the simulation software, or subtract it from the final energy cost savings
calculation.
 411

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Retail
Option 2 Prescriptive Compliance: ASHRAE 50% AEDG. Comply with the prescriptive measures in Appendix 3,
Tables 1–4, for 90% of total energy consumption for all process equipment.

Data Centers
See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems
See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Project Type Variations.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Option 1, Whole-Building Energy Simulation. If ASHRAE 90.1 is not applicable, Option 1 requirements can be met
with a USGBC-approved equivalent standard.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

EA
Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

OPTIMIZE ENERGY PERFORMANCE

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Appendix G energy modeling inputs X

Input and output reports from modeling software X

Renewable energy (if applicable) X

Exceptional calculations (if applicable) X

Target Finder results and summary X X

Energy consumption and demand for each building end use and fuel type X

Fuels rates X

AEDG compliance tables X

List of process equipment efficiencies (retail only) X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. See Related Credit Tips under the prerequisite.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. To receive credit for renewable energy systems savings, calculate the
equivalent cost of the energy generated using the methodology outlined in the related credit.
412

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Changes from LEED 2009.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE 90.1–2010 and ASHRAE 90.1–2010 User’s Manual: ashrae.org

ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guides: ashrae.org

COMNET Commercial Buildings Energy Modeling Guidelines: comnet.org/mgp-manual

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. New construction, major renovation, and core and shell projects: Achieve at least 54% energy savings.

DEFINITIONS
EA

See EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 413

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Advanced Energy
Metering
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

EA
INTENT

ADVANCED ENERGY METERING

To support energy management and identify opportunities for
additional energy savings by tracking building-level and system-level
energy use.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE

Install advanced energy metering for the following:

·· all whole-building energy sources used by the building; and
·· any individual energy end uses that represent 10% or more of the total annual consumption of the building.

The advanced energy metering must have the following characteristics.

·· Meters must be permanently installed, record at intervals of one hour or less, and transmit data to a remote
location.
·· Electricity meters must record both consumption and demand. Whole-building electricity meters should
record the power factor, if appropriate.
·· The data collection system must use a local area network, building automation system, wireless network, or
comparable communication infrastructure.
·· The system must be capable of storing all meter data for at least 36 months.
·· The data must be remotely accessible.
·· All meters in the system must be capable of reporting hourly, daily, monthly, and annual energy use.
414

CORE AND SHELL

Install meters for future tenant spaces so that tenants will be capable of independently metering energy
consumption (electricity, chilled water, etc.) for all systems dedicated to their space. Provide a sufficient number of
meters to capture total tenant energy use with a minimum of one meter per energy source per floor.

Install advanced energy metering for all base building energy sources used by the building.

The advanced energy metering must have the following characteristics.

·· Meters must be permanently installed, record at intervals of one hour or less, and transmit data to a remote
location.
·· Electricity meters must record both consumption and demand. Whole-building electricity meters should
record the power factor, if appropriate.
·· The data collection system must use a local area network, building automation system, wireless network, or
comparable communication infrastructure.
·· The system must be capable of storing all meter data for at least 36 months.
·· The data must be remotely accessible.
·· All meters in the system must be capable of reporting hourly, daily, monthly, and annual energy use.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 415

BEHIND THE INTENT

See EA Prerequisite Building-Level Energy Metering, Behind the Intent.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ENERGY SOURCES THAT SERVE PROJECT BUILDING

Determine all energy sources that serve the project.
·· Whole-building energy sources delivered to the building by an external provider, such as a utility
company or campus central plant, include sources owned by the building owner that cross an exterior
wall between the point of generation and point of use (see EA Prerequisite Building-Level Metering).
·· Count both renewable and nonrenewable sources of on-site energy generation.
·· Renewable sources include wind turbines, photovoltaic panels, solar thermal panels, and geothermal.
·· Nonrenewable sources include fossil fuel–burning generators and microturbines. Both inputs and
outputs of nonrenewable sources, including fuel input, electricity output, and recovered heat (if
applicable), must be metered.

EA
STEP 2. IDENTIFY ENERGY END USES THAT REQUIRE ADVANCED ENERGY METERING
Determine the type and quantity of advanced meters necessary to capture all individual end uses that
represent 10% or more of the building’s total annual energy consumption (see Further Explanation,
Determining Major End Uses).

ADVANCED ENERGY METERING

·· Projects that used modeling to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (Option 1) must
use the whole-building simulation results to determine which end uses must be metered.
·· Projects that followed a prescriptive pathway for EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
(Option 2 or 3) should use historical end-use data from buildings with similar design and operational
characteristics.

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT ADVANCED METERING SYSTEM

Design and install an advanced metering system.
·· Refer to the credit requirements for types of equipment, measurement frequency, communication
protocols, and data storage requirements (see Further Explanation, Meter Selection).
·· Locate the meters to capture the usage of major end users (see Further Explanation, Electricity
Metering Strategies).
·· Install and calibrate the meters according to the manufacturers’ recommendations.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

DETERMINING MAJOR ENERGY END USES

Defining appropriate energy end uses is crucial to the success of an advanced energy metering program and energy
management plan. Low data granularity, such as with whole-building energy data, will not help a building operator
understand or identify sources of anomalies in energy consumption and does not meet the intent of this credit.
Extreme granularity, achieved by metering every piece of equipment in a building, may be cost prohibitive
because of the quantity of equipment and the data storage capacity required. In addition, too much information may
overwhelm an energy manager and may hamper the effectiveness of an energy management program.
416

Identifying major energy end uses is the first step in choosing what to meter. Often, in large commercial or
industrial buildings, end uses are classified as systems composed of discrete pieces of equipment that can be metered
together. For example,
·· Chilled water system: chillers, chilled water pumps
·· Condenser water system: cooling tower, condenser water pumps
·· Hot water system (natural gas): boilers
·· Hot water system (electricity): hot water pumps
·· Air-handling system: supply fan, return fan, damper motors

Smaller buildings may not have large systems that are easily segregated by function. A common example is a rooftop
unit (RTU), a single packaged piece of equipment that can provide the cooling, heating, and air handling but is cost
and space prohibitive to submeter. Therefore, metering the entire RTU (or metering each fuel supplying the RTU, if
there is more than one) is an acceptable way to achieve this credit. Even though metering the energy usage of each
system component of a packaged system is not practical, the performance of each system component should be
monitored by the building automation system.
The metering strategy for systems that serve the same basic function, such as multiple built-up air-handling units
serving a 1,000,000-square-foot (92 900-square-meter) multitenant office building, or multiple RTUs serving a
25,000-square-foot (2 325-square-meter) physician’s office, is left to the discretion of the project team. Examples of
options for submetering these systems include the following:
·· Meter all similar systems together. This strategy is appropriate for multiple systems that serve the same type of
EA

occupant and operate according to the same schedule.

·· Meter all similar systems separately. This strategy is appropriate if each system serves a different type of
occupancy group or has a different operating schedule.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Meter similar systems by grouped occupancy type or operating schedule. This strategy is a combination of the
above.

Choosing what equipment and components to group requires a balance between keeping the project costs on budget
while ensuring that robust data are available for future decision making.
Examples of typical end uses for a commercial office building that may require advanced metering include the
following:
·· Receptacle equipment
·· Interior lighting
·· Space heating
·· Space cooling
·· Fans
·· Pumps
·· Heat rejection
·· Exterior lighting
·· Service water heating

Energy modeling software that is acceptable for EA Credit Minimum Energy Performance produces a report of
energy consumption for a standard set of end uses. Some programs also allow the user to virtually meter additional
end uses. An energy model completed in the design phase of the project will enable the metering system to be
integrated into design drawings and project specifications. The engineer of record may enlist the energy modeling
professional to help identify and specify the number and location of meters.
If the project team does not conduct energy modeling to comply with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy
Performance, the end uses to meter can be estimated by referencing the Commercial Building Energy Consumption
Survey (2003) End-Use Consumption Tables for Non-Mall Buildings or End-Use Consumption Tables for All
Buildings.
End uses can be grouped by occupancy type, building section, or building level. This type of consolidation can
be useful for buildings with different usage types, such as a commercial office with an industrial test kitchen, since it
allows building operators and energy managers to separately monitor different space types and account for different
energy usage patterns.
 417

METER SELECTION
The accuracy of available commercial meters and submeters varies widely. Select meters based on the level of
accuracy required for energy management purposes. It is recommended that submeters that may be used for revenue
purposes conform to the applicable revenue-grade accuracy (see EA Prerequisite Building-Level Metering, Further
Explanation, Meter Selection).
When locating meters, consider any physical installation requirements (e.g., straight lengths of piping).
Incorrect application or installation of a meter can reduce measurement accuracy.
Ensure that staff responsible for installing and maintaining equipment and using the data have input into the
meter selection.
The owner is responsible for maintaining and calibrating meters according to the manufacturers’
recommendations.

ELECTRICITY-METERING STRATEGIES

The number and location of electricity meters depend on the layout of a project’s electrical panels.
If major energy-using systems are segregated by panel, energy consumption can be measured at the panel level
and fewer submeters will be required (Figure 1). Individual branch circuit meters can be avoided if more than 90%
of the panel’s power is directed to a single end use. For example, if a panel is shared by the air-handling system and
mechanical room but the lighting accounts for less than 10% of the power load of the panel, then the individual
lighting branch circuits do not need to be metered.

EA
If multiple diverse end uses are connected to the same panel, individual branch circuits must be metered to
extract the individual energy consumption of each (Figure 2). Submetering individual branch circuits will be an
additional cost.

ADVANCED ENERGY METERING

If the majority of a panel serves one system type, subtraction metering may be used. This strategy requires
metering of the entire panel as well the individual branch circuits for minority end uses. The energy consumption
of the majority end use is then determined by subtracting the minority end uses from the total panel consumption
(Equation 1, Figure 3).

EQUATION 1. Example subtraction metering

Lighting energy consumption = Total panel energy - Water heater energy - Conference room fan powered box
(Major panel end use) (Panel meter) (Branch circuit meter 1) (Branch circuit meter 2)

Figure 1. Power panel that serves single end use: single submeter
418

Figure 2. Panel that serves diverse end uses: one submeter for each branch circuit
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 3. Panel that serves one majority use: one meter for panel and one meter for branch circuits for minority uses

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
Advanced energy metering must be installed for all energy sources used by the base building. Additionally, the
devices must enable independent metering of future tenants’ energy consumption.
Base building energy consumption includes all building systems and equipment in the core and shell scope of
work. Examples include central plants, elevators and escalators, interior and exterior lighting, receptacle equipment,
and HVAC equipment that serves core space, such as parking garages, lobbies, corridors, and restrooms.
The number of meters required for tenant spaces depends on building configuration; a minimum of one meter
per energy source per floor is required. Advanced metering is not required to measure end-use consumption of
systems and equipment installed by tenants.

Data Centers
IT energy consumption, as measured from an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) output meter, should be metered
separately from non-IT equipment, such as HVAC, plug loads, and lighting. If the UPS system supports non-IT loads
that amount to more than 10% of its load, such as lighting or cooling, this non-IT load should also be submetered.
This guidance is derived from ENERGY STAR and applies to data center buildings as well as commercial buildings
that contain large data centers.
 419

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

List of all advanced meters to be installed, including type, energy source metered X

Manufacturers’ cutsheets X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Project teams following Option 1, Whole-Building Energy

EA
Simulation, must use the results of the simulation to determine which end uses represent 10% or more of the total
annual consumption of the building. Project teams following the prescriptive options (Option 2, ASHRAE 50%
Advanced Energy Design Guide or Option 3 Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide) can estimate energy

ADVANCED ENERGY METERING

consumption by referencing the Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey (2003), End-Use Consumption
Tables for Non-Mall Buildings or End-Use Consumption Tables for All Buildings.

EA Prerequisite Building-Level Metering. If an advanced metering system is installed, additional whole-building

metering is not required for the related prerequisite.

EA Credit Demand Response. An advanced metering system facilitates participation in demand response programs
and provides an additional means to track building energy reduction levels.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Renewable energy systems and net metering will affect the kind of
energy meters that are installed for this credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION EA

420
 421

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Demand Response
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

EA
INTENT

To increase participation in demand response technologies and

DEMAND RESPONSE
programs that make energy generation and distribution systems more
efficient, increase grid reliability, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Design building and equipment for participation in demand response programs through load shedding or shifting.
On-site electricity generation does not meet the intent of this credit.

Case 1. Demand Response Program Available (2 points)

·· Participate in an existing demand response (DR) program and complete the following activities. Design a
system with the capability for real-time, fully-automated DR based on external initiation by a DR Program
Provider. Semi-automated DR may be utilized in practice.
·· Enroll in a minimum one-year DR participation amount contractual commitment with a qualified DR program
provider, with the intention of multiyear renewal, for at least 10% of the estimated peak electricity demand.
Peak demand is determined under EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.
·· Develop a comprehensive plan for meeting the contractual commitment during a Demand Response event.
·· Include the DR processes in the scope of work for the commissioning authority, including participation in at
least one full test of the DR plan.
422

Case 2. Demand Response Program Not Available (1 point)

Provide infrastructure to take advantage of future demand response programs or dynamic, real-time pricing
programs and complete the following activities.
·· Install interval recording meters with communications and ability for the building automation system to
accept an external price or control signal.
·· Develop a comprehensive plan for shedding at least 10% of building estimated peak electricity demand. Peak
demand is determined under EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.
·· Include the DR processes in the scope of work for the commissioning authority, including participation in at
least one full test of the DR plan.
·· Contact local utility representatives to discuss participation in future DR programs.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 423

BEHIND THE INTENT

When temperatures rise or fall dramatically, use of air-conditioning or heating increases. The electricity grid must
respond quickly, especially in urban areas and places where commercial buildings or industrial operations are
clustered. Utilities work to keep the system operating in balance, reliably, and at reasonable cost.
Demand response (DR) strategies encourage electricity customers to reduce their usage during peak demand
times, helping utilities optimize their supply-side energy generation and delivery systems. One strategy is tiered
demand electricity pricing. Another is incentive programs that reward commercial consumers who agree to change
their usage patterns when the utility company sends an alert (to the building’s operator or the building automation
system) announcing a DR event (also known as a curtailment event). DR programs set a maximum number of events
that can be announced and specify the time frames in which they may occur.
By reducing overall demand for electricity, DR helps utilities avoid building additional power generation
facilities, transmission lines, and distribution stations, thereby avoiding some of the environmental effects of energy
infrastructure and consumption. DR also helps balance the contribution of renewable energy sources. For example,
on calm days or at night, when renewable sources such as wind and solar are less available, grid operators must either
find additional generation sources or persuade energy users to lower demand. DR achieves the latter, balancing
systemwide usage and reducing the need for nonrenewable backup generation.

EA
STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

DEMAND RESPONSE
STEP 1. DETERMINE APPLICABLE CASE
Contact the utilities serving the project site to see whether demand response programs are available and
determine the appropriate case (see Further Explanation, Demand Response Program Availability).
·· Case 1 Demand Response Program Available is for projects in locations that have DR programs.
Participation is required to achieve the credit.
·· Case 2 Demand Response Program Not Available requires the project team to design a system to
accommodate future DR programs.

STEP 2. DESIGN SYSTEM TO ACCEPT EXTERNAL SIGNALS

Incorporate the capability for a demand response program into the design process as indicated in the
credit requirements and by the utility (if applicable). Systems must be capable of acting on an external
signal, but their actual operation may be either fully or semi-automated (see Further Explanation,
Demand Response Event Management).

STEP 3. DETERMINE PEAK DEMAND REDUCTION REQUIREMENT

Establish the peak demand estimate. Projects that used modeling to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance should take the estimated peak from the model. Projects that followed a
prescriptive path may use space peak load calculations to estimate overall building peak demand, or
other methods or calculations based on information available. Use Equation 1 to determine the minimum
peak demand reduction required.

EQUATION 1. Minimum reduction in peak electricity demand

= 10% × Peak
peak demand reduction
Minimum reduction
required.
demand

STEP 4. DEVELOP STRATEGIES FOR PEAK DEMAND REDUCTION

Identify strategies that will allow the project to meet or exceed the minimum demand reduction target
(see Further Explanation, Strategies to Reduce Demand).
·· Project teams may wish to incorporate these strategies into the energy model to confirm that they will
meet or exceed the reduction target.
·· Many utilities and third-party energy providers can work with project teams to review local demand
response options and make design suggestions.
424

STEP 5. PREPARE PLAN FOR PEAK DEMAND REDUCTION

Generate a plan that provides clear direction for implementing the identified demand reduction
strategies. Include activities, responsible parties, and anticipated reduction for each measure (see Further
Explanation, Developing the Action Plan). The training plan and objectives for those employees directly
responsible for executing the demand response action plan should address the following activities:
·· Individual assignments
·· Event signals
·· Communication protocols
·· Recovery
·· Reporting
·· Clear status
Ensure that the DR operations team members, which may include the DR coordinator, facilities manager,
and DR action plan manager, agree with the content of the plan, since they will be implementing it (see
Further Explanation, Demand Response Operations Team). The building’s DR coordinator and team
members should be well trained in mitigating any potential problems.

STEP 6. INCLUDE DEMAND RESPONSE IN COMMISSIONING

Coordinate with the CxA to include a review of the DR plan in the commissioning of the building’s system
test procedures, to verify the ability to handle an externally initiated demand response event. The Cx plan
must include at least one performance test of the full DR plan to verify that all equipment responds as
planned and that all responsible parties understand their roles.
EA

CASE 1. DEMAND RESPONSE PROGRAM AVAILABLE

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. ENROLL IN DEMAND RESPONSE PROGRAM

Select a DR program and enroll in a minimum one-year contract (see Further Explanation, Demand
Response Program Types).
·· Participation in a DR program requires engaging a DR provider and entering into an agreement to
provide curtailment of building energy demand upon notification of a DR event, or to participate in
other DR strategies, such as ancillary services.
·· Retain a copy of the DR program enrollment contract or verification issued by the independent system
operator, regional transmission organization, or energy provider.
·· Typical contracts specify the physical address of the building(s), authorized agents for event
notification, utility account numbers, terms for earning revenue, terms for revenue sharing, number and
duration of events, notification processes, monitoring requirements, enrollment periods, minimum size,
performance and consequences for nonperformance, penalties, and renewal options. Not all elements
listed will be applicable to all project types.

CASE 2. DEMAND RESPONSE PROGRAM NOT AVAILABLE

STEP 1. CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY

Contact the local utility or service provider to express interest in a future program. Utilities and service
providers may want to start a demand response program but not know about facilities that can and
would participate. Indicating the project’s capability and willingness to take part in a program may
encourage them to proceed.
 425

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

DEMAND RESPONSE PROGRAM AVAILABILITY

Energy supply and demand vary widely on a regional and national basis and are determined in part by local market
conditions and regulatory frameworks. Participation in demand response is often encouraged by state regulatory
agencies or state legislatures. Information on state demand response programs can often be found on the public
utility commission’s website.
In the U.S., the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission has developed the National Action Plan on Demand
Response, with the goal of achieving greater demand response, consistent with the requirements of the Energy
Independence and Security Act of 2007.

DEMAND RESPONSE EVENT MANAGEMENT

When a DR event is called, the DR program provider sends a signal as specified in the program enrollment contract.
The signal may be based on price, reliability, or supply and demand.
Demand response signals are received and acted on manually or through an energy management control system,

EA
which may include a building automation system (BAS), a building management system, and a programmable load
control.

DEMAND RESPONSE
TABLE 1. Demand response management

Level Energy management control system Response to DR event Eligible for credit

Building operator or occupants manually turn

Manual demand response No off end-use systems (e.g., lights, HVAC, other No
equipment)

Semiautomated demand DR coordinator or other person initiates

Yes Yes
response control strategy programmed into BAS

Fully automated demand BAS control sequence initiates strategy,

Yes Yes
response without human intervention

Source: Used with permission from Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory.

426

Figure 1. Demand response progression. Used with permission from Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

1. DR Event notice sent via text, 1. DR Event notice sent via text, 1. DR Event notice sent over the
e-mail or phone call e-mail or phone call Internet or private network
2. Decision to participate is made 2. Decision to participate is made 2. Pre-programmed DR measures
by a person by a person are initiiated automatically
3. DR measures are initiated by 3. Pre-programmed DR measures 3. In some cases the meter feed-
people on-site and limited to manu- are initiated by a person at a back is provided
ally adjustable components such as workstation
light switches, thermostats, etc.

ISO = Independent System Operator CSP = Curtainment Service Provider L = Load

STRATEGIES TO REDUCE DEMAND

Project teams may reduce peak demand by modifying consumption from various end-use systems, such as HVAC and
lighting.
·· Global temperature adjustments increase cooling setpoints (or decrease heating setpoints) for an entire
facility for a given period. Facilities managers may find that some occupants prefer the temperatures under DR
events, indicating the possibility of making permanent changes to the setpoints.
·· Turning off decorative features, like fountains and video displays, reduces energy consumption without
affecting worker productivity.
·· Hospitality and health care facilities may be able to reschedule housekeeping activities, such as dishwashing
and laundry.
 427

DEMAND RESPONSE OPERATIONS TEAM

Participating in DR requires careful evaluation, planning, and execution of curtailment strategies. A project team
member may fill one or more of the following roles:
·· DR project coordinator
·· Facilities manager
·· DR action plan (curtailment) manager
·· DR credit project manager
·· DR integration service provider, or energy services company
·· DR provider account manager (e.g., utility, independent system operator, curtailment service provider
employee)

The demand response provider or curtailment service provider can recommend qualified outside contractors for
help with system analysis and demand response planning.

DEVELOPING THE ACTION PLAN

Projects must develop a comprehensive action plan to address roles, responsibilities, and expectations for a demand
response event. The plan should address at least the following:
·· Potential for demand response participation, such as curtailment of peak demand, and the elected demand
response value, or schedule of values, in kWs, to be registered with the DR provider

EA
·· Event notification process for demand response events, such as a phone call, an alarm with countdown
clock, or a signal to a BAS console, depending on the degree of program automation (i.e., semi-automated or
automated).

DEMAND RESPONSE
·· Detailed procedures and responses to execute the program measures consistent with the demand response
contract
·· Contract and the registered demand response participation amount, including the notification method,
specific actions, order of execution, load-monitoring process, and postevent recovery process
·· Energy management team responsible for coordinating with the program provider, the facilities department,
and internal risk management, including event notification and response, revenue settlements, contract
administration, assessments, action fulfillment, employee awareness training, readiness drills, and energy
management reporting
·· Description of end-use systems that will be affected, such as HVAC or lighting, on a stand-alone or integrated
basis, during participation in demand response events.

DEMAND RESPONSE PROGRAM TYPES

DR programs vary regionally in the number and timing of events called. One factor that affects the type and number
of DR programs is weather: regions with hot weather may have more summer-peaking programs, and regions with
cool weather may have more winter-peaking programs. Congestion (transmission constraints) is another: regions
that have congestion may have more interruptible load and emergency DR programs. Some program types may be
better suited to certain building use categories.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
428

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Case 1 Case 2

Proof of enrollment in DR program X

Evidence of ability to shed 10% of peak demand X X

Confirmation that system is capable of receiving and acting on external signal X X

Action plan for meeting reduction requirement during event X X

Inclusion of DR in CxA systems testing plan X X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification. Include DR in the Cx plan to ensure that the
building systems respond as anticipated during an event. Test the sequence before an event occurs to work out any
problems ahead of time.
EA

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
demand response (DR) a change in electricity use by demand-side resources from their normal consumption
patterns in response to changes in the price of electricity or to incentive payments designed to induce lower
electricity use at times of high wholesale market prices or when system reliability is jeopardized

demand response (DR) event a specific period of time when the utility or independent service operator calls
for a change in the pattern or level of use in grid-based electricity from its program participants. Also known as a
curtailment event.

load shedding an intentional action by a utility to reduce the load on the system. Load shedding is usually conducted
during emergency periods, such as capacity shortages, system instability, or voltage control.

peak demand the maximum electricity load at a specific point in time or over a period of time

permanent peak load shifting the transfer of energy consumption to off-peak hours, when demand for power is
lower and energy is therefore less expensive
 429

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Renewable Energy
Production
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–3 points) Data Centers (1–3 points)
Core and Shell (1–3 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–3 points)
Schools (1–3 points) Hospitality (1–3 points)
Retail (1–3 points) Healthcare (1–3 points)

EA
INTENT

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

To reduce the environmental and economic harms associated with fossil
fuel energy by increasing self-supply of renewable energy.

REQUIREMENTS
Use renewable energy systems to offset building energy costs. Calculate the percentage of renewable energy with the
following equation:

Equivalent cost of usable energy produced by the renewable energy system

% renewable energy =
Total building annual energy cost

Use the building’s annual energy cost, calculated in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, if Option 1
was pursued; otherwise use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey
(CBECS) database to estimate energy use and cost.
The use of solar gardens or community renewable energy systems is allowed if both of the following
requirements are met.
·· The project owns the system or has signed a lease agreement for a period of at least 10 years.
·· The system is located with the same utility service area as the facility claiming the use.

Credit is based on the percentage of ownership or percentage of use assigned in the lease agreement. Points are
awarded according to Table 1.
430

TABLE 1. Points for renewable energy

Percentage renewable energy Points (All, except Core and Shell)) Points (Core and Shell)

1% 1 1

3% — 2

5% 2 3

10% 3 —
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 431

BEHIND THE INTENT

Renewable energy generation can reduce carbon emissions and offer local environmental benefits by reducing air
pollution. Some renewable energy systems capture wind or sunlight; others usefully employ materials that might
otherwise be wasted. Renewable energy produced on-site protects projects from energy price volatility and reliance
on the grid while reducing wasted energy lost in transmission. Ultimately, renewable energy production contributes
to reducing a country’s demand for imported energy.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. EXPLORE OPPORTUNITIES FOR RENEWABLES

Determine the most abundant renewable resources on site, such as sunlight, wind, or water, and explore
opportunities for using renewable fuels, such as waste wood or biomass (see Further Explanation,
Renewable Resource Considerations).

STEP 2. COMPARE REQUIREMENTS FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

Carefully evaluate the space requirements, costs, financial incentives, and efficiencies for each potential

EA
technology.
·· Local funding, financing, and incentives for renewable generation projects may be available for certain
technologies and may be a significant factor.

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

·· Excess energy, beyond the building’s energy demand at a given point, can be sold to the utility
company (net metering). The building owner receives the market rate, however, and cannot charge a
premium for the renewable energy. In effect, the grid serves as a storage system and frees the project
from hosting a storage system on site.
·· Tying into an existing community system or creating a community system may lower cost barriers
through economies of scale, because unit costs may decrease as system sizes increase. Community
systems can also take advantage of time-shifted demand: one building that is occupied during the day
and another building that is occupied at night could both take advantage of the same biofuel-fired
heating system.
·· Renewable energy may be available from a third-party system, or the project team may enter an
arrangement in which a third party owns a system that serves the project. In such cases, project teams
must take additional steps to ensure that the arrangement continues for a set period of time and that
the renewable energy credits (RECs) are retained (see Further Explanation, Renewable Energy Systems
and Third Parties).
·· Some systems that are commonly considered renewable do not qualify for this credit (see Further
Explanation, Eligible Renewable Energy Systems).

STEP 3. SET RENEWABLE ENERGY TARGET

To establish the target renewable energy system size for the project, estimate the annual energy cost for
the project.
·· Projects that used modeling to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (Option 1) must
base annual energy cost on the whole-building simulation results (see Further Explanation,
Example 1).
·· Projects that used a prescriptive path to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
(Option 2 or 3) must use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption
Survey (CBECS) data to estimate annual energy use and cost (see Further Explanation, Example 2).
·· Use either the maximum building system size that can be accommodated in the project or the
available budget as the starting point to estimate the maximum number of points for this credit.
·· To qualify toward credit points, the environmental benefits associated with generated renewable
energy must be retained or, if sold, purchased in an equivalent amount (see Further Explanation,
Renewable Energy Certificates [RECs] and Carbon Offsets).
432

STEP 4. DESIGN AND SPECIFY SYSTEM CRITERIA

Many resources are available, some for no or little cost, for planning and designing a renewable energy
system. Given basic information for the project, many manufacturers can complete the necessary
calculations for the project team. Teams will also find software tools that help in sizing. If pursuing EA
Credit Enhanced Commissioning, address commissioning of the system at this step.

STEP 5. CALCULATE RENEWABLE ENERGY COST CONTRIBUTION

Use Equation 1 to estimate the annual energy cost of the usable energy produced by the renewable
energy system and calculate the points available. Teams that used whole-building simulations to comply
with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance must use the results of the model in this calculation.

EQUATION 1. Percentage renewable energy cost contribution

Equivalent cost usable energy produced by renewable energy system

% renewable energy cost =
Total estimated building annual energy cost

·· Usable energy is defined as the output energy from the system less any transmission and conversion
losses, such as standby heat loss or losses when converting electricity from DC to AC.
·· The project may use the virtual energy rate or the actual utility rates (see Further Explanation,
Equivalent Cost for Renewable Energy).
EA

Projects served by a district energy system (DES) using renewable energy are eligible to receive credit
for the percentage of its contribution. Use Equation 2 to determine this amount (see Further Explanation,
Example 3).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EQUATION 2. Equivalent cost of renewable energy with district energy system

Equivalent cost of DES

renewable energy
= ($ value of renewable energy used at DES × % of DES energy delivered to building)

Projects generating renewable energy through a community or off-site facility have additional documentation
requirements for the criteria noted in the credit requirements.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

RENEWABLE RESOURCE CONSIDERATIONS

A project team should use web resources and other tools available to determine the feasibility of renewable
systems, given the project site’s climate, context, and infrastructure. Consider the features of the site, such as solar
availability, wind patterns, and other renewable energy sources, and any seasonal or daily variations in its supply.
Certain project types may have special opportunities: office or university campuses typically have available land, for
example, and warehouse projects may have large roof areas.
Match the project’s energy needs with renewable energy output when selecting a renewable system. For example,
a sunny site is a good candidate for solar thermal hot water, but this type of renewable resource is most cost-effective
 433

if the building has a constant demand for hot water. Accordingly, a hotel or a multifamily project may be a better
match for a solar thermal hot water system than an office complex.
Daily and seasonal variations in loads also factor into the investigation of renewable energy. For example, a
residential project with low daytime electricity demand may require battery storage to benefit from a photovoltaic
(PV) array; an office building with high daytime demand may not.

RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS AND THIRD PARTIES

Some renewable energy systems that use fuels produced off site (e.g., landfill gas) can still be eligible to receive
points under this credit. In such a case, the project team must provide documentation showing the following:
·· The project has a minimum 10-year contract with the fuel provider.
·· The contract with the fuel provider includes both the fuel and all associated RECs.
·· If the fuel provider does not also provide RECs, the project must purchase offsets for 100% of the renewable
energy produced in the form of RECs every year for at least 10 years.

In some cases, renewable energy may be available from equipment, such as a PV array or wind turbine, owned by
a third party, whether on or off site. Project teams wishing to receive credit for such an arrangement must submit
documentation, including the agreement between the project owner and the power producer. The power purchase
agreement must last for at least 10 years, and the project owner must retain all environmental benefits from the
renewable energy.
For example, if a PV array owner sells electricity to the project building and then sells RECs to a different party,

EA
the project is not eligible for this credit unless RECs are purchased by the project in a sum equal to the electricity
being purchased, for a period of 10 years.

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

434

The project is
The project is
using renewable energy
producing renewable energy
No produced within a campus No
within the LEED
boundary with the same
Project Boundary
owner

Create contract to
show that amount has
Yes Yes been established and
agreement will continue
for at least 10 years

Determine percent
renewable energy
that is fed to project

The project
is retaining all Demonstrate that
environmental attributes No RECs are not being
associated with the energy double-counted
produced
EA

The
owner is
passing over all
Electricity alone is being environmental attributes
produced by the renewable No associated with the energy
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

system produced and this is

included in the
contract

Yes Yes Yes

Purchase RECs equal Purchase RECs and/

to the amount of or offsets equal to the
renewable energy amount of renewable
produced and being energy produced and
submitted for credit; being submitted for
contract must be for credit; contract must
10 years be for 10 years

CREDIT REQUIREMENTS
HAVE BEEN MET

Figure 1. Renewable energy scenarios and requirements

ELIGIBLE RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

Allowable sources for renewable energy include the following:
·· Photovoltaic
·· Solar thermal
·· Wind
·· Biofuel (in some cases)
·· Low-impact hydroelectricity
·· Wave and tidal energy
·· Geothermal energy (in some cases)
 435

Some renewable energy systems do not meet the intent of the credit and are not eligible. Strategies like architectural
features, passive solar, and daylighting, for example, reduce energy consumption but are not eligible renewable
energy systems.
Geothermal energy, such as electricity generated from subterranean steam or heat generated from subterranean
steam or hot water, is eligible. However, geothermal energy used in conjunction with vapor compression cycles, as in
a ground-source heat pump, is not.
If a biofuel is used in a cogeneration plant that produces both electricity and heat, both of these energy uses count
as renewable energy. A biofuel used in a boiler to produce heat also qualifies. However, not all biofuels meet the
intent of this credit. The following biofuels are ineligible:
·· Combustion of municipal solid waste
·· Forest biomass waste other than mill residue
·· Wood coated with paints, plastics, or laminate
·· Wood treated for preservation with materials containing halogens, chlorine compounds, halide compounds,
chromated copper arsenate, or arsenic; if more than 1% of the wood fuel has been treated with these
compounds, the energy system is ineligible

RENEWABLE ENERGY CERTIFICATES AND CARBON OFFSETS

The environmental benefits from renewable energy generation are certified and tracked through renewable energy
certificates (RECs). A third party ensures that a specific amount of power was generated by a renewable source. By

EA
purchasing RECs, a project that is using nonrenewable energy can still stimulate demand for green power.
Carbon offsets allow buildings or companies to fund activities that decrease carbon emissions or remove carbon
from the atmosphere. Carbon offset projects include reforestation, carbon sequestration, energy efficiency projects,
and land-use changes.

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

Generating renewable energy has both environmental and financial benefits, and projects must retain both
benefits to be eligible for this credit. Projects with ownership of renewable energy generation have the option to
sell the RECs associated with their renewable energy generation. Some utilities may grant a rebate to projects that
generate their own renewable energy and also require that they give up the rights to the RECs associated with the
generation. A project can still claim this credit by purchasing enough RECs or offsets to make up for the RECs that
were sold. In such cases, projects that are generating electricity are required to purchase Green-e–certified RECs;
projects that are generating heat or other nonelectric energy are required to purchase Green-e Climate–certified
carbon offsets.
Both RECs and carbon offsets are addressed in EA Credit Green Power and Carbon Offsets.

EQUIVALENT COST OF RENEWABLE ENERGY

The equivalent cost of the usable energy system can be calculated in two ways, virtual rate or actual utility tariff plus
demand rates.
Virtual rate. The project team may use the virtual energy rate determined by the proposed building energy
model used for EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. The virtual rate accounts for both consumption and
demand charges. Project teams that use the Energy Information Administration’s average energy prices must use the
virtual rates to determine the renewable energy system cost.
Actual rate plus demand. Calculate the expected savings in both consumption and demand charges, based on
the rates charged by the utility that serves the project. If a project is served by a utility that uses time-dependent
valuation to set rates, the team may use those rates but must provide hourly calculations for the value of generated
energy. Some energy modeling software may calculate the savings from renewable energy systems if the utility rates
include consumption, demand, time-dependent valuation, time-of-use, ratchets, and other factors.
For renewable energy sources priced on a basis other than per unit of energy, the project team must account for
all the costs associated with the source, such as delivery costs and annual fees. For example, a project that uses heat
generated from geothermal steam needs to account for all the equipment, maintenance, and labor costs associated
with the geothermal system throughout the year.
In addition to calculating the equivalent cost of the energy generated, project teams must also provide
calculations that show how much energy the renewable energy system will produce. With some technologies, like a
436

biofuel-fired boiler, energy modeling software can determine the amount of energy generated. In other cases, such as
PV or wind systems, the amount of energy generated may be determined by using an external calculation program. In
either case, provide all assumptions and outputs associated with the renewable energy calculations.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Project with complete energy modeling data
A proposed multifamily residential project has completed its energy model for EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance and is sizing a PV array. The project anticipates using 562,457 kWh of electricity, with a virtual energy
rate of $0.082 per kWh. Gas consumption is calculated as 29,650 therms, at a utility rate of $0.675 per therm of
natural gas. The total building annual energy cost is as follows:

Total cost = (Gas consumption x Gas rate) + (Electricity consumption x Electricity rate)

Total cost = (29,650 therms x $0.675/therm) + (562,457 kWh x $0.082/kWh)

Total cost = $20,013 + $46,121 = $66,134

The project has space on site for a 150-kW PV array. Based on calculations provided by the solar array installer, the
system will produce 218,789 kWh of electricity per year, after transmission and conversion losses. The project team
calculates the equivalent cost of the renewable energy generated:
EA

Equivalent cost = (Units of renewable energy generated x Project utility or virtual rate for type of
energy generated)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Equivalent cost = (218,789 kWh x $0.082/kWh) = $17,941

The project can now calculate its percentage of renewable energy:

Equivalent cost usable energy produced by renewable energy system

% renewable energy =
Total building annual energy cost

$17,941
% renewable energy =
$66,134

% renewable energy = 27%

Example 2. Project without energy modeling data

A proposed 75,000-square-foot office project is complying with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
through a prescriptive path but is also installing an on-site renewable energy system. To achieve this credit, the
team must determine its total building annual energy cost. The project will have gas and electricity service. Local
utility rates are $1.10 per therm of natural gas and $0.09 per kWh of electricity. Using data from CBECS (Table 1), the
project can estimate its annual energy consumption by fuel type.
Projects with multiple space types should calculate energy consumptions for each space type separately based on
Table 2.
 437

TABLE 2. CBECS building energy intensity data

Total energy
Total electric energy
consumption Total nonelectric energy consumption
consumption (CBECS Table C14)
(CBECS Table C3)
Building type
kWh/ kWh/
kBtu/ft2 kWh/ft2 kWh/m2 kBtu/ ft2
m2 m2

Education 83.1 262.2 11 118.4 45.5 143.6

Food sales 199.7 630.1 49.4 531.8 194.6 614

Food service 258.3 814.9 38.4 413.3 127.4 401.9

Health care inpatient 249.2 786.2 27.5 296.0 155.5 490.6

Health care outpatient 94.6 298.5 16.1 173.3 39.6 124.9

Lodging 100 315.5 13.5 145.3 53.9 170.1

Retail (nonmall) 73.9 233.2 14.3 153.9 25.1 79.2

Enclosed and strip malls 102.2 322.4 22.3 240.0 26.2 82.7

Office 92.9 293.1 17.3 186.2 34 107.3

Public Assembly 93.9 296.3 12.5 134.6 51.3 161.9

EA
Public order and safety 115.8 365.3 15.3 164.7 63.5 200.3

Religious worship 43.5 137.2 4.9 52.7 26.9 84.9

Service 77 242.9 11 118.4 39.5 124.6

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

Warehouse and storage 45.2 142.6 7.6 81.8 19.3 60.9

Other 164.4 518.7 22.5 242.2 87.6 276.4

Source: This table is from the Energy Information Administration (EIA) website.

Electricity cost is estimated as follows:

Electricity cost = (Electricity kWh/ft2 for space type x Project area x Project electricity rate)

Electricity cost = (17.3 kWh/ft2 x 75,000 ft2 x $0.09/kWh)

Electricity cost = $116,775

The project’s gas cost can be estimated in the same manner:

Gas cost = (Nonelectric kBtu/ft2 for space type x Project area x (1 Therm / 100 kBtu) x Project gas rate)

Gas cost = (34 kBtu/ft2 x 75,000 ft2 x (1 Therm / 100 kBtu) x $1.10 / Therm)

Gas cost = $28,050

The project’s total annual building energy cost is the sum of the electricity and gas costs, or $144,573. The building site
has space for a 70-kW solar array, which is estimated to produce 92,254 kWh of electricity per year, after transmission
and conversion losses. The project’s equivalent cost of usable energy is calculated as follows:

Equivalent cost = (Units of renewable energy generated x Project utility rate for type of energy generated)

Equivalent cost = (92,254 kWh x $0.09/kWh) = $8,303

438

The project can now calculate its percentage of renewable energy:

Equivalent cost usable energy produced by renewable energy system

% renewable energy =
Total building annual energy cost

$8,303
% renewable energy =
$144,825

% renewable energy = 5.7%

Example 3. Project connected to a DES

A university classroom building is connected to a central chilled-water plant that serves multiple campus buildings.
The central plant has a dedicated photovoltaic array that provides a portion of the energy to the chilled water plant.
The DES uses the equivalent of $100,000 of electricity generated from PV, and the project receives 25% of the chilled
water output of the DES. The project calculates its equivalent cost of renewable energy as follows:

Equivalent cost = ($ value of renewable energy used at DES x % of DES energy delivered to building)

Equivalent cost = ($100,000 x 25%)

EA

Equivalent cost = $25,000

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

District Energy Systems (DES)

For projects documenting EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy
Performance using Path 2 or 3 (full DES performance accounting or streamlined DES modeling), qualifying
renewable energy sources used in a DES may earn points in EA Credit Renewable Energy Production for a connected
building. That is, they count as “on-site” renewable energy for the connected building. Projects using energy
model Path 1 for renewable DES sources do not earn points in the energy performance prerequisite and credit for a
connected building.
The fraction of project costs offset by the renewable energy that the DES contributes depends on how much of
the building’s load the DES supplies and how much of the DES energy source is renewable. The total cost offset is
based on the product of these two factors. For each thermal energy source provided to the building by the district
plant, calculate the renewable contribution as follows.
1. Find the fraction of the annual DES thermal energy source provided by qualifying renewable sources. If two
fuel sources are required to generate the thermal energy source (e.g., electric pumps and natural gas burners
for boilers), the fraction of DES provided by the qualifying renewable source should be based on the amount of
energy contributed (e.g., kBtus) and should account for all fuels used to generate the thermal energy source.

Renewable fraction Renewable energy used to generate source, i

of thermal energy =
source (RS), i Total energy used to generate source, i

2. Find the fraction of the project building’s annual energy consumption that is supplied by the DES thermal
energy source.

Fraction of building Building energy supplied by source, i

annual energy
consumption supplied
=
by source (BS), i Total building energy consumed
 439

3. Multiply these two factors together for each energy source provided by qualifying renewables.
4. Sum the renewable energy contribution from each district thermal energy source serving the building to
identify the total renewable energy contribution from the district plant.

Total renewable energy contribution from DES = ∑RSi × BSi

i

If renewable energy contributions from the DES are applied to a connected building, submit a letter from the DES
owner or operator verifying all of the following:
·· That the quantity of renewable energy reported above is allocated to the DES itself (i.e., the upstream
generation or distribution equipment) and not directly to any building
·· That within the overall DES renewable energy allocation, no renewable energy assigned specifically to the DES
central plant building, if any (in a separate LEED application), is also being counted toward the renewable
energy contribution of the connected project building
·· That no renewable energy is being double-counted among any connected project buildings (in separate LEED
applications)
·· That either the DES owner or its operator maintains rights to the environmental benefits of the site-generated
renewable energy, or that RECs or offsets are being purchased in an amount equal to the benefits being claimed

Projects that do not use energy modeling may not take credit for renewable energy sources used for the DES
upstream of the project.

EA
CAMPUS
Group Approach

RENEWABLE ENERGY PRODUCTION

All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Third-party
Community
Documentation On-site system system
system
ownership

Renewable system rated capacity X X X

Calculations to determine energy generated X X X

Equivalent cost of renewable energy produced X X X

Documentation of annual energy costs X X X

Contract indicating duration X X

Documentation indicating percentage owned or leased of community system X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Credit Advanced Energy Metering. All whole-building energy sources, including renewable energy sources,
must be submetered to comply with the related credit.

EA Credit Green Power and Carbon Offsets. Renewable energy certificates, green power, and carbon offsets
purchased from outside vendors are addressed in the related credit; additional points are available for projects that
purchase them.
440

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The credit now allows solar gardens and community systems.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Center for Resource Solutions Green-e Program: green-e.org

Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS): eia.gov/consumption/commercial

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Renewable energy must account for 15% of total energy. For Core and Shell projects, the threshold is 10%.

DEFINITIONS
EA

district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

solar garden a shared solar array or other renewable energy system with grid-connected subscribers who receive
credit for the use of renewables using virtual net metering. Also known as a community renewable energy system.
(Adapted from solargardens.org)
 441

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Enhanced Refrigerant
Management
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

EA
ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT
INTENT

To reduce ozone depletion and support early compliance with the

Montreal Protocol while minimizing direct contributions to climate
change.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION
CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE

OPTION 1. NO REFRIGERANTS OR LOW-IMPACT REFRIGERANTS (1 POINT)

Do not use refrigerants, or use only refrigerants (naturally occurring or synthetic) that have an ozone depletion
potential (ODP) of zero and a global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.

OR

OPTION 2. CALCULATION OF REFRIGERANT IMPACT (1 POINT)

Select refrigerants that are used in heating, ventilating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration (HVAC&R) equipment
to minimize or eliminate the emission of compounds that contribute to ozone depletion and climate change. The
combination of all new and existing base building and tenant HVAC&R equipment that serve the project must
comply with the following formula:
442

IP Units SI Units

LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ≤ 100 LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ≤ 13

Calculation definitions for LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ≤ 100 Calculation definitions for LCGWP + kg CFC 11/(kW/year) x 105 ≤ 13
(IP units) (SI units)

LCODP = [ODPr × (Lr × Life + Mr) × Rc] / Life kg CFC 11/(kW/year) = [ODPr × (Lr × Life + Mr) × Rc ] / Life

LCGWP = [GWPr × (Lr × Life + Mr) × Rc] / Life LCGWP = [GWPr × (Lr × Life + Mr) × Rc] / Life

LCODP: Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential kg CFC 11/(kW/year): Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential
(lb CFC 11/ Ton-Year) (lb CFC 11/Ton-Year)

LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming Potential LCGWP: Lifecycle Direct Global Warming Potential
(lb CO2 /Ton-Year) (kg CO2 /kW-year)

GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant GWPr: Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 12,000 lb CO2 / lbr) (0 to 12,000 kg CO2 /kg r)

ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant ODPr: Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant
(0 to 0.2 lb CFC 11/lbr) (0 to 0.2 kg CFC 11/kg r)

Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate (2.0%) Lr: Refrigerant Leakage Rate (2.0%)

Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss (10%) Mr: End-of-life Refrigerant Loss (10%)

Rc: Refrigerant Charge (0.5 to 5.0 lbs of refrigerant per ton of Rc: Refrigerant Charge (0.065 to 0.65 kg of refrigerant per kW of AHRI
gross AHRI rated cooling capacity) rated or Eurovent Certified cooling capacity)
EA

Life: Equipment Life (10 years; default based on equipment Life: Equipment Life (10 years; default based on equipment type, unless
type, unless otherwise demonstrated) otherwise demonstrated)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For multiple types of equipment, calculate a weighted average of all base building HVAC&R equipment, using the
following formula:

IP UNITS SI UNITS

∑
[( LCGWP + LCODP × 105
)× Qunit
] ≤ 100
∑ [( LCGWP + LCODP × 105 )× ]
Qunit

≤ 13
Qtotal Qtotal

CALCULATION DEFINITIONS FOR (IP UNITS) CALCULATION DEFINITIONS FOR (SI UNITS)

∑
[( LCGWP + LCODP × 105
)× Qunit
] ≤ 100
∑
[( LCGWP + LCODP × 105
)× ]
Qunit

≤ 13
Qtotal Qtotal

Qunit = Gross AHRI rated cooling capacity of an individual HVAC Qunit = Eurovent Certified cooling capacity of an individual HVAC
or refrigeration unit (Tons) or refrigeration unit (kW)
Qtotal = Total gross AHRI rated cooling capacity of all HVAC or Qtotal = Total Eurovent Certified cooling capacity of all HVAC or
refrigeration refrigeration (kW)
 443

RETAIL

Meet Option 1 or 2 for all HVAC systems.

Stores with commercial refrigeration systems must comply with the following.
·· Use only non-ozone-depleting refrigerants.
·· Select equipment with an average HFC refrigerant charge of no more than 1.75 pounds of refrigerant per 1,000
Btu/h (2.72 kg of refrigerant per kW) total evaporator cooling load.
·· Demonstrate a predicted store-wide annual refrigerant emissions rate of no more than 15%. Conduct leak
testing using the procedures in GreenChill’s best practices guideline for leak tightness at installation.

Alternatively, stores with commercial refrigeration systems may provide proof of attainment of EPA GreenChill’s
silver-level store certification for newly constructed stores.

EA
ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT
444

BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit addresses the two main threats to the environment posed by refrigerants: their ozone depletion potential
(ODP) and global warming potential (GWP).
As is well known, chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs), and other ozone-depleting
substances commonly used in refrigerants contribute to the depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer. Yet
refrigerants released into the atmosphere also contribute to global climate change, having a disproportionately large
effect compared with other greenhouse gases. For example, HCFC-22 contributes to warming at 1,780 times the
potency of an equal amount of carbon dioxide.
However, trade-offs also exist between the above concerns and energy use. Alternatives to CFC and HCFC
refrigerants, such as HFC-410A, have a lower GWP when directly released, but their use may require more energy—
which also affects climate. Conversely, variable refrigerant flow (VRF) systems may improve energy efficiency but
have a higher refrigerant charge.
Careful consideration of the refrigerant requirements of energy systems and appliances can improve
performance and reduce operating cost. Refrigerants vary in operating pressure, material compatibility,
flammability, and toxicity. Operating pressure and material compatibility are particularly critical factors to take into
account when refrigerants in existing equipment are replaced.
The refrigerant impact calculation addresses the overall effect of each refrigerant’s ODP and GWP combined by
accounting for these interrelated factors.
EA

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. GATHER INFORMATION ON SYSTEMS AND REFRIGERANTS IN PROJECT

Identify all HVAC&R equipment that contains refrigerants and record the refrigerant charge and type for
existing and new units. Project teams may incorporate the credit requirements and equations into project
specifications if needed. Projects that retain CFCs past initial occupancy, even if using a phase-out plan
to meet the requirements of EA Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant Management, are ineligible for this
credit.
·· Small systems with less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerants, such as individual water fountains
or stand-alone refrigerators, do not need to be included in credit calculations.
·· Unit charge information is often not available for new equipment until contractor submittals are
provided (particularly for split systems) because the charge depends on the length of refrigerant
piping runs.
·· If a district energy system (DES) serves the project, data for the refrigerant-using equipment in the
DES must be collected.

STEP 2. SELECT ONE OPTION

Choose the appropriate option for the project.
·· Option 1 is for projects that have no refrigerants and projects with refrigerants that have an ODP of
zero and a GWP of less than 50 (see Further Explanation, Designing for No Refrigerants or Low-Impact
Refrigerant Use). These projects achieve the credit; no additional steps are required.
·· Option 2 is for projects whose refrigerants exceed the Option 1 limit.

Option 2. Refrigerant Impact Calculation

STEP 1. CALCULATE REFRIGERANT IMPACT OF PROPOSED SYSTEMS

To determine the environmental effects of HVAC&R systems containing refrigerants, apply the following
assumptions. Assume the ODP and GWP values listed in Table 1.
 445

TABLE 1. Ozone depletion and global warming potentials of common refrigerants

Refrigerant ODPr GWPr Common building application

Chlorofluorocarbons

CFC-11 1.0 4,680 Centrifugal chiller

CFC-12 1.0 10,720 Refrigerators, chiller

CFC-114 0.94 9,800 Centrifugal chiller

CFC-500 0.605 7,900 Centrifugal chiller, humidifier

CFC-502 0.221 4,600 Low-temperature refrigeration

Hydrochlorofluorocarbons

HCFC-22 0.04 1,780 Air-conditioning, chiller

HCFC-123 0.02 76 CFC-11 replacement

Hydrofluorocarbons

HFC-23 ~0 12,240 Ultra-low-temperature refrigeration

HFC-134a ~0 1,320 CFC-12 or HCFC-22 replacement

EA
HFC-245fa ~0 1,020 Insulation agent, centrifugal chiller

HFC-404A ~0 3,900 Low-temperature refrigeration

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

HFC-407C ~0 1,700 HCFC-22 replacement

HFC-410A ~0 1,890 Air-conditioning

HFC-507A ~0 3,900 Low-temperature refrigeration

Natural refrigerants

Carbon dioxide (CO2) 0 1.0

Ammonia (NH3) 0 0

Propane 0 3

Assume equipment life according to Table 2. For any HVAC&R equipment not listed, assume an
equipment life of 10 years. Different values for equipment life may be substituted, with manufacturers’
documentation.
For existing equipment, apply the default equipment life according to Table 2. The equation is based on
refrigerant impact spread over the life of the equipment; estimated remaining equipment life should not
be substituted because it would provide inaccurate results.

TABLE 2. Default equipment life

Equipment Default equipment life

Window air-conditioner, heat pump 10 years

Unitary, split, packaged air-conditioner, package heat pump 15 years

Reciprocating and scroll compressor, reciprocating chiller 20 years

Absorption chiller 23 years

Water-cooled packaged air-conditioner 24 years

Centrifugal chiller 25 years

446

Assume that refrigerant leakage rate (Lr) is 2% per year and end-of-life refrigerant loss (Mr) is 10%,
for all equipment types. No alternative values may be substituted for these percentages (see Further
Explanation, Examples).
Refrigerant charge (Rc) is the ratio of the total refrigerant used in a piece of equipment to the total
cooling capacity of that equipment, expressed in pounds per ton or kilograms per kW. For example,
if a packaged air-conditioning unit uses 7 pounds of refrigerant and its cooling capacity is 5 tons, the
refrigerant charge is 1.4.

STEP 2. INCORPORATE DESIGN CRITERIA INTO PROJECT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

If calculations were performed during design, use the results to specify the maximum refrigerant
charge for the HVAC equipment. When the project is under construction, review equipment submittals
from the mechanical contractor to verify that the equipment and refrigerant charge meet the design
specifications.

FURTHER EXPLANATION
EA

CALCULATIONS

Weighted Average Refrigerant Impact for the Project Building

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The project team must develop a weighted average calculation based on both downstream and upstream equipment.
The weighted average is based on the entire downstream equipment capacity, but only the designed capacity of the
equipment being served by the district cooling plant, not the entire capacity of the district cooling plant.

{ ( ) ( )
}
Project building Chilled water central Project building Project building
design chilled water × plant refrigerant + refrigerant systems’ × refrigerant
cooling load impact value total capacity impact value

Project building refrigerant Project building design

systems’ total capacity
+ chilled water cooling load

For example, a building has 50 tons of packaged equipment with a refrigerant impact value of 150 per ton. The district
energy plant has a refrigerant impact value of 70 per ton and a total capacity of 1,000 tons. The building also has a
designed 500 tons of equipment served by the district cooling plant. The weighted average impact is calculated as
follows:

{ ( ) ( )
}
500 tons × 70 + 50 tons × 150

= 77.3 weighted average

(
refrigerant impact
500 tons + 50 tons
)
OPTIMIZING HVAC SYSTEMS TO MINIMIZE REFRIGERANT IMPACT
Avoiding equipment with a high refrigerant charge, such as multiple small packaged units or split systems, can
make this credit easier to achieve. Systems that use chillers or a central plant are more likely to meet the credit
requirements. If possible, incorporate indirect or direct evaporative cooling.
 447

For renovations, consider retrofitting or replacing existing HVAC systems to minimize ODP and GWP contributions.
Assess whether equipment replacement or refrigerant conversion is economical. Equipment that is easily accessible
and has a high run time may be a candidate for refrigerant swap with a reasonable return on investment.

EXAMPLES
Example calculation 1. The cooling equipment for a school consists of the following systems:
·· Twelve 5-ton packaged HVAC units with HFC-410A for classrooms
·· One 2-ton split system HVAC unit with HCFC-22 for a data room
·· One 1-ton window HVAC unit with HCFC-22 for an office

TABLE 3. Example calculations for school

Inputs

Units Qunit (tons) Refrigerant GWPr ODPr Rc (lb/ton) Life (yrs.) Lr (%) Mr (%)

12 5 R-410A 1,890 0 1.8 15 2 10

1 2 R-22 1,780 0.04 3.3 15 2 10

1 1 R-22 1,780 0.04 2.1 10 2 10

Qtotal 63

EA
Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 105) × Qunit) / Qtotal 108.33

Result: Average refrigerant impact has a value greater than 100, therefore this project does not earn this credit

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

TABLE 3 (CONTINUED). Example calculations for school

Calculations

LCODP^10^5 Refrigerant atmospheric impact

Tr Total Leakage LCGWP (LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ×
100,000 × (ODPr × =
(Lr × Life +Mr) (GWPr × Tr × Rc) / Life N × Qunit
Tr × Rc) / Life LCGWP + LCODP × 105

40% 90.72 0 90.7 5,443

40% 156.6 352 508.6 1,017

30% 112.1 252 364.1 364

Subtotal 6,825

Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 10 ) × Qunit) / Qtotal 108.33

5

Result: Average refrigerant impact has a value greater than 100, therefore this project does not earn this credit

Example calculation 2. The cooling equipment in an office building consists of the following systems:
·· One 500-ton centrifugal chiller with HFC-134a
·· One 50-ton reciprocating “pony” chiller with HCFC-22
·· Five 10-ton computer room air-conditioning units with HCFC-22
448

TABLE 4. Example calculations for office building

Inputs

Units Qunit (tons) Refrigerant GWPr ODPr Rc (lb/ton) Life (yrs.) Lr (%) Mr (%)

1 500 R-134a 1,320 0 2 25 2 10

1 50 R-22 1,780 0.04 2.1 20 2 10

5 10 R-22 1,780 0.04 2.4 15 2 10

Qtotal 600

Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 105) × Qunit) / Qtotal 108.92

Result: Average refrigerant impact has a value greater than 100, therefore this project does not earn this credit.

TABLE 4 (CONTINUED). Example calculations for office building

Calculations

LCODP^10^5 Refrigerant atmospheric impact

Tr Total Leakage LCGWP (LCGWP + LCODP ×
× 100,000 =
(Lr × Life +Mr) (GWPr × Tr × Rc) / Life 105 × N × Qunit
(ODPr × Tr × Rc) / Life LCGWP + LCODP × 105

60% 63.36 0 63.36 31,680

EA

50% 93.5 210 303 15,173

40% 113.9 256 369.9 18,496

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Subtotal 65,349

Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 105) × Qunit) / Qtotal 108.92

Result: Average refrigerant impact has a value greater than 100, therefore this project does not earn this credit.

Example calculation 3. A hotel’s cooling system includes the following equipment:

·· Three 1400-kW centrifugal chillers with HCFC-123
·· One 140-kW commercial refrigeration compressor rack with HCFC-22
·· Twelve 7-kW telephone and data room split-system cooling units with HCFC-22

TABLE 5. Example calculations for hotel

Inputs

Units Qunit (kW) Refrigerant GWPr ODPr Rc (kg/kW) Life (yrs.) Lr (%) Mr (%)

3 1 400 R-123 76 0.02 0.21 25 2 10

1 140 R-22 1,780 0.04 0.27 20 2 10

12 7 R-22 1,780 0.04 0.4 15 2 10

Qtotal 4 424

Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 105) × Qunit) / Qtotal 12.34

Result: Average refrigerant impact has a value less than or equal to 13, therefore this project earns this credit.
 449

TABLE 5 (CONTINUED). Example calculations for hotel

Calculations

Refrigerant atmospheric impact

Tr Total Leakage LCGWP LCODP ×
= (LCGWP + LCODP × 105 x N x Qunit
(Lr × Life +Mr) (GWPr × Tr × Rc) / Life 100,000
LCGWP + LCODP × 105

60% .38 10.08 10.46 43 932

50% 12.02 27 39.02 5 462.8

40% 18.99 42.67 61.66 5 179.44

Subtotal 54 574.24

Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 105) × Qunit) / Qtotal 12.34

Result: Average refrigerant impact has a value less than or equal to 13, therefore this project earns this credit.

Example calculation 4. The cooling equipment in an apartment building consists of four 8-ton outdoor VRF units.
Each unit has a base refrigerant amount of 16.5 pounds and an additional refrigerant amount of 2.7 pounds for
distribution, which must be included. The Rc for each unit is (16.5 pounds + 2.7 pounds) / 8 tons = 2.4 pounds / ton.

EA
TABLE 6. Example calculations for apartment building

Inputs

Qunit Rc (lb/ Life Lr Mr

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

Units Refrigerant GWPr ODPr
(tons) ton) (yrs.) (%) (%)

4 8 R-410A 1,890 0 2.4 15 2 10

Qtotal 32

Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 105) × Qunit) / Qtotal 120.96

Result: Average refrigerant impact has a value greater than 100, therefore this project does not earn this
credit

TABLE 6 (CONTINUED). Example calculations for apartment building

Calculations

Refrigerant atmospheric impact

Tr Total Leakage LCGWP LCODP × 105 × 100,000 (LCGWP + LCODP × 105 × N
=
(Lr × Life + Mr) (GWPr × Tr × Rc) / Life (ODPr × Tr × Rc) / Life × Qunit
LCGWP + LCODP × 105

40% 120.96 0 120.96 3,871

Subtotal 3,871

Average refrigerant atmospheric impact = ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 10 ) × Qunit) / Qtotal 120.96

5

Result: Average refrigerant impact has a value greater than 100, therefore this project does not earn this credit

DESIGNING FOR NO REFRIGERANTS OR LOW-IMPACT REFRIGERANT USE

In some cases, cooling needs can be met without vapor compression HVAC equipment. This can be possible in
buildings that are designed for natural ventilation and have very low cooling loads. Optimizing the following
non-HVAC design elements can help reduce the project building’s cooling load:
·· Massing
·· Building orientation
·· Window-to-wall ratio
450

·· Glazing properties
·· Shading
·· Insulation
·· Lighting and equipment power density

Determine whether natural refrigerants like carbon dioxide, ammonia, or water can be used to meet cooling needs
or other building goals. Absorption chillers, for example, are compatible with refrigerants like ammonia, and carbon
dioxide is popular for low-temperature cooling applications.
Heat from the refrigeration process can be recovered for other uses, like service hot water heating. To reduce
peak cooling requirements for ventilation air, use air-side energy recovery.

EVAPORATIVE COOLING
Another strategy for minimizing refrigerant charge is to incorporate direct or indirect evaporative cooling. Table 7
outlines the most favorable circumstances for this approach to refrigerant impact reduction.

TABLE 7. Evaporative cooling scenarios

Direct evaporative cooling Indirect evaporative cooling

Hot and dry climates with design wet-bulb temperatures Hot and dry climates with design wet-bulb temperatures
68°F (20°C) or lower 68°F (20°C) or lower
EA

Pretreatment of outside air for systems with higher latent loads,

Residential, light commercial, industrial or other spaces with
such as densely occupied office spaces, and need to
low latent heat gain
control humidity
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Indirect and direct evaporative cooling can be combined for greater efficiency. An indirect cooler lowers the
temperature of air and reduces the air’s moisture content; a direct cooler then cools the air further and restores
humidity to the air.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
If the core and shell project does not include all HVAC associated with anticipated work by the tenant but the project
team would like to include those systems to achieve the credit, documentation must be supported by the tenant sales
or lease agreement.

Retail
For Retail HVAC systems, use the calculation methodology and assumptions listed for all projects.

Retail projects with commercial refrigeration systems may either follow the prescriptive criteria or pursue
certification through U.S. EPA GreenChill’s certification program for newly constructed stores. If pursuing EPA
certification, follow the certification steps outlined on the program website.
If following prescriptive requirements, have the commercial refrigeration equipment tested for leaks according
to the procedures outlined in GreenChill’s Best Practices Guideline for Leak Tightness at Installation. The leak
testing is required for GreenChill certification but the guidelines are applicable to any retail project, including
international projects, regardless of whether the building is pursuing GreenChill certification. The installer is
typically responsible for conducting leak testing after installation. Include requirements in the contract with the
commercial refrigerant installer. The commissioning scope may also include verification of proper leak testing, but
this is not required.
Non-Retail projects that have commercial refrigeration systems may follow the prescriptive criteria available
to retail projects for commercial refrigeration systems. Both these prescriptive criteria for the commercial
refrigeration systems and the credit requirements for the HVAC refrigerant-using systems must be met to achieve
credit compliance in this case.
 451

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems
If a project has only downstream refrigeration equipment, only that equipment must be included in the refrigerant
impact calculation. If a project has only upstream refrigeration equipment, only that equipment must be included in
the refrigerant impact calculation. If a project has both downstream and upstream refrigeration equipment, use the
following procedure to show credit compliance.
Complete two separate refrigerant impact calculations: one to calculate the refrigerant impact using only the
downstream equipment and another using only the upstream equipment.
If both calculations meet the credit requirements, the project team has demonstrated credit compliance. If
neither calculation meets the credit requirements, the project cannot achieve this credit. If one calculation fails but
the other passes, the project team may demonstrate compliance using the weighted average refrigerant impact for
the project building (see Further Explanation, Calculations).

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Option 1. Eligible.

EA
Option 2. Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

Confirmation that only no or low-impact refrigerants are used X
REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Equipment type X

Refrigerant charge calculations (for VRF systems only) X

Equipment cooling capacity X

Provide refrigerant equipment schedule or GreenChill certification

X
(commercial refrigeration systems)

Equipment quantity X

Refrigerant type X

Refrigerant charge (plus supporting documentation, if applicable) X

Equipment life (plus supporting documentation, if applicable) X

Leak test results (commercial refrigeration systems only) X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Alternatives to CFCs and HCFCs, such as HFC-410A, have lower
refrigerant impacts but may require higher levels of energy use. Variable refrigerant flow and some split systems
rarely meet the requirements of this credit because of the long refrigerant piping runs and the high quantity of
refrigerant needed.
452

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

Sector-specific requirements have been added for commercial refrigeration equipment.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
EA

include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

downstream equipment the heating and cooling systems, equipment, and controls located in the project building
or on the project site and associated with transporting the thermal energy of the district energy system (DES) into
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

heated and cooled spaces. Downstream equipment includes the thermal connection or interface with the DES,
secondary distribution systems in the building, and terminal units.

natural refrigerant a compound that is not manmade and is used for cooling. Such substances generally have much
lower potential for atmospheric damage than manufactured chemical refrigerants. Examples include water, carbon
dioxide, and ammonia.

upstream equipment a heating or cooling system or control associated with the district energy system (DES) but
not part of the thermal connection or interface with the DES. Upstream equipment includes the thermal energy
conversion plant and all the transmission and distribution equipment associated with transporting the thermal
energy to the project building or site.
 453

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE CREDIT

Green Power and

Carbon Offsets
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

EA
GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS
INTENT

To encourage the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions through

the use of grid-source, renewable energy technologies and carbon
mitigation projects.

REQUIREMENTS
Engage in a contract for qualified resources that have come online since January 1, 2005, for a minimum of five years,
to be delivered at least annually. The contract must specify the provision of at least 50% or 100% of the project’s
energy from green power, carbon offsets, or renewable energy certificates (RECs).
Green power and RECs must be Green-e Energy certified or the equivalent. RECs can only be used to mitigate the
effects of Scope 2, electricity use.
Carbon offsets may be used to mitigate Scope 1 or Scope 2 emissions on a metric ton of carbon dioxide–
equivalent basis and must be Green-e Climate certified, or the equivalent.

For U.S. projects, the offsets must be from greenhouse gas emissions reduction projects within the U.S.
Determine the percentage of green power or offsets based on the quantity of energy consumed, not the cost.
Points are awarded according to Table 1.

TABLE 1. Points for energy from green power or carbon offsets

Percentage of total energy addressed by green

Points
power, RECs and/or offsets

50% 1

100% 2
454

Use the project’s annual energy consumption, calculated in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, if
Option 1 was pursued; otherwise use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption
Survey (CBECS) database to estimate energy use.

CORE AND SHELL ONLY

A core and shell building’s energy is defined as the energy usage of the core and shell floor area as defined by the
Building Owners and Managers Association (BOMA) standards, but not less than 15% of the project’s floor area.
EA
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 455

BEHIND THE INTENT

The voluntary market can be an effective catalyst for encouraging energy generators and utility companies to
develop clean energy sources and help address climate change. Purchasing renewable energy certificates (RECs)
allows buildings that use nonrenewable power to create market demand for renewable energy. Carbon offsets
allow buildings or companies to fund activities that seek to decrease carbon emissions or remove carbon from the
atmosphere, such as methane abatement, energy efficiency projects, and reforestation or land-use changes.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. INVESTIGATE AVAILABLE OPTIONS

The possibilities for purchasing green power, RECs, and offsets will vary with the project’s location
and energy types. Consider the costs of various options (see Further Explanation, Green Power
Purchasing).
·· Green power and RECs must be Green-e Energy certified or the equivalent. Direct or local green power
may be available through local utility providers; review their websites for green power cost premiums.
·· Green power and RECs can be used only toward the electric energy use portion of the project’s annual

EA
energy use (Scope 2, electricity). They cannot be applied toward nonelectric energy uses.
·· Carbon offsets must be Green-e Climate certified or the equivalent. Unlike RECs and purchased green
power, carbon offsets can be used toward both electric and nonelectric energy use.

GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

STEP 2. CONDUCT COST-BENEFIT ANALYSIS
Undertake a cost-benefit analysis to understand the financial and environmental benefits for the available
options. All carbon offsets are not the same. Some are associated with land-use development, others
with energy efficiency projects. Teams are encouraged to purchase carbon offsets that align with their
environmental interests and values.

STEP 3. SET PROJECT GOAL FOR GREEN POWER OR CARBON OFFSETS

Review the credit point thresholds and establish the green power or carbon offset purchase goal for the
project. The offset goal is not a one-time purchase—it must be met for multiple consecutive years, as
indicated in the credit requirements.

STEP 4. CALCULATE ENERGY USE ASSOCIATED WITH SCOPE 1 AND SCOPE 2 EMISSIONS
CATEGORIES
Determine the total grid-generated annual energy use, based on the option selected in EA Prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance.
·· Projects that used modeling to comply with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (Option
1) must use the whole-building simulation results to determine the total annual electricity and
nonelectricity energy use.
°° Exclude any site-generated electricity (e.g., wind turbines, photovotaics) and fuel (e.g., biogas) from
the total consumption amount, provided the project does not sell the on-site energy generated as
RECs.
°° Include as nonelectric energy any steam and chilled water purchased from the utility provider or a
third party and any fuel purchased for on-site electricity generation in the building (e.g., diesel for
gensets).
·· Projects that used a prescriptive pathway to achieve EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance
(Option 2 or 3) must use the U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption
Survey (CBECS) database to estimate annual energy use.
°° Exclude any site-generated electricity from the total annual electric energy use.
°° Use the total building area and appropriate energy use intensity (EUI) from the CBECS database to
calculate the projected electric and nonelectric annual energy use.
456

°° If a project contains multiple space types (e.g., an office building with ground-floor retail), use the
EUIs associated with each space type to generate the projected annual energy use (see Further
Explanation, Calculating Annual Energy Use Using CBECS Data for Projects with Multiple Space
Types).
·· Net-zero buildings—those anticipated to consume zero net energy on an annual basis—are eligible
to achieve 2 points under this credit without purchasing any additional renewable energy, RECs, or
carbon offsets, provided the project does not sell any RECs associated with the on-site renewable
energy production.

STEP 5. CALCULATE REQUIRED GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

Use the project’s electricity and nonelectricity energy use totals to determine the required amount of
green power and/or carbon offsets to be purchased.
·· Projects that use green power or RECs must convert their annual grid-generated electricity use to
MWh.
·· Projects that use carbon offsets must convert their annual grid-generated electricity use to metric
tons of CO2e. For conversion factors and GHG emissions factors, see Further Explanation, Calculating
Greenhouse Gas Emissions.
·· All projects must convert their annual nonelectricity energy use to metric tons of CO2e.
·· Any combination of the above can be used to achieve either the 50% or the 100% threshold. If the
project goal is less than the 100% threshold, prorate the required amount accordingly.

STEP 6. OBTAIN PROPOSALS FOR GREEN-E CERTIFIED PRODUCTS OR EQUIVALENT AND

MAKE PURCHASE
EA

Solicit proposals for green power, RECs, and/or carbon offsets from providers of Green-e certified
products, as specified in the credit requirements and select a vendor.
·· The provider must provide confirmation of the date on which the qualified resources came online.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· The contract must specify the purchasing goals and is valid for the duration indicated in the credit
requirements.
·· For U.S. projects, the offsets must come from greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions reduction projects
within the U.S.
·· If Green-e certified products are not available, equivalency of other products must be demonstrated
(see Further Explanation, Establishing Green-e Equivalency). Projects outside the U.S. that cannot find
local products that meet the Green-e standard or equivalent can still achieve this credit by purchasing
Green-e certified products from the U.S.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS

EQUATION 1. Total qualifying energy use

Total qualifying
annual energy
use
=
{( Total annual
grid-based
electricity use
–
Total annual
site-generated
electricity ) (
+
Total annual
fossil fuel use
–
Total annual
renewable fuels
use ) }
 457

EQUATION 2. Percentage of energy purchased or offset

{ ( ) ( ) ( )
}
Quantity of Purchased Purchased
RECs in kWh green power carbon offsets
% Energy
purchased or = + +

( ) ( ) ( )
offset
Annual building Annual building GHG emissions
energy use in energy use in associated with project’s
kWh kWh annual energy use

EQUATION 3. Metric tons of CO2 equivalent, Fuel A

Metric tons of CO2

equivalent, Fuel A
= Annual use, Fuel A (kBtu) × Direct GHG emissions factor, Fuel A (mt CO2e ⁄ kBtu)

EQUATION 4. Metric tons of CO2 equivalent, electricity

Metric tons of CO2

= Annual electricity
× × Indirect GHG emissions factor,

EA
3.412 (kBtu ⁄ kWh)
equivalent, electricity use (kWh) electricity (mt CO2e ⁄ kBtu)

GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

CALCULATING ANNUAL ENERGY USE USING CBECS DATA FOR PROJECTS WITH MULTIPLE
SPACE TYPES
A proposed 75,000-square-foot office project with 15,000 square feet of retail space has achieved EA Prerequisite
Minimum Energy Performance through a prescriptive path. The team wants to earn points under EA Credit Green
Power and Carbon Offsets, which requires determining the building’s total annual energy usage. The project will
have natural gas and electric service. Using data from CBECS (Table 2), the team can estimate annual energy
consumption by fuel type. For projects with multiple space types, calculate energy consumption for each space type
separately, based on Table 2.

TABLE 2. CBECS building energy intensity data

Total energy consumption Total electric energy consumption

Total nonelectric energy consumption
(CBECS Table C3) (CBECS Table C14)
Building type
kBtu/ft2 kWh/m2 kWh/ft2 kWh/m2 kBtu/ft2 kWh/m2

Education 83.1 262.2 11 118.4 45.5 143.6

Food sales 199.7 630.1 49.4 531.8 194.6 614

Food service 258.3 814.9 38.4 413.3 127.4 401.9

Health care
249.2 786.2 27.5 296.0 155.5 490.6
inpatient

Health care
94.6 298.5 16.1 173.3 39.6 124.9
outpatient

Lodging 100 315.5 13.5 145.3 53.9 170.1

Retail
73.9 233.2 14.3 153.9 25.1 79.2
(nonmall)

Enclosed and
102.2 322.4 22.3 240.0 26.2 82.7
strip malls

Office 92.9 293.1 17.3 186.2 34 107.3

458

TABLE 2 (CONTINUED). CBECS building energy intensity data

Total energy consumption Total electric energy consumption

Total nonelectric energy consumption
(CBECS Table C3) (CBECS Table C14)
Building type
kBtu/ft2 kWh/m2 kWh/ft2 kWh/m2 kBtu/ft2 kWh/m2

Public
93.9 296.3 12.5 134.6 51.3 161.9
assembly

Public order
115.8 365.3 15.3 164.7 63.5 200.3
and safety

Religious
43.5 137.2 4.9 52.7 26.9 84.9
worship

Service 77 242.9 11 118.4 39.5 124.6

Warehouse
45.2 142.6 7.6 81.8 19.3 60.9
and storage

Other 164.4 518.7 22.5 242.2 87.6 276.4

See the U.S. Energy Information Administration website for building type definitions.

Electricity usage is estimated as follows:

EA

Electricity usage = (Electric kWh /ft2 for space type x Project area)
= (17.3 kWh/ft2 x 75,000 ft2) + (14.3 kWh/ft2 x 15,000 ft2)
= 1,512,000 kWh
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

= 5,159,158 kBtu

The project natural gas usage can be estimated in the same manner:

Natural gas usage = (Non-Electric kBtu/ft2 for space type x Project area)
= (34 kBtu/ft2 x 75,000 ft2) + (25.1 kBtu/ft2 x 15,000 ft2)
= 2,926,000 kBtu

The project’s total annual building energy use is the sum of the electric and natural gas usage: 8,085,658 kBtu.

ESTABLISHING GREEN-E EQUIVALENCY

Projects not using Green-e certified products must demonstrate the alternative’s equivalency to the quality
standards established for Green-e Energy and Green-e Climate products:
·· Green-e Energy National Standard v2.3, Sections II, III (excluding G), IV (excluding A), and V
·· Green-e Energy Code of Conduct and Customer Disclosure Requirements – Sections III-VII
·· Green-e Climate National Standard v2.1, Sections 4, 5, 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, and 7
·· Green-e Climate Code of Conduct – Sections II-VII

The accounting process and standards must be equivalent to Green-e products and address the following:
·· Verifiable chain of custody
·· Verifiable age of renewable energy
·· Tracking of GHG reductions from eligible projects
·· Mechanism to prevent double-counting
·· Third party–verified retail transaction

For carbon offsets, retirement of an eligible credit alone is not equivalent to Green-e Climate certification.
 459

CALCULATING GREENHOUSE GAS EMISSIONS

When calculating offsets, project teams must use the default emissions factors established by ENERGY STAR
Portfolio Manager for the appropriate fuel types (Tables 3 and 4). Using Equation 5, apply the default emissions
factor to the project’s annual fuel consumption to determine the building’s greenhouse gas footprint is determined,
expressed in metric tons of CO2 equivalent (CO2e).

EQUATION 5. Project greenhouse gas emissions

GHG emissions (CO2e) = Consumption × CO2 emissions factor

where emissions factor = mass CO2 per mass or volume unit of fuel

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Determining compliance based on modeled energy use

A project team has used modeling to comply with EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance (Option 1).
According to the whole-building simulation results, the project building’s annual electricity use is 5,077,667 kWh
plus 5,750,000 kBtu of natural gas use. To earn 1 point under this credit, the project team has two choices.

EA
1. The project can purchase RECs for electricity consumption and carbon offsets for natural gas consumption. For
RECs, the team uses the following calculation:
5,077,667 kWh/yr x 50% = 2,538,834 kWh /yr

GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

For carbon offsets, the team uses this calculation:
5,775,000 kBtu/yr x (5.32 x 10-5 mtCO2e /kBtu) x 50% = 153.6 mtCO2e/yr

Projects are not required to cover 50% of its electricity use and 50% of its natural gas use, only 50% of total
energy use.

2. Alternatively, the project can purchase carbon offsets for all consumption (Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions). For
the carbon offsets to cover electricity use (Scope 2), the team performs the following calculation:
5,077,667 kWh/yr x (5.90 x 10-4 mtCO2e/ kWh) = 2995.8 mtCO2e/yr

For carbon offsets to cover natural gas use (Scope 1), the team uses this calculation:
5,775,000 kBtu/yr x (5.32 x 10-5 mtCO2e/kBtu) = 307.2 mtCO2e / yr

2995.8 + 307.2 = 3303 metric tons of CO2 equivalent. Thus, the project’s total carbon offsets are as follows:
3303 mtCO2e/yr x 50% = 1651.5 mtCO2e/yr

Example 2. Determining compliance using CBECS data

A project team has achieved EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance through one of the prescriptive
pathways (Option 2 or 3) and will therefore use CBECS data to estimate electricity and gas consumption. The project
is a 100,000-square-foot office building with 10,000 square feet of ground-floor retail space that uses both electricity
(for cooling and equipment) and natural gas (for heating and domestic hot water). The team is attempting to earn 2
points by covering 100% of the building’s energy use through RECs and offsets.
460

The team must estimate total electricity and natural gas use based on CBECS data for both space types, as follows:
Office electricity: 100,000 ft2 x 17.3 kWh/ft2 = 1,730,000 kWh
Retail electricity: 10,000 ft2 x 14.3 kWh/ft2 = 143,000 kWh
143,000 + 1,730,000 = 1,873,000 kWh
Office natural gas: 100,000 ft2 x 34 kBtu/ft2 = 3,400,000 kBtu

The emissions factors are applied as follows:

3,400,000 kBtu x (5.32 x 10-5) = 180.88 mtCO2e office natural gas

Retail natural gas: 10,000 ft2 x 25.1 kBtu/ft2 = 251,000 kBtu
251,000 kBtu x (5.32 x 10-5) = 13.35 mtCO2e retail natural gas
180.88 + 13.35 = 194.23 mtCO2e total retail and office

To earn 2 points, the project must purchase Green-e certified green power equal to 1,873,000 kWh and must also
purchase carbon offsets for 194.23 metric tons of CO2 equivalent.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
If the core and shell floor area is less than 15% of the gross floor area, use 15% of the total building area for the
EA

calculations. If not, use the actual percentage of core and shell floor area to determine the amount of energy
consumption.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

District Energy Systems (DES)
For projects using energy model Path 2 or 3 (aggregate building or DES scenario), green power and offsets used in a
DES may contribute toward this credit for a connected building. For any projects using energy model Path 1, green
power and offsets used in a DES do not contribute toward the credit for a connected building.
Performance is based on the fraction of the project building’s annual energy consumption that is supplied by
green power or made up for by carbon offsets. In the DES setting, this fraction depends in turn on the fraction of
district plant electricity that is supplied by the green power or offset, and the fraction of the model’s annual energy
consumption associated with the DES. For each thermal energy source provided to the building by the district plant,
calculate the green power or offset contribution by using Equations 6, 7, and 8.

EQUATION 6. Annual DES energy supplied by green power sources or covered by offsets

{ ( )( ) }
Quantity recs or green Quantity carbon offsets
power purchased purchased
Fraction of thermal +
energy source i from
green power or covered
= Electricity use to
generate source, i
Carbon equivalent of fuel
used to generate source, i
by recs/offsets (gs)

Total energy used to generate source, i

EQUATION 7. Annual energy supplied by DES thermal energy source.

Fraction of building annual

energy consumption supplied
by source (bs), i
=
{ Building energy supplied by source, i

Total building energy consumed

}
 461

EQUATION 8. Total qualifying contribution from DES

Total Green Power or offset contribution from DES = ∑ GS i × BS i

i

Derive the project building’s total annual energy consumption reported for EA Credit Green Power and Carbon
Offsets credit compliance from the proposed case modeling run of EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.
If green energy contributions from the DES are applied to the project, submit a letter from the DES owner
or operator verifying that the renewable energy is allocated specifically to the DES generation or distribution
equipment, and confirming that no renewable energy allocated specifically to the DES central plant building, if any
(in a separate LEED application), is being counted toward the renewable energy contribution of the satellite project
building. The letter must also confirm that no renewable energy is being double-counted among any satellite project
buildings (in separate LEED applications).
Projects without a Path 2 or 3 energy model may not take credit for renewable energy sources used for the DES
upstream of the project. However, credit may be taken for green power associated with the project itself. In this case,
project teams should follow the standard guidance.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS

EA
Projects must use Green-e qualified products or demonstrate Green-e equivalency to achieve this credit.
Projects that wish to use a local benchmark based on source energy from their country’s national or regional
energy agency must submit proof that the local benchmark contains a statistically significant sample of the building
type being referenced and that the benchmarking process is repeatable. The benchmark should include at least

GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS

30 buildings of the project building type, and the data should be weather normalized and account for internal and
external loads.
Additional information on the regressions and models used in CBECS can be found at eia.gov/emeu/cbecs/tech_
end_use.html to help determine whether a local baseline is equivalent to CBECS.
Projects outside the U.S. are not required to purchase products from the country in which the building is located.
Projects in Canada can either buy Green-e certified products or use RECs from Canadian facilities that meet the
eligible renewable definition and are generated at facilities certified by the EcoLogo Program (ecologo.org).
Projects can use the WRI-WBCSD Greenhouse Gas Protocol Standards to calculate GHG emissions based on
GHG inventories for the project location.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Annual electricity and nonelectricity energy use calculations X

Calculations showing required REC, green power, or carbon offsets for targeted point threshold X

Purchase contract or letter of commitment showing REC, green power, or carbon offsets for
X
targeted point threshold

Green-e equivalency documentation, if not Green-e certified X

462

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. The amount of the project’s proposed energy use, as determined
in Option 1 of the related prerequisite, can be used to calculate the green power, RECs, or offsets that will be
contracted.

EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Implementing energy efficiency measures that reduce total annual
energy use will reduce the amount of RECs and carbon offset purchases required to meet this credit’s requirements.

EA Credit Renewable Energy Production. Renewable energy production will reduce the project’s total energy use
and therefore the amount of green power, RECs, or carbon offsets required.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· In addition to including electricity, the credit now requires nonelectric energy use to be offset using carbon
offsets.
·· The credit now requires a five-year contract and specifies that resources must have come online after January
1, 2005, and be delivered at least annually.
·· The percentage thresholds have been increased to 50% for 1 point and 100% for 2 points.
EA

REFERENCED STANDARDS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Green-e Energy and Green-e Climate: green-e.org

U.S. Department of Energy’s Commercial Buildings Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS):

eia.gov/consumption/commercial/index.cfm

Building Owners and Managers Association (BOMA): boma.org

ENERGY STAR Portfolio Manager: Methodology for Greenhouse Gas Inventory and Tracking Calculations:
https://portfoliomanager.energystar.gov/pdf/reference/Emissions.pdf

Inventory of U.S. Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Sinks: 1990–2010. Annex 2 Methodology and Data for
Estimating CO2 Emissions from Fossil Fuel Combustion:
epa.gov/climatechange/ghgemissions/usinventoryreport/archive.html

2006 IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories: ipcc-nggip.iges.or.jp/public/2006gl/index.html

eGRID2012 Version 1.0—U.S. Environmental Protection Agency:

epa.gov/cleanenergy/energy-resources/egrid/index.html

WRI-WBCSD Greenhouse Gas Protocol: ghgprotocol.org/standards

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
carbon offset a unit of carbon dioxide equivalent that is reduced, avoided, or sequestered to compensate for
emissions occurring elsewhere (World Resources Institute)
 463

district energy system (DES) a central energy conversion plant and transmission and distribution system that
provides thermal energy to a group of buildings (e.g., a central cooling plant on a university campus). It does not
include central energy systems that provide only electricity.

green power a subset of renewable energy composed of grid-based electricity produced from renewable energy
sources

Scope 1 emissions direct greenhouse gas emissions from sources owned or controlled by the entity, such as
emissions from fossil fuels burned on site. Electricity produced on site through the burning of fossil fuels is
measured by the Scope 1 emissions associated with that fossil fuel.

Scope 2 emissions indirect greenhouse gas emissions associated with the generation of purchased electricity,
heating/cooling, or steam off site, through a utility provider for the entity’s consumption. Transmission and
distribution losses related to hot water, chilled water, and steam are included in Scope 2 emissions, but transmission
and distribution losses associated with electricity are not included.

EA
GREEN POWER AND CARBON OFFSETS
 465

Materials and
Resources (mr)
OVERVIEW

MR
The Materials and Resources (MR) credit category focuses on minimizing the embodied energy and other impacts
associated with the extraction, processing, transport, maintenance, and disposal of building materials. The

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES

requirements are designed to support a life-cycle approach that improves performance and promotes resource
efficiency. Each requirement identifies a specific action that fits into the larger context of a life-cycle approach to
embodied impact reduction.

THE WASTE HIERARCHY

Construction and demolition waste constitutes about 40 percent of the total solid waste stream in the United States1
and about 25% of the total waste stream in the European Union.2 In its solid waste management hierarchy, the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ranks source reduction, reuse, recycling, and waste to energy as the four
preferred strategies for reducing waste. The MR section directly addresses each of these recommended strategies.
Source reduction appears at the top of the hierarchy because it avoids environmental harms throughout a
material’s life cycle, from supply chain and use to recycling and waste disposal. Source reduction encourages the use
of innovative construction strategies, such as prefabrication and designing to dimensional construction materials,
thereby minimizing material cutoffs and inefficiencies.
Building and material reuse is the next most effective strategy because reusing existing materials avoids the
environmental burden of the manufacturing process. Replacing existing materials with new ones would entail
production and transportation of new materials, and it would take many years to offset the associated greenhouse
gases through increased efficiency of the building. LEED has consistently rewarded the reuse of materials. LEED v4
now offers more flexibility and rewards all material reuse achieved by a project—both in situ, as part of a building
reuse strategy, and from off site, as part of a salvaging strategy.
Recycling is the most common way to divert waste from landfills. In conventional practice, most waste is
landfilled—an increasingly unsustainable solution. In urban areas landfill space is reaching capacity, requiring

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, epa.gov/osw/conserve/rrr/imr/cdm/pubs/cd-meas.pdf.

2. European Commission Service Contract on Management of Construction and Demolition Waste, Final Report, http://www.eu-smr.eu/cdw/docs/BIO_
Construction%20and%20Demolition%20Waste_Final%20report_09022011.pdf (accessed April 9, 2013).
466

the conversion of more land elsewhere and raising the transportation costs of waste. Innovations in recycling
technology improve sorting and processing to supply raw material to secondary markets, keeping those materials in
the production stream longer.
Because secondary markets do not exist for every material, however, the next most beneficial use of waste
materials is conversion to energy. Many countries are lessening the burden on landfills through a waste-to-energy
solution. In countries such as Sweden and Saudi Arabia, waste-to-energy facilities are far more common than
landfills. When strict air quality control measures are enforced, waste-to-energy can be a viable alternative to
extracting fossil fuels to produce energy.
In aggregate, LEED projects are responsible for diverting more than 80 million tons (72.6 million tonnes) of
waste from landfills, and this volume is expected to grow to 540 million tons (489.9 million tonnes) by 2030.3 From
2000 to 2011, LEED projects in Seattle diverted an average of 90 percent of their construction waste from the landfill,
resulting in 175,000 tons (158,757.3 tonnes) of waste diverted.4 If all newly constructed buildings achieved the 90
percent diversion rate demonstrated by Seattle’s 102 LEED projects, the result would be staggering. Construction
debris is no longer waste, it is a resource.

LIFE-CYCLE ASSESSMENT IN LEED

Through credits in the MR category, LEED has instigated market transformation of building products by creating
a cycle of consumer demand and industry delivery of environmentally preferable products. LEED project teams
have created demand for increasingly sustainable products, and suppliers, designers, and manufacturers are
responding. From responsibly harvested wood to increased recycled content to bio-based materials, the increased
supply of sustainable materials has been measurable over the history of LEED. Several MR credits reward use of
products that perform well on specific criteria. It is difficult, however, to compare two products that have different
sustainable attributes—for example, cabinets made of wheat husks sourced from all over the country and bound
together in resin versus solid wood cabinets made from local timber. Life-cycle assessment (LCA) provides a
more comprehensive picture of materials and products, enabling project teams to make more informed decisions
MR

that will have greater overall benefit for the environmental, human health, and communities, while encouraging
manufacturers to improve their products through innovation.
LCA is a “compilation and evaluation of the inputs and outputs and the potential environmental impacts
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

of a product system throughout its life cycle.”5 The entire life cycle of a product (or building) is examined, the
processes and constituents identified, and their environmental effects assessed—both upstream, from the point of
manufacture or raw materials extraction, and downstream, including transportation, use, maintenance, and end of
life. This approach is sometimes called “cradle to grave.” Going even further, “cradle to cradle” emphasizes recycling
and reuse at the end of life rather than disposal.
Life-cycle approaches to materials assessment began in the 1960s with carbon accounting models. Since
then, LCA standards and practices have been developed and refined. In Europe and a few other parts of the world,
manufacturers, regulators, specifiers, and consumers in many fields have been using life-cycle information to
improve their product selections and product environmental profiles. Until relatively recently, however, the data
and tools that support LCA were lacking in the U.S. Now a growing number of manufacturers are ready to document
and publicly disclose the environmental profiles of their products, and programs that assist this effort and help users
understand the results are available.
LEED aims to accelerate the use of LCA tools and LCA-based decision making, thereby spurring market
transformation and improving the quality of databases. Recognizing the limitations of the life-cycle approach for
addressing human health and the ecosystem consequences of raw material extraction, LEED uses alternative,
complementary approaches to LCA in the credits that address those topics.

CROSS-CUTTING ISSUES

Required Products and Materials

The scope of the MR credit category includes the building or portions of the building that are being constructed
or renovated. Portions of an existing building that are not part of the construction contract are excluded from MR

3. USGBC, Green Building Facts, usgbc.org/ShowFile.aspx?DocumentID=18693 (accessed September 13, 2012).

4. City of Seattle, LEED Projects Analysis, seattle.gov/dpd/greenbuilding/docs/dpdp022009.pdf (accessed March 26, 2013).
5. ISO 14040 International Standard, Environmental management, Life cycle assessment, principles and framework (Geneva, Switzerland: International
Organization for Standardization, 2006).
 467

documentation unless otherwise noted. For guidance on the treatment of additions, see the minimum program
requirements.

Qualifying Products and Exclusions

The MR section addresses “permanently installed building products,” which as defined by LEED refers to products
and materials that create the building or are attached to it. Examples include structure and enclosure elements,
installed finishes, framing, interior walls, cabinets and casework, doors, and roofs. Most of these materials fall into
Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) 2012 MasterFormat Divisions 3-10, 31, and 32. Some products addressed
by MR credits fall outside these divisions.
Furniture is not required to be included in credit calculations. However, if furniture is included in MR credit
calculations, all furniture must be included consistently in all cost-based credits.
In past versions of LEED, all mechanical, plumbing, and electrical equipment (MEP), categorized as CSI
MasterFormat divisions 11, 21-28, and other specialty divisions, was excluded from MR credits. In this version
of LEED some specific products that are part of these systems but are “passive” (meaning not part of the active
portions of the system) may be included in credit calculations. This allows flexibility for the optional assessment
of piping, pipe insulation, ducts, duct insulation, conduit, plumbing fixtures, faucets, showerheads, and lamp
housings. If optional products or materials are included in cost-based credit calculations, such as Option 2 under
each Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits, they must be included consistently across all cost-based
credit calculations. Additionally, if optional products and materials are included in product based calculations,
such as Option 1 under each Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits, they are not required to be
included in cost-based credit calculations. However, unlike furniture, if some of these products are included in credit
calculations, not all products of that type must be included.
Special equipment, such as elevators, escalators, process equipment, and fire suppression, systems, is excluded
from the credit calculations. Also excluded are products purchased for temporary use on the project, like formwork
for concrete.
For Healthcare projects, the scope of MR Credit Medical Furniture and Furnishings includes all freestanding

MR
furniture and medical furnishings. Freestanding furniture items included in this credit cannot be counted in any
Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits, to avoid double-counting. Permanently installed items such
as casework and built-in millwork should be included in the Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits,
not MR Credit Medical Furniture and Furnishings.

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES

Defining a Product
Several credits in this category calculate achievement on the basis of number of products instead of product cost.
For these credits, a “product” or a “permanently installed building product” is defined by its function in the project.
A product includes the physical components and services needed to serve the intended function. If there are similar
products within a specification, each contributes as a separate product. Here are a few scenarios.

Products that arrive at the project site ready for installation:

·· Metal studs, wallboard, and concrete masonry units are all separate products.
·· For wallboard, the gypsum, binder, and backing are all required for the product to function, so each ingredient
does not count as a separate product.

Products that arrive as an ingredient or component used in a site-assembled product:

·· Concrete admixtures are considered separate products because each component (admixture, aggregate, and
cement) serves a different function; each component is therefore a separate product.

Similar products from the same manufacturer with distinct formulations versus similar products from the same
manufacturer with aesthetic variations or reconfigurations:
·· Paints of different gloss levels are separate products because each paint type is specified to serve a different
function, such as water resistance. Different colors of the same paint are not separate products because they
serve the same function.
·· Carpets of different pile heights are separate products because they are used for different kinds of foot traffic.
The same carpet in a different color is not a separate product.
468

·· Desk chairs and side chairs in the same product line are different products because they serve different
functions. Two side chairs differing only in aesthetic aspects, such as the presence of arms, are not different
products.

Determining Product Cost

Product and materials cost includes all taxes and expenses to deliver the material to the project site incurred by the
contractor but excludes any cost for labor and equipment required for installation after the material is delivered to
the site.
To calculate the total materials cost of a project, use either the actual materials cost or the default materials cost.
Actual materials cost. This is the cost of all materials being used on the project site, excluding labor but including
delivery and taxes.
Default materials cost. The alternative way to determine the total materials cost is to calculate 45% of total
construction costs. This default materials cost can replace the actual cost for most materials and products, as
specified above. If the project team is including optional products and materials, such as furniture and MEP items,
add the actual value of those items to the default value for all other products and materials.

Location Valuation Factor

Several credits in the MR section include a location valuation factor, which adds value to locally produced
products and materials. The intent is to incentivize the purchase of products that support the local economy.
Products and materials that are extracted, manufactured, and purchased within 100 miles (160 kilometers) of the
project are valued at 200% of their cost (i.e., the valuation factor is 2).
For a product to qualify for the location valuation factor, it must meet two conditions: all extraction,
manufacture, and purchase (including distribution) of the product and its materials must occur within that radius
(Figure 1), and the product (or portion of an assembled product) must meet at least one of the sustainable criteria
(e.g., FSC certification, recycled content) specified in the credit. Products and materials that do not meet the
location criteria but do meet at least one of the sustainability criteria are valued 100% of their cost (i.e., the valuation
factor is 1).
MR

The distance must be measured as the crow flies, not by actual travel distance. The point of purchase is

Portland cement manufacturing Gravel extraction

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Silica extraction Concrete mixing plant

Figure 1. Example material radius

Blast furnace slag extraction

Lime extraction Project site location

100 mile (160 km) radius from project site

 469

considered the location of the purchase transaction. For online or other transactions that do not occur in person, the
point of purchase is considered the location of product distribution.
For the location valuation factor of salvaged and reused materials, see MR Credit Building Product Disclosure
and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials, Further Explanation, Material Reuse Considerations.

Determining Material Contributions of an Assembly

Many sustainability criteria in the MR category apply to the entire product, as is the case for product certifications
and programs. However, some criteria apply to only a portion of the product. The portion of the product that
contributes to the credit could be either a percentage of a homogeneous material or the percentage of qualifying
components that are mechanically or permanently fastened together. In either case, the contributing value is based
on weight. Examples of homogeneous materials include composite flooring, ceiling tiles, and rubber wall base.
Examples of assemblies (parts mechanically or permanently fastened together) include office chairs, demountable
partition walls, premade window assemblies, and doors.
Calculate the value that contributes toward credit compliance as the percentage, by weight, of the material or
component that meets the criteria, multiplied by the total product cost.
Product value ($) = Total product cost ($) x (%) product component by weight x (%) meeting
sustainable criteria

Cotton fabric 5% (certified

by Rainforest Alliance)

Fastening hardware 2% Plastic component 25%

(25% recycled content) (10% post-consumer recycled content)
Arm rest plastic 5%
(10% post-consumer recycled content)

MR
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES

Metal base 20% Steel post 8% Wheels 5%

(25% recycled content) (40% recycled content) (10% post-consumer
recycled content)

Percentage (%) denotes assembly components by weight

Figure 2. Sustainably produced components of $500 office chair

470

TABLE 1. Example calculation for $500 office chair

Percentage of
Value of
Chair Percentage of product, Value of component meeting
sustainability
component by weight component sustainability
criteria
criteria

25% preconsumer
Fastening hardware 2% $10 $2.50
recycled content

100% certified by
Cotton fabric 5% $25 $25.00
Rainforest Alliance

10% postconsumer
Plastic component 25% $125 $12.50
recycled content

10% postconsumer
Armrest 5% $25 $2.50
recycled content

25% preconsumer
Metal base 20% $100 $25.00
recycled content

40% preconsumer
Steel post 8% $40 $16.00
recycled content

10% postconsumer
Wheels 5% $25 $1.25
recycled content

Total value contributing to credit $84.75

MR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 471

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES PREREQUISITE

Storage and Collection

of Recyclables
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

INTENT

To reduce the waste that is generated by building occupants and hauled

MR
to and disposed of in landfills.

STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS,

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE

Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building occupants for the collection and storage of
recyclable materials for the entire building. Collection and storage areas may be separate locations. Recyclable
materials must include mixed paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals. Take appropriate measures
for the safe collection, storage, and disposal of two of the following: batteries, mercury-containing lamps, and
electronic waste.

RETAIL

Conduct a waste stream study to identify the retail project’s top five recyclable waste streams, by either weight
or volume, using consistent metrics. Based on the waste stream study, list the top four waste streams for which
collection and storage space will be provided. If no information is available on waste streams for the project, use
data from similar operations to make projections. Retailers with existing stores of similar size and function can use
historical information from their other locations.
Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers and building occupants for the separation, collection, and
storage of recyclable materials for at least the top four recyclable waste streams identified by the waste study. Locate
the collection and storage bins close the source of recyclable waste. If any of the top four waste streams are batteries,
mercury-containing lamps, or electronic waste, take appropriate measures for safe collection, storage, and disposal.
472

BEHIND THE INTENT

Waste disposal continues to be a significant environmental burden on communities and ecosystems. In the U.S.,
paper, food, glass, metals, and plastics—all recyclable—make up approximately 69% of total municipal solid waste1
(Figure 1). By diverting such recyclable waste from landfills, building owners can not only reduce hauling costs but
also help convert recyclables into new products, reducing demand for virgin materials.

Figure 1. Total municipal solid waste

generation. Adapted from the US
Environmental Protection Agency.
Food scraps
Yard trimmings 12.7% Other 3.3%
13.2%

Wood 6.6%

Rubber,
leather, and
textiles 7.9%

Plastics 12%
Paper 31%

Metals
8.4% Glass
4.9%

A factor that commonly thwarts recycling efforts within buildings is a lack of convenient, physical spaces for
doing so. Incorporating recycling infrastructure early in the design process encourages successful recycling once
operations begin. Well-designed and accessible waste management infrastructure that anticipates how and where
MR

waste will be discarded helps occupants make recycling their default behavior.
The increasing volume of electronic waste (e-waste)—computers, cameras, printers, keyboards—has become
a growing environmental concern. Therefore, identifying storage areas, recycling facilities, and haulers that can
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

process e-waste is important. The disposal procedure for batteries, fluorescent lamps, and other e-waste is more
hazardous than for cardboard, glass, plastic, metals, and paper. Because safety in handling and diversion of these
materials is often overlooked by many recycling programs, this prerequisite requires developing waste management
infrastructure for at least two hazardous waste streams.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY WASTE DISPOSAL NEEDS FOR PROJECT

Identify the possible waste types and quantities that may be generated by different occupants and
spaces. For example, an office may need a large area devoted to paper recycling, whereas a café may
require more space for plastics, glass, and metals.
·· Core and Shell projects may need to estimate requirements (see Further Explanation, Rating System
Variations).
·· Even if a recycling service is not available, all required recyclable waste streams must have dedicated
storage in anticipation of future service (see Further Explanation, Projects without Available Recycling
Infrastructure).
·· Retail projects only: Conduct a waste stream audit for the project in an existing location, or make
projections based on historical data for similar establishments. Identify the top-five recyclable waste
streams. List the top-four waste streams for which collection and storage space will be provided. See
Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

1. epa.gov/osw/nonhaz/municipal/pubs/msw2009rpt.pdf (accessed July 3, 2013).

 473

STEP 2. DESIGN APPROPRIATELY SIZED STORAGE AREAS

Provide sufficient collection and storage space for all required recyclables. Indicate recycling storage
and collection areas on a floor plan, and be prepared to describe the dedicated recycling storage areas,
their accessibility, and how these spaces will serve their functional needs (see Further Explanation,
Infrastructure Considerations).
·· Storage areas should be easily accessible to building occupants, including visitors, full-time occupants,
operations staff, and waste haulers.
·· For hazardous waste streams (batteries, mercury-containing lamps, e-waste), take appropriate
measures for safe collection, storage, and disposal.
·· Locate and highlight central collection and storage areas for recyclables, including paper, cardboard,
glass, plastic, metal, and e-waste, on submitted floor plans.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

PROJECTS WITHOUT AVAILABLE RECYCLING INFRASTRUCTURE

Projects where there is no access to haulers or external facilities must still comply with this prerequisite by
establishing accessible recycling areas. As an interim measure, until a recycling service becomes available, consider
alternative means of recycling, such as reuse or donation.
The requirements of this prerequisite help establish recycling infrastructure in the building and encourage waste
separation behavior by occupants.

INFRASTRUCTURE CONSIDERATIONS
Consider the following factors for the setup, size, and accessibility of storage and collection of recyclables.

MR
Recycling approach. Research local recycling programs. Some project teams may need to coordinate multiple
services. Determine which materials will be stored separately on site and which may be commingled into a single
stream and separated off site. The number and size of bins will affect storage requirements. Consider any special

STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES

equipment that might be needed (e.g., tanks for fryer oil, compactors, and bailers).

Frequency of collection. Occupants may generate more of one type of waste than another, necessitating different
schedules for collection or different space requirements. Haulers may operate on a calendar schedule, use sensing
technology to retrieve waste only when the compactor is full, or negotiate pick-up patterns for specialized waste,
such as e-waste.

Specialized waste streams. Some waste streams may require particular handling or disposal requirements. For
example, health care, retail, and some office projects may require secure areas for shredding sensitive or proprietary
documents. Electronic waste and mercury-containing lamps may require extra precautions to prevent breakage
or exposure to toxins. To set up safe storage and recycling programs, refer to the U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency’s universal wastes page, at epa.gov/wastes/hazard/wastetypes/universal/index.htm.

Access for waste haulers. Ensuring that waste haulers have access to the recyclable materials is particularly
important when planning and building loading docks and roads or when special equipment is required. It may be
necessary to demonstrate hauler accessibility by highlighting central storage locations and equipment pull-in on a
site plan. Project teams may wish to consult local waste haulers to ensure adequate space for collection vehicles, with
appropriate clearances and turning radii.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell

Because tenant spaces are likely to be unfinished, Core and Shell projects may estimate tenants’ recycling needs,
based on case study or historical data of similar buildings in the same area, or past project experience.
To reinforce recycling behaviors amongst future occupants, consider incorporating recycling program requirements
474

into tenant guidelines, including information regarding the building’s recycling policy and procedures; the
requirement that tenant spaces are to be fit-out with dedicated, accessible recycling areas; and recommendations
and guidelines for appropriate sizing of recycling infrastructure.

Retail
Retail projects must identify the project’s top-five recyclable waste streams by conducting a waste stream study.
The waste stream study must include, at a minimum, a 24-hour period. In some cases the representative time
period may be longer. Project teams will be asked how the time period chosen is a representative sample
The required measurement of each waste stream may be by weight or volume but must be consistent. Visual
estimation is not considered an effective metric. Project teams must describe the method of conducting the waste
stream study, including location, time period, separation method, safety precautions, and measurement method.
Waste streams comprise two major substreams: waste disposed of via landfills or incinerators and waste diverted
from disposal through recycling, reuse, or composting. The results of the waste stream study must divide the waste
into at least these two substreams.
Use the findings of the study to evaluate how each type of waste can be reduced and set goals for minimizing
waste and disposal costs. This may include source reduction, reuse, and recycling. In addition, check local waste
haulers, buyers, and other recycling service providers to investigate the potential disposal and diversion options. For
example, a local nursery may be able to use coffee grounds for compost.
If a waste stream study is not feasible, the project team may make an informed estimate using one of the
following approaches:
·· Make projections based on waste stream study of similar retail operation in close proximity to the project.
·· Use historical data from existing stores in other locations of the same retailer of similar size and function.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. For campuses, a shared central recycling facility for haulers is
MR

acceptable, provided the space accommodates recycling produced by all buildings served.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All projects Retail only

Verification of recycled material types X

Narrative describing recycling storage and collection strategies X

Floor plans indicating recycling storage and collection areas X

Methodology and results of waste stream study X

 475

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Prerequisite PBT Source Reduction—Mercury (Healthcare). Mercury-containing lamps and certain types of
electronic waste fall under the scope of both this prerequisite and the related prerequisite. Consider both scenarios
when designing waste and recycling facilities.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

Materials that require dedicated storage now include batteries, mercury-containing lamps, and e-waste; project
teams may choose two of the three. For retail projects, the required number of waste streams with dedicated storage
has increased from three to four.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS

MR
dedicated storage a designated area in a building space or a central facility that is sized and allocated for a
specific task, such as the collection of recyclable waste. Signage often indicates the type of recyclable waste stored

STORAGE AND COLLECTION OF RECYCLABLES

there. Some waste streams, such as mercury-based light bulbs, sensitive paper documents, biomedical waste, or
batteries, may require particular handling or disposal methods. Consult the municipality’s safe storage and disposal
procedures or use guidelines posted on the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency website, at www.epa.gov.

electronic waste discarded office equipment (computers, monitors, copiers, printers, scanners, fax machines),
appliances (refrigerators, dishwashers, water coolers), external power adapters, and televisions and other
audiovisual equipment

mixed paper white and colored paper, envelopes, forms, file folders, tablets, flyers, cereal boxes, wrapping paper,
catalogs, magazines, phone books, and photos
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

476
 477

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES PREREQUISTE

Construction and
Demolition Waste
Management Planning
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers
Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

MR
INTENT

To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and

incineration facilities by recovering, reusing, and recycling materials.

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING

REQUIREMENTS
Develop and implement a construction and demolition waste management plan:
·· Establish waste diversion goals for the project by identifying at least five materials (both structural and
nonstructural) targeted for diversion. Approximate a percentage of the overall project waste that these
materials represent.
·· Specify whether materials will be separated or commingled and describe the diversion strategies planned for
the project. Describe where the material will be taken and how the recycling facility will process the material.

Provide a final report detailing all major waste streams generated, including disposal and diversion rates.
Alternative daily cover (ADC) does not qualify as material diverted from disposal. Land-clearing debris is not
considered construction, demolition, or renovation waste that can contribute to waste diversion.
478

BEHIND THE INTENT

Construction waste is a significant portion of the waste produced in the world. The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) estimated that in the U.S. in 2003, 170 million tons of construction and demolition waste were
generated and, of that, 61% from nonresidential construction projects.1 The European Commission estimates that
510 million metric tonnes of construction waste is generated annually by European Union member nations.2 Keeping
these materials out of landfills prevents ground and water pollution, promotes recycling, and keeps materials in
active use longer.
Waste management services vary widely from one location to another; therefore, teams should begin
by identifying the technologies, haulers, and facilities in the project’s area. Planning for construction waste
management (CWM) before construction allows time to identify the most effective waste diversion strategies
available. Such strategies typically include reuse, recycling, donation, and salvage; however, source reduction and
source separation are also viable and effective. Source reduction eliminates project waste through prefabrication,
modular construction, or incorporating standard material lengths or sizes into construction documents. Source
separation sorts waste on site into recycling streams, ensuring delivery to the correct facility.
Developing a CWM plan early in the design process allows more time for planning and coordination, identifying
appropriate strategies, and developing contractual agreements. Educating project team members, site workers, and
waste haulers helps ensure that the plan is followed and material is actually diverted from landfills and incinerators.
A well-devised CWM plan can also minimize cost and maximize return by decreasing tipping fees, selling high-
valued scrap materials, or identifying materials for reuse.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
MR

STEP 1. IDENTIFY WASTE DIVERSION GOALS

Identify at least five construction or demolition material streams for diversion from landfill. It may be
easiest to focus on determining the heaviest waste or the waste that generates the most volume.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Common materials that may be simple to divert include drywall, wood, scrap metals, brick, and
concrete.
·· Finish materials, such as flooring and ceiling tiles, can often be recycled through the major
manufacturers.
·· Consider incorporating reuse of finish materials, furniture, or framing into the design early. Reusing
existing materials may require design modifications. Some materials must remain intact to be reused
(e.g., drywall) or may require additional preparation (e.g., de-nailing).
Source reduction strategies should be incorporated into the design of the project and outlined in the
CWM plan. These strategies include modular construction, reduced packaging, using industry-standard
measurements, and prefabrication.

STEP 2. SELECT COLLECTION AND DIVERSION METHODS

Explore on-site and off-site waste collection and sorting opportunities and consider the infrastructure
needed for implementation (see Further Explanation, Effective Construction Waste Management
Strategies).
·· Projects may use a combination of on-site separation and commingled collection, depending on what
is appropriate for the project location, material stream, and available facilities and haulers.
·· For on-site separation, common CWM strategies include donation, resale, on-site reuse, recycling, or
refurbishment. Crushing asphalt, concrete, and masonry for infill or aggregate is also considered on-
site waste diversion.
·· The most common off-site strategies are incineration, combustion of wood, and sending commingled
waste to a sorting facility.
·· Identify diversion options for materials.
·· Incineration may be considered diversion if reuse and recycling methods are not readily available in the
project’s location; this must be included in the CWM plan. Wood-derived fuel, or wood combustion,
Figureis considered
1. ENERGY diversion
STAR and not subject
water management to the
system additional
builder requirements for incineration (see Further
checklist

1. epa.gov/osw/nonhaz/municipal/pubs/msw2009rpt.pdf (accessed July 3, 2013).

2. ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/pdf/story_book.pdf (accessed May 28, 2013).
 479

Explanation, Waste-to-Energy).
·· Using a recycling facility for which recycling rates have been independently certified by a third
party, such as the Recycling Certification Institute (recyclingcertification.org), provides assurance
that diversion rates are accurate, but it is not required for compliance. Some haulers work with local
municipalities to certify their average diversion rates.
·· Consider how CWM plan requirements, or the requirement to write a plan, can be included in
specification documents under Division 1, General Requirements.

STEP 3. DRAFT CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

The CWM plan must be customized for each project. The plan must include an overall project waste
diversion goal and identify at least five kinds of materials that will be diverted from landfills or
incineration.
·· There is no minimum threshold for diversion, though project teams may earn points for meeting
the thresholds set in the corresponding credit (see MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste
Management).
·· All projects must comply with this prerequisite, including projects located in areas without recycling
services and those not intending to pursue the corresponding credit.
·· The plan must account for all materials, including land-clearing debris, materials to be used for
alternative daily cover (ADC), and other materials not contributing to diversion but not included in the
diverted waste total.
·· The safe removal and disposal of hazardous materials must also be covered in the CWM plan.
Hazardous materials must be tracked separately and not be included in the project’s total waste.
·· Specify the means and methods of diversion for each of the five selected material streams and the
approximate amount of waste of each.
·· If possible, provide contracts or sample contract language that describes the waste-sorting strategies
and technologies used by the waste hauler and facility. Successful CWM plans start with early
establishment of contractual obligations.
·· When developing the waste hauler contract, consider including the waste reporting structure, a
schedule that identifies the responsible parties and their contact information, and a clear chain and
method of communication. Consider involving waste haulers in regular construction meetings.

MR
STEP 4. DECIDE WHETHER TO PURSUE CREDIT
Determine whether the project team will seek to achieve the corresponding credit, which awards points
for implementing the plan developed in this prerequisite and meeting diversion thresholds (see MR Credit

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING

Construction and Demolition Waste Management). A project team that does not pursue the credit must
nevertheless develop the plan and produce a final waste report.

STEP 5. PRODUCE WASTE REPORT

Create a final report on the total construction and demolition waste produced by the project and the
total waste diverted, using the following equation.

EQUATION 1. Diversion rate

Diversion rate = (Total waste diverted from landfill / Total waste produced by project) × 100

·· Units may be weight or volume but must be consistent throughout.

·· If the project team is pursuing the corresponding credit, see MR Credit Construction and Demolition
Waste Management for additional requirements for the final waste report.
480

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance. This prerequisite has no performance requirement, but the corresponding
credit does (see MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management).

EFFECTIVE CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES

On-site separation (also known as source separation) is most viable if multiple bins are conveniently located and the
general contractor and subcontractors enforce careful separation. A best practice for source separation is to target
waste materials that are easily separated and have established recycling markets, such as steel, wood, and concrete.
On-site separation is preferable to commingling because separated wastes are more likely to actually be diverted
from the landfill. Using easy-to-understand multilingual or symbol-based signage helps prevent contamination of
on-site source separation areas.
Commingled collection (or single-stream recycling) may be more appropriate for sites with limited storage
area for waste containers. Recyclable materials are mixed in one container but sorted and processed at an off-site
recycling facility, which separates them from the waste going to a landfill. Commingled waste may be considered
only one material stream unless the facility can provide diversion rates for specific materials.
To count toward the corresponding credit (MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management),
commingled recycling facilities must be able to provide diversion rates either specific to the project, or an average
diversion rate for the facility that is regulated by the local or state authority. The average recycling rate for the facility
must exclude ADC.
Donating surplus or architectural salvage or community donation is permissible as long as the organization can
verify and track the material, including how much is received and information for where they are going. Habitat for
Humanity Restore is a commonly used donation facility in the U.S. and Canada.
Use of construction waste to infill mining pits is permissible only if the waste is “clean” and the work is overseen
MR

by the state or local government or a government sponsored organization.

Leaving items on the curb for people to pick up is not acceptable. Dumping in the ocean is never permissible as a
diversion strategy.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

WASTE-TO-ENERGY
Waste-to-energy may be considered a viable diversion strategy if the project team follows European Commission
Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC and European Commission Waste Incineration Directive 200/76/EC. In
addition, the facility must meet the applicable European standards based on the fuel type. See Referenced Standards
for more information on these directives:
·· EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers
·· EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels
·· EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner

The combustion of wood or “wood-derived fuel” is not considered waste-to-energy and is exempt from the above
criteria.
Project teams must demonstrate that reuse and recycling strategies were exhausted before sending waste
material to energy facilities.
 481

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Campus buildings may develop one comprehensive plan for
construction waste.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Construction waste management plan X

Total construction waste X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management. See the related credit for additional
considerations and waste diversion requirements.

MR
CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING

The creation of a CWM plan is a new requirement.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
European Commission Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC: www.ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/
framework/index.htm

European Commission Waste Incineration Directive 2000/76/EC: www.europa.eu/legislation_summaries/

environment/waste_management

EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Terminology, general requirements,
testing and marking: www.cen.eu/cen/Products

EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Special requirements for boilers with
atomizing oil burners: www.cen.eu/cen/Products

EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers, Assembly comprising a boiler body and a forced
draught burner: www.cen.eu/cen/Products

EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Special requirements for boilers with forced
draught oil burners with outputs up to 70 kW and a maximum operating pressure of 3 bar, Terminology,
special requirements, testing and marking: www.cen.eu/cen/Products
482

EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels, manually and automatically stoked, nominal heat output of up
to 500 kW: www.cen.eu/cen/Products

EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Specific requirements for the domestic hot
water operation of combination boilers with atomizing oil burners of nominal heat input not exceeding 70
kW: www.cen.eu/cen/Products

EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner of nominal heat
output not exceeding 1000 kW: www.cen.eu/cen/Products

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
alternative daily cover (ADC) material other than earthen material placed on the surface of the active face of a
municipal solid waste landfill at the end of each operating day to control vectors, fires, odors, blowing litter, and
scavenging. Generally these materials must be processed so they do not allow gaps in the exposed landfill face.
(CalRecycle)

clean waste nonhazardous materials left over from construction and demolition. Clean waste excludes lead and
asbestos.
MR

commingled waste building waste streams that are combined on the project site and hauled away for sorting into
recyclable streams. Also known as single-stream recycling.

land-clearing debris and soil materials that are natural (e.g., rock, soil, stone, vegetation). Materials that are man-
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

made (e.g., concrete, brick, cement) are considered construction waste even if they were on site.

waste-to-energy the conversion of nonrecyclable waste materials into usable heat, electricity, or fuel through a
variety of processes, including combustion, gasification, pyrolization, anaerobic digestion, and landfill gas (LFG)
recovery
 483

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES PREREQUISITE

PBT Source
Reduction—Mercury
This prerequisite applies to: Healthcare

INTENT

To reduce mercury-containing products and devices and mercury

release through product substitution, capture, and recycling.

MR
REQUIREMENTS

PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY

As part of the project’s recycling collection system, identify the following:
·· types of mercury-containing products and devices to be collected;
·· criteria governing how they are to be handled by a recycling program; and
·· disposal methods for captured mercury.

Applicable mercury-containing products and devices include, but are not limited to, lamps (such as linear and
circular fluorescents, integrally ballasted and nonintegrally ballasted compact fluorescents and HIDs) and dental
wastes (such as scrap amalgam, chair side traps, and separator wastes).
In facilities delivering dental care, specify and install amalgam separation devices that meet or exceed the ISO-
11143 standard.
Comply with the mercury elimination requirements outlined below, from the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design
and Construction of Health Care Facilities, Section A1.3- 4b, Mercury Elimination.
·· 4.2.1.1. New construction: healthcare facilities may not use mercury-containing equipment, including
thermostats, switching devices, and other building system sources. Lamps are excluded.
·· 4.2.1.2. Renovation: healthcare facilities must develop a plan to phase out mercury-containing products and
upgrade current mercury-containing lamps to high-efficiency, low-mercury, or mercury-free lamp technology.

Do not specify or install preheat, T-9, T-10, or T-12 fluorescents or mercury vapor high-intensity discharge (HID)
lamps in the project. Do not specify probe-start metal halide HID lamps in any interior spaces.
Specify and install illuminated exit signs that do not contain mercury and use less than 5 watts of electricity.
Fluorescent and high-pressure sodium lamps must meet the criteria in Table 1.
484

TABLE 1. Maximum mercury content of lamps

Lamp Maximum content

T-8 fluorescent, eight-foot 10 mg mercury

T-8 fluorescent, four-foot 3.5 mg mercury

T-8 fluorescent, U-bent 6 mg mercury

T-5 fluorescent, linear 2.5 mg mercury

T-5 fluorescent, circular 9 mg mercury

Compact fluorescent, nonintegral ballast 3.5 mg mercury

Compact fluorescent, integral ballast 3.5 mg mercury, ENERGY STAR qualified

High-pressure sodium, up to 400 watts 10 mg mercury

High-pressure sodium, above 400 watts 32 mg mercury

mg = milligram
MR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 485

BEHIND THE INTENT

Mercury is a persistent bioaccumulative toxic (PBT) chemical element and a neurotoxin. PBTs, which break down
extremely slowly in the environment, accumulate within animal tissues in increasing concentrations up the food
chain. Once present in an organism, mercury can affect the central nervous system, ultimately damaging the brain,
spinal cord, kidneys, and liver. Released into the environment, it is difficult to contain.
In buildings, mercury releases come from breakage of lamps containing mercury or from some kinds of
equipment. This prerequisite focuses on reducing mercury found in health care building system components and
lighting.
A robust recycling program enables collection and recycling of equipment that contains mercury. This
prerequisite requires that projects make plans for the handling of mercury in building systems and lighting during
design, construction, and major renovations. Strategies include source reduction, operational cost reduction, and
prevention of spills that could expose staff and patients to contamination and entail costly remediation measures.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

For Projects Reusing Existing Mercury-Containing Equipment

and Lamps

STEP 1. INVENTORY EXISTING MERCURY-CONTAINING EQUIPMENT AND LAMPS

Work with the building maintenance department to develop an inventory of all mercury-containing
equipment and lamps within the project boundary (see Further Explanation, Inventory Scope).

MR
·· Building systems and indoor and outdoor lighting equipment must be included in the inventory.
·· Medical equipment may also be included.
Collect the following information for the inventory:

PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY

·· Equipment, building system, lamp type
·· Quantity within the project boundary
·· Mercury content
List the maximum mercury content allowed for the mercury-containing lamps and identify lamps that do
not comply with the prerequisite criteria.

STEP 2. DEVELOP PHASE-OUT AND UPGRADE PLAN

Based on the inventory, develop a phase-out plan to transition any mercury-containing equipment and
lamps to mercury-free devices and replace noncompliant mercury lamps with low-mercury or mercury-
free lamps.
·· Where feasible, completely eliminating mercury in the building is a best practice. It avoids the need to
develop ongoing collection, handling, and recycling or disposal procedures.
·· If the total elimination of mercury is not feasible given existing equipment within the project’s scope of
work, develop a plan to phase out mercury in building equipment and lamps.

All Projects

STEP 1. INCORPORATE MERCURY LIMITS INTO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

Specify mercury-free building equipment, including thermostats, switching devices, lamps, and other
building system sources (see Further Explanation, Inventory Scope).
·· Consider using digital measurement devices and controls to prevent “hidden” mercury from being
installed.
486

·· Specify high-efficiency, low-mercury lamps that meet the credit criteria for the specific lamp type, or
specify mercury-free lamps (see Further Explanation, Lamp Exclusions).
·· Although 8-foot and U-bent lamps are permitted under this prerequisite, they are particularly
susceptible to breakage because of their size and configuration. Consider eliminating large and
awkward lamps for operational staff safety.
·· Include specifications for illuminated exit signs and metal halide lamps that meet the criteria.
·· Mercury-free alternatives to low-wattage fluorescent lamps, such as LED or LEC, comply with the
credit requirements only if they are at least as energy efficient as comparable mercury-containing
lamps.
·· If either average and maximum values or ranges are given for mercury content in manufacturer’s data,
use the highest value.

STEP 2. SPECIFY COMPLIANT AMALGAM SEPARATION FOR DENTAL FACILITIES

(IF APPLICABLE)
Specify amalgam separation devices that meet or exceed ISO 11143 standards.
·· Separators reduce the amount of amalgam entering the sewage system by removing amalgam
particles from the wastewater of a dental treatment center.
·· The ISO standard specifies the efficiency of the amalgam separators (in terms of the level of retention
of amalgam based on a laboratory test) and the test procedure for determining this efficiency.
·· This standard also includes requirements for the safe function of the amalgam separator through
integral markings and instructions for use, operation, and maintenance.

STEP 3. TRACK PRODUCTS DURING CONSTRUCTION

Track specified and purchased materials during construction with a material checklist or tracking form
(see Further Explanation, Sample Inventory and Lighting Schedule).
·· Prepare a lighting schedule that includes mercury content, ballast type, and product manufacturers’
information for mercury-containing and high-pressure sodium lamps.
·· Check material safety data sheets and manufacturers’ documentation before installation to ensure that
only qualifying products and lamps are used.
MR

STEP 4. PLAN FOR COLLECTING AND RECYCLING MERCURY-CONTAINING EQUIPMENT

Create a mercury collection and recycling program, including storage areas, handling methods, and
disposal process. Prepare a narrative that describes the plan.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Consider undertaking the following activities during plan preparation and implementation:
·· Coordinate the collection and recycling of mercury-containing devices with MR Prerequisite Storage
and Collection of Recyclables. Conduct an audit of a similar facility to identify mercury-containing
devices in the project’s waste stream and inform the development of appropriate recycling facilities
(see Further Explanation, Mercury-Containing Devices in the Waste Stream).
·· Develop a protocol for collection and disposal of mercury-containing spills and incorporate it into
training for operating personnel.
·· Coordinate the development of a recycling program for mercury-containing products with
representatives from waste management, purchasing, and industrial hygiene.
·· Avoid bulb crushers, which can expose workers to mercury vapor and generate hazardous waste, even
though crushed bulbs are not classified as universal waste.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

INVENTORY SCOPE
The following building equipment must be included in the prerequisite scope for projects planning to reuse existing
mercury-containing equipment and lamps:
·· Thermostats
·· Switching devices
 487

·· Relays
·· Lamps
Because the following types of medical equipment could have hidden mercury, and it is recommended that they be
included in a mercury inventory and phase-out plan:
·· MRI equipment
·· Wheelchairs
·· Automated beds
·· Cantor tubes
·· Bed warmers
·· Thermometers
·· Pressure-measuring devices
Mercury content requirements are specified by lamp type. Figure 1 is an example of typical lamp types in a Healthcare
project.

Figure 1. Lamp Types

T5

T5 linear

MR
T8 linear T5 circle

PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY

T9
T8

T10

T8 U

SCALE:
1”
(25.4 mm)

FOR CONSTRUCTION
LAMP EXCLUSIONS
Operating rooms, dental treatment rooms, dental labs, and other spaces in medical military facilities may require
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR11
lamps with very high CRI and color temperature to comply with UFC 4-501-01. If the prerequisite criteria and UFC
MRc PBT Source Reduction- Mercury in Lamps
4-501-01 conflict, affected lamps may be excluded from the prerequisite.
If the prerequisite criteria and local code or regulations conflict, affected lamps may be excluded from the
prerequisite. Retain a copy of the local code that conflicts with the prerequisite criteria.
488

MERCURY-CONTAINING DEVICES IN THE WASTE STREAM

Mercury-containing waste to be addressed in coordination with MR Prerequisite Storage and Collection of
Recyclables includes the following equipment:
·· Linear and circular fluorescent lamps
·· Compact fluorescent lamps
·· HID lamps
·· Dental wastes (scrap amalgam, chair side traps, amalgam separator wastes)

The following data should be captured during an audit to identify mercury-containing devices in the project waste
stream:
·· Product type
·· Quantity of each product type
·· Criteria for handling and storage after the end of a product’s useful life
·· Protocols for spill response
·· Disposal methods for captured mercury
·· Contact information for coordinators of the mercury-recycling program

SAMPLE INVENTORY AND LIGHTING SCHEDULE

The lamp inventory and lighting schedule include information related to the lamp life. The following data must be
included in the lighting schedule:
·· Lamp type
·· Quantity
·· Mercury content
·· Ballast type
MR

·· Rated life criteria (see Further Explanation, Finding Lamp Data)

·· Actual rated life
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

TABLE 1. Sample inventory and lighting schedules

MR Prerequisite MR Credit

Lamp
Max mercury Rated life
Lamp rated
Lamp type Model Quantity Ballast type mercury content criteria
life (hours)
criteria (mg) (mg) (hours)

T8, 8-ft
F32T8 2,000 Instant start 10 1.7 24,000 24,000
standard

T8, 8-ft high

F48T8 44W 100 Instant start 10 3.5 18,000 18,000
output

FB32T8/6
T8, U-bent 25 Program start 6 3 25,000 20,000
25W

T5 F28T5/850 50 Program start 2.5 1.4 25,000 25,000

Integral bare
CFL 20W CFL 150 3.5 2.6 10,000 15,000
bulb
 489

FINDING LAMP DATA

Manufacturer’s documentation typically includes at least one value for mercury content in a simple lamp. The
elemental symbol for mercury is Hg, which may appear as the label for mercury content (Figure 2).
Lamp life is typically provided on manufacturer product data sheets. Identify the lamp life correlating with
specified ballast type and three hour start.

Product Information
General Characteristics
Base Medium Bi-Pin
(Medium Bi-Pin
Fluorescent)

Base Information Green Base

Bulb TB

Rated Average Life 36000 hr

(12-Hr Prog St)

Rated Average Life 30000 hr

(12-Hr Inst St)

Rated Average Life 30000 hr Identify the lamp life provided with
(3-Hr Prog St) manufacturer documentation
corresponding to the 3 hour start with
Rated Average Life 24000 hr the appropriate ballast (program start
(3-Hr Inst) or instant start).

Mercury Information
Average Mercury (Hg) 1.7 mg
Content

MR
Max Mercury (Hg) 2.2 mg If multiple values are given, use
Content the max given.

Light Characteristics

PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY

Color Temperature 3000 K

Initial Lumen 2600 Lm

Design Mean Lumens 2470 Lm Find design mean lumens.

Figure 2. Sample manufacturer’s information

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Projects that are on existing campuses or part of large
health care systems can coordinate lamp selection with purchasing protocols to ensure ongoing compliance with
prerequisite requirements.

Campus Approach
Eligible.
490

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All projects

Existing inventory and phase-out plan (for renovation projects) X

Recycling plan for mercury-containing lamps X

Lighting schedule including lamp type and mercury content X

USGBC’s PBT source reduction calculator (or equivalent documentation) X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit PBT Source Reduction—Mercury. In addition to the mercury content information required for this
prerequisite, include lamps that meet the rated hours criteria for the related credit.

MR Prerequisite Storage and Collection of Recyclables. The related prerequisite requires safe storage and
collection of hazardous wastes, including mercury-containing waste.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

MR

None.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Guidelines for the Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities, 2010 Edition Facility Guidelines
Institute: fgiguidelines.org/

ISO-11143, Dentistry, Amalgam Separators: iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=42288

ENERGY STAR: energystar.gov

U.S. Department of Energy ENERGY STAR Qualified Light Bulbs, 2009 Partner Resource Guide: energystar.
gov/ia/products/downloads/CFL_PRG.pdf

Toxicological Effects of Methylmercury, Committee on the Toxicological Effects of Methylmercury, Board on

Environmental Studies and Toxicology, National Research Council, 2000: nap.edu/catalog.php?record_id=9899

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
 491

DEFINITIONS
elemental mercury mercury in its purest form (rather than a mercury-containing compound), the vapor of which is
commonly used in fluorescent and other bulb types

lamp a device emitting light in a fixture, excluding lamp housing and ballasts. Light-emitting diodes packaged as
traditional lamps also meet this definition.

lamp life the useful span of operation of a source of artificial light, such as bulbs. Lamp life for fluorescent lights is
determined by testing three hours on for every 20 minutes off. For high-density discharge lamps, the test is based
on 11 hours on for every 20 minutes off. Lamp life depends on whether the start ballast is program or instant. This
information is published in manufacturers’ information. Also known as rated average life.

persistent bioaccumulative toxic chemical a substance that poses a long-term risk to both humans and the
environment because it remains in the environment for long periods, increases in concentration as it moves up the
food chain, and can travel far from the source of contamination. Often these substances can become more potent
and harmful to ecosystems the longer they persist. See U.S. EPA’s website on persistent bioaccumulative toxic
chemicals, www.epa.gov/pbt/.

universal waste hazardous items that are easily purchased and commonly used. Examples include batteries,
pesticides, mercury-containing equipment, and light bulbs. See epa.gov/osw/hazard/wastetypes/universal/index.htm.

MR
PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

492
 493

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Building Life-Cycle
Impact Reduction
This credit applies to:
New Construction (2–5 points) Data Centers (2–5 points)
Core and Shell (2–6 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (2–5 points)
Schools (2–5 points) Hospitality (2–5 points)
Retail (2–5 points) Healthcare (2–5 points)

INTENT

To encourage adaptive reuse and optimize the environmental

MR
performance of products and materials.

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

REQUIREMENTS

Demonstrate reduced environmental effects during initial project decision-making by reusing existing building
resources or demonstrating a reduction in materials use through life-cycle assessment. Achieve one of the following
options.

OPTION 1. HISTORIC BUILDING REUSE (5 POINTS BD+C, 6 POINTS CORE AND SHELL)

Maintain the existing building structure, envelope, and interior nonstructural elements of a historic building or
contributing building in a historic district. To qualify, the building or historic district must be listed or eligible for
listing in the local, state, or national register of historic places. Do not demolish any part of a historic building or
contributing building in a historic district unless it is deemed structurally unsound or hazardous. For buildings listed
locally, approval of any demolition must be granted by the local historic preservation review board. For buildings
listed in a state register or the U.S. National Register of Historic Places (or local equivalent for projects outside the
U.S.), approval must appear in a programmatic agreement with the state historic preservation office or National Park
Service (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
Any alteration (preservation, restoration, or rehabilitation) of a historic building or a contributing building in
a historic district on the project site must be done in accordance with local or national standards for rehabilitation,
whichever are applicable. If building is not subject to historic review, include on the project team a preservation
professional who meets U.S. federal qualifications for historic architects (or local equivalent for projects outside
the U.S.); the preservation professional must confirm conformance to the Secretary of Interior’s Standards for the
Treatment of Historic Properties (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).
494

OR

OPTION 2. RENOVATION OF ABANDONED OR BLIGHTED BUILDING (5 POINTS BD+C,

6 POINTS CORE AND SHELL)
Maintain at least 50%, by surface area, of the existing building structure, enclosure, and interior structural elements
for buildings that meet local criteria of abandoned or are considered blight. The building must be renovated to a state
of productive occupancy. Up to 25% of the building surface area may be excluded from credit calculation because of
deterioration or damage.

OR

OPTION 3. BUILDING AND MATERIAL REUSE (2–4 POINTS BD+C, 2-5 POINTS CORE
AND SHELL)
Reuse or salvage building materials from off site or on site as a percentage of the surface area, as listed in Table 1.
Include structural elements (e.g., floors, roof decking), enclosure materials (e.g., skin, framing), and permanently
installed interior elements (e.g., walls, doors, floor coverings, ceiling systems). Exclude from the calculation window
assemblies and any hazardous materials that are remediated as a part of the project.
Materials contributing toward this credit may not contribute toward MR Credit Material Disclosure and
Optimization.

TABLE 1. Points for reuse of building materials

Percentage of completed project

Points BD+C Points BD+C (Core and Shell)
surface area reused

25% 2 2

50% 3 3

75% 4 5
MR

OR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

OPTION 4. WHOLE-BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE ASSESSMENT (3 POINTS)

For new construction (buildings or portions of buildings), conduct a life-cycle assessment of the project’s structure
and enclosure that demonstrates a minimum of 10% reduction, compared with a baseline building, in at least three of
the six impact categories listed below, one of which must be global warming potential. No impact category assessed
as part of the life-cycle assessment may increase by more than 5% compared with the baseline building.
The baseline and proposed buildings must be of comparable size, function, orientation, and operating energy
performance as defined in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. The service life of the baseline and
proposed buildings must be the same and at least 60 years to fully account for maintenance and replacement. Use
the same life-cycle assessment software tools and data sets to evaluate both the baseline building and the proposed
building, and report all listed impact categories. Data sets must be compliant with ISO 14044.

Select at least three of the following impact categories for reduction:

·· global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in CO2e;
·· depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11;
·· acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2;
·· eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate;
·· formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethene; and
·· depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ.

HEALTHCARE ONLY
For all options in this credit, building materials demolished to create courtyards to increase daylighting may be
counted as retained in calculations, provided the new courtyards meet the requirements of EQ Credits Daylight and
Quality Views.
 495

BEHIND THE INTENT

Over their lifetimes, buildings have local, regional, and global environmental effects. Some occur during the harvest,
extraction, manufacture, and transportation of materials; others involve construction and operations; still others
take place at demolition and disposal. A life-cycle assessment (LCA) examines as many of these environmental
effects as possible. This credit identifies several strategies for reducing harm done to the environment over a
building’s entire life cycle: restoring existing buildings, reusing building components, and reducing a building’s
environmental footprint through LCA.
Restoring existing buildings, preserving historic structures, and rehabilitating blighted buildings reduce the
energy use and waste associated with demolition and construction. A report by the National Trust for Historic
Preservation, titled The Greenest Building: Quantifying the Environmental Value of Building Reuse, found that
building reuse almost always offers environmental savings over demolition and new construction. A new, energy-
efficient building will not compensate for the climate change effects of its construction for at best 10 years and
perhaps 80 years.1 Restoring existing buildings preserves a site’s historical, cultural, and aesthetic values, and reusing
or repurposing wood, brick, steel, stone, or other materials from off site can be a cost-effective and sustainable
strategy.
For new construction projects, a cradle-to-grave LCA enables building professionals to understand the
cumulative energy use and other environmental consequences resulting from all phases of the building’s life. A
comprehensive, quantitative analysis helps determine which materials best fit the project’s needs throughout the
building’s lifetime. Employed as a design tool, LCA may reduce the amount of materials used (“dematerialization”),
which can in turn reduce environmental harms and save money. An LCA also allows the design team to understand
the trade-offs of material selection and energy performance and find an appropriate balance between the two. For
example, high thermal mass can reduce a building’s peak energy demands; an LCA can quantify the environmental
damage associated with the additional materials used so that the team can compare those effects with the benefits
for energy performance and then make more informed design decisions. By looking at how materials interact within
the whole structure and enclosure rather than merely individually, it is possible gain a larger perspective and reduce

MR
overall environmental effects over the long term.
The whole-building LCA option takes into account a wide range of such effects. These include global warming
potential, stratospheric ozone depletion, acidification of land and water sources, eutrophication, formation of
tropospheric ozone, and depletion of nonrenewable energy sources. Those are only some of the most common,

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

measurable, and well-understood environmental impacts that LCA tools evaluate. Current LCA tools cannot
accurately measure human health, ecological, and land-use issues; however, those effects are also important to a life-
cycle approach to materials and are addressed under other Materials and Resources credits.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Select the appropriate option for the project (see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations).
·· Options 1, 2, and 3 are for projects that will reuse all or part of an existing building.
·· Option 4 is for entirely new buildings but can also be used by projects that are new additions to
existing buildings; it involves conducting a life-cycle assessment for the whole building.

Option 1. Historic Building Reuse

STEP 1. DETERMINE WHETHER BUILDING HAS OR IS ELIGIBLE FOR HISTORIC DESIGNATION

Search national, state, and local historic registers to determine whether the existing building has historic
designation or is within a historic district.

1. preservationnation.org/information-center/sustainable-communities/green-lab/lca/The_Greenest_Building_lowres.pdf (accessed May 28, 2013).

496

·· If the building does not have historic designation, it may be considered eligible if it meets one of the
four National Register criteria or meets state or local historic criteria. The U.S. National Register of
Historic Places defines a building as historic if it meets at least one of the following criteria:2
°° It is associated with events that have made a significant contribution to the broad patterns of our
history.
°° It is associated with the lives of significant persons in the past.
°° It embodies the distinctive characteristics of a type, period, or method of construction; represents
the work of a master; possesses high artistic values; or represents a significant and distinguishable
entity whose components may lack individual distinction.
°° It has yielded, or may be likely to yield, information important in history or prehistory.
·· Projects outside the U.S. should consult the historic preservation guidelines set forth in the local or
national registry of historic places (see Further Explanation, International Tips).

STEP 2. REUSE HISTORIC BUILDING

If the building has or is eligible for historic status, confirm the specific requirements for maintaining
that designation during design and construction. Confirm what part(s) of the building can and cannot
be altered to maintain its historic status and ensure that the design and construction uphold these
requirements.
·· This option does not have a threshold for credit compliance. There is no minimum area of the building
that must be reused to meet the requirement. However, if its historic designation or eligibility is
revoked because of demolition or alteration, the project is no longer eligible for this option.
·· Demolition of any part of the historic structure must be reviewed by the appropriate review board
or conform to local standards for rehabilitation (U.S. projects must adhere to the secretary of the
Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties).
·· If historic designation is revoked, project teams may pursue Option 3 Building and Material Reuse for
the partial reuse of buildings.
·· If there is no local review body in place, include on the project team a qualified professional to guide
historically sensitive design and construction decisions.
MR

Option 2. Renovation of Abandoned or Blighted Building

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. DETERMINE WHETHER BUILDING IS ABANDONED OR BLIGHTED

Determine whether the jurisdiction in which the project is located has a program or designation for
abandoned or blighted buildings and whether the building meets this definition. If no such program or
definition exists, use the LEED definition for abandoned or blighted property to determine whether the
project is eligible for this option.

STEP 2. DETERMINE REUSABLE AREA

Identify and quantify the surface areas of the structure and building enclosure that can and cannot
be retained. Areas of the structure and building enclosure that are structurally unsound and must be
demolished, as determined by a structural engineer, can be excluded from the calculation in Step 3.

STEP 3. CALCULATE PERCENTAGE OF REUSED AREA

·· If more than 25% of the building’s surface area is considered unsound and must be demolished, the
project is ineligible for this option but may pursue Option 3 Building and Material Reuse.
·· Calculate the percentage of the total surface area that will be reused (see Further Explanation,
Calculations, and Table 2).
·· Ensure that the reusable areas are clearly defined and incorporated into the design and construction
of the project.

2. nps.gov/nr/publications/bulletins/nrb15/nrb15_2.htm.
 497

TABLE 2. Calculating reuse for abandoned or blighted buildings

Structure or envelope element Existing area (m2) Reused area (m2) Percentage reused

On-grade floor assembly

Foundation, slab on grade 3120 2740 87.8%

Subfloor 3000 2000 66.7%

Hardwood flooring 3000 1500 50.0%

2nd-floor assembly

Structural deck 3120 1050 33.7%

Hardwood flooring 3000 2500 83.3%

Ceiling tiles 2225 1300 58.4%

Roof deck

Reused roof deck 1905 985 51.7%

Roof deck (structurally unsound

920 - -
and removed)

Asbestos ceiling tiles (hazardous

1905 - -
material removed)

1st-floor wall assemblies (excluding windows)

Brick enclosure 1525 1525 100.0%

Insulation 1525 765 50.2%

MR
Drywall 1525 0 0.0%

2nd-floor wall assemblies (excluding windows)

Brick enclosure 1525 1525 100.0%

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

Insulation 1525 380 24.9%

Drywall 1525 0 0.0%

TOTAL 26 995 16 270 60.3%

Option 3. Building and Material Reuse

STEP 1. CALCULATE EXISTING BUILDING SURFACE AREA AND REUSE EXISTING BUILDING
Identify and quantify the surface areas of the structure, building enclosure, and interior elements (e.g.,
walls, doors, floor coverings, and ceiling systems) that can and cannot be retained.
·· Exclude from the calculation any hazardous materials that are remediated as part of the project.
·· Once the scope of reuse is determined, ensure that the areas intended for reuse are well defined and
incorporated into the design and construction.
 498

Reused exterior wall: 10% of surface area Reconstructed wall: 20% of surface
(counts towards credit) area (does not count towards
credit)

Remediated hazardous roofing due to asbestos

(excluded from calculation)

Reused roofing: 15% of surface area

(counts towards credit)
MR

Reused surfaces that contribute towards credit

Reconstructed surfaces that were existing and have been re-built are
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

included in the calculation but do not contribute towards credit

Remediated surfaces that are excluded from calculations

Figure 1. Example existing building reused surface area for credit calculation
OR CONSTRUCTION

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR1

MRc Building Life Cycle Impact Reduction (BD&C) and
GIB credit: Building Reuse

STEP 2. REUSE OFF-SITE MATERIALS

Off-site products and materials used in the project may be included in the credit calculations but may
not be double-counted for MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw
Materials, Option 2.
·· Any reused product or material may be included in either this credit or MR Credit Building Product
Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials, Option 2.
·· Teams pursuing both credits may count their materials in either credit, whichever is more appropriate
for their projects.
·· For this credit, building and material reuse is measured in surface area; in MR Credit Building Product
Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials reuse is measured by cost or replacement
value.

STEP 3. CALCULATE REUSE

Calculate the percentage of total area that will be reused (see Further Explanation, Calculations, and
Table 3).
 499

TABLE 3. Calculating reuse for existing buildings and materials

Structure, enclosure,
Existing area (ft2) Reused area (ft2) Percentage reused
or interior element

On-grade floor assembly

Foundation, slab on grade 18,230 18,230 100.0%

Subfloor 17,500 15,000 85.7%

Carpet 10,000 0 0.0%

2nd-floor assembly

Structural deck 18,230 18,230 100.0%

Hardwood flooring 10,000 2,500 25.0%

Salvaged wood flooring from barn 7,500 7,500 100.0%

Ceiling tiles 14,500 7,000 48.3%

Roof assembly

Roof deck 18,000 7,630 42.4%

Asbestos ceiling tiles (hazardous material

– – –
removed)

1st-floor wall assembly (excluding windows)

Brick enclosure 16,460 16,460 100.0%

Sheathing 15,000 8,400 56.0%

MR
Insulation 7,700 0 0.0%

Salvaged doors from off site 105 105 100.0%

2nd-floor wall assembly (excluding windows)

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

Brick enclosure 16,460 16,000 97.2%

Steel structure 16,460 16,460 100.0%

Drywall 15,300 9,400 61.4%

TOTAL 201,445 142,915 70.9%

Option 4. Whole-Building Life-Cycle Assessment

This option has only one threshold. To achieve this option the proposed building must demonstrate
at least a 10% reduction in global warming potential and a 10% reduction of two of five other impact
measures (discussed below) when compared to a baseline building, without increasing any measure by
more than 5%.

STEP 1. CALCULATE EXISTING BUILDING SURFACE AREA AND REUSE EXISTING BUILDING
Ensure that the scope of the analysis is a cradle-to-grave assessment, which includes environmental
impacts associated with all the life-cycle stages for the building structure and enclosure: resource
extraction or harvest, building product manufacture, on-site construction, product maintenance and
replacement (where warranted), and deconstruction or demolition and disposal over the assumed 60-
year service life. The LCA must address the following:
·· Products. The LCA must cover the complete building envelope and structural elements, including the
material components of footings and foundations, structural wall assembly (from cladding to interior
finishes), structural floors and ceilings (not including finishes), and roof assemblies.
500

°° Exclude electrical and mechanical equipment and controls, plumbing fixtures, fire detection and
alarm system fixtures, elevators, and conveying systems.
°° Exclude excavation and other site development.
°° Include parking structures; exclude parking lots.
°° Additional building elements, such as interior nonstructural walls or finishes, may be included at the
discretion of the project team but earn no additional credit.
·· Functional equivalence. The proposed and baseline buildings have to serve the same function and
must have the same gross floor area, orientation, and operational energy usage.
·· Service life. For LEED, the project team must take into account the entire building structure and
enclosure, from design to demolition for an assumed 60-year service life.
The assumed service life must be the same for the baseline and proposed buildings and must
be at least 60 years to properly account for material maintenance and replacement (see Further
Explanation, Product Replacement).
·· System boundary. The system boundary of the analysis must be defined to account for cradle-to-grave
environmental impacts associated with all the life-cycle stages for the building structure and enclosure
as defined in ISO 21930 sections A-1 thru A-4, B-1 thru B-7, and C-1 thru C-4.
·· Any parameters not defined above may change across the baseline and proposed buildings to achieve
desired design and performance objectives.

STEP 2. SELECT APPROPRIATE TOOLS AND DATA SETS FOR LCA ASSESSMENT
Review existing LCA tools and data sets and select the most suitable for the project (see Further
Explanation, LCA Tools Selection). The choice of tool will determine whether an LCA specialist is
required.
·· The same LCA software or tool and ISO 14044–compliant data sets must be used to study both the
baseline building and the proposed building. Data set selection may be determined by the tool being
used and the relevant data sets for the project location (see Further Explanation, LCA Impact Measures
or Indicators).
·· Ensure that the selected tool can be applied at the whole-building level and produce results for the
relevant indicators.
MR

STEP 3. CREATE AND MODEL BASELINE BUILDING

Create the baseline building with which the team will compare alternatives early in the design process,
once programmatic and size needs have been determined. Input the baseline building into the selected
LCA tool (see Further Explanation, Creating the Baseline Building).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 4. SELECT RELEVANT IMPACT MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS

Select the appropriate output units for each LCA impact indicator shown in Table 4 (see Further
Explanation, Life Cycle Impact Measures Or Indicators).

TABLE 4. LCA impact indicator units

LCA impact indicatorS TRACI 2.1 CML 2002 ReCiPe

Global warming potential CO2e CO2e CO2e

Ozone depletion potential CFC-11-eq CFC-11-eq CFC-11-eq

Acidification potential (land) SO2e SO2e SO2e

Eutrophication potential (fresh

N eq PO43e P eq
water)

Formation of tropospheric
ozone (photochemical oxidant NOx eq C2H4e kg NMVOC
formation)

Depletion of nonrenewable Weight or volume of

MJ Kg oil eq
energy resources raw material
 501

STEP 5. USE LCA TO MAKE DESIGN DECISIONS THAT REDUCE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
Use the proposed LCA model to conduct “what if” scenario analyses and support design decisions
to evaluate and select environmentally preferable assemblies and materials. Examples of alternatives
analyses could include the following:
·· Comparing the environmental consequences of building footprint and shape
·· Evaluating different structural system types, such as load-bearing walls versus columns
·· Defining the selection of building products and assemblies
·· Optimizing structural system design (e.g., column spacing, slab depth)
If the design team wants to use a material, product, or assembly that is not in the selected LCA tool’s
data set, the results of a critically reviewed LCA or a verified environmental product declaration (EPD)
can be used, provided the results cover the required full set of impact indicators for that component.
The material, product, or assembly in the model must then be removed and the impact measures for the
replacement added as a side calculation, taking account of all related ancillary product use. Any such
additions must be documented and the documentation included in the submittal; include the rationale
for the change and the source of the replacement impact measures.

STEP 6. INCORPORATE FINAL LCA RESULTS

Review the results, incorporate decisions in design documents, and prepare a narrative that describes the
LCA assumptions, scope, and baseline and proposed buildings (see Further Explanation, Developing an
LCA Narrative).

FURTHER EXPLANATION

MR
CALCULATIONS
For Options 2 and 3, each assembly (vertical or horizontal) may be calculated as up to three layers of surface area:

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

enclosure and finish floor, structure, and interior finish and ceiling finish. See Further Explanation, Calculating Surface
Area.

EQUATION 1. Percentage of abandoned or blighted building reuse (Option 2)

Abandoned or blighted
building reuse
=
( Existing building
surface area
Surface area reused

– hazardous or unsafe
materials demolished area
) x 100

Exclude hazardous materials and structurally unsound portions of the building from the calculations.

EQUATION 2. Percentage of existing building reuse (Option 3)

( +

)
Surface area reused Surface area reused
on-site
Existing building reuse = from off-site
x 100
Existing building – hazardous materials area
surface area
Exclude hazardous materials from the calculations.
502

CALCULATING SURFACE AREA

Each assembly (vertical or horizontal) may be calculated as up to three layers of surface area. For vertical building
elements, the layers are enclosure, interior finish, and structure. For horizontal building elements, the layers are
ceiling finish, structure, and floor finish. Structural support elements, such as columns, beams, and studs, are
considered part of the larger surfaces they support. Calculate the surface area of these elements as equal to surface
area of the wall.
Not all projects will have all layers present at the beginning of construction, depending on the state of the
building. If a layer that existed before construction or demolition is removed and replaced with new material, it
must be included in the calculation. If an existing layer was removed and not replaced, it is excluded from the credit
calculations. Examples:
·· A project has a floor assembly consisting of ceiling tiles, structural slab, and carpeting. The ceiling tiles and
structural slab are reused, but the carpet is removed and not replaced because the design uses the exposed
structural concrete as the finish material. The team excludes the carpeting from the calculation but counts the
slab as reused.
·· A building has an existing brick enclosure, steel structure, and drywall. The project is reusing the structure and
enclosure but replacing the existing drywall with new drywall. The team must include all three existing layers
in the denominator, but only the reused portions in the numerator.
·· For a building with an existing brick enclosure and steel structure, with no drywall or interior finish, the team
includes only those two layers in the reuse calculations.

If before construction and demolition the building has more than three layers that can be counted toward reuse, the
project team may choose the three layers to include in the calculation. The three layers chosen should represent the
structure of a typical basic wall or floor assembly (enclosure and interior finish, structure, and ceiling; or floor slab,
ceiling finish, and floor finish).
If material salvaged from off-site will replace all or a part of an existing layer, count the existing surface area as
the area of the entire existing layer. That is, the reused area equals the surface area of the installed salvaged material.
MR

Example:
·· An existing building has a 100,000-square-foot carpeted floor, of which 90,000 square feet will be removed
and replaced with new carpet and 10,000 square feet will be removed and replaced with salvaged wood. The
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

entire surface area of the existing finished floor (100,000 square feet) goes in the denominator, but only the
salvaged 10,000 square feet can contribute to the numerator, resulting in 10% reuse for that particular layer
(floor finish).

If the salvaged material is a new layer in an assembly, then only the surface area of the installed salvaged material is
used for both the existing and reused surface areas in the calculation. Example:
·· An existing building has a 100,000-square-foot concrete structural slab, of which 90,000 square feet will be
stained as the finished floor. The remaining 10,000 square feet of floor area will be salvaged wood. The surface
area of the salvaged wood is used in the denominator as the existing area (10,000 square feet) and the same
area is used in the numerator for reuse (10,000 square feet), resulting in 100% reuse.
 503

Backer board: reused

Batt insulation: replaced Layer 3: reused studs Figure 2. Example of surface area reuse calculations
Layer 2: replaced interior drywall
using wall assembly layers

Layer 1: reused bricks, repaired as needed

MR
Reused materials included in credit calculations

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

PRODUCT REPLACEMENT
An LCA for this credit uses an assumed building service life of at least 60 years—long enough to capture the
replacement cycle of enclosure materials, such as roof systems and curtain walls, but short enough that its basic
structure is unlikely to be replaced. Replacement schedules for each product or assembly must reflect their service
ONSTRUCTION
life and the consequent number of replacements required over the building’s assumed service life.
Develop a consistent approach to quantifying the service life of individual products and assemblies, using
USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR3
manufacturers’ warranties or empirical data. If the service life of a product is less than 60 years, include the
MRc Building Life Cycle Impact Reduction (BD&C) and
aggregate impacts associated with the number of product replacements necessary to equal the building’s service
Interiors Life-Cycle Impact Reduction (ID&C)
life. For example, if the expected life of a component is 20 years, multiply the impacts by 3 to accurately capture the
cumulative effects of the product over the building’s assumed 60-year lifetime.
If the service life of a product used in initial construction is greater than the building’s assumed service life, the
impacts associated with the product may not be discounted to reflect its remaining service life.
Some LCA design tools include service life assumptions and calculations that reflect the approach required for
this credit. Check the service life assumption to ensure that it meets the credit requirements.

CREATING THE BASELINE BUILDING

1. Identify the baseline building early in the design process, when the basic project scope has been determined, create
the baseline building with which the team will compare design alternatives.
Define the wall, roof, and floor assemblies following the performance requirements of the building envelope as
defined in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, Opaque Assemblies, Vertical Fenestration, Skylights, and Roof Solar
Reflectance and Thermal Emittance sections, for the project’s climate zone. (For projects outside the U.S., see
Further Explanation, International Tips.)
504

For this credit, the total area of exterior walls, floors and roofs may differ between the baseline building and the
proposed building to account for differing proportions or geometry.

2. Customize the baseline building for the project to create the proposed building. Modify the initial baseline
building design to reduce the environmental effects while meeting the specific needs of the project, but keep the
following parameters the same so that the baseline and proposed models can be accurately compared:
·· LCA scope requirements. The functional unit and system boundary must be identical for the baseline and
proposed buildings.
·· Size. The gross floor area of the baseline and proposed buildings must be the same. The two designs can have
different massing, provided the gross area is the same.
·· Function. The baseline and proposed buildings must serve the same programmatic function. If the project is a
mixed-use residential building with retail in the first floor, the baseline building must have the same program,
but the elements can be in different locations in the building. If the project is a hospital with stringent
air quality and humidity control, both the baseline and the proposed cases must meet those functional
requirements.
·· Orientation. The orientation—the directional exposure—of the baseline and proposed buildings must be the
same, but the shape may differ. Orientation must be the same because exposure to the sun affects solar heat
gain within the building and will skew LCA results for energy performance.
·· Location. Both the baseline and the proposed buildings must be located in the same ASHRAE 90.1–2010
climate zone and assumed to be on the same site.
·· Operating energy performance. The baseline and proposed buildings must meet EA Prerequisite Minimum
Energy Performance by adhering to the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, Opaque Assemblies,
Vertical Fenestration, Skylights, and Roof Solar Reflectance and Thermal Emittance sections, because
comparing an energy-efficient proposed building with an underperforming baseline building will skew the
results. Increasing wall mass or insulation unnecessarily in the baseline building to show dematerialization in
the proposed building is not acceptable. Energy modeling for either building is not required for this credit.
MR

Other portions of the baseline building may be modified from the basic ASHRAE 90.1 requirements to capture the
LCA goals of the project team.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

3. Input the baseline building into the chosen tool. Once the baseline building is complete, input the design into the
selected tool to estimate the benchmark environmental impacts. Save the baseline building model as a separate LCA
project so that the results will be available for comparison with the proposed building and for submission to USGBC.
As the design process proceeds, the baseline building can be modified, modeled, and saved as new LCA versions
so that the team can compare the embodied impacts of design alternatives. While iterations of the LCA model may
occur during construction, it is not expected that the documentation for the credit be updated after it has been
submitted to USGBC.

LCA TOOLS SELECTION

This credit does not require design professionals to become LCA experts, but the choice of tool can determine
whether an LCA specialist is required. Every LCA tool is populated with background data sets that form the basis of
the assessment. Some LCA data are specific to the location of the building construction or the location of product
manufacture because of the region’s electric grid, for example. Different types of tools require varying levels of data
set manipulation. There are two types of tools to consider.
Design team LCA tools simplify and streamline the LCA process for non-LCA practitioners. They manage
the data and calculations in the background and do not allow the user to add or customize data. The user inputs
material selections consistent with the building design and can then explore the environmental effects of design
modifications by changing materials, floor area, or other aspects of the building.
Design team LCA tools have calculation factors specific to the country or region for which they were designed.
Examples include the following:
·· North America: ATHENA® Impact Estimator, athenasmi.org/our-software-data/impact-estimator/. This tool
can import a bill of materials from a CAD system.
·· United Kingdom: Envest 2, envest2.bre.co.uk/
·· Australia: LCADesign. This tool can import a bill of materials from a CAD system.
 505

LCA practitioner tools require the user to select the appropriate data sets and calculation factors. They typically
conduct LCAs on a product-by-product basis and may require different methodological decisions for the products
being examined. The practitioner then aggregates the results to the whole building level. Examples include the
following:
·· SimaPro, simapro.co.uk/
·· GaBi, gabi-software.com/america/index/

Project teams that choose LCA practitioner tools will likely need to bring in an LCA specialist.

LIFE CYCLE IMPACT MEASURES OR INDICATORS

The impacts measured in LCA are divided into two categories, as described in ISO 21930–2007, which deals with
EPDs for building products. Impacts are either expressed in terms of the categories of life-cycle impact assessments
(LCIA) or derived from a life-cycle inventory (LCI) and not assigned to impact categories.
LCIA is an additional step in analysis that interprets and quantifies the resulting ecological effects of resources
used and waste emitted over the life-cycle of the product. In contrast, LCI simply quantifies flows in and out of the
process in terms of resources used and depleted and waste created.
The first five measures specified in the credit requirements are impact categories of LCIA; they are the only LCIA
categories cited in ISO 21930. Other LCIA measures are in use or being developed (e.g., human health and ecotoxicity
measures) but are less quantifiable than the measures required for LEED, although they may be reported separately.
Other impact assessment methods not listed in Table 4 may be used if the reasons are justified and documented.
The sixth measure in the list, depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, is in the second category because
it is derived directly from the LCI (defined in the ISO standard as “phase of life-cycle assessment involving the
compilation and quantification of inputs and outputs for a product throughout its life-cycle”).
Several other LCI aggregations are cited in ISO 21930 (e.g., depletion of nonrenewable material resources, use
of renewable materials, and consumption of freshwater). These additional measures have not been included in the
credit for the sake of simplicity. Teams may take these indicators into account in the LCA but are not required to

MR
submit them to meet the credit requirements.
For all the measures listed in Table 4 except depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, the software tool
categorizes emissions and then applies characterization factors to create equivalence measures in the units shown in

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

the table.
·· In design team LCA tools, the characterization factors for the country or region are automatically generated.
·· In LCA practitioner tools, the user must select the characterization factors and corresponding units for the
country or region.

North American projects typically use the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s TRACI (Tool for the Reduction
and Assessment of Chemical and Other Environmental Impacts) system. Projects in other parts of the world use the
CML (Institute of Environmental Sciences) or ReCiPe system.
The impact assessment method must be no older than the most current version available on the LEED project
registration date:
·· TRACI, version 2.1 or newer
·· CML, version 2001–November 2012 or newer
·· ReCiPe, version 1.07 (midpoints) or newer

If these versions are not available in the chosen LCA tool, the project team must explain and justify the use of an
alternative. Other impact assessment methods are available. If the chosen LCA tool offers options, the project team
should weigh their pros and cons and choose the most appropriate method.
The same assessment method must be used for the baseline and proposed buildings.
For the purposes of complying with this credit, depletion means “the amount used,” as opposed to more complex
measures involving calculation of the amount used relative to existing physical or economic reserves.
506

DEVELOPING AN LCA NARRATIVE

The narrative required for Option 4 must describe the LCA assumptions, scope, baseline building, and proposed
building. Include the following:
·· Life-cycle impact assessment summary, showing outputs of the baseline and proposed building
·· Table showing the percentage change for all impact indicators between the baseline and proposed buildings.
Describe the differences between the buildings that resulted in those changes.
·· Description of the data sets used to represent each material or assembly (proxies may be deemed acceptable)
·· Confirmation that the same data sets were used for both the baseline and proposed buildings and their
materials and assemblies
·· Description of the characterization model used (e.g., TRACI) for all impact category characterization factors
·· The service life assumed for the baseline and proposed buildings
·· Source of data for product replacement for both the baseline and proposed buildings

EXAMPLE

TABLE 5. Sample table of values based on LCA example report

LCA impact indicators Total value (using TRACI)

Global warming potential 1,131,284.39 kg CO2e

Acidification potential (land) 22,382,422 kg H+ moles eq

Eutrophication potential (fresh water) 83.676 kg N eq

Ozone depletion potential .062 kg CFC-11-eq

MR

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Healthcare
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Materials demolished to create a courtyard may be excluded from calculations for Options 1, 2, and 3. This situation
is treated the same as materials demolished and not replaced (see Further Explanation, Calculating Surface Area).

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Existing Buildings with Additions
Project teams may pursue only one option. For an existing building with an addition, the team can pursue either
a reuse option (Option 1, 2, or 3) for the existing portions of the building or the LCA option (Option 4) for the
new construction addition. In most cases, more points are available for reuse options, but the project team may
determine the appropriate option given their sustainability goals.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Option 1. Historic Building Reuse
Projects outside the U.S should consult the historic preservation guidelines set forth in the local or national registry
of historic places. Many countries have established their own process for determining historic significance of a
structure or building. If the project is in a country without a process for determining the historic status of a building,
project teams are encouraged to consult the UNESCO website (whc.unesco.org/en/conventiontext) or the Venice
Charter (icomos.org/charters/venice_e.pdf) to determine historical significance.

Option 4. Whole-Building Life-Cycle Assessment

For projects outside the U.S. pursuing this option, the baseline building is based on ASHRAE 90.1–2010. The
purpose of this requirement is to provide a minimum set of guidelines regarding the performance of the structure
 507

and enclosure being studied in the LCA. Projects outside the U.S. are expected to develop a baseline building
representing typical construction for their region meeting local applicable building performance requirements.
Additional documentation may be needed to demonstrate how the baseline building meets the requirements of the
credit.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Option 1. Submit separate documentation for each building.
Option 2. Submit separate documentation for each building.
Option 3. All buildings in the group may be documented as one.
Option 4. All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Although each building will need to be modeled
separately, each with a baseline and proposed building, the end results may be aggregated across multiple buildings.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4

Documentation of historic designation status X

Narrative describing demolition (if any) X

MR
Documentation of how additions and alterations X
(if any) meet local review board requirements

Narrative describing abandoned or blighted status X

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

Reused elements table and calculations X X

Description of LCA assumptions, scope, and X

analysis process for baseline building and
proposed building

Life-cycle impact assessment summary showing X

outputs of proposed building with percentage
change from baseline building for all impact
indicators.
508

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

LT Credit High-Priority Site. Buildings located in a historic district and in an infill site qualify for Option 1 of the
related credit.

MR Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning and MR Credit Construction
and Demolition Waste Management. If a project cannot meet the credit’s reuse requirements, on-site salvaged
materials may count as diversion for this prerequisite and credit.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials. Salvaged materials
(structural and nonstructural, on-site or off-site) may contribute toward achieving Options 1–3 of this credit or
Option 2 of the related credit, depending on which credits the project is pursuing and which calculation makes more
sense (surface area versus cost). However, materials may not be double-counted under both credits.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product Declarations and MR

Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Material Ingredients. These related credits address the
ecological and human health consequences of construction materials.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· MR Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction is a combination of two LEED 2009 credits: MR Credit
Building Reuse—Maintain Walls, Floor and Roof and MR Credit Building Reuse—Maintain Interior
Nonstructural Elements.
·· MR Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction,Option 3. Building and Material Reuse may incorporate both
structural and nonstructural elements as long as they are not double-counted in MR Credit Building Product
Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials, Option 2, Leadership Extraction Practices.
MR

REFERENCED STANDARDS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

ISO 14044: iso.org/

National Register of Historic Places: nrhp.focus.nps.gov/

Secretary of Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties: nps.gov/ and nps.gov/hps/tps/
standguide/

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Not available.

Option 2. Not available.

Option 3. Reuse 95% of the building.

Option 4. Achieve any improvement over the required credit thresholds in all six impact measures.
 509

DEFINITIONS
abandoned property property left behind intentionally and permanently when it appears that the former owner
does not intend to come back, pick it up, or use it. One may have abandoned the property of contract rights by not
doing what is required by the contract. However, an easement and other land rights are not abandoned property just
because of nonuse. Abandoned land is defined as land not being used at the present time but that may have utilities
and infrastructure in place.

cultural landscape an officially designated geographic area that includes both cultural and natural resources
associated with a historic event, activity, or person or that exhibits other significant cultural or aesthetic values

enclosure the exterior plus semi-exterior portions of the building. Exterior consists of the elements of a building
that separate conditioned spaces from the outside (i.e., the wall assembly). Semiexterior consists of the elements of
a building that separate conditioned space from unconditioned space or that encloses semi-heated space through
which thermal energy may be transferred to or from the exterior or conditioned or unconditioned spaces (e.g., attic,
crawl space, basement).

furniture and furnishings the stand-alone furniture items purchased for the project, including individual and
group seating; open-plan and private-office workstations; desks and tables; storage units, credenzas, bookshelves,
filing cabinets, and other case goods; wall-mounted visual-display products (e.g., marker boards and tack boards,
excluding electronic displays); and miscellaneous items, such as easels, mobile carts, freestanding screens, installed
fabrics, and movable partitions. Hospitality furniture is included as applicable to the project. Office accessories,
such as desktop blotters, trays, tape dispensers, waste baskets, and all electrical items, such as lighting and small
appliances, are excluded.

hazardous material any item or agent (biological, chemical, physical) that has the potential to cause harm to
humans, animals, or the environment, either by itself or through interaction with other factors

MR
historic building a building or structure with historic, architectural, engineering, archeological, or cultural
significance that is listed or determined to be eligible as a historic structure or building, or as a contributing building
or structure in a designated historic district. The historic designation must be made by a local historic preservation
review board or similar body, and the structure must be listed in a state register of historic places, be listed in the

BUILDING LIFE-CYCLE IMPACT REDUCTION

National Register of Historic Places (or a local equivalent outside the U.S.), or have been determined eligible for
listing.

historic district a group of buildings, structures, objects, and sites that have been designated as historically,
architecturally, or culturally significant and categorized as either contributing or noncontributing

life-cycle assessment an evaluation of the environmental effects of a product from cradle to grave, as defined by ISO
14040–2006 and ISO 14044–2006

life-cycle inventory a database that defines the environmental effects (inputs and outputs) for each step in a
material’s or assembly’s life cycle. The database is specific to countries and regions within countries.

service life the assumed length of time that a building, product, or assembly will be operational for the purposes of a
life-cycle assessment

structure elements carrying either vertical or horizontal loads (e.g., walls, roofs, and floors) that are considered
structurally sound and nonhazardous
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

510
 511

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Building Product
Disclosure and
Optimization—
Environmental Product
Declarations
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)

MR
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

BPDO—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

INTENT

To encourage the use of products and materials for which life-cycle

information is available and that have environmentally, economically,
and socially preferable life-cycle impacts. To reward project teams for
selecting products from manufacturers who have verified improved
environmental life-cycle impacts.

REQUIREMENTS

Achieve one or more of the options below, for a maximum of 2 points.

OPTION 1. ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATION (EPD) (1 POINT)

Use at least 20 different permanently installed products sourced from at least five different manufacturers that meet
one of the disclosure criteria below.
512

·· Product-specific declaration.
°° Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that
have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one quarter (1/4) of a product for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
·· Environmental Product Declarations which conform to ISO 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930
and have at least a cradle to gate scope.
°° Industry-wide (generic) EPD – Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external
verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator are
valued as one half (1/2) of a product for purposes of credit achievement calculation.
°° Product-specific Type III EPD – Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external
verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as the participant by the program operator
are valued as one whole product for purposes of credit achievement calculation.
·· USGBC approved program – Products that comply with other USGBC approved environmental product
declaration frameworks.

OPTION 2. MULTI-ATTRIBUTE OPTIMIZATION (1 POINT)

Use products that comply with one of the criteria below for 50%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed
products in the project. Products will be valued as below.
·· Third party certified products that demonstrate impact reduction below industry average in at least three of
the following categories are valued at 100% of their cost for credit achievement calculations.
°° global warming potential (greenhouse gases), in CO2e;
°° depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11;
°° acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2;
°° eutrophication, in kg nitrogen or kg phosphate;
°° formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethene; and depletion of nonrenewable energy
MR

resources, in MJ.
·· USGBC approved program – Products that comply with other USGBC approved multi-attribute frameworks.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100 miles
(160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost.

Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products.
 513

BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit recognizes the selection of products for which the environmental impacts are well known because of
industry standard life-cycle information and reporting protocols. Environmental product declarations (EPDs) are
a standardized way of communicating the environmental effects associated with a product or system’s raw material
extraction, energy use, chemical makeup, waste generation, and emissions to air, soil, and water. Although a variety
of EPD programs exist, the credit requires that EPDs come from program operators who follow the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) standards, the internationally recognized norm for EPDs. Project teams
using EPDs can more accurately compare and evaluate similar products, improving their decisions when selecting
materials.
As EPDs become commonplace, this credit will recognize the most advanced disclosures available. Giving
preference to products with EPDs supports the transition from a “single-attribute” approach to one that relies on
more comprehensive reporting and rewards manufacturers whose products are less harmful to the environment.
The diversity of options and compliance paths in this credit is designed to reward both initial first steps and
leadership in life-cycle information disclosure. The credit intends to help transform the market for building
products and materials for which life-cycle information is available and encourage manufacturers that have verified
their environmental performance.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Select which option(s) to pursue. Products may contribute to both Options 1 and 2. Early product
research can help the project team capitalize on opportunities for products contributing to multiple
credits and options.

MR
The required scope of this credit is permanently installed building products, excluding mechanical,
plumbing, electrical, (MEP) and specialty equipment and items purchased for temporary use on the
project. Furniture is not considered permanently installed and is not required to be included in the credit.
However, furniture as well as other optional MEP products may be included, provided they are also
included in the other two cost-based credits, MR Credit Building Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing

BPDO—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

of Raw Materials and MR Credit Building Disclosure and Optimization—Materials Ingredients. For more
information see MR Overview, Qualifying Products and Exclusions.
·· Option 1 is for projects with products with product-specific declarations or industry-wide EPDs,
or otherwise recognized USGBC-approved program. Products must be sourced from multiple
manufacturers, as indicated in the credit requirements. Various thresholds are available to
accommodate stages of EPD development in different industries. The weighted value of the product
must meet the threshold indicated in the credit requirements.
·· Option 2 is for projects with permanently installed products that come from manufacturers
adhering to USGBC-approved programs that will certify verified reductions in the multiple impact
categories listed in the credit requirements. USGBC will endorse specific third-party programs if their
certifications are based on verified data. This information will be available on the USGBC website. The
proportion of qualifying materials must meet the threshold indicated in the credit requirements and
includes the weighted value of locally sourced products.

Option 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD)

STEP 1. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Specify products from manufacturers for which the available EPDs meet at least one of the credit criteria.
·· Include performance requirements or sole-source compliant products as applicable to the selected
option(s) in the project specifications. To ensure compliant purchases, consider creating a Division 1,
General Requirements, specification for sustainability criteria that meet MR requirements. Reference
that section to distinguish it from other sections that cover products and materials (see Further
Explanation, Environmental Product Declarations and Documentation of EPD's, Figure 3).
514

·· Similar products from the same manufacturer can be counted as separate products if they have
distinct formulations, but not if they are aesthetic variations or reconfigurations (see MR Overview,
Defining a Product).

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction submittals to ensure that selected products
meet credit requirements. To track progress toward credit achievement, regularly enter information into
the MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by USGBC or an equivalent
custom tool.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders during buy-out and installation to ensure that
replacement products meet the credit requirements. Any product substitutions should be carefully
reviewed by the design team and contractor for compliance.
·· Because these requirements are not typical for all construction teams and suppliers, conduct a
LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and stress their
importance.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. COUNT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS AND COMPILE DOCUMENTATION

With the data collected in a tracking tool or the calculator provided by USGBC, use Equation 1 (see
Further Explanation, Calculations) to calculate the total number of products that comply with Option 1
requirements. This equation calculates compliance based on the number of products, not their cost.
·· A product is the unit of purchase. The requirement for EPDs applies to the final unit of purchase—that
is, entire assemblies, not individual components.
·· Products with EPDs that meet more than one criterion are weighted at the highest valuation factor
(not a combined factor).
·· Collect all EPDs and life-cycle assessment (LCA) reports for contributing products for credit
documentation. Ensure that EPD documentation includes a summary sheet of measured impacts.
·· Retain product data for all materials that contribute to credit achievement and be prepared to provide
MR

it on request (see Further Explanation, Documentation of Product-Specific Declarations and Further

Explanation, Documentation of EPD's, Figure 3).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Option 2. Multi-attribute Optimization

STEP 1. RESEARCH PRODUCTS

Identify products that meet one or more of the attributes listed in the credit requirements under
Option 2.

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

Collect documentation of environmental claims for each product expected to contribute toward credit
achievement. To review progress toward credit achievement, regularly enter information into the MR
building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by USGBC or an equivalent custom
tool.
·· Request documentation via correspondence with the product’s manufacturer or third-party certifying
body.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that the credit threshold will be met.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. CALCULATE COMPLIANCE

Purchase 50%, by cost, of permanently installed products that meet at least one of the requirements
listed in Option 2. Calculate compliant materials using Equation 2 and the data collected in the tracking
tool (see Further Explanation, Calculations).
 515

·· Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant
building products. Once the cap on structural material is met, these products can no longer contribute
toward the credit but must be included in the denominator of Equation 2.
·· Some products may meet multiple criteria or are part of assemblies (see MR Overview, Determining
Material Contributions).
·· Compile documentation to verify environmental claims for each product. Retain product data for all
materials that contribute to credit achievement.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS

EQUATION 1. Total number of products with environmental product declarations

Total #
of products =
{ # of products
with product
specific
declarations
× 0.25

}{ +
# of products
with industry
specific
declarations
× 0.5

}{ +
# of products
with type
III EPD
× 1

MR
EQUATION 2. Percentage of multi-attribute optimization materials cost

{ ( )( ) { ( )( )
criterion location
{ criterion location
{

BPDO—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

product 1
cost
valuation valuation + product 2
cost
valuation valuation + ...
factor factor factor factor
% of
materials = × 100
cost
Cost of all permanently installed prodcuts

where
·· Product cost = cost of the product contributing toward credit. For assemblies, the cost amount contributing
toward credit is based on weight (see MR Overview, Determining Product Cost).
·· Criterion valuation factor = weighting multiplier for the criterion. This factor will be determined for each
certification that becomes available.
·· Location valuation factor = multiplier for the extraction, manufacture, and purchase location (see MR
Overview, Location Valuation Factor).

ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

An EPD is a standardized way of communicating the environmental impacts, such as global warming potential and
energy resource depletion, of a product or system. A product category rule (PCR) defines how to standardize this
information for a specific product type, such as flooring. The PCR defines scope, system boundary, measurement
procedures, impact measures and other technical requirements.
PCR development is the responsibility of the EPD Program Operator and is often organized through standards
516

organizations or industry associations or sponsored by private or government organizations. Many countries

maintain lists of PCRs that are publicly available; private Program Operators have PRCs on their websites:
·· China EPD program, sepacec.com/cecen
·· Japan Ecoleaf program, ecoleaf-jemai.jp/eng
·· International EPD system, environdec.com/en/Product-Category-Rules/
·· Institut Bauen und Umwelt (Institute Construction and Environment), bau-umwelt.de
·· Norway EPD system, epd-norge.no
·· Taiwan EPD system, pcr-library.edf.org.tw/product_country/taiwan.asp
·· Korean EPD system, eng.keiti.re.kr
·· UL Environment EPD system,
ul.com/global/eng/pages/offerings/businesses/environment/services/certification/epd/
·· Global Environmental Declaration network, gednet.org

Because an EPD must have a corresponding PCR to contribute to this credit, project teams might find it useful to
research EPDs by finding out whether a PCR exists for a product type, and if so, the entity that created it. The entity
that created the PCR is likely to have used it to create an EPD.
In Option 1 Environmental Product Declaration, different thresholds are designed to accommodate varying
levels of development of EPDs across industries. For example, the flooring industry has an established PCR, and as
a result, several carpet and resilient flooring companies now provide EPDs. In industries without established PCRs,
some manufacturers provide life-cycle assessments in accordance with ISO. The credit-calculated value for an ISO
14040/44 LCA is lower, to encourage manufacturers to work through their industry associations to develop PCRs,
which allow more accurate comparisons between products in similar categories. Generic EPDs are a good starting
point for manufacturers; they provide a baseline of information for a specific product category, but are not specific to
a company or manufacturing plant.
Product-specific declarations are publicly available and critically reviewed (but not necessarily verified) by a third
party to ensure that they conform to ISO 14044, which defines how LCAs are critically reviewed.
MR

Industry-wide (generic) declarations have third-party (Type III) certification, which includes verification. The
declaration is generic to a product, such as concrete, not specific to a particular manufacturer or company. For
the product to be eligible, the manufacturer must claim representation either directly on the EPD or through the
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Program Operator for the associated EPD.

Product-specific Type III declarations also use third-party certification that includes verification. Unlike generic
EPDs, however, product-specific declarations are specific to a particular manufacturer and do not necessarily reflect
the practices of the rest of the industry.
A Type III EPD uses data from a life-cycle assessment (LCA) and is defined by the PCR so that all EPDs for a
product are comparable. LCA data can also be aggregated to produce a representative EPD of several products in the
same family (type). ISO has developed several standards regarding independent verification of quantitative data
(the LCA), PCR development, and EPD review and publication. EPDs can be found on manufacturers’ websites or
the program operator’s website or can be requested from the manufacturer.
For this credit, the scope of any EPD must be at least cradle-to-gate—that is, it must cover the part of a product’s
life cycle from extraction (“cradle”) and material processing to creation of the final product ready for sale by the
manufacturer (“gate”); it excludes transportation from the factory to distributors or end customers. EPDs that cover
only manufacture (“gate to gate”) do not contribute toward the credit.
All EPDs must be consistent with ISO standards 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930. These standards
address how to set up and perform LCA, how LCA feeds into an EPD, and the appropriate level of detail and content
to be included in an EPD (see Referenced Standards).
For products not included in EN 15804 or the superseded ISO 21930 (i.e., furniture and other items not
considered building products), conformance to ISO 14025 only is acceptable.
EN 15804 is a European standard for PCR development. Products using EN 15804 in North America are expected
to adapt regionally specific aspects of the EN standard for North America. Declaration Holders should work with the
Program Operator to perform these adaptations.
To contribute to the credit threshold, the EPD must include statements of compliance with a specific PCR and
compliance with the ISO standards.
 517

Commissioning
(Individual or group)

Figure 1. EPD process

Implementation

Life Cycle
Product Category PCR Verification
Inventory
Rules
Data Collection (3rd Party)

Life Cycle
Assessment

Environmental
Product
Declaration
(program operator)

OR
EPD Verification EPD Verification
(program operator) (3rd Party)

MR
Publication
(program operator)

BPDO—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

TABLE 1. EPD process comparison

Product-specific
Industry-wide EPD Product-specific EPD
declaration

Data are critically

X X X
reviewed

Data are specific to

X X
product

Data are reported

possibly X
according to PCR

For a manufacturer, the EPD process is as follows:

1. A manufacturer searches for existing product category rules for its product category (aka the product type) see
list above for regional entities that maintain PCR libraries. If a PCR does not exist, manufacturers work with
a program operator to convene a group and develop product category rules for the product type. This process
includes a proposal, draft creation, open consultation, panel review, and approval and publication of product
category rules.
2. The manufacturer conducts a life-cycle assessment, based on the product’s goals and functional unit, global
warming potential, primary energy demand, contribution to acidification and eutrophication, and other
environmental indicators.
3. The manufacturer creates the EPD using this information and initiates verification by a third party, which
determines whether the LCA followed the correct ISO processes and the EPD was created according to the
PCR.
518

4. The manufacturer registers the declaration with a program operator, which verifies the EPD according to ISO
standards. Examples of program operators include UL Environmental, ICC-ES, ASTM, NSF, FP Innovations,
and the Institute for Environmental Research and Education.

DOCUMENTATION OF PRODUCT-SPECIFIC DECLARATIONS

Product-specific declarations are defined for this credit as declarations that are based on a life-cycle assessment
of a product but not constituting a full EPD. To document this claim, the project team must provide the following
information:
·· Name (declaration holder or producer, typically the manufacturer)
·· Contact information
·· Product type
·· Product name
·· Product description
·· Summary of impact categories measured and overall values
·· Functional unit
·· Standards met
·· Independent review entity’s name and statement

DOCUMENTATION OF EPDS
For industry-wide (generic) declarations and product-specific Type III declarations, the project team must provide
the following:
·· Declaration holder (the company, usually the manufacturer, that the EPD is attributed to)
·· EPD program operator (the entity that creates and registers the EPD)
·· LCA verifier (the third-party entity that verifies the life-cycle assessment)
MR

·· PCR reviewer (the third-party entity that has reviewed the product category rules)

During the selection of products with EPDs, identify two items about the document: the type of EPD it is, and the
summary that will be uploaded for credit compliance. Figure 2 illustrates an EPD created by Interface Flor for Type 6
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Nylon with GlasBac.

This EPD is for a

single product

This EPD has a

reviewed PCR

This EPD was

performed according
to ISO 14044

Figure 2. Example of EPD that meets requirements of Type III.

Used with permission from Interface.
 519

Such a summary is preferable to the full document, provided it includes the following:
·· Name (declaration holder, the producer or group of producers; each producer must be listed to claim the
credit)
·· Program operator
·· Contact information
·· Product type
·· Product name
·· Product description
·· Product category rule (title)
·· Certification period
·· Declaration number
·· Summary of impact categories measured and overall values
·· Functional unit
·· Standards met
·· Independent verification body (may be the same as the program operator)

MR
BPDO—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

Figure 3. Sample EPD for carpet tile product. Used with permission from Interface.
520

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2

MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent tracking tool X X

EPD and LCA reports or compliant summary documents for 100% of products contributing
X
toward credit

Documentation of compliance with USGBC-approved program X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials. Locally sourced
MR

materials contributing to the credit may also contribute to this related credit if compliant harvesting or extraction
can be confirmed.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Material Ingredients. Manufacturers whose

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

products and materials have EPDs may report ingredients. Ensure that the level of detail reported meets the credit
requirements. If the level of detail is sufficient, the product can contribute to both this credit and the related credit.

MR Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction. See MR Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction, Further
Explanation, Life Cycle Impact Measures or Indicators, for more information on environmental impact measures
included in Option 2 of this credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· This is a new credit.
·· Some materials excluded from MR credits in the past may now be included, such as mechanical fixtures,
fittings, and rough-in materials that are considered nonmotorized MEP components.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
International Standard ISO 14021–1999, Environmental labels and declarations—Self Declared Claims (Type
II Environmental Labeling): iso.org

International Standard ISO 14025–2006, Environmental labels and declarations (Type III Environmental
Declarations—Principles and Procedures): iso.org

International Standard ISO 14040–2006, Environmental management, Life cycle assessment principles, and
frameworks: iso.org
 521

International Standard ISO 14044–2006, Environmental management, Life cycle assessment requirements,
and guidelines: iso.org

CEN Comité Européen de Normalisation (European Committee for Standardization) EN 15804—2012

Sustainability of construction works, Environmental product declarations, Core rules for the product
category of construction products: cen.eu

International Standard ISO 21930–2007 Sustainability in building construction—Environmental declaration

of building products: iso.org

Federal Trade Commission, Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims, 16 CFR 260.7 (e):
ftc.gov/bcp/grnrule/guides980427.htm

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Source at least 40 qualifying products from five manufacturers.

Option 2. Purchase 75%, by cost, of permanently installed building products that meet the required attributes.

DEFINITIONS
cradle-to-gate assessment analysis of a product’s partial life cycle, from resource extraction (cradle) to the factory
gate (before it is transported for distribution and sale). It omits the use and the disposal phases of the product.

enclosure the exterior plus semi-exterior portions of the building. Exterior consists of the elements of a building

MR
that separate conditioned spaces from the outside (i.e., the wall assembly). Semiexterior consists of the elements of
a building that separate conditioned space from unconditioned space or that encloses semi-heated space through
which thermal energy may be transferred to or from the exterior or conditioned or unconditioned spaces (e.g., attic,

BPDO—ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT DECLARATIONS

crawl space, basement).

environmental product declaration a statement that the item meets the environmental requirements of ISO
14021–1999, ISO 14025–2006 and EN 15804, or ISO 21930–2007

life-cycle assessment an evaluation of the environmental effects of a product from cradle to grave, as defined by ISO
14040–2006 and ISO 14044–2006

product (permanently installed building product) an item that arrives on the project site either as a finished
element ready for installation or as a component to another item assembled on-site. The product unit is defined
by the functional requirement for use in the project; this includes the physical components and services needed to
serve the intended function of the permanently installed building product. In addition, similar products within a
specification can each contribute as separate products.

structure elements carrying either vertical or horizontal loads (e.g., walls, roofs, and floors) that are considered
structurally sound and nonhazardous
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

522
 523

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Building Product
Disclosure and
Optimization—Sourcing
of Raw Materials
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

MR
INTENT

BPDO—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

To encourage the use of products and materials for which life cycle
information is available and that have environmentally, economically,
and socially preferable life cycle impacts. To reward project teams
for selecting products verified to have been extracted or sourced in a
responsible manner.

REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. RAW MATERIAL SOURCE AND EXTRACTION REPORTING (1 POINT)
Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that have publicly
released a report from their raw material suppliers which include raw material supplier extraction locations, a
commitment to long-term ecologically responsible land use, a commitment to reducing environmental harms
from extraction and/or manufacturing processes, and a commitment to meeting applicable standards or programs
voluntarily that address responsible sourcing criteria.
·· Products sourced from manufacturers with self-declared reports are valued as one half (1/2) of a product for
credit achievement.
·· Third-party verified corporate sustainability reports (CSR) which include environmental impacts of extraction
operations and activities associated with the manufacturer’s product and the product’s supply chain, are
524

valued as one whole product for credit achievement calculation. Acceptable CSR frameworks include the
following:
·· Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report
·· Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises
·· U.N. Global Compact: Communication of Progress
·· ISO 26000: 2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility
·· USGBC approved program: Other USGBC approved programs meeting the CSR criteria.

OPTION 2. LEADERSHIP EXTRACTION PRACTICES (1 POINT)

Use products that meet at least one of the responsible extraction criteria below for at least 25%, by cost, of the total
value of permanently installed building products in the project.
·· Extended producer responsibility. Products purchased from a manufacturer (producer) that participates in
an extended producer responsibility program or is directly responsible for extended producer responsibility.
Products meeting extended producer responsibility criteria are valued at 50% of their cost for the purposes of
credit achievement calculation.
·· Bio-based materials. Bio-based products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Sustainable
Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials must be tested using ASTM Test Method D6866 and be legally
harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country. Exclude hide products, such as leather and other
animal skin material. Products meeting bio-based materials criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the
purposes of credit achievement calculation.
·· Wood products. Wood products must be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC-approved
equivalent. Products meeting wood products criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
·· Materials reuse. Reuse includes salvaged, refurbished, or reused products. Products meeting materials reuse
MR

criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.
·· Recycled content. Recycled content is the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus one-half the
preconsumer recycled content, based on cost. Products meeting recycled content criteria are valued at 100%
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation.

·· USGBC approved program. Other USGBC approved programs meeting leadership extraction criteria.

For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, and purchased) within 100 miles
(160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost. For credit achievement calculation,
the base contributing cost of individual products compliant with multiple responsible extraction criteria is not
permitted to exceed 100% its total actual cost (before regional multipliers) and double counting of single product
components compliant with multiple responsible extraction criteria is not permitted and in no case is a product
permitted to contribute more than 200% of its total actual cost.
Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products.
 525

BEHIND THE INTENT

Raw material extraction has a direct environmental impact on Earth’s ecosystems. For example, conventional
logging is the largest source of deforestation in Latin America and subtropical Asia, accounting for more than 70%
of resource depletion; mining operations clear another 18% of the world’s forests. Unmanaged extraction practices
can cause not only deforestation but also degradation of water sources, habitat loss, threats to rare and endangered
species, releases of toxic chemicals, and the infringement of indigenous peoples’ rights.
This credit encourages the use of responsibly sourced and extracted materials through reporting and
demonstration of responsible extraction practices. Corporate sustainability reports (CSRs), based on widely
recognized frameworks and standards, can shed light on product supply chains and identify sources of raw material
extraction. CSRs have become increasingly popular among all types of businesses, from retail organizations to
product manufacturers. As sustainability goals become more prominent, CSRs provide frameworks that allow
transparency and environmental impacts to be assessed, improved, and compared with other companies.
In addition to seeking the responsible sourcing of virgin materials, teams are also encouraged to reduce raw
material usage by selecting reused and recycled materials. Teams may also follow leadership performance standards
and certifications that encourage local sourcing. To recognize the rapidly changing marketplace conditions for
product and material reporting, this credit has an additional “USGBC-approved program” criterion designed to
recognize any leadership certification programs that may be developed in the future.
By increasing the demand for transparency in mining, quarrying, agriculture, forestry, and other industries, this
credit rewards environmental impact reductions that go beyond the individual project and have positive effects on
the sources of project materials.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

MR
Select which option(s) to pursue. Projects can earn a maximum of 2 points by achieving the requirements
for both options, and products may contribute to both options simultaneously. Early product research
can help the project team capitalize on opportunities for products contributing to multiple credits and

BPDO—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

options.
The required scope of this credit is permanently installed building products, excluding mechanical,
plumbing, electrical, (MEP) and specialty equipment and items purchased for temporary use on the
project. Furniture is not considered permanently installed and is not required to be included in the credit.
However, furniture as well as other optional MEP products may be included, provided they are also
included in the other two cost-based credits, MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—
Environmental Product Declarations and MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—
Material Ingredients. For more information see MR Overview, Qualifying Products and Exclusions.
·· Option 1 Raw Material Source and Extraction Reporting is for projects that have products consisting
of materials from manufacturers that have reported sustainable sourcing and extraction methods
according to an acceptable framework, as indicated in the credit requirements. Products must be
sourced from the minimum number of manufacturers as specified in the credit requirements.
·· Option 2 Leadership Extraction Practices is for projects that have products and/or constituent
materials that meet at least one of the responsible extraction criteria listed in the credit.

Option 1. Raw Material Source and Extraction Reporting

STEP 1. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Specify products from manufacturers that can provide reports of raw materials from their suppliers.
·· To meet the credit requirements, reports must include information on the following:
°° Raw material supplier extraction locations
°° Commitment to long-term ecologically responsible land use
°° Commitment to reducing environmental harms from extraction and manufacturing processes
°° Commitment to meeting voluntary standards or programs that address responsible sourcing
526

·· The reports may be available in the form of a corporate sustainability report (CSR) (see Further
Explanation, Raw Material Reporting and Corporate Sustainability Reports).
·· Include performance requirements or sole-source compliant products as applicable to the selected
option(s) in the project specifications. To ensure compliant purchases, consider creating a Division 1,
General Requirements, specification for sustainability criteria that meet MR requirements. Reference
that section to distinguish it from other sections that cover products and materials.
·· Similar products from the same manufacturer can be counted as separate products if they have
distinct formulations but not if they are aesthetic variations or reconfigurations (see MR Overview,
Defining a Product).
·· Research sourcing disclosure reports for contributing products. Third-party verified reports—also
called externally assured reports—are counted at full value for credit compliance; self-declared reports
are counted at half value. Retain all reports for credit documentation.
·· For a material procured directly from a raw material supplier, such as timber from a forest products
company or stone from a quarry, verify that any reporting meets the requirements.
·· For a product made by a manufacturer that uses raw materials extracted by others, ask the
manufacturer or supplier to provide documentation of compliant reporting.

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

Track purchasing of products throughout the construction of the project. To review progress toward
credit achievement, regularly enter information into the MR building product disclosure and optimization
calculator or an equivalent custom tool.
·· The best source of documentation is the manufacturer or the organization that manages the reporting
program. Reports are typically available online, but in some cases it might be necessary to contact a
company representative. Documentation may also be available from third-party websites that compile
the information of many companies in one place. Use formal correspondence to request CSRs or other
documentation indicating that the required information has been disclosed if it is not readily available.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that replacement products meet the credit
requirements.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
MR

any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. CALCULATE COMPLIANT PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS AND COMPILE

DOCUMENTATION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Using the data collected in the tracking tool, calculate the number of compliant products, using Equation
1 (see Further Explanation, Calculations).
·· In this option, compliance is based on the number of products, not their cost.
·· Collect sourcing disclosure reports. Retain the reports for all materials that contribute to credit
achievement.

Option 2. Leadership Extraction Practices

STEP 1. RESEARCH PRODUCTS

Specify products that meet one or more of the criteria listed in the credit requirements.
·· Different components or ingredients in an assembled product may contribute to different credit
criteria.
·· Each product, component, or ingredient that meets several criteria receives credit for each criterion
met. For exceptions see Further Explanation, Calculating FSC Credit Contributions.
Review preliminary design concepts and identify opportunities to use and procure biobased, qualified
wood as well as salvaged and recycled-content materials and products covered by extended producer
responsibility, especially for applications that use either significant quantities of materials or small
amounts of high-cost materials.
·· The amount of biobased content in a product is determined by the manufacturer according to ASTM
Standard D6866. Testing per ASTM Standard D6866 may be necessary to determine the fraction of
biobased content if it cannot be determined by other means (see Further Explanation, Documentation
for Wood and Biobased Products).
 527

·· Wood must be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) unless it is considered reused,
salvaged, or recycled. Look for vendors that hold an FSC chain-of-custody certificate. Material
covered by both FSC and the Sustainable Agriculture Standard, such as nonwood forest products and
bamboo, may be certified under either FSC or Sustainable Agriculture Network standards (see Further
Explanation, Materials Reuse Considerations).
·· Extended producer responsibility (also known as a closed-loop recycling program and as product
take-back) puts a used product back into the production stream (see Further Explanation, Extended
Producer Responsibility). The program can be sponsored by the product’s manufacturer or other
service.

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction product submittals to ensure that the
selected products meet credit requirements. To review progress toward credit achievement, regularly
enter information into the MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by
USGBC or an equivalent custom tool regularly to track progress toward credit achievement.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that replacement products meet the
credit requirements. Any product substitutions should be carefully reviewed by the design team and
contractor for compliance.
·· Because these requirements are not typical for all construction teams and suppliers, conduct a
LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and stress their
importance.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. CALCULATE PRODUCT AND MATERIAL COSTS AND COMPILE DOCUMENTATION

Use Equation 2 to determine the total value of compliant products (see Further Explanation,
Calculations). Compliance is based on products’ cost.
·· Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant
building products. Once the cap on structural material is met, these products can no longer contribute

MR
toward the credit but must be included in the denominator of Equation 2.
·· Some products may meet multiple criteria or are part of assemblies (see MR Overview, Determining
Material Contributions).
·· Collect documentation. For certification programs, provide documentation for all products

BPDO—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS

EQUATION 1. Number of products with raw material extraction reporting

Total #
of products =
{ # of products
with
manufacturer-
declared reports
× 0.5

} { +
# of products
with 3rd party
verified reports
× 1

}
528

EQUATION 2. Percentage of responsibly sourced products

{( )( )( ) {( )( )( )
applicable
product
criterion1
valuation
location
valuation
{ +
applicable
product
criterion2
valuation
location
valuation
{
+ ...
% of materials
cost = cost 1 factor factor cost 2 factor factor

× 100

Cost of all permanently installed prodcuts

where

Product cost = cost of the product contributing toward credit (see MR Overview, Determining Product Cost).

Criterion valuation factor = multiplier assigned to each sourcing criterion:

·· Biobased products meeting Sustainable Agriculture Standard, value 1.0, by cost
·· Wood products certified to FSC standards, 1.0 value (see Further Explanation, Calculating FSC Credit
Contributions).
·· Reused materials, value 1.0, by cost
·· Postconsumer recycled materials, value 1.0, by cost
·· Preconsumer recycled materials, value 0.5, by cost
·· Location valuation factor = multiplier for the extraction, manufacture, and purchase location (see MR
Overview, Location Valuation Factor)
·· Extended producer responsibility is valued at 50%; that is, the valuation factor is 0.5. Products that are part of
an extended producer responsibility program may be counted in their entirety even if only part of the product
is recycled.
MR

RAW MATERIAL REPORTING AND CORPORATE SUSTAINABILITY REPORTS

For a product to count toward credit achievement, its report must be current for the product at its time of
installation. Reports published within one year of the project’s LEED registration date, or reports that cover a period
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

that ends within that year are acceptable.

A compliant report must be issued by either the manufacturer or the raw material supplier and cover at least
the criteria listed in the rating system requirements. At least 90% of the contents of each product must be from raw
materials covered by a compliant report; no partial credit is allowed for products that do not meet this threshold.
Reports obtained directly from raw material suppliers must verify the use of the raw material in products purchased
for the project building. A manufacturer’s report must trace activities to the source of extraction of the product’s raw
materials. In either case, acceptable frameworks for raw material reporting include the following:

Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report

The GRI reporting framework is widely recognized as the most comprehensive. Its corporate sustainability reporting
program offers reporting services, a publicly available database of reports, and tracking of required progress. Reports
are assigned a score of A, B, or C, reflecting how closely the framework was followed in the report; this letter grade is
not an indicator of quality but pertains only to the application.
The reporting framework also supports third-party verification (“external assurance”) through a network of
approved assurance providers. A plus sign (+) after the score indicates that the report has been externally assured.
For a product to count toward credit achievement, the “assurance scope” must cover either the entire report or
all sections of the report that directly address raw materials extraction practices. The “level of assurance” for the
relevant sections must be “reasonable/high” for the report to be considered third-party verified. If the level is
“limited/moderate,” the report is not considered third-party verified for the purposes of this credit. The report can
still count as a manufacturer-declared report, however, provided it includes all the information specified in the credit
requirements.
A report status of “GRI-checked” or “third-party checked” applies only to the application level. These checks are
not the same as external assurance and do not qualify the report as third-party verified for the purposes of this credit.
 529

For more details on these report qualifiers, refer to globalreporting.org/resourcelibrary/GRI-Data-Legend-

Sustianability-Disclosure-Database-Profiling.pdf. The framework can also be used as a stand-alone guidance
document. The current version of the framework is G3.1. The next version, G4, is intended to align better with other
reporting programs worldwide.

Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises
These guidelines are a comprehensive corporate social responsibility instrument developed by governments.
The recommendations, addressed to multinational enterprises operating in or from adhering countries, set forth
voluntary principles and standards for responsible business conduct in such areas as employment and industrial
relations, human rights, environment, information disclosure, antibribery practices, consumer interests, science
and technology, competition, and taxation. The guidelines are general and not intended to define specific reporting
requirements, so it is up to the product’s manufacturer to ensure that its report covers the required measures and, if
it is third-party verified, that the verification process is truly independent. Project teams should seek a signed letter
from the manufacturer on company letterhead attesting to that conformance with the credit requirements.

UN Global Compact: Communication of Progress

The UNGC is a policy framework for the development, implementation, and disclosure of 10 sustainability
principles in four core areas: human rights, labor, environment, and anticorruption. The GRI Sustainability
Reporting Guidelines can be used to produce the Global Compact’s annual Communication on Progress, the
mechanism that UNGC uses to demonstrate progress toward its principles. The GRI guidelines provide a structure
for reporting and independent verification. See the GRI Sustainability Reports section, above, for details on how to
use that format to meet the credit requirements. Project teams should seek a signed letter from the manufacturer on
company letterhead attesting to conformance with the credit requirements.

ISO 26000: 2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility

ISO 26000 provides guidance on how businesses and organizations can operate in an ethical and transparent way

MR
that contributes to the health and welfare of society. Not a standard to which a company’s report can be certified,
it helps clarify what social responsibility is, helps businesses and organizations translate principles into effective
actions, and shares best practices relating to social responsibility.
To document product compliance with Option 1, provide a publicly available document confirming the

BPDO—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

manufacturer’s third-party-verified corporate sustainability report. Reports are often available on websites, but
because web pages can change without notice, project teams are advised to print and retain paper copies.

EXTENDED PRODUCER RESPONSIBILITY

Extended producer responsibility (EPR) is a waste management strategy that promotes integrating the life-cycle
environmental costs associated with goods into the market price of the products. EPR is based on the idea that
because producers have the greatest control over product design, they also have the ability and responsibility to
reduce their products’ toxicity and waste.
The Organisation for Economic Co-Operation and Development (OECD) defines extended producer
responsibility as an environmental policy approach in which a producer’s responsibility for a product is extended
to the postconsumer stage of the product’s life cycle. An EPR policy (1) shifts responsibility (physically and/or
economically, fully or partially) upstream toward the producer and away from municipalities; and (2) creates
incentives for producers to take into account environmental considerations when designing their products. There
are two basic types of EPR programs:
·· Manufacturer-based programs. The manufacturer of the product has a take-back or recycling program for
the product purchased (Figure 1). Documentation for Option 2 can be a brochure describing the EPR program
and including contact information, plus proof that the product purchased for the project is included in the
program. Documentation may also be a letter from the manufacturer verifying that an EPR program is in place
and that the product purchased for the project is eligible, with contact information.
·· Third-party program. In some cases a separate business collects material and sells or transports it back
to manufacturers. Verifying that the material is in fact recycled is of the utmost importance. Acceptable
documentation is a brochure that describes the recycling process and states the average rate of return for the
material.
530

Figure 1. Sample education pamphlet about commercial ceiling tile recycling as part of extended
producer responsibility program. Education pamphlet about Extended Producer Responsibility used
with permission from Armstrong World Industries.
MR

DOCUMENTATION FOR WOOD AND BIOBASED PRODUCTS

Documentation for Wood
To contribute toward credit achievement, wood products that are not reused, salvaged, or recycled must be certified
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

to the standards of the Forest Stewardship Council. Bamboo, nonwood forest products, and other materials that are
not actually wood but are certified by FSC can count toward this credit. Collect vendor invoices for wood products
purchased for the project (see Further Explanation, FSC Chain of Custody).

Documentation for Biobased materials

Biobased products are defined by ASTM D6866, but testing (by the manufacturer or a contracted party) is not
required in all cases. Manufacturers use this test to determine the amount of biobased material in a product. If the
percentage of biobased materials, by weight, in the product are known, testing to this standard may not be necessary.
Nonwood products must be grown on farms that meet the Sustainable Agriculture Standard of the Sustainable
Agricultural Network (SAN). Products originating on farms that meet the Sustainable Agriculture Standard must
adhere to the guidelines and policies of the Rainforest Alliance—including traceability, chain of custody and use of
seal—and receive pre-approval from the Rainforest Alliance in order to bear the Rainforest Alliance Certified™ seal.
The Rainforest Alliance is a member of SAN and hosts its international secretariat, providing traceability, market
linkages, and technical assistance. Several certification bodies in different countries are accredited to conduct
Rainforest Alliance certification. A full listing of certified farms and operations can be found on the SAN website,
sanstandards.org. A list of Rainforest Certified products can be found at rainforest-alliance.org. To date, nearly all
Rainforest Alliance Certified agricultural products are foods, coffee, tea, and cut flowers.
Because the number of Rainforest Alliance–certified crops in building materials is limited, project teams may
include products with manufacturer-declared conformance to the Sustainable Agriculture Standard (except bamboo
and nonwood forest products that could be FSC certified) under the following three conditions:
·· The product’s manufacturer provides a signed letter on company letterhead from the raw material supplier
attesting that its practices meet the standard.
·· The letter includes a link to a publicly available document that specifies how the raw material supplier’s
practices conform to each paragraph in all 10 sections of the standard and attesting that each “critical
criterion” is met.
 531

·· Both the letter and the detailed documentation are dated within one year before the date of project
registration.

FSC CHAIN OF CUSTODY

Chain-of-Custody (CoC) certification requirements are established by Forest Stewardship Council Chain of
Custody Standard 40-004 v2-1. To view this and all FSC standards, see the FSC website, ic.fsc.org, for listings.
Every entity that processes or trades FSC-certified material before it is shipped to the project site must have FSC
CoC certification. On-site installers of FSC-certified products must have CoC certification only if they modify the
products off the project site.

CALCULATING FSC CREDIT CONTRIBUTIONS

FSC-certified products must be itemized on the vendor’s invoice. Their value toward credit contribution
is calculated as one of the following, as determined by the FSC claim on the invoice provided by the
supplier(terminology in parenthesis is being phased out but may still be in use):
·· Products identified as FSC 100% (FSC Pure) contribute 100% FSC content.
·· Products identified as FSC Mix Credit (FSC Mixed Credit) contribute 100% FSC content.
·· Products identified as FSC Mix [NN]% (FSC Mixed [NN]%) contribute the FSC content percentage indicated.
For example, a product identified as “FSC Mix 75%” is valued at 75% of the product’s cost (Equation 3).

EQUATION 3. Credit contribution of FSC Mix

=
FSC product value ($) Total product cost ($) × FSC Mix [NN] %

MR
·· Products identified as FSC Recycled Credit contribute 100% postconsumer recycled content.
·· Products identified as FSC Recycled [NN] % contribute the percentage postconsumer recycled content

BPDO—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

percentage indicated [NN].

Multiple Sustainable Claims and FSC

FSC and recycled content. Some products identified as FSC Mix Credit or FSC Mix [NN] % also have pre- or
postconsumer recycled content, the latter of which is commonly reported separately by the product manufacturer.
In these instances the project team must choose whether to classify the product (or some fraction of the assembly)
as FSC certified or as recycled content; the material cannot contribute to both claims simultaneously.
FSC and SAN certified products. Products certified by both FSC and to the Sustainable Agriculture Standard they
may receive credit for each criteria.

DOCUMENTING FSC CLAIMS

Project teams must document FSC certification for all wood products that contribute to credit achievement. FSC-
certified products qualify for credit only when purchased from a vendor with an FSC chain-of-custody certificate
that is current at the time of sale. The vendor is defined as the company that sells products to the project contractors
and subcontractors who do not modify products off-site. The status of a CoC certification can be verified at
info.fsc.org.
Each product shipped to the project site and contributing toward credit must be documented by an invoice from
the CoC certificate holder as follows:
·· The invoice must have the vendor’s CoC certificate code (e.g., RA-COC-001025, SCS-COC-000345, or SGS-
COC-002563). The invoice must itemize FSC-certified products and specific FSC claims.
·· The invoice may aggregate the value of products, provided the cost of FSC products is isolated from other
wood products and the vendor’s CoC certificate code is on the invoice.
·· The invoice must show the entity being invoiced and indicate the delivery is intended for the LEED project.
532

An alternative documentation process is available for architectural woodworkers (manufacturers of millwork,

casework, and furniture) who supply custom wood products to the project. The purpose of this alternative process is
to allow FSC-certified materials used in a custom millwork, casework, or furniture package to contribute toward the
credit even if the entire package is not eligible to be invoiced with a FSC claim. Documentation for this alternative
process must meet all of the following requirements:
·· The woodworker (whether an individual or a company) must be FSC CoC certified, and the CoC certificate
number must appear on the project invoice.
·· The woodworker must install the custom millwork, casework, or furniture.
·· The woodworker’s invoice must isolate product costs from installation costs.
·· The woodworker must provide a document, separate from the project invoice, detailing FSC-certified wood
materials used and total cost of wood materials used. (The woodworker does not need to provide itemized
material cost calculations but must maintain calculation records for auditing purposes by the FSC certifying
body.)
·· The contract cost may include assembly labor but must exclude on-site labor (see MR Overview, Determining
Product Cost).

The project team should complete a spreadsheet itemizing wood components by cost and identifying FSC-certified
and noncertified components to determine overall contributions to the credit, to be entered into the MR calculator.
Calculate the FSC-certified contribution value toward the credit by multiplying the percentage of FSC-certified
wood by the overall value of the contract. Calculate the percentage of FSC-certified wood by dividing the cost of
FSC-certified wood by the total cost of the wood.
Submit the FSC-certified contribution value as well as the total contract amount. Include the woodworker’s CoC
certificate number, invoice, and itemized costs.

MATERIAL REUSE CONSIDERATIONS

Determine the cost of each material. The cost of reused or reclaimed materials is either the actual cost paid or the
MR

replacement value, whichever is higher.

The replacement value can be determined by pricing a comparable material in the local market; exclude labor and
shipping. If a project team receives a discount from a vendor, the replacement value should be the discounted price,
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

not the list value.

If the actual cost of the reused or salvaged material is below the cost of an equivalent new item, use the higher
value (actual cost) of the new item. If the cost to reclaim an item found on site is less than the cost of an equivalent
new item, use the cost of the new item (or replacement cost).
Generally, opportunities to reuse building materials may be limited. Core materials that may be eligible include
salvaged brick, structural timber, railroad ties, stone, and pavers. When considering the reuse of salvaged materials,
confirm that they do not contain toxic substances, such as lead or asbestos.

Reused materials found on site

Components that are retained either in their original function or in a new role are eligible for this credit. For reused
materials found on site, the source location distance is zero.

Reused materials found off site

Materials obtained off site qualify as reused if they were previously used in a building or other application. These
materials may be purchased as salvaged, like any other project material, or moved from another facility, including
facilities used or owned by the LEED project owner.
For salvaged furniture taken from the owner’s previous facility or location, demonstrate that these materials
were purchased at least two years before the date of project registration. For example, if the owner is moving to a
new building, furniture and furnishings relocated to the new site can contribute to this credit because their reuse will
eliminate the need for purchasing new furniture and furnishings. Alternatively, furniture that is leased must have
been in service for at least two years before being installed in the current project. Document this claim.
 533

Location valuation factor for salvaged or reused materials

For reused materials, the source location of extraction or harvest is the location of the materials before their removal
to the project site.
For material taken directly from another building, the source location is the building. For items purchased from
a building materials salvage store or recycling facility, the source location is the store or facility. In this case, it is not
necessary to track material to the original building.

RECYCLED CONTENT
Recycled content claims for products must conform to the definition in ISO 14021–1999, Environmental Labels and
Declarations, Self-Declared Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labeling).
Many common materials have recycled content because of how they are manufactured; examples are steel,
gypsum board, and acoustical ceiling tile. Design and construction teams may need to research which materials
contain high levels of recycled content or verify which factories and which models of a product line feature the
desired recycled content. Average recycled content claims given in a range are not acceptable for the purposes of this
criterion.
Although it is a good practice, reusing materials reclaimed from the same process in which they were generated
does not contribute toward the recycled content of the material. Putting waste back into the same manufacturing
process from which it came is not considered recycling because it was not diverted from the waste stream.
Reuse of materials includes rework, regrind, or scrap product (ISO 14021); these count as preconsumer recycled
only if they are used in a different product than the one whose production generated the waste. For example, glass
culls that are reused to make new glass products do not count, but planer shavings, plytrim, sawdust, chips, bagasse,
and sunflower seed hulls are considered preconsumer recycled content when used to make new products. .
Distinguish between postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content when tracking materials for the purpose
of credit calculations.
To calculate the percentage of recycled-content materials used in a project, list all recycled-content materials
and products and their costs. For each product, identify the percentage of postconsumer and/or preconsumer

MR
recycled content by weight, and list the recycled content information source. The information must come from a
reliable, verifiable source, such as the product’s manufacturer.

Postconsumer recycled content

BPDO—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

Postconsumer recycled content is consumer waste, much of which comes from residential curbside recycling
programs for aluminum, glass, plastic, and paper. Other postconsumer feedstock is generated when construction
and demolition debris is recycled. To be a feedstock, the raw materials must have served a useful purpose in the
consumer market before being used again.

Preconsumer Recycled Content

Preconsumer recycled content comes from process waste that is used to make a different product. For instance,
a composite board manufacturer may use sawdust from a lumber mill or waste straw from a wheat farm. This
definition does not include in-house industrial scrap or trimmings, which are normally fed back into the same
manufacturing process.
The end product must be considered when determining whether a waste product is preconsumer or
postconsumer. For example, a power plant’s end product is electricity, so waste products from the combustion of
coal may be considered preconsumer waste but not postconsumer; the power plant is not an end-use consumer of
the coal.
Default recycled content for steel products where no recycled content information is available, assume the
recycled content to be 25% postconsumer. No other material is known to have a similarly consistent minimum
recycled content.
Many steel products contain 90% or higher recycled content if manufactured by the electric arc furnace process,
so it may be beneficial to obtain actual information from the manufacturer rather than relying on the default value.

Average recycled content

Recycled content claims must be specific to the installed product. Installed product refers to an item distinguished
by color, type, and/or location of manufacture, as identified to the consumer by SKU or other means.
534

Project teams may use the average recycled content value provided by a single manufacturer for a single product.
Recycled content claims for custom products must be product specific; industry-wide or national averages are not
acceptable. In all cases, if recycled content is given as a range, use the lowest recycled-content percentage.

EXAMPLES
Option 2 Example Calculation: MDF Panel with FSC-Certified Veneer

A project is installing $10,000 worth of veneer paneling. The MDF core is 90% of the product by weight, of which
80% is preconsumer waste wood that meets the ISO 14021 requirement. The veneer is 10% of the product by weight
and FSC certified. The MDF is extracted, manufactured, and purchased within 100 miles (160 km); the veneer is
imported.

TABLE 1. Sample calculation for product assembly meeting sustainable criteria

Sustainable criteria
Percentage Location
Value of Sustainable
Component of product by valuation
component criteria value
weight Percentage of factor?
Requirement
component

Preconsumer
MDF core 90% $9,000 80% Yes $14,400
recycled content

Veneer 10% $1,000 100% FSC certified No $1,000

Total sustainable criteria value $15,400

Option 2 Example Calculation: Salvaged Doors

A project team purchases 50 doors salvaged from a local deconstruction site and sold through a local Habitat for
Humanity ReStore for $500. The value of equivalent new doors is documented at $400 each, or $20,000. Their
MR

contribution to the credit is as follows:

$20,000 x 1.0 criterion valuation * 2.0 location valuation = $40,000
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

$40,000 is the total sustainable criteria value for these doors

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2

MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator or equivalent tracking tool X X

Corporate sustainability reports for 100% of products contributing toward credit X

Documentation of product claims for credit requirements or other USGBC-approved program X

 535

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Building Life Cycle Impact Reduction. If the project includes a preexisting structure, reused, salvaged,
and refurbished products may contribute to either this credit or the related credit but may not be double-counted.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product Declarations. Products

may be double-counted if they meet the requirements of both credits.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Material Ingredients. Products may be double-
counted if they meet the requirements of both credits.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

Multiple criteria from the following LEED 2009 credits have been combined into this credit. Except as noted,
the criteria are unchanged from LEED 2009. Other criteria are now incorporated into other MR credits, such as
Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction and Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product
Declarations (see Related Credit Tips).
·· MR Credit Materials Reuse. Materials that are reused on-site are no longer required to be repurposed.
·· MR Credit Recycled Content. The requirements for recycled content have not changed; however, this criterion
is now combined with other criteria in a single option.
·· MR Credit Regional Materials. The 500-mile (805-km) radius requirement was decreased to 100 miles (160
km). The definition of regional has been expanded to include the distribution and purchase location and now
includes all points of manufacture.
·· MR Credit Rapidly Renewable Materials. Biobased materials are no longer defined by the harvest cycle of the
raw materials; instead, products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Standard to count toward this credit.
·· MR Credit Certified Wood. The requirements for certified wood have not changed; however, this criterion is

MR
not combined with other criteria in a single option.

BPDO—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report: globalreporting.org/

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational
Enterprises: oecd.org/daf/internationalinvestment/guidelinesformultinationalenterprises/

U.N. Global Compact, Communication of Progress: unglobalcompact.org/cop/

ISO 26000—2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility: iso.org/iso/home/standards/iso26000.htm

Forest Stewardship Council: ic.fsc.org

Sustainable Agriculture Network: sanstandards.org

The Rainforest Alliance: rainforest-alliance.org/

ASTM Test Method D6866: astm.org/Standards/D6866.htm

International Standards ISO 14021–1999, Environmental Labels and Declarations—Self Declared

Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labeling): iso.org/iso/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=23146
536

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Source at least 40 products from five manufacturers.

Option 2. Purchase 50%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed building products that meet the
responsible extraction criteria.

DEFINITIONS
biobased material commercial or industrial products (other than food or feed) that are composed in whole, or
in significant part, of biological products, renewable agricultural materials (including plant, animal, and marine
materials), or forestry materials. For the purposes of LEED, this excludes leather and other animal hides.

chain of custody (CoC) a procedure that tracks a product from the point of harvest or extraction to its end use,
including all successive stages of processing, transformation, manufacturing, and distribution

enclosure the exterior plus semi-exterior portions of the building. Exterior consists of the elements of a building
that separate conditioned spaces from the outside (i.e., the wall assembly). Semiexterior consists of the elements of
a building that separate conditioned space from unconditioned space or that encloses semi-heated space through
which thermal energy may be transferred to or from the exterior or conditioned or unconditioned spaces (e.g., attic,
crawl space, or basement).

extended producer responsibility measures undertaken by the maker of a product to accept its own and
sometimes other manufacturers’ products as postconsumer waste at the end of the products’ useful life. Producers
recover and recycle the materials for use in new products of the same type. To count toward credit compliance, a
program must be widely available. For carpet, extended producer responsibility must be consistent with NSF/ANSI
MR

140–2007. Also known as closed-loop program or product take-back.

furniture and furnishings the stand-alone furniture items purchased for the project, including individual and
group seating; open-plan and private-office workstations; desks and tables; storage units, credenzas, bookshelves,
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

filing cabinets, and other case goods; wall-mounted visual-display products (e.g., marker boards and tack boards,
excluding electronic displays); and miscellaneous items, such as easels, mobile carts, freestanding screens, installed
fabrics, and movable partitions. Hospitality furniture is included as applicable to the project. Office accessories,
such as desktop blotters, trays, tape dispensers, waste baskets, and all electrical items, such as lighting and small
appliances, are excluded.

postconsumer recycled content waste generated by households or commercial, industrial and institutional
facilities in their role as end users of a product that can no longer be used for its intended purpose

preconsumer recycled content matter diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process,
determined as the percentage of material, by weight. Examples include planer shavings, sawdust, bagasse, walnut
shells, culls, trimmed materials, overissue publications, and obsolete inventories. The designation excludes rework,
regrind, or scrap materials capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated them (ISO 14021).
Formerly known as postindustrial content.

product (permanently installed building product) an item that arrives on the project site either as a finished
element ready for installation or as a component to another item assembled on-site. The product unit is defined
by the functional requirement for use in the project; this includes the physical components and services needed to
serve the intended function of the permanently installed building product. In addition, similar products within a
specification can each contribute as separate products.

raw material the basic substance from which products are made, such as concrete, glass, gypsum, masonry, metals,
recycled materials (e.g., plastics and metals), oil (petroleum, polylactic acid), stone, agrifiber, bamboo, and wood

recycled content defined in accordance with the International Organization of Standards document ISO 14021,
Environmental labels and declarations, Self-declared environmental claims (Type II environmental labeling)
 537

reuse the reemployment of materials in the same or a related capacity as their original application, thus extending
the lifetime of materials that would otherwise be discarded. Reuse includes the recovery and reemployment of
materials recovered from existing building or construction sites. Also known as salvage.

structure elements carrying either vertical or horizontal loads (e.g., walls, roofs, and floors) that are considered
structurally sound and nonhazardous

wood plant-based materials that are eligible for certification under the Forest Stewardship Council. Examples
include bamboo and palm (monocots) as well as hardwoods (angiosperms) and softwoods (gymnosperms)

MR
BPDO—SOURCING OF RAW MATERIALS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

538
 539

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Building Product
Disclosure and
Optimization—
Material Ingredients
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

MR
INTENT

BPDO—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS
To encourage the use of products and materials for which life-cycle
information is available and that have environmentally, economically,
and socially preferable life-cycle impacts. To reward project teams for
selecting products for which the chemical ingredients in the product are
inventoried using an accepted methodology and for selecting products
verified to minimize the use and generation of harmful substances. To
reward raw material manufacturers who produce products verified to
have improved life-cycle impacts.

REQUIREMENTS
OPTION 1. MATERIAL INGREDIENT REPORTING (1 POINT)
Use at least 20 different permanently installed products from at least five different manufacturers that use any of the
following programs to demonstrate the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1% (1000 ppm).
·· Manufacturer Inventory. The manufacturer has published complete content inventory for the product
following these guidelines:
°° A publicly available inventory of all ingredients identified by name and Chemical Abstract Service
Registration Number (CASRN)
540

°° Materials defined as trade secret or intellectual property may withhold the name and/or CASRN but must
disclose role, amount and GreenScreen benchmark, as defined in GreenScreen v1.2.
·· Health Product Declaration. The end use product has a published, complete Health Product Declaration
with full disclosure of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration open Standard.
·· Cradle to Cradle. The end use product has been certified at the Cradle to Cradle v2 Basic level or Cradle to
Cradle v3 Bronze level.
·· USGBC approved program. Other USGBC approved programs meeting the material ingredient reporting
criteria.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. MATERIAL INGREDIENT OPTIMIZATION (1 POINT)

Use products that document their material ingredient optimization using the paths below for at least 25%, by cost, of
the total value of permanently installed products in the project.
·· GreenScreen v1.2 Benchmark. Products that have fully inventoried chemical ingredients to 100 ppm that
have no Benchmark 1 hazards:
°° If any ingredients are assessed with the GreenScreen List Translator, value these products at 100% of cost.
°° If all ingredients are have undergone a full GreenScreen Assessment, value these products at 150% of cost.
·· Cradle to Cradle Certified. End use products are certified Cradle to Cradle. Products will be valued as
follows:
°° Cradle to Cradle v2 Gold: 100% of cost
°° Cradle to Cradle v2 Platinum: 150% of cost
°° Cradle to Cradle v3 Silver: 100% of cost
°° Cradle to Cradle v3 Gold or Platinum: 150% of cost
·· International Alternative Compliance Path – REACH Optimization. End use products and materials
MR

that do not contain substances that meet REACH criteria for substances of very high concern. If the product
contains no ingredients listed on the REACH Authorization or Candidate list, value at 100% of cost.
·· USGBC approved program. Products that comply with USGGBC approved building product optimization
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

criteria.

AND/OR

OPTION 3. PRODUCT MANUFACTURER SUPPLY CHAIN OPTIMIZATION (1 POINT)

Use building products for at least 25%, by cost, of the total value of permanently installed products in the project
that:
·· Are sourced from product manufacturers who engage in validated and robust safety, health, hazard, and risk
programs which at a minimum document at least 99% (by weight) of the ingredients used to make the building
product or building material, and
·· Are sourced from product manufacturers with independent third party verification of their supply chain that
at a minimum verifies:
°° Processes are in place to communicate and transparently prioritize chemical ingredients along the supply
chain according to available hazard, exposure and use information to identify those that require more
detailed evaluation
°° Processes are in place to identify, document, and communicate information on health, safety and
environmental characteristics of chemical ingredients
°° Processes are in place to implement measures to manage the health, safety and environmental hazard and
risk of chemical ingredients
°° Processes are in place to optimize health, safety and environmental impacts when designing and improving
chemical ingredients
°° Processes are in place to communicate, receive and evaluate chemical ingredient safety and stewardship
information along the supply chain
°° Safety and stewardship information about the chemical ingredients is publicly available from all points
along the supply chain
 541

Products meeting Option 3 criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement
calculation.
For credit achievement calculation of options 2 and 3, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased)
within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost. For credit
achievement calculation, the value of individual products compliant with either option 2 or 3 can be combined to
reach the 25% threshold but products compliant with both option 2 and 3 may only be counted once.
Structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30% of the value of compliant building products.

MR
BPDO—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS
542

BEHIND THE INTENT

The occupants of an average office building, school, or warehouse have little knowledge of the components of
the building that surrounds them every day. Often, not even project planners have enough information about
construction materials on which to base their own selection criteria, given that disclosure data are hard to acquire.
Despite the regulatory safeguards for some toxic chemicals, 96% of the roughly 85,000 chemicals on the U.S. market
have never been screened for possible health effects.1
Persistent bioaccumulative and toxic chemicals (PBTs) and persistent organic pollutants (POPs) are often found
in building products and materials. PBTs linger in the environment, accumulate in organisms high on the food chain
(including humans), and can cause harm even in very small doses. PBTs released during the manufacture, use, or
disposal of a product can threaten the health of plants and animals many miles away. Even less is known about which
chemicals are potential carcinogens, mutagens, neurotoxicants, or developmental toxicants.
By adhering to the precautionary principle and supporting green chemistry, this credit encourages project teams
to avoid products containing potentially harmful chemicals, which will ultimately spur innovation in materials
from manufacturers. The precautionary principle states, “Where there are threats of serious or irreversible damage,
lack of full scientific certainty shall not be used as a reason for postponing cost-effective measures to prevent
environmental degradation.”2 Green Chemistry is the design of chemical products and processes that reduce or
eliminate the use and generation of hazardous substances.3 Companies conducting green chemistry research are
developing safer alternatives to priority chemicals so that one day there will be “green lists” instead of “red lists.”
Such companies are also developing corporate policies that include the precautionary principle, establish credible
monitoring and assurance programs, and strengthen relationships with suppliers.4
This credit aims to support manufacturers that disclose information about the ingredients in their products,
allowing project teams to make better-informed decisions. The programs described below use hazard assessment
approaches that evaluate multiple human and environmental health endpoints at a level of detail that goes beyond
the scope of most life-cycle assessments. Project teams may demonstrate responsible product selection by providing
manufacturers’ reports or by ensuring the absence of materials of concern, using specified programs.
MR

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Select which option(s) to pursue. Projects can earn a maximum of 2 points by achieving the requirements
for two options, and products may contribute to Options 1 and 2. A project that cannot achieve Option
1 is not precluded from achieving Option 2 and vice versa. For Option 3 Product Manufacturer Supply
Chain Optimization, check USGBC’s website for updates on how to achieve compliance.
·· Option 1 Material Ingredient Reporting is for projects that have at least 20 permanently installed
products consisting of materials from manufacturers that have disclosed their ingredient inventory in
one of the listed formats, as indicated in the credit requirements. Products must be sourced from at
least five manufacturers.
·· Option 2 Material Ingredient Optimization is for projects with 25% permanently installed products,
by cost, that meet at least one of the material ingredient optimization paths listed in the credit
requirements.

1. “Healthy Business Strategies for Transforming the Toxic Chemical Economy,” Clean Production Action (June 2006), http://www.cleanproduction.org/library/
CPA-HealthyBusiness-1.pdf (accessed May 29, 2013).
2. Report of the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development, http://www.un.org/documents/ga/conf151/aconf15126-1annex1.htm (accessed May
29, 2013).
3. Anastas and Warner, Green Chemistry: Theory and Practice (New York: Oxford University Press, 2000).
4. “Healthy Business Strategies for Transforming the Toxic Chemical Economy,” Clean Production Action (June 2006), http://www.cleanproduction.org/library/
CPA-HealthyBusiness-1.pdf (accessed May 29, 2013).
 543

Option 1. Material Ingredient Reporting

STEP 1. ASSESS OPTION FEASIBILITY

Research at an early phase can help the project team identify products that contribute to multiple credits
and options. Review the approved programs and assess the feasibility of finding enough products that
meet project requirements (see Further Explanation, Material Ingredient Reporting).
·· Some of these programs are new and have documented or certified only a few products in a way that
complies with the requirements.
·· The Cradle to Cradle Products Innovation Institute publishes a searchable registry of certified
products.
·· Products can comply under different programs; it is not necessary to find 20 products that all comply
using the same path.

STEP 2. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Specify at least 20 products, from at least five different manufacturers (see MR Overview, Qualifying
Products and Exclusions).
·· All ingredients in the end product must be characterized through a USGBC-approved program.
·· Similar products from the same manufacturer can be counted as separate products if they have
distinct formulations, but not if they are just aesthetic variations or reconfigurations.

STEP 3. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction submittals to ensure that the selected
products meet credit requirements. To review progress toward credit achievement, regularly enter the
information into the MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by USGBC or
an equivalent custom tool.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that replacement products meet the
credit requirements. Any product substitutions should be carefully reviewed by the design team and
contractor for compliance.
·· Because these requirements are not typical for all construction teams and suppliers, conduct a

MR
LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and stress their
importance.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address

BPDO—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 4. COUNT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS AND COMPILE DOCUMENTATION

Using the data collected in the tracking tool, tally the number of products that comply with Option 1
requirements. Collect all ingredient disclosure reports for contributing products for credit documentation.
·· Documentation availability varies by reporting program.
·· Retain product data for all materials that contribute to credit achievement and be prepared to provide
the information on request.
·· The best source of documentation is the manufacturer or the organization that manages the reporting
program. Reports are typically available online, but in some cases it might be necessary to contact a
company representative.
·· Documentation may also be available from third-party websites that collect the information of many
companies.

Option 2. Material Ingredient Optimization

STEP 1. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Specify products meeting one or more of the criteria listed in the credit requirements. Note that this
option evaluates complete products; therefore, the criteria for assemblies found in other MR credits do
not apply to this option.
544

STEP 2. TRACK PURCHASES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction submittals to ensure selected products meet
credit requirements. To review progress toward credit achievement, regularly enter information into the
MR building product disclosure and optimization calculator provided by USGBC or an equivalent custom
tool.
·· Continually track substitutions and change orders to ensure that replacement products meet the
credit requirements. Any product substitutions should be carefully reviewed by the design team and
contractor for compliance.
·· Because these requirements are not typical for all construction teams and suppliers, conduct a
LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and stress their
importance.
·· Check in periodically with team members (particularly owners, architects, interior designers,
contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers) to verify progress toward credit achievement and address
any gaps in credit compliance.

STEP 3. CALCULATE PRODUCT AND MATERIAL COSTS AND COMPILE DOCUMENTATION

Using Equation 1, determine the total value of compliant products (see Further Explanation, Calculations).
This option calculates compliance based on product cost.
Collect relevant documentation:
·· For regional and local claims, provide a representative sample of documentation.
·· For certification programs, provide documentation for all products.

FURTHER EXPLANATION
MR

CALCULATIONS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Use the following equation for Option 2 Material Ingredient Optimization (see Further Explanation, Material
Ingredient Optimization).

EQUATION 1. Percentage of compliant materials’ cost

{ ( )( ) { ( )( )
product 1
cost
criterion
valuation
factor
location
valuation
{ + product 2
cost
criterion
valuation
factor
location
valuation
{ + ...
% of materials factor factor
cost =
× 100

Cost of all permanently installed products

where:

Product cost = price charged to the project owner for the product. Each product can be counted only once, even if it
meets the requirements of multiple programs.

Program valuation factor = multiplier assigned to each compliance program:

·· GreenScreen version 1.2 benchmark. Products that have fully inventoried chemical ingredients to 100 ppm:
°° All ingredients screened using GreenScreen List Translator and no ingredients with Benchmark 1 hazards,
100% value (by cost)
 545

°° All ingredients fully assessed by full GreenScreen method and no ingredients with Benchmark 1 hazards,
150% value (by cost)
·· Cradle to Cradle Certified version 2.1.1:
°° Gold, 100% value (by cost)
°° Platinum, 150% value (by cost)
·· Cradle to Cradle Certified version 3.0:
°° Silver, 100% value (by cost)
°° Gold or Platinum, 150% value (by cost)
·· REACH Optimization. This is an alternative compliance path for projects outside the U.S. If the product
contains no ingredients listed on the REACH authorization or candidate list, value it at 100% of cost.

Location valuation factor = multiplier for the extraction, manufacture, and purchase location (see MR Overview,
Location Valuation Factor).

MATERIAL INGREDIENT REPORTING

Under Option 1, products can be documented as compliant and thus contribute to credit achievement in any of three
ways (Table 1).

TABLE 1. Manufacturers’ documentation for compliant products

Program What has to be reported? To whom? Based on what framework?

All ingredients at or above 0.1%;

GreenScreen (GS) v1.2
Report hazards associated with
or higher (either GS
Manufacturer’s inventory LT-1, LT-P1 (GS List Translator) or Public
List Translator or full
Benchmark 1 (full GreenScreen)
GreenScreen)
scores

MR
All ingredients down to 0.1% and
full disclosure of health hazards HPD authoritative lists
Health Product Declaration from ingredients; some ingredients Public (closely match GreenScreen
can remain unnamed but health List Translator)

BPDO—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS
hazards must still be reported

Independent, accredited
assessors (some Version 2.1.1: C2C proprietary
data protected under screening
nondisclosure agreement
All ingredients down to 0.01%, with
Cradle to Cradle between the assessor Version 3.0: Material Health
some banned substances
and suppliers); data not Assessment Methodology
disclosed under NDA (includes hazard screening
may be made public at and risk assessment)
manufacturer’s discretion

Manufacturer’s Inventory
Manufacturers may publicly disclose all ingredients by name and Chemical Abstract Service (CAS) registry number.
No third-party verification is required for this option, but the information must be publicly available; direct
disclosure to the designer or contractor is not acceptable.
If a specific ingredient cannot be disclosed for proprietary reasons, the manufacturer may withhold the name and
CAS registry number but still provide the following information:
·· Role or function in the product
·· Amount, as a percentage of total product content or ppm
·· GreenScreen LT score (GS List Translator) or GS Benchmark score (full GS). Report hazard levels and
hazard endpoints that result in scoring the ingredient as LT-1 or LT-P1 using GS List Translator (e.g. High for
Carcinogenicity) or hazard levels and hazard endpoints that result in scoring the ingredient as Benchmark 1
using full GreenScreen. It is not necessary to report hazards associated with higher Benchmark levels or LT-
UNK (Unknown) using GS List Translator.
All ingredients that constitute 0.1% (1,000 ppm) or more of the product must be accounted for. This threshold is
10 times lower than the typical 1% minimum threshold for reporting on a material safety data sheet (MSDS).
546

Health Product Declaration version 1.0

Disclosure is done through Health Product Declaration (HPD), which is an open standard for reporting product
ingredients and their associated health hazards. Manufacturers that use HPDs must provide the nonproprietary
information listed above (role or function, amount, and health hazards) for every ingredient, not just those whose
names have been withheld. The manufacturer affirms “Full disclosure of known hazards” on the front summary
page and further affirms the level of disclosure with the check box under “Residuals disclosure.” For the material
to comply with the credit requirements, the HPD standards for the 1,000-ppm level must be attained and the
appropriate box on the summary page checked.
An HPD is several pages long, with a one-page summary listing company information, metadata about the
report, and ingredients, and continuing on subsequent pages with more detail about individual ingredients and their
associated health hazards, plus details on any certifications and associated materials. GreenScreen Benchmarks, if
any, are listed for each ingredient in HPDs, in the contents section. A report from a certified GreenScreen profiler
may also be used to document the GreenScreen benchmarks for a product’s ingredients.
Manufacturers that use the standard HPD format reduce uncertainty about whether the information that they
have provided meets the credit requirements, and they create a report that should be useful in other settings as well.

Cradle to Cradle Certified, version 2.1.1 and version 3.0

Project teams may also select Cradle to Cradle Certified (C2C) products. C2C requires that ingredients be disclosed
to an independent, accredited C2C assessor. The percent of the product defined and assessed impacts the level
of certification. Products certified under v2.1.1, have had at least 95% by weight of their materials assessed at any
level and 100% of their materials assessed at the Gold and Platinum levels. Products certified under v3.0, have
had at least 75% or 95% by weight of their materials assessed at the Bronze and Silver levels respectively, and 100%
of their materials at the Gold and Platinum levels. Eligible products will have their scorecard available in the C2C
product registry. The product scorecard shows the level of achievement for all five standard attributes, the overall
certification level for the product (Basic, Bronze, Silver, Gold, or Platinum), the certificate expiration date, and the
version of the standard that the product is certified against. For each certified product the registry includes an image
MR

of the product, the product description and certification level, and the expiration date of the current certification.
Product certification claims from manufacturers’ websites should always be verified against this registry because
they may be out-of-date (see Further Explanation, Example, Cradle to Cradle (C2C) certification). During the material
health assessment, assessors review the scientific literature available for all chemical ingredients contained in a
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

material above 100 ppm, use structure activity relationship models and chemical analog data to fill data gaps, and
compare the collected information against the C2C hazard criteria. Through this process, the environmental and
human health hazards of the chemical ingredients are classified using a green–yellow–red rating system. In a second
step, assessors evaluate whether exposure to any of the identified or suspected hazardous chemicals are plausible
in the context of the materials containing these chemicals and the product use and end of life scenarios. If avenues
for exposure to these chemicals in a material exist, the material will receive an overall risk assessment rating of
‘x’. Gold and Platinum certified products do not contain any x-assessed materials. Products certified at the Silver
level under v3.0 do not contain materials that have been x-assessed due to the presence of a carcinogen, mutagen,
or reproductive toxicant (CMR). Products certified at any level under v3.0 do not contain banned list chemicals.
Chemicals on the v3.0 banned lists include PVC and related compounds, certain flame retardants, PFOS and PFOA,
certain phthalates, halogenated hydrocarbons and toxic heavy metals. C2C certification addresses a total of five
product attributes and ingredient screening is just one part of the program.

Other USGBC-approved programs

As the industry evolves, additional programs and protocols for reporting on material ingredients are likely to emerge.
USGBC will determine whether any new programs are acceptable and issue rating system addenda to include them
as additional approaches to earning the credit.

MATERIAL INGREDIENT OPTIMIZATION

Under Option 2, GreenScreen (a program of Clean Production Action), Cradle to Cradle Certified, and the European
Union’s REACH program (for projects outside the U.S.) can be used as frameworks for documenting the substitution
of potentially problematic substances.
 547

Option 2 goes beyond Option 1’s reporting requirement and encourages the use of products that are made
without problematic ingredients. It offers these four approaches:
·· No GreenScreen Benchmark 1 materials (see the following section)
·· Cradle to Cradle certified gold or platinum certification (see above, under Material Ingredient Reporting)
·· REACH (see Further Explanation, International Tips)
·· Other programs that may be approved by USGBC in the future

GreenScreen Benchmark 1
The GreenScreen hazard assessment method evaluates individual chemicals. GreenScreen version 1.2 is based on a
toxicological assessment that starts with a collection of authoritative lists of “chemicals of concern” published by
governmental and nongovernmental organizations (GreenScreen List Translator). These substances are known to
be associated with certain health problems. The assessment then proceeds to reviews of the scientific literature, use
of structure activity relationship models and chemical analog data to fill data gaps (Full GreenScreen). Chemicals are
assigned to one of four main categories: those of highest concern, as indicated in the authoritative lists, are assigned
Benchmark 1. Chemicals that are not on the major authoritative lists and pass a toxicological review based on Clean
Production Action’s protocols can be assigned benchmarks that indicate lower levels of concern; Benchmark 4 is the
lowest level of concern. A full GreenScreen assessment overrides the results of screening using the GreenScreen List
Translator only.
The GreenScreen List Translator has been automated by two software providers. It can be accessed through
the Chemical and Material Library found in Healthy Building Network’s Pharos Tool and in the GS List Translator
module in the GreenWERCS software tool by The Wercs. The Interstate Chemicals Clearinghouse has created a
website where GreenScreen assessments can be posted by various participating State governments and shared with
no costs or restrictions.
Option 1 of this credit requires only the GreenScreen List Translator review of ingredients to ensure that none
of the ingredients are on the authoritative lists and thus flagged as Benchmark 1 substances. Project teams should
look for documentation from manufacturers that either identifies all ingredients in the product or identifies and

MR
characterizes any benchmark hazards.
Option 2 requires the Full GreenScreen toxicological assessment to ensure that none of the ingredients are
Benchmark 1. Project teams should look for documentation from manufacturers that shows each ingredient in the

BPDO—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS
product has been subject to a full GreenScreen assessment by a licensed GreenScreen Profiler and that the product
contains only Benchmark 2 and higher ingredients.

For Manufacturers and Suppliers

GreenScreen’s List Translator assigns hazard classifications based on the various governmental and authoritative
hazard lists including lists of chemicals classified using the Globally Harmonized System of Classification and
Labeling. The GreenScreen List Translator can be used to identify chemicals that achieve or may achieve the
Benchmark 1 level of concern. Under Option 1, manufacturers that keep certain ingredients proprietary must
characterize any health hazards from those ingredients, as indicated by the List Translator or a full GreenScreen
assessment.
Under Option 2, the manufacturer must warrant that no ingredients in the product at levels of 0.01% or more
(100 ppm) are designated as Benchmark 1 chemicals based on the referenced lists defined by the List Translator.
These products achieve compliance at the first level of the option.
The second level of compliance requires that all ingredients be Benchmark 2 or higher. There is no definitive
List Translator for Benchmark 2, so manufacturers must engage an independent third party to screen all their
ingredients, using the screening protocol defined by GreenScreen, and certify that none of them are Benchmark 1.
548

EXAMPLES

Figure 1. Cradle to Cradle (C2C) certification

MR

Example GreenScreen List Translator Result

The GreenScreen List Translator, version 1.2, identifies each list that GreenScreen references, including its source,
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

which hazards in the GreenScreen it covers, whether it is “authoritative” or “screening,” and which GreenScreen
hazard level and subsequent Benchmark score applies, along with other data.

TABLE 2. GreenScreen List Translator Result. Used with permission from Clean Production Action

Display
A Hazard III hazard Benchmark
ID List List category GreenScreen hazard List type
or B range box (see score
notes)

Group 2A:
Agent is
154 IARC probably Carcinogenicity Authoritative A H H 1
carcinogenic to
humans

Carcinogenic
158 MAK Carcinogenicity Authoritative A H H 1
Group 1

Carcinogenic
159 MAK Carcinogenicity Authoritative A H H 1
Group 2

Occupational
174 NIOSH-C Carcinogenicity Authoritative A H H 1
Cancer

Clear Evidence
of Adverse
NTP- Developmental
175 Effects - Authoritative A H H 1
OHAaT Toxicity
Developmental
Toxicity
 549

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Alternative Compliance Path for International Projects: Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of
Chemicals (REACH)
The European Union’s REACH legislation requires all chemicals sold in quantity in the EU to be registered in a
central database and prioritized for evaluation and possible avoidance based on their hazard profile. The program
maintains several lists of “Substances of Very High Concern.”
Products can contribute to Option 2 under this credit if they come with clear documentation from the supplier
that they do not contain any substances on the “Authorization List” (chemicals that can only be used with special
authorization) nor on the “Candidate List” (chemicals being considered for the Authorization List). Because these
lists can change over time, the supplier documentation must be dated; if a substance in the product was added to
one of these lists after that documentation was produced and after the project’s registration date, the product is still
considered compliant. Projects in the U.S. may not use this alternative compliance path.
·· Authorization List: echa.europa.eu/web/guest/addressing-chemicals-of-concern/authorisation/
recommendation-for-inclusion-in-the-authorisation-list/authorisation-list
·· Candidate List: echa.europa.eu/web/guest/candidate-list-table

REACH also provides for a “Restriction List” of chemicals that are to be banned from production and use, but as of
August 2013 no substances had made it onto that list. Any substances that are moved from the Authorization List
and Candidate List to the Restriction List continue to be treated as substances to be avoided in Option 2-compliant
products.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach

MR
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

BPDO—MATERIAL INGREDIENTS
REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

MR building product disclosure and optimization X X

calculator or equivalent tracking tool

Documentation of chemical inventory through X

Health Product Declaration, Cradle to Cradle
certification labels, manufacturers’ lists of
ingredients with GreenScreen assessment reports
for confidential ingredients, or USGBC-approved
programs (if applicable)

Verification of ingredient optimization through X

Cradle to Cradle certification labels, manufacturers’
lists of ingredients with GreenScreen Benchmark or
LT scores listed for all ingredients, or manufacturers’
declaration (for REACH), or USGBC-approved
programs (if applicable)

Documentation of supply chain optimization X

550

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Building Life-Cycle Impact Reduction. This credit requires more detailed ingredient information than
is typically used in a building life-cycle assessment study.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product Declarations. This

credit is structured similarly to the related credit, but because it requires more detailed ingredient information than
typically used for an environmental product declaration, it reveals different information about the products.

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials. This credit is
structured similarly to the related credit and uses the same calculation methodology.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

This is a new credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Chemical Abstracts Service: cas.org/

Health Product Declaration: hpdcollaborative.org/

Cradle-to-Cradle CertifiedCM Product Standard: c2ccertified.org/product_certification

Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH): echa.europa.eu/support/

MR

guidance-on-reach-and-clp-implementation

GreenScreen: cleanproduction.org/Greenscreen.v1-2.php
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Purchase at least 40 permanently installed building products that meet the credit criteria.

Option 2. Purchase at least 50%, by cost, of permanently installed building products that meet the credit criteria.

DEFINITIONS
product (permanently installed building product) an item that arrives on the project site either as a finished
element ready for installation or as a component to another item assembled on-site. The product unit is defined
by the functional requirement for use in the project; this includes the physical components and services needed to
serve the intended function of the permanently installed building product. In addition, similar products within a
specification can each contribute as separate products.
 551

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

PBT Source
Reduction—Mercury
This credit applies to: Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To reduce the release of persistent, bioaccumulative, and toxic (PBTs)

chemicals associated with the life cycle of building materials.

MR
REQUIREMENTS

PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY

Specify and install fluorescent lamps with both low mercury content (MR Prerequisite PBT Source Reduction—
Mercury) and long lamp life, as listed in Table 1.
552

TABLE 1. Criteria for rated life of low-mercury lamps

Lamp Maximum content Lamp life (hrs)

Standard output - 24,000 rated hours on instant start ballasts (3-hour

T-8 fluorescent, eight- starts)
10 mg mercury
foot High output – 18,000 rated hours on instant start ballasts or program
start ballasts (3-hour starts)

Both standard and high output - 30,000 rated hours on instant start
T-8 fluorescent, four-foot 3.5 mg mercury ballasts, or 36,000 rated hours on program start ballasts (3 hour
starts)

T-8 fluorescent, two-foot 24,000 rated hours on instant start ballasts or program start ballasts
3.5 mg mercury
and three-foot (3-hour starts)

18,000 rated hours on instant start ballasts, or 24,000 rated hours on

T-8 fluorescent, U-bent 6 mg mercury
program start ballasts (3-hour starts)

Both standard and high-output - 25,000 rated hours on program start

T-5 fluorescent, linear 2.5 mg mercury
ballasts

Compact fluorescent,
3.5 mg mercury 12,000 rated hours
nonintegral ballast

Compact florescent, 3.5 mg mercury, ENERGY STAR Bare bulb - 10,000 rated hours
integral ballast, bare bulb qualified Covered models such as globes, reflectors, A-19s – 8,000 hours

High-pressure sodium, up
10 mg mercury Use noncycling type or replace with LED lamps or induction lamps
to 400 watts

High-pressure sodium,
32 mg mercury Use noncycling type or replace with LED lamps or induction lamps
above 400 watts

Do not specify or install circular fluorescent lamps or probe start metal halide lamps.
MR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 553

BEHIND THE INTENT

Lamps that contain mercury, a persistent bioaccumulative toxin, represent the majority of mercury-containing
devices in modern health care facilities. Longer lamp life contributes to lower mercury use because replacement is
less frequent, which lowers hazardous waste disposal costs. Less frequent replacement also decreases the likelihood
of spills, which could expose staff and patients to contamination and entail costly remediation procedures. By
focusing on installing long-lasting mercury fluorescent lamps, this credit expands on the requirements of the
corresponding prerequisite for mercury reduction.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. SPECIFY COMPLIANT LAMPS

For projects that meet the prerequisite by using a phase-out plan, lamp life requirements in this credit
must be met for both existing and new mercury-containing lamps. See Further Explanation, Lamp
Exclusions, for a list of lamps that may be excluded from this credit.
Incorporate low-mercury lamp requirements into the project specifications:
·· Specify lamps that meet the credit criteria for increased lamp life.
·· Specify linear and U-bend fluorescent lamps meeting the rated hours and ballast type criteria.
·· Do not specify circular fluorescent lamps. These lamps are prohibited because of the high rate of
breakage and associated risk of exposure for staff and patients to contamination.
·· Use pulse-start instead of probe-start metal halide lamps. The latter are prohibited because of their
relatively short lamp life.
·· Consider installing high-efficiency, nonmercury lamps such as LEDs to replace high-pressure sodium

MR
(HPS) lamps to further reduce mercury in buildings. Alternatively, avoid cycling HPS ballasts.

STEP 2. CREATE LIGHTING SCHEDULE AND TRACK PRODUCTS THROUGHOUT

CONSTRUCTION

PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY

Track specified and purchased lamps during construction with a material checklist or tracking form.
·· Prepare a lighting schedule that specifies the mercury-containing lamp type (fluorescent, compact
fluorescent, high-pressure sodium, metal halide, etc.), ballast type, rated hours, and mercury content.
·· Review manufacturers’ documentation before installation to ensure that only qualifying lamps are
used.
·· See MR Prerequisite PBT Source Reduction—Mercury for sample documentation schedules and lamp
manufacturers’ documentation

FURTHER EXPLANATION

LAMP EXCLUSIONS
·· Operating rooms, dental treatment rooms, dental labs, and other spaces in medical military facilities may
require lamps with very high CRI and color temperature to comply with UFC 4-501-01. If the credit criteria and
UFC 4-501-01 conflict, affected lamps may be excluded from the credit.
·· If the credit criteria and local code or regulations conflict, affected lamps may be excluded from the
prerequisite. Retain a copy of the local code that conflicts with the criteria.
554

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Projects that are on existing campuses or part of large
health care systems can coordinate lamp selection with purchasing protocols to ensure ongoing compliance with
prerequisite requirements.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All projects

Lighting schedule (including lamp life hours) X

Narrative explaining lamps excluded from credit X

USGBC’s MR PBT source reduction calculator (or equivalent documentation) X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR

MR Prerequisite PBT Source Reduction—Mercury. Ensure that the mercury-containing lamps meet the mercury
content criteria for the tracking tool includes the information required in this prerequisite as well.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

None.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
elemental mercury mercury in its purest form (rather than a mercury-containing compound), the vapor of which is
commonly used in fluorescent and other bulb types

lamp a device emitting light in a fixture, excluding lamp housing and ballasts. Light-emitting diodes packaged as
traditional lamps also meet this definition.
 555

lamp life the useful span of operation of a source of artificial light, such as bulbs. Lamp life for fluorescent lights is
determined by testing three hours on for every 20 minutes off. For high-density discharge lamps, the test is based
on 11 hours on for every 20 minutes off. Lamp life depends on whether the start ballast is program or instant. This
information is published in manufacturers’ information. Also known as rated average life.

persistent bioaccumulative toxic chemical a substance that poses a long-term risk to both humans and the
environment because it remains in the environment for long periods, increases in concentration as it moves up the
food chain, and can travel far from the source of contamination. Often these substances can become more potent
and harmful to ecosystems the longer they persist. See U.S. EPA’s website on persistent bioaccumulative toxic
chemicals, www.epa.gov/pbt/.

universal waste hazardous items that are easily purchased and commonly used. Examples include batteries,
pesticides, mercury-containing equipment, and light bulbs. See epa.gov/osw/hazard/wastetypes/universal/index.
htm.

MR
PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—MERCURY
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

556
 557

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

PBT Source Reduction—

Lead, Cadmium,
and Copper
This credit applies to: Healthcare (2 points)

INTENT

To reduce the release of persistent, bioaccumulative, and toxic (PBT)

chemicals associated with the life cycle of building materials.

MR
PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—LEAD, CADMIUM, AND COPPER
REQUIREMENTS
Specify substitutes for materials manufactured with lead and cadmium, as follows.

Lead
·· For water intended for human consumption, specify and use solder and flux to connect plumbing pipe on site
that meets the California AB1953 standard, which specifies that solder not contain more than 0.2% lead, and
flux not more than a weighted average of 0.25% lead for wetted surfaces. The “lead free” label as defined by the
Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) does not provide adequate screening for the purposes of this credit because
the SDWA defines “lead free” as solders and flux containing 0.2% lead or less.
·· For water intended for human consumption, specify and use pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and faucets
that meet the California law AB1953 of a weighted average lead content of the wetted surface area of not more
than 0.25% lead.
·· Specify and use lead-free roofing and flashing.
·· Specify and use electrical wire and cable with lead content less than 300 parts per million.
·· Specify no use of interior or exterior paints containing lead.
·· For renovation projects, ensure the removal and appropriate disposal of disconnected wires with lead
stabilizers, consistent with the 2002 National Electric Code requirements.

Lead used for radiation shielding and copper used for MRI shielding are exempt.
558

Cadmium
·· Specify no use of interior or exterior paints containing intentionally added cadmium.

Copper
·· For copper pipe applications, reduce or eliminate joint-related sources of copper corrosion:
°° use mechanically crimped copper joint systems; or
°° specify that all solder joints comply with ASTM B828 2002, and specify and use ASTM B813 2010 for flux.
MR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 559

BEHIND THE INTENT

Both lead and cadmium are persistent bioaccumulative toxins (PBTs).1 PBTs released during the manufacture, use,
or disposal of a product can travel far beyond their source point by wind and water, becoming more harmful the
longer they persist in the food chain and posing risks to ecosystems on a wide scale. PBTs have a wide range of health
effects, including cancer, endocrine disruption, immune system disorders, impaired brain development, and birth
defects.
Copper, another PBT, corrodes when exposed to acidic air or water. Copper pipe corrosion can release high levels
of copper into aquatic ecosystems, not only creating potentially toxic conditions for aquatic life but also affecting
human health as it bioaccumulates and moves up the food chain. The procedures specified in this credit ensure
that copper is not released during soldering or from unsoldered joint systems, thus reducing opportunities for
copper piping to “shed” copper atoms. This credit seeks to secure both human health and environmental benefits by
encouraging project teams to avoid building materials with lead and cadmium and to use construction methods and
materials that protect against lead and copper corrosion.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY LEAD, CADMIUM, AND COPPER PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

Review preliminary project design and material specifications to identify building materials that may
contain any of the substances in the credit requirements. Examples include the following:
·· Roofing and flashing materials (lead)
·· Plumbing pipes, pipe and plumbing fittings, faucets (pipes and fittings) that convey water for human
consumption (lead, lead soldering, lead flux, joints in copper piping)

MR
·· Electrical wire and cable (lead)
·· Paints (lead, cadmium)
·· For renovation projects, disconnected wires (lead stabilizers)

PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—LEAD, CADMIUM, AND COPPER

Certain medical equipment and preexisting PBT-containing building materials in renovation projects may
be excluded (see Further Explanation, Excluded Products and Materials).

STEP 2. IDENTIFY AND SPECIFY LEAD- AND CADMIUM-FREE PRODUCTS

For all applicable building materials and equipment, research alternative PBT-free products and their
suppliers (see Further Explanation, Lead-Free and Cadmium-Free Products).
·· Identify flux, pipe, pipe fittings, and fixtures that comply with the California AB1953 standard by
looking for ANSI-approved third-party certification.
·· Identify lead-free roofing and flashing through manufacturers’ information.
·· Identify electrical wire and cabling with lead content less than 300 parts per million (ppm).
·· Identify lead- and cadmium-free paints using Green Seal certification for metal-free paints or an
equivalent source of lead- and cadmium-free documentation.
Add product specifications for alternative products and performance requirements for corrosion
prevention to relevant Construction Specifications Institute MasterFormat classifications.
·· In some cases, an addition to Division 1 for LEED-specific requirements may be appropriate for
overlapping work sections.
·· Specifications for products and installation practices may be more appropriate in the work results
category, such as Division 22, Plumbing.

STEP 3. DESIGN PLUMBING SYSTEMS TO PREVENT COPPER CORROSION

Improper installation is a common reason for copper corrosion and leaching. Design plumbing systems to
prevent copper from leaching into water (see Further Explanation, Preventing Corrosion Strategies).

1. Lent, Tom, “Green Guide for Health Care: PBT Elimination,” http://www.gghc.org/tools.technical.php (accessed May 29, 2013).
560

·· Follow the ASTM B828 standard for making capillary joints by soldering of copper and copper alloy
tube and fittings for solder joints.
·· Emphasize correct use of ASTM B813 fluxes or use O-ring gaskets and crimping tools for jointing.
·· Minimize flow direction and piping size changes.
·· Minimize hot water temperature and velocity.
·· Use compatible materials (e.g., copper straps for copper pipes) to reduce galvanic corrosion and
similar problems.

STEP 4. EDUCATE CONTRACTORS

Provide education and training to contractors and subcontractors on PBT source reduction goals,
common problem areas, and targeted strategies. Some best practices include the following:
·· Provide a PBT source reduction plan to contractors, for them to distribute to subcontractors and field
personnel.
·· If possible, specify applicable plan components in contracts.
·· For renovation projects, ensure that removal of disconnected wires with lead stabilizers is in
compliance with 2002 U.S. National Electric Code requirements or a local equivalent.

STEP 5. TRACK PRODUCTS THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION

Track specified and purchased materials during construction with a material checklist or PBT tracking
form. Check the products’ material safety data sheets (MSDS) and manufacturers’ documentation before
installation to ensure that only qualifying materials are used. At a minimum, review the following:
·· Roofing and flashing
·· Electrical wiring and cabling
·· Indoor and outdoor paints
·· Flux and solder
·· Pipes, pipe fittings, and fixtures
The following information about each product or material is recommended for inclusion in a tracking tool:
·· Product type
MR

·· Manufacturer
·· Product name
·· Allowable lead, cadmium, and copper content
·· Actual lead, cadmium, and copper content, with source of data
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Compliance with the lead- and cadmium-free standard

FURTHER EXPLANATION

LEAD-FREE AND CADMIUM-FREE PRODUCTS

Many pipes, faucets, and other plumbing products may be labeled “lead-free” to comply with the U.S. Safe Water
Drinking Act; however, “lead-free,” as defined by EPA, allows for minimal amounts of lead and is not adequate for
compliance with this credit.
Instead, this credit uses California AB1953, part of the California Health and Safety Code (Section 116875),
which sets a standard for the lead content of pipes, pipe fittings, and other products that convey water for human
consumption. It defines the standard using a weighted average of <0.25% for all wetted surfaces; however, consumers
and specifiers need only look for products certified to this standard by an independent ANSI-approved third-party
organization. Currently, NSF International certifies products to this standard under NSF 61, Annex G, Section 9, or
NSF 372.
Solder, flux, pipe, pipe fittings, and fixtures must meet the California AB1953 standard for lead content. Several
states and local municipalities have adopted California AB1953; check product literature carefully for compliance
statements.
Roofing and flashing must not contain any lead.
 561

Lead-free electrical wire and cable for construction applications are not industry standard; most wiring and cable
jacketing currently contains lead but the amount is not disclosed. Therefore, not every contractor may be aware of
lead content information in electrical wire and cable. Project teams are encouraged to ask vendors about wire and
cable that complies with lead-free standards, such as RoHS in the European Union.
Lead- and cadmium-free paints may be identified by industry standards, such as Green Seal. However, because
lead and cadmium are often added as pigment to the base, it may be necessary to ask manufacturers whether both the
base and the pigment are lead and cadmium free.

EXCLUDED PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENTS

Some equipment, such as relay contacts, may have minute amounts of hidden cadmium; these uses are allowed.
For renovations, existing products and materials that are not included in the scope of work may be excluded.
Examples of existing items include solder, flux, pipes, pipe fittings, faucets, roofing, flashing, electrical cable, cable,
paints, and mechanical pipe connections.
For health care facilities, copper used for MRI shielding equipment and lead used for radiation shielding are
exempt from credit requirements, but teams are encouraged to consider alternative shielding materials.

COPPER CORROSION PREVENTION STRATEGIES

Consider implementing strategies from “Preventing Corrosion Protects San Francisco Bay: A Fact Sheet
for Designers” (bacwa.org/Portals/0/Committees/BAPPG/Archive/cu_designers_05_03.pdf) and the Copper
Development Association Inc. resources and tools (copper.org/). Some best practices from these resources include
the following:
·· Use large-diameter piping to keep velocities low—less than 8 feet per second (2.5 meters per second) for cold
lines and less than 4–5 feet per second (1.2–1.5 meters per second) for hot lines.
·· Ensure that return lines in a circulating hot water system have the same diameter as the supply lines.
·· Avoid stagnant sections by minimizing direction and size changes.

MR
·· Prevent electrical currents by grounding directly to a copper rod driven into the ground. Do not attach a
grounding wire to water pipes.
·· Do not allow galvanized nails to touch copper piping.

PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—LEAD, CADMIUM, AND COPPER

·· Avoid induced stresses, provide enough pipe support, and allow for thermal expansion.
·· Carefully ream cut ends to reduce turbulence. Unreamed tubing corrodes and fails at a higher rate.
·· Use stainless-steel piping and components for industrial process water supplies, heat exchangers, chillers, and
condensers when operation temperatures exceed 140 degrees F (60 degrees C).

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
562

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Documentation All projects

Product documentation demonstrating credit criteria have been met (manufacturer’s data or proof of certification) X

Narrative explaining any excluded materials X

Description of pipe jointing processes (for copper pipe only) X

Verification of appropriate disposal of wires and lead stabilizers (for renovation projects only) X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials. Specifying interior and exterior paints that are GreenSeal compliant will
ensure that they are also free of lead and cadmium.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

None.
MR

REFERENCED STANDARDS
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

ASTM B813 for copper flux: astm.org/Standards/B813.htm

ASTM B828, Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
and Fittings: www.astm.org/Standards/B828.htm

California AB1953 standard for lead water pipes used to convey water for human consumption: leginfo.ca.gov/
pub/05-06/bill/asm/ab_1951-2000/ab_1953_bill_20060930_chaptered.html

GreenSeal: greenseal.org

2002 National Electric Code requirements for removal and disposal of disconnected wires with lead
stabilizers: nfpa.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
 563

DEFINITIONS
lead-free a label defined by U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations under the Safe Drinking Water Act
that allows small amounts of lead in solders, flux, pipes, pipe fittings, and well pumps

persistent bioaccumulative toxic chemical a substance that poses a long-term risk to both humans and the
environment because it remains in the environment for long periods, increases in concentration as it moves up the
food chain, and can travel far from the source of contamination. Often these substances can become more potent
and harmful to ecosystems the longer they persist. See U.S. EPA’s website on persistent bioaccumulative toxic
chemicals, www.epa.gov/pbt/.

MR
PBT SOURCE REDUCTION—LEAD, CADMIUM, AND COPPER
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

564
 565

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Furniture and
Medical Furnishings
This credit applies to: Healthcare (1-2 points)

INTENT

To enhance the environmental and human health performance attributes

associated with freestanding furniture and medical furnishings.

MR
REQUIREMENTS

FURNITURE AND MEDICAL FURNISHINGS

Use at least 30% (1 point) or 40% (2 points), by cost, of all freestanding furniture and medical furnishings (e.g.,
mattresses, foams, panel fabrics, cubicle curtains, window coverings, other textiles) that meets the criteria in one of
the following three options.
Include built-in casework and built-in millwork in the base building calculations, even if manufactured off site.
The dollar value of any individual product may be included in the total qualifying value if the product meets the
requirements.

OPTION 1. MINIMAL CHEMICAL CONTENT

All components that constitute at least 5%, by weight, of a furniture or medical furnishing assembly, including
textiles, finishes, and dyes, must contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of at least four of the five following
chemical groups:
·· urea formaldehyde;
·· heavy metals, including mercury, cadmium, lead, and antimony;
·· hexavalent chromium in plated finishes consistent with the European Union Directive on the Restriction of
the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances (EU RoHS);
·· stain and nonstick treatments derived from perfluorinated compounds (PFCs), including perfluorooctanoic
acid (PFOA); and
·· added antimicrobial treatments.
566

AND/OR

OPTION 2. TESTING AND MODELING OF CHEMICAL CONTENT

All components of a furniture or medical furnishing assembly, including textiles, finishes, and dyes, must contain
less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of at least two of the five chemicals or materials listed in Option 1.
New furniture or medical furnishing assemblies must be in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method
M7.1–2011. Comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2010 Furniture Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1 and 7.6.2, using
either the concentration modeling approach or the emissions factor approach. Model the test results using the open
plan, private office, or seating scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1, as appropriate. USGBC-approved equivalent testing
methodologies and contaminant thresholds are also acceptable. Documentation submitted for furniture must
indicate the modeling scenarioused to determine compliance.
Salvaged and reused furniture more than one year old at the time of use is considered compliant, provided it
meets the requirements for any site-applied paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants.

AND/OR

OPTION 3. MULTI-ATTRIBUTE ASSESSMENT OF PRODUCTS

Use products that meet at least one of the criteria below. Each product can receive credit for each criterion met. The
scope of any environmental product declaration (EPD) must be at least cradle to gate.
·· Product-specific declaration.
°° Products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that
have at least a cradle to gate scope are valued as one quarter (1/4) of a product for the purposes of credit
achievement calculation.
·· Environmental Product Declarations which conform to ISO 14025, 14040, 14044, and EN 15804 or ISO 21930
and have at least a cradle to gate scope.
°° Industry-wide (generic) EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external
MR

verification, in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as a participant by the program operator are
valued as one half (1/2) of a product for purposes of credit achievement calculation.
°° Product-specific Type III EPD -- Products with third-party certification (Type III), including external
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

verification in which the manufacturer is explicitly recognized as the participant by the program operator
are valued as one whole product for purposes of credit achievement calculation.
·· Materials reuse. Use salvaged, refurbished, or reused products.
·· Recycled content. Use products with recycled content. Recycled content is the sum of post-consumer
recycled content plus one-half the pre-consumer recycled content.
·· Extended producer responsibility. Products purchased from a manufacturer (producer) that participates in
an extended producer responsibility program or is directly responsible for extended producer responsibility.
·· Bio-based materials. Bio-based products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Sustainable
Agriculture Standard. Bio-based raw materials must be tested using ASTM Test Method D6866 and be legally
harvested, as defined by the exporting and receiving country. Exclude hide products, such as leather and other
animal skin material.
·· Wood products. Wood products must be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council or USGBC-approved
equivalent.

Products that meet the above criteria are valued according to source location (extraction, manufacture, and
purchase point must be within the distances noted below):
For credit achievement calculation, products sourced (extracted, manufactured, purchased) within 100 miles
(160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their base contributing cost.
 567

BEHIND THE INTENT

Sustainably sourced furniture and furnishings can improve indoor environmental quality, protect long-term public
health, and reduce a health care facility’s ecological footprint.
Minimizing emissions from furniture and furnishings reduces the risk of exposure for sensitive patients.
Persistent bioaccumulative toxins (PBTs) can travel far beyond their source point, becoming more harmful
the longer they persist in the food chain. PBTs have a wide range of health effects, including cancer, endocrine
disruption, brain and nervous system damage, birth defects, and impaired childhood development. Avoiding
materials with PBT chemicals, heavy metals, hexavalent chromium, perfluorinated compounds, and other
substances of concern reduces risks to ecosystems and lessens the concentration of these substances in the
population. Antimicrobial treatments may contain nanomaterials, which can cross biological barriers that
protect human organs and tissues. Given uncertainty about the toxic effects and environmental infiltration of
nanomaterials, a precautionary approach regarding their use is appropriate.1
This credit encourages project teams to select furniture and furnishings without substances that harm indoor air
quality and human health. Additionally, it supports the use of products with environmentally responsible attributes
and products from manufacturers that have taken steps to document and disclose quantified environmental product
data in accordance with international standards.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS

Identify all free-standing furniture and medical furnishings that could contribute to credit achievement.
·· Examples of items that are eligible under all three options include office and lounge furniture, surgical

MR
tables, procedure and supply carts, mobile technology carts, lifting and transfer aids, supply closet
carts and shelving, and overbed tables (see MR Overview, Qualifying Products and Exclusions).
·· Exclude base building elements, such as cabinets and casework; they are covered under the MR
building product disclosure and optimization credits. (Conversely, furniture and medical furnishings are

FURNITURE AND MEDICAL FURNISHINGS

not eligible under building product disclosure and optimization.)

STEP 2. SPECIFY AND SELECT COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

Include performance requirements or sole-source compliant products in project specifications.
·· Many products may contribute to multiple options. Early product research can help the project team
find these opportunities and maximize the credit contribution of high-cost items.
·· Added microbial treatments are typical for mattresses and textiles. Identifying products that meet
performance requirements and sustainable requirements may involve additional research.
·· Urea formaldehyde typically appears in adhesives and pressed-wood products. These are found in
furniture with veneer finishes or composite wood cores. Alternatives are available.
·· Hexavalent chromium is used in chrome-plated products to protect against wear and tear. One
standard is the European Union’s Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHs), which limits
the concentration of hexavalent chromium allowed in plating.
·· Because credit compliance is based on percentage of total cost, it may be helpful to develop the
furniture and furnishing budget early to ensure that the value of compliant products specified is
sufficient to achieve the targeted point threshold.

STEP 3. TRACK FURNITURE AND MEDICAL FURNISHING PURCHASES

For each product expected to contribute to credit achievement, collect manufacturer’s documentation
that includes each product’s environmental characteristics (e.g., hazardous chemical content, emissions,
and recycled content). Collect cost information for all furniture and medical furnishings purchased for the
project.

1. Green Guide for Health Care Technical briefs; Tom Lent, Low Emitting Materials, Tom Lent, PBT Elimination form building Materials, and Lorissa MacAllister,
Furniture and Medical Furnishings. http://www.gghc.org/tools.technical.php (accessed August 14, 2013).
568

·· Consider giving the contractor and vendors a tracking tool to record furniture and furnishing
purchases. Table 1 shows a sample tracking tool that can be used to collect information and calculate
credit compliance.
·· Examples of acceptable documentation from manufacturers include product data sheets,
manufacturers’ letters, and test reports.
·· Components that make up less than 5% of the product by weight do not need to be included in the
calculations.
·· If the actual cost to purchase a salvaged or reused item is not known, use its replacement value in
the credit calculation: obtain pricing for a comparable item in the local market, excluding labor and
shipping.
·· If a vendor discount would typically be given to the product when purchased new, the replacement
value should be the discounted price, not the list price.
·· If the actual cost of the salvaged or reused item is greater than the replacement value, use the higher
value (actual cost) of the new, equivalent item.

TABLE 1. Sample Tracking tool

Total furniture material cost

$200,000
(excluding labor):

Total sustainably sourced furniture and medical furnishings

$110,000
(Option 1 + Option 2 + Option 3):

Percentage sustainably sourced furniture and medical furnishings: 55%

Total points (30%: 1 point; 40%: 2 points): 2

Product information
MR

Manufacturer or Material Total value as

Description of product # Purchased
vendor name cost per item purchased ($)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Workstation Chairs Sit-EZ Distributors $200.000 100 $20,000

Waiting Room Chairs Sit-EZ Distributors $150.00 25 $3,750

Modular Workstations NU Modular, Inc $1,000.00 100 $1000,000

Chemical groups (Option 1 = 4 minimum, Option 2 = 2 minimum) Option 2

plated finishes (per RoHS)

Product meets or exceeds

parts per million (ppm) of

parts per million (ppm) of

of heavy metals including
urea-formaldehyde resin?

mercury, cadmium, lead,

hexavalent chromium in
parts per million (ppm)

parts per million (ppm)

parts per million (ppm)

Perfluorooctanoic Acid

of added antimicrobial
Contains less than 100

Contains less than 100

Contains less than 100

Contains less than 100

Contains less than 100

CDPH/EHLB Standard
of stain and non-stick

IAQ requirements of
from Perfluorinated
treatments derived

Compliant Groups
(PFCs), including

Total # Chemical
Compounds

treatments?

Method 1.1?
antimony?

(PFOA)?

Yes Yes Yes Yes No 4 No

Yes Yes Yes No No 3 Yes

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 0 No

 569

Option 1 and 2 Option

Option 3
totals 3 Total

Total Sustainable Criteria Value with location

Total product value of products compliant

Total product value of products compliant

Product Specific Declaration (LCA) *.25

% Pre-Consumer Recycled Content * .5

% Post-Consumer Recycled Content

Base contributing cost of products

Extended Producer Responsibility

Industry Wide (generic) EPD * .5

Product Specific Type III EPD *1

% Locally Sourced

valuation factor
Materials Reuse
with option 2
with option 1

$20,000 0% 0% 10% Yes No No Yes $42,000 0% $42,000

$3,750 0% 10% 5% No Yes No No $2,250 0% $2,250

$0 30% 0% No No Yes No $40,000 5% $42,000

Sub-total Option 3: $0 $15,188 $2,188 $20,000 $3,750 $50,000 $200 $84,250 $86,250

STEP 4. CALCULATE SUSTAINABLE CRITERIA VALUE OF ALL COMPLIANT PRODUCTS

MR
Using the data collected in the tracking tool, calculate the percentage of materials, by cost, that complies
with the requirements for each option.
·· For Options 1 and 2, the total value of each product that meets the criteria is included in the qualifying
value for the credit.

FURNITURE AND MEDICAL FURNISHINGS

·· For Options 1 and 2, each component that makes up at least 5% of the product’s weight must meet
the requirement for chemical avoidance to qualify as sustainably sourced. Exclude components that
constitute less than 5% (see Further Explanation, Examples). Additionally, for Option 2, products must
also meet emissions requirements for the entire assembly.
·· For Option 3, modify actual product costs as indicated in the credit requirements. This includes
multipliers for certain options and calculating the compliant value for assemblies.
°° For product declaration guidance, see MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—
Environmental Product Declarations, Option 1 Environmental Product Declaration.
°° For guidance regarding materials reuse, recycled content, biobased content, certified wood, and
extended producer responsibility, see MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—
Sourcing of Raw Materials, Option 2 Leadership Extraction Practices.
·· For products that meet criteria for more than one option, the total value can be counted for each
option for which the product is fully compliant (see Further Explanation, Examples).

STEP 5. DETERMINE CREDIT ACHIEVEMENT

EQUATION 1. Percentage of sustainably sourced furniture and furnishings

Total % =
{ (Option 1 compliant value

Product cost = cost of the product contributing toward credit. For assemblies, the cost amount
+ Option 2 compliant value

Total furniture and medical furnishing cost

+ Option 3 compliant value)

} × 100
570

contributing toward credit is based on weight (see MR Overview, Determining Product Cost).
Criterion valuation factor = multiplier assigned to each sourcing criterion:
·· Products with product specific declarations, value .25, by cost
·· Products with industry wide (generic) EPD, value .5, by cost
·· Products with product specific Type III EPD, value 1.0, by cost
·· Materials reuse, value 1.0, by cost
·· Postconsumer recycled materials, value 1.0, by cost
·· Preconsumer recycled materials, value 0.5, by cost
·· Extended producer responsibility is valued at 50%; that is, the valuation factor is 0.5. Products that are
part of an extended producer responsibility program may be counted in their entirety even if only part
of the product is recycled.
·· Biobased nonwood products meeting Sustainable Agriculture Standard, 1.0 value
·· New wood products certified to FSC standards, value 1.0, by cost
Location valuation factor = multiplier for the extraction, manufacture, and purchase location (see MR
Overview, Location Valuation Factor).

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculation in Step-by-Step Guidance.
MR

BUILDING PRODUCT DISCLOSURE AND OPTIMIZATION CREDITS REFERENCES

For information about EPDs and documentation of product-specific declarations, see MR Credit Building Product
Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product Declarations, Further Explanation.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For information about documentation for wood and biobased products, FSC chain of custody, recycled content
definition and assemble determination, and extended producer responsibility, see MR Credit Building Product
Disclosure and Optimization—Sourcing of Raw Materials, Further Explanation.

EXAMPLES
Evaluating Chemical Content
A nurses station chair consists of treated fabric, plastic components, fastening hardware (bolts and screws), steel
post, metal base, and wheels. All components that constitute at least 5% of the product’s total weight must comply
with the chemical content limits for Option 1 or Option 2. Because it represents only 2% of the chair’s weight, the
fastening hardware does not need to comply.

Products That Comply with More Than One Option

A nurses station task chair has a materials cost of $500. According to the product data sheet, all components that
constitute at least 5% of the chair, by weight, contain less than 100 ppm each of urea formaldehyde, mercury, lead,
and hexavalent chromium. Therefore, the chair complies with Option 1.
Additionally, the manufacturer’s documentation indicates that the chair has been tested and complies with the
appropriate ANSI/BIFMA testing methodology, and thus it meets Option 2 requirements.
Because the chair meets the criteria for both options, its full cost, $500, can be applied twice, for a total
sustainability value of $1,000.
 571

Treated fabric 5% (does not have PFC derived

stain and non-stick treatment or added microbial
treatment)

Fastening hardware 2% Plastic components 30% (do not

(>5% of weight and contain urea formaldehyde nor added
excluded from calculation) antimicrobial treatments)

MR
FURNITURE AND MEDICAL FURNISHINGS
Metal base 20% Steel post 8% Wheels 4% (>5%
(component does not (component does not of weight and excluded
contain heavy metals and contain heavy metals and from credit)
is not plated with is not plated with
hexavalent chromium) hexavalent chromium)

Percentage (%) denotes assembly components by weight

Figure 1. Example of product assembly’s contribution to multiple sustainable criteria

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR9

MRc Furniture and Medical Furnishings Option 1: mini
mal chemical content (Healthcare Only
572

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

MR furniture and medical furnishings calculator provided by USGBC X X X

Documentation of product claims for credit criteria X X X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product Declarations, Sourcing
of Raw Materials, and Material Ingredients. Built-in casework is considered permanently installed and is included
in the total cost calculations for materials in the three Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits. It
is therefore not included in the calculations for this credit. Furniture and medical furnishings cannot be counted
toward any Building Product Disclosure and Optimization credits.
MR

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Air testing protocols for Option 2 have been updated to reflect leadership standards.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Requirements in Option 3 have been modified to reflect changes to related Materials and Resources credits.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances of the European Union Directive (EU RoHS):
eur-lex.europa.eu

American National Standard and The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association
Standard M7.1–2011: ANSI/BIFMA M7.1–2011:bifma.org/standards/standards.html

Furniture Sustainability Standard and level™ Certification Program. American National Standard and
The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association Standard e3–2011 for Furniture
Sustainability: ANSI/BIFMA e3–2011: levelcertified.org

International Standard ISO 14025–2006, Environmental labels and declarations, Type III environmental
declarations, Principles and procedures: iso.org

International Standard ISO 14040–2006, Environmental management, Life cycle assessment principals and
frameworks: iso.org

International Standard ISO 14044–2006, Environmental management, Life cycle assessment Requirements
and guidelines: iso.org
 573

International Standard ISO 21930–2007, Sustainability in building construction, Environmental declaration

of building products: iso.org

International Standards ISO 14021–1999, Environmental Labels and Declarations, Self-Declared

Environmental Claims (Type II Environmental Labeling): iso.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Use at least 50%, by cost, of all freestanding furniture and medical furnishings that meet the credit criteria.

DEFINITIONS
added antimicrobial treatment a substance added to a product (e.g., paint, flooring) to kill or inhibit the growth
of microorganisms. Some products, such as linoleum, exhibit natural antimicrobial properties. Despite current
practice, science has not proven that antimicrobial treatments reduce infection transfer in building finishes more
effectively than standard cleaning procedures. Also known as added microbial agent. See U.S. EPA factsheet,
Consumer Products Treated with Pesticides (www.epa.gov/pesticides factsheets/treatart.htm).

engineered nanomaterial a substance designed at the molecular (nanometer) level. Because of its small size, it
has novel properties generally not seen in its conventional bulk counterpart. See the Australian National Industrial
Chemicals Notification and Assessment Scheme, nicnas.gov.au/publications/information_sheets/general_
information_sheets/nis_nanomaterials_pdf.pdf.

medical furnishing an item of furniture designed for use in health care. Examples include surgical tables; procedure,

MR
supply, and mobile technology carts; lifting and transfer aids; supply closet carts and shelving; and overbed tables.

persistent bioaccumulative toxic chemical a substance that poses a long-term risk to both humans and the
environment because it remains in the environment for long periods, increases in concentration as it moves up the

FURNITURE AND MEDICAL FURNISHINGS

food chain, and can travel far from the source of contamination. Often these substances can become more potent
and harmful to ecosystems the longer they persist. See U.S. EPA’s website on persistent bioaccumulative toxic
chemicals, www.epa.gov/pbt/.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

574
 575

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Design for Flexibility

This credit applies to: Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

Conserve resources associated with the construction and management

of buildings by designing for flexibility and ease of future adaptation
and for the service life of components and assemblies.

MR
REQUIREMENTS
Increase building flexibility and ease of adaptive use over the life of the structure by employing at least three of the

DESIGN FOR FLEXIBILITY

following strategies.
·· Use interstitial space. Design distribution zone utility systems and equipment including HVAC, plumbing,
electrical, information technology, medical gases, and life safety systems to serve the occupied zones and have
the capacity to control multiple zones in clinical spaces.
·· Provide programmed soft space, such as administration or storage, equal to at least 5% of departmental gross
area (DGA). Locate soft space adjacent to clinical departments that anticipate growth. Determine a strategy
for future accommodation of displaced soft space.
·· Provide shell space equal to at least 5% of DGA. Locate it such that it can be occupied without displacing
occupied space.
·· Identify horizontal expansion capacity for diagnostic and treatment or other clinical space equal to at least
30% of existing floor area (excluding inpatient units) without demolition of occupied space (other than at
the connection point). Reconfiguration of additional existing occupied space that has been constructed with
demountable partition systems is permitted.
·· Design for future vertical expansion on at least 75% of the roof, ensuring that existing operations and service
systems can continue at or near capacity during the expansion.
·· Designate space for future above-grade parking structures equal to 50% of existing on-grade parking capacity,
with direct access to the main hospital lobby or circulation. Vertical transportation pathways that lead directly
to the main hospital lobby or circulation are acceptable.
·· Use demountable partitions for 50% of applicable areas.
·· Use movable or modular casework for at least 50% of casework and custom millwork. Base the calculation on
the combined value of casework and millwork, as determined by the cost estimator or contractor.
576

BEHIND THE INTENT

Health care practices and technologies are rapidly evolving, often requiring changes to the physical layout of
health care facilities. In 2010, renovation projects accounted for more than 45% of the total cost of U.S. hospital
construction.1 Because health care facilities are not typically designed to accommodate future changes, the constant
renovations can produce more debris than the initial new construction, increasing waste and environmental
consequences over the life of the building. In addition, constant change can make it difficult to maintain energy
efficiency and cost-effective operation.
Health care facilities intentionally designed for adaptive use are easier to renovate, reducing the resource
inputs and waste generation associated with renovation. Movable wall partitions, for example, reduce the solid
waste generated by demolition of permanent walls while avoiding raw material extraction for new walls. Rooms
that use modular systems and standard design elements can be more easily altered for new technology and space
requirements, extending the life of the building. This credit concentrates on flexibility for the portions of the
building typically subject to change: the space plan (such as department layouts), services (such as HVAC or water),
and movable items (such as furniture). Concentrating such flexible systems in areas subject to frequent renovations
reduces source inputs and waste.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DEVELOP FLEXIBILITY GOALS

Establish goals and metrics for future flexibility to help focus the project team’s efforts on a design that
will work for both current and long-term needs.
·· Obtain early commitment from the owner, architect, medical planner, design engineers, and contractor,
among others, to design the facility for future flexibility.
MR

·· Work with the owner and other members of the project team in the predesign and schematic design
phases to clarify possible scenarios for future renovation and expansion, and discuss how the design
can help accommodate those potential changes.
·· Resist the pressure to establish critical programmatic adjacencies and customize the building to
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

specific program sizes and functional requirements; doing so early in the design phase can preclude
strategies that offer flexibility.
·· Determine which clinical programs are likely to grow, and locate shell or soft space to permit their
expansion without major disruption or reconfiguration.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY AT LEAST THREE STRATEGIES TO MEET CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Determine which design strategies outlined in the credit requirements will best help achieve the project
team’s goals for future flexibility.
·· Some strategies focus on providing flexibility for future expansion; others prioritize changes within the
existing building envelope, such as space planning modifications, mechanical system upgrades, and
technology improvements.
·· If expansion is anticipated, identify the likely size, location, and space types (see Further Explanation,
Designing for Future Expansion).
·· If the project site is constrained and vertical expansion is the only option, plan for additional structural,
mechanical, and egress requirements.
·· If flexibility is needed within the existing building envelope, select strategies like interstitial space, soft
space, and shell space that allow for changes to rooms and building systems (see Further Explanation,
Designing for Future Flexibility within Existing Space).

STEP 3. PRELIMINARY CALCULATIONS

Conduct preliminary calculations to determine whether the strategy thresholds are achievable.
Calculations that will be helpful include the following:
·· Departmental gross area. Add the area of all clinical departments in the building program, starting
from the centerline of walls (see Further Explanation, Determining Departmental Gross Area).

1. Carpenter, David, and Suzanna Hoppszallern, “2010 Hospital Building Report: Proceed with Caution,” HFM Magazine (February 2010):
11–15, http://www.hfmmagazine.com/hfmmagazine/jsp/articledisplay.jsp?dcrpath=HFMMAGAZINE/Article/data/02FEB2010/1002HFM_FEA_
CoverStory&domain=HFMMAGAZINE (accessed May 29, 2013).
 577

·· Expansion area. For both vertical and horizontal exterior walls, determine the potential for areas
eligible as expansion areas—places that allow for future additions without demolition of occupied
space.
·· Existing area (floor and parking). This is the area of the current project (whether a new building or a
major renovation of an existing building), plus parking.
·· Demountable partition area (see Further Explanation, Applicable Areas for Demountable Partitions).

STEP 4. CONFIRM THAT STRATEGIES MEET CREDIT REQUIREMENTS

Review the list of strategies to determine whether the scope of each selected project strategy achieves
the required credit thresholds.
·· Interstitial space. No calculation is required for this strategy; any use of space meeting the definition
of interstitial space meets the requirements of this strategy. Design ample floor-to-floor heights
with raised-floor distribution systems or systems in interstitial space to simplify future modifications.
Install undifferentiated “technology floors” that can accommodate surgery, cardiology, and radiology
programs in equally sized, adaptable modules.

Figure 1. Example of interstitial space between floors.

Exterior wall

Utilities and equipment Technology access

Finished ceiling Utilities and equipment

Floor slab

5'-6"
(1.7 m)
Walk on deck

MR
DESIGN FOR FLEXIBILITY
Floor slab

Interstitial space

·· Soft space. Calculate the percentage of total soft space area; it must be at least 5% of the total
departmental gross area. Soft space is an area of which the function can be easily changed. One
example is administrative offices or conference rooms adjacent to a lab, the specialized equipment and
infrastructure of which are difficult to relocate; if the lab needs to expand, the offices or conference
rooms can be moved. Optimize space by planning multiple uses for individual spaces. Office “hoteling”
(flexible workstations shared by multiple users) and universal sizing (standardized rooms and
workstations) contribute to soft space.
·· Shell space. Calculate the percentage of total shell space area; it must be at least 5% of the total
departmental gross area. Shell space is an area designed to be fitted out for future expansion. It is
enclosed by the building envelope but otherwise left unfinished; it may not be climate controlled or
illuminated, but adding these utilities would not disrupt hospital functions. Future fit-out of shell space
is recommended to meet the same sustainable requirements as the rest of the project. The project
team is encouraged to develop a set of fit-out guidelines for future use.
·· Horizontal expansion. Calculate the percentage of area available for horizontal expansion; it must
be more than 30% of the floor area available at the time of future expansion. Demolition of adjacent
occupied areas is not permitted for horizontal expansion. Horizontal expansion of diagnostic or other
clinical treatment space cannot go through an area occupied for other purposes, such as inpatient
units, mechanical space, and circulation, unless the area has demountable partitions.

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR13

MRc Resource Use - Design for Flexibility
578

·· Vertical expansion. Calculate the roof area and identify a portion that could accommodate vertical
expansion without critically disrupting existing operations and service systems; it must be at least 75%
of the total roof area.
°° Critical disruption typically means HVAC service is disrupted for critical areas or electricity for
the building has to be cut off. It is up to the project team to determine a reasonable threshold for
critical disruption.
°° Vertical expansion may be infeasible if the structure is not designed to accommodate additional
loads. Ensure that the design of the structural elements (e.g., columns, bearing walls, lateral bracing,
shear walls, transfer beams, foundations) can accommodate increased vertical loads, lateral loads,
sliding, and overturning moments.
·· Future parking structure. Calculate the area required to accommodate an additional 50% of existing
on-grade parking in an above-grade parking structure and identify an on-site location for this
expansion, based on the credit requirements. The expanded parking area must lead directly to the
main lobby; the circulation pathway may include vertical systems such as elevators, stairs, or escalators
to direct occupants to the main lobby.
·· Demountable partitions. Calculate the total length, in linear distance, of full-height interior partitions
within and around applicable areas. Ensure that the demountable partitions account for at least 50%
of full-height interior partitions. To incorporate demountable and reconfigurable systems, designs
may include prepackaged systems and detailing may call for screws and bolts in place of nails and
adhesives. Consider systems that enable lighting and controls to be moved throughout an interior
space without the need to rewire or reconfigure.
·· Casework and millwork. Calculate the value of casework and custom millwork that is movable or
modular; it must be at least 50% of the total value of all casework and millwork in the project. Include
delivery and taxes but not installation or labor.

STEP 5. TRACK IMPLEMENTATION OF STRATEGIES THROUGHOUT PROJECT

Develop a system for tracking the implementation of selected strategies, particularly at major project
milestones. Strategies that support future flexibility are often at risk of being removed during the design
process because of space or budget pressures.
·· Planning for shell space early in the design process may help avoid costly changes when new
MR

programmatic requirements are identified late in the design process.

·· Programmed soft space may be reduced to accommodate required space changes in the design
development phase.
·· Review “at risk” strategies at major project milestones and work with the project team to ensure that
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

optimal design flexibility is maintained.

·· Ensure clear communication among all disciplines by clearly indicating strategies on a floor plan and in
design documents.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

DETERMINING DEPARTMENTAL GROSS AREA

Calculate the project’s departmental gross area (DGA) by adding the area of all clinical departments in the building
program, starting from the centerline of walls.
Include everything interior to the department and all areas required to support that department, such as
hallways, interior walls and circulation spaces, and dedicated storage.
Do not include inpatient rooms, building equipment rooms, facilities departments, or storage and
administration areas not associated with a diagnostic, treatment, or clinical department.
 579

Gross Area: The area inside the centerline of the walls separating
adjoining rooms.
GA

Figure 2. Floor area included in Gross Area calculation

OVERALL STRATEGIES FOR DESIGNING FOR FUTURE EXPANSION

MR
Corridors and stairways should support future additions without demolition of occupied space. Locate stairs
to provide an alternative to elevator use, and avoid exit tunnels. This will cause less disruption during future
construction as well as reduce waste from demolition.

DESIGN FOR FLEXIBILITY

Oversize corridors, exit doors, and egress stairs to accommodate higher use. Design the structural system to
accommodate vertical expansion through increased vertical loads, lateral loads, sliding, and overturning moments of
structural elements (columns, bearing walls, lateral bracing, shear walls, transfer beams, foundations). If horizontal
expansion is planned, design the façade to accommodate new openings and additions.
It is recommended that structural serviceability issues resulting from future expansion, such as vibration,
vertical deflection, and drift, also be addressed.

APPLICABLE AREAS FOR DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS

When determining which areas have linear surface applicable for demountable partitions, exclude the following:
·· Areas that require medical staff to have emergency access to patients or where safety is a concern. These may
be areas where drapery and screens are more appropriate privacy devices than walls.
·· Walls that have life, safety, or health requirements by code, such as fire separation, detention, or smoke
control. Examples include inpatient nursing units (such as ICU), surgery theaters, postanesthesia care units,
emergency department treatment areas, and acute trauma. If other areas are excluded, provide the rationale.

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR14

MRc Resource Use- Design for Flexibility
 580

Net Area: The area within the walls of a room or the usable floor area
assigned to a function in an open area e.g., cubicles or workstations.
The space includes casework, fixtures and door swings but does not
include wall thickness.
NA
MR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Departmental Gross Area (DGA): The area inside the centerline of the
walls separating a department from adjoining areas; include internal
walls, corridors, etc.
GBC LEED Guide Illustrations
DGA MR14
MRc Resource Use- Design for Flexibility

Figure 3 and 4. Net area and department gross area

 581

Fire separation wall ICU emergency access drapes

(excluded from (excluded from calculation)
calculation)

Demountable walls Interior partition walls

contributing (included in calculation)
towards credit

Figure 5. Example of linear

surface locations applicable
for demountable partition
calculation

MR
DESIGN FOR FLEXIBILITY

Walls excluded in calculation

Demountable partitions contributing towards credit

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations MR10

MRc Resource Use- Design for
582

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects

Description of overall flexible design strategy X

Calculations for departmental gross area showing areas required for each selected strategy X

Floor plans or other documentation for areas using flexible design strategies X

Calculations of floor area for soft space, shell space, expansion capacity, and future parking (if applicable) X

Calculations of linear area for demountable partitions and description of excluded areas (if applicable) X

Calculation of product costs for movable and modular casework (if applicable) X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning. Using modular systems and
standard design elements can reduce waste generation during the construction phase.
MR

MR Credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization—Environmental Product Declarations, Sourcing

of Raw Materials, and Material Ingredients. Built-in casework is considered permanently installed and is included
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

in the cost calculations for materials in the three related credits.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

There is no longer a minimum requirement for interstitial space.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.
 583

DEFINITIONS
demountable partition a temporary interior wall that can be easily reconfigured. In a health care facility, acoustical
concerns and embedded equipment, as in a surgery suite, may prevent demountable partitions from being used

departmental gross area (DGA) the floor area of a diagnostic and treatment of clinical department, calculated from
the centerline of the walls separating the department from adjacent spaces. Walls and circulations space within the
department are included in the calculation. This calculation excludes inpatient units.

interstitial space an intermediate space located between floors with a walk-on deck, often used to run the majority
of the utility distribution and terminal equipment, thus permitting convenient installation, maintenance, and future
modifications

modular and movable casework shelving and cabinetry designed to be easily installed, moved, or reconfigured.
In a retail setting, items that are movable but semipermanently attached using mechanical fastening systems for
operational use are considered furniture and not base building elements (e.g., a table or display bolted to the floor, or
shelving attached to a wall)

shell space an area designed to be fitted out for future expansion. Shell space is enclosed by the building envelope
but otherwise left unfinished.

soft space an area whose functions can be easily changed. For example, hospital administrative offices could be
moved so that this soft space could be converted to a laboratory. In contrast, a lab with specialized equipment and
infrastructure would be difficult to relocate.

structure elements carrying either vertical or horizontal loads (e.g., walls, roofs, and floors) that are considered
structurally sound and nonhazardous

MR
DESIGN FOR FLEXIBILITY
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MR

584
 585

MATERIALS AND RESOURCES CREDIT

Construction and
Demolition Waste
Management
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

MR
INTENT

To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

incineration facilities by recovering, reusing, and recycling materials.

REQUIREMENTS

Recycle and/or salvage nonhazardous construction and demolition materials. Calculations can be by weight or
volume but must be consistent throughout.
Exclude excavated soil, land-clearing debris, and alternative daily cover (ADC). Include wood waste converted to
fuel (biofuel) in the calculations; other types of waste-to-energy are not considered diversion for this credit.
However, for projects that cannot meet credit requirements using reuse and recycling methods, waste-to-energy
systems may be considered waste diversion if the European Commission Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC
and Waste Incineration Directive 2000/76/EC are followed and Waste to Energy facilities meet applicable European
Committee for Standardization (CEN) EN 303 standards.

OPTION 1. DIVERSION (1–2 POINTS)

Path 1. Divert 50% and Three Material Streams (1 point)

Divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must include at least three
material streams.
586

OR

Path 2. Divert 75% and Four Material Streams (2 points)

Divert at least 75% of the total construction and demolition material; diverted materials must include at least four
material streams.

OR

OPTION 2. REDUCTION OF TOTAL WASTE MATERIAL (2 POINTS)

Do not generate more than 2.5 pounds of construction waste per square foot (12.2 kilograms of waste per square
meter) of the building’s floor area.
MR
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
 587

BEHIND THE INTENT

Diversion of construction waste has increased greatly in recent years because of new market incentives, better
recycling and reuse infrastructure, and more sophisticated sorting technology. However, the majority of diverted
materials are those that occur in high volume, such as structural waste, or are easily resold, valuable materials such as
metals.
Both planning and implementation are critical to reducing construction waste. This credit rewards projects
that implement the plan created in MR Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning. It
encourages the diversion of a greater quantity and diversity of materials across multiple material steams by setting
thresholds for both an overall diversion percentage and a minimum number of material streams. With an option that
rewards waste reduction, the credit also offers an alternative to diversion.
For more on the benefits of diverting construction and demolition waste, please refer to the prerequisite.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

The process for waste management should be developed as part of the construction waste management
(CWM) plan in the corresponding prerequisite. Review the steps in MR Prerequisite Construction and
Demolition Waste Planning and select an option.
·· Option 1 focuses on diverting construction and demolition waste from landfills by implementing the
CWM plan created in the prerequisite and meeting minimum thresholds.
·· Option 2 is appropriate for projects implementing source reduction strategies in both the design and
construction phases. Before selecting this option, estimate the amount of waste produced by the
project to see whether the performance threshold is realistic.

MR
Option 1. Diversion

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

STEP 1. IMPLEMENT CWM PLAN
Implement the procedures outlined in the CWM plan developed for the corresponding prerequisite to
achieve diversion goals and meet minimum thresholds.
·· Establish on-site infrastructure, practices, and policies for off-site sorting, and develop a tracking
system, as applicable. Identify at least three material streams that will be diverted (see Further
Explanation, Identifying Material Streams).
·· Track all the construction and demolition waste leaving the site. Retain waste hauler reports for
documentation. Record estimated weight or volume of materials that are reused on site or salvaged
for reuse on other projects by subcontractors or vendors.
·· Retain receipts and estimate weight or volume for materials donated to charities, reuse retailers, or
other recipients that can verify and track incoming and outgoing materials.
To contribute to this credit, commingled waste diversion must comply with one of the following
requirements:
·· The waste-sorting facility provides a waste diversion percentage specific to the project’s waste based
on measurement of each component waste material. Visual inspection is not an acceptable method of
evaluation for documenting this percentage.
·· The project team uses the facility’s average diversion rate, which must be regulated by the local or
state authority and must exclude alternative daily cover (ADC). This system must be a closed system;
shipping waste to another municipality to manage, thus burdening another system, does not count as
diverting the waste.

STEP 2. CALCULATE DIVERSION RATE

Applying Equation 1 to the total waste generated and diverted, determine the construction and
demolition waste diversion rate. To ensure that the credit requirements will be met, project teams should
588

calculate the diversion rate periodically (e.g., monthly or bimonthly) so that adjustments can be made to
meet diversion goals.

EQUATION 1. Diversion rate

Total waste diverted from landfill

Diversion rate
= × 100

Total waste produced by project

·· The performance threshold requires both a minimum diversion percentage and diversion of at least
three (Path 1) or four (Path 2) material streams.
·· Ensure that units are consistent for all materials, in either weight or volume.
·· Diverted waste includes all recycled, salvaged, reused, and donated materials.
·· ADC does not count as diversion but must be included in total construction and demolition waste.
·· Exclude hazardous waste, land-clearing debris, soil, and landscaping materials.
·· Projects that cannot meet the credit threshold via reuse or recycling are eligible to claim diversion
through waste-to-energy systems, provided they meet applicable standards and requirements (see
Further Explanation, Waste-to-Energy). Wood-derived fuel may contribute toward diversion.

STEP 3. PRODUCE CWM REPORT

Create a final waste report for the project that includes the following information:
·· Total construction and demolition waste produced by the project
·· Types of waste material and quantity of each material
·· Total waste diverted and diversion rate (percentage)
The report must address ADC and other materials that are included in the calculation even if they do
not count toward diversion. If a single hauler is used for all waste, this company may be able to provide
MR

this report. If multiple haulers or diversion strategies are used, the project team must compile waste
management information from all sources into a single report.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Option 2. Reduction of Total Waste

STEP 1. DESIGN FOR REDUCED WASTE

Project teams should consider design strategies that will greatly reduce the amount of waste generated
on site. Strategies such as prefabrication, modular construction, and designs that use industry standard
sizes greatly reduce the amount of waste that needs to be managed and diverted from landfills and
incinerators (see Further Explanation, Source Reduction).

STEP 2. CALCULATE TOTAL WASTE REDUCTION

Calculate threshold achievement using Equation 2.

EQUATION 2. Waste per area calculation

Total construction and demolition waste generated

Waste per area
= × 100
Project gross floor area

·· Under Option 2, materials reused on site do not count as waste.

·· Include all waste materials donated, sent to reuse facilities, or reused on other projects.
·· Include all waste materials sent to recycling facilities, landfills, and incinerators.
 589

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See credit calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

WASTE TRACKING (OPTION 1)

One best practice is tracking waste throughout the entire project. The project team may determine the best strategy
for ongoing tracking, which will then feed into the construction and demolition waste management calculator
provided by USGBC or an equivalent tracking tool.
Web-based tools can provide contractors with an easy, step-by-step process for electronically tracking and
submitting waste management and recycling plans. Electronic tracking can save them time and money by identifying
materials that can be recycled, locating the nearest recycling facilities, following recycling progress in real time,
gathering comprehensive statistics, and creating reports regarding waste generation and recycling for project,
clients, company, government, as well as for green rating systems.
Some tools provide LEED credit templates so that data can be transferred directly to LEED report formats.

TABLE 1. Sample waste-tracking tool

Diverted waste per report date

Material stream
Sept Oct Nov Dec Total Units

Plastic 1.25 2.5 10 5 18.75 yards

Carpet 2.5 2.5 2.5 0 7.5 yards

Material streams contributing

Paper/Cardboard 5 2.5 2.5 5 15 yards

MR
toward credit

Clean Wood 0 25 0 1.25 26.25 yards

Metal 1.25 2.5 5.5 7 16.25 yards

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

Sheetrock 2.5 2.5 4 5 14 yards

Brick/Concrete Masonry 10.5 2.5 5.5 8.75 27.25 yards

Asphalt Shingles 10 0 0 0 10 yards

Total diverted waste 135 yards

Landfill 10.75 7.5 15 10 43.25 yards

Material streams
not contributing
toward credit

Screen Fines (ADC) 5 1.25 0 2.5 8.75 yards

6" Minus (ADC) 1.25 1.25 5 5.5 13 yards

Total landfill/ADC waste 65 yards

Total waste 200 yards

Percent (%) diverted 67.5 %

IDENTIFYING MATERIAL STREAMS

Under Option 1 of this credit, project teams must divert at least three material streams from landfill. A material
stream is defined as a flow of materials coming from a job site into markets for building materials. A stream can be
either of the following:
·· a specific material category that is diverted in a specific way; or
·· a mixture of several material categories that are diverted in a specific way.
590

Examples of material streams include deconstructed materials sent to reuse markets, commingled waste sent to
mixed-waste recycling facility, source separation where each material is sent to a specific facility, manufacturers’ or
suppliers’ take-back of materials, and reuse of deconstructed materials on-site.
As a best practice, a material stream should constitute at least 5% (by weight or volume) of total diverted
materials. The option requires that multiple material streams be diverted for several reasons: to stimulate markets
for recovered materials by keeping materials separated at the job site, thus increasing recycling rate of materials; to
encourage better project planning, job site diversion best practices, and new sorting and diversion techniques; and to
encourage manufacturers to use closed-loop product systems.

WASTE-TO-ENERGY
Waste-to-energy may be considered a viable diversion strategy if the project team follows the European Commission
Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC and the European Commission Waste Incineration Directive 2000/76/
EC. These standards consist of performance metrics of both efficiency and emissions for different types of energy
recovery systems. In addition, the facility must meet the applicable European standards based on the fuel type. See
Referenced Standards for more information on these directives:
·· EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers
·· EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels
·· EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners
·· EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner

Project teams pursuing this compliance option must demonstrate that reuse and recycling strategies were exhausted
before sending material to waste-to-energy facilities.
MR

The combustion of wood or “wood-derived fuel” is not considered waste-to-energy and is exempt from the
criteria above.

SOURCE REDUCTION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Source reduction eliminates waste produced by a project in the following three ways:
·· Prefabrication is a viable alternative for many wall assemblies. Because prefabrication occurs off site in a
dedicated facility, the manufacturer can achieve high efficiencies in its use of equipment and materials, thereby
reducing waste.
·· Modular designs are likely to have a longer lifespan if they use of durable materials and permanent fastening.
They are also safer to build because large assemblies are constructed in controlled environments, reducing
workers’ exposure to elevated work tasks.
·· Designing for standard material lengths eliminates large amounts of off-cuts and scrap. If incorporated early in
the design process, this strategy does not add additional cost to a project.

Under Option 2, exclude on-site reused materials. Materials reused on site are not considered waste for the purposes
of calculating this option only.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Multiple buildings on a campus may share waste hauling
contracts and on-site collection equipment. Data aggregation is allowed, provided that each building included is
pursuing the same option.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 591

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

MR Construction and Demolition Waste Management calculator or equivalent tool,

X
tracking total and diverted waste amounts and material streams

Documentation of recycling rates for commingled facilities (if applicable) X

Justification narrative for use of waste-to-energy strategy (if applicable) X

Documentation of waste-to-energy facilities adhering to relevant EN standards

X
(if applicable)

Total waste per area X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Prerequisite Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning. The diversion accomplished in
this credit should be done according to the plan developed in the related prerequisite.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· A compliance option has been added for total project waste reduction per gross floor area of the project.
·· Multiple material streams must be diverted to earn the credit for waste diversion (Option 1).
·· ADC has been specifically excluded from diversion calculations. In LEED 2009, it was allowed to count as
diverted waste.

MR
·· Waste-to-energy may count as a diversion method if the facility meets European Union requirements for waste
management and emissions into air, soil, surface water, and groundwater.

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Certification of Sustainable Recyclers: recyclingcertification.org

European Commission Waste Framework Directive 2008/98/EC:

·· ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/framework/index.htm
·· eur-lex.europa.eu/LexUriServ/LexUriServ.do?uri=OJ:L:2008:312:0003:0030:en:PDF

European Commission Waste Incineration Directive 2000/76/EC:

·· europa.eu/legislation_summaries/environment/waste_management/l28072_en.htm
·· central2013.eu/fileadmin/user_upload/Downloads/Document_Centre/OP_Resources/Incineration_
Directive_2000_76.pdf

EN 303-1—1999/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Terminology, general requirements,
testing and marking: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-2—1998/A1—2003, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Special requirements for boilers with
atomizing oil burners: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-3—1998/AC—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers, Assembly comprising a boiler body and a forced
draught burner: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx
592

EN 303-4—1999, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Special requirements for boilers with forced
draught oil burners with outputs up to 70 kW and a maximum operating pressure of 3 bar, Terminology,
special requirements, testing and marking: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-5—2012, Heating boilers for solid fuels, manually and automatically stoked, nominal heat output of up
to 500 kW: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-6—2000, Heating boilers with forced draught burners, Specific requirements for the domestic hot
water operation of combination boilers with atomizing oil burners of nominal heat input not exceeding 70
kW: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EN 303-7—2006, Gas-fired central heating boilers equipped with a forced draught burner of nominal heat
output not exceeding 1000 kW: cen.eu/cen/Products/Search/Pages/default.aspx

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Achieve both Option 1 (either Path 1 or Path 2) and Option 2.

DEFINITIONS
alternative daily cover (ADC) material other than earthen material placed on the surface of the active face of a
municipal solid waste landfill at the end of each operating day to control vectors, fires, odors, blowing litter, and
scavenging. Generally these materials must be processed so they do not allow gaps in the exposed landfill face.
(CalRecycle)
MR

clean waste nonhazardous materials left over from construction and demolition. Clean waste excludes lead and
asbestos.

commingled waste building waste streams that are combined on the project site and hauled away for sorting into
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

recyclable streams. Also known as single-stream recycling.

land-clearing debris and soil materials that are natural (e.g., rock, soil, stone, vegetation). Materials that are man-
made (e.g., concrete, brick, cement) are considered construction waste even if they were on site.

source separated construction or demolition waste materials that are sorted into separate bins on the project site
(aka on-site). This waste strategy often isolates waste materials targeted for reuse, donation, or recycling programs.
Typically, sorted materials on-site include metals, wood, ceiling tiles, furniture, and concrete.

waste diversion a management activity that disposes of waste through methods other than incineration or
landfilling. Examples include reuse and recycling.

waste-to-energy the conversion of nonrecyclable waste materials into usable heat, electricity, or fuel through a
variety of processes, including combustion, gasification, pyrolization, anaerobic digestion, and landfill gas (LFG)
recovery
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES MR
593
 595

Indoor
Environmental

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

Quality (eq)
OVERVIEW
The Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) category rewards decisions made by project teams about indoor air quality

EQ
and thermal, visual, and acoustic comfort. Green buildings with good indoor environmental quality protect the
health and comfort of building occupants. High-quality indoor environments also enhance productivity, decrease
absenteeism, improve the building’s value, and reduce liability for building designers and owners.1 This category
addresses the myriad design strategies and environmental factors—air quality, lighting quality, acoustic design,
control over one’s surroundings—that influence the way people learn, work, and live.
The relationship between the indoor environment and the health and comfort of building occupants is complex
and still not fully understood. Local customs and expectations, occupants’ activities, and the building’s site, design,
and construction are just a few of the variables that make it difficult to quantify and measure the direct effect of
a building on its occupants.2 Therefore, the EQ section balances the need for prescriptive measures with more
performance-oriented credit requirements. For example, source control is addressed first, in a prerequisite, and a
later credit then specifies an indoor air quality assessment to measure the actual outcome of those strategies.
The EQ category combines traditional approaches, such as ventilation and thermal control, with emerging
design strategies, including a holistic, emissions-based approach (Low-Emitting Materials credit), source control
and monitoring for user-determined contaminants (Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies credit), requirements
for lighting quality (Interior Lighting credit), and advanced lighting metrics (Daylight credit). A new credit covering
acoustics is now available for all projects using a BD+C rating system.

1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Health Buildings Healthy People: A Vision for the 21st Century, epa.gov/iaq/pubs/hbhp.html
(October 2001) (accessed July 25, 2013).
2. Mitchell, Clifford S., Junfeng Zhang, Torben Sigsgaard, Matti Jantunen, Palu J. Lioy, Robert Samson, and Meryl H. Karol, Current State
of the Science: Health Effects and Indoor Environmental Quality, Environmental Health Perspectives 115(6) (June 2007).
596

CROSS-CUTTING ISSUES

FLOOR AREA CALCULATIONS AND FLOOR PLANS

For many of the credits in the EQ category, compliance is based on the percentage of floor area that meets the credit
requirements. In general, floor areas and space categorization should be consistent across EQ credits. Any excluded
spaces or discrepancies in floor area values should be explained and highlighted in the documentation. See Space
Categorization, below, for additional information on which floor area should be included in which credits.

SPACE CATEGORIZATION
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The EQ category focuses on the interaction between the occupants of the building and the indoor spaces in which
they spend their time. For this reason, it is important to identify which spaces are used by the occupants, including
any visitors (transients), and what activities they perform in each space. Depending on the space categorization, the
credit requirements may or may not apply (Table 1).

Occupied versus unoccupied space

All spaces in a building must be categorized as either occupied or unoccupied. Occupied spaces are enclosed areas
intended for human activities. Unoccupied spaces are places intended primarily for other purposes; they are
occupied only occasionally and for short periods of time—in other words, they are inactive areas.

Examples of spaces that are typically unoccupied include the following:

·· Mechanical and electrical rooms
·· Egress stairway or dedicated emergency exit corridor
·· Closets in a residence (but a walk-in closet is occupied)
·· Data center floor area, including a raised floor area
·· Inactive storage area in a warehouse or distribution center
For areas with equipment retrieval, the space is unoccupied only if the retrieval is occasional.

Regularly versus nonregularly occupied spaces

Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied, based on the duration of the
occupancy. Regularly occupied spaces are enclosed areas where people normally spend time, defined as more than
one hour of continuous occupancy per person per day, on average; the occupants may be seated or standing as they
work, study, or perform other activities. For spaces that are not used daily, the classification should be based on the
EQ

time a typical occupant spends in the space when it is in use. For example, a computer workstation may be largely
vacant throughout the month, but when it is occupied, a worker spends one to five hours there. It would then be
considered regularly occupied because that length of time is sufficient to affect the person’s well-being, and he or she
would have an expectation of thermal comfort and control over the environment.
Occupied spaces that do not meet the definition of regularly occupied are nonregularly occupied; these are areas
that people pass through or areas used an average of less than one hour per person per day.
 597

Examples of regularly occupied spaces include the following:

·· Airplane hangar ·· Hospital dialysis and ·· Natatorium
·· Auditorium infusion area ·· Open-office workstation
·· Auto service bay ·· Hospital exam room ·· Private office
·· Bank teller station ·· Hospital operating room ·· Reception desk
·· Conference room ·· Hospital patient room ·· Residential bedroom
·· Correctional facility cell ·· Hospital recovery area ·· Residential dining room
or day room ·· Hospital staff room ·· Residential kitchen
·· Data center network ·· Hospital surgical suite ·· Residential living room
operations center ·· Hospital waiting room ·· Residential office, den, workroom
·· Data center security ·· Hospital diagnostic and ·· Retail merchandise area and
operations center treatment area associated circulation
·· Dorm room ·· Hospital laboratory ·· Retail sales transaction area
·· Exhibition hall ·· Hospital nursing station ·· School classroom
·· Facilities staff office ·· Hospital solarium ·· School media center
·· Facilities staff workstation ·· Hospital waiting room ·· School student activity room
·· Food service facility dining area ·· Hotel front desk ·· School study hall
·· Food service facility kitchen area ·· Hotel guest room ·· Shipping and receiving office

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

·· Gymnasium ·· Hotel housekeeping area ·· Study carrel
·· Hospital autopsy and morgue ·· Hotel lobby ·· Warehouse materials-
·· Hospital critical-care area ·· Information desk handling area
·· Meeting room

Examples of nonregularly occupied spaces include the following:

·· Break room ·· Hospital short-term ·· Residential laundry area
·· Circulation space charting space ·· Residential walk-in closet
·· Copy room ·· Hospital prep and cleanup area in ·· Restroom
·· Corridor surgical suite ·· Retail fitting area
·· Fire station apparatus bay ·· Interrogation room ·· Retail stock room
·· Hospital linen area ·· Lobby (except hotel lobby)* ·· Shooting range

EQ
·· Hospital medical record area ·· Locker room ·· Stairway
·· Hospital patient room bathroom ·· Residential bathroom

* Hotel lobbies are considered regularly occupied because people often congregate, work on laptops, and spend more time there
than they do in an office building lobby.

Occupied space subcategories

Occupied spaces, or portions of an occupied space, are further categorized as individual or shared multioccupant,
based on the number of occupants and their activities. An individual occupant space is an area where someone
performs distinct tasks. A shared multioccupant space is a place of congregation or a place where people pursue
overlapping or collaborative tasks. Occupied spaces that are not regularly occupied or not used for distinct or
collaborative tasks are neither individual occupant nor shared multioccupant spaces.

Examples of individual occupant spaces include the following:

·· Bank teller station ·· Hospital patient room ·· Open-office workstation
·· Correctional facility cell ·· Hotel guest room ·· Private office
or day room ·· Medical office ·· Reception desk
·· Data center staff workstation ·· Military barracks with ·· Residential bedroom
·· Hospital nursing station personal workspaces ·· Study carrel
598

Examples of shared multioccupant spaces include the following:

·· Active warehouse and storage ·· Gymnasium ·· Hotel housekeeping area
·· Airplane hangar ·· Hospital autopsy and morgue ·· Hotel lobby
·· Auditorium ·· Hospital critical-care area ·· Meeting room
·· Auto service bay ·· Hospital dialysis and ·· Natatorium
·· Conference room infusion area ·· Retail merchandise area and
·· Correctional facility cell ·· Hospital exam room associated circulation
or day room ·· Hospital operating room ·· Retail sales transaction area
·· Data center network ·· Hospital surgical suite ·· School classroom
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

operations center ·· Hospital waiting room ·· School media center

·· Data center security ·· Hospital diagnostic and ·· School student activity room
operations center treatment area ·· School study hall
·· Exhibition hall ·· Hospital laboratory ·· Shipping and receiving office
·· Facilities staff office ·· Hospital solarium ·· Warehouse materials-
·· Food service facility dining area ·· Hotel front desk handling area
·· Food service facility kitchen area

Occupied spaces can also be classified as densely or nondensely occupied, based on the concentration of occupants
in the space. A densely occupied space has a design occupant density of 25 people or more per 1,000 square feet (93
square meters), or 40 square feet (3.7 square meters) or less per person. Occupied spaces with a lower density are
nondensely occupied.

Table 1 outlines the relationship between the EQ credits and the space categorization terms. If the credit is listed, the
space must meet the requirements of the credit.

TABLE 1. Space types in EQ credits

Space Category Prerequisite or credit

Occupied space • Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, ventilation rate procedure and natural ventilation procedure
• Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, monitoring requirements
• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 C
EQ

• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 D

• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 E
• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 B
• Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 E
• Indoor Air Quality Assessment, Option 2, Air Testing (sampling must be representative of all
occupied spaces)
• Thermal Comfort (New Construction, Schools, Retail, Hospitality), design requirements
• Acoustic Performance (New Construction, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality)

Regularly occupied • Thermal Comfort, design requirements (Data Centers)

space • Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy A
• Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy D
• Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy E
• Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy G
• Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy H
• Daylight
• Quality Views

Individual occupant • Thermal Comfort, control requirements

space • Interior Lighting, Option 1

Shared multioccupant • Thermal Comfort, control requirements

space • Interior Lighting, Option 1

Densely occupied space • Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 C

 599

Table 2 outlines the relationship between the EQ credits and the space categorization terms specific to each rating
system (see Definitions). Unless otherwise stated, if the credit is listed, the space must meet the requirements of
the credit.

TABLE 2. Rating system–specific space classifications

Rating system Space type Prerequisite or credit

• Minimum Acoustic Performance

Schools Classroom and core learning spaces
• Acoustic Performance (Schools)

• Interior Lighting*
Hospitality Guest rooms
• Thermal Comfort, control requirements*

• Thermal Comfort, control requirements

Healthcare Patient rooms
• Interior Lighting, Option 2, Lighting Quality

Healthcare Staff areas • Interior Lighting, Option 2, Lighting Quality

• Daylight
Healthcare Perimeter area
• Quality Views

Healthcare Inpatient units • Quality Views

Warehouses & • Thermal Comfort, design requirements

Office areas

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

Distribution Centers • Quality Views

Warehouses & • Thermal Comfort, design requirements

Areas of bulk storage, sorting, and distribution
Distribution Centers • Quality Views

• Thermal Comfort, control requirements

Retail Office and administrative areas
• Interior Lighting, Option 2, Lighting Quality

Retail Sales areas • Interior Lighting, Option 2, Lighting Quality

*Hotel guest rooms are excluded from the credit requirements.

The following credits are not affected by space classifications:

·· Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control
·· Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 A

EQ
·· Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 1 B
·· Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 A
·· Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies, Option 2 D (no specific spaces; applicable spaces are determined by
the project team)
·· Low-Emitting Materials
·· Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan
·· Indoor Air Quality Assessment, Option 1, Flush-Out (the floor area from all spaces must be included in
calculation for total air volume; the flush-out must be demonstrated at the system level.)
·· Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy B
·· Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy C
·· Interior Lighting, Option 2, strategy F
·· Acoustic Performance (Healthcare)

TRICKY SPACES
Pay extra attention to how the following types of spaces are classified in specific credits.

Residential
·· Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance and Environmental Tobacco Smoke have specific requirements and
considerations for residential projects.
600

·· See the Further Explanation, Project Type Variations sections in Thermal Comfort and Interior Lighting for
guidance on providing appropriate controllability in residential buildings.

Auditoriums
·· Exceptions to Daylight and Quality Views are permitted. See the Further Explanation, Project Type Variations
sections in Daylight and Quality Views.

Gymnasiums
·· See the Further Explanation, Project Type Variations section in Thermal Comfort for guidance on dealing with
high levels of physical activity.
·· Exceptions to Quality Views are permitted. See the Further Explanation, Project Type Variations section in
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Quality Views.

Transportation Terminals
·· For Thermal Comfort and Interior Lighting, Option 1, Lighting Control, most of the areas in a transportation
terminal can be considered shared multioccupant. Most areas in transportation terminals are also regularly
occupied.

Dormitories and Military Barracks

·· These spaces fall in-between a work space and residence.
·· Dorm rooms or military barracks with personal workspaces are considered individual occupant spaces.
Military barracks without personal workspaces are considered shared multioccupant.

Industrial Facilities
·· For Thermal Comfort and Interior Lighting, Option 1, Lighting Control, most of the active warehouse and
storage areas are considered multioccupant.
·· Most areas in industrial facilities are also regularly occupied.
EQ
EQ INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
601
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

602
 603

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY PREREQUISITE

Minimum Indoor Air

Quality Performance
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

INTENT

To contribute to the comfort and well-being of building occupants by

establishing minimum standards for indoor air quality (IAQ).

REQUIREMENTS

EQ
NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY

Meet the requirements for both ventilation and monitoring.

Ventilation

Mechanically Ventilated Spaces

OPTION 1. ASHRAE STANDARD 62.1–2010

For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated),
determine the minimum outdoor air intake flow for mechanical ventilation systems using the ventilation rate
procedure from ASHRAE 62.1–2010 or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent.
Meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Sections 4–7, Ventilation for Acceptable
Indoor Air Quality (with errata), or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent.
604

OPTION 2. CEN STANDARDS EN 15251–2007 AND EN 13779–2007

Projects outside the U.S. may instead meet the minimum outdoor air requirements of Annex B of Comité
Européen de Normalisation (CEN) Standard EN 15251–2007, Indoor environmental input parameters for design
and assessment of energy performance of buildings addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting
and acoustics; and meet the requirements of CEN Standard EN 13779–2007, Ventilation for nonresidential
buildings, Performance requirements for ventilation and room conditioning systems, excluding Section 7.3,
Thermal environment; 7.6, Acoustic environment; A.16; and A.17.

Naturally Ventilated Spaces

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated),
determine the minimum outdoor air opening and space configuration requirements using the natural ventilation
procedure from ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent. Confirm
that natural ventilation is an effective strategy for the project by following the flow diagram in the Chartered
Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation
in Nondomestic Buildings, Figure 2.8, and meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 4, or a
local equivalent, whichever is more stringent.

All Spaces
The indoor air quality procedure defined in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 may not be used to comply with this
prerequisite.

Monitoring

Mechanically Ventilated Spaces

For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated),
monitor outdoor air intake flow as follows:
·· For variable air volume systems, provide a direct outdoor airflow measurement device capable of measuring
the minimum outdoor air intake flow. This device must measure the minimum outdoor air intake flow
EQ

with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum outdoor airflow rate, as defined by the ventilation
requirements above. An alarm must indicate when the outdoor airflow value varies by 15% or more from the
outdoor airflow setpoint.
·· For constant-volume systems, balance outdoor airflow to the design minimum outdoor airflow rate defined
by ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 (with errata), or higher. Install a current transducer on the supply fan, an
airflow switch, or similar monitoring device.

Naturally Ventilated Spaces

For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated),
comply with at least one of the following strategies.
·· Provide a direct exhaust airflow measurement device capable of measuring the exhaust airflow. This device
must measure the exhaust airflow with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum exhaust airflow rate.
An alarm must indicate when airflow values vary by 15% or more from the exhaust airflow setpoint.
·· Provide automatic indication devices on all natural ventilation openings intended to meet the minimum
opening requirements. An alarm must indicate when any one of the openings is closed during occupied
hours.
·· Monitor carbon dioxide ( CO2 ) concentrations within each thermal zone. CO2 monitors must be between
3 and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor and within the thermal zone. CO2 monitors must
have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building automation system if the sensed CO2 concentration
exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate CO2 setpoints using the methods in ASHRAE
62.1–2010, Appendix C.
 605

CORE AND SHELL ONLY

Mechanical ventilation systems installed during core and shell construction must be capable of meeting
projected ventilation levels and monitoring based on the requirements of anticipated future tenants.

RESIDENTIAL ONLY

In addition to the requirements above, if the project building contains residential units, each dwelling unit must
meet all of the following requirements.
·· Unvented combustion appliances (e.g., decorative logs) are not allowed.
·· Carbon monoxide monitors must be installed on each floor of each unit.
·· All indoor fireplaces and woodstoves must have solid glass enclosures or doors that seal when closed.
·· Any indoor fireplaces and woodstoves that are not closed combustion or power-vented must pass a
backdraft potential test to ensure that depressurization of the combustion appliance zone is less than 5 Pa.

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

·· Space- and water-heating equipment that involves combustion must be designed and installed with closed
combustion (i.e., sealed supply air and exhaust ducting) or with power-vented exhaust, or located in a
detached utility building or open-air facility.
·· For projects in high-risk areas for radon, EPA Radon Zone 1 (or local equivalent for projects outside the
U.S.), design and construct any dwelling unit on levels one through four above grade with radon-resistant
construction techniques. Follow the techniques prescribed in EPA Building Radon Out; NFPA 5000,
Chapter 49; International Residential Code, Appendix F; CABO, Appendix F; ASTM E1465; or a local
equivalent, whichever is most stringent.

HEALTHCARE

Meet the following requirements for both ventilation and monitoring.

Mechanically Ventilated Spaces

EQ
For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated),
determine the minimum outdoor air intake flow for mechanical ventilations systems using the ventilation
rates in ASHRAE Standard 170–2008, Section 7; the requirements of the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and
Construction of Health Care Facilities (Table 2.1–2); or a local equivalent, whichever is most stringent. For
any area not covered in 170 or the FGI guidelines, follow ASHRAE 62.1 or a local equivalent, whichever is more
stringent and meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 170–2008, Sections 6–8, Ventilation of
Health Care Facilities (with errata) or a USGBC-approved equivalent standard for projects outside the U.S.

Naturally Ventilated Spaces

For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated),
determine the minimum outdoor air opening and space configuration requirements using the natural ventilation
procedure of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 (with errata) or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent.
Confirm that natural ventilation is an effective strategy for the project by following the flow diagram in Figure
2.8 of the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005,
Natural Ventilation in Nondomestic Buildings.
606

Mechanically Ventilated Spaces

For mechanically ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is activated),
provide a direct outdoor airflow measurement device capable of measuring the minimum outdoor air intake
flow. This device must measure the minimum outdoor air intake flow with an accuracy of +/–10% of the design
minimum outdoor airflow rate defined by the ventilation requirements above. An alarm must alert staff
whenever the outdoor airflow value varies by 15% or more from the outdoor airflow setpoint.

Naturally Ventilated Spaces

For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated),
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

comply with at least one of the following strategies.

·· Provide a direct exhaust airflow measurement device capable of measuring the exhaust airflow with an
accuracy of +/–10% of the design minimum exhaust airflow rate. An alarm must indicate when airflow values
vary by 15% or more from the exhaust airflow setpoint.
·· Provide automatic indication devices on all natural ventilation openings intended to meet the minimum
opening requirements. An alarm must indicate when any one of the openings is closed during occupied
hours.
·· Monitor carbon dioxide (CO2 ) concentrations within each thermal zone. CO2 monitors must be between
3 and 6 feet (900 and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor and within the thermal zone. CO2 monitors must
have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building automation system if the sensed CO2 concentration
exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate CO2 setpoints by using the methods in
ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C.
EQ
 607

BEHIND THE INTENT

By diluting pollutants created by a building’s occupants and other contaminant sources, ventilation contributes
to the occupants’ comfort and well-being. The exact connections between ventilation rates and occupants’ health
are still being researched, but a multidisciplinary scientific review of the current state of knowledge shows some
strong associations.1 Maintaining good indoor air quality (IAQ) depends on controlling pollutant sources, removing
contaminants from outdoor air, and supplying at least some outdoor air, among other factors. The standards
referenced in this prerequisite outline well-tested methods for determining the amount of outdoor air each type
of space requires. These standards were chosen because they strike a balance between providing fresh air and
maintaining energy efficiency.
Different kinds of occupants, activities, and equipment in a building will make for different IAQ parameters,
so requirements vary both by space type in a building and by project type. For example, residential projects must
meet additional prescriptive requirements that protect occupants from indoor contaminants, such as combustion
byproducts and radon, and health care facilities have more stringent ventilation and space pressurization
requirements to prevent cross-contamination.
Intelligent ventilation design is only the first step. Monitoring, as required by this prerequisite, helps maintain
IAQ during all stages of a building’s operation. Even though occupants may not notice reductions in outdoor airflow

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

or exhaust airflow, indoor air pollutants begin to build up the moment proper ventilation ceases. The combination of
intelligent ventilation design with monitoring provides confidence that occupants enjoy comfort and well-being.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

Healthcare projects, see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

STEP 1. EVALUATE OUTDOOR AIR QUALITY

Investigate local outdoor air quality at the project location. If pursuing Option 1 for mechanically
ventilated spaces, or using naturally ventilated spaces, follow ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 4, or a local
equivalent, whichever is more stringent. If pursuing Option 2 for mechanically ventilated spaces, see
Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN) Standard EN 13779–2007, Section 6.2.3, Outdoor Air.
Use the results of this analysis to inform ventilation strategy selection and system design. For example,

EQ
natural ventilation may not be appropriate in high-pollution areas, where outdoor air requires significant
filtration. Outdoor air quality may affect mechanical equipment filtration specifications.

STEP 2. SELECT VENTILATION STRATEGY

Determine whether mechanical ventilation, natural ventilation, or a mixed-mode approach is appropriate
for the project.
·· Consider how the building’s form, location, orientation, programming, and depth of the floor plate can
create opportunities for low-energy, high-quality natural ventilation or mixed-mode systems. For help
in determining whether natural ventilation is feasible for a building or space, see Chartered Institution
of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation in
Non-Domestic Buildings, Figure 2.8 (flow chart).
·· ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 requires mechanical ventilation systems in addition to natural ventilation,
unless specific exceptions are met. See ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 6.4.
·· If mechanical ventilation is preferred, consider separating ventilation from thermal conditioning with
a dedicated outdoor air system. These systems ensure that the correct amount of ventilation air is
provided while minimizing overventilation and reducing energy consumption.
·· Core and Shell, Healthcare, and residential projects: see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations
and Project Type Variations.

1. Sundell, Jan, Hal Levin, and Davor Novosel, Ventilation Rates and Health: Report of an Interdisciplinary Review of the Scientific Literature (National
Center for Energy Management and Building Technologies Task 06-01, September 2006),
ncembt.org/downloads/Sundell%20J_VentilationRatesAndHealthReportOfAnInterdisciplinaryReviewOfTheScientificLiterature_NCEMBT-070914.pdf
(accessed June 10, 2013).
608

STEP 3. CATEGORIZE SPACES

Create a table of all rooms and spaces in the project and identify the following for each:
·· Ventilation strategy
·· Net occupiable space, as defined in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, page 4, or room floor area if using
CEN Standard 15251
·· Occupancy category, as listed in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Table 6-1 or CEN Standard 15251,
Table B.2
·· If applicable, identify whether the building is very low polluting, low polluting, or not low polluting
(see CEN Standard 15251, Annex C).
·· Design occupancy (see Getting Started, Occupancy)
It may be appropriate to group rooms or spaces into ventilation zones (see Further Explanation, Types of
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Mechanical Ventilation Systems).

STEP 4. IDENTIFY APPROPRIATE PREREQUISITE REQUIREMENTS

Follow the steps below for mechanical ventilation or natural ventilation, depending on the ventilation
strategy used in each space.
For mixed-mode systems, projects must comply with mechanical ventilation requirements when the
mechanical system is active, and natural ventilation requirements when the mechanical ventilation system
is inactive.

Mechanically Ventilated Spaces (and Mixed-Mode Spaces When

A Mechanical Ventilation Is Active)

STEP 1. DETERMINE PRELIMINARY HVAC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Identify the following basic mechanical system features, which will affect the calculation of outdoor air
required:
·· Single-zone, 100% outdoor air, or multiple-zone systems
·· Underfloor, overhead, or side air distribution and location of return grilles
·· Supply air temperature: cooling only or heating and cooling
·· Variable air volume (VAV) or constant volume (CV) supply

STEP 2. CALCULATE REQUIRED OUTDOOR AIRFLOW UNDER OPTION 1

EQ

Complete the ventilation rate procedure in ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 6.2, to determine the
minimum amount of outdoor air that must be supplied by each ventilation system.
·· Complete a separate ventilation rate procedure calculation for each ventilation system.
·· Account for all occupied spaces in the calculation. Perform ventilation rate procedure calculations
for worst-case conditions, which typically occur in the heating mode when supply airflows are lowest
or supply air temperature is highest. From Table 6-2 of the standard, select the zone air distribution
effectiveness (Ez) value that corresponds to the air distribution configuration of the worst-case
conditions. Ez is typically less than 1.0 when the system is in heating mode. If Ez is greater than 1.0,
see EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance, Further Explanation, Common Issues with Energy
Modeling, Ventilation (zone air distribution effectiveness).
·· As applicable, evaluate and document assumptions for all variables required for the ventilation rate
procedure calculation. These variables include the percentage of total design airflow rate at condition
analyzed (Ds), the primary air fraction of supply air at condition analyzed (Ep), the system ventilation
efficiency (Ev), and the fraction of local recirculated air that is representative of system return air (Er).
·· For special conditions that apply to systems designed to respond to varying operating conditions,
such as with demand-controlled ventilation, see Further Explanation, Considerations for Variable
Operating Conditions.
Ensure that the appropriate method is selected for each system in the project. The ventilation rate
procedure calculation differs for single-zone, 100% outdoor air, and multiple-zone systems. Suggested
methods are as follows:
·· For single-zone systems or 100% outdoor air systems, use the calculator provided by USGBC or a
user-generated spreadsheet. The 62MZCalc spreadsheet is not applicable to these systems and should
not be used to perform the ventilation calculations.
 609

·· For multiple-zone systems, use the 62MZCalc spreadsheet. This includes VAV and CV systems in
which one or more air handlers supply a mixture of outdoor air and recirculated air to more than one
ventilation zone (see Further Explanation, Calculations for Multiple-Zone Systems).
Energy modeling software may also be used to perform ventilation rate procedure calculations for all
three system types. Direct outputs from the programs are acceptable, provided they include sufficient
information about the values used for all variables in the calculation.
If the local code is more stringent than ASHRAE 62.1–2010, see Further Explanation, Local Equivalent to
ASHRAE 62.1–2010.

ALTERNATIVE STEP 2. CALCULATE REQUIRED OUTDOOR AIRFLOW UNDER OPTION 2

Follow the calculations outlined in CEN Standard 15251–2007, Annex B, to determine the minimum
amount of outdoor air that must be supplied by each ventilation system.

STEP 3. REVISE DESIGN TO MEET OUTDOOR AIR REQUIREMENTS, IF NECESSARY

If the ventilation calculations in Step 2 indicate that the preliminary design does not provide enough
outdoor air to meet the selected reference standard, revise the design and recalculate the minimum
amount of outdoor air to confirm compliance.
For single-zone and 100% outdoor air systems, increase the amount of outdoor air supplied by the

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

system. For multiple-zone systems, increase supply airflow to the critical zone or increase the amount of
outdoor air supplied by the system.
In the final calculations, ensure that the net occupiable space, design occupancy, number of air handlers,
and outdoor air volume are consistent with the project’s mechanical schedules and documentation
provided for other LEED credits. Create a summary table that lists the required outdoor air intake flow
and design outdoor air intake flow for each ventilation system.

STEP 4. MEET MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

Option 1. ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010

·· Confirm compliance with Sections 4 through 7.
·· Indicate whether the project is in a nonattainment area for fine particulate matter (PM2.5), and if so,
confirm that filters with minimum efficiency reporting values (MERV) of 11 or higher have been or
will be installed.
·· Indicate whether the project is in an area where ozone exceeds the most recent three-year average,
annual fourth-highest daily maximum eight-hour average ozone concentration of 0.107 ppm, and if
so, confirm that the project has or will have air-cleaning devices for ozone.

EQ
·· If using a local code instead of ASHRAE 62.1–2010, see Further Explanation, Local Equivalent to
ASHRAE 62.1–2010.

Option 2. CEN Standards EN 15251–2007 and EN 13779–2007

·· Confirm compliance with the requirements in CEN Standard 13770–2007, excluding Section 7.3
Thermal environment, 7.6 Acoustic environment, A.16, and A.17.

STEP 5. IMPLEMENT AIRFLOW MONITORING

Incorporate airflow monitoring equipment into the HVAC system design. The technique for monitoring
outdoor air depends on the HVAC system. For VAV systems—for example, a 100% outdoor air energy
recovery unit with demand-controlled ventilation, or any system that provides a variable amount of
supply or outdoor air—a direct outdoor airflow measurement device must measure the intake flow rate
(Figure 1).
·· Indirect measurements, such temperature or current transducers, cannot directly measure the airflow
rate and thus are not allowed for VAV systems.
·· If a 100% outdoor air system provides ventilation air to the return of downstream terminal devices
(e.g., fan coil units, heat pumps), the measurement device needs to measure the outdoor airflow rate
at the 100% outdoor air unit only, not at each terminal device. The ventilation rate procedure must still
be calculated for each terminal device.
·· For device requirements, see the specific language in the prerequisite requirements.
610

Figure 1. Example schematic for outdoor air sensor location

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
EQ
 611

For constant volume systems, balancing ensures that the correct amount of outdoor air is being supplied
to the building.
·· Once the system has been balanced, a current transducer on the supply fan, airflow switch, pressure
transducer, or similar monitoring device must be installed.
·· If a 100% outdoor air system provides ventilation air to the return of downstream terminal devices
(e.g., fan coil units, heat pumps), the measurement device needs to be installed at the 100% outdoor
air system only, not at each terminal device. The ventilation rate procedure must still be calculated to
each terminal device.
For all systems, retain equipment cut sheets showing the accuracy of the monitoring device(s), copies
of control sequences and diagrams, and test and balance reports that show airflow setpoints for each
ventilation system.

Naturally Ventilated Spaces (and Mixed-Mode Systems When

Mechanical Ventilation Is Inactivated)

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

STEP 1. CONFIRM NATURAL VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS
Use Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, Natural
Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings, Figure 2.8 (flow chart), to confirm that natural ventilation is
appropriate. Retain a copy of the flow chart path for the project.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY CEILING HEIGHTS AND NATURAL VENTILATION OPENINGS

Collect the following information for each naturally ventilated space and add to the table of rooms and
spaces:
·· Minimum ceiling height in the space
·· Location of natural ventilation openings (on one side, two opposite sides, or two adjacent sides)
·· Size of the natural ventilation openings (openable area)

STEP 3. PERFORM NATURAL VENTILATION PROCEDURE

Use the natural ventilation procedure in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.4, to determine the size of
openings required in each space and the maximum distance from the openings that can be considered
naturally ventilated.
·· Compare the calculation results with the design and revise, if necessary, to ensure that all spaces meet
the requirements of the standard.

EQ
·· If the project includes an engineered natural ventilation system approved by the authority having
jurisdiction, the requirements of Section 6.4 do not apply (see Further Explanation, Authority Having
Jurisdiction Exception).
·· Confirm compliance with the exhaust ventilation requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010,
Section 6.5.

STEP 4. CONFIRM MECHANICAL SYSTEM EXCEPTION OR COMPLIANCE

If the project qualifies for an exception to the mechanical ventilation requirement in ASHRAE 62.1–2010,
Section 6.4, prepare an explanatory narrative.
If the project does not qualify for exception, follow the step-by-step instructions for mechanical
ventilation systems to demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE 62.1–2010 when mechanical ventilation is
active (see Further Explanation, Natural Ventilation Exceptions).

STEP 5. IMPLEMENT MONITORING SYSTEM

Incorporate airflow monitoring equipment into the natural ventilation system design through one of the
following three monitoring strategies.
612

Direct exhaust airflow measurement device

·· Incorporate exhaust airflow monitoring equipment that has an accuracy of +/–10% of the design
minimum exhaust airflow rate.
·· Naturally ventilated systems induce passive air movement from openings to the point of exhaust,
requiring that airflow measurement devices be placed at the exhaust location.
·· Configure the exhaust airflow monitoring equipment to generate an alarm when airflow values vary by
15% or more from the exhaust airflow setpoint.
·· Retain equipment cutsheets for the monitors, plans indicating sensor locations, and copies of control
sequences and diagrams.
Alarmed openings for naturally ventilated spaces
·· Identify all windows, louvers, and trickle vents used for natural ventilation.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Each opening counted as a natural ventilation intake for this prerequisite must have an alarm under
this strategy. For example, an office with two windows intended to provide natural ventilation must
have alarms installed on both windows. However, if only one window is counted as a natural ventilation
intake, only one window is required to have an alarm.
Carbon dioxide (CO2 ) monitors
·· Install a CO2 sensor in each thermal zone.
·· CO2 sensors must be located in the breathing zone, as defined in the prerequisite requirements
(Figure 2). CO2 sensors installed in return air ducts cannot be used to meet the requirements.
·· Determine CO2 concentration setpoint(s) using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C. See
ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Appendix A, for calculations and examples. Configure the CO2
monitoring system to generate an audible or visual alarm to the system operator if the differential CO2
concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%.
EQ
 613

Figure 2. Example CO2 sensor locations

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

EQ
614

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
For mechanical ventilation, Option 1, see ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.2, and ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual,
Chapter 6.2. Refer to ASHRAE Journal articles 2 for additional information on the calculations.

For mechanical ventilation, Option 2, see CEN Standards EN 15251–2007 and EN 13779–2007.

For natural ventilation, see ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.4, and ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Chapter 6.4.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

NATURAL VENTILATION EXCEPTIONS

ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 6.4, requires naturally ventilated spaces to include a mechanical ventilation
system unless one of the following exceptions applies:
·· Ventilation openings comply with Section 6.4 and are permanently open.
·· Ventilation openings comply with Section 6.4 and have controls that prevent them from being closed during
times of expected occupancy.
·· The naturally ventilated zone is not served by heating or cooling equipment.
·· The system is an engineered natural ventilation system approved by the authority having jurisdiction (see
Further Explanation, Authority Having Jurisdiction Exception).

TYPES OF MECHANICAL VENTILATION SYSTEMS

ASHRAE 62.1–2010 defines a ventilation zone as any area with similar occupancy categories, occupant density,
zone air distribution effectiveness, and zone primary airflow per unit area. This differs from the definition of a
thermal zone.

There are three main types of mechanical ventilation systems.

Single-zone system
This system delivers a mixture of outdoor air and recirculated air to only one ventilation zone. For example, a single
rooftop unit that provides ventilation and conditioned air to three separate offices may be considered a single-zone
system, provided the offices are similar, as defined above.
EQ

Alternatively, a single rooftop unit that provides ventilation and conditioned air to an office and a conference
room would not be considered a single-zone system, since these two spaces differ in occupancy category and
occupant density, even though the unit itself is often considered “single-zone” because it only has one thermal zone.
In this case, the unit must be analyzed using the method for multiple-zone recirculating systems.
A separate ventilation rate procedure calculation must be made for each single-zone system serving the building.

100% outdoor air system

This type of system delivers only outdoor air directly to one or more ventilation zones. The ventilation air cannot
contain any recirculated air. For example, an energy recovery unit that provides 100% outdoor ventilation air to each
space via a separate distribution system and mixes this air with air from only the same zone would be considered a
100% outdoor air system.
Alternatively, an energy recovery unit that provides 100% outdoor ventilation air to zone-level fan coil units that
mix outdoor air with return air from other ventilation zones before delivering it to the space would not be considered
a 100% outdoor air system. In this case, each fan coil unit must be analyzed as either a single-zone or a multiple-zone
recirculating system.
A separate ventilation rate procedure calculation must be made for each 100% outdoor air system serving the
building.

2. Stanke, Dennis, “Single-Zone & Dedicated-OA Systems,” ASHRAE Journal (October 2004); “Single-Path Multiple-Zone System Design,” ASHRAE Journal
(January 2005); “Designing Dual-Path Multiple-Zone Systems,” ASHRAE Journal (May 2005).
 615

Multiple-zone recirculating system

This type of system delivers a mixture of outdoor air and recirculated air to more than one ventilation zone. Typical
examples include a constant volume rooftop unit that serves more than one ventilation zone or a VAV system that
serves an entire building.
A separate ventilation rate procedure calculation must be made for each multiple-zone recirculating system
serving the building (see Further Explanation, Calculations for Multiple-Zone Recirculating Systems).

CALCULATIONS FOR MULTIPLE-ZONE RECIRCULATING SYSTEMS

Because of the complexity of the calculations for multiple-zone recirculating systems, project teams must use the
62MZCalc spreadsheet, or energy modeling software to perform the ventilation rate procedure calculations and
determine the amount of outdoor air required at the system level.

System ventilation efficiency

Multiple-zone system calculations need to account for the inefficiency that occurs when the zones have different
ratios of outdoor ventilation air to supply the air required for thermal conditioning. The calculations account for this
through system ventilation efficiency (Ev) and by determining the critical zone.
The critical zone is the zone with the highest proportion of required outdoor air to provided supply air. Critical

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

zones are often densely occupied spaces, such as conference rooms. When all zones are entered into the 62MZCalc
spreadsheet, the critical zone for the system is determined automatically.
For large projects, it may not be feasible to enter each individual zone into the 62MZCalc spreadsheet. In these
cases, the mechanical engineer can determine the outdoor air required for the system simply by identifying the
potentially critical zone(s). For a detailed discussion of identifying critical zones, see ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010,
Appendix A–A3.1, Selecting Zones for Calculation, and ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Example 6-L.

Diversity factor
Alternatively, the multiple-zone system calculations may include a diversity factor to account for the movement
of occupants between spaces, per ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 6.2.5.3.1. For example, in a school, it is
reasonable to assume that not all rooms are occupied simultaneously, because students and staff would not be in a
classroom if they are eating lunch in the cafeteria. In this case, diversity can be applied, provided the classroom and
cafeteria are served by the same ventilation system.
Diversity may not be applied to either single-zone or 100% outdoor air systems. If applying diversity, all
calculations and assumptions must be included with the documentation.
If preliminary calculations indicate that a multiple-zone system does not comply with ASHRAE 62.1–2010

EQ
outdoor air requirements, consider the following before increasing outdoor air at the air-handling unit(s):
·· Increase the amount of supply air (e.g., zone primary airflow, Vpz) to the critical zone. This has the effect of
decreasing the primary outdoor air fraction, Zpz, which will increase system efficiency and reduce the total
amount of outdoor air required.
·· For systems with VAV terminal units, increase the minimum terminal unit flow rate setting for the critical
zone. This has the same effect described above.

CONSIDERATIONS FOR VARIABLE OPERATING CONDITIONS

ASHRAE 62.1–2010 permits ventilation systems to reflect or respond to changes in zone occupancy in two ways,
time-average population and dynamic reset. These two strategies cannot be applied simultaneously, however.

Time-average population. In spaces where peak occupancy occurs over only a short period, a time-average design
population may be used, per ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.2.6.2 (see ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Examples
6-W, 6-X, 6-Y, 6-Z, and 6-AA). Project teams must include all calculations and assumptions used when submitting the
ventilation rate procedure calculations for time-average population.

Dynamic reset. The system varies the flow of outdoor air as operating conditions change, thereby reducing the
amount of energy needed to condition outdoor air. Demand-controlled ventilation is one of the most common reset
strategies. Refer to ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.2.7, for dynamic reset requirements, some of which include the
following:
616

·· A minimum level of outdoor, based on the area outdoor air rate, must be provided to each ventilation zone at
all times when dynamic reset is implemented. Refer to the ASHRAE standard’s Section 6.2.7.1.2.
·· The ventilation system must be controlled to provide the required amount of outdoor air in each zone, based
on current occupancy. For a multiple-zone recirculating system, a single CO2 sensor mounted in the return
duct does not meet the requirements of ASHRAE 62.1–2010, since it does not guarantee that the appropriate
amount of outdoor air will be provided to the critical zones. Refer to ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual,
Appendix A, and the ASHRAE Journal 3 for demand-controlled ventilation approaches for multiple-zone
systems and for CO2 setpoint calculations.

LOCAL EQUIVALENT TO ASHRAE STANDARD 62.1–2010

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

If local code is more stringent than ASHRAE 62.1–2010 for the system design, use the local code.

For mechanically ventilated spaces, prepare the following documentation:

·· A detailed summary comparing the two standards’ requirements
·· A comparison demonstrating that outdoor air requirements established by the local code for occupants and
for floor area are at least as stringent as the ASHRAE standard
·· Evidence that the local code incorporates the zone- and system-level efficiency of the ventilation systems in an
equivalent or more stringent way than the ASHRAE ventilation rate procedure

For naturally ventilated spaces, prepare the following documentation:

·· A detailed summary comparing the two standards’ requirements for fenestration opening area, distance from
window, and ceiling height
·· A description of the engineered ventilation modeling approach, and documentation of approval by the local
code authority

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION EXCEPTION

In some situations, compliance with this prerequisite is acceptable through an authority having jurisdiction
exception. With this exception, the local code authority (the authority having jurisdiction) approves the plans and
specifications used for the building’s engineered natural ventilation approach. There are three possible situations for
this exception: (1) the local code is ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, (2) the ventilation code governing the project is any
code other than ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, and (3) USGBC is serving as the authority having jurisdiction for the
purposes of LEED certification.
EQ

If USGBC is the authority having jurisdiction, a ventilation strategy that meets the intent of ASHRAE 62.1–2010 but
does not meet the requirements of the ventilation rate procedure may be approved. It is highly recommended that
project teams contact USGBC for approval of the engineered natural ventilation approach as early as possible, rather
than waiting until the system has been fully designed.

If the local code is ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, provide the following documentation:
·· Evidence that ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 (or a later version) is required for local building code compliance
·· A description of the engineered ventilation modeling approach
·· Documentation of plan approval by the local code authority

If the ventilation code governing the project is other than ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, provide the following:
·· Evidence that the alternate code is at least as stringent as ASHRAE 62.1–2010 in its entirety (see Further
Explanation, Local Equivalent to ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010).
·· A description of the engineered ventilation modeling approach
·· Documentation of plan approval by the local code authority

If USGBC is serving as the authority having jurisdiction for the purposes of LEED certification, provide the
following:

3. Stanke, Dennis, “Dynamic Reset for Multiple-Zone Systems,” ASHRAE Journal (March 2010).
 617

·· A description of the engineered ventilation modeling approach

·· Drawings and calculations or airflow analyses
·· Evidence that the project’s engineered natural ventilation system meets the intent of ASHRAE 62.1–2010.
This documentation must clearly identify how the project does not meet the standard’s natural ventilation
requirements, and how the ventilation design has been engineered to meet the intent of the standard.

OCCUPIED VERSUS OCCUPIABLE

ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 requires occupiable spaces to be ventilated. For consistency with other LEED credits,
this prerequisite uses the term occupied. Spaces classified as occupiable per Standard 62 are considered occupied for
the purposes of LEED certification (see Definitions).

EXAMPLES
For mechanical ventilation, see ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Examples 6-F through 6-V.

For natural ventilation, see ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Examples 6-AC through 6-AF.

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS
Core and Shell
If the scope of the core-and-shell project includes mechanical systems, the project team must comply with both
the ventilation and monitoring requirements. Make reasonable assumptions about the distribution of spaces and
ensure that air handlers are capable of providing enough outdoor air for anticipated occupants and space types. For
example, a typical buildout by an office tenant will include office spaces, corridors, and conference rooms. If these
spaces are all served by the air handling unit, the system-level outdoor air must be sufficient to meet the outdoor air
requirements of all three space types. If the occupancy is unknown, see Getting Started, Occupancy.
If the scope of the core-and-shell project does not include mechanical systems, the project is exempt from the
ventilation and monitoring requirements. See EQ Overview.

Healthcare
Review Steps 1–3 in Step-by-Step Guidance. For mechanically ventilated spaces and mixed-mode spaces when
mechanical ventilation is active, evaluate whether the spaces are ventilated according to ASHRAE Standard 170–
2008, Section 7; the 2010 Facility Guidelines Institute (FGI) Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care
Facilities (Table 2.1–2); or a local equivalent, whichever is most stringent. For any space type not covered by these

EQ
standards, use ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010 or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent, and follow Steps
2, 3, and 5 in Step-by-Step Guidance for mechanically ventilated spaces and mixed-mode spaces when mechanical
ventilation is active. Ensure that the design meets the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard 170–2008,
Sections 6–8, or a local equivalent, whichever is more stringent.
For naturally ventilated spaces, follow Step-by-Step Guidance for naturally ventilated spaces and mixed-mode
systems when mechanical ventilation is inactivated.

Data Centers
All occupied spaces in data centers, including offices and control rooms, must meet ventilation requirements.

Warehouses and Distribution Centers

Both warehouses and distribution centers (e.g., shipping and receiving) are listed as an occupancy category in
Table 6-1 of ASHRAE 62.1–2010. Therefore, these spaces must meet either the mechanical or natural ventilation
requirements. If ventilation cannot be provided to these spaces due to extenuating circumstances, contact USGBC.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Residential
Residential projects and units must comply with the ventilation requirements outlined above as well as all
requirements for combustion appliances and radon-resistance listed in the residential only credit language in the
rating system. Gas ranges must have hoods that exhaust air directly to the outdoors. No pressure testing is required if
closed-combustion or power-vented fireplaces and stoves are used.
618

To minimize the infiltration and concentration of radon gas, the National Building Code, NFPA 5000, Chapter
49 has incorporated several building techniques, including sealing, home pressurization, soil depressurization, and
ventilation.
Provide outdoor air to each unit directly from the outdoors. Project teams using exhaust ventilation systems
must specify how outdoor air is delivered at the flow rate required by ASHRAE 62.1–2010. Do not use systems that
rely on transfer air from pressurized hallways or corridors, adjacent dwelling units, attics, or elsewhere.

Apparatus Bays in Fire Stations

Typically, these spaces are not designed for human occupancy and would not be required to meet the prerequisite
requirements. If these spaces will be occupied, however, then they must be ventilated according to the applicable
reference standard for this prerequisite.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Vehicle Repair Facilities and Maintenance Bays

These space types include military buildings where trucks, tanks, aircraft, and other vehicles are being serviced.
Because these are occupied spaces, they must meet the prerequisite requirements.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project must pursue the prerequisite individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality

Naturally
Documentation Option 1 Option 2 Mixed Mode
ventilated

Confirmation that project meets minimum requirements of

X X X
ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Sections 4–7, or CEN Standard 13779–2007
EQ

Confirmation that project has MERV 11 or higher filters (if

X X X
project is in nonattainment area for PM2.5)

Ventilation rate procedure or CEN calculations and

X X X
documentation of assumptions for calculation variables

Confirmation that project meets minimum requirements of

ASHRAE Standard 62.1–2010, Section 7, and exhaust ventilation X X
requirements of Section 6.5

Documentation of CIBSE flow diagram process for project X X

Natural ventilation procedure calculations and ventilation

X X
opening information

Any natural ventilation exception from mechanical ventilation

X X
system (ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.4)

Any exception from authority having jurisdiction X X

Controls drawing showing monitoring devices (outdoor airflow

measuring device, current transducer, airflow switch, or similar X X X X
monitor, automatic indication device, CO2 sensor)
 619

Healthcare

Mechanically Naturally
Documentation Mixed mode
ventilated ventilated

Confirmation that project meets minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard

X X
170-2008, Sections 6-8

If applicable, air balance summary table to demonstrate that the minimum OA

changes, min total air changes, and space pressurization relationships provided X X
are consistent with the FGI or ASHRAE Standard 170

If applicable, ventilation rate procedure calculations and documentation of

X X
assumptions for calculation variables

Documentation of CIBSE flow diagram process for project X X

Natural ventilation procedure calculations and ventilation opening information X X

Any natural ventilation exception from mechanical ventilation system (ASHRAE

X X
62.1–2010, Section 6.4)

Any exception from authority having jurisdiction X X

MINIMUM INDOOR AIR QUALITY PERFORMANCE

Controls drawing showing monitoring devices (outdoor airflow measuring
device, current transducer, airflow switch, or similar monitor, automatic X X X
indication device, CO2 sensor)

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Outdoor air can increase the amount of energy needed to heat
and cool the building. Dynamic reset, such as demand-controlled ventilation, can reduce energy use.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. Airflow monitoring and increased ventilation addressed by
this prerequisite will assist in earning the related credit.

EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment. The building’s minimum outdoor air ventilation rate may affect the
duration of the flush-out required for Option 2, Occupied Flush-Out, of the related credit.

EQ
CHANGES FROM LEED 2009
·· ASHRAE Standard 62.1 has been updated to version 2010 from version 2007.
·· ASHRAE 62.1–2010 natural ventilation calculations now consider window configuration and ceiling height.
·· ASHRAE 62.1–2010 now requires supplementary mechanical ventilation systems for naturally ventilated
spaces in some cases.
·· Project teams are required to confirm the appropriate application of natural ventilation through CIBSE AM10,
Figure 2.8 (flow chart).
·· Projects outside the U.S. are now allowed to demonstrate achievement via CEN requirements (rather than
ASHRAE 62.1–2010).
·· This prerequisite now includes the monitoring requirements previously included in Indoor Environmental
Quality Credit 1, Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring. Additionally, the monitoring requirements now distinguish
between variable air volume and constant volume systems.
·· This prerequisite now includes specific requirements for residential projects. These requirements are mostly
taken from LEED for Homes, Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 2, Combustion Venting.
620

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE 62.1–2010: ashrae.org

ASHRAE Standard 170–2008: ashrae.org

2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities: fgiguidelines.org

CEN Standard EN 15251–2007: cen.eu

CEN Standard EN 13779–2007: cen.eu

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CIBSE Applications Manual AM10, March 2005: cibse.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
occupiable space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended
primarily for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are occupied only occasionally
and for short periods of time (ASHRAE 62.1–2010)

occupied space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended primarily
for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for
short periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied spaces
based on the duration of the occupancy, individual or multioccupant based on the quantity of occupants, and densely
or nondensely occupied spaces based on the concentration of occupants in the space.

unoccupied space an area designed for equipment, machinery, or storage rather than for human activities. An
equipment area is considered unoccupied only if retrieval of equipment is occasional.
EQ
 621

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY PREREQUISITE

Environmental Tobacco
Smoke Control
This prerequisite applies to:
New Construction Data Centers

ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL

Core and Shell Warehouses and Distribution Centers
Schools Hospitality
Retail Healthcare

INTENT

To prevent or minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor surfaces,

and ventilation air distribution systems to environmental tobacco smoke.

REQUIREMENTS

EQ
NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,
WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE

Prohibit smoking inside the building.

Prohibit smoking outside the building except in designated smoking areas located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters)
from all entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. Also prohibit smoking outside the property line in
spaces used for business purposes.
If the requirement to prohibit smoking within 25 feet (7.5 meters) cannot be implemented because of code,
provide documentation of these regulations.
Signage must be posted within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building entrances indicating the no-smoking policy.
622

RESIDENTIAL ONLY

OPTION 1. NO SMOKING
Meet the requirements above.

OR

OPTION 2. COMPARTMENTALIZATION OF SMOKING AREAS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Prohibit smoking inside all common areas of the building. The prohibition must be communicated in building rental
or lease agreements or condo or coop association covenants and restrictions. Make provisions for enforcement.
Prohibit smoking outside the building except in designated smoking areas located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters)
from all entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. The no-smoking policy also applies to spaces outside the
property line used for business purposes.
If the requirement to prohibit smoking within 25 feet (7.5 meters) cannot be implemented because of code,
provide documentation of these regulations.
Signage must be posted within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building entrances indicating the no-smoking policy.

Each unit must be compartmentalized to prevent excessive leakage between units:

·· Weather-strip all exterior doors and operable windows in the residential units to minimize leakage from
outdoors.
·· Weather-strip all doors leading from residential units into common hallways.
·· Minimize uncontrolled pathways for the transfer of smoke and other indoor air pollutants between residential
units by sealing penetrations in the walls, ceilings, and floors and by sealing vertical chases (including utility
chases, garbage chutes, mail drops, and elevator shafts) adjacent to the units.
·· Demonstrate a maximum leakage of 0.23 cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.17 liters per second per
square meter) at 50 Pa of enclosure (i.e., all surfaces enclosing the apartment, including exterior and party
walls, floors, and ceilings).

SCHOOLS
EQ

Prohibit smoking on site.

Signage must be posted at the property line indicating the no-smoking policy.
 623

BEHIND THE INTENT

Tobacco use kills more than five million people worldwide every year.1 Smoking also puts nonsmokers at risk by
exposing them to environmental tobacco smoke (ETS), often called secondhand smoke. In 2006, nearly half of all
nonsmoking Americans were regularly exposed to secondhand smoke.2 ETS exposure at home or in the workplace
increases nonsmokers’ risk of developing lung cancer, heart disease, and other serious health problems.3
Prohibiting indoor smoking is the only way to fully eliminate the health risks associated with ETS.4 For this
reason, designated indoor smoking rooms are not allowed in LEED-certified buildings. Only residential projects
are excepted, because of legal ownership issues. The prerequisite also prohibits smoking in outdoor areas used for
business purposes. A business that uses a public sidewalk or courtyard for seating or kiosks still maintains control
over those areas, even though they are typically outside the property boundary line. They are included under this
prerequisite because the business owner still has control over the smoking policy in these areas.
Restricting the introduction of ETS into the building interior not only benefits human health, it also improves
the longevity of building surfaces, air distribution systems, furniture, and furnishings when compared with those in
buildings that allow smoking.5

ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE SMOKE-FREE LOCATIONS

Obtain confirmation from the owner that smoking is prohibited inside the building. Residential projects
may allow smoking in specific units, with specific requirements for ensuring that those units are
adequately isolated (see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations).
·· Identify the location of building openings, including entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable
windows. Identify the property line and the location of outdoor areas used for business purposes, both
inside and outside the property line. Indicate these elements on a site plan, map, or sketch.
·· Emergency exits do not qualify as building openings if the doors are alarmed, because alarmed doors
will not be opened. Emergency exits without alarms qualify as building openings.

STEP 2. DESIGNATE LOCATIONS OF EXTERIOR SMOKING AREAS

EQ
Determine whether the project has or will have designated outdoor smoking areas. Locate any area
designated for smoking at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from smoke-free areas, based on the information
gathered in Step 1. The 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance is a straight-line calculation.
·· Consider design strategies that may encourage people to use the designated smoking area, such as
covered seating.
·· Educate occupants on the smoking policy and encourage them to self-police. This is particularly
important in retail situations.
·· Ashtrays signal that smoking is allowed in a particular area. Be sure these are placed outside the 25-
foot (7.5-meter) perimeter.

STEP 3. CONFIRM THAT SMOKING IS PROHIBITED IN NONDESIGNATED AREAS

Provide confirmation from the owner that smoking outside designated areas is prohibited in any space
used by the building for business purposes, even if the space falls outside the property line. Examples of
spaces used for business purposes include sidewalk seating, kiosks, and courtyards.
·· Smoking must be prohibited in areas within 25 feet (7.5 meters) from building openings.

1. World Health Organization, WHO Report on the Global Tobacco Smoke Epidemic (Geneva, Switzerland, 2009), who.int/tobacco/mpower/2009/gtcr_
download/en/index.html (accessed June 10, 2013).
2. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, The Health Consequences of Involuntary Exposure to Tobacco Smoke: A Report of the Surgeon General
(Atlanta, Georgia, 2006). surgeongeneral.gov/library/reports/secondhandsmoke/report-index.html (accessed June 10, 2013).
3. Ibid.
4. Ibid.
5. Mudarri, D.H., The Costs and Benefits of Smoking Restrictions: An Assessment of the Smoke-Free Environment Act of 1993 (H.R.3434) (Washington, DC:
Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Radiation and Indoor Air, Indoor Air Division, 1994), tobaccodocuments.org/landman/89268337-8360.html
(accessed June 10, 2013).
624

·· If smoking cannot be prohibited for the full 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance because of code restrictions,
provide documentation of the regulation (see Further Explanation, Code Limitations and
Restrictions).
·· Smoking in the prohibited area is not allowed, even when the 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance extends
beyond the property line. The boundary of the space for business purposes, other than a building
opening, indicates the end of a nonsmoking area (see Further Explanation, Property Line LessThan 25
Feet from the Building).

STEP 4. DETERMINE LOCATIONS OF NO-SMOKING SIGNAGE

Post signage within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building entrances indicating that smoking is not allowed.
·· School projects must post signage at the property line adjacent to all pedestrian and vehicular
entrances indicating the no-smoking policy for the school site.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Language on the signage is up to the project team. Two examples of successful language include
“No smoking allowed within 25 feet” and “Smoking is allowed in designated smoking areas only.”
·· It may be helpful to stripe sidewalks to show the no-smoking boundary.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

PROPERTY LINE LESS THAN 25 FEET (7.5 METERS) FROM THE BUILDING
Projects with a property line less than 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the building must consider space usage when
determining the outdoor smoking policy. The no-smoking requirement still applies to spaces outside the property
line used for business purposes. Public sidewalks are not considered used for business purposes, but smoking must
still be prohibited on sidewalks within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of openings. Building staff should be educated about this
policy so that they can direct smokers to designated smoking areas and away from entrances or windows.
Examples of common business activities that would require the smoking prohibition include outdoor seating,
outdoor stadium areas, courtyards, and banking kiosks.
EQ
 625

FIGURE 1. Example site plan with no smoking areas

ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL

EQ
CODE LIMITATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS
Many local governments ban smoking in the workplace and in public spaces. These regulations do not always meet
the 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance for exterior smoking required by this prerequisite. In most cases, LEED projects can
extend the smoking ban to the required 25 feet (7.5 meters), regardless of existing code. However, if existing code
explicitly prohibits this, building owners may still achieve the prerequisite by providing documentation of the code.
626
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 2. Smoking bans by state

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Healthcare
The residential-only Option 2 Compartmentalization of Smoking Areas is available to Healthcare projects that have
EQ

a clinical need to permit residents to smoke.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Multitenant
Owners and property management teams for multitenant buildings may find it useful to communicate the interior
and exterior smoking policy in tenant guidelines, handbooks, or similar documents.

Residential Healthcare
Residential health care projects, such as long-term care facilities, may allow smoking inside residential units if there
is a clinical need to permit residents to smoke. Examples of clinical needs include medical treatments for substance
abuse and psychiatric programs.

Residential
Residential projects are the only project type that may choose to allow smoking indoors in specific units. If smoking
is permitted in residential projects, leakage from smoking units to other areas of the building must be prevented.
Confirm the following requirements:
·· All applicable doors and windows are weather-stripped.
·· All residential units are sealed in applicable places.
·· Testing results demonstrate compliance with the identified leakage rate requirements (see Referenced
Standards).
 627

Smoking must be prohibited in all building common areas. This prohibition must be communicated through rental
or lease agreements, or condo or co-op association covenants and restrictions.
Prohibiting smoking on private residential balconies is a best practice for protecting nearby nonsmoking units
and balconies from ETS infiltration. Consider prohibiting smoking on balconies in lease agreements.
All units must be compartmentalized because of potential tenant turnover. The following strategies are
recommended to achieve proper air sealing:
·· Use caulk for cracks and smaller gaps.
·· Use expanding foam sealant for larger openings.
·· Use mastic to seal all ducts.
·· Use high-quality, durable, exterior-grade weatherstrip on all exterior doors, operable windows, and doors
leading from residential units into common hallways.
·· Confirm that all recessed can lights in insulated ceilings are airtight and IC-rated.
·· Block stud cavities at changes in ceiling height and joist cavities under attic kneewall.
·· Use sealed exterior sheathing and/or netting for dense insulation at attic kneewall.

Seal the following areas:

ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL

·· Bottom plate to subfloor
·· Penetrations in the top plate
·· Drywall to framing
·· Window and door rough openings with expanding foam
·· Gaps in exterior wall sheathing
·· Exterior walls of fireplace chase
·· Shower and tub drains
·· Cantilevered floor above supporting wall
·· Seams in band joist between conditioned floors
·· Electrical and communication boxes

Properly seal all penetrations in unit walls, ceilings, and floors, including the following:
·· Perimeter doors, windows, and baseboards
·· Plumbing and electrical penetrations, including outlets and switches, through insulated floors, ceilings, and
walls

EQ
·· Recessed lights and fans in insulated ceilings
·· Dropped ceilings and cantilevered floors
·· Exhaust vent penetrations
·· Sheathing, including exterior light fixtures
·· Band joist, including exhaust ducts
·· Through drywall in attached garage
·· Insulated subfloor, including HVAC boots

Properly seal airpath connections to all vertical chases adjacent to smoking units:
·· Utility chases
·· Garbage chutes
·· Mail drops
·· Elevator shafts
·· All other adjacent vertical chases

Compartmentalization is achieved when individual residential units are adequately isolated from adjacent units and
spaces. This must be demonstrated for all units. The most common way to meet this requirement is to conduct a
blower door test that follows either the RESNET standards, Energy Star Multifamily Testing Protocol, ASTM E779-
03, or ASTM E1827-11 (see Referenced Standards).
628

Consider having a building performance technician visit the job site to explain proper air-sealing techniques
before insulation and drywall are installed. Perform blower door testing after drywall is installed and before painting.
Testing a single representative unit first can help identify any leakages and pinpoint areas where additional sealing
is likely to be required in other units. Use the test results to improve the construction process so that the remaining
units pass the test.
A sampling rate of at least one in seven smoking units can be used, per the Residential Manual for Compliance
with California’s 2001 Energy Efficiency Standards, Chapter 4.
The results must demonstrate a maximum leakage of 0.23 cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.17 liters per
second per square meter) at 50 Pa of enclosure.
Teams may use another air leakage test, such as tracer gas testing, provided that the same performance results as
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

a blower door test can be documented. Testing must follow CEN Standard EN 1779 or CEN Standard EN 13185 with
EN 13192.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Eligible.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

All projects Residential projects

Documentation where smoking is where smoking is
prohibited permitted

Description of project’s no-smoking policy, including information on how policy is

X X
communicated to building occupants and enforced

Copy of no-smoking policy, signed letter from owner describing project’s no-smoking policy
and enforcement, or copy of any legally binding covenants or restrictions to verify status of X
residential units as nonsmoking

Door schedule demonstrating weather-stripping at exterior unit doors and doors leading
X
EQ

from units to common hallways

Differential air pressure test report for units in project building X

Scaled site plan or map showing the location of designated outdoor smoking and
no-smoking areas, location of property line, and site boundary and indicating 25-foot X X
(7.5-meter) distance from building openings

Drawings, photos, or other evidence of signage communicating no-smoking policy X X

Any code restrictions that prevent establishment of no-smoking requirements X X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.
 629

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Designated interior smoking rooms are no longer permitted, with the exception of residential spaces. This
change recognizes the overwhelming evidence and broad consensus that exposure to ETS harms human
health, and it supports higher indoor air quality in LEED projects.
·· The no-smoking policy has been expanded to apply to spaces outside the property line if the space is used for
business purposes and is within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of building openings or outdoor air intakes.
·· A specific requirement for the location of exterior posted signs has been added.
·· The acceptable procedure for demonstrating compliance with air leakage requirements in residential projects
has been expanded. This change allows teams to use testing procedures other than blower door testing.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization, ASTM E779-03: astm.org

Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an Orifice Blower Door, ASTM

ENVIRONMENTAL TOBACCO SMOKE CONTROL

E1827-11: astm.org

Nondestructive testing, Leak testing—Criteria for method and technique selection, CEN Standard EN
1779—1999: cen.eu

Nondestructive testing, Leak testing, Tracer gas method, CEN Standard EN 13185—2001: cen.eu

Nondestructive testing, Leak testing, Calibration of reference leaks for gases, CEN Standard EN 13192—2001:
cen.eu

RESNET Standards: resnet.us/standards

ENERGY STAR Multifamily Testing Protocol: energystar.gov/ia/partners/bldrs_lenders_raters

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE

EQ
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

630
 631

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY PREREQUISITE

Minimum Acoustic
Performance
This prerequisite applies to: Schools

MINIMUM ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE

INTENT

To provide classrooms that facilitate teacher-to-student and student-to-

student communication through effective acoustic design.

REQUIREMENTS

HVAC Background Noise

Achieve a maximum background noise level of 40 dBA from heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC)

EQ
systems in classrooms and other core learning spaces. Follow the recommended methodologies and best practices
for mechanical system noise control in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1, Annex A.1; the 2011 HVAC Applications
ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control (with errata); AHRI Standard 885–2008; or a local
equivalent for projects outside the U.S.

Exterior Noise
For high-noise sites (peak-hour Leq above 60 dBA during school hours), implement acoustic treatment and other
measures to minimize noise intrusion from exterior sources and control sound transmission between classrooms
and other core learning spaces. Projects at least one-half mile (800 meters) from any significant noise source (e.g.,
aircraft overflights, highways, trains, industry) are exempt.

Reverberation Time
Adhere to the following reverberation time requirements.
632

Classrooms and Core Learning Spaces < 20,000 Cubic Feet

(566 Cubic Meters)
Design classrooms and other core learning spaces to include sufficient sound-absorptive finishes for compliance
with the reverberation time requirements specified in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1, Acoustical Performance
Criteria, Design Requirements and Guidelines for Schools, or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.

OPTION 1
For each room, confirm that the total surface area of acoustic wall panels, ceiling finishes, and other sound-absorbent
finishes equals or exceeds the total ceiling area of the room (excluding lights, diffusers, and grilles). Materials must
have an NRC of 0.70 or higher to be included in the calculation.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

OR

OPTION 2
Confirm through calculations described in ANSI Standard S12.60-2010 that rooms are designed to meet
reverberation time requirements as specified in that standard.

Classrooms and Core Learning Spaces ≥ 20,000 Cubic Feet

(566 Cubic Meters)
Meet the recommended reverberation times for classrooms and core learning spaces described in the NRC-CNRC
Construction Technology Update No. 51, Acoustical Design of Rooms for Speech (2002), or a local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.

Exceptions
Exceptions to the requirements because of a limited scope of work or to observe historic preservation requirements
will be considered.
EQ
 633

BEHIND THE INTENT

Acoustic performance is important to consider when designing classrooms and other core learning spaces because
it can affect students’ learning and performance. Background noise and reverberation can distract and confuse
children, whose ability to distinguish sounds is not fully developed.1 Background noises compete with the primary
sound source—teachers or fellow students—and reverberation often reduces speech intelligibility and clarity of
sound. Students of any age who are distracted by extraneous sounds have difficulty retaining information and staying
engaged in learning.2 Figure 1 shows the typical sources of noise that impinge on concentration in core learning
spaces.

MINIMUM ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE

Figure 1. Sources of noise (from left): exterior noise, reverberation, HVAC equipment, sound transmission, and “crosstalk”
between rooms via ductwork

EQ
For children with temporary or permanent hearing loss or cochlear implants and children who are nonnative
speakers, poor acoustics in schools erect needless additional educational barriers. Assistive technologies such as
hearing aids amplify both wanted and unwanted sound across a variety of frequencies; these technologies can do
little to improve student-to-teacher or student-to-student communication in spaces with poor acoustics. According
to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, children with temporary hearing loss—some 15% of the school-
age population—are especially affected, as are children with speech impairments or learning disabilities.
This prerequisite’s reference standards and documentation options allow a project team with even a limited
knowledge of acoustics to demonstrate compliance and become aware of school-appropriate acoustic standards.
The prerequisite thresholds were specifically chosen to avoid mandating top-tier design practices for high-
performance spaces, which would be difficult or impractical to implement within school budgets. Teams that
consider acoustics early in the design process (when thinking about programming, site layout, and room layouts)
will be best positioned to meet the prerequisite’s intent.

1. Acoustical Society of America, American National Standard: Acoustical Performance Criteria, Design Requirements, and Guidelines for Schools, Part 1:
Permanent Schools (2007).
2. Centers for Disease Control, National Workshop on Mild and Unilateral Hearing Loss (2005). cdc.gov/ncbddd/hearingloss/conference.html (accessed June
10, 2013).
634

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL CLASSROOMS AND OTHER CORE LEARNING SPACES

Determine which rooms and spaces are covered by this prerequisite (see EQ Overview for a list of space
types that are considered classrooms and other core learning spaces, and see Further Explanation,
Excluded Space Types and Further Explanation, Project Type Variations, Schools).

STEP 2. REVIEW ACOUSTIC CRITERIA

Evaluate how the three acoustic performance areas addressed by this prerequisite affect each applicable
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

space:
·· HVAC background noise. Engineers or acoustic experts will need to analyze A-weighted sound
pressure levels resulting from HVAC equipment.
·· Exterior noise. Engineers and designers will need to minimize exterior noise intrusion through design
strategies that reduce noise source level.
·· Reverberation time. Designers will need to specify sound-absorbing treatments and/or revisit room
size to address reverberation time.
Prepare a log or spreadsheet to record the pertinent acoustic information for each space.
Determine how the acoustic requirements fit into the design process so that each can be addressed by
the responsible party at the appropriate time.

STEP 3. ADDRESS HVAC BACKGROUND NOISE

Identify equipment and air distribution elements that could contribute to HVAC background noise in core
learning spaces.
·· When selecting and designing HVAC systems, consider basic acoustic design techniques from 2011
HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control, page 48.8.
·· Consider specific source design considerations from 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook,
Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control, pages 48.8–48.30.
·· Compile acoustic performance data at the specific operating points from the HVAC equipment
manufacturer’s data.
·· Consider source-receiver paths when locating core learning spaces, and HVAC equipment. For
example, noise-generating HVAC equipment could be placed above a corridor rather than above a
classroom.

STEP 4. VERIFY HVAC BACKGROUND NOISE

EQ

Determine A-weighted sound pressure levels for each core learning space through one or more of the
following methods. Consider sound pressure levels from HVAC equipment only; plumbing, lighting, and
electrical may be excluded.
·· Calculate sound pressure levels per 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise
and Vibration Control. Follow the steps in the HVAC Noise-Reduction Design Procedures section of
the handbook (pages 48.38–48.41). The dBA method and a 40-dBA sound pressure limit may be used
instead of the referenced noise criteria method. Calculations may be done in the design phase.
·· Calculate sound pressure levels per AHRI Standard 885–2008, Procedure for Estimating Occupied
Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets. Follow the steps outlined in
Section 6, Calculation Procedures for Estimating Sound Levels in Occupied Spaces (pages 11–26). A
sound pressure limit of 40 dBA may be used in lieu of the dBA and dBC levels shown in Table 15 of the
standard. Calculations may be done in the design phase.
·· Measure sound pressure levels per ANSI S12.60–2010, Part 1, American National Standard Acoustical
Performance Criteria, Design Requirements, and Guidelines for Schools, Annex A.1. A sound pressure
limit of 40 dBA may be used in lieu of the dBA and dBC levels shown in Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.
The measurements must be performed during postconstruction in furnished spaces with HVAC
systems operating in typical conditions and while no occupants are present. Noises from sources other
than HVAC systems should be minimized or turned off during testing.
·· Measure sound pressure levels per 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise
and Vibration Control. Follow field measurement guidelines from the Determining Compliance section.
Follow guidelines from the Room Noise Measurements section. A sound pressure limit of 40 dBA may
be used in lieu of the dBA and dBC levels shown in Table 1 of the handbook. The measurements must
 635

be performed during postconstruction in furnished spaces with HVAC systems operating in typical
conditions and while no occupants are present. Noises from sources other than HVAC systems should
be minimized or turned off during testing.
A local standard, procedure, or handbook that is equivalent to one of the above methods may also
be used. Additionally, a sound rating method other than the standard weighted decibel method (dBA
method), such as the noise criteria (NC), room criteria (RC), room criteria neutral (RCN), balanced noise
criteria (NCB), A-room criteria (RC Mark II), or dBC methods, may be used.
Prepare a narrative that describes the methods followed and a summary report with measurements or
calculations.

STEP 5. DETERMINE PRESENCE OF EXTERIOR NOISE SOURCES

Assess the project site for exterior noise sources. Sources of exterior noise can often be readily identified
through a site visit during normal school hours. Predicted noise sources may also be identified through
study of neighborhood maps or aerial photography that show adjacent site uses. If the site is in the
flyover area of an airport, Ldn data are typically available online in noise exposure maps (NEMs).
·· Identify significant noise sources within ½ mile (800 meters) of the face of the building. Examples of
significant sources are major transit corridors, industrial or manufacturing facilities, outdoor concert or
sports venues, rail lines, and air traffic lanes. If there are no significant noise sources, skip the exterior
Leq measurement, and skip Step 6.
·· Conduct acoustic readings on the project site using a sound meter that can measure equivalent
continuous noise levels (Leq) measured in A-weighted decibels (dBA) (see Further Explanation,
Understanding Peak-Hour Leq ). Measure exterior noise during the normal period of school hours and

MINIMUM ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE

repeat as necessary to capture intermittent noise sources such as train and airplane traffic. Record site
observations, noting the source, direction, and intensity of the exterior noise, so that the project team
can develop design strategies for noise mitigation. If applicable, data from the NEM may be used in
lieu of taking measurements.
·· If peak-hour Leq measurements exceed 60 dBA, the project is considered a high-noise site and the
team must implement noise reduction measures (Step 6). If the peak-hour Leq measurements are
below 60 dBA, the team may skip Step 6.
·· It is acceptable to forgo measuring Leq if it is already known that the project is on a high-noise site.

STEP 6. FOR HIGH-NOISE SITES, IMPLEMENT MEASURES TO MINIMIZE EXTERIOR NOISE

INTRUSION
Minimize the amount of exterior noise in core learning spaces.
·· Explore strategies that reduce the source or occurrence of noise, if collaboration with the noise-
generating property owner is possible.

EQ
·· Define the path(s) of noise on the site, and identify how each measure implemented creates a barrier
or dampening effect between the source and the receiving core learning space. Include acoustic
treatments as appropriate.
·· Refer to 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control, Sound
Control for Outdoor Equipment (pages 48.33–34), for additional design guidance.
The appropriate combination of strategies depends on the type and regularity of noise sources. Example
strategies include the following:
·· Site barriers, such as earth berms and site walls
·· Architectural barriers, such as other building spaces and courtyards
·· Architectural material barriers, such as dense wall construction and offset studs
·· Construction best practices, such as sound sealants and window and door gaskets

STEP 7. DESIGN FOR OPTIMUM REVERBERATION TIMES

Use sound-absorptive materials or other strategies to limit reverberation time in core learning spaces.
·· Sound absorptive materials can be applied to any planar surface in the space. While applying
treatment to the walls is typically the most effective way forward, a sound absorptive ceiling
is generally the most cost effective for a classroom. Consider using absorptive wall surfaces or
treatments in spaces that primarily require hard surfaces, such as teaching laboratories.
·· For spaces that will accommodate seating, consider soft or upholstered backs and seats.
·· Refer to ANSI 12.60–2010, Annex C, for additional design guidance.
636

·· Determine sound absorption properties (sound absorption coefficients at 500 Hz, 1000 Hz and 2,000
Hz and/or noise reduction coefficients) for absorptive materials. Use manufacturers’ documentation
or Table 1 for common materials and pay attention to the mounting condition employed for any values
determined from laboratory tests (see ANSI 12.60–2010, Section C.2.1).

TABLE 1. Sound absorption coefficients for common materials

Coefficient ( ) Coefficient ( )

Material 500HZ 1000HZ 2000HZ Material 500Hz 1000Hz 2000HZ

Walls Floor
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Brick, unglazed .03 .04 .05 Concrete or Terrazzo .015 .02 .02

Linoleum, asphalt, rubber, or cork

Brick, unglazed, painted .02 .02 .02 .03 .03 .03
tile on concrete

Plaster, gypsum, or lime,

.02 .03 .04 Wood .10 .07 .06
smooth finish on tile or brick

Plaster, gypsum, or lime,

Wood parquet in asphalt on
rough or smooth finish on .06 .05 .04 .07 .06 .06
concrete
lath

Concrete block, light, porous .31 .29 .39 Carpet, heavy, on concrete .14 .37 .60

Concrete block, dense, Same, on 40 oz hairfelt or foam

.06 .07 .09 .57 .69 .71
painted rubber

Same, with impermeable latex

Gypsum boards. 1/2-inch
.05 .04 .07 backing on 40 oz hairfelt or foam .39 .34 .48
nailed to 2x4s, 16 inches o.c.
rubber

Plywood paneling, 3/8-inch

.17 .09 .10 Marble or glaze tile .01 .01 .02
thick

Large panes of heavy plate

.04 .03 .02 Fabrics
glass

Light velour, 10 oz per sq yd, hung

Ordinary window glass .18 .12 .07 .11 .17 .24
straight, in contact with walll

Medium velour, 14 oz per sq yd,

Misc .49 .75 .70
draped to half area
EQ

Chairs, metal or wood seats, Heavy velour, 18 oz per sq yd,

.22 .39 .38 .55 .72 .70
each, unoccupied draped to half area

STEP 8. CALCULATE ROOM VOLUME

Determine the room volume of each core learning space in the project. Use the room volume to
determine whether the reverberation time requirements are defined by the ANSI or NRC-CNRC standard.

STEP 9. SELECT OPTION FOR CLASSROOMS AND CORE LEARNING SPACES LESS THAN
20,000 CUBIC FEET (566 CUBIC METERS)
Determine the acoustic design approach option that is appropriate for each space:
·· Option 1 is for simple spaces with regular shapes and parallel surfaces.
·· Option 2 is for more complex spaces or for project teams that want a tailored solution to handle
unique conditions.
For spaces with a volume between 13,500 cubic feet (382 cubic meters) and 20,000 cubic feet (566
cubic meters), Option 2 is strongly encouraged. Although such spaces are eligible to demonstrate
compliance using Option 1, consideration of noise reduction coefficients (NRCs) alone may be insufficient
if the space features irregular shapes and nonparallel surfaces; these configurations may need acoustic
panels on both ceilings and walls to reduce reverberation.
 637

Option 1. Total Compliant Acoustic Finish Area Exceeds Ceiling Area

Calculate the total ceiling area for the core learning space, excluding diffusers, grilles, and light
fixtures. If the ceiling is sloped, consider the ceiling area to be the total area of that sloped surface
(minus grilles and light fixtures). If the ceiling has multiple surfaces or levels, use the entire ceiling
surface (minus grilles and light fixtures). Include vertical and sloped ceiling elements in the ceiling area
calculation.
The total area of compliant sound absorbing treatment must equal or exceed the total ceiling area
calculated in the previous step. Sound absorbing treatments may be applied to the ceiling or wall, or
may be free hanging acoustic features.
Collect manufacturers’ documentation to verify the NRC of each acoustic finish material is 0.7
or higher. Record the area of each acoustic finish material for credit documentation (see Further
Explanation, Examples).

Option 2. ANSI Standard S12.60–2010 Compliance

Follow the procedures described in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Annex A.4, to confirm that the
reverberation time for each space complies with the maximum permitted reverberation times in Table 1
of the standard (footnote e of the table may be excluded). Reverberation times are 0.6 seconds or 0.7
seconds, based on space volume.
Reverberation time must be verified at 500, 1000, and 2000 Hz. Calculation and measurement
options are available. Retain calculations or measurements for credit documentation. For detailed
reverberation time calculations, see EQ Credit Acoustic Performance, Further Explanation.

MINIMUM ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE

STEP 10. CONFIRM APPROPRIATE REVERBERATION TIMES FOR SPACES 20,000 CUBIC
FEET (566 CUBIC METERS) AND LARGER
Follow the procedures described in NRC-CNRC Construction Technology Update No. 51, Acoustical
Design of Rooms for Speech (2002), to confirm that the reverberation time for each space complies with
Figure 3 of the standard. Reverberation times vary from approximately 0.45 seconds to 1.23 seconds,
based on space volume, use, and type.
Reverberation time must be verified at 500, 1000, and 2000 Hz using calculations or measurements.
Retain calculations or measurement logs for credit documentation. For detailed reverberation time
calculations, see EQ Credit Acoustic Performance, Further Explanation.

EQ
FURTHER EXPLANATION

EXAMPLES
Example 1. 100% acoustic ceiling treatment (Option 1)
A project team has calculated the area of the diffusers and recessed lighting and subtracted it from the total area of
the ceiling. The remaining area, 1,350 square feet (125 square meters), has been specified with an acoustic ceiling
material rated 0.70 NRC; the rating is documented with testing data supplied by the manufacturer. Because the
ceiling material is compliant and covers the entire adjusted ceiling area, the project meets the requirements.
638

Figure 2. Example of 100% acoustic ceiling treatment

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Example 2. Total acoustic finish area (Option 1)

A project team has calculated the area of the diffusers and the recessed lighting and subtracted it from the total
area of the ceiling. The remaining area, 1,350 square feet (125 square meters), dictates the total amount of acoustic
treatment needed. This team has elected to use 1,140 square feet (105 square meters) of acoustic ceiling tile and
added three wall panels of acoustic treatment that totals 210 square feet (20 square meters). For both the ceiling tile
and the wall material, the team specifies material that exceeds the credit minimum rating of 0.70 NRC, a rating that
is verified by manufacturer-supplied testing data. Because the total area with compliant acoustic finish equals the
adjusted ceiling area, the project achieves the prerequisite.

Figure 3. Example of total acoustic finish area

EQ
 639

EXCLUDED SPACE TYPES

Prerequisite requirements do not apply to natatoriums, auditoriums, music performance spaces, teleconferencing
rooms, or special education rooms, such as those for severely acoustically challenged students. These spaces require
special acoustical design and treatment that are not within the scope of this prerequisite or the referenced standards.

UNDERSTANDING PEAK-HOUR LEQ

Peak-hour Leq is the equivalent continuous noise level (Leq ) for the peak hour. In lay terms, Leq is an energy-average
of the noise level over a specified sample time. Most modern sound meters can measure Leq. Teams should follow
common industry practice for determining Leq, and source the methodology for their calculations.

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Schools
Schools projects with limited scope or historical preservation restrictions may still be able to achieve the
prerequisite if the team implements as many measures as feasible for each requirement and proposes alternative
means to meet the intent.
Strategies may extend to technological, behavioral, or other unconstructed methods of providing acceptable
acoustic conditions for classrooms and core learning spaces. For example, a project may not be allowed to change
exterior and interior finishes or replace windows and doors of designated historical structures, but the project may
be able to modify the exterior landscape, install suspended acoustic treatments, and specify soft seating to meet the

MINIMUM ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE

intent of the prerequisite.
Provide a detailed narrative about what is and is not under the project team’s control. Document and describe all
acoustic mitigation strategies undertaken to meet the intent.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
Local equivalents to ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1, and NRC-CNRC Construction Technology Update No. 51,
Acoustical Design of Rooms for Speech (2002), are acceptable.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

EQ
Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project must pursue the prerequisite individually. For exterior noise, the Leq measurements
and measures to minimize noise intrusion may be appropriate for the entire campus.
640

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
Spaces with identical size and material treatments may be documented together. To reduce documentation burden,
calculations and measurements can also be based on acoustically critical spaces or room types or worst-case
combinations of room assemblies.

All
Documentation
projects

Summary report of measurements and calculations documenting compliance with selected

Background noise X
reference standard
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Description of exterior noise sources (or lack thereof) within ½-mile (800-meter) radius X

Exterior L eq calculations and narrative describing when measurements were taken (if required) X
noise
Description or drawings of measures and strategies implemented to minimize exterior noise
X
(if required)

Option 1, documentation showing materials with NRC of 0.70 or higher X

Reverberation time,
spaces less than
Option 2, calculations or measurements showing that reverberation times meet the ANSI
20,000 ft2 (1 860 m2) X
S12.60–2010 or requirements

Reverberation time,
Calculations or measurements showing that reverberation times meet NRC-CNRC
spaces 20,000 ft2 X
Construction Technology Update No. 51 requirements
(1 860 m2) or larger

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Credit Acoustic Performance. This related credit defines additional acoustic performance criteria that build on
the fundamentals of this prerequisite.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The maximum allowable background noise has been revised from 45 dBA to 40 dBA.
EQ

·· An exterior noise requirement has been added to minimize exterior noise intrusion into classrooms and core
learning spaces.
·· The ANSI referenced standard has been updated to ANSI S12.60–2010.
·· The ASHRAE referenced standard has been updated to 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter
48, Noise and Vibration Control.
·· For spaces 20,000 cubic feet (566 cubic meters) or larger, the referenced standard for reverberation time
has changed to NRC-CNRC Construction Technology Update No. 51. This standard specifies variable
reverberation time and total sound absorption values depending on the size of the space.
·· Exceptions for projects with limited renovation scopes or strict historic preservation requirements have been
added.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
AHRI Standard 885–2008, Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air
Terminals and Air Outlets: ahrinet.org

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASHRAE Standard S12.60–2010, Acoustical Performance

Criteria, Design Requirements, and Guidelines for Schools: asastore.aip.org
 641

2011 HVAC Applications, ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control: ashrae.org

NRC-CNRC Construction Technology Update No. 51, Acoustic Design of Rooms for Speech, 2002:
nrc-cnrc.gc.ca

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
classroom or core learning space a space that is regularly occupied and used for educational activities. In such
space, the primary functions are teaching and learning, and good speech communication is critical to students’
academic achievement. (Adapted from ANSI S12.60)

MINIMUM ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE

EQ
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

642
 643

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Enhanced Indoor Air

Quality Strategies
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Data Centers (1–2 points)

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

Core and Shell (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

INTENT

To promote occupants’ comfort, well-being, and productivity by

improving indoor air quality.

REQUIREMENTS

EQ
OPTION 1. ENHANCED IAQ STRATEGIES (1 POINT)

Comply with the following requirements, as applicable.

Mechanically ventilated spaces:

A. entryway systems;
B. interior cross-contamination prevention; and
C. filtration.

Naturally ventilated spaces:

A. entryway systems; and
D. natural ventilation design calculations.

Mixed-mode systems:
A. entryway systems;
B. interior cross-contamination prevention;
C. filtration;
D. natural ventilation design calculations; and
E. mixed-mode design calculations.
644

A. Entryway Systems
Install permanent entryway systems at least 10 feet (3 meters) long in the primary direction of travel to capture dirt
and particulates entering the building at regularly used exterior entrances. Acceptable entryway systems include
permanently installed grates, grilles, slotted systems that allow for cleaning underneath, rollout mats, and any other
materials manufactured as entryway systems with equivalent or better performance. Maintain all on a weekly basis.

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS ONLY

Entryway systems are not required at doors leading from the exterior to the loading dock or garage but must be
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

installed between these spaces and adjacent office areas.

HEALTHCARE ONLY

In addition to the entryway system, provide pressurized entryway vestibules at high-volume building entrances.

B. Interior Cross-Contamination Prevention

Sufficiently exhaust each space where hazardous gases or chemicals may be present or used (e.g., garages,
housekeeping and laundry areas, copying and printing rooms), using the exhaust rates determined in EQ
Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance or a minimum of 0.50 cfm per square foot (2.54 l/s per square
meter), to create negative pressure with respect to adjacent spaces when the doors to the room are closed. For each
of these spaces, provide self-closing doors and deck-to-deck partitions or a hard-lid ceiling.

C. Filtration
Each ventilation system that supplies outdoor air to occupied spaces must have particle filters or air-cleaning devices
that meet one of the following filtration media requirements:
·· minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 13 or higher, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2–2007;
or
·· Class F7 or higher as defined by CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation,
Determination of the Filtration Performance.
EQ

Replace all air filtration media after completion of construction and before occupancy.

DATA CENTERS ONLY

The above filtration media requirements are required only for ventilation systems serving regularly occupied spaces.

D. Natural Ventilation Design Calculations

Demonstrate that the system design for occupied spaces employs the appropriate strategies in Chartered Institution
of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005, Natural Ventilation in Non-
Domestic Buildings, Section 2.4.

E. Mixed-Mode Design Calculations

Demonstrate that the system design for occupied spaces complies with CIBSE Applications Manual 13–2000, Mixed
Mode Ventilation.
 645

OPTION 2. ADDITIONAL ENHANCED IAQ STRATEGIES (1 POINT)

Comply with the following requirements, as applicable.

Mechanically ventilated spaces (select one):

A. exterior contamination prevention;
B. increased ventilation;
C. carbon dioxide monitoring; or
D. additional source control and monitoring.

Naturally ventilated spaces (select one):

A. exterior contamination prevention;
D. additional source control and monitoring; or
E. natural ventilation room by room calculations.

Mixed-mode systems (select one):

A. exterior contamination prevention;

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

B. increased ventilation;
D. additional source control and monitoring; or
E. natural ventilation room-by-room calculations.

A. Exterior Contamination Prevention

Design the project to minimize and control the entry of pollutants into the building. Ensure through the results
of computational fluid dynamics modeling, Gaussian dispersion analyses, wind tunnel modeling, or tracer gas
modeling that outdoor air contaminant concentrations at outdoor air intakes are below the thresholds listed in
Table 1 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S., whichever is more stringent).

TABLE 1. Maximum concentrations of pollutants at outdoor air intakes

Pollutants Maximum concentration Standard

Allowable annual average

OR
Those regulated by National Ambient Air 8-hour or 24-hour average where an annual National Ambient Air Quality Standards
Quality Standards (NAAQS) standard does not exist (NAAQS)

EQ
OR
Rolling 3-month average

B. Increased Ventilation
Increase breathing zone outdoor air ventilation rates to all occupied spaces by at least 30% above the minimum rates
as determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance.

C. Carbon Dioxide Monitoring

Monitor CO2 concentrations within all densely occupied spaces. CO2 monitors must be between 3 and 6 feet (900
and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor. CO2 monitors must have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building
automation system if the sensed CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate
CO2 setpoints using methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C.

D. Additional Source Control and Monitoring

For spaces where air contaminants are likely, evaluate potential sources of additional air contaminants besides
CO2. Develop and implement a materials-handling plan to reduce the likelihood of contaminant release. Install
monitoring systems with sensors designed to detect the specific contaminants. An alarm must indicate any unusual
or unsafe conditions.

E. Natural Ventilation Room-by-Room Calculations

Follow CIBSE AM10, Section 4, Design Calculations, to predict that room-by-room airflows will provide effective
natural ventilation.
646

BEHIND THE INTENT

Indoor pollutants and particulates are brought indoors by occupants, through ventilation system intakes or building
openings, and from activities conducted within the building. Designing for effective indoor air quality (IAQ) can
help produce a comfortable indoor environment for building occupants and prevent the human health problems
associated with poor indoor air quality.
This credit identifies IAQ strategies that extend beyond the outdoor air requirements of EQ Prerequisite
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. Design strategies include the installation of entryway systems to prevent
contaminants from being brought inside by occupants, use of enhanced filtration media, increased ventilation,
and monitoring strategies for ventilation systems. Each strategy alone is beneficial, but a combination of multiple
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

strategies is encouraged.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. DETERMINE HOW PROJECT IS VENTILATED

Determine whether the project will use mechanical ventilation, natural ventilation, or a mixed-mode
approach (see EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance).

STEP 2. SELECT ONE OR BOTH OPTIONS

Determine which option(s) and strategies the project will pursue, based on the information in Table 2 and
the credit requirements.
·· Option 1 requires implementing all strategies applicable to the project’s ventilation system type.
·· Option 2 requires implementing one strategy applicable to the project’s ventilation system type.
If multiple ventilation system types are used (i.e., mixed mode), only one strategy needs to be
attempted. For example, if a space is both naturally and mechanically ventilated, the project team
could select carbon dioxide monitoring and implement this strategy by installing monitors that
operate whenever the space is operating in mechanical ventilation mode. Similarly, if the project has
both naturally and mechanically ventilated spaces, it could also select carbon dioxide monitoring and
implement this strategy by installing monitors in all mechanically ventilated spaces.
EQ

TABLE 2. Ventilation systems and credit requirements

Option 1. Enhanced IAQ strategies

Interior cross- Natural

Entryway Mixed-mode
contamination Filtration ventilation design
systems design calculations
prevention calculations

Mechanically ventilated space Required Required Required N/A N/A

Naturally ventilated space Required N/A N/A Required N/A

Mixed-mode system Required Required Required Required Required

Option 2. Additional enhanced IAQ strategies

Exterior Additional source Natural ventilation

Increased Carbon dioxide
contamination control and room-by-room
ventilation monitoring
prevention monitoring calculations

Mechanically ventilated space Select 1 of 4 N/A

Naturally ventilated space Select 1 of 3 N/A N/A Select 1 of 3

Mixed-mode system Select 1 of 4 N/A Select 1 of 4

 647

STEP 3. COMPLY WITH APPROPRIATE STRATEGY REQUIREMENTS

For each strategy required for a given space’s ventilation system, follow the appropriate set of steps.
Prepare a narrative indicating the system type and strategies pursued, detailing how compliance was
achieved.

Option 1. Enhanced IAQ Strategies

ENTRYWAY SYSTEMS

STEP 1. IDENTIFY APPLICABLE ENTRIES

Identify all regularly used exterior entrances to the building (see Further Explanation, Regularly Used
Exterior Entrances, Rating System Variations, and Project Type Variations).

STEP 2. INCORPORATE PERMANENT ENTRYWAY SYSTEMS INTO DESIGN

Determine which type of permanent entryway system will be installed and incorporate into the project
drawings and specifications (see Further Explanation, Selecting a Permanent Entryway System). Indicate

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

the compliant entryways on project plans.

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT MAINTENANCE STRATEGY

Determine how the entryway systems will be maintained on a weekly basis. Consider modifying standard
operating procedures, cleaning programs, and vendor requirements to include entryway maintenance.

INTERIOR CROSS-CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL SPACES NEEDING INTERIOR CROSS-CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

Identify spaces where hazardous gases or chemicals may be handled or used, as indicated in the credit
requirements.
·· Open garages are exempt from this requirement.
·· Include housekeeping and laundry areas even if green cleaning policies are adopted.
·· Copying and printing rooms with convenience printers and copiers only may be excluded. The
definition of convenience printers and copiers is left to the discretion of the design team; convenience
machines are generally small units shared by many office personnel for short printing and copying
jobs.

EQ
STEP 2. DEVELOP CONTAMINANT CONTROL DESIGN
Work with the architect and mechanical designer to develop a contaminant control design for all spaces
needing interior cross-contamination prevention and incorporate strategies into the project drawings and
specifications.
·· Include self-closing doors and either deck-to-deck partitions or a hard-lid ceiling for each space, as
indicated in the credit requirements.
·· Design the exhaust system such that each space has negative pressure, as indicated in the credit
requirements. Use the exhaust rates from EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
or 0.50 cfm per square foot, whichever is greater (see Further Explanation, Exhaust Rates for Interior
Cross-Contamination Prevention).
·· Additional ductwork and exhaust fans may be needed to provide the required ventilation. Possible
strategies to achieve the necessary ventilation economically include stacking all high-pollutant source
areas and locating rooms with hazardous material adjacent to outside walls and each other.

FILTRATION MEDIA

STEP 1. SPECIFY COMPLIANT FILTRATION MEDIA

Identify all HVAC equipment that supplies outdoor air to occupied spaces and specify outdoor air
filtration media that meet the credit requirements for minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) ratings
or filtration class. All outdoor air supplied to occupied spaces must be filtered.
·· Ensure that specified air-handling equipment is designed to accommodate the required filter media.
Otherwise, customization—resizing ductwork, increasing fan capacity to maintain air delivery despite
648

the added resistance of MERV 13 (F7) filtration, or other modifications to system design—may be
required.
·· Mixed return and outdoor air can also be filtered with MERV 13 (F7) or higher, but this is not required.
·· If the project design includes a dedicated outdoor air system with local distribution systems, the
filtration requirement applies only to the dedicated outdoor air system.

STEP 2. REPLACE FILTRATION BEFORE OCCUPANCY

Replace all filters after completion of construction but before occupancy. For Data Center projects, see
Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

NATURAL VENTILATION DESIGN CALCULATIONS

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 1. REVIEW STANDARD

Review the basic forms of ventilation strategy presented in Chartered Institution of Building Service
Engineers Applications (CIBSE) Manual AM10, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings, Section
2.4: single-sided ventilation, single opening, double opening, cross-ventilation, stack ventilation, double-
skin facade ventilation, mechanically assisted strategies, and night ventilation. Identify which ventilation
strategies apply to the project.

STEP 2. CONFIRM RULES OF THUMB FOR ESTIMATING EFFECTIVENESS OF NATURAL

VENTILATION
Use the rules of thumb or guidance from CIBSE AM10 as applicable to the project. Prepare diagrams and
narratives to explain how each applicable rule of thumb or guidance was considered. The documentation
should supplement the natural ventilation calculations for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality
Performance.
Room-by-room calculations found in CIBSE AM10, Section 4, are not required for this option.

MIXED-MODE VENTILATION DESIGN CALCULATIONS

STEP 1. REVIEW STANDARD

Review the mixed-mode design strategies presented in Chartered Institution of Building Service
Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM13, Mixed-Mode Ventilation, Section 2.1: contingency design,
complementary design, and zone design. Identify which mixed-mode strategy applies to the project.
If the complementary design is selected, also identify the operational strategy based on CIBSE AM13,
Section 2.2.
Use CIBSE AM13, Figure 2.1, as the iteration strategy to optimize the mixed mode system.
EQ

STEP 2. CONFIRM THAT DESIGN FOLLOWS APPROPRIATE MIXED-MODE STRATEGIES

Use the guidance and strategies from CIBSE AM13 (Section 2.1, Section 2.2, and Figure 2.1) as applicable
to the project. Prepare diagrams and narratives to explain how the guidance was considered. The
documentation should supplement that prepared for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality
Performance and requirement D (natural ventilation design calculations) in this credit.

Option 2. Additional Enhanced IAQ Strategies

Determine which strategy the project will implement, based on Table 2.

EXTERIOR CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

STEP 1. DESIGN OUTDOOR AIR INTAKES TO MINIMIZE AND CONTROL ENTRY OF

POLLUTANTS
Consider locating outdoor air intakes away from nearby sources of pollutants. Air intakes located one-
third of the way up the side of the building tend to work best.1 Locate air intakes away from loading
docks and roadways. Also avoid below-grade locations in areaways and locations near roof-mounted
exhausts.2 ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Table 5-1, lists minimum separation distances for air intakes (see Further
Explanation, International Tips).

1. Spengler, J.D., J.M. Samet, and J.F. McCarthy, Indoor Air Quality Handbook (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001).
2. Ibid.
 649

STEP 2. SELECT MODELING TOOL

Determine which modeling tool, of the list in the credit requirements, will be used to verify compliance
with pollution concentration requirements. Consider whether the software can accurately capture
expected meteorological conditions, potential pollutant plumes, and contaminant concentrations at the
project’s outdoor air intakes.

STEP 3. COMPLETE LEVEL 1 SCREENING

Model contaminant travel at worst-case meteorological conditions. Worst-case conditions should be
based on the wind speed and direction, with a direct line of sight from each pollutant source to the
project building.
Once worst-case conditions have been identified, perform a simulation to determine whether
concentrations for the pollutants regulated by National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) at
outdoor air intakes are below the allowable annual average, eight-hour or 24-hour average where an
annual standard does not exist, or the rolling three-month average. If all pollutant concentrations are well
below the required thresholds, no further modeling is required.

STEP 4. COMPLETE LEVEL 2 SCREENING

If the Level 1 screening indicates that pollutant concentrations are barely compliant or noncompliant,
perform a Level 2 screening to reassess pollutant concentrations. Use more detailed inputs pertaining to

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

atmospheric processes, building geometry, and emissions concentrations. If the precise composition of
chemical exhaust from a source is unpublished, document how the team arrived at its components and
concentrations.
The Level 2 screening should confirm one of the following outcomes:
·· The concentrations for the pollutants regulated by NAAQS at outdoor air intakes are below the
allowable annual average, eight-hour or 24-hour average where an annual standard does not exist, or
the rolling three-month average.
·· The indoor concentrations for the pollutants regulated by NAAQS are below 2.5% of the allowable
annual average, eight-hour or 24-hour average where an annual standard does not exist, or the rolling
three-month average. Indoor analyses may require a different modeling technique than that used in
the Level 1 dispersion analysis. If the Level 2 screening indicates that pollutant concentrations are
noncompliant, consider modifying air filtration or the locations of the outdoor air intakes.

INCREASED VENTILATION

STEP 1. DETERMINE VOLUME OF OUTDOOR AIR REQUIRED

Use the ventilation standard or code and the calculation methodology selected for EQ Prerequisite

EQ
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance to determine the 30% increase.
·· Follow the prerequisite’s steps for mechanical ventilation systems to determine the amount of outdoor
air that must be supplied by each ventilation system. To meet the credit requirements, the system must
deliver 30% more outdoor air to the occupied spaces at all times the space is occupied. For multiple-
zone recirculating systems, this will likely increase the required outdoor air intake for the system by
more than 30%.
·· For projects that use ASHRAE 62.1–2010, see Further Explanation, Determining Increased Ventilation
Rate.
·· Exhaust rates are excluded from the credit requirements.

STEP 2. REVISE DESIGN TO MEET OUTDOOR AIR REQUIREMENTS, IF NECESSARY

See EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance for recommended modifications for
specific mechanical ventilation system types.

CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) MONITORING

STEP 1. IDENTIFY DENSELY OCCUPIED SPACES

Review ventilation calculations developed for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance
or the project’s furniture plans to identify all spaces with an occupant density greater than 25 people per
1,000 square feet (93 square meters).
650

STEP 2. DESIGN CO2 MONITORING SYSTEM

Incorporate CO2 sensors into the design for each densely occupied space.
·· CO2 sensors must be located in the breathing zone, as defined in the credit requirements. CO2 sensors
installed in return air ducts cannot be used to meet the requirements.
·· Determine CO2 concentration setpoint(s) using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Appendix C. See
ASHRAE 62.1–2010 User’s Manual, Appendix A, for calculations and examples.
·· Configure the CO2 monitoring system to generate an alarm if the differential CO2 concentration
exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Alarms may be audible or visual indicators to space occupants
or building automation system alerts. CO2 sensors may be incorporated into the HVAC control system,
for example, to open zone VAV dampers when the setpoint is exceeded. However, this is not required.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 3. INSTALL AND COMMISSION CO2 SENSORS

During construction, install CO2 sensors per the design. Include CO2 sensors in the commissioning
process for EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification.

ADDITIONAL SOURCE CONTROL AND MONITORING

STEP 1. DETERMINE POTENTIAL CONTAMINANT SOURCES

List potential indoor air contaminants that may be present in the project spaces. Consider typical
substances found in the particular building type, and review activities and processes that will
occur. Substances might include cleaning supplies, laboratory chemicals, or materials required for
manufacturing.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY PRIORITY CONTAMINANTS AND EXPOSURE LIMITS

From the list of potential sources, identify the priority contaminants—those that pose the greatest risk to
occupants’ health. For each priority contaminant, identify a reference standard and an exposure limit.

STEP 3. DESIGN AND INSTALL MONITORING SYSTEM

Install a permanent monitoring system to continuously monitor concentrations of priority contaminants.
Configure the system to generate an alarm when unusual or unsafe concentrations occur.
·· Retain documentation that describes how alarm setpoints were established.
·· Include the contaminant monitoring system in the commissioning process for EA Prerequisite
Fundamental Commissioning and Verification.

STEP 4. DEVELOP AND IMPLEMENT MATERIALS HANDLING PLAN

Develop a materials handling plan to limit human exposure to priority contaminants and ensure that
EQ

the monitoring system is effective. For example, a materials handling plan may require that a particular
solvent be stored and used in a single room that is properly ventilated and equipped with sensors
connected to an alarm.

NATURAL VENTILATION ROOM-BY-ROOM CALCULATIONS

STEP 1. DETERMINE REQUIRED FLOW RATES

Follow CIBSE AM10, Section 4.1, to determine the desired airflow rates.

STEP 2. DETERMINE OPENING SIZES

Follow CIBSE AM10, Sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4, 4.2, and 4.3, as applicable, to determine whether the design
will produce sufficient airflow rates and to optimize opening sizes, locations, and characteristics. These
sections offer many calculation options. All options are acceptable, provided inputs and results are
justified and reasonable.

STEP 3. CONFIRM COMPLIANCE

Create a table of all naturally ventilated spaces in the project, opening characteristics, desired flow
rates, and calculated flow rates. Indicate how seasonal conditions and different wind conditions were
considered.
Determine the free area of natural ventilation openings and the required opening area. Confirm that
natural ventilation openings meet or exceed the sizes calculated for all spaces. The documentation
should supplement that developed for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance and
Option 1, requirement D (natural ventilation design calculations) in this credit.
 651

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See the referenced standards for all calculations.

REGULARLY USED EXTERIOR ENTRANCES

See Definitions to help in identifying regularly used entrances.
For renovation or additions where the scope of the project does not include an exterior entrance, entryway
systems do not need to be installed. However, if the project scope includes an entrance that would qualify as
regularly used exterior entrance, then the team must ensure that appropriate entryway systems are also installed.
See Rating System Variations for considerations for Warehouses and Distribution Centers and Healthcare.

SELECTING A PERMANENT ENTRYWAY SYSTEM

Permanent entryway systems must catch and hold dirt particles and prevent contamination of the building interior.

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

Acceptable permanent entryway systems include the following:
·· Permanently installed grates
·· Grilles
·· Slotted systems that allow for cleaning underneath
·· Rollout mats
·· Carpet tile specifically designed for entryway system or similar use
·· Other materials manufactured for use as an entryway system or similar that performs at least as well as the
above systems

Typical building carpeting is not an acceptable permanent entryway system.

Consider permanent entryway systems that have solid backings. A nonporous backing captures dirt and moisture
and helps prevent contaminants from collecting underneath. Consider permanent entryway systems made with
mold- and mildew- resistant materials.
The permanent entryway system should be at least 10 feet (3 meters) long. Exceptions to the 10-foot (3-meter)
distance are allowed if the team submits documentation verifying that the proposed entryway system performs at
least as well as a full-length system. The selected product should be appropriate for the project’s climate. Areas with

EQ
high precipitation, for example, may need to install more absorbent mats to prevent occupants from slipping.
Evaluate maintenance requirements when selecting the permanent entryway system. All permanent entryway
systems must be maintained on a weekly basis.

EXHAUST RATES FOR INTERIOR CROSS-CONTAMINATION PREVENTION

In general, exhaust rates are prescribed by the ventilation standard or code used in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor
Air Quality Performance. However, if this standard or code does not set a requirement for a particular space type,
a minimum exhaust rate of 0.5 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per square foot (2.54 liters per second, l/s, per square
meter) must be used.
ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Table 6-4, lists numerous spaces whose exhaust requirements exceed the 0.5 cfm per square
foot (2.54 l/s per square meter) rate. Exhaust rates for these spaces must be maintained at all times, even when the
building is not occupied.
If supply air is being provided to the room, the exhaust rate must be sufficient to create a negative pressure with
respect to adjacent spaces when the doors to the room are closed.
No recirculation of the air from these rooms is permitted.

DETERMINING INCREASED VENTILATION RATES

When using ASHRAE 62.1–2010, use the following process to determine the 30% increase in ventilation for the
breathing zone:
652

Single-zone or 100% outdoor air system. Calculate the required outdoor intake flow using the ventilation rate
procedure and multiple the result by 1.3.
Multiple-zone recirculating system. At the system level, multiply the uncorrected outdoor air requirements
for the system, Vou , by 1.3. Multiply the outdoor airflow (Vbz ) in the critical zone’s breathing zone by 1.3. Recalculate
the system ventilation efficiency, Ev, based on the revised values for Vou and critical zone Vbz. This will likely increase
the required outdoor air intake for the system (Vot ) by more than 30%.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Warehouses and Distribution Centers
For Option 1 Entryway Systems, exterior entrances to loading docks and garages are not required to have entryway
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

systems. Regularly used entrances from these areas into adjacent spaces in the building (typically office areas of the
building) must have entryway systems.

Healthcare
For Option 1 Entryway Systems, in addition to the entryway system, provide pressurized entryway vestibules at high-
volume building entrances.

Data Centers
For Option 1 Filtration, the requirements apply only to ventilation systems serving regularly occupied spaces (see
EQ Overview).

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Residential Projects
For Option 1 Entryway Systems, the systems are required only at the ground level, for each residential entrance from
the outdoors.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
For Option 2 Exterior Contamination Prevention, local guidelines for maximum concentrations of pollutants at air
intakes may be followed, provided they are at least as stringent as the U.S. EPA guideline.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
EQ

Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 653

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

Entryway systems: scaled floor plans showing locations and measurements X

Interior cross-contamination prevention: list of rooms, areas, exhaust rate, separation method X

Filtration: mechanical schedules highlighting MERV or class ratings for all units that supply outdoor air X

Natural ventilation design: calculations and narrative demonstrating appropriate strategies per
X
referenced standard

Mixed mode design: calculations and narrative demonstrating appropriate strategies per referenced
X
standard

Exterior contamination prevention: narrative describing type of modeling; model output reports
X
highlighting contaminant levels and required thresholds

Increased ventilation: confirmation (calculations are documented under EQ Prerequisite Minimum

X
Indoor Air Quality Performance)

Carbon dioxide monitoring: list of densely occupied spaces, space type, design CO2 concentrations,

ENHANCED INDOOR AIR QUALITY STRATEGIES

X
floor plan showing sensor locations, narrative describing CO2 setpoints

Additional source control and monitoring: description of likely air contaminants and how they were
X
identified, description of materials handling plan, plans showing installed monitoring system

Natural ventilation: room-by-room calculations, narrative, and diagrams demonstrating effective natural
X
ventilation per referenced standard

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Increased
filtration and increased ventilation affect energy consumption. Consider incorporating energy efficiency measures,
such as dedicated outdoor air systems, economizers, and demand-controlled ventilation, to reduce or eliminate
potential energy penalties.

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. The ventilation system referenced in the related

EQ
prerequisite must be consistent with this credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Portions of IEQ Credit 1 Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring, IEQ Credit 2 Increased Ventilation, and IEQ
Credit 5 Indoor Chemical and Pollutant Source Control have been combined into a single credit.
·· Meeting the requirements of interior cross-contamination prevention no longer requires a calculation of a
minimum pressure differential. However, the exhaust rates from the ventilation standard in EQ Prerequisite
Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance must be used. For spaces that do not have a requirement from
this standard, a minimum exhaust rate of 0.5 cubic feet per minute per square foot (2.54 liters per second per
square meter) must be used.
·· Additional options regarding naturally ventilated spaces have been included.
·· Additional guidance has been incorporated for warehouses, distribution centers, health care facilities, data
centers, and residential projects.
·· An option for filtration media requirements, CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General
Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration Performance, has been added.
654

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE Standard 52.2–2007: ashrae.org

CEN Standard EN 779–2002: cen.eu

ASHRAE Standard 62.1—2010: ashrae.org

Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10, March 2005:
cibse.org

Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual 13, 2000: cibse.org
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS): epa.gov/air/criteria.html

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Achieve both Option 1 and Option 2 and incorporate an additional Option 2 strategy.

DEFINITIONS
densely occupied space an area with a design occupant density of 25 people or more per 1,000 square feet (93 square
meters)

occupied space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended primarily
for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for
short periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied spaces
based on the duration of the occupancy, individual or multioccupant based on the quantity of occupants, and densely
or nondensely occupied spaces based on the concentration of occupants in the space.

regularly occupied space an area where one or more individuals normally spend time (more than one hour per
person per day on average) seated or standing as they work, study, or perform other focused activities inside a
EQ

building. The one-hour timeframe is continuous and should be based on the time a typical occupant uses the space.
For spaces that are not used daily, the one-hour timeframe should be based on the time a typical occupant spends in
the space when it is in use.

regularly used exterior entrance a frequently used means of gaining access to a building. Examples include the
main building entrance as well as any building entryways attached to parking structures, underground parking
garages, underground pathways, or outside spaces. Atypical entrances, emergency exits, atriums, connections
between concourses, and interior spaces are not included.
 655

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Low-Emitting Materials
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–3 points) Data Centers (1–3 points)
Core and Shell (1–3 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–3 points)
Schools (1–3 points) Hospitality (1–3 points)
Retail (1–3 points) Healthcare (1–3 points)

INTENT

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
To reduce concentrations of chemical contaminants that can damage air
quality, human health, productivity, and the environment.

REQUIREMENTS
This credit includes requirements for product manufacturing as well as project teams. It covers volatile organic
compound (VOC) emissions into indoor air and the VOC content of materials, as well as the testing methods

EQ
by which indoor VOC emissions are determined. Different materials must meet different requirements to be
considered compliant for this credit. The building interior and exterior are organized in seven categories, each
with different thresholds of compliance. The building interior is defined as everything within the waterproofing
membrane. The building exterior is defined as everything outside and inclusive of the primary and secondary
weatherproofing system, such as waterproofing membranes and air- and water-resistive barrier materials.
656

OPTION 1. PRODUCT CATEGORY CALCULATIONS

Achieve the threshold level of compliance with emissions and content standards for the number of product
categories listed in Table 2.

TABLE 1. Thresholds of compliance with emissions and content standards for 7 categories of materials

Category Threshold Emissions and content requirements

Interior paints and coatings applied At least 90%, by volume, for • General Emissions Evaluation for paints and coatings applied
on site emissions; 100% for VOC to walls, floors, and ceilings
content • VOC content requirements for wet applied products
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Interior adhesives and sealants At least 90%, by volume, for • General Emissions Evaluation
applied on site (including flooring emissions; 100% for VOC • VOC content requirements for wet applied products
adhesive) content

Flooring 100% General Emissions Evaluation

Composite wood 100% not covered by other Composite Wood Evaluation

categories

Ceilings, walls, thermal, and 100% • General Emissions Evaluation

acoustic insulation • Healthcare, Schools only
Additional insulation requirements

Furniture (include in calculations if At least 90%, by cost Furniture Evaluation

part of scope of work)

Healthcare and Schools Projects At least 90%, by volume Exterior Applied Products
only: Exterior applied products

TABLE 2. Points for number of compliant categories of products

Compliant categories Points

New Construction, Core and Shell, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers,
Hospitality projects without furniture

2 1
EQ

4 2

5 3

New Construction, Core and Shell, Retail, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers,
Hospitality projects with furniture

3 1

5 2

6 3

Schools, Healthcare without furniture

3 1

5 2

6 3

Schools, Healthcare with furniture

4 1

6 2

7 3
 657

OPTION 2. BUDGET CALCULATION METHOD

If some products in a category do not meet the criteria, project teams may use the budget calculation method
(Table 3).

TABLE 3. Points for percentage compliance, under budget calculation method

Percentage of total Points

≥ 50% and < 70% 1

≥ 70% and < 90% 2

≥ 90% 3

The budget method organizes the building interior into six assemblies:
·· flooring;
·· ceilings;
·· walls;
·· thermal and acoustic insulation;
·· furniture; and
·· Healthcare, Schools only: exterior applied products.

Include furniture in the calculations if it is part of the scope of work. Walls, ceilings, and flooring are defined as

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
building interior products; each layer of the assembly, including paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants, must be
evaluated for compliance. Insulation is tracked separately.

Determine the total percentage of compliant materials according to Equation 1.

EQUATION 1. Total percentage compliance

Total % compliant
for projects without
furniture
=
{ ( % compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant flooring + % compliant insulation )
________________________________________________________________________

4
}

EQ
{ }
( % compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant flooring + % compliant insulation )
Total % compliant +
for projects without = ( % compliant furniture )
furniture ________________________________________________________________________

EQUATION 2. System percentage compliant

{ ( )
}
compliant compliant compliant
surface area + surface area + surface area + ...
of layer 1 of layer 2 of layer 3
Flooring, walls,
ceilings, insulation = × 100

( )
% compliant
total total total
surface area + surface area + surface area + ...
of layer 1 of layer 2 of layer 3
658

EQUATION 3. Furniture systems compliant, using ANSI/BIFMA evaluation

{ }
0.5 × cost compliant with §7.6.1 of ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011
+
% compliant for
furniture = cost compliant with §7.6.2 of ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 × 100

total furniture cost

Calculate surface area of assembly layers based on the manufacturer’s documentation for application.

If 90% of an assembly meets the criteria, the system counts as 100% compliant. If less than 50% of an assembly meets
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

the criteria, the assembly counts as 0% compliant.

Manufacturers’ claims. Both first-party and third-party statements of product compliance must follow the
guidelines in CDPH SM V1.1–2010, Section 8. Organizations that certify manufacturers’ claims must be accredited
under ISO Guide 65.

Laboratory requirements. Laboratories that conduct the tests specified in this credit must be accredited under
ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use.

Emissions and Content Requirements

To demonstrate compliance, a product or layer must meet all of the following requirements, as applicable.

Inherently nonemitting sources. Products that are inherently nonemitting sources of VOCs (stone, ceramic,
powder-coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick, and unfinished or untreated solid wood
flooring) are considered fully compliant without any VOC emissions testing if they do not include integral organic-
based surface coatings, binders, or sealants.

General emissions evaluation. Building products must be tested and determined compliant in accordance
with California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1–2010, using the applicable exposure
scenario. The default scenario is the private office scenario. The manufacturer’s or third-party certification must
state the exposure scenario used to determine compliance. Claims of compliance for wet-applied products must
state the amount applied in mass per surface area.
Manufacturers’ claims of compliance with the above requirements must also state the range of total VOCs after
EQ

14 days (336 hours), measured as specified in the CDPH Standard Method v1.1:
·· 0.5 mg/m3 or less;
·· between 0.5 and 5.0 mg/m3; or
·· 5.0 mg/m3 or more.

Projects outside the U.S. may use products tested and deemed compliant in accordance with either (1) the CDPH
standard method (2010) or (2) the German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010). Test products either with
(1) the CDPH Standard Method (2010), (2) the German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010), (3) ISO 16000-
3: 2010, ISO 16000-6: 2011, ISO 16000-9: 2006, ISO 16000-11:2006 either in conjunction with AgBB, or with French
legislation on VOC emission class labeling, or (4) the DIBt testing method (2010). If the applied testing method does
not specify testing details for a product group for which the CDPH standard method does provide details, use the
specifications in the CDPH standard method. U.S. projects must follow the CDPH standard method.

Additional VOC content requirements for wet-applied products. In addition to meeting the general
requirements for VOC emissions (above), on-site wet-applied products must not contain excessive levels of
VOCs, for the health of the installers and other tradesworkers who are exposed to these products. To demonstrate
compliance, a product or layer must meet the following requirements, as applicable. Disclosure of VOC content
must be made by the manufacturer. Any testing must follow the test method specified in the applicable regulation.
·· All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of the California Air Resources
Board (CARB) 2007, Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for Architectural Coatings, or the South Coast Air
Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, effective June 3, 2011.
 659

·· All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site must meet the applicable chemical content requirements of
SCAQMD Rule 1168, July 1, 2005, Adhesive and Sealant Applications, as analyzed by the methods specified
in Rule 1168. The provisions of SCAQMD Rule 1168 do not apply to adhesives and sealants subject to state or
federal consumer product VOC regulations.
·· For projects outside the U.S., all paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants wet-applied on site must either
meet the technical requirements of the above regulations, or comply with applicable national VOC control
regulations, such as the European Decopaint Directive (2004/42/EC), the Canadian VOC Concentration
Limits for Architectural Coatings, or the Hong Kong Air Pollution Control (VOC) Regulation.
·· If the applicable regulation requires subtraction of exempt compounds, any content of intentionally added
exempt compounds larger than 1% weight by mass (total exempt compounds) must be disclosed.
·· If a product cannot reasonably be tested as specified above, testing of VOC content must comply with ASTM
D2369-10; ISO 11890, part 1; ASTM D6886-03; or ISO 11890-2.
·· For projects in North America, methylene chloride and perchloroethylene may not be intentionally added in
paints, coatings, adhesives, or sealants.

Composite Wood Evaluation. Composite wood, as defined by the California Air Resources Board, Airborne Toxic
Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products Regulation, must be documented
to have low formaldehyde emissions that meet the California Air Resources Board ATCM for formaldehyde
requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde resins. For projects
outside the U.S., composite wood must be documented not to exceed a concentration limit of 0.05 ppm of
formaldehyde (0.06 mg/m2-h when expressed as emission rate) as tested either following EN-717-1:2004, following
ISO 16000-3: 2010, ISO 16000-6: 2011, ISO 16000-9: 2006, ISO 16000-11:2006, or following CEN/TS 16516: 2013

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
either in conjunction with AgBB or with Belgian or French legislation on VOC emission class labeling.
Salvaged and reused architectural millwork more than one year old at the time of occupancy is considered
compliant, provided it meets the requirements for any site-applied paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants.

Furniture evaluation. New furniture and furnishing items must be tested in accordance with ANSI/BIFMA
Standard Method M7.1–2011. Comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2011 Furniture Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1
and 7.6.2, using either the concentration modeling approach or the emissions factor approach. Model the test results
using the open plan, private office, or seating scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1, as appropriate. USGBC-approved
equivalent testing methodologies and contaminant thresholds are also acceptable. For classroom furniture, use the
standard school classroom model in CDPH Standard Method v1.1. Documentation submitted for furniture must
indicate the modeling scenario used to determine compliance.

EQ
Salvaged and reused furniture more than one year old at the time of use is considered compliant, provided it
meets the requirements for any site-applied paints, coatings, adhesives, and sealants.

HEALTHCARE, SCHOOLS ONLY

Additional insulation requirements. Batt insulation products may contain no added formaldehyde, including urea
formaldehyde, phenol formaldehyde, and urea-extended phenol formaldehyde.

Exterior applied products. Adhesives, sealants, coatings, roofing, and waterproofing materials applied on site
must meet the VOC limits of California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007 Suggested Control Measure (SCM) for
Architectural Coatings, and South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), Rule 1168, effective July 1,
2005. Small containers of adhesives and sealants subject to state or federal consumer product VOC regulations are
exempt.
Projects outside North America may use either the jurisdictional VOC content requirements or comply with
the European Decopaint Directive (2004/42/EC, to be updated to most current version when available) Phase II, for
water-borne coatings, as analyzed according to ISO 11890 parts 1 and 2, instead of the CARB and SCAQMD regulatory
standards.
Two materials are prohibited and do not count toward total percentage compliance: hot-mopped asphalt for
roofing, and coal tar sealants for parking lots and other paved surfaces.
660

BEHIND THE INTENT

Many types of chemicals, both engineered and naturally occurring, are present everywhere. Volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) are chemicals that are released into the air from numerous materials—some of them natural,
humanmade, plant-based, and from animals, including people. Prolonged exposure to high concentrations of some
VOCs has been linked to a wide range of chronic health problems such as asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary
disease, and cancer. Short-term exposure to VOCs can also cause acute reactions, such as eye, nose, and throat
irritation.
Some VOCs are present in the natural environment; however, higher concentrations of VOCs are typically found
indoors, where reduced air ventilation and numerous sources of VOCs may exist. Although completely eliminating
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

exposure to all VOCs is impossible, specifying low-emitting and nonemitting products will significantly reduce the
strength and quantity of VOC exposure indoors.
Project teams should specify products that meet the compliance thresholds established by recognized standards,
or choose products classified as inherently nonemitting (see Further Explanation, About the Referenced Standards).
Ideally, all interior building materials—from furniture and furnishings to thermal and acoustic insulation and the
interior finishes of all floors, walls, and ceilings—would be compliant. This credit, however, uses a holistic systems
approach that rewards teams for partial compliance, recognizing compliance of product assemblies even if some of
their elements do not meet the applicable standard.
This credit addresses each layer of wall, flooring, and ceiling interior finish—a methodology that is conservatively
protective of occupants, given that the emissions from layers that are not directly exposed to air are tested
separately.
Air concentration measurements from chamber testing are a much better predictor of emissions over time
than VOC content limits. However, chamber emissions testing is generally more expensive, less widely adopted for
wet-applied products, and unable to evaluate emissions generated at the time of application. The credit still limits
VOC for on-site wet-applied products, in part to avoid environmental damage (e.g., smog formulation) and in part to
protect the people who apply these products or are exposed to them during installation.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. RESEARCH AND SPECIFY LOW- OR NONEMITTING FINISHES AND FURNITURE

EQ

Review project documents to identify all applicable products and specify them as low- or nonemitting.
Research products that meet the requirements by having one or more of the following characteristics:
·· The product is inherently nonemitting. Examples of nonemitting products are stone, ceramic, powder-
coated metals, plated or anodized metal, glass, concrete, clay brick, and unfinished or untreated solid
wood flooring, provided they do not include integral organic-based surface coatings, binders, or
sealants (see Further Explanation, Inherently Nonemitting Materials).
·· The manufacturer has self-declared the product’s compliance and provides appropriate
documentation, as outlined in the credit requirements.
·· The product has third-party certification of compliance.
In most cases, turning to third-party certification to recognized guidelines, such as California Department
of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.1, is the easiest way to find and specify products; in other
cases, self-declared compliance to a standard, such as South Coast Air Quality Management District
(SCAQMD) Rule 1113, is widespread and sufficient. Check that the appropriate version of the testing
method was used to test the product. Check the USGBC website for an up-to-date listing of certification
programs that test to the referenced standards. (see Further Explanation,Testing Standards).
Provide the contractor with detailed specifications to ensure that the team has the information needed
to meet the credit requirements. The design team should specifically call out products that have been
researched and confirm that they meet the credit requirements.
Request the specific documentation that will be required for the certification review, such as material
safety data sheets (MSDS), third-party certificates, and test reports from subcontractors; this will help
in procuring compliant products. Certificates must state the testing methodology and the model as
 661

appropriate. The units must be stated and be consistent with those as required. For wet-applied products,
the manufacturer must state each product’s classification and application according to the referenced
standard’s definitions or be otherwise justified; how it’s used in the project does not count as justification.
For example, a defined roof coating is not a carpet adhesive simply because it was used this way on the
project. If the product is classified as a roof coating under SCAQMD, it must meet the appropriate limit for
roof coatings.
Specifying only compliant products is the easiest way to ensure that the credit requirements are met and
the building will have the lowest possible emissions. But Option 2 allows project teams to substitute a
noncompliant product if necessary.
For the options that apply to interior applied products, the credit requirements need to be met for all
products and materials installed within the waterproofing membrane (see Further Explanation, Definitions
of Building Interior and Exterior).

STEP 2. PERFORM CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL REVIEWS

During construction, coordinate a review of the construction submittals to ensure that selected products
meet the credit requirements and do not exceed the allocated VOC emissions.
·· Because meeting these credit requirements is not typical for all construction teams and suppliers,
conducting a LEED-specific preconstruction meeting to review the credit requirements in detail and
stress their importance will aid in successful product procurement.
·· Any product substitutions should be carefully reviewed by the design team and contractor for
compliance with credit requirements. Some manufacturers have a list of LEED compliant products on
their websites. Such lists are good resources for design teams and contractors to consult when sourcing
products that may meet the requirements of this credit.

STEP 3. SELECT ONE OPTION

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
Based on the research performed and products purchased in each category identified in the credit
requirements, determine which option is more appropriate for the project.
·· Option 1 is simpler but less flexible, since partial credit (i.e., less than the minimum percentage
compliance required) in one category cannot be combined with partial credit in another category. If the
minimum percentage compliance cannot be attained in a category, project teams must use Option 2.
·· Option 2 offers a budget calculation method that categorizes building interior products and materials
into six “assemblies.” If at least 50% of an assembly is compliant, partial credit for that assembly can
be combined with partial credit from another assembly to earn points, which ensures that teams can
receive partial credit for specifying compliant low-emitting products or materials in each assembly
category if full compliance is not readily achievable.
·· Option 2 may also allow the project to achieve more points and demonstrate higher overall compliance,

EQ
even if the Option 1 requirements are also feasible.

Option 1. Product Category Calculations

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL APPLICABLE PRODUCTS

List all specified interior paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants, flooring, composite wood, ceilings, walls,
thermal and acoustic insulation, and furniture, as applicable to the project’s scope of work.
·· During the construction submittal review process, obtain manufacturer documentation confirming
compliance for each product category. All products must comply with each applicable threshold
requirement. If two requirements exist, the product must comply with both requirements.
·· The most effective way to track this credit is for one team member to keep a running list of products
and their compliance information (e.g., VOC content, emissions testing, emissions percentage by
volume), with manufacturers’ documentation.
·· Healthcare and Schools projects have an additional category, exterior products, that they may choose
to pursue.
·· Furniture is considered part of the scope if it is installed at the time of occupancy, regardless of who
specified or provided it.
·· Adhesives, sealants, paints, and coatings used on site with flooring products are considered interior
adhesives and sealants or interior paints and coatings, as appropriate. The flooring itself must meet the
requirements of the flooring product category.
662

·· For wet-applied product categories, 90% of products must meet emissions criteria and 100% must
meet VOC content criteria.
·· To demonstrate the project’s overall attainment of 100% of the VOC content criteria, compare the
baseline case and the design case in a VOC content budget. If the design (or actual) level is less than
the baseline, the credit requirement is satisfied. The values used in the comparison calculation are the
g/L of VOCs contained in the product. To determine the budget, multiply the volume of the product
used by the threshold VOC level for the baseline case from the appropriate referenced standard;
use the actual product VOC level for the design case. If a product with high VOC levels is applied
unintentionally, use the VOC budget approach to determine whether compliance can nevertheless be
attained.
·· Example. SCAQMD Rule 1113 sets the allowable VOC content limit for faux finishing coatings—trowel-
applied coatings at 350 g/L. A subcontractor mistakenly used 50 liters of a faux finish coating with
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

450 g/L VOC content. The project team must now create a budget for all paints and coatings installed
in the project to offset this product, which does not meet the Rule 1113 limits.

TABLE 4. SCAQMD Rule 1113

VOC budget
General
Volume Allowable Actual VOC
Regulation Product type emissions
installed (l) VOC content content Baseline Design case
criteria met?
case (g) (g)

Faux finishing
coatings—
SCAQMD Rule 1113 YES 50 350 450 17,500 22,500
trowel-applied
coatings

Clear wood
SCAQMD Rule 1113 finishes— YES 55 275 150 15,125 8,250
sanding sealers

VOC budget baseline case total (g) 32,625

VOC budget design case total (g) 30,750

STEP 2. PERFORM BUDGET CALCULATION METHOD (AS NECESSARY)

A different budget may be used if threshold requirements cannot be achieved for the material categories
EQ

specified in the credit requirements. That is, if 100% of the product category does not meet the
requirements, use the budget calculation method in Option 2.

Option 2. Budget Calculation Method

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ASSEMBLIES

Break out assembly components for each category (flooring, ceilings, walls, insulation, and if applicable,
furniture and exterior applied products).
·· For each product in an assembly, calculate the surface area for typical wall, ceiling, and floor areas (see
Further Explanation, Building Products and Systems).
·· Identify products that are full-spread, such as paint or carpet adhesive, according to the
manufacturer’s documentation for application.

STEP 2. CALCULATE TOTAL PERCENTAGE COMPLIANCE

Use Equation 1 in the credit requirements to calculate the total percentage compliance. Generate take-
offs and review estimates from subcontractors to calculate the surface area for each product. Equations
2 and 3 may be required to generate values for Equation 1.
For assemblies, use the following guidelines:
·· If all layers of an assembly are compliant, the entire surface area (square footage or square meters)
counts. Not-full-spread, wet-applied products are included in the definition of interior finish if they are
installed on site.
 663

·· If some layers of an assembly are noncompliant, calculate the weighted average using Equation 2.
·· At least 50% of an assembly must be compliant to contribute to credit compliance: if less than 50% of
the assembly is compliant, it counts as 0%; if 90% of the assembly meets the criteria, it counts as 100%
compliant.
If some furniture is noncompliant, calculate the percentage of compliance using Equation 3.

For Healthcare and Schools projects, see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in the credit requirements.

ABOUT THE REFERENCED STANDARDS

As VOC emissions test methods and related criteria have advanced, the choices in standards have significantly
improved. In the very early days of LEED, only proprietary criteria and incomplete standards were available, which

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
did not promote competition between laboratories or provide consistent comparisons between products. However,
after much research and work in this area, qualified laboratories, manufacturers, and third-party certification
organizations are now available to support the choice of safe interior materials (see Further Explanation, Testing
Standards).
The science behind these credit criteria is complex. Compliance with the credit requires testing agencies to
measure millionths of a gram of a chemical compound in a cubic meter of air under tightly controlled laboratory
conditions, and then equate these measurements to standard building conditions to correlate the results with real-
world conditions.

Selection of the referenced standards included consideration of the following factors:

·· Leadership and scientific basis of target criteria (necessary for market transformation)

EQ
·· Rigor of the standards (specificity, consistency, repeatability across competing assessors)
·· Standard development process (proprietary business interest, open balanced consensus)
·· Market adoption (balanced with other factors but high enough to ensure credit success)
·· Harmonization with best practices (necessary for efficiency and economical application)

When multiple, competing criteria exist, purchasers find it difficult to make meaningful comparisons among
products and materials. If compliance with all cited standards were required, manufacturers (and ultimately
customers) would pay for duplicative tests and evaluations, wasting precious time and resources. Thus,
harmonization on baseline standards is essential for market clarity and efficiency.

INHERENTLY NONEMITTING MATERIALS

Naturally occurring materials and products that are made from inorganic materials (e.g., granite) emit either very
low or no VOCs. USGBC recognizes that such products do not need to undergo testing to prove they do not emit
VOCs. For the purposes of this credit, untreated and unfinished solid wood (not engineered wood) flooring can also
be considered nonemitting even though such flooring will likely emit some amount of formaldehyde naturally. This
applies only to flooring materials, not to wood paneling or cabinetry.

TESTING STANDARDS
CDPH Standard Method v1.1
This credit uses the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, v.
664

1.1–2010, for the emissions testing and requirements of all products and materials except furniture. The method,
widely recognized as a leadership standard for its stringent scientific criteria and detailed specificity, was developed
through an open, consensus process. It uses the chronic reference exposure levels established by the California
Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment, which include some of the most stringent criteria in use. It also
adopted and incorporated the first edition of the ANSI/BIFMA M7.1 standard test method for furniture.
There is no total volatile organic compound (TVOC) pass-fail requirement in the CDPH standard, which focuses
on measuring and limiting individual VOCs. However, this credit requires manufacturers using the CDPH standard
to also disclose the range of TVOC for each product, a requirement intended to provide greater transparency for
project teams, especially when they are comparing similar materials. Though TVOC alone is a crude measurement
not suitable for health-based determinations of acceptability, it is useful as a general indicator in combination with
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

individual VOC measurements, since higher TVOC may suggest the need for additional investigation.

CARB ATCM composite wood formaldehyde regulation

This credit uses the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 93120 Airborne Toxic Control Measure (ATCM)
for formaldehyde emissions from composite wood products. It provides a way to determine the compliance of
composite wood materials used in products not covered by full VOC testing in other categories. CARB 93120 ATCM
is required in California but widely used internationally.
This credit uses not the minimum requirements of the CARB 93120 ATCM but the more stringent requirements
for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) resins or no added formaldehyde based resins, as defined in the CARB
ATCM. These criteria are some of the strongest available for formaldehyde emissions from composite wood.
Although composite wood compliance with the CARB formaldehyde criteria is beneficial, chamber testing for a
broader range of individual VOCs emitted from assembled products that include composite wood in combination
with other components can provide a better determination of a product’s potential effect on indoor air quality.
Therefore, the composite wood criteria of this credit do not apply to composite wood covered by the full VOC testing
of other categories.

ANSI/BIFMA standards
This credit requires that all furniture VOC emissions testing be conducted in accordance with the ANSI/BIFMA
M7.1–2011 Standard Test Method for Determining VOC Emissions from Office Furniture Systems, Components and
Seating. The second edition of this standard incorporates important advances that include defining an emissions
factor approach for compliance, refining the mathematical estimation procedures for nonmeasured time points, and
adding specific, highly detailed surface area calculation requirements to ensure consistency.
This credit also requires furniture to comply with the low-emitting requirements in the ANSI/BIFMA e3–2011
EQ

Furniture Sustainability Standard. This standard includes both the historical VOC emissions requirements for
furniture from earlier versions of LEED and the health-based requirements from the 2010 version of the CDPH
standard, both as concentration limits and as maximum emissions factors. These emissions factor limits effectively
increase the stringency of the standard and make it easier for furniture component suppliers to modify their
products for compliance.

International standards
Recognizing the need for additional compliance options for projects outside the U.S., this credit also references
select international standards, which can be used only under specific conditions because of the complicated nature
of air quality standards.
The German AgBB Testing and Evaluation Scheme (2010) is a leading industry standard that can be used for
this credit, with some limitations. The AgBB standard does not represent a European consensus but does share
common attributes with several European counterparts. It addresses six times more individual VOC requirements
than the CDPH standard, and it specifies TVOC and total semivolatile organic compound (TSVOC) limits for all
nonregulated substances. However, the standard has limitations, including the following:
·· The formaldehyde limit value of 10 μg/m³ at 28 days must also be met when using the AgBB alternative, as
specified for class A+ in French compulsory VOC emissions class labeling.
·· The AgBB requirements use different exposure scenario conditions than CDPH. Because VOC emissions from
building materials generally decrease over time, the point in time for determining compliance is critical. The
more time there is for off-gassing to occur, the easier it may be to meet the standard, even though in many cases
the difference is minor (most emissions decay within the first week). CDPH requires compliance at 14 days; the
full AgBB requirements apply at three or 28 days, which this credit does not take into account.
 665

Similarly, this credit allows the use of the ISO 16000 series standards when combined with the AgBB standard, the
cited French legislation (Decree no 2011-321 and arrêté of 19 April 2011), or the DIBT method (German Institute for
Building Technology, Principles of Health Assessment of Construction Products in Indoor Environments, 2010 dibt.de/de/
data/Aktuelles_Ref_II_4_6.pdf). The ISO 16000 series standards do not contain enough detail to be cited alone for
testing in this credit. The same requirements for formaldehyde also apply in each of these cases.
For composite wood, this credit allows the use of EN-717-1, CEN/TS 16516 and the ISO 16000 series provided
that a formaldehyde limit of 0.05 ppm (0.06 mg/m2-h when expressed as emission rate) is met. This is the same
limit required to meet CARB ATCM requirements for ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde resins (ULEF). EN 717-
1 was established by the Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN) as a consistent standard for determining
formaldehyde emissions from wood-based panels and is used primarily for assigning E1 and E2 classifications to
wood products.

Referenced mass VOC regulatory standards

The U.S. regulatory system for adhesives and sealants captures a limited range of listed product categories and
excludes small packages intended for consumer use. The leading CARB and SCAQMD regulations are well ahead
of other state and national regulations. Historically, CARB has developed the suggested control measure (SCM)
coatings regulatory framework later adopted by some U.S. states and Canada. SCAQMD created a widely cited
regulatory system for sealants and adhesives packaged and designed for commercial applications.
This credit includes requirements for all product categories found in the referenced standards. Product
categories that are not listed do not need to be tracked. The credit incorporates various district, state, and national
regulations limiting the overall VOC content in coatings, sealants, and adhesives. These regulatory limits serve as a
minimum requirement, in addition to emissions testing standards listed in the general emissions requirements.

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
Because of divergent regulatory development processes, the coatings categories, category definitions, and
VOC limits vary between CARB SCM and SCAQMD Rule 1113. Suppliers should provide information on the proper
categorization of their materials consistent with definitions in the referenced regulations.
For projects outside the U.S., existing national VOC regulations may serve as the credit requirement. The
Canadian VOC Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings and the Hong Kong Air Pollution Control (VOC)
Regulation are examples of local regulations deemed equivalent to the CARB SCM and SCAQMD Rule 1113. Project
teams should contact USGBC to determine additional equivalent regulations. Establishing parity or a direct
comparison with cited U.S. regulations is difficult, given varying definitions of product categories, the VOC status of
specific solvents, and varying applications of the less-water and exempt-solvent approaches.
Information on any VOC compounds exempt from regulation is required for credit compliance. Cited regulatory
limits do not include the VOC content of colorants added to coatings at the point of sale. Pretinted flat, nonflat,

EQ
industrial maintenance coatings and stains include the VOC content of all ingredients, including colorants.

BUILDING PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS

Use Table 5 to calculate the surface area for each layer in a building system. For all building systems listed in the table,
salvaged and reused items more than one year old at the time of occupancy do not require testing.
666

TABLE 5. Building products and systems

Building system Includes Exceptions Calculations

Insulation Includes following (whether part of Insulation on interior or exterior Total area of insulation is based on installed planar areas of
(thermal and building interior or exterior): of HVAC ductwork may be each insulation type, irrespective of placement of insulation
acoustic) • Thermal and acoustical boards, excluded (because of lack of (e.g., exterior or interior wall use). Total area of insulation
batts, rolls, blankets modeling scenarios) for project is sum of planar areas of all types of insulation
in defined scope. Percentage of compliant insulation is
• Sound attenuation fire blankets calculated based on percentage of compliant insulation
• Loose fill insulation surface area.
• Spray foam insulation (open and If insulation system comprises more than one component,
closed cell) all components identified in spreadsheet matrix must be
compliant for system to qualify for full credit. Otherwise,
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

use Equation 2 to determine credit percentage.

Example of multicomponent insulation system is insulation
board bonded to structural components with adhesive.

Flooring Includes all finished flooring: Testing not required: Total finished floor area for project is sum of areas of all
• Subflooring • Mineral-based finished flooring.

• Fluid and trowel-applied flooring without integral Percentage of compliant flooring is calculated based on
adhesives and grout (full spread organic-based modifiers, percentage of compliant floor area.
only) or topically applied film- If flooring system comprises more than one component,
forming or penetrating all components identified in spreadsheet matrix must be
• Engineered wood coatings such as tile, compliant for system to qualify for full credit.
• Resilient flooring terrazzo, and masonry
Flooring systems generally comprise multiple components;
• Carpeting • Associated site-applied identify all components in spreadsheet matrix. This includes
adhesives, grouts, and all site-applied products and materials such as adhesives,
• Mineral-based tile
sealers must be meet underlays, grouting, stains, and sealers.
requirements for adhesives
and sealants. Examples of multicomponent flooring systems are carpet
with cushion, resilient flooring with site-applied sealer, tile
• Untreated and unfinished with adhesive and grout, and concrete finish consisting of
solid wood flooring stain, sealer and top coat.

Walls • Generally vertical structural • Office furniture system Total wall area for project is total interior surface area of all
elements (exposed, finished, partitions (e.g., partial- elements within scope of wall systems category.
unfinished) height or floor-to-ceiling Because of potential complexity of area calculations for
• All finish wall treatments cubicle panels that are large projects, wall surface areas may be estimated as for
manufactured off-site) are painting.
• Interior columns addressed under Furniture
• Exterior and interior wall glazing and furnishings Percentage of compliant wall systems is calculated based
on percentage of compliant wall area.
• Doors Testing not required:
EQ

If wall system is comprises more than one component,

• Partial-height vertical surfaces • Bare concrete or metal all components identified in spreadsheet matrix must be
(e.g., transoms, bulkheads, pony structural elements; tile, compliant for system to qualify for full credit. Examples
walls, knee walls, and similar masonry and cut stone of multicomponent wall systems are drywall panel and
structures normally constructed without integral organic- acoustic panel applied with adhesive, drywall panel with
and finished on-site) based coatings and sealants; primer and finish paint coats, and movable wall system
factory-finished metal wall with wood frame, wood door, and fabric-covered acoustic
• Architectural woodwork applied
products; and glazing. panels.
to walls
• Plaster and stucco without
• Built-in cabinetry
>1% organic additives
• Floor-to-ceiling, moveable.
• Wall systems considered
demountable wall systems and
to be architectural
partitions
woodwork must comply
• When it is unclear what is wall with prescriptive material
versus ceiling, project teams requirements specified
may classify elements either for built-in cabinetry (see
way, as they deem appropriate. below)
• Salvaged and reused
architectural woodwork is
available for credit without
any requirements other
than those associated with
site-applied paints, coatings,
adhesives, sealants
 667

TABLE 5. (CONTINUED) Building products and systems

Building system Includes Exceptions Calculations

Ceilings • Overhead structural elements Testing not required: Total ceiling area for project is ceiling plan area for project
(exposed, finished, unfinished) • Exposed concrete plus areas of additional finished ceiling planes.
• Direct-applied ceiling systems • Exposed metal structural Percentage of compliant ceiling is calculated based on
• Suspended systems (including elements percentage of compliant ceiling area.
canopies and clouds) • Factory-finished metal If ceiling system comprises more than one component, all
• Glazed skylights ceiling products components identified in USGBC’s low-emitting materials
calculator must be compliant for system to qualify for
• Examples include painted • Glazing full credit. Examples of multicomponent ceiling systems
drywall and plaster, acoustical • Ceiling systems considered are drywall panel with skim coat, primer and finish paint;
suspension systems, specialty architectural woodwork must manufactured wood coffer applied with adhesive; and any
systems (plastic, metal, wood), comply with prescriptive ceiling surface with site-applied paint or coating.
and painted or otherwise material requirements
finished structural elements specified for built-in
• When it is unclear what is wall cabinetry
versus ceiling, project teams • Bare concrete or metal
may classify elements either structural elements; tile,
way, as they deem appropriate masonry and cut stone
without integral organic-
based coatings and sealants;
transition strips

Built-in cabinetry Includes all furniture-like items Total emitting surface area of built-in cabinetry is the area
(subcategory of built on site that are typically exposed to interior
wall systems in procured by general contractor For built-in cabinetry, compliance is determined based on
Option 2) at earlier stage than furniture and following prescriptive construction criteria intended to limit
furnishings sources of indoor VOC contaminants:

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
• Examples: cabinets, other • Products with composite woods constituting all or
storage units, shelving, product- portion of product (e.g., countertops, cabinetry with
display units, integrated or composite wood cores and internal components) must
built-in reception desks and be constructed with composite wood documented to
seating have low formaldehyde emissions (compliant to CARB
ATCM limits for no added formaldehyde or ultra-low
formaldehyde emitting or its equivalent). Materials
with no defined category under ATCM must follow
requirements for particleboard. Built-in cabinetry
constructed of inherently nonemitting materials (e.g.,
metal with factory-applied powder coating or plating)
are eligible for credit without testing.
• Site-applied finishes must comply with VOC content
limits and VOC emissions limits for paints and coatings.

EQ
• Site-applied adhesives must comply with VOC content
limits for adhesives and sealants.

Furniture and All stand-alone furniture items • Salvaged and reused Total amount of stand-alone furniture for project and
Furnishings purchased for project furniture more than one year the relative contributions of these products is based on
• Examples: individual and group old at time of occupancy is purchase costs (i.e., excluding labor for installation).
seating; open-plan and private available for credit without To achieve full credit, 50% or more of total stand-alone
office workstations; desks and any IAQ testing furniture costs must be compliant for project to earn credit
tables of all types; storage • Office accessories (e.g., for this category. Product compliance of 90% or more is
units, credenzas, bookshelves, desk-top blotters, trays, tape treated as 100%.
filing cabinets, and other dispensers, waste baskets, Furniture and furnishing items must be tested following
case goods; wall-mounted, work tools normally hung ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1–2011. Compliance
visual display products (e.g., on office cubicle panels, must be determined based on BIFMA e3–2011 Furniture
markerboards and tackboards, monitor arms, and all Sustainability Standard, Sections 7.6.1 and 7.6.2 using
excluding electronic display electrical items such as desk either concentration modeling approach or emission factor
products); and miscellaneous lamps and small appliances) approach. Model test results using open plan, private office,
items (e.g., easels, mobile are excluded or seating scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1 as appropriate.
carts, freestanding screens, and USGBC-approved equivalent testing methodologies
movable partitions) and contaminant thresholds are also acceptable. For
• Movable partitions include office classroom furniture, use standard school classroom model
furniture system cubicle panels in CDPH Standard Method v1.1. Documentation submitted
that are typically integrated for furniture must indicate modeling scenario used to
with work surfaces, desks, and determine compliance.
storage furniture. To be compliant, furniture must comply with Section 7.6.1 or
• Hospitality and Healthcare Section 7.6.2 of BIFMA e3–2011.
furniture is included as
applicable.
668
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
EQ

Figure 1. Insulated concrete panel

Figure 2. Curtain wall assembly

 669

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
EQ
Figure 3. Metal stud masonry wall
 EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

670

Figure 4. Cast in place concrete foundation wall

 Balast
671

EPDM membrane

Splicing adhesive

Insulation Vapor retarder Structural deck

Surface can be considered a substrate depending on the membrane, insulation, vapor retarder and deck.
Plane dividing interior and exterior

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
Figure 5. EPDM roofRoof
EPDM assembly
Assembly

Membrane Cover board

Bonding adhesive Insulation

Vapor barrier

ON

USGBC LEED Guide Illustrations EQ28

Low Emitting Interiors(6) BDC

EQ

Thermal barrier or Structural deck

barrier board

Surface can be considered a substrate depending on the membrane, insulation, vapor retarder and deck.
Plane dividing interior and exterior

TPO Roof Assembly

Figure 6. TPO roof assembly
672

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
Credit will be given for each product category installed in the core and shell of the building.

Healthcare and Schools

Exterior applied adhesives, sealants, coatings, roofing, and waterproofing applied on site must meet the VOC limits
of the California Air Resources Board (CARB) 2007 Suggested Control Measures (SCM) for Architectural Coatings,
and South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168, effective July 1, 2005.

Submit a list of all exterior applied materials and products used on site.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Identify the regulatory VOC content, allowable VOC limit, and the total volume used on site for each product to
determine whether 90% by volume has been achieved. The regulatory VOC content must be expressed as g/L less
water and exempt solvents except for low-solids coatings, which show the content in g/L less exempt solvents. Hot-
mopped asphalt and coal tar sealants are prohibited.

Equation 1 of the credit requirements for Healthcare and Schools must be modified to account for exterior applied
finishes as follows:

EQUATION 1. Total percentage compliance

{ }
( % compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant flooring + % compliant insulation )
Total % compliant +
for projects without = ( % compliant exterior finishes)
furniture ________________________________________________________________________

{ }
( % compliant walls + % compliant ceilings + % compliant flooring + % compliant insulation )
Total % compliant +
for projects without = ( % compliant exterior finishes + % compliant furniture )
furniture ________________________________________________________________________

6
EQ

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1 Option 2

USGBC low-emitting materials calculator X X

Product information (e.g., MSDS, third-party certifications, testing reports) X X

 673

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

MR Credit Furniture and Medical Furnishings (Healthcare only). The testing standards for Option 2 of this
related credit also meet this credit’s testing standard requirements for furniture and furnishings products.

EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment. Using products with low emissions can significantly improve indoor
air quality. Each product category pursued increases the chance of passing the indoor air quality testing limits for the
related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Former individual credit paths have been combined into one credit, with a scaled point system for each path
earned.
·· Compliance of interior finishes may be demonstrated in assemblies with multiple layers in combination, or in
each system individually.
·· Consideration of furniture emissions has been included for all rating systems.
·· New referenced standards have been added to address international projects and new product requirements.
·· Ceilings are now included in the requirements.
·· Emissions from insulation are now included.
·· Emissions requirements for on-site, wet-applied, full-spread products measured via chamber tests in air are
now included. VOC content limits for on-site, wet-applied products are still required.

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
REFERENCED STANDARDS
CDPH Standard Method v1.1–2010: cal-iaq.org

ISO 17025: iso.org

ISO Guide 65: iso.org

AgBB—2010: umweltbundesamt.de/sites/default/files/medien/377/dokumente/agbb-evaluation-scheme2010.pdf

EQ
ISO 16000 parts 3, 6, 7, 11: iso.org

South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168: aqmd.gov

South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113: aqmd.gov

European Decopaint Directive: ec.europa.eu/environment/air/pollutants/stationary/paints/paints_legis.htm

Canadian VOC Concentration Limits for Architectural Coatings:

ec.gc.ca/lcpe-cepa/eng/regulations/detailReg.cfm?intReg=117

Hong Kong Air Pollution Control Regulation:

epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/air/air_maincontent.html

CARB 93120 ATCM: arb.ca.gov/toxics/compwood/compwood.htm

ANSI/BIFMA M7.1 Standard Test Method for Determining VOC Emissions from Office Furniture Systems,
Components and Seating: bifma.org

ANSI/BIFMA e3–2011 Furniture Sustainability Standard: bifma.org

EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels - Determination of formaldehyde release - Formaldehyde emission by the

chamber method: http://www.en-standard.eu/

CEN/TS 16516:2013 Construction products - Assessment of release of dangerous substances - Determination

of emissions into indoor air: http://www.cen.eu
674

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Option 1. Earn all points and reach 100% of products.

Option 2. Reach 100% of products.

DEFINITIONS
building exterior a structure’s primary and secondary weatherproofing system, including waterproofing
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

membranes and air- and water-resistant barrier materials, and all building elements outside that system

building interior everything inside a structure’s weatherproofing membrane

furniture and furnishings the stand-alone furniture items purchased for the project, including individual and
group seating; open-plan and private-office workstations; desks and tables; storage units, credenzas, bookshelves,
filing cabinets, and other case goods; wall-mounted visual-display products (e.g., marker boards and tack boards,
excluding electronic displays); and miscellaneous items, such as easels, mobile carts, freestanding screens, installed
fabrics, and movable partitions. Hospitality furniture is included as applicable to the project. Office accessories,
such as desktop blotters, trays, tape dispensers, waste baskets, and all electrical items, such as lighting and small
appliances, are excluded.

interior floor finish all the layers applied over a finished subfloor or stairs, including stair treads and risers, ramps,
and other walking surfaces. Interior finish excludes building structural members, such as beams, trusses, studs, or
subfloors, or similar items. Interior finish also excludes nonfull spread wet coatings or adhesives.

interior wall and ceiling finish all the layers comprising the exposed interior surfaces of buildings, including fixed
walls, fixed partitions, columns, exposed ceilings, and interior wainscoting, paneling, interior trim or other finish
applied mechanically or for decoration, acoustical correction, surface fire resistance, or similar purposes
EQ
 675

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Construction
Indoor Air Quality

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

Management Plan
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To promote the well-being of construction workers and building

occupants by minimizing indoor air quality problems associated with
construction and renovation.

EQ
REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY

Develop and implement an indoor air quality (IAQ) management plan for the construction and preoccupancy phases
of the building. The plan must address all of the following.
During construction, meet or exceed all applicable recommended control measures of the Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under
Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3.
Protect absorptive materials stored on-site and installed from moisture damage.
Do not operate permanently installed air-handling equipment during construction unless filtration media with
a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2–2007, with errata (or equivalent
filtration media class of F5 or higher, as defined by CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air Filters for General
Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration Performance), are installed at each return air grille and return or
transfer duct inlet opening such that there is no bypass around the filtration media. Immediately before occupancy,
replace all filtration media with the final design filtration media, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
676

Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of the building entrance
during construction.

HEALTHCARE

Moisture. Develop and implement a moisture control plan to protect stored on-site and installed absorptive
materials from moisture damage. Immediately remove from site and properly dispose of any materials susceptible
to microbial growth and replace with new, undamaged materials. Also include strategies for protecting the building
from moisture intrusion and preventing occupants’ exposure to mold spores.

Particulates. Do not operate permanently installed air-handling equipment during construction unless filtration
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

media with a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2–2007, with errata
(or equivalent filtration media class of F5 or higher, as defined by CEN Standard EN 779–2002, Particulate Air
Filters for General Ventilation, Determination of the Filtration Performance), are installed at each return air grille
and return or transfer duct inlet opening such that there is no bypass around the filtration media. Immediately
before occupancy, replace all filtration media with the final design filtration media, installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.

VOCs. Schedule construction procedures to minimize exposure of absorbent materials to VOC emissions. Complete
painting and sealing before storing or installing “dry” materials, which may accumulate pollutants and release them
over time. Store fuels, solvents, and other sources of VOCs separately from absorbent materials.

Outdoor emissions. For renovation projects involving waterproofing, repairing asphalt roofing, sealing parking lots,
or other outdoor activities that generate high VOC emissions, develop a plan to manage fumes and avoid infiltration
to occupied spaces. Comply with the procedures established by NIOSH, Asphalt Fume Exposures during the
Application of Hot Asphalt to Roofs (Publication 2003–112).

Tobacco. Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of the building
entrance during construction.

Noise and vibration. Develop a plan based on the British Standard (BS 5228) to reduce noise emissions and
vibrations from construction equipment and other nonroad engines by specifying low-noise emission design or the
lowest decibel level available that meets performance requirements in the British Standard. Construction crews
must wear ear protection in areas where sound levels exceed 85 dB for extended periods.
EQ

Infection control. For renovations and additions adjacent to occupied facilities or phased occupancy in new
construction, follow the FGI 2010 Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities and the Joint
Commission on Standards to establish an integrative infection control team comprising the owner, designer, and
contractor to evaluate infection control risk and document the required precautions in a project-specific plan. Use
the infection control risk assessment standard published by the American Society of Healthcare Engineering and
the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) as a guideline to assess risk and to select mitigation
procedures for construction activities.
 677

BEHIND THE INTENT

Construction activities adversely affect indoor air quality (IAQ) when they generate dust, toxic substances, or
other contaminants, which can cause health problems not only for construction workers but also those who occupy
the building long after construction is complete. Incorporating IAQ best practices during construction has many
benefits. One is the protection of building occupants from airborne pollutants associated with the construction.
Another is the protection of construction workers from toxins and dust during build-out. A less obvious one, finally,
is the benefit gained when building material and HVAC equipment last longer and perform better over time.
This credit requires teams to develop and implement a construction IAQ management plan that follows the
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors’ Association (SMACNA) IAQ guidelines. The SMACNA
standard identifies major sources of construction-related indoor air pollution and spells out best practices for
controlling them.
By implementing SMACNA IAQ strategies, projects will capture dust and other airborne pollutants, keep

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

contaminants and toxic substances out of building systems, and prevent mold and other damage to building
materials. Additionally, projects must protect absorptive material from moisture damage, prohibit smoking during
construction inside the building and near entrances, and ensure that any permanent air handlers operated during
construction meet filtration requirements.
Because of the special sensitivities of patients, health care facilities have additional requirements to address
noise, vibration, and infection control that go beyond the basic SMACNA guidelines.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND
DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY

STEP 1. INTEGRATE SMACNA CONTROL MEASURES INTO PROJECT DRAWINGS AND

SPECIFICATIONS
Include compliance with SMACNA guidelines and other credit requirements in drawings and

EQ
specifications (see Further Explanation, SMACNA Guidelines).
·· Consider how the requirements and guidelines may affect design decisions. If used during
construction, the air-handling equipment must be designed to accommodate MERV 8 or higher filters.
Finishes such as paints and coatings specified by the design team must be consistent with SMACNA
guidelines, regardless of whether those materials will contribute to other LEED credits.
·· Include SMACNA requirements in project specifications. For example, specify that air handlers and
ducts be delivered to the site prewrapped in plastic, to avoid having to protect equipment after
delivery.
·· Review the credit requirements and SMACNA guidelines in detail with all pertinent members of
the design and construction team, specifically, the construction manager, general contractor, and
mechanical subcontractor(s).

STEP 2. DEVELOP INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN

Before construction begins, develop an IAQ management plan that meets or exceeds the credit
requirements. The IAQ plan is typically prepared by the general contractor or construction manager. It
includes IAQ management practices implemented during construction and preoccupancy phases and
describes how each requirement in the SMACNA guidelines and credit requirements will be addressed
and managed on the job site. The plan should adhere to the SMACNA guidelines and cover the following
additional items:
·· Specify procedures for protecting stored and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
·· Highlight the nonsmoking policy. Prohibit the use of tobacco products inside the building and within
25 feet (7.5 meters), or more if required by the local jurisdiction, of the building entrance at all times
during construction. Consider prohibiting smoking on the entire job site.
678

·· Indicate whether air handlers will be operated during construction, and specify compliant filtration
procedures for permanent equipment that will be used.
A detailed checklist instead of an IAQ management plan is also acceptable.

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN

Ensure that the IAQ management plan is in place before starting above-ground construction, storing
materials on site, or roughing in mechanical systems. Take photographs of each IAQ measure for
documentation.
The following best practices support successful implementation of the plan:
·· Identify the key players and someone responsible for implementing the plan, such as the HVAC
installer and the general contractor. Make sure they understand the requirements of the plan and help
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

champion its goals.

·· Include the IAQ management plan requirements in contract agreements with subcontractors.
·· As subcontractors are selected and deployed on site, familiarize them with the plan and how it will
affect their daily activities. Hold a subcontractors’ orientation meeting to review the plan requirements
as a group.
·· Include construction IAQ progress check-ins as a regular item in weekly subcontractor meetings and
safety meetings.
·· Provide a copy of the plan on site, preferably posted in an accessible area. Translate the plan into the
languages spoken by subcontractors and their crews.
·· General contractors, construction managers, and owners should verify that the IAQ management plan
is being followed on job walks, ideally daily, so that issues can be addressed with subcontractors as
necessary. Creating a checklist of major items for easy reference is often effective.
·· Decide whether air handlers need to be used during construction. If so, substituting stand-alone
temporary air handlers or heaters may make it easier to meet the HVAC protection requirement. If
permanent air handlers are used during construction, record the filtration media used to meet the
documentation requirements.
·· Annotate photographs to indicate each IAQ measure depicted and its general location.
·· Provide photographs of the methods employed to protect stored and installed absorptive materials
from moisture damage during construction and preoccupancy.

HEALTHCARE
EQ

STEP 1. EVALUATE INFECTION CONTROL RISK

For renovations, additions adjacent to occupied facilities, or phased occupancy projects, evaluate
infection control risk.
Follow the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities and the Joint
Commission on standards to establish an integrative infection control team comprising the owner,
designer, and contractor to evaluate infection control risk. Include an infection control risk assessment as
part of the indoor air quality plan—known as an environmental quality management plan—and document
the required precautions in the project-specific plan. The plan should take into account the occupants,
patients, and programming unique to the project and the building as a whole.

STEP 2. INTEGRATE ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN INTO PROJECT

SPECIFICATIONS
Develop an environmental quality management plan (EQMP).
·· Include a noise and nuisance plan based on British Standard 5228–2009. This standard addresses
noise pollution and nuisance to neighboring properties, specifying reductions in noise and vibration
from construction equipment and other nonroad engines.
·· Limit construction noise (both the level of noise and its duration). Use construction equipment with
low noise emissions or the lowest decibel level available that meets performance requirements in the
British Standard.
·· Construction crews must wear ear protection wherever sound levels exceed 85 dB for extended
periods. Provide training and protective gear for workers.
·· Limit the effects of vibration on nearby historic or otherwise sensitive buildings. For example, conduct
demolition in stages rather than using a single large blast explosive.
 679

·· Implement source-reduction strategies by providing properly graded and maintained circulation paths,
establishing no-idling and sequential equipment start-up policies, and retrofitting loud equipment with
noise and vibration attenuators.
·· Use the Infection Control Risk Assessment Standard, published by the American Society of Healthcare
Engineering and the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, as a guideline for assessing the
risk of construction activities and selecting mitigation procedures. Incorporate appropriate measures
into the EQMP. Draw on both this standard and the FGI guidelines to develop the project’s EQMP.
·· For renovation projects with any waterproofing, asphalt roofing needing repair, parking lot sealing,
or other outdoor activities with high VOC emissions, comply with procedures in National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health, NIOSH Publication 2003-112, Asphalt Fume Exposures During the
Application of Hot Asphalt to Roofs, Sections 4 and 5. Include details for compliance in the project
EQMP to manage fumes and avoid infiltration to occupied spaces.
·· Include compliance with SMACNA guidelines and other credit requirements in the project drawings
and specifications (see Further Explanation, SMACNA Guidelines).
A detailed checklist instead of an EQMP is also acceptable.

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

STEP 3. COORDINATE ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN WITH DESIGN
Consider how the environmental quality management requirements and guidelines may relate to design
decisions.
·· Decide whether air handlers need to be used during construction. If so, substituting stand-alone
temporary air handlers or heaters may make it easier to meet the HVAC protection requirement. If
used during construction, the air-handling equipment must be designed to accommodate MERV 8 or
higher filters.
·· Finishes such as paints and coatings specified by the design team must be consistent with SMACNA
guidelines, regardless of whether those materials will contribute to other LEED credits.
·· Include SMACNA requirements in project specifications. For example, specify that air handlers and
ducts be delivered to the site prewrapped in plastic, to avoid having to protect equipment after
delivery.

STEP 4. IMPLEMENT ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

Ensure that the EQMP is in place before starting above-ground construction, storing materials on- site, or
roughing in mechanical systems. Photograph each measure for documentation.
The following best practices support successful implementation of the plan:
·· Review the credit requirements and SMACNA guidelines in detail with members of the design
and construction team, particularly the construction manager, general contractor, and mechanical
subcontractor(s).

EQ
·· Identify the key players and someone responsible for implementing the plan, such as the HVAC
installer and the general contractor. Make sure they understand the requirements of the plan and help
champion its goals.
·· Include the IAQ management plan requirements in contract agreements with subcontractors.
·· As subcontractors are selected and deployed on site, familiarize them with the plan and how it will
affect their daily activities. Hold a subcontractors’ orientation meeting to review the plan requirements
as a group.
·· Include construction IAQ progress check-ins as a regular item in weekly subcontractor meetings and
safety meetings.
·· Provide a copy of the plan on site, preferably posted in an accessible area. Translate the plan into the
languages spoken by subcontractors and their crews.
·· General contractors, construction managers, and owners should verify that the IAQ management plan
is being followed on job walks, ideally daily, so that issues can be addressed with subcontractors as
necessary. Creating a checklist of major items for easy reference is often effective.
Document the implementation.
·· Photograph each IAQ measure and annotate the images for documentation.
·· Photograph the methods employed to protect stored and installed absorptive materials from moisture
damage during construction and preoccupancy.
·· Record the filtration media used in HVAC equipment.
680

FURTHER EXPLANATION

SMACNA GUIDELINES
The following SMACNA guidelines apply to teams seeking this credit.

HVAC protection. Keep contaminants out of the HVAC system. Do not run permanently installed equipment if
possible, or maintain proper filtration if it is used.
·· If conditioning is required during construction, use supplementary HVAC units instead of permanently
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

installed equipment if possible.

·· If permanently installed HVAC system must be used during construction, install filtration to protect the return
(negative pressure) side of the system. Replace these filters regularly during construction.
·· Seal all ductwork, registers, diffusers, and returns with plastic when stored on site or not in service. Seal
unfinished runs of ductwork at the end of each day.
·· Replace all filtration media before occupancy.
·· Do not store materials in mechanical rooms, to reduce potential debris and contamination to mechanical
systems.

Source control. Keep sources of contaminants out of the building and have a plan to eliminate any that are
introduced.
·· Use low-toxicity and low-VOC materials to the greatest extent possible.
·· Develop protocols for the use of any high-toxicity materials. Isolate areas where high-toxicity materials are
being installed and use temporary ventilation for that area.
·· Prevent exhaust fumes (from idling vehicles, equipment, and fossil-fueled tools) from entering the building.
·· Enforce the no-smoking job site policy.
·· Protect stored materials from moisture because absorbent materials exposed to moisture during construction
can mold and degenerate long after installation. Store materials in dry conditions indoors, under cover, and off
the ground or floor.
·· If materials are improperly exposed to moisture, replace the material and consider testing air quality before
occupancy to make sure no mold contamination has occurred.
EQ

Pathway interruption. Prevent circulation of contaminated air when cutting concrete or wood, sanding drywall,
installing VOC-emitting materials, or performing other activities that affect IAQ in other work spaces.
·· Isolate areas of work to prevent contamination of other spaces, whether they are finished or not. Seal
doorways, windows, or tent off areas as needed using temporary barriers, such as plastic separations. Provide
walk-off mats at entryways to reduce introduced dirt and pollutants.
·· Depressurize the work area to allow a differential between construction areas and clean areas. Exhaust to the
outdoors using 100% outdoor air, if possible.
·· Use dust guards and collectors on saws and other tools.

Housekeeping. Maintaining a clean job site results in fewer IAQ contaminants to manage.
·· Maintain good job site housekeeping on a daily basis. Use vacuum cleaners with high-efficiency particulate
filters and use sweeping compounds or wetting agents for dust control when sweeping.
·· Keep materials organized to improve job site safety as well as indoor air quality.

Scheduling. Sequence construction activities to reduce air quality problems in new construction projects. For major
renovations, coordinate construction activities to minimize or eliminate disruption of operations in occupied areas.
·· Keep trades that affect IAQ physically isolated on site and separated from each other by the construction
schedule. For example, schedule drywall finishing and carpet installation for different days or different
sections of the building. Consider after-hours or weekend work if practical.
 681

·· Install absorptive-finish materials after wet-applied materials have fully cured whenever possible. For
example, install carpet and ceiling tile after paints and stains are completely dry.
·· If applicable, plan adequate time to conduct a flush-out and/or perform IAQ testing before occupancy, in
compliance with EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment (see Related Credit Tips).
·· Remove all temporary filtration media and replace them with new filters before occupancy.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
In countries where filters with MERV ratings are not available, filtration media must be Class F5 or higher, as defined
by CEN Standard EN 779–2002. Filtration media with a minimum dust spot efficiency of 30% or higher and greater
than 90% arrestance on a particle size of 3–10 µ g are also acceptable.

CAMPUS

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

Group Approach
All buildings may be documented as one. One master indoor air quality management plan is allowed. The plan should
include building specific guidelines if necessary. Photo documentation must include a sampling for all buildings.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

All projects except

Documentation Healthcare
Healthcare

IAQ management plan or detailed checklist, highlighting nonsmoking policy X

EQMP or detailed checklist, highlighting nonsmoking policy X

Narrative describing protection measures for absorbent materials X X

Annotated photographs of indoor air and environmental quality measures X X

Record of filtration media X X

EQ
RELATED CREDIT TIPS
EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. The related credit builds on the best practices implemented
during construction to maintain optimal indoor air quality. Both credits have filtration requirements; however,
the related credit requires MERV 13 filtration (or Class F7 filters for projects outside the U.S.) to be installed
immediately before occupancy, whereas this credit does not specify a MERV rating for filtration installed before
occupancy.

EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials. Both the related credit and this credit’s SMACNA source control strategies
require the use of low-VOC and low-toxicity materials. Although earning one credit does not necessarily mean that
all requirements are met for the other, implementing a comprehensive strategy of using low-VOC and low-toxicity
materials can contribute to earning both credits.

EQ Credit Indoor Air Quality Assessment. A single IAQ management plan can be developed for both this credit
and the related credit. Teams may pursue the assessment credit without pursuing this credit.
682

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The use of tobacco products during construction is now explicitly prohibited inside the building and within 25 feet
(7.5 meters) (or greater, if required by the local jurisdiction) of the building entrance.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for
Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008 (Chapter 3): smacna.org
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

ASHRAE 52.2–2007: ashrae.org

CEN Standard EN 779–2002: cen.eu

British Standard 5228—2009 (Healthcare): bsigroup.com

Infection Control Risk Assessment (ICRA) Standard, published by the American Society of Healthcare
Engineering (ASHE) and the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) (Healthcare):
ashe.org/advocacy/organizations/CDC

NIOSH, Asphalt Fume Exposures During the Application of Hot Asphalt to Roofs, Publication No. 2003-112
(Healthcare): cdc.gov/niosh/topics/asphalt

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.
EQ
 683

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Indoor Air Quality

Assessment
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (1–2 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)
Data Centers (1–2 points)

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

INTENT

To establish better quality indoor air in the building after construction

and during occupancy.

EQ
REQUIREMENTS
Select one of the following two options, to be implemented after construction ends and the building has been
completely cleaned. All interior finishes, such as millwork, doors, paint, carpet, acoustic tiles, and movable
furnishings (e.g., workstations, partitions), must be installed, and major VOC punch list items must be finished. The
options cannot be combined.

OPTION 1. FLUSH-OUT (1 POINT)

Path 1. Before Occupancy

Install new filtration media and perform a building flush-out by supplying a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet of
outdoor air per square foot (4 267 140 liters of outdoor air per square meter) of gross floor area while maintaining an
internal temperature of at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher than 80°F (27°C) and relative humidity no higher than
60%.

OR

Path 2. During Occupancy

If occupancy is desired before the flush-out is completed, the space may be occupied only after delivery of a
minimum of 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot (1 066 260 liters of outdoor air per square meter) of gross
floor area while maintaining an internal temperature of at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher than 80°F (27°C) and
relative humidity no higher than 60%.
684

Once the space is occupied, it must be ventilated at a minimum rate of 0.30 cubic foot per minute (cfm) per
square foot of outdoor air (1.5 liters per second per square meter of outdoor air) or the design minimum outdoor air
rate determined in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance, whichever is greater. During each day
of the flush-out period, ventilation must begin at least three hours before occupancy and continue during occupancy.
These conditions must be maintained until a total of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of outdoor air (4 270 liters of
outdoor air per square meter) has been delivered to the space.

OR

OPTION 2. AIR TESTING (2 POINTS)

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

After construction ends and before occupancy, but under ventilation conditions typical for occupancy, conduct
baseline IAQ testing using protocols consistent with the methods listed in Table 1 for all occupied spaces.
Use current versions of ASTM standard methods, EPA compendium methods, or ISO methods, as indicated.
Laboratories that conduct the tests for chemical analysis of formaldehyde and volatile organic compounds must be
accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use. Retail projects may conduct the testing within 14 days
of occupancy.
Demonstrate that contaminants do not exceed the concentration levels listed in Table 1.

TABLE 1. Maximum concentration levels, by contaminant and testing method

Maximum concentration ASTM and U.S. EPA

Contaminant Maximum concentration ISO method
(Healthcare only) methods

Formaldehyde 27 ppb 16.3 ppb ASTM D5197; EPA TO- ISO 16000-3
11 or EPA Compendium
Method IP-6

Particulates PM10: 50 micrograms per 20 micrograms per cubic EPA Compendium ISO 7708
(PM10 for all buildings; cubic meter meter Method IP-10
PM2.5 for buildings in EPA PM2.5: 15 micrograms per
nonattainment areas, or cubic meter
local equivalent)

Ozone 0.075 ppm 0.075 ppm ASTM D5149 - 02 ISO 13964

(for buildings in EPA
nonattainment areas)
EQ

Total volatile organic 500 micrograms per 200 micrograms per EPA TO-1, TO-15, TO-17, ISO 16000-6
compounds (TVOCs) cubic meter cubic meter or EPA Compendium
Method IP-1

Target chemicals listed in CDPH Standard Method CDPH Standard Method ASTM D5197; EPA TO-1, ISO 16000-3, 16000-6
CDPH Standard Method v1.1–2010, Allowable v1.1–2010, Allowable TO-15, TO-17
v1.1, Table 4-1, except Concentrations, Table 4-1 Concentrations, Table 4-1
formaldehyde

Carbon monoxide (CO) 9 ppm; no more than 2 9 ppm; no more than EPA Compendium ISO 4224
ppm above outdoor levels 2 ppm above outdoor Method IP-3
levels

ppb = parts per billion; ppm = parts per million; μg/cm = micrograms per cubic meter

Conduct all measurements before occupancy but during normal occupied hours, with the building ventilation
system started at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outdoor airflow rate for the occupied
mode throughout the test.
For each sampling point where the concentration exceeds the limit, take corrective action and retest for the
noncompliant contaminants at the same sampling points. Repeat until all requirements are met.
 685

BEHIND THE INTENT

Many building materials contain substances that are hazardous to human health, and construction activity can
introduce contaminants into the indoor environment. Harmful substances include formaldehyde and volatile
organic compounds (VOCs) from building materials. Dust, ozone, and fine particulate matter generated by
construction activity, diesel engines, or unfiltered outdoor air can also be harmful. Reducing indoor air contaminants
has significant human health benefits and typically improves occupants’ comfort, lowers absenteeism, and increases
productivity.
Testing airborne pollutant levels is the best way to demonstrate that source control strategies have been
effectively and properly implemented. For VOCs, this credit follows the California Department of Public Health
Standard Method v1.1, which is widely recognized by the industry for its science-based best practices and rigorous,
well-established testing procedures.
An alternative to testing that can improve indoor air quality is a building flush-out, an effective method to
disperse off-gassed compounds and other contaminants left behind at the end of construction. The threshold for
duration of building flush-out is based on a typical mechanical ventilation system. A typical ventilation system
supply airflow rate is 0.7 cubic feet per minute per square foot (3.55 liters per second per square meter). Therefore,
if a system operates at 100% outdoor air continuously for two weeks, the cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of
floor area is calculated as follows:

{() ( ) ( )}

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

14,112 cu ft of cfm 24 hours 60 mins
outdoor air ⁄ ft2 = 0.7 × 14 days × ×
of floor area ft2 day hr

In SI units,

4 294 080 l of
outdoor air ⁄ sq meter
of floor area
=
{()
3.55
lps

m2
× 14 days ×
( ) ( ) ( )}
24 hours

day
×
60 mins

hr
×
60 sec

min

EQ
This demonstrates that two weeks of flush-out provides adequate time for removing contaminants from the
construction process.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ASSESS OPTIONS

Develop a plan for the preferred option. Teams can change to a different option later if, for example,
they run out of time to complete a flush-out. Options 1 and 2 cannot be combined to meet the credit
requirements.
·· Option 1 may be feasible if the project’s schedule allows time for a flush-out. Work with the mechanical
engineer to estimate the flush-out duration before the construction schedule is established (see
Further Explanation, Calculations, and Considerations for Flush-Out).
·· Option 2 can typically be completed in less time than a flush-out, but the cost of air quality testing
must be factored into the project budget.

STEP 2. SPECIFY LOW-EMITTING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

Use the requirements of the source control credits in this credit category, such as EQ Credit Low-
Emitting Materials and EQ Credit Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan, as guidance during
selection and installation of products and materials.
686

By incorporating low-emitting products, the project team can reduce the contaminant load before the
flush-out and position the project for good test results. However, project teams are not required to
achieve EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials to meet the requirements of this credit.

STEP 3. INSTALL FINISHES, FURNITURE, AND FURNISHINGS

Install all finishes, furniture, and furnishings before testing or beginning a flush-out.
·· Ensure that all owner-provided furniture has been installed in residential projects.
·· Complete all punch-list items that would generate VOCs or other contaminants.
·· Complete testing and balancing of the HVAC system.

STEP 4. CLEAN BUILDING

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Consider thoroughly cleaning the building, including the ductwork, before testing or beginning a flush-
out.
·· Use low-emitting cleaning products to prevent high short-term VOC levels that may affect test results.
·· Use vacuum cleaners with HEPA filtration to capture particulates.

Option 1. Flush-out

STEP 1. SELECT PATH 1 OR PATH 2

Path 1 is preferable if the schedule permits, since it exposes occupants to lower levels of potential toxins;
Path 2 is appropriate if the schedule does not allow time for Path 1 (see Further Explanation, Examples
1–4).
·· For Path 2, begin the flush-out three hours before daily occupancy and continue throughout the
occupied portion of the day.
·· For Path 2, ensure that outdoor air volume is at least 0.30 cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.5
liters per second per square meter) or the design minimum outdoor air rate, whichever is greater.

STEP 2. CALCULATE REQUIRED VOLUME

Use the gross square footage (or square meters) to calculate the total cubic feet (or liters) of air required.
The area used must be consistent with the area used for other credits. Every space in the building must
be flushed out (see Further Explanation, Calculations).

STEP 3. DETERMINE DURATION OF FLUSH-OUT

EQ

Determine the rate of outdoor air the HVAC system can provide and calculate the duration of flush-out
with the required volume calculated in Step 1 (see Further Explanation, Calculations).
·· If a shorter duration is desired, or if the HVAC system is unable to provide at least 0.3 cubic feet
per minute per square foot (1.5 liters per second per square meter) for an occupied flush-out,
supplemental units may be used. Ventilation fans without supplemental cooling or heating, or
temporary, supplemental HVAC units (installed in window or door openings) may be used, provided
the outdoor conditions are within the required temperature and humidity constraints at all times
during the flush-out. See the credit requirements.
·· Commissioning can occur during the flush-out, provided none of the commissioning procedures
introduce contaminants into the space and none of the flush-out procedures circumvent the
commissioning process. Complete testing and balancing of the HVAC system after the flush-out is
complete.
·· If even partial construction work occurs during the flush-out (e.g., repainting a room) the flush-out
must be started again from the beginning for that space.
·· If multiple, discrete HVAC systems operate independently, the team may flush out portions of the
building as work is completed in each area served by a given system.

STEP 4. REPLACE OR INSTALL FILTERS

If the permanent HVAC system will be used to perform the flush-out procedure, first replace used filters.
·· Replace the used HVAC filtration media with new media. Filter selection has implications for other
credits (see Related Credit Tips).
·· Remove any temporary filters or duct coverings installed as part of the construction indoor air quality
management plan.
 687

STEP 5. COMPLETE FLUSH-OUT

Complete the flush-out, following the requirements for Path 1 or Path 2.

STEP 6. PREPARE FLUSH-OUT REPORT

Provide a flush-out report that includes the following information:
·· Duration calculations. Include the capacity of all HVAC units used and indicate which are permanent
and which temporary; capacity should take into account the volume of outdoor air and temperature
and humidity allowances.
·· Description of flush-out procedure. Include a log of dates, hours, and recorded temperature and
humidity.
·· If the amount of outdoor air is more than has been designed in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air
Quality Performance or more than shown on the mechanical schedules, include a narrative explaining
how the additional air was provided to the building.

Option 2. Air Testing

STEP 1. DETERMINE AIR-TESTING LOCATIONS

Select testing locations with the least ventilation but the greatest concentration of VOCs and other
contaminants. Testing must be completed by an appropriately accredited professional. Use current

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

versions of ASTM or ISO methods. The number of testing locations depends on the size of the building
and number of ventilation systems but must include all occupied spaces. If sampling is used, all space
types must be represented (e.g., office and classroom). Use the following methodology to determine how
many air testing locations are required.
·· Test at least one location per ventilation system for each occupied space type. There must be a
minimum of one test per floor. The locations selected for testing must represent the worst-case zones
where the highest concentrations of contaminants of concern are likely to occur.
·· For offices, retail, schools, hospitality, and multifamily residential projects, test areas no larger than
5,000 square feet (465 square meters). For warehouses or large open spaces in other building types
(e.g., ballrooms in hospitality, gymnasiums in schools), a limit of 50,000 square feet (4 654 square
meters) may be used. If there is evidence that the air in the space is well mixed and sources of
contaminants of concern are uniform, project teams may test a single location in that space.
·· Determine whether the project includes spaces (e.g., offices, school classrooms, or multifamily
residential units) that are identical in their construction, finishes, configuration, square footage, and
HVAC systems. Project teams may sample identical spaces by testing one in seven. If the sampled

EQ
space fails the test, all seven must be tested.

STEP 2. PERFORM TEST

Ensure that the following procedures are followed at all test locations. If a test fails, take corrective action
(e.g., clean and flush out the space) and retest. The duration of any flush-out between tests is at the
discretion of the project team.
·· The measurement equipment must be positioned in the breathing zone, between 3 and 6 feet (900
and 1 800 millimeters) above the floor.
·· The test must occur during normal occupied hours, with the HVAC system starting at the normal start
time and delivering outdoor air at the minimum rate.
·· The gravimetric method must be used for testing.

STEP 3. PREPARE INDOOR AIR QUALITY TESTING REPORT

Develop an IAQ testing report that includes the following:
·· Narrative describing procedures and how locations were determined
·· Dates and results of each test
688

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS

Option 1, Path 1. Flush-Out before Occupancy

EQUATION 1. Flush-out outdoor air volume

Cubic feet of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy Area (ft2) 14,000 ft3/ft2
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Liters of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy Area (m2) 4 267 140 l/m2

Option 1, Path 2. Flush-Out during Occupancy

EQUATION 2. Flush-out outdoor air volume before occupancy

Cubic feet of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy Area (ft2) 3,500 ft3/ft2

Liters of outdoor air needed prior to occupancy Area (m2) 1 066 260 l/m2

EQUATION 3. Flush-out outdoor air volume during occupancy

Cubic feet of outdoor air needed during occupancy to complete flush-out Area (ft2) 10,500 ft3/ft2

Liters of outdoor air needed during occupancy to complete flush-out Area (m2) 3 200 880 l/m2

Options 1 and 2
EQ

EQUATION 4. Flush-out duration

( Area (ft2) × 14,000 ft3/ft2 )

Duration (Days)
( Air handler capacity ÷ 1440 minutes /day )

( Area (m2) × 4 267 140 l/m2 )

Duration (Days)
( Air handler capacity ÷ 86 400 seconds/day )

EXAMPLES
The figures below assume that air handlers are capable of delivering 100% outdoor air while maintaining 60–80ºF
(15–27ºC) and 60% relative humidity 24 hours per day.

Example 1. Option 1, Path 1, flush-out before occupancy calculation (IP)

 689

TABLE 2. Option 1, Path 1 (IP)

Duration of
Total Outdoor Volume of air Air handler Duration of
Net office area preoccupancy
Air Required required before outdoor air preoccupancy
(ft2) flush-out
(ft3/ft2) occupancy (cf) capacity (cfm) flush-out (days)
(minutes)

Space type 1 50,000 14,000 700,000,000 15,000 46,667 32.4

Space type 2 10,000 14,000 140,000,000 4,000 35,000 24.3

Space type 3 5,000 14,000 70,000,000 5,000 14,000 9.7

Example 2. Option 1, Path 1, flush-out before occupancy calculation (SI)

TABLE 3. Option 1, Path 1 (SI)

Volume of air Duration of

Total Outdoor Air handler Duration of
Net office area required before preoccupancy
Air Required outdoor air preoccupancy
(m2) occupancy flush-out
(l/m2) capacity (lps) flush-out (days)
(liters) (seconds)

Space type 1 4645 4267 140 19 820 865 300 7 079 2 799 953 32.4

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

Space type 2 929 4267 140 3 964 173 060 1 888 2 099 668 24.3

Space type 3 464 4267 140 1 979 952 960 2 360 838 963 9.7

Example 3. Option 1, Path 2, flush-out during occupancy calculation (IP)

TABLE 4. Option 1, Path 2 (IP)

Minimum outdoor air delivery rate

Total outdoor air required before

Air handler outdoor air capacity

Time to complete flush-out at

Time to complete flush-out at

Volume of air required before

Total outdoor air required to

min. delivery rate (minutes)

complete flush-out (ft3/ft2)
Duration of preoccupancy

Duration of preoccupancy

Volume of air required to

min. delivery rate (days)

complete flush-out (ft3)

postoccupancy (cfm)
Net office area (ft2)

flush-out (minutes)
occupancy (ft3/ft2)

flush-out (days)
occupancy (cf)

if applicable
(cfm)

EQ
(0.3 cfm/ ft2 )
525,000,000
175,000,000
50,000

35,000
15,000

10,500

15,000
3,500

11,667

Space
24.3
8.1

type 1
105,000,000
35,000,000

4,000*
10,000

26,250
10,500
4,000
3,500

Space
8,750

18.2
6.1

type 2
52,500,000
17,500,000

5,000*
10,500

10,500
5,000

5,000
3,500

3,500

Space
2.4

7.3

type 3

* Minimum rate required in Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance

Example 4. Option 1, Path 2, flush-out during occupancy calculation (SI)

690

TABLE 5. Option 1, Path 2 (SI)

Total outdoor air required before

Duration of preoccupancy flush-

Duration of preoccupancy flush-

Air handler outdoor air capacity

Minimum outdoor air delivery

Time to complete flush-out at

Time to complete flush-out at

Volume of air required before

Total outdoor air required to

complete flush-out (liters)

complete flush-out (l/m2)

Volume of air required to

rate postoccupancy (lps)

Net office area (sq m)

occupancy (liters)

min. delivery rate

min. delivery rate

occupancy (l/m2)

out (seconds)

out (days)

(seconds)

(days)
(lps)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

14 868 087 600

4 952 777 700

(0.3 cfm/sqft)
3 200 880

2 100 309
1 066 260

699 644
4 645

7 079

7 079
Space

24.3
8.1
type 1

2 973 617 520

990 555 540

3 200 880
1 066 260

1 575 009
524 659

1 888*
1 888

Space
929

18.2
6.1
type 2

1 485 208 320

494 744 640

3 200 880
1 066 260

209 638

629 326
2 360*
2 360

Space
464

2.4

7.3
type 3

* Minimum rate required in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance

CONSIDERATIONS FOR FLUSH-OUT

Before committing to a flush-out, check with the mechanical engineer to confirm that proposed mechanical systems
are capable of providing outdoor air at the required rate. Flush-out during occupancy requires at least 0.3 cubic feet
per minute per square foot (1.5 liters per second per square meter) of outdoor air.
EQ

Systems that meet ASHRAE 62.1–2010 airflow rates and provide a fixed volume of outdoor air may not be able to
provide sufficient outdoor air, or the flush-out could take a long time.
For systems that can provide a sufficient volume of outdoor air, confirm that heating and cooling equipment can
handle the additional load from increased outdoor air during times of peak heating and cooling. The equipment must
be able to maintain an internal temperature between 60ºF (15ºC) and 80ºF (27ºC), with a relative humidity no higher
than 60%.
Buildings with air-side economizers may be able to provide the required outdoor air during the free cooling
season, reducing the energy required to provide the increased outdoor air, assuming it can be provided at a constant
volume.

INTERNATIONAL TIPS
To address PM2.5 and ozone (see Table 1), use an equivalent to the U.S. EPA standards for nonattainment areas. If no
equivalent exists, consider the project to be in a nonattainment area.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 691

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Option 1, Path 1 Option 1, Path 2 Option 2

Flush-out report X X

IAQ testing report X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. Projects that pursue Option 1, Path 2 (flush-out
during occupancy), must use the greater of the minimum outdoor air rate determined for this prerequisite or 0.30
cubic feet per minute per square foot (1.5 liters per second per square meter) for the occupied portion of the
flush-out.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. Projects that pursue Option 1 must install new MERV 13 or
Class F7 filters before the flush-out to meet the requirements of this credit. Using comprehensive strategies will
improve indoor air quality, increase the effectiveness of a flush-out, and increase the likelihood of passing the air
quality tests.

INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT

EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials. Specifying low-emitting products and materials will improve indoor air
quality, increase the effectiveness of a flush-out, and increase the likelihood of passing the air quality tests.

EQ Credit Construction Indoor Air Quality Management. For projects that pursue Option 1, new filters that meet
the appropriate specifications and were installed immediately before the flush-out also satisfy the requirements of
this credit. Proper attention to contaminants during construction will improve overall indoor air quality, increase
the effectiveness of a flush-out, and increase the likelihood of passing the air quality tests.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· Installation of movable furnishings (such as workstations and partitions) before testing or flush-out is now

EQ
required rather than just recommended.
·· Options can no longer be combined.
·· An upper interior temperature limit is now identified in Option 1.
·· Testing is now required for an expanded list of contaminants in Option 2.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASTM D5197–09e1 Standard Test Method for Determination of Formaldehyde and Other Carbonyl
Compounds in Air (Active Sampler Methodology): astm.org/Standards/D5197.htm

ASTM D5149–02(2008) Standard Test Method for Ozone in the Atmosphere: Continuous Measurement by
Ethylene Chemiluminescence: astm.org/Standards/D5149

ISO 16000-3, Indoor air–Part 3: Determination of formaldehyde and other carbonyl compounds in indoor air
and test chamber air—Active sampling method:
iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=51812
692

ISO 16000-6, Indoor air–Part 6: Determination of volatile organic compounds in indoor and test chamber air
by active sampling on Tenax TA sorbent, thermal desorption and gas chromatography using MS or MS-FID:
iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=52213

ISO 4224 Ambient air—Determination of carbon monoxide—Nondispersive infrared spectrometric method:

iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=32229

ISO 7708 Air quality—Particle size fraction definitions for health-related sampling:
iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=14534

ISO 13964 Air quality—Determination of ozone in ambient air—Ultraviolet photometric method:

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

iso.org/iso/home/store/catalogue_tc/catalogue_detail.htm?csnumber=23528

U.S. EPA Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air, IP-1: Volatile
Organic Compounds, IP-3: Carbon Monoxide and Carbon Dioxide, IP-6: Formaldehyde and other aldehydes/
ketones, IP-10 Volatile Organic Compounds: nepis.epa.gov

U.S. EPA Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Compounds in Ambient Air, TO-1:
Volatile Organic Compounds, TO-11: Formaldehyde, TO-15: Volatile Organic Compounds, TO-17:

Volatile Organic Compounds: epa.gov/ttnamti1/airtox.html

California Department of Public Health, Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic
Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources using Environmental Chambers, v1.1–2010:
cal-iaq.org/separator/voc/standard-method

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
EQ

None.
 693

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Thermal Comfort
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)
Data Centers (1 point)

INTENT

To promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by

PROCESS
providing quality thermal comfort.

COMFORT
INTEGRATIVE
THERMAL
REQUIREMENTS
Meet the requirements for both thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control.

EQ
Thermal Comfort Design

NEW CONSTRUCTION, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, HOSPITALITY, HEALTHCARE

OPTION 1. ASHRAE STANDARD 55-2010

Design heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems and the building envelope to meet the
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55–2010, Thermal Comfort Conditions for Human Occupancy, with errata or a
local equivalent.
For natatoriums, demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2011 edition, Chapter 5,
Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium Design Conditions, with errata.

OR

OPTION 2. ISO AND CEN STANDARDS

Design HVAC systems and the building envelope to meet the requirements of the applicable standard:
·· ISO 7730:2005, Ergonomics of the Thermal Environment, analytical determination and interpretation of
thermal comfort, using calculation of the PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria; and
·· CEN Standard EN 15251:2007, Indoor Environmental Input Parameters for Design and Assessment of Energy
Performance of Buildings, addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting, and acoustics,
Section A2.
694

DATA CENTERS ONLY

Meet the above requirements for regularly occupied spaces.

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS

Meet the above requirements for office portions of the building.

In regularly occupied areas of the building’s bulk storage, sorting, and distribution areas, include one or more of
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

the following design alternatives:

·· radiant flooring;
·· circulating fans;
·· passive systems, such as nighttime air, heat venting, or wind flow;
·· localized active cooling (refrigerant or evaporative-based systems) or heating systems; and
·· localized, hard-wired fans that provide air movement for occupants’ comfort.
·· other equivalent thermal comfort strategy.

Thermal Comfort Control

NEW CONSTRUCTION, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS,
HOSPITALITY

Provide individual thermal comfort controls for at least 50% of individual occupant spaces. Provide group thermal
comfort controls for all shared multioccupant spaces.
Thermal comfort controls allow occupants, whether in individual spaces or shared multioccupant spaces, to
adjust at least one of the following in their local environment: air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed,
and humidity.

HOSPITALITY ONLY
EQ

Guest rooms are assumed to provide adequate thermal comfort controls and are therefore not included in the credit
calculations.

RETAIL ONLY

Meet the above requirements for at least 50% of the individual occupant spaces in office and administrative areas.

HEALTHCARE

Provide individual thermal comfort controls for every patient room and at least 50% of the remaining individual
occupant spaces. Provide group thermal comfort controls for all shared multioccupant spaces.
Thermal comfort controls allow occupants, whether in individual spaces or shared multioccupant spaces, to
adjust at least one of the following in their local environment: air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed,
and humidity.
 695

BEHIND THE INTENT

A large body of laboratory and field research has demonstrated how thermal conditions inside buildings directly
affect people’s satisfaction and performance.1 Although often associated only with air temperature, thermal comfort
is a complex amalgam of six primary factors (Figure 1), all of which are influenced by building design and operation.
An effective thermal comfort strategy considers all six concurrently, meaning that close collaboration between the
owner, architect, and engineer is critical to achieving this credit.

THERMAL COMFORT
Figure 1. Primary factors that affect thermal comfort

Modifying one or more of the six comfort factors can greatly improve occupants’ perception of the thermal
environment while still supporting energy reduction goals. Working closely with the owner during design, the
project team can maximize comfort by coordinating design with operational policies. For example, a flexible dress

EQ
code that permits seasonally appropriate clothing can allow design air temperatures to be adjusted upward during
the cooling season and downward during the heating season without affecting occupants’ perception of comfort.
Occupants who are able to modify their thermal environment through thermal controls will perceive more
comfort regardless of conditioning strategy, and they may exhibit additional satisfaction and productivity. Indoor
environment quality surveys administered by the Center for the Built Environment have shown significant increases
in satisfaction among occupants who have individual control of a thermostat or an operable window.2 Likewise,
research from the International Centre for Indoor Environment and Energy suggests that giving occupants +/–5°F
(3°C) of local temperature control can result in productivity gains of 2.7% to 7%.3
The referenced standards for this credit use two indices: predicted mean vote (PMV) and predicted percentage
of dissatisfied (PPD). The PMV was developed by placing test subjects in climate chambers and asking them to
rate their level of comfort on a seven-point thermal sensation scale. The scale runs from plus 3 (too hot) to minus 3
(too cold), with zero representing neutral. The PPD index is then determined; it predicts the percentage of people
who are likely to be dissatisfied with a given thermal condition. The referenced standards for this credit also use
field-based research as the basis of the adaptive model, which relates indoor design temperatures or acceptable
temperature ranges to outdoor meteorological or climatological parameters. 4

1. Fisk, W. 2001. “Estimates of Potential Nationwide Productivity and Health Benefits from Better Indoor Environments: An Update.” In Spengler, J., J. Samet,
and J. McCarthy. Indoor Air Quality Handbook. New York: McGraw Hill, 4.1–4.31.
2. Huizenga, C., S. Abbaszadeh, L. Zagreus, and E. Arens. 2006. “Air Quality and Thermal Comfort in Office Buildings: Results of a Large Indoor
Environmental Quality Survey.” In Proceedings of Healthy Buildings 2006, vol. III, Lisbon, Portugal, pp. 393–397.
3. Wyon, D. 1996. “Individual Microclimate Control: Required Range, Probable Benefits, and Current Feasibility.” In Proceedings of Indoor Air 1996: Seventh
International Conference of Indoor Air Quality and Climate, vol. 1, Nagoya, Japan, pp.1067–1072.
4. ASHRAE Standard 55–2010, Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy.
696

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ESTABLISH THERMAL COMFORT GOALS

Work with the owner to understand expectations for the indoor thermal environment, the level of control
that occupants should have, and characteristics of the occupant population.
·· Determine whether a tightly controlled environment is required or whether some variation in indoor
conditions is acceptable.
·· Determine whether occupants would see natural conditioning as a workplace benefit.
·· Consider including factors and design criteria related to occupants in the owner’s project requirements
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

(OPR) for commissioning activities.

Thermal comfort needs for natatoriums are unique (see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations).
Data Center and Warehouses and Distribution Center projects also have different needs (see Further
Explanation, Rating System Variations).

STEP 2. SELECT CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Based on the thermal comfort goals, determine the best conditioning approach for the project (see
Further Explanation, Thermal Comfort Conditioning Approaches).
·· Consider whether the project is a candidate for natural conditioning. Examine the climate by season,
including temperature, humidity, and air quality, to determine optimal times of the year for natural
conditioning.
·· Identify program areas that could be designed to accommodate cross or stack ventilation and
consider ways they could be organized to create microclimates to expand annual hours of natural
conditioning (see Further Explanation, Criteria for Occupant-Controlled Naturally
Conditioned Spaces).

STEP 3. SELECT COMFORT CONTROLS

Determine the best thermal comfort controls for the conditioning system(s) selected, based on the type
of project and occupant’s activities (see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations and Project Type
Variations).
·· Consider thermal comfort controls that allow occupants to control air temperature, radiant
temperature, air speed, and humidity.
·· Examples of eligible thermal comfort controls include thermostats, ceiling fans, adjustable underfloor
diffusers, task-mounted controls (such as plug-in desktop fans, humidifiers, or dehumidifiers), and
EQ

operable windows. Examples of ineligible thermal comfort controls include a ceiling diffuser without
an accessible control, and a thermostat with a fixed setpoint that cannot be adjusted by occupants.
·· Zone the conditioning system to ensure that at least 50% of individual occupant spaces have individual
thermal comfort controls. Additional controls may be appropriate for some projects but are not
required by this credit.
·· Provide at least one group thermal comfort control in each shared multioccupant space. Meeting
spaces that can be subdivided (e.g., a convention hall with movable walls) must be designed such that
each group of occupants can control their area.

STEP 4. SELECT THERMAL COMFORT STANDARD

Decide which standard or set of standards is suited to the project. Either option is appropriate for
common space types, such as offices, educational buildings, hospitals, hotels and restaurants, and retail
buildings. For other building types, see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations.
·· Option 1 is suitable for most U.S. project teams, who are likely familiar with ASHRAE Standard 55–2010.
This option also allows project teams to use the same standard for both mechanically and naturally
conditioned spaces.
·· Option 2 relies on two international standards, ISO 7730–2005 and EN 15251–2007, to document
mechanically and naturally conditioned spaces, respectively.
Both options include compliance paths for mechanically and naturally conditioned spaces based on the
same comfort models.
 697

Option 1. ASHRAE Standard 55–2010

STEP 1. SELECT ANALYSIS METHOD(S)

Select the methodology from ASHRAE Standard 55–2010 that will be used for the thermal
comfort analysis.
·· For mechanically conditioned spaces, select one or more of the following from Section 5.2, Methods
for Determining Acceptable Conditions in Occupied Spaces:
·· Section 5.2.1, Graphic Comfort Zone Method for Typical Indoor Environments
·· Section 5.2.1.2, Computer Model Method for General Indoor Application
·· Section 5.2.3.1, Graphic Elevated Air Speed Method
·· Section 5.2.3.2, SET Method
Section 5.2.4 must also be followed for potential sources of local discomfort.
·· For naturally conditioned spaces, select Section 5.3, Optional Method for Determining Acceptable
Thermal Conditions in Naturally Conditioned Spaces. The optional method is available only for
spaces that meet certain criteria (see Further Explanation, Criteria for Occupant-Controlled Naturally
Conditioned Spaces). Spaces that do not meet these criteria must follow one of the mechanically
conditioned spaces methods.
For mixed-mode spaces, each seasonal conditioning strategy must be documented separately. For
example, demonstrate heating season compliance using Section 5.2 and cooling season compliance using
Section 5.3.

STEP 2. PERFORM ANALYSIS

If using Section 5.2, perform the analysis as described in the standard.
·· Estimate occupants’ personal factors, such as clothing and activity levels.
·· Using the owner’s comfort expectations, energy goals, and occupancy factors, set seasonal comfort
criteria for operative temperature, humidity, and air speed for each programmed area. Refer to

THERMAL COMFORT
ASHRAE 55–2010, Appendices A and B, for recommended values.
·· Calculate the effects of any likely local discomfort sources, such as radiant temperature asymmetry,
vertical air temperature difference, floor surface temperature, and drafts, as described in Section 5.2.4.
Confirm that dissatisfaction is within the allowable ranges listed in Table 5.2.4.
This analysis may be an iterative process in which thermal conditions are revised or refined to meet the
ASHRAE requirements. By using the standard in this way, project teams can ensure that the thermal
conditions meet the credit requirements before they begin detailed design work.
If using Section 5.3, perform the analysis as described in the standard.
·· Calculate mean monthly outdoor temperature for the project’s location, as described in the ASHRAE

EQ
standard, for times of the year when natural conditioning is used.
·· Use Figure 5.3 to establish the upper and lower operative temperature limits of the comfort zone. It
may be helpful to plot mean monthly outdoor temperatures, comfort zone boundaries, and design
operative temperatures on Figure 5.3.
·· Compare indoor operative temperatures with the comfort zone boundaries.

STEP 3. DESIGN PROJECT’S CONDITIONING SYSTEMS

Design the project’s conditioning systems to provide the acceptable comfort conditions identified in
the previous step. Additionally, verify that all spaces at risk for discomfort, such as locations close to
entrances prone to drafts or west-facing walls that may retain heat, have been addressed.
ASHRAE 55–2010, Section 6.1, requires the design to be within the acceptable comfort range at all
combinations of conditions that are expected to occur, including variations in internal loads and the
exterior environment, and at both full- and partial-load conditions. Systems that cannot maintain comfort
under all conditions (e.g., a constant-volume rooftop unit with a single compressor may have problems
controlling humidity levels) do not meet the credit requirements (see Further
Explanation, Examples).
698

Option 2. ISO 7730–2005 and EN 15251–2007

STEP 1. SELECT ANALYSIS METHOD(S)

Select the methodology that will be used for the thermal comfort analysis.
·· For mechanically conditioned spaces, select ISO 7730–2005.
·· certain criteria (see Further Explanation, Criteria for Occupant-Controlled Naturally Conditioned
Spaces). Spaces that do not meet these criteria must follow ISO.
For mixed-mode spaces, each seasonal conditioning strategy must be documented separately. For
example, demonstrate heating season compliance using ISO 7730 and cooling season compliance using
EN 15251.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP 2. SELECT BUILDING CATEGORY

Identify the space category and comfort threshold for the project based on the selected standard’s
classifications.
·· The ISO and EN standards set different ranges of comfort acceptability for specific building types and
occupant populations (Table 1).
·· Category B (ISO) and Category II (EN) are appropriate for most new buildings.

TABLE 1. Comparison of comfort acceptability ranges, ISO 7730–2005 and EN 15251–2007

Category
Allowable predicted Allowable predicted
Description
ISO EN mean vote percentage dissatisfied
7730– 2005 15251– 2007

Recommended for spaces occupied by very

A I sensitive and fragile persons with special –0.2 < PMV < 0.2 <6%
requirements (very young children, elderly, ill)

B II Suitable for most new buildings and renovations –0.5 < PMV < 0.5 <10%

C III Suitable for existing buildings –0.7 < PMV < 0.7 <15%

Values other than above; acceptable for only part

IV PMV < –0.7 or PMV > 0.7 >15%
of year

PMV = predicted mean vote (index of thermal comfort) PPD = predicted percentage (of people) dissatisfied
Source: This excerpt is adapted and modified from ISO 7730:2005 and EN 15251:2007 with the permission of ANSI on behalf of ISO.
EQ

© ISO 2013 – All rights reserved.

STEP 3. PERFORM ANALYSIS

If using ISO 7730-2005, perform the analysis as described in the standard.
·· Estimate occupants’ personal factors, such as clothing and activity levels.
·· Using the owner’s comfort expectations, energy goals, and occupancy factors, set seasonal comfort
criteria for operative temperature, humidity, and air speed for various programmed areas. Refer to ISO
7730–2005, Appendices A and C, for recommended values.
·· Use the simplified look-up tables provided in ISO 7730–2005, Annex E, to determine PMV for spaces
with 50% relative humidity and minimal difference between air and mean radiant temperature. For
spaces that do not meet Annex E criteria, calculate PMV as described in Section 4.1 or Annex D.
·· Confirm that PMV falls within the allowable range for general thermal comfort for appropriate building
category (Table 1).
·· Calculate the effects of any likely local discomfort sources, such as draughts, vertical air temperature
difference, floor surface temperature, and radiant temperature asymmetry, as described in ISO 7730–
2005, Section 6, and Annex A, Section A.3, and confirm that dissatisfaction is within the allowable
ranges listed in Annex A, Table A1.
This analysis may be an iterative process in which thermal conditions are revised or refined to meet the
ISO requirements. By using the standard in this way, project teams can ensure that design criteria meet
the credit requirements before they begin detailed design work.
If using EN 15251–2007, perform the analysis as described in the standard.
·· Calculate running mean outdoor temperatures for the project’s location, as described in Section 3.11 of
the EN standard, for times of the year when natural conditioning is used.
 699

·· Use Figure A1 or the equations in Section A.2 of the EN standard to establish the upper and lower
operative temperature limits of the comfort zone. It may be helpful to plot running mean outdoor
temperatures, comfort zone boundaries, and design operative temperatures on Figure A1.
·· Compare design operative temperatures with the comfort zone boundaries.

STEP 4. DESIGN PROJECT’S CONDITIONING SYSTEMS

Design the project’s conditioning systems to provide the acceptable comfort conditions identified in
the previous step. Additionally, verify that all spaces at risk for discomfort, such as locations close to
entrances prone to drafts or west-facing walls that may retain heat, have been addressed.
ISO 7730–2005, Section A.2, requires the mechanical conditioning system design to maintain the
specified comfort ranges “at all locations within the occupied zone of a space … at all times.” Systems
that cannot maintain comfort under all conditions (e.g., a constant-volume rooftop unit with a single
compressor may have problems controlling humidity levels) do not meet the credit requirements (see
Further Explanation, Examples).

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
All calculations are found in the referenced standards.

THERMAL COMFORT
THERMAL COMFORT CONDITIONING APPROACHES
There are three basic approaches to conditioning for thermal comfort: mechanical, natural, and a combination.

Mechanical conditioning is the use of mechanical systems, such as chillers and boilers, to supply cooling or heating
to a space. Comfort is based on the predicted mean vote (PMV) model, which is the result of laboratory-based
controlled climate chamber research in which test subjects assigned comfort values to different conditions. PMV
assumes relatively consistent comfort conditions with minimal adjustment for seasonal variations. Occupants of

EQ
mechanically conditioned spaces have come to expect a tightly controlled indoor thermal environment and a narrow
band of indoor conditions.

Natural conditioning is the use of zero-energy strategies, such as cross or stack natural ventilation paths, passive
solar heating, and thermal mass, to moderate exterior conditions. The thermal comfort zone is determined using the
adaptive comfort model, which accounts for outdoor climate as well changes in occupants’ expectations, clothing
adjustments and use of controls, such as operable windows. Occupants of naturally conditioned spaces typically
expect a broader comfort zone and accept more variation in comfort conditions, both of which can facilitate lower-
energy solutions than are possible with mechanical conditioning alone.

Mixed-mode conditioning combines mechanical and natural conditioning systems, which may be used concurrently
or on an alternating basis (within a working day or seasonally) in the same space, or may be used independently in
different spaces in the same building.

CRITERIA FOR OCCUPANT-CONTROLLED NATURALLY CONDITIONED SPACES

The referenced standards, ASHRAE 55–2010, Section 5.3, and EN 15251–2007, Section A.2, set the following
requirements for when the occupant-controlled naturally conditioned spaces (or adaptive) method may be used:
·· Occupants’ metabolic rate is between 1.0 and 1.3 metabolic equivalent of task (MET).
·· Occupants are free to adapt their clothing to the indoor and/or outdoor thermal conditions.
·· User-controlled operable windows are present.
700

·· No mechanical cooling is installed.

·· Running mean outdoor temperatures are within the ranges specified in the standards at times of year when
natural conditioning is used.
·· The natural conditioning comfort model cannot be applied to times of the year when the heating
system is operating.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Option 1, mechanically conditioned, graphic method
An office space is cooled with an underfloor air system and heated by perimeter fin tube radiators. The metabolic
rate for the space is 1.1, per ASHRAE Appendix A. The clothing insolation (clo) is calculated as 0.9 when the outdoor
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

environment is cool and 0.6 when the outdoor environment is warm, per garment insulation values from ASHRAE
55–2010, Appendix A, Table B2.
The project team has decided to determine compliance using the graphic method, described in ASHRAE 55–2010,
Section 5.2.1.1. The design air speeds (less than 40 feet per minute), clothing insulation levels (0.5–1.0 clo), and
occupant metabolic rate1.0–1.3 MET) are all within the specified ranges for this method.
The comfort zone boundaries are calculated using the ASHRAE equations for Tmax, Icl, Tmin, Icl, and Icl. The design
parameters and comfort zone boundaries are plotted on a psychometric chart (Figure 2). The team has determined
that any local thermal discomfort effects are unlikely. Because the space’s operative temperature and humidity levels
fall within the comfort zone in heating and cooling modes, the project achieves the credit.

Figure 2. Supporting documentation for Example 1

Design parameters and acceptable range of operative temperature and humidity
EQ

Heating Comfort Range (0.9 Clo) Cooling Comfort Range (0.6 Clo)

Heating operative Cooling operative

Example 2. Option 1, mechanically conditioned, computer model method

An office’s file room is heated and cooled by a fan coil unit. Because the occupants of this space will be
standing and filing, the expected metabolic rate is 1.4 MET, per ASHRAE 55–2010, Appendix A. The clo is calculated
as in Example 1.
The project team is determining compliance using the computer model method, described in ASHRAE 55–2010,
Section 5.2.1.2, because the activity level exceeds the upper metabolic limit of the graphic method (1.3 MET) but falls
below the 2.0 limit for computer model method.
The design parameters are entered into the Center for the Built Environment (CBE) Thermal Comfort Tool for
ASHRAE-55, which performs the required PMV and PPD calculation. The results from the tool (Figure 3) indicate
that the room’s operative temperature and humidity levels comply with the standard, and the project meets the
credit requirements.
 701

Figure 3. Supporting documentation for Example 2.

Source: Hoyt Tyler, Schiavon Stefano, Piccioli Alberto. 2013, CBE Thermal Comfort Tool for ASHRAE-55.
Center for the Built Environment, University of California Berkeley, http://cbe.berkeley.edu/comforttool/

THERMAL COMFORT
Example 3. Option 1, naturally conditioned, adaptive method
An open office space is naturally cooled with occupant-controlled operable windows and does not have any
mechanical cooling system installed. Heating is provided by fin tube radiators.
The project team has decided to determine compliance for the cooling period (April through October) using the
adaptive method, described in ASHRAE 55–2010, Section 5.3, Optional Method for Determining Acceptable Thermal

EQ
Conditions in Naturally Conditioned Spaces.
The average monthly outdoor temperatures and design operative temperatures are plotted on Figure 5.3, found
in Section 5.3 of the standard (Figure 4).
The project team must also determine compliance for the mechanically conditioned heating period (November
through March) and uses the CBE Thermal Comfort Tool for ASHRAE-55, as described in Example 2.
702

Figure 4. Supporting documentation for Example 3

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Example 4. Option 2
A classroom is naturally cooled via operable windows that are manually operated by teachers and students. The
heating system consists of a hydronic radiant panel supplied with hot water from a central boiler system and
controlled by a local thermostat in each classroom.
The project team has decided to determine compliance for the cooling period using the adaptive method,
EQ

described in EN 15251–2007, Annex A, Section A.2, and will determine compliance for the mechanically conditioned
heating period using ISO 7730–2005, Table E.3.
The project team creates a summary table for the design parameters (Table 2).

TABLE 2. Summary table for Example 4

Mean monthly
Activity level Operative Relative Air speed
Space type outdoor
(MET) temperature (°C) humidity (%) (m/s)
temperature (°C)

Cooling Classroom 1.2 25.5 20 N/A 1

Heating Classroom 1.2 22.2 N/A 50 0.15

The average mean monthly outdoor temperature and design operative temperature is plotted on Figure A1 in Annex
A of the EN standard (Figure 5).
 703

Figure 5. Supporting documentation for naturally conditioned period for Example 4. This excerpt is adapted and modified
from ISO 7730:2005 and EN 15251:2007 with the permission of ANSI on behalf of ISO. © ISO 2013 – All rights reserved.

Cooling Condition

THERMAL COMFORT
The design parameters were compared with ISO 7730–2005, Annex E, Table E.3 (Figure 6), and the PMV was
determined to be –0.40. This is within the acceptable range for a Category B building, which is –0.5<PMV<+0.5.

EQ
704

Figure 6. Supporting documentation for mechanically conditioned period for Example 4. This excerpt is adapted and
modified from ISO 7730:2005 and EN 15251:2007 with the permission of ANSI on behalf of ISO. © ISO 2013 – All rights
reserved.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
EQ

For the heating period, the project reviews the potential for local discomfort effects, as required by the ISO standard,
and determines that draft rate, vertical air distribution, and warm and cool floors are not likely. Radiant asymmetry
was considered likely, however, so the team must perform additional calculations.
Radiant asymmetry was calculated to be 10ºC from warm walls and 5ºC from cool walls. Figure 4 from Section
6.5, ISO 7730–2005 provides the associated percentages dissatisfied, <2% and <1%, respectively. The team compares
percentages dissatisfied with the local discomfort limits listed in ISO 7730–2005, Annex A, Table A.1 and sees that
they are well below the 5% limit for Category B buildings.
Alternatively, the project could have compared the radiant temperature asymmetry with Annex A, Table A.4,
which shows that for a Category B building, the radiant temperature asymmetry must be below 23°C for warm walls
and below 10°C for cool walls.
 705

Example 5. Thermal comfort controls

A project consists of a library that has private offices, open library space with reference desks, meeting rooms, and a
children’s storytime room. All spaces are regularly occupied. The project develops a table to summarize the controls
for each space (Table 3).

TABLE 3. Summary table for Example 5

Space type Occupancy Spaces Spaces with controls Type of control

Private office Individual occupant 16 12 Operable window

Reference desk Individual occupant 6 2 Adjustable underfloor diffuser

Meeting rooms Multioccupant 8 8 Thermostat

Storytime room Multioccupant 2 2 Operable window

Percentage of individual occupant spaces with controls 64% (=14/22)

Percentage of multioccupant spaces with controls 100% (=10/ 10)

The project team earns the credit because the percentage of individual occupant spaces with controls is above 50%
and all multioccupant spaces have controls.

Example 6. Warehouses and distribution centers

A warehouse and distribution center project has two regularly occupied areas: a warehouse storage space, and a
distribution and loading dock. The project is using radiant heating, ceiling fans, and radiant flooring to condition
the spaces.

THERMAL COMFORT
To demonstrate compliance, the project compiles a table describing the conditioning systems (Table 4).

TABLE 4. Summary table for Example 6

Design strategy and

Space type System description
conditioning system

Warehouse storage Radiant heating; ceiling fans Gas-fired infrared heaters hung from ceiling (6 zones); variable-
speed ceiling fans for air circulation; heater thermostat and fan speed
controlled by occupants

EQ
Distribution and loading dock Radiant flooring Electric radiant concrete floor

With the radiant heating, ceiling fans, and radiant flooring design strategies, the project meets the thermal comfort
design requirements for the building’s bulk storage, sorting, and distribution areas.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Warehouses and Distribution Centers
The thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step
Guidance with the exception of regularly occupied bulk storage, sorting, and distribution areas. Design each of these
areas to include one of the alternative systems noted in the credit requirements.

Healthcare
The thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step
Guidance with the exception of patients’ rooms. Each patient room must have an individual comfort control for each
patient in the room.

Hospitality
The thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step
Guidance with the exception of guest rooms, which are assumed to have individual thermal comfort controls and are
therefore excluded from the controls requirements of this credit.
706

Retail
The thermal comfort design requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step Guidance. The thermal comfort
control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step Guidance but apply only to individual occupant spaces in
office and administrative areas. All other spaces may be excluded.

Data Centers
The thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step
Guidance but apply only to regularly occupied spaces, such as network operation centers, security offices, and
administrative spaces. Spaces that are not regularly occupied, such as areas that house data center equipment and
mechanical equipment, may be excluded.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Gymnasiums, Fitness Areas, and Other Spaces with High Metabolic Rates
ASHRAE 55–2010, Normative Appendix A, permits use of a time-weighted average metabolic rate over a period of
an hour or less. Any space with a rate of 2.0 MET or less must be addressed using standard compliance methods.
Although the ASHRAE standard does not apply where the time-averaged metabolic rate is above 2.0 MET, thermal
comfort in these spaces must still be addressed. For spaces with a rate above 2.0 MET, address how the project meets
the intent of the credit.

ISO 7730–2005 addresses metabolic rates up to 4.0 MET.

Kitchens
Many kitchens are not conditioned, not cooled, or are only indirectly cooled and may have difficulties achieving
the requirements of ASHRAE 55–2010 or ISO 7730–2005. For kitchens that cannot meet the requirements of these
standards, address how the project meets the intent of the credit.

Apparatus Bays in Fire Stations

Typically, these spaces are not designed for human occupancy and thus would not have to meet the credit
requirements. However, if these spaces are designed for human occupancy, the project must meet the thermal
comfort criteria. The requirements for Warehouses and Distribution Centers may be applied to earn the credit.

Vehicle Repair Facilities

The requirements for Warehouses and Distribution Centers may be applied to earn the credit. This space type,
which is not typically cooled, also includes military buildings where trucks, tanks, aircraft, and other vehicles are
EQ

being serviced.

Natatoriums
Discuss with the owner how the natatorium will be used and the associated activity levels. Design the space to meet
the thermal comfort design requirements in the ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2011 edition, Chapter 5,
Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium Design Conditions. Calculate internal loads and rates of evaporation and
verify that the design criteria will result in acceptable comfort. Retain all activity levels and factors, evaporation
rates, and design calculations for credit documentation.

Residential
The thermal comfort design requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step Guidance. The thermal comfort
control requirements are the same as those in Step-by-Step Guidance, except the entire residential unit only needs one
thermal comfort control.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 707

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Thermal comfort design Thermal Warehouses

Documentation comfort and distribution
Option 1 Option 2 controls centers only

Description of weather data used to determine operative

X
temperatures, relative humidity, outdoor temperatures

Plots or calculation results verifying that design parameters

meet ASHRAE Standard 55–2010 for 80% acceptability (e.g.,
psychometric chart; PMV or PPD calculations; ASHRAE Thermal
X
Comfort Tool results; copy of ASHRAE 55–2010, Figure 5.2.4.1,
Figure 5.2.4.3, or Figure 5.2.4.4; or predicted worst-case indoor
conditions for each month on copy of Figure 5.3)

Documentation to verify thermally conditioned spaces meet ISO

7730 or EN 15251, as applicable (e.g., for ISO, calculations based
on Sections 4.1 and 6 or Annex H, computer program results
X
based on Annex D, tables based on Annex E, or copy of Figures
2, 3, 4, A.1, A.2; for EN, documentation of worst-case indoor
conditions for each month on copy of Figure A1)

List of spaces by type, quantity, and controls X

List of regularly occupied bulk storage, sorting, and

X
distribution areas

Narrative describing design strategy used in each space X

THERMAL COMFORT
RELATED CREDIT TIPS
EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Any plug-in devices that are claimed as thermal controls must be
included in Option 1 of the related prerequisite.

EQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. The requirements for natural conditioning
(ASHRAE 55–2010) are different from those for natural ventilation (ASHRAE 62.1–2010). The former standard
does not specify a minimum window size or any location or proximity requirements. The latter specifies minimum

EQ
window or ventilation opening area as well as maximum distance from the ventilation opening that may be
considered naturally ventilated. Refer to ASHRAE 62.1–2010, Section 6.4, for additional information. Adjustable
diffusers used to provide thermal control (whether floor, wall, or ceiling mounted) can affect the supply air flow of
ventilation and should be coordinated with the ventilation design under the related prerequisite.

EQ Credit Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. Natural ventilation and mixed mode systems must meet
additional requirements of CISBE AM10 and AM13 to earn the related credit.

EQ Credit Interior Lighting. The quantity of individual occupant spaces and shared multioccupant spaces for this
credit must be consistent with the quantity in the related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· This thermal comfort credit combines the LEED 2009 credits Controllability of Systems: Thermal Comfort
(IEQ Credit 6.2, IEQ Credit 6) and Thermal Comfort: Design (IEQ Credit 7.1, IEQ Credit 7) into a single credit.
·· The referenced standard has been updated to ASHRAE 55–2010. Refer to ASHRAE Journal (June 2011) for an
explanation of changes from the 2004 version of the standard: ashrae.org/resources--publications/periodicals/
ashrae-journal/.
·· International standards have been included to provide more relevant compliance options for
non-U.S. projects.
708

·· The requirements for natatoriums are now applicable to all rating systems.
·· New compliance paths have been established for data centers and warehouses.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE Standard 55–2010, Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy: ashrae.org

ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2011 edition, Chapter 5, Places of Assembly, Typical Natatorium
Design Conditions: ashrae.org
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

ISO 7730–2005 Ergonomics of the thermal environment, Analytical determination and interpretation of
thermal comfort using calculation of the PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria: iso.org

EuropeanStandard EN 15251: 2007, Indoor environmental input parameters for design and assessment of
energy performance of buildings addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting and acoustics:
cen.eu

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
individual occupant space an area where an occupant performs distinct tasks. Individual occupant spaces may be
within multioccupant spaces and should be treated separately where possible.

nonregularly occupied space an area that people pass through or an area used for focused activities an average
of less than one hour per person per day. The one-hour timeframe is continuous and should be based on the time a
typical occupant uses the space. For spaces that are not used daily, the one-hour timeframe should be based on the
EQ

time a typical occupant spends in the space when it is in use.

occupied space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended primarily
for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for
short periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied spaces
based on the duration of the occupancy, individual or multioccupant based on the quantity of occupants, and densely
or nondensely occupied spaces based on the concentration of occupants in the space.

regularly occupied space an area where one or more individuals normally spend time (more than one hour per
person per day on average) seated or standing as they work, study, or perform other focused activities inside a
building. The one-hour timeframe is continuous and should be based on the time a typical occupant uses the space.
For spaces that are not used daily, the one-hour timeframe should be based on the time a typical occupant spends in
the space when it is in use.

unoccupied space an area designed for equipment, machinery, or storage rather than for human activities. An
equipment area is considered unoccupied only if retrieval of equipment is occasional.
 709

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Interior Lighting
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–2 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)
Schools (1–2 points) Hospitality (1–2 points)
Retail (2 points) Healthcare (1 point)
Data Centers (1–2 points)

INTENT

To promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by

INTERIOR LIGHTING
providing high-quality lighting.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, SCHOOLS, DATA CENTERS,

EQ
WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY

Select one or both of the following two options.

OPTION 1. LIGHTING CONTROL (1 POINT)

For at least 90% of individual occupant spaces, provide individual lighting controls that enable occupants to adjust
the lighting to suit their individual tasks and preferences, with at least three lighting levels or scenes (on, off,
midlevel). Midlevel is 30% to 70% of the maximum illumination level (not including daylight contributions).
For all shared multioccupant spaces, meet all of the following requirements.
·· Have in place multizone control systems that enable occupants to adjust the lighting to meet group needs and
preferences, with at least three lighting levels or scenes (on, off, midlevel).
·· Lighting for any presentation or projection wall must be separately controlled.
·· Switches or manual controls must be located in the same space as the controlled luminaires. A person
operating the controls must have a direct line of sight to the controlled luminaires.
710

HOSPITALITY ONLY

Guest rooms are assumed to provide adequate lighting controls and are therefore not included in the
credit calculations.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. LIGHTING QUALITY (1 POINT)

Choose four of the following strategies.

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

A. For all regularly occupied spaces, use light fixtures with a luminance of less than 2,500 cd/m2 between 45 and
90 degrees from nadir.
Exceptions include wallwash fixtures properly aimed at walls, as specified by manufacturer’s data, indirect
uplighting fixtures, provided there is no view down into these uplights from a regularly occupied space
above, and any other specific applications (i.e. adjustable fixtures).
B. For the entire project, use light sources with a CRI of 80 or higher. Exceptions include lamps or fixtures
specifically designed to provide colored lighting for effect, site lighting, or other special use.
C. For at least 75% of the total connected lighting load, use light sources that have a rated life (or L70 for LED
sources) of at least 24,000 hours (at 3-hour per start, if applicable).
D. Use direct-only overhead lighting for 25% or less of the total connected lighting load for all regularly
occupied spaces.
E. For at least 90% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet or exceed the following thresholds for area-
weighted average surface reflectance: 85% for ceilings, 60% for walls, and 25% for floors.
F. If furniture is included in the scope of work, select furniture finishes to meet or exceed the following
thresholds for area-weighted average surface reflectance: 45% for work surfaces, and 50% for movable
partitions.
G. For at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet a ratio of average wall surface illuminance
(excluding fenestration) to average work plane (or surface, if defined) illuminance that does not exceed
1:10. Must also meet strategy E, strategy F, or demonstrate area-weighted surface reflectance of at least 60%
for walls.
H. For at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area, meet a ratio of average ceiling illuminance (excluding
EQ

fenestration) to work surface illuminance that does not exceed 1:10. Must also meet strategy E, strategy F, or
demonstrate area-weighted surface reflectance of at least 85% for ceilings.

RETAIL

For at least 90% of the individual occupant spaces in office and administrative areas, provide individual lighting
controls.

In sales areas, provide controls that can reduce the ambient light levels to a midlevel (30% to 70% of the maximum
illumination level not including daylight contributions).

HEALTHCARE

Provide individual lighting controls for at least 90% of individual occupant spaces in staff areas.

For at least 90% of patient positions, provide lighting controls that are readily accessible from the patient’s bed.
In multioccupant patient spaces, the controls must be individual lighting controls. In private rooms, also provide
exterior window shades, blinds, or curtain controls that are readily accessible from the patient’s bed. Exceptions
include in-patient critical care, pediatric, and psychiatric patient rooms.

For all shared multioccupant spaces, provide multizone control systems that enable occupants to adjust the
lighting to meet group needs and preferences, with at least three lighting levels or scenes (on, off, midlevel).
Midlevel is 30% to 70% of the maximum illumination level (not including daylight contributions).
 711

BEHIND THE INTENT

Studies of lighting in buildings have shown that workers are more comfortable and productive in an environment
that is carefully illuminated and where lighting controls are provided for individual and group needs.1 Also, high-
quality lighting helps eliminate distractions, creates visual interest and a sense of place, supports interaction and
communication, contributes to occupants’ well-being, and reduces health problems.2 This credit rewards lighting
quality that dramatically improves occupants’ comfort and productivity.3
The credit encourages lighting quality in multiple ways.
·· Minimizing light fixture luminance (strategy A) helps reduce disability and discomfort glare; the threshold,
2,500 candela per square meter, was selected because research by the Light Right Consortium found that above
that level, glare became objectionable.
·· Using light sources with a color rendering index above 80 (strategy B) helps approximate natural light.
·· Using light sources with long lamp life (strategy C) can lengthen the period over which the integrity of the
lighting design is maintained; it also reduces maintenance costs and lowers material and resource inputs. A
lamp life of 24,000 hours promotes the use of longer-life fluorescents.
·· Designing spaces with less direct-only overhead lighting (strategy D) helps minimize glare, reduces the
perceived brightness of the direct luminaires, and reduces contrast between ceiling and luminaire.
·· Specifying surfaces with high reflectance (strategies E and F) helps make the space brighter through reflection,
minimizing the difficulty of viewing light documents on dark surfaces; the specific surface reflectance values
for ceilings, walls, and floors are above the standard industry assumptions of 80, 50, and 20, respectively, as
recommended in the latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Lighting Handbook.4
·· Designing for an illuminance ratio less than 1:10 (strategies G and H) minimizes the amount of contrast
that occupants experience between their work surface and the ceiling and wall surfaces around them; the
1:10 illuminance ratio represents one log scale difference in lighting levels (human eyes are logarithmic, but

INTERIOR LIGHTING
illuminance is linear).

Research on lighting and visual performance is cited in Further Explanation, Additional Lighting Resources.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

EQ
STEP 1. ESTABLISH LIGHTING NEEDS
Work with the owner to understand occupants’ lighting needs and desires.
·· Document the types of tasks that will occur in each space and the tools and equipment that occupants
will use regularly, and determine appropriate light levels for tasks.
·· Identify the level of control that occupants should have and the characteristics of the occupant
population.

STEP 2. SELECT OPTION(S)

Determine which option(s) are appropriate for the project. All projects except Healthcare and Retail may
earn one or both options.
·· Option 1 requires lighting controls for 90% of the individual occupant spaces and 100% of shared,
multioccupant spaces. Standard on-off switches are not acceptable; at least three lighting levels or
scenes must be provided. Project teams that are familiar with previous versions of LEED may prefer
this option, and it is easier to implement in later phases of design than Option 2.

1. Lighting Quality and Office Work: A Field Simulation Study, lrc.rpi.edu/researchAreas/pdf/LRAlbanyStudyReport.pdf (accessed June 11, 2013).
2. Federal Lighting Guide, eere.energy.gov/femp/pdfs/light_controls.pdf (accessed June 11, 2013).
3. Veitch, J.A., et al., “Lighting Appraisal, Well-Being, and Performance in Open-Plan Offices: A Linked Mechanisms Approach,” Lighting Research and
Technology 40(2) (June 2008): 133-151.
4. DiLaura, David, Kevin Houser, Richard Mistrick, and Gary Steff, eds., The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition (New York: Illuminating Engineering Society
of North America, 2011).
712

·· Option 2 offers eight strategies (Table 1), of which four must be implemented to meet the
requirements. Strategies A–D are based on characteristics of the lighting fixtures, light sources,
and luminaires. Strategies E–H are based on characteristics of the surfaces in the project and the
illuminance levels that fall on those surfaces. This option requires attention during early design phases
because achievement depends on luminaire selection and configuration and architectural surface
specifications.
For the different requirements for Healthcare and Retail projects, see Further Explanation, Rating System
Variations.

TABLE 1. Strategies for Option 2, Lighting Quality

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Strategy Scope Exceptions, exclusions

A. Light fixture luminance All light fixtures located in regularly • Wallwash fixtures properly aimed at walls, as
occupied spaces specified by manufacturer
• Indirect uplighting fixtures, provided there is no
view down into these uplights from a regularly
occupied space above
• Any other specific applications (e.g., adjustable
fixtures)

B. Color rendering index (CRI) All light fixtures • Lamps or fixtures specifically designed to provide
colored lighting for effect
• Site lighting
• Any other special use

C. Lamp life 75% connected lighting load —

D. Direct overhead lighting 25% connected lighting load for —

regularly occupied spaces.

E. Surface reflectance: 90% of regularly occupied floor area —

ceilings, walls, floors

F. Surface reflectance: furnishings All furniture used for work surfaces —

G. Surface illuminance ratio: 75% regularly occupied floor area —

wall to work surface

H. Surface illuminance ratio: 75% regularly occupied floor area —

ceiling to work surface
EQ

STEP 3. COMPLY WITH OPTION REQUIREMENTS

For the option(s) selected, follow the appropriate set of steps to confirm compliance.

Option 1. Lighting Control

Identify all individual occupant and shared, multioccupant spaces in the project (see EQ Overview).
·· Design lighting controls for individual and multioccupant spaces to meet the credit requirements. Task
lighting may be used to meet the credit requirements for individual occupant spaces. Task lights are
not required to be hardwired.
·· All lighting controls must provide at least three lighting levels or scenes: including on, off, and
a midlevel, defined as 30% to 70% of the maximum illumination level (not including daylight
contributions). Daylight does not qualify as a separate lighting level.
·· For multioccupant spaces that can be subdivided by movable walls or partitions, provide the required
lighting controls for each subdivision of the space.
·· Tabulate all individual and multioccupant spaces and their respective lighting controls. Confirm
that at least 90% of individual occupant spaces and 100% of multioccupant spaces meet the credit
requirements. The percentage of compliant individual occupant spaces is based on the number of
spaces, not floor area.
 713

Option 2. Lighting Quality

Option 2. Lighting Quality, Strategy A

Identify all regularly occupied spaces in the project and all light fixtures in these spaces (see EQ
Overview). The following fixtures may be excluded:
·· Wallwash fixtures properly aimed at walls, as specified by manufacturer’s data
·· Indirect uplighting fixtures, provided there is no view down into these uplights from a regularly
occupied space above
·· Any other specific applications (e.g., adjustable fixtures)
For the light fixtures, review luminaires cutsheets, Illuminating Engineering Society photometric files, or
other documentation to identify luminance between 45 degrees and 90 degrees from nadir and select
products that meet the credit requirements. The luminance must be below 2,500 candela per square
meter.
Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for luminance.

Option 2. Lighting Quality, Strategy B

Specify all light sources to meet the credit requirements for color rendering index (CRI).
·· The following light sources may be excluded: lamps or fixtures specifically designed to provide colored
lighting for effect, site lighting, and lamps or fixtures designed for some other special use.
·· For the light sources, determine the CRI, not to be confused with correlated color temperature (CCT),
which refers to the spectrum of warm to cool. A light source can have a high or low CRI regardless of
its CCT.
·· Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for the lighting’s CRI.

Option 2. Lighting Quality, Strategy C

Specify all light sources to meet the credit requirements for lamp life.

INTERIOR LIGHTING
·· Calculate the total connected lighting load for all lighting in the project, in watts or kilowatts. Refer
to the lighting power calculations prepared for EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and
tabulate luminaire quantities and wattages to determine the total connected load. For guidance on
determining connected lighting load, see ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Sections 9.1.3 and 9.1.4. Plug-in lighting is
included in the calculation for connected load.
·· For lamp life, review luminaire cutsheets or other documentation. Lamp life depends on the type
of source. For traditional light sources, the lamp life is based on the time at which 50% of the test
samples have burned out. For LED light sources, the lamp life criterion L70 is based on the time at
which the light source has a 30% reduction in light output. Review the IES Lighting Handbook for more

EQ
information on lamp life.
·· Calculate the amount of connected lighting load with compliant light source; it must be 75% or greater.
·· Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for lamp life.

Option 2. Lighting Quality, Strategy D

Specify a combination of direct-only overhead lighting and other lighting. Minimize the use of direct-only
overhead lighting to meet the credit requirements for strategy D.
·· Identify all regularly occupied spaces in the project and the total connected lighting load associated
with these spaces (see EQ Overview). Refer to the lighting power calculations prepared for EA
Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and tabulate luminaire quantities and wattages to
determine the total connected load. For guidance on determining connected lighting load, see
ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Sections 9.1.3 and 9.1.4. Plug-in lighting is included in the calculation for connected
load.
·· Determine the connected lighting load that is associated with direct-only overhead lighting; it must be
25% or less.
·· Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for overhead lighting.
714

Option 2. Surface Reflectance, Strategies E and F

Select or specify high-reflectance finish materials as applicable to the strategy pursued: ceilings, walls,
and floors for strategy E, and work surfaces and movable partitions for strategy F.
·· Before construction begins, review manufacturers’ cutsheets to identify reflectance, typically
expressed as a fraction or percentage LR (light reflectance) or LRV (light reflectance value). If
manufacturers’ data do not include reflectance, measure the reflectance of product samples (before
construction) or the installed product (postconstruction) using the methodology described in IES
Lighting Handbook, Section 9.12.2, Measuring Reflectance and Transmittance. Or use reflectance
charts, such as Lighting Guide 11, Surface Reflectance and Colour.5
·· For strategy E, 10% of the regularly occupied floor area may be excluded.
·· For strategy F, work surfaces include desk and table surfaces where individuals perform tasks. The
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

surface area for movable partitions is limited to opaque surfaces of the partition; transparent or
partially transparent surfaces are not included in the calculation.
·· Use Equation 1 to calculate the average surface reflectance for walls, ceilings, and floors (strategy E)
and work surfaces and movable partitions (strategy F).

EQUATION 1. Average surface reflectance

{ ( (( ( ( ( {
reflectance of
surface area
Weighted reflectance
of surface 1
× of surface 1
+ reflectance
of surface 2
× surface area
of surface 2
+ ... + surface n and surface
average
of surface =
area of surface n

reflectances
total surface area

·· Confirm that the average surface reflectance of the specified surfaces meets or exceeds the values in
the credit requirements.

Option 2. Illuminance, Strategies G and H

Develop a lighting design strategy to minimize the ratio of wall surface illuminance (strategy G) or ceiling
surface illuminance (strategy H) to work surface illuminance. Consider the following design strategies:
·· Specify ceiling and wall finishes that are light colored or have high surface reflectance.
·· Design the lighting system to intentionally light the walls or ceiling.
·· Consider luminaires that throw 20% to 30% of light on ceiling or wall, such as direct-indirect lighting.
·· Arrange luminaires to provide wall wash.
EQ

Use lighting calculation software or measurements to determine the average illuminance levels on work,
wall, and ceiling surfaces for each regularly occupied space. If illuminance values vary widely throughout
the space, either subdivide or use the predominant illuminance level. Work surfaces include desks or
other table surfaces where individuals perform tasks. Where work surfaces are not specified, calculate
the illuminance at a height of 30 inches (750 millimeters) above the finished floor. Alternatively, calculate
illuminance at the height where most visual tasks are expected to be performed. For existing building
projects or after construction is complete, the illuminance may be measured. The illuminance of a given
surface is measured with a light meter, with the sensor facing away from the surface for which the
measurement is being taken.
Use Equation 2 (for Strategy G) and Equation 3 (for Strategy H) to calculate an illuminance ratio for
each regularly occupied space. Determine the percentage of regularly occupied area that achieves an
illuminance ratio of 1:10 or less, it must be at least 75%.

EQUATION 2. Wall to work plane illuminance ratio EQUATION 3. Ceiling to work plane illuminance ratio

Illuminance
ratio
= 1:
{ average work surface illuminance

average wall surface illuminance { Illuminance

ratio
= 1:
{average work surface illuminance

average ceiling illuminance {

5. cibseknowledgeportal.co.uk (accessed June 11, 2013).
 715

Spaces where similar ratios of wall surface or ceiling surface illuminance to work surface illuminance are
expected can be assessed through a single representative calculation.
Compile documentation that confirms compliance with the credit requirements for illuminance, As
applicable, include confirmation that one of the following has also been met: strategy E, strategy F, area-
weighted surface reflectances of at least 60% for walls, or area-weighted surface reflectances of at least
85% for ceilings.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See calculations in Step-by-Step Guidance.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Option 1
An office has individual occupant spaces (workstations), private offices, and a conference room. The workstations
have task lighting that is part of the furniture system; the control allows for four distinct light levels. The private
offices have overhead lighting with manual dimming controls. The conference room can be divided into two spaces,
each with its own set of manual controls for overhead lighting. The overhead lighting is divided into two separate
zones and is also fully dimmable. There are separate controls for lighting the presentation wall. Because this office

INTERIOR LIGHTING
has the appropriate lighting controls for at least 90% of the individual occupant spaces and all shared, multioccupant
spaces, the project earns 1 point under Option 1 of the credit.

Figure 1. Example 1

EQ
716

Example 2. Option 2, lighting quality, strategies A and D

The data for all luminaires specified in the project building’s regularly occupied spaces are summarized in Table 2.

For strategy A, two luminaire types (indirect pendant and indirect-direct pendant) are excluded because there is no
view of these luminaires from above. There is one luminaire type that does not meet the requirement, the surface-
mounted luminaires. For this reason, the project does not achieve strategy A.

For strategy D, there are two direct-only overhead lights: recessed and surface mounted. The percentage of
connected lighting load attributed to these lights is 5.7 % which is well below the 25% threshold. For this reason, the
project achieves strategy D.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

TABLE 2. Luminaire information for Example 2

Luminance
Connected load Total <2,500 cd/m 2
Excluded from
Description per luminaire Luminaires connected load between 45° and Direct-only?
strategy A
(W) (W) 90° from nadir
(Y/N)

Indirect pendant 112 8 896 N Y N

Recessed 56 4 224 Y N Y

Surface mounted 32 1 32 N N Y

Indirect-direct
168 20 3,360 N Y N
pendant

Total connected lighting load (W): 4,512

Percentage of connected lighting load that is direct-only: 5.7% (256 W)

Example 3. Option 2, lighting quality, strategies B and C

Data for all light sources in the building are summarized in Table 3.

For strategy B, all three light sources have a CRI above 80. For this reason, the project achieves strategy B.

For strategy C, the lamp life for the linear fluorescent T8 and linear LED cove light both meet the lamp life
requirement of 24,000 hours or more rated life or L70. The percentage of connected lighting load attributed to the
EQ

light fixtures with these lamps is 96.2 % which is well above the 75% threshold. For this reason, the project achieves
strategy C.

TABLE 3. Example 3 Light source information

Light source Total connected load

CRI Lamp life (hours)
description for fixtures (W)

Linear fluorescent T8 5,320 82 26,000

Halogen 250 99 5,000

Linear LED cove light 1,000 81 L70

Total connected load (W): 6,570

Percentage of connected lighting load that meets lamp life requirement: 96.2% (6,320 W)

Example 4. Option 2, lighting quality, strategies E and F (surface reflectance)

The values of the reflectance for the ceilings, walls, floors, work surfaces, and partitions were determined. The
results are summarized in Figure 2 below.
 717

Figure 2. Supplemental calculator

Surface Reflectance for

Surface Information Surface Reflectance for Ceilings, Walls, Floors
Furnishings

Pctg. total regularly occupied

100%
floor area included below (%) Work Surface Moveable
Reflectance
Description of Surface Area Partition Area
(%)
Ceiling Area Wall Area Floor Area (sq ft) (sq ft)
(sq ft) (sq ft) (sq ft)

high reflectance ceiling 90.00% 26786.00

generic ceiling 80.00% 216.00

wall type 1 65.00% 7312.00

wall type 2 55.00% 500.00

light wood floor 27.00% 500.00

dark carpet 12.00% 216.00

light carpet 25.00% 26286.00

workstation type 1 60.00% 2000.00

workstation type 2 50.00% 20.00

workstation type 3 10.00% 500.00

partition type 1 50.00% 80.00

partition type 2 55.00% 40.00

Total area incl. in calculation 27002.00 7812.00 27002.00 2520.00 120.00

INTERIOR LIGHTING
Average surface reflectance for ceilings 90%
E. Surface Reflectance for
Average surface reflectance for walls 64%
Ceilings, Walls, Floors
Average surface reflectance for floors 25%

Average surface reflectance for work surfaces 50%

F. Surface Reflectance for
Furnishings
Average surface reflectance for moveable partitions 52%

E. Ceilings calculation: (90% × 26786 sq ft + 80% × 216 sq ft) ÷ 27002 sq ft = 90%

E. Walls calculation: (65% × 7312 sq ft + 55% × 500 sq ft) ÷ 7812 sq ft = 64%

EQ
E. Floors calculation: (27% × 500 sq ft + 12% × 216 sq ft + 25% × 26286 sq ft) ÷ 27002 sq ft = 25%
F. Work surfaces calculation: (60% × 2000 sq ft + 50% × 20 sq ft + 10% × 500 sq ft) ÷ 2520 sq ft = 50%
F. Moveable partitions calculation: (50% × 80 sq ft + 55% × 40 sq ft) ÷ 120 sq ft = 52%

Example 5. Option 2, lighting quality, strategies G and H (illuminance)

The project’s lighting designer has used lighting calculation software to determine the average illuminance levels for
wall, ceiling, and work surfaces and compiled (Table 4). Private office 2 was excluded from the calculation because
the office has low wall and ceiling illuminance values.
The project team wishes to use strategies G and H. The wall to work surface illuminance ratio exceeds 1:10 in the
open office, which constitutes the majority of the floor area in the project, so the project does not attain strategy G.
However, the ceiling to work surface illuminance ratio is below 1:10 for the open office, private office 1, and the
conference room. The project has also achieved strategy E, so the project complies with strategy H.
718

TABLE 4. Illuminance information for Example 5

Average illuminance (footcandles) Illuminance ratio

Floor area
Space
(ft2 ) Wall to work Ceiling to
Work surface Wall Ceiling
surface work surface

Open office 26,284 80 (861 lux) 7 (75 lux) 20 (214 lux) 1:11.4 1:4

Private office 1 96 75 (807 lux) 10 (107 lux) 25 (267 lux) 1:7.5 1:3

Conference room 500 60 (642 lux) 10 (107 lux) 15 (160 lux) 1:6 1:4

Private office 2 120 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

2
Total regularly occupied floor area (ft ): 27,000

Percentage of regularly occupied floor area that meets wall to work surface illuminance ratio of 1:10 or less (must be 75%):
2.2% (596 ft2)

Percentage of regularly occupied floor area that meets ceiling to work surface illuminance ratio of 1:10 or less (must be 75%):
99.6% (26,880 ft2)

ADDITIONAL LIGHTING RESOURCES

Studies of the effect of lighting on visual performance and comfort can be found in the following sources:

Peter R. Boyce, Human Factors in Lighting, 2nd edition (Taylor and Francis, 2003).

Lighting and Human Performance II (available at no cost from EPRI): my.epri.com/portal/server.pt?

Lighting Guide 11: Surface Reflectance and Colour: cibseknowledgeportal.co.uk/

Lighting Research Center, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute: lrc.rpi.edu/

National Research Council Canada Institute for Research in Construction: nrc-cnrc.gc.ca/eng/rd/construction/

J.A. Veitch, “Psychological Processes Influencing Lighting Quality,” Journal of the Illuminating Engineering Society
30(1) (2001): 124–40.

The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition, Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (2011).
EQ

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Healthcare
Follow the steps for Option 1 for individual occupant spaces in staff areas and for all shared multioccupant spaces.
Identify all patient positions in the project, and classify whether each is in a private room (see Definitions and
exclude in-patient critical care, pediatric, and psychiatric patient rooms).
·· Design the individual lighting controls. Task lighting may be used and is not required to be hardwired.
·· If the position is in a private room, provide exterior window shades, blinds, or curtain controls that are readily
accessible from the patient’s bed.
·· Tabulate all positions and their respective lighting controls. Confirm that at least 90% of patient positions
meet the credit requirements. The percentage of compliant positions is based on the number of spaces, not
floor area.

Retail
For Option 1, follow the steps for Option 1 for office and administration areas. In addition, provide at least three
lighting levels: on, off, and a midlevel in sales areas.

Hospitality
Option 1. Lighting Control Exclude guest rooms from lighting control calculations.
 719

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Residential
For Option 1, residential units must have one lighting control for each individual occupant and multioccupant space.
For example, a bedroom is listed as individual occupancy. A task light in the bedroom or an overhead light with
manual dimmable control would be acceptable. See EQ Overview for a detailed list of individual and multioccupant
space types in residential buildings.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Option 2
Documentation Option 1
A B C D E F G H

Table of individual occupant and multioccupant spaces and lighting

x
controls in each space

Table of regularly occupied spaces and associated lighting details x x

INTERIOR LIGHTING
Calculations of total connected lighting load x x

Lighting details, including manufacturer and model, results of

x x x x
estimations, or in situ or laboratory photometric tests

List of ceiling, wall, and floor surfaces and their associated surface
x
reflectance values

List of work surfaces and movable partitions and their associated

x
surface reflectance values

EQ
Average surface reflectance calculations x x

List of work surfaces and illuminance values (lux) x

List of wall or ceiling surfaces with illuminance values (lux) x

Illuminance ratio calculations x x

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Credit Thermal Comfort. Individual and multioccupant spaces for this credit must be consistently with those
for the related credit.

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification and EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning. All
lighting controls must be included in the commissioning process.
720

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· An additional point and option for lighting quality have been added.
·· The requirements for lighting control have been revised to require at least three lighting levels: on, off,
and a midlevel.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition, Illuminating Engineering Society of North America: ies.org
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
color rendering index a measurement from 0 to 100 that indicates how accurately an artificial light source, as
compared with an incandescent light, displays hues. The higher the index number, the more accurately the light
is rendering colors. Incandescent lighting has a color rendering index above 95; standard high-pressure sodium
lighting (such as orange-hued roadway lights) measures approximately 25; many fluorescent sources using rare earth
phosphors have a color rendering index of 80 and above. (Adapted from U.S. ENERGY STAR)

illuminance the incident luminous flux density on a differential element of surface located at a point and oriented
in a particular direction, expressed in lumens per unit area. Since the area involved is differential, it is customary to
refer to this as illuminance at a point. The unit name depends on the unit of measurement for area: footcandles if
square feet are used for area, and lux if square meters are used. (Adapted from Illuminating Engineering Society) In
lay terms, illuminance is a measurement of light striking a surface. It is expressed in footcandles in the U.S. (based on
square feet) and in lux in most other countries (based on square meters).
EQ

individual occupant space an area where an occupant performs distinct tasks. Individual occupant spaces may be
within multioccupant spaces and should be treated separately where possible.

shared multioccupant space a place of congregation, or where occupants pursue overlapping or collaborative tasks

patient position a patient bed, infusion chair, recovery room bay, or other location where a patient receives
clinical care
 721

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Daylight
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–3 points) Data Centers (1–3 points)
Core and Shell (1–3 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–3 points)
Schools (1–3 points) Hospitality (1–3 points)
Retail (1–3 points) Healthcare (1–2 points)

INTENT

To connect building occupants with the outdoors, reinforce circadian

rhythms, and reduce the use of electrical lighting by introducing
daylight into the space.

DAYLIGHT
REQUIREMENTS
Provide manual or automatic (with manual override) glare-control devices for all regularly occupied spaces.

EQ
Select one of the following three options.

OPTION 1. SIMULATION: SPATIAL DAYLIGHT AUTONOMY AND ANNUAL SUNLIGHT

EXPOSURE (2–3 POINTS, 1-2 POINTS HEALTHCARE)

Demonstrate through annual computer simulations that spatial daylight autonomy 300/50% (sDA 300/50% ) of at least
55%, 75%, or 90% is achieved. Use regularly occupied floor area. Healthcare projects should use the perimeter area
determined under EQ Credit Quality Views. Points are awarded according to Table 1.

TABLE 1. Points for daylit floor area: Spatial daylight autonomy

New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail, Data Centers,

Healthcare
Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality

sDA (for regularly occupied floor area) Points sDA (for perimeter floor area) Points

55% 2 75% 1

75% 3 90% 2
722

AND

Demonstrate through annual computer simulations that annual sunlight exposure1000,250 (ASE1000,250) of no
more than 10% is achieved. Use the regularly occupied floor area that is daylit per the sDA300/50% simulations.
The sDA and ASE calculation grids should be no more than 2 feet (600 millimeters) square and laid out across the
regularly occupied area at a work plane height of 30 inches (76 millimeters) above finished floor (unless otherwise
defined). Use an hourly time-step analysis based on typical meteorological year data, or an equivalent, for the nearest
available weather station. Include any permanent interior obstructions. Moveable furniture and partitions may be
excluded.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

CORE AND SHELL ONLY

If the finishes in the space will not be completed, use the following default surface reflectances: 80% for ceilings, 20%
for floors, and 50% for walls. Assume that the entire floor plate, except for the core, will be regularly occupied space.

OR

OPTION 2. SIMULATION: ILLUMINANCE CALCULATIONS (1–2 POINTS)

Demonstrate through computer modeling that illuminance levels will be between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for 9 a.m.
and 3 p.m., both on a clear-sky day at the equinox, for the floor area indicated in Table 2. Use regularly occupied floor
area. Healthcare projects should use the perimeter area determined under EQ Credit Quality Views.

TABLE 2. Points for daylit floor area: Illuminance calculation

New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail, Data Centers,

Healthcare
Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality

Percentage of regularly occupied floor

Points Percentage of perimeter floor area Points
area

75% 1 75% 1
EQ

90% 2 90% 2

Calculate illuminance intensity for sun (direct component) and sky (diffuse component) for clear-sky conditions as
follows:
·· Use typical meteorological year data, or an equivalent, for the nearest available weather station.
·· Select one day within 15 days of September 21 and one day within 15 days of March 21 that represent the clearest
sky condition.
·· Use the average of the hourly value for the two selected days.

Exclude blinds or shades from the model. Include any permanent interior obstructions. Moveable furniture and
partitions may be excluded.

CORE AND SHELL ONLY

Assume the following default surface reflectances if the finishes in the space will not be completed: 80% for ceilings,
20% for floors, and 50% for walls. Assume that the entire floor plate, except for the core, will be regularly occupied
space.
 723

OR

OPTION 3. MEASUREMENT (2-3 POINTS, 1-2 POINTS HEALTHCARE)

Achieve illuminance levels between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for the floor area indicated in Table 3.

TABLE 3. Points for daylit floor area: Measurement

New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail, Data Centers,

Healthcare
Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality

Percentage of regularly occupied floor area Points Percentage of perimeter floor area

75 2 75 1

90 3 90 2

With furniture, fixtures, and equipment in place, measure illuminance levels as follows:
·· Measure at appropriate work plane height during any hour between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m.
·· Take one measurement in any regularly occupied month, and take a second as indicated in Table 4.
·· For spaces larger than 150 square feet (14 square meters), take measurements on a maximum 10 foot (3 meter)
square grid.
·· For spaces 150 square feet (14 square meters) or smaller, take measurements on a maximum 3 foot (900
millimeters) square grid.

TABLE 4. Timing of measurements for illuminance

If first measurement is taken in … take second measurement in …

January May-September

DAYLIGHT
February June-October

March June-July, November-December

April August-December

May September-January

EQ
June October-February

July November-March

August December-April

September December-January, May-June

October February-June

November March-July

December April-August
724

BEHIND THE INTENT

Increased access to daylight has positive human behavioral and health effects because it reinforces our circadian
rhythms.1 Access to sufficient daylight has been shown to increase healing times in hospitals, improve students’
performance, 2 increase productivity in the workplace,3 fight depression and lethargy, and even increase sales in retail
environments.4 A well-designed daylit building also uses less electric lighting energy, conserving natural resources
and reducing air pollution.
This credit has evolved significantly and now focuses on using simulated daylight analysis and actual
measurement to estimate daylight quality and daylight levels. These methods more accurately predict daylight
access and support the design process for optimizing daylight. The previous prescriptive method for calculating
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

daylight using window design less accurately accounted for such project-specific factors as building orientation,
exterior conditions, the interaction with interior finishes, time of day and year, and other performance variables.
The new simulation requirements use global metrics and performance values for daylight established by daylighting
professionals. Other globally recognized standards-setting organizations are using the credit’s language, metric
conversions, and performance goals to create consistency in the daylighting and building professions.
Projects have three compliance options. The options that require more detailed design input and analysis or that
demonstrate actual performance earn a correspondingly higher number of points. A good computer simulation is the
best way to inform the design phase and help create a more effective daylit project. Project teams should integrate
daylight concerns into the design process while taking into account such factors as heat gain and loss, glare control,
visual quality, and variations in daylight availability.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ESTABLISH DESIGN CRITERIA

During predesign, work with the owner to understand lighting and daylighting goals. Specify daylighting
performance criteria in the owner’s project requirements.

STEP 2. CONSIDER SITE AND MASSING

During schematic design, determine how best to orient the building to allow for passive solar strategies,
EQ

and explore ways to improve daylight penetration and distribution.

·· Consider identifying and preserving existing topography and landscape features that will shade the
building or minimize glare.
·· Consider proximity to neighboring buildings and their effects on daylighting availability and shading.
·· Evaluate the building footprint, the structural floor-to-floor height, and finished ceiling clearances to
determine an adequate ratio of window to floor area.
·· Consider incorporating atria, clerestories, courtyards, and shallow floor plates.
·· Weigh the effects of the envelope design on energy efficiency. Incorporate exterior shading to
minimize solar heat gains and glare while admitting daylight.

STEP 3. DESIGN TO MAXIMIZE DAYLIGHT

Consider how best to allocate interior space to ensure that daylight is available in all regularly occupied
spaces. Enclosure design and furniture selection will affect daylight penetration. Possible design
strategies include the following:
·· Use transparent partitions or interior glazing to provide daylight to enclosed spaces.

1. Kellert, Stephen R., Judith H. Heerwagen, and Martin L. Mador, Biophilic Design: The Theory, Science and Practice of Bringing Life into Buildings (New
York: Wiley, 2008), p. 99.
2. Boyce, Peter, Reviews of Technical Reports on Daylight and Productivity (Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, 2004); Heschong Mahone Group, Daylighting in
Schools: An Investigation into the Relationship between Daylighting and Human Performance (1999).
3. Edwards, L., and P. Torcellini. A Literature Study of the Effects of Natural Light on Building Occupants (Golden, Colorado: NREL, 2002).
4. Peet, Ramona, Lisa Heschong, Roger Wright, and Don Aumann, Daylighting and Productivity in the Retail Sector (2004), eceee.org/conference_
proceedings/ACEEE_buildings/2004/Panel_7/p7_24/paper (accessed June 12, 2013).
 725

·· In open-plan offices, select low partitions or incorporate glazed panels above 42 inches (1 070
millimeters).
·· Consider using daylighting simulations early in the design process to ensure effective daylighting and
to identify and minimize sources of glare.

STEP 4. IDENTIFY REGULARLY OCCUPIED SPACES

Identify all regularly occupied spaces within the project (see EQ Overview, Regularly versus nonregularly
occupied spaces). Highlight regularly occupied spaces on the floor plan or furniture plan and create a
tracking table that lists all regularly occupied spaces and their respective floor area (square footage or
square meters).
Determine whether any regularly occupied spaces should be excluded from the daylight requirements
(see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations). Spaces where tasks would be hindered by the use of
daylight may be excluded. Spaces may not be excluded for security or noise concerns.
For Healthcare projects, only consider regularly occupied spaces within the perimeter area
(see EQ Credit Quality Views, Further Explanation, Perimeter Areas).

STEP 5. PROVIDE GLARE CONTROLS

Provide glare-control devices for all transparent glazing in regularly occupied spaces, regardless of
whether the glazing receives direct sunlight or whether the space meets the illuminance requirements of
this credit (Figure 1).
·· All glare-control devices must be operable by the building’s occupants to address unpredicted glare.
Automatic devices with user override are acceptable.
·· Acceptable glare-control devices include interior window blinds, shades, curtains, movable exterior
louvers, movable screens, and movable awnings.
·· Systems not acceptable as glare-control devices include fixed exterior overhangs, fixed fins and
louvers, dark-colored glazing, and frit and other glazing treatments.
·· Diffused and translucent glazing systems do not require glare-control devices.

DAYLIGHT
EQ

Figure 1. Glare control devices

726

STEP 6. SELECT ONE OPTION

Determine which option the project will pursue. Options 1 and 2 involve different modeling procedures
(see IES LM 83-12 and Further Explanation, Illuminance Simulation Procedure) and different point values.
Option 3 requires no modeling.
·· Option 1 requires project teams to simulate both hourly illuminance and direct sunlight in each
space over an entire year and likely necessitates engaging a daylighting consultant. The method
uses a daylight simulation program that generates spatial daylight autonomy (sDA) ratios,5 a metric
that determines annual daylight performance based on annual weather data and occupancy use.
This temporal analysis provides more information for design decisions than single-point-in-time
calculations.6 Only spatial daylight autonomy (and not continuous autonomy or daylight autonomy) is
modeled.
·· Option 2 is similar to the simulation option in previous versions of LEED and may require the help of
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

a daylighting consultant. This compliance method has been carried over from previous LEED versions
because illuminance calculation is still used by many daylighting professionals. However, project teams
are now required to use site-specific daylight illuminance values instead of the program default values
for weather. This provides daylight performance data that better reflect actual site conditions, leading
to better design decisions.
·· Option 3 is typically for renovations that involve minimal modifications to the building envelope and
for substantiating a completed project’s design strategies with a performance-based metric. Consider
the schedule before selecting Option 3: the second required measurement must occur at least five
months after the first measurement. Measurement compliance method is similar to the method used in
previous versions and is now the only method for credit compliance that is not simulation based. This
method has been revised to better address the differences in daylight experienced throughout the
year by requiring measurements at two times—when the sun is high in the sky and when the sun is low
in the sky.

Option 1. Simulation—Spatial Daylight Autonomy

STEP 1. COLLECT SDA SIMULATION INPUTS

Work with the daylighting consultant to identify information needed for the daylight simulation. At a
minimum, compile the following:
·· Exterior building geometry and obstructions
·· Site plan, location, and context
EQ

·· Floor plan and furniture plan

·· Interior finishes and surface reflectance (see Further Explanation, Surface Reflectance).
·· Glazing performance specifications
·· Glare-control device specifications
·· Project occupancy schedule
·· Local climate weather files, such as typical meteorological year (TMY2 or TMY3) data, available at
nrel.gov

STEP 2. PERFORM SDA SIMULATION

Prepare the sDA model based on information collected in Step 1. Follow the modeling methodology
outlined in IES LM 83 (section numbers below refer to this standard).
·· See Section 2.2, sDA—Building 3D Modeling Methodology, for guidance on the period of analysis,
illuminance threshold information, temporal threshold, analysis area, analysis points, operation of
blinds and shades, optical properties of blinds and shades, exterior obstructions, window and skylight
details, interior surface reflectances, and furniture and partitions. For building geometries, develop a
complete building model.
·· Ensure that the software program selected is capable of simulating the sDA model per Section 2.3.3,
Modeling Parameters.

5. Illuminating Engineering Society, Approved Method: IES Spatial Daylight Autonomy (sDA) and Annual Sunlight Exposure (ASE), IES document LM-83
(2013), ies.org/store/product/approved-method-ies-spatial-daylight-autonomy-sda-and-annual-sunlight-exposure-ase-1287.cfm (accessed June 12, 2013).
6. Heschong Mahone Group, Daylighting Metrics (California Energy Commission, PIER Daylighting Plus Research Program, February 2012), energy.
ca.gov/2012publications/CEC-500-2012-053/CEC-500-2012-053.pdf (accessed June 12, 2013).
 727

·· Determine how the regularly occupied spaces will be divided into analysis areas. The analysis areas
must cover all regularly occupied floor area. For the annual sunlight exposure (ASE) calculations, at
a minimum, each floor must be an analysis area (for Healthcare, use all regularly occupied perimeter
floor area).
·· Include glare-control devices in the model as described in Sections 2.2.7, Blinds/Shades Operation, and
2.2.8, Blinds/Shades Optical Properties.
·· Set thresholds for the simulation to 300 lux for 50% of the hours between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M. local clock
time, for a full calendar year, from January 1 to December 31. See Sections 2.2.1, Period of Analysis;
2.2.2, Illuminance Threshold Information; and 2.2.3, Temporal Threshold.
·· Ensure that the model includes all permanent interior obstructions. Moveable furniture and partitions
may be excluded. See Section 2.2.11 for suggestions on modeling furniture and partitions.
·· Refer to Section 2.3, sDA—Climatic Modeling Methodology, for guidance on climate conditions for the
project’s location (see Further Explanation, Finding Meteorological Data).
Perform the sDA simulation.
Consult with the project team on assumptions developed for early design simulations. The assumptions
should be further refined as design develops. Simulation results used for credit documentation should be
based on the design that is closest to the completed construction documents for the as-built scenario.

STEP 3. EVALUATE SDA COMPLIANCE

Review the simulation output results and determine the sDA value for all regularly occupied floor area
(for Healthcare, the regularly occupied perimeter floor area).
·· Record the areas that are daylit (i.e., they contribute to the sDA value by meeting the threshold for the
simulation).
·· Confirm that the project meets or exceeds the requirements in Table 1 in the credit requirements.

STEP 4. PERFORM ANNUAL SUNLIGHT EXPOSURE SIMULATION

·· Prepare the annual sunlight exposure (ASE) model based on information collected in Step 1 and the
sDA model created in Step 2. The sDA model can be used for ASE analysis with a few modifications.
Follow the modeling methodology outlined in IES LM 83 (section numbers below refer to this
standard).

DAYLIGHT
·· See Section 3.2, ASE—Building 3D Modeling Details, for guidance on the period of analysis, illuminance
threshold information, temporal threshold, analysis area, analysis points, operation of blinds and
shades, optical properties of blinds and shades, and exterior obstructions.
·· The analysis areas should be the same as those used for the sDA simulations. To align with the
supporting research for ASE, small analysis areas (ideally space by space, or orientation per floor)
are recommended. At a minimum, the analysis area must be for all regularly occupied floor area on a

EQ
single floor (for Healthcare, the regularly occupied perimeter area on a single floor).
·· Glare-control devices are not included in the analysis per Section 3.2.6, Blinds/Shade Operation.
·· Set thresholds for the simulation to 1,000 lux of direct sunlight for more than 250 hours of the hours
between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M. local clock time, for a full calendar year, from January 1 to December 31.
See Sections 3.2.1, Period of Analysis; 3.2.2, Illuminance Threshold Information; and 3.2.3, Temporal
Threshold).
·· Refer to Section 3.3, ASE—Climatic Modeling Methodology, for guidance on climate conditions for the
project’s location. The ASE analysis does not require modeling of sky luminance or ground reflectance.
If the software being used does not accommodate direct sunlight as described in Section 3.3, ASE may
be identified based on illuminance compared with adjacent nodes.
For an alternative way to determine ASE, see Further Explanation, Direct Sunlight Based on Lux
Differences between Adjacent Grid Points.

STEP 5. EVALUATE COMPLIANCE FOR ANNUAL SUNLIGHT EXPOSURE

Review the simulation output results and determine the ASE values for each analysis area.
·· Record the ASE values for each floor area being analyzed.
·· Confirm that the ASE value does not exceed 10% for each analysis area. The 10% threshold should
be determined for small areas, ideally space by space or orientation per floor. At a minimum, the
10% threshold must be determined for all regularly occupied floor area (for Healthcare, the regularly
occupied perimeter area) on a single floor.
728

Option 2. Simulation—Illuminance Calculations

STEP 1. COLLECT ILLUMINANCE SIMULATION INPUTS

Work with the daylighting consultant or modeler to identify information needed for the daylight
simulation. At a minimum, compile the following:
·· Exterior building geometry and obstructions
·· Site plan, location, and context
·· Floor plan and furniture plan
·· Interior finishes and surface reflectance (see Further Explanation, Surface Reflectance)
·· Glazing performance specifications
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

·· Local climate weather files, such as typical meteorological year (TMY2 or TMY3) data, available at
nrel.gov

STEP 2. PERFORM ILLUMINANCE SIMULATION

Prepare the illuminance model based on information collected in Step 1.
·· Follow the modeling methodology outlined and illustrated in Further Explanation, Illuminance
Simulation Procedure.
·· Perform the point-in-time simulations.
·· Consult with the project team on assumptions developed for early design simulations. The
assumptions should be further refined as design develops. Simulation results used for credit
documentation should be based on the design that is closest to the completed construction
documents for the as-built scenario.
·· Perform one illuminance simulation at 9 A.M. on the equinox (September 21 or March 21).
·· Perform a second illuminance simulation at 3 P.M. on the equinox (September 21 or March 21).

STEP 3. EVALUATE ILLUMINANCE COMPLIANCE

Review the simulation output results and determine the illuminance values for all regularly occupied floor
area (for Healthcare, the regularly occupied perimeter floor area).
·· Record the areas that are daylit (have illuminance levels between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for both 9
A.M. and 3 P.M.) and the associated floor area.
·· Confirm that the project meets or exceeds the values in Table 2 in the credit requirements.

Option 3. Measurement
EQ

STEP 1. PREPARE FOR MEASUREMENTS

Determine when the first and second measurements will be taken.
·· Schedule the first day of measurement after the project construction is complete, all furniture is moved
in, window shades are installed, and people have occupied the space.
·· Review Table 4 in the credit requirements to determine timing of the second measurement. Both
measurements must occur during regularly occupied months. For example, measurements for a school
may not be taken during school breaks.
·· Review the regularly occupied space floor area (for Healthcare, all regularly occupied perimeter floor
area) to determine the required measurement grid. Draw the measurement grid and the measurement
nodes (usually located at the center of each grid space) on a floor plan.

STEP 2. PERFORM MEASUREMENTS

Use a light meter to take a daylight illuminance measurement at workplane height (30 inches [750
millimeters] above finished floor, unless otherwise defined) between 9 A.M. and 3 P.M. (see Further
Explanation, Solar Time or Local Time).
·· Refer to the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) Lighting Handbook, 10th edition, Section 9.7, for
more information on light meters.
·· Identify the location of each measurement node in the actual space.
·· Record the measured illuminance at each node on the floor plan or in a tracking table.
·· If measurements cannot be completed for the entire project in one day, continue the following day
between 9 A.M. and 3 P.M.
 729

·· Repeat the process using the same nodes for the second measurement (see Further Explanation,
Examples, Option 3).

STEP 3. EVALUATE ILLUMINANCE COMPLIANCE

Review the measurement results and determine the illuminance values for all regularly occupied floor
area (for Healthcare, the perimeter floor area).
·· Record the areas that are daylit (have illuminance levels between 300 lux and 3,000 lux for both
measurements) and the associated floor area.
·· Confirm that the project meets or exceeds the values in Table 3 in the credit requirements.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
See the daylight and quality views calculator provided by USGBC.

SURFACE REFLECTANCE
IES LM 83-12, Section 2.2.10, provides general guidance for interior surface reflectances.
If surface reflectance values are not available in manufacturers’ information, field measurements may be
performed. Refer to IES LM 83-12, Section 9.12.2, on measuring illuminance and luminance.

Field measurements may be performed as follows:

·· Use a reflectance chart, such as that found in the CIBSE’s Lighting Guide 11: Surface Reflectance and colour

DAYLIGHT
document, to measure reflectance.
·· Measure illuminance with an illuminance meter, and luminance with a spot luminance meter.
·· Reflectance is defined as illuminance divided by luminance in the space.

DIRECT SUNLIGHT BASED ON LUX DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ADJACENT GRID POINTS

EQ
For ASE analysis, direct sunlight can be assumed to occur for any grid point that has an hourly illuminance level at
least 1,000 lux higher than any directly adjacent grid point. This could be determined from manual postprocessing of
the simulation results, through a sun path and shadow program, or with software that automatically postprocesses
the simulation results.

FINDING METEOROLOGICAL DATA

Obtain typical meteorological year data for the nearest available weather station in a format the simulation program
can accept. Example formats include TMY2 and TMY3, EPW, and WEA.
Most U.S. and international weather data can be downloaded from the U.S. Department of Energy, at
apps1.eere.energy.gov/buildings/energyplus/weatherdata_about.cfm.
The National Renewable Energy Laboratory provides a weather file viewer (DView) at
beopt.nrel.gov/downloadDView.

ILLUMINANCE SIMULATION PROCEDURE

The simulation methodology for illuminance simulation is similar to that described in IES LM 83-12 for sDA and ASE.
For building geometries, develop a complete building model. Some programs allow energy model geometries to
be transferred to the daylight modeling interface. Include exterior walls, roofs, shading devices, glazed assemblies
(including mullion thickness), sunlight and window recesses, rough opening thicknesses, and light shelves. Refer to
LM 83, Section 2.2, for general guidance on the level of detail for the model.

Period of analysis. The analysis is performed at 9 A.M. and 3 P.M. on the equinox (September 21 or March 21),
adjusted for daylight savings time and longitude.
730

Illuminance threshold. The illuminance threshold for analysis is 300 lux or greater and below 3,000 lux at the
horizontal workplane, which is 30 inches (750 mm) above the finished floor, unless otherwise defined.

Analysis area and points. The analysis area should cover all regularly occupied floor area. For Healthcare projects,
the analysis area must cover all perimeter floor area, which is any area within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of the building
perimeter. Refer to LM 83, Section 2.2.5, for guidance on the calculation grid and location of the analysis points.

Exterior obstructions. Refer to LM 83-12, Section 2.2.8, for guidance on modeling exterior obstructions.

Window and skylight details. Refer to LM 83-12, Section 2.2.9, for guidance on modeling windows and skylights. If
the modeling software requires an input of glazing transmissivity, use the visible light transmittance value provided
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

by the manufacturer. Glare-control devices are not included in the analysis.

Surface reflectances. Prepare a list of material finishes for all model surfaces and verify material specifications with
the design team. A library of materials is available with most daylight programs, such as the material.rad file structure
for the RADIANCE-based7 simulation programs. The material.rad file may be customized, but in RADIANCE, the
simulation fails if a material is incorrectly defined. Check the normal direction of model surfaces. To receive daylight,
exposed surfaces should face outward from the center of each zone in which they belong. Ground surfaces should
face upward. Refer to LM 83, Section 2.2.10, for further guidance on modeling interior surface reflectances.

Furniture and partitions. The model must include all permanent interior obstructions. Moveable furniture and
partitions may be excluded. See LM 83, Section 2.2.11, for suggestions on modeling furniture and partitions.

Illuminance climatic modeling methodology. Proceed as follows.

1. Obtain typical meteorological year data (see Further Explanation, Finding Meteorological Data). Use
local weather data or TMY weather data files for the nearest city. If the simulation program is capable of
automatically determining clear sky condition, select that option.
2. To calculate the illuminance intensity for sun (direct component) and sky (diffuse component) in a TMY2 or
TMY 3 file, export the data into a text file or spreadsheet format.
3. From the TMY, select the day within 15 days of September 21 that has the clearest sky condition (total sky cover
at its lowest value) at 9 A.M.
4. From the TMY, select the day within 15 days of March 21 that has the clearest sky condition at 9 A.M.
5. Determine the direct horizontal irradiance (Wh/m2 ) values at 9 A.M. for the day selected in September and at
9 A.M. for the day selected in March. Average the two values and use the result in the 9 A.M. simulation as the
EQ

direct horizontal irradiance input. If the file does not explicitly state direct horizontal irradiance, calculate it as
follows:
Direct horizontal irradiance = Global horizontal irradiance – Diffuse horizontal irradiance 8

6. Determine the diffuse horizontal irradiance (Wh/m2 ) values at 9 A.M. for the day selected in September and at
9 A.M. for the day selected in March. Average the two values and use the result in the 9 A.M. simulation as the
diffuse horizontal irradiance input.
7. Repeat procedures 3–6 for 3 P.M. (see Further Explanation, Examples).
8. Prepare the model to run a simulation to input custom values for direct horizontal and diffuse horizontal
irradiance.

Refer to LM83, Sections 2.3.1 and 2.3.2, for additional guidance on climate conditions for the project’s location such
as, the sun position and intensity, sky illuminance distribution, and modeling parameters. Refer to IES LM83, Section
2.3.3, for guidance on modeling parameters.
The daylight simulation is most successful when the light is reflected back from the interior walls into the space.
The daylight modeler can specify a certain number of inter-reflections before a ray path is discarded.

7. radsite.lbl.gov/radiance/HOME.html (accessed June 12, 2013).

8. More information on determining different kinds of irradiance is available at the Natural Frequency wiki site: wiki.naturalfrequency.com/wiki/
SolarRadiation/Components (accessed June 12, 2013).
 731

SOLAR TIME OR LOCAL TIME

When performing daylight measurements, determine whether the measurements will be taken at solar or local time.
Both are acceptable, but solar time may be more appropriate because it is based on the position of the sun in the sky.
Solar time varies from the local standard time because of eccentricities in Earth’s orbit and because of time zones
and daylight saving adjustments. Solar time is typically calculated using a third-party calculator, such as the National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration’s solar calculator.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. Option 2
An open office with core areas is being assessed for compliance with Option 2 Illuminance Simulation. The office
is in New York City and has six regularly occupied spaces (Table 5) plus several nonregularly occupied spaces, such
as mechanical, elevator, and restroom space. The office has equally spaced ribbon glazing on all four sides and a
window-to-wall ratio of 63%.
Illuminance simulations were performed for all the regularly occupied spaces, based on diffuse and direct
horizontal radiation inputs determined in Figure 2. The calculated results for the second-floor open office are
displayed in Figure 3, demonstrating that 80% of the open office area is daylighted. For the entire project, the
percentage of regularly occupied area that is daylighted is 81%. The percentage of regularly occupied floor area
exceeds 75%, so project has earned 1 point under Option 2.

TABLE 5. Regularly occupied spaces in example office

Floor area with daylight

Regularly occupied space ID Floor area (ft2)
illuminance of 300–3,000 lux

2nd-floor open office 9,000 7,200

3rd-floor conference room 500 420

3rd-floor private office 301 96 72

DAYLIGHT
3rd-floor private office 302 120 88

3rd-floor open office 8,284 6,900

4th-floor open office 9,000 7,200

Total regularly occupied area (ft2) 27,000

EQ
Daylighted regularly occupied area (ft2) 21,880

Regularly occupied area that is daylighted 81%

Figure 2. Diffuse and direct horizontal radiation inputs for New York City

New York City TMY3

September
• Lowest total sky cover for 9 a.m. on September 17
• Global horizontal irradiance = 618 Wh/m2
• Diffuse horizontal irradiance = 98 Wh/m2
• Direct horizontal irradiance = 618 – 98 = 520 Wh/m2

March
Daily illuminance intensity data • Lowest total sky cover for 9 a.m. was on March 21
• Global horizontal irradiance = 155 Wh/m2
• Diffuse horizontal irradiance = 136 Wh/m2
• Direct horizontal irradiance = 155 – 136 = 19 Wh/m2

Computer model will input following values:

• Average diffuse horizontal irradiance = 117 Wh/m2
• Average direct horizontal irradiance = 270 Wh/m2
732

Example 2. Option 3
After construction of the New York City office building (Example 1) was completed in mid-June, the project team
took daylight measurements in all regularly occupied spaces. A second set of daylight measurements was taken
for the same spaces in October to determine the compliant floor areas in the building. The two measurements for
each space were compared to determine the areas that were compliant at both times. Figures 3 and 4 display the
measurement results for a third-floor private office, 301.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 3. Measurements recorded in June

EQ

Figure 4. Measurements recorded in October

 733

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
Project teams may assume surface reflectance for finishes in unfinished spaces as described in the credit
requirements. Project teams must assume that all spaces except the core and restrooms are regularly occupied. In
unfinished spaces, permanent interior obstructions may be excluded from the analysis.

Healthcare
Review all steps in Step-by-Step Guidance.

For Step 4, first identify the perimeter area (see EQ Credit Quality Views, Further Explanation, Perimeter Areas) for
both the inpatient floors and non-inpatient floors. Next, identify all regularly occupied spaces in this area; this is the
“regularly occupied area within the perimeter.” Follow the rest of the steps for these spaces.
(For EQ Credit Quality Views, view compliance for the inpatient floor includes all regularly occupied spaces, not
just the regularly occupied spaces in the perimeter area.)

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Auditoriums
Auditoriums must be included in the daylight requirements, but a lower illuminance level is acceptable; see
recommended illuminance values in The Lighting Handbook, Table 24.2.

Conference rooms dedicated to video conferencing

Conference rooms that are dedicated to video conferencing may be excluded from the daylight requirements.

Gymnasiums
Gymnasiums must be included in the daylight requirements.

CAMPUS
Group Approach

DAYLIGHT
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

EQ
REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation All projects Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

Floor plans highlighting regularly occupied spaces (for Healthcare, regularly

X X X X
occupied perimeter area)

List of glare-control devices for all windows with their control mechanism X X X X

List of compliant spaces with their annual summary values for sDA and ASE X

Geometric plots from simulations. X X

Narrative or output file describing daylight simulation program, simulation

X X
inputs, and weather file

List of compliant spaces with their calculated illuminance values X

Floor plans or list of compliant spaces with measured illuminance values for
X
each node

Calculations demonstrating percentage of compliant space between 300

X
lux and 3,000 lux
734

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance. Good
daylighting and glare control reduce the need for electric lighting. Consider daylight contribution when designing
the lighting system. Consider incorporating daylight sensors and dimmers to reduce lighting energy consumption,
and account for these efficiency measures in the related prerequisite and credit.

EQ Credit Quality Views. Design strategies that enhance daylight penetration are also likely to increase the number
of occupants with exterior views. Regularly occupied spaces must be consistently reported for both this credit and
the related credit.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

EQ Credit Interior Lighting. For projects that pursue Option 1 or Option 2 of this credit, ensure that same surface
reflectance values used in daylight simulation models match those used in lighting quality calculations for the
related credit.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The prescriptive compliance path has been eliminated.
·· An additional simulation option is available. The new option incorporates two new metrics, spatial daylight
autonomy and annual sunlight exposure, based on annual daylight computer simulation models.
·· For Option 2, the illuminance simulation now relies on local weather data and uses a calculated illuminance
intensity.
·· For Option 3, measurements are required at two times of the year.
·· The number of points available and thresholds for achievement have changed.
·· Schools is no longer broken out by classroom and core learning spaces vs. other regularly occupied spaces.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
IES Lighting Measurements (LM) 83-12, Approved Method: IES Spatial Daylight Autonomy (sDA) and Annual
Sunlight Exposure (ASE): webstore.ansi.org
EQ

The Lighting Handbook, 10th edition, Illuminating Engineering Society: ies.org

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
annual sunlight exposure (ASE) a metric that describes the potential for visual discomfort in interior work
environments. It is defined as the percentage of an analysis area that exceeds a specified direct sunlight illuminance
level more than a specified number of hours per year. (Illuminating Engineering Society)

ASE 1,000,250 reports the percentage of sensors in the analysis area, using a maximum 2-foot spacing between points,
that are found to be exposed to more than 1000 lux of direct sunlight for more than 250 hours per year, before any
operable blinds or shades are deployed to block sunlight, considering the same 10 hour/day analysis period as sDA
and using comparable simulation methods
 735

clear glazing glass that is transparent and allows a view through the fenestration. Diffused glazing allows only
daylighting.

direct sunlight an interior horizontal measurement of 1,000 lux or more of direct beam sunlight that accounts for
window transmittance and angular effects, and excludes the effect of any operable blinds, with no contribution from
reflected light (i.e., a zero bounce analysis) and no contribution from the diffuse sky component. (Adapted from
(Illuminating Engineering Society)

movable furniture and partitions items that can be moved by the users without the need of tools or assistance from
special trades and facilities management

permanent interior obstruction a structure that cannot be moved by the user without tools or assistance from
special trades and facilities management. Examples include lab hoods, fixed partitions, demountable opaque full- or
partial-height partitions, some displays, and equipment.

spatial daylight autonomy (sDA) a metric describing annual sufficiency of ambient daylight levels in interior
environments. It is defined as the percentage of an analysis area (the area where calculations are performed, typically
across an entire space) that meets a minimum daylight illuminance level for a specified fraction of the operating
hours per year (i.e., the Daylight Autonomy value following Reinhart & Walkenhorst, 2001). The illluminance level
and time fraction are included as subscripts, as in sDA 300,50%. The sDA value is expressed as a percentage of area.
(Illuminating Engineering Society)

sDA 300/50% the percentage of analysis points across the analysis area that meet or exceed this 300 lux value for at least
50% of the analysis period

DAYLIGHT
EQ
EQ LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

736
 737

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Quality Views
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1-2 points)

INTENT

To give building occupants a connection to the natural outdoor

environment by providing quality views.

QUALITY VIEWS
REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, CORE AND SHELL, SCHOOLS, RETAIL, DATA CENTERS,

HOSPITALITY

EQ
Achieve a direct line of sight to the outdoors via vision glazing for 75% of all regularly occupied floor area.
View glazing in the contributing area must provide a clear image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits, fibers,
patterned glazing, or added tints that distort color balance.

Additionally, 75% of all regularly occupied floor area must have at least two of the following four kinds of views:
·· multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90 degrees apart;
·· views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2) movement; and (3) objects at least 25
feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing;
·· unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of the vision glazing; and
·· views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in “Windows and Offices; A Study of Office Worker
Performance and the Indoor Environment.”

Include in the calculations any permanent interior obstructions. Movable furniture and partitions may be excluded.

Views into interior atria may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area.

WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS

For the office portion of the building, meet the requirements above.

For the bulk storage, sorting, and distribution portions of the building, meet the requirements above for 25% of the
regularly occupied floor area.
738

HEALTHCARE

For inpatient units (IPUs), meet the requirements above (1 point).

For other areas, configure the building floor plates such that the floor area within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of the perimeter
exceeds the perimeter area requirement (Table 1), and meet the requirements above for the perimeter area (1 point).

TABLE 1. Minimum compliant perimeter area, by floor plate area

Floor plate area Perimeter area

(square feet) (square meters) (square feet) (square meters)

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Up to 15,000 Up to 1 400 7,348 682

20,000 1 800 8,785 816

25,000 2 300 10,087 937

30,000 2 800 11,292 1 049

35,000 3 300 12,425 1 154

40,000 3 700 13,500 1 254

45,000 4 200 14,528 1 349

50,000 and larger 4 600 and larger 15,516 1 441

EQ
 739

BEHIND THE INTENT

Building occupants who can visually connect with outdoor environments while performing everyday tasks
experience greater satisfaction, attentiveness, and productivity. Outside views that incorporate natural elements
are more enticing and offer better visual respite. Workers seated at computers, who often develop eye strain or dry
eyes from looking at their screens for extended periods without a break, find relief in attractive distance views.1 In
healthcare facilities, providing patients with views and access to nature can shorten hospital stays and reduce stress,
depression, and the use of pain medication.2
Views to the outdoors also connect the occupants with natural environmental cues, such as diurnal changes from
light to dark and the changes in light from season to season, which are important for maintaining natural circadian
rhythms. Disruption of these rhythms can lead to long-term health care problems, including mental disorders.3
Designing for quality views involves consideration of building orientation and site design, facade, and interior
layout. In particular, Healthcare projects may be required to rethink the fundamental building typology (see Further
Explanation, Special Considerations for Healthcare Projects). Integrated design enables project teams to identify
potential compromises. For example, glazing with frits, fibers, patterns, colors, or tints is often used to provide
privacy, enhance aesthetics, and reduce glare and solar heat gain; however, these types of glazing distort and in some
cases completely block the views to the exterior.
Four former exemplary performance paths have been incorporated as credit compliance options, expanding the
credit to include consideration for the quality of views provided to building occupants. Specifically, glazing color, frit,
and patterns have been restricted to ensure that quality views are being maintained. Additionally, the type of objects
visible in the view (e.g., vegetation, sky, brick wall, busy street)—is now an important factor. Although the bar has
been raised, four credit paths give teams flexibility in how their designed spaces may comply. Also, atriums may now
account for up to 30% of the required area with access to quality views—a change based on industry recognition that
atriums can not only increase daylight and views for interior spaces but also reduce the need for electrical lighting in
spaces that would otherwise likely require it.

QUALITY VIEWS
STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

For Healthcare, see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

EQ
STEP 1. EVALUATE PROJECT SITE
During schematic design, review the project’s surroundings to identify the presence of elements that
meet the view quality requirements of this credit, such as parks, green roofs and walls, nearby buildings,
and pedestrian and vehicle movement.
·· Orient the building and locate glazing to capitalize on desirable views. For massing considerations for
healthcare projects, see Further Explanation, Special Considerations for Healthcare Projects.
·· Consider the energy and comfort implications of vision glazing. Explore ways to use exterior shading
to minimize solar heat gain and glare while maintaining views.

STEP 2. DESIGN FOR TRANSPARENCY AND QUALITY VIEWS

During programming, consider how best to allocate interior space to maximize access to views. During
design development, design enclosures and select furniture to minimize visual obstructions to perimeter
glazing (see Further Explanation, Quality View Design Considerations).
·· Consider using transparent partitions or providing interior glazing at eye level to ensure views for
enclosed spaces.

1. California Energy Commission, Windows and Offices: A Study of Office Worker Performance and Indoor Environment: Technical Report (2003), pp. 8–9,
ff. 1–8, energy.ca.gov/2003publications/CEC-500-2003-082/CEC-500-2003-082-A-09.PDF (accessed June 12, 2013); Oklahoma State University Healthy
and Safety Office, You Can
Do Something About Eyestrain (2011), ehs.okstate.edu/kopykit/eyestrain.htm (accessed June 12, 2013).
2. Ulrich, Roger, et al., “A Review of the Research Literature on Evidence-Based Healthcare Design,” Health Environments Research and Design Journal 1(3)
(2008), (http://www.herdjournal.com)
3. Kellert, Stephen R., Judith H. Heerwagen, and Martin L. Mador, Biophilic Design: The Theory, Science and Practice of Bringing Life into Buildings (New
York: Wiley, 2008), p. 91.
740

·· In open-plan offices, select low partitions or incorporate glazed panels to provide views in multiple
directions.
·· Pay particular attention to maintaining views for spaces near the core. One successful strategy is
to locate open-plan areas, including classrooms, at the perimeter, while placing private offices and
unoccupied areas near the core.
·· Consider using glare control devices that preserve the view to the exterior. Movable glare control
devices do not need to be included in the calculations.

STEP 3. IDENTIFY REGULARLY OCCUPIED SPACES

Identify all regularly occupied spaces within the project (see EQ Overview, Regularly versus nonregularly
occupied spaces). Highlight regularly occupied spaces on the floor plan or furniture plan and list all
regularly occupied spaces and their respective floor areas (Table 2).
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

For Warehouses and Distribution Centers, identify which regularly occupied spaces are in the office
portion of the building and which are in the bulk storage, sorting, and distribution portions of the
building.

TABLE 2. Quality views tracking table

Quality views
Regularly
Floor area
occupied space Space type View types
(ft2 or m2) Floor area with direct line of sight
ID
to outdoors via vision glazing
1 2

Determine whether any regularly occupied spaces should be excluded from the views requirements
(see Further Explanation, Project Type Variations). Spaces whose functional requirements prohibit the
incorporation of glazing for direct access to views may be excluded. Spaces may not be excluded for
security or noise concerns.
EQ

STEP 4. IDENTIFY SIGHT LINES TO EXTERIOR VIEWS

On floor plans or furniture plans, identify the locations of perimeter and interior glazing and all
permanent interior obstructions.
·· Determine whether the perimeter and interior glazing qualifies as vision glazing (see Further
Explanation, Vision Glazing).
·· Identify permanent interior obstructions (see Definitions). Movable furniture and partitions as well as
movable glare control devices may be included in the calculations, but this is not required.
·· Consider performing an initial rough assessment before performing the detailed assessment of view
quality. Determine whether the regularly occupied floor area with proximity to vision glazing is at
least 75% of the total regularly occupied floor area (see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations,
Warehouses and Distribution Centers).

STEP 5. ASSESS VIEW QUALITY

Identify which kinds of view will be used to demonstrate view quality. For each regularly occupied space
or area of the floor plan, select two view types and add the selection to the tracking table. Eligible view
types are as follows:
1. Multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90 degrees apart
2. Views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2) movement; and (3) objects
at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing
3. Unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of the vision glazing
4. Views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in Windows and Offices: A Study of Office Worker
Performance and the Indoor Environment 4

4. California Energy Commission, Windows and Offices: A Study of Office Worker Performance and Indoor Environment: Technical Report (2003), pp. 8–9, ff.
1–8, energy.ca.gov/2003publications/CEC-500-2003-082/CEC-500-2003-082-A-09.PDF (accessed June 12, 2013).2.
 741

Review Further Explanation, Quality View Design Considerations, for tips on which view types make the
most sense for the project.
The view types may be mixed and matched, but documentation will be simpler if the same view types are
used consistently across spaces.
If the entire regularly occupied space or area does not meet the requirements of the selected view type,
include only the regularly occupied floor area that complies. To assess the regularly occupied space for
each view type selected, perform the following steps (also see Further Explanation, Examples).

View type 1. Multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90
degrees apart
On the floor plan or furniture plans, draw two lines of sight to the vision glazing for each location
within the space.
·· The space or location qualifies if the lines of sight are at least 90 degrees apart and if they are not
intercepted by any permanent interior obstructions. If necessary, draw sight lines on section or
elevation plans to confirm that permanent interior obstructions do not block the lines of sight.
·· It may be easiest to determine the boundary of qualifying areas to nonqualifying areas (Figure 1).

Figure 1. Identifying multiple lines of sight

View type 2. Views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2) QUALITY VIEWS
EQ

movement; and (3) objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing
In plan, label the qualifying features located at the vision glazing.
·· Two features must be indicated.
·· Movement (feature 2) includes such activities as people walking, cars driving on the street, and
boats moving through the water. Movement of plants and trees from wind does not qualify.
·· Account for any changes in exterior views as floor elevation changes.
·· In plan, draw one line of sight to the vision glazing for each location in the space. The space or
location qualifies if the line of sight is not intercepted by any permanent interior obstructions. If
necessary, draw sight lines on section or elevation plans to confirm permanent interior obstructions
do not block the lines of sight.
742

View Type 3. Unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head
height of the vision glazing
In section, determine the head height of the vision glazing for each regularly occupied space. In plan,
identify all regularly occupied floor area that is within three times the head height of the perimeter.
·· The space or location qualifies if there are no permanent interior obstructions present in the area.
No permanent interior obstructions are allowed, regardless of their height.
·· Any regularly occupied floor area not in the identified area does not qualify.

View type 4. Views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in Windows and Offices: A
Study of Office Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment
On the floor plan or furniture plan, identify occupants’ typical locations in each regularly occupied
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

space (e.g., open-office workstation, enclosed office, conference room seat, counter). Indicate whether
the location is the primary view location or a break view location (see Further Explanation, View
Factor).
·· Assess the view factor for each of these locations, based on either the primary view or the break
view.
·· In section or elevation, or through drawings or images, demonstrate how the view factor was
determined.

STEP 6. CONFIRM COMPLIANCE

Complete the tracking table to confirm that at least 75% of the regularly occupied floor area has two
qualifying view types.
For Warehouses and Distribution Centers, 75% of the regularly occupied floor area in the office portions
of the building and 25% of the regularly occupied floor area in the bulk storage, sorting, and distribution
portions of the building must meet two view types.
For Healthcare, see Further Explanation, Rating System Variations.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
EQ

See the daylight and quality views calculator provided by USGBC.

Perimeter Area:
The perimeter area is all floor area within 15 feet (4.5 meters) of a perimeter wall that is capable of providing
a view. Below-grade walls with areaways and walls that abut adjacent buildings are excluded. For portions of
the perimeter wall with full-height glazing, the qualifying area may be extended beyond the 15-foot (4.5 meter)
limit to twice the head height of the windows; both single-story and multistory spaces are eligible (see Further
Explanation, Example 7).
 743

QUALITY VIEW DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

TABLE 3. Design considerations by view type

View type Design considerations

1. M
 ultiple lines of sight to vision Providing multiple lines of site to vision glazing in different directions could be advantageous for
glazing in different directions at high-rise buildings with curtain wall exteriors, especially for open-office spaces.
least 90 degrees apart Interior atrium and exterior glazing provide views in several directions.
Consider glazing characteristics that avoid excessive heat gain, to reduce energy use for cooling

2. V
 iews that include at least two of In dense urban environments, providing views of movement, flora, fauna, or sky, and objects at
following: least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from exterior of building may prove difficult.
• (1) flora, fauna, or sky; Conversely, this criterion may be easy to achieve in low-rise buildings or buildings in suburban
• (2) movement; or areas surrounded by open space and landscaping.
• (3) objects at least 25 feet (7.5 Vertical landscaping may be effective strategy for achieving views of flora and fauna in dense
meters) from exterior of glazing urban environments.

3. Unobstructed views located within This option is easiest to achieve in buildings with large expanses of perimeter glazing.
distance of three times head Layouts that include extensive open-office workstations or open areas with little interior
height of vision glazing obstructions along perimeter glazing are good candidates for this approach.

4. V
 iews with view factor of 3 or View factor must be determined by observation of available views for each workstation.
greater This approach may allow greater flexibility in building orientation, window size, and surroundings,
but without 3D modeling, team may be unable to determine view factor until substantial
completion.

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR HEALTHCARE PROJECTS

U.S. hospitals typically have a “plinth-tower” arrangement, with inpatient towers sitting on top of a diagnostic and
treatment (D&T) block. In each tower, most of the perimeter is occupied by inpatient bed spaces, with windows.
Many inpatient blocks are designed in a “racetrack” configuration, with a ring of patient rooms surrounding staff

QUALITY VIEWS
areas and family support areas. The nursing stations and other staff spaces are thus in the core of the building,
without direct access to daylight and views.
In the D&T block, the perimeter is usually programmed for public spaces and circulation; the clinical areas,
support spaces, and administrative offices are inside, leaving staff with limited access to daylight and views. In
such designs, the deep floor plate of the D&T block has the benefit of reducing distance to critical adjacencies and
provides uniform grids and bays for flexibility in future layout and servicing. Equipment lines all four walls and often
is embedded into the ceiling and floor, eliminating opportunities for both windows and skylights. Fire code and

EQ
privacy requirements also reduce opportunities and increase the initial cost associated with glazing in these areas.
EQ Credit Daylight and EQ Credit Quality Views encourage project teams to design the building for the benefit of
both patients and staff.
Creative planning that retains the operational benefits of easy access to patients’ rooms while placing staff and
public spaces on the perimeter is required for credit achievement. Courtyard and articulated floor plans5 (e.g., C, F,
E, or comb shapes) with double-loaded corridors, which place patient rooms on either side of a hallway, narrow the
floor plate and improve access to both daylight and views. These designs can increase the initial cost because of the
additional perimeter wall and additional glazing, but daylight can illuminate a greater proportion of the building,
including nursing stations and other work areas. In T-shaped configurations with perimeter rooms, the windowless
inside corner rooms can be used for storage, equipment, and vertical transportation. Nursing stations can be located
closer to patient rooms, and wayfinding for visitors is easier.
Public spaces, diagnostic and treatment areas, and ambulatory units can be daylit either through an articulated
plan or by inserting courtyards or light wells into a large block (Figure 18). Although the articulated plan is more
widely used, the courtyard option both increases overall access to daylight and views and reduces travel time
between departments. It also gives the facility flexibility to expand and contract department size when clinical
practices shift and technology drives changes in spatial configurations.

5. Guenther and Vittori, Sustainable Healthcare Architecture (New York: Wiley, 2008).
744

VIEW FACTOR
View factor is a measure of the amount and quality of views within a 90-degree cone of vision from an individual
workstation. View factor is rated from 0 (poor quality) to 5 (high quality).
To achieve this credit, teams may determine the view factor for either primary view, what an occupant would
see while working on the phone or computer, or break view, what occupants would see while taking a short break by
turning their heads or moving their chairs while remaining seated.
View factor is determined for each workstation by assessing the vertical and lateral viewing angle for either
the primary or the break view (Figure 2). To determine view factor, first find the smaller of the vertical or lateral
view angle. Use the angle to identify the preliminary view factor (Table 4). If the view angle falls within the gray
zone, assess the content of the view. View angles in the gray zone are rated up one level when the view has very high
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

vegetation content, and down one level if the view has no vegetation content.
Alternatively, use Figure 3, which demonstrates examples of different view factors, to visually assess the view
factor of a given space.

TABLE 4. View factor

View angle
Preliminary view factor
Min–max Gray-zone range
(degrees) (degrees)

1 1–4

1 or 2 4–5

2 5–9

2 or 3 9–11

3 11–15

3 or 4 15–20

4 20–40

4 or 5 40–30

5 50–90
EQ

Figure 2. Assessing view angles

 745

Figure 3. View factor illustrations. The following images illustrate the view quality associated with each view factor level.

View Factor 1 View Factor 2 View Factor 3

View Factor 4 View Factor 5

QUALITY VIEWS
VISION GLAZING
Vision glazing is defined as that portion of exterior windows that permits views to the exterior (or an atrium). Vision
glazing must have a clear image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits, fibers, patterned glazing, or added tints that
distort color balance (Figures 4–8). Some patterns are acceptable if they preserve the view.

The glazing does not have to be located between 30 and 90 inches (750 and 2 300 millimeters) above the finished

EQ
floor.

Figures 4–7 illustrate examples of glazing solutions that are eligible for this credit.

Figure 4. Fritted glass with horizontal strips of Figure 5. Fritted glass with vertical panels
clear glazing. The area between the upper and of clear glazing. The glazing between the
lower portions of fritted glass is acceptable fritted panels is acceptable vision glazing.
vision glazing. Photo by Michael Spillers. Photo by Michael Spillers.
746
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 6. Frosted glass above, clear glazing below. The area below the frosted glazing is
acceptable vision glazing. This space also has multiple views more than 90 degrees apart.
Photo by Todd Reed.
EQ

Figure 7. Lightly tinted glazing. The gray tint darkens the view but does not distort
color balance, so it is acceptable vision glazing.
 747

Figure 8 is an example of glazing that is ineligible for this credit.

Figure 8. Partial-height partitions

with frosted glass. Frosted glass is not
acceptable because it interferes with
occupants’ views to the vision glazing.
Photo by Marcus Sheffer.

EXAMPLES
Example 1. View type 1. Multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90 degrees apart

A classroom is assessed for compliance with the requirement for view type 1. The classroom has a total floor area of
750 square feet (70 square meters) and no permanent interior obstructions. To identify compliant areas within the
classroom, the team has identified representative points on the classroom floor plan with two lines of sight at least
90 degrees apart (Figure 9) and determined that 500 square feet (45 square meters) of the classroom complies with
the requirement.

QUALITY VIEWS
EQ

Figure 9. Lines of sight in classroom

748

Example 2. View type 2. Views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2) movement;
and (3) objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing

A regularly occupied space on the southeast side of the project building is assessed for compliance with requirements
for view type 2. A section drawing of the building and adjacent properties is prepared to demonstrate that the
space has views of trees close to the building and objects 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior glazing (Figure 10).
The section also shows that the space, which is an office, has no permanent interior obstructions, so this regularly
occupied area meets the requirements.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 10. Flora within sight of space

Figures 11 illustrates a view with flora.

EQ

Figure 11. Planters outside a school. Photo by Marcus Sheffer.

 749

Example 3. View type 3. Unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of the
vision glazing

An open-plan office space (Open Office 1) is assessed for compliance with the quality view requirement to have
unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of the vision glazing. A section view of
the space is prepared to demonstrate that there are no permanent interior obstructions within 29 feet 3 inches (8.9
meters) of the vision glazing, which has a head height of 9 feet 9 inches (3 meters). The office space is compliant with
the requirement (Figure 12).
In the same building, a similar open office space is also assessed for compliance. A section view of the space is
prepared, but in this case, there are permanent interior obstructions within 29 feet 3 inches (8.9 meters) of the vision
glazing, which has a head height of 9 feet 9 inches (3 meters). The fixed workstation with partitions and separate
partition are both considered permanent interior obstructions. This open office space is not compliant with the
requirement (Figure 12).

QUALITY VIEWS
EQ
Figure 12. Compliant and noncompliant office spaces

Example 4. View type 4. Views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in Windows and Offices; A Study of
Office Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment

The primary view for a workstation in an open-plan office (Figure 13) is evaluated and assigned a view factor of 5,
based on the view factor illustrations provided in Figure 3. The view factor is rated 5 because the workstation is
directly in front of two large windows, with no obstructions or odd angles disrupting the view to the outdoors.
750
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 13. Workstation with view factor of 5. Photo by Marcus Sheffer.

Example 5. Views into Atrium

Figure 14 illustrates how views into a sunlit interior space can be an alternative to views to the outdoors. This
approach can be used for up to 30% of the regularly occupied floor area. The requirements for direct line of sight and
two view types still apply.
EQ

Figure 14. View into atrium. The Christman Building: Photo by Gene Meadows.
 751

Example 6. Health care perimeter area examples

Figures 15 illustrates strategies that hospitals and other health care facilities can use to achieve compliance. The
smaller the floor plate (Figure 15a), the greater the percentage of perimeter area. Courtyards also increase perimeter
area (Figure 15b): all three floor plates have the same square footage, but the third has a much larger percentage of
perimeter area because of the courtyard.

QUALITY VIEWS
EQ
Figure 15a. Effect of floor plate area on compliant perimeter area
Figure 15b. Effect of enclosed courtyards on compliant perimeter area

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
Develop a feasible tenant layout based on default occupancy (or other justifiable occupancy count) for use in
analysis of quality views. Layouts should reflect the anticipated use of the unfinished spaces.

Warehouses and Distribution Centers

Follow all steps in Step-by-Step Guidance. Compliance for the office areas is calculated separately from compliance
for the bulk storage, sorting, and distribution portions.
752

Healthcare
Review steps 1 and 2 in Step-by-Step Guidance and see Further Explanation, Special Considerations for Healthcare
Projects.

Classify each floor of the building as inpatient or non-inpatient (see Definitions).

For the inpatient floors, in Step 3, identify all regularly occupied spaces (see EQ Overview, Regularly Occupied Spaces).
Highlight them on the floor plan or furniture plan and list them with their floor areas (Table 1). Follow Steps 4 and 5.
Confirm whether 75% of the inpatient regularly occupied floor area has two view types.
For the non-inpatient floors, calculate the perimeter area (see Further Explanation, Calculations: Perimeter Area).
Because non-inpatient areas are often highly variable, each floor must be calculated separately. This component of
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

the quality view calculation can be completed in the early stages of design, at block planning, so that project teams
can determine whether massing decisions are likely to achieve the credit intent and adjust accordingly.

List the floor plate area and perimeter area (Table 5). Confirm that the perimeter area exceeds the values in Table 1 of
the credit requirements.

TABLE 5. Tracking table for compliant perimeter area

Non-inpatient floor Floor area (ft2 or m2 ) Perimeter area (ft2 or m2 )

Highlight the perimeter area on the floor plan or furniture plan and list all regularly occupied spaces within the
highlighted area and their respective floor areas (Table 3) (see EQ Overview, Regularly Occupied Spaces). Follow Steps
4 and 5 in Step-by-Step Guidance. Confirm that 75% of the non-inpatient regularly occupied floor area has two view
types.
EQ

TABLE 6. Healthcare quality views tracking table ( non-inpatient, perimeter areas)

Quality views
Regularly
Floor area
occupied space Space type View types
(ft2 or m2) Floor area with direct line of sight
ID
to outdoors via vision glazing
1 2

PROJECT TYPE VARIATIONS

Auditoriums
Auditoriums may be excluded from the view requirements.

Conference rooms dedicated to video conferencing

Conference rooms that are dedicated to video conferencing may be excluded from the view requirements.
 753

Gymnasiums
Gymnasiums may be excluded from the view requirements.

Incomplete Spaces
See Rating System Variations, Core and Shell.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION
View type

1: 2: 3: 4:
Documentation All projects
multiple exterior unobstructed view factor
lines of features views within
sight 3H

List of all regularly occupied spaces, qualifying floor

X
area in each space, and view features

Sections, elevations, diagrams, renderings, or photos

indicating sight lines to glazing do not encounter X
permanent interior obstructions.

QUALITY VIEWS
Floor plans or diagrams identifying regularly occupied
X
spaces and the following:

Multiple sight lines for each regularly occupied space X

Sight lines and exterior features labeled; provide

multiple floor plans if view features change at varying X
building heights

EQ
Sight lines and area indicating three times head height X

Area with view factor of 3 or greater X

Sections, interior elevations, or other documentation

that demonstrates the view factor assessment for the X
areas with a view factor of three or greater.

Method for determining view factor for each typical

X
occupant location

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

EQ Credit Daylight. Window tints used for solar and glare control may hinder the quality of view by distorting the
color of objects and light. Increasing the area of vision glazing may provide greater access to daylight.

EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Increased window-to-wall ratio in design can alter energy
performance and has a direct correlation to lighting design strategies to conserve energy. Increased glazing may
contribute to heat gain and increased HVAC energy use, but daylighting reduces the need for electric lighting.
754

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

·· The exemplary performance requirements from LEED 2009 are now the basis for the credit requirements.
·· Glazing must provide a clear view to the outdoors. The glazing does not have to be located between 30 and 90
inches (750 and 2300 millimeters) above the finished floor.
·· Atriums now qualify for up to 30% of the total area.
·· For Healthcare projects, the inpatient unit requirements now include nonperimeter area. The requirements
for direct lines of sight in the perimeter area have been modified to align with other rating systems.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

REFERENCED STANDARDS
Windows and Offices: A Study of Office Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment: h-m-g.com

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
New Construction, Core and Shell, Schools, Retail, Data Centers, Hospitality
Meet the requirements for 90% of all regularly occupied area.

Warehouses and Distribution Centers

Meet the requirements for 90% of the regularly occupied floor area in the office portion of the building, and for
50% of the regularly occupied floor area in the bulk storage, sorting, and distribution portions of the building.

Healthcare
For inpatient areas, meet the requirements for 90% of the regularly occupied floor area.
For noninpatient areas, exceed the area requirements in Table 1 by 10% or more.

DEFINITIONS
color rendering index a measurement from 0 to 100 that indictes how accurately an artificial light source, as
EQ

compared with an incandescent light, displays hues. The higher the index number, the more accurately the light
is rendering colors. Incandescent lighting has a color rendering index above 95; standard high-pressure sodium
lighting (such as orange-hued roadway lights) measures approximately 25; many fluorescent sources using rare earth
phosphors have a color rendering index of 80 and above. (Adapted from U.S. ENERGY STAR)

inpatient unit any medical, surgical, maternity, specialty, or intensive-care unit where an individual receives care for
more than 23 hours

movable furniture and partitions items that can be moved by the users without the need of tools or assistance from
special trades and facilities management

non-inpatient area a public space, diagnostic or treatment area, ambulatory unit, or any other space in a health care
facility that is not for individuals who have been admitted for care

permanent interior obstruction a structure that cannot be moved by the user without tools or assistance from
special trades and facilities management. Examples include lab hoods, fixed partitions, demountable opaque full- or
partial-height partitions, some displays, and equipment.

vision glazing the glass portion of an exterior window that permits views to the exterior or interior. Vision glazing
must allow a clear image of the exterior and must not be obstructed by frits, fibers, patterned glazing, or added tints
that distort color balance.
 755

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CREDIT

Acoustic Performance
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Data Centers (1 point) Healthcare (1–2 points)

INTENT

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
To provide workspaces and classrooms that promote occupants’ well-
being, productivity, and communications through effective acoustic
design.

REQUIREMENTS

NEW CONSTRUCTION, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY

EQ
For all occupied spaces, meet the following requirements, as applicable, for HVAC background noise, sound
isolation, reverberation time, and sound reinforcement and masking.

HVAC Background Noise

Achieve maximum background noise levels from heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems per
2011 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, Chapter 48, Table 1; AHRI Standard 885-2008, Table 15; or a local
equivalent. Calculate or measure sound levels.
For measurements, use a sound level meter that conforms to ANSI S1.4 for type 1 (precision) or type 2 (general
purpose) sound measurement instrumentation, or a local equivalent.
Comply with design criteria for HVAC noise levels resulting from the sound transmission paths listed in ASHRAE
2011 Applications Handbook, Table 6; or a local equivalent.

Sound Transmission
Meet the composite sound transmission class (STCC) ratings listed in Table 1, or local building code, whichever is
more stringent.
756

TABLE 1. Maximum composite sound transmission class ratings for adjacent spaces

Adjacency combinations STCC

Residence (within a multifamily residence), hotel or motel room Residence, hotel or motel room 55

Residence, hotel or motel room Common hallway, stairway 50

Residence, hotel or motel room Retail 60

Retail Retail 50

Standard office Standard office 45

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Executive office Executive office 50

Conference room Conference room 50

Office, conference room Hallway, stairway 50

Mechanical equipment room Occupied area 60

Reverberation Time
Meet the reverberation time requirements in Table 2 (adapted from Table 9.1 in the Performance Measurement
Protocols for Commercial Buildings1).

TABLE 2. Reverberation time requirements

T60 (sec), at 500 Hz, 1000 Hz,

Room type Application
and 2000 Hz

Apartment and condominium — < 0.6

Individual room or suite < 0.6

Hotel/motel
Meeting or banquet room < 0.8

Executive or private office < 0.6

Conference room < 0.6

EQ

Office building Teleconference room < 0.6

Open-plan office without sound masking < 0.8

Open-plan office with sound masking 0.8

Unamplified speech < 0.7

Courtroom
Amplified speech < 1.0

Performing arts space Drama theaters, concert and recital halls Varies by application

Testing or research with minimal speech

< 1.0
communication
Laboratories
Extensive phone use and speech communication < 0.6

Church, mosque, synagogue General assembly with critical music program Varies by application

Library < 1.0

Gymnasium and natatorium < 2.0

Indoor stadium, gymnasium
Large-capacity space with speech amplification < 1.5

Classroom — < 0.6

1. Adapted from ASHRAE (2007d), ASA (2008), ANSI (2002), and CEN (2007)
 757

Sound Reinforcement and Masking Systems

Sound Reinforcement
For all large conference rooms and auditoriums seating more than 50 persons, evaluate whether sound
reinforcement and AV playback capabilities are needed.

If needed, the sound reinforcement systems must meet the following criteria:
·· Achieve a speech transmission index (STI) of at least 0.60 or common intelligibility scale (CIS) rating of at
least 0.77 at representative points within the area of coverage to provide acceptable intelligibility.
·· Have a minimum sound level of 70 dBA.
·· Maintain sound-level coverage within +/–3 dB at the 2000 Hz octave band throughout the space.

Masking Systems
For projects that use masking systems, the design levels must not exceed 48 dBA. Ensure that loudspeaker coverage
provides uniformity of +/–2 dBA and that speech spectra are effectively masked.

SCHOOLS

HVAC Background noise

Achieve a background noise level of 35 dBA or less from heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems
in classrooms and other core learning spaces. Follow the recommended methodologies and best practices for
mechanical system noise control in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Part 1, Annex A.1; the 2011 HVAC Applications
ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Sound and Vibration Control, with errata; AHRI Standard 885–2008; or a local

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
equivalent.

Sound Transmission
Design classrooms and other core learning spaces to meet the sound transmission class (STC) requirements of ANSI
S12.60–2010 Part 1, or a local equivalent. Exterior windows must have an STC rating of at least 35, unless outdoor and
indoor noise levels can be verified to justify a lower rating.

HEALTHCARE

Design the facility to meet or exceed the sound and vibration criteria outlined below, which are adapted from
the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities (“2010 FGI Guidelines”) and the

EQ
reference document on which it is based, Sound and Vibration Design Guidelines for Health Care Facilities (“2010
SV Guidelines”).

OPTION 1. SPEECH PRIVACY, SOUND ISOLATION, AND BACKGROUND NOISE (1 POINT)

Speech Privacy and Sound Isolation

Design sound isolation to achieve speech privacy, acoustical comfort, and minimal annoyance from noise-producing
sources. Consider sound levels at both source and receiver locations, the background sound at receiver locations,
and the occupants’ acoustical privacy and acoustical comfort needs. Speech privacy is defined as “techniques…to
render speech unintelligible to casual listeners” (ANSI T1.523-2001, Telecom Glossary 2007).
Design the facility to meet the criteria outlined in the sections of Table 1.2-3, Design Criteria for Minimum Sound
Isolation Performance between Enclosed Rooms, and Table 1.2-4 Speech Privacy for Enclosed Room and Open-Plan
Spaces (in the 2010 FGI Guidelines and 2010 SV Guidelines).
Calculate or measure sound isolation and speech privacy descriptors achieved for representative adjacencies as
necessary to confirm compliance with the criteria in the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Sections1.2-6.1.5 and 1.2-6.1.6, and the
2010 SV Guidelines (including the appendix).

Background Noise
Consider background noise levels generated by all building mechanical-electrical-plumbing systems, air distribution
systems and other facility noise sources under the purview of the project building design-construction team.
758

Design the facility to meet the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-2 Minimum-Maximum Design Criteria for Noise in
representative interior rooms and spaces.
Calculate or measure sound levels in representative rooms and spaces of each type to confirm compliance with
criteria in the above-referenced table using a sound level meter that conforms to ANSI S1.4 for type 1 (precision) or
type 2 (general purpose) sound measurement instrumentation. For spaces not listed in Table 1.2-2, refer to ASHRAE
2011 Handbook, Chapter 48, Sound and Vibration Control, Table 1.

OPTION 2. ACOUSTICAL FINISHES AND SITE EXTERIOR NOISE (1 POINT)

Meet the requirements for acoustical finishes and site exterior noise.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Acoustical Finishes
Specify materials, products systems installation details, and other design features to meet the 2010 FGI Guidelines,
Table 1.2-1, Design Room Sound Absorption Coefficients (including associated sections of the appendix) and the
2010 SV Guidelines.
Calculate or measure the average sound absorption coefficients for representative unoccupied rooms of each
type in the building to confirm conformance with the requirements.

Site Exterior Noise

Minimize the effect on building occupants of site exterior noise produced by road traffic, aircraft flyovers, railroads,
on-site heliports, emergency power generators during maintenance testing, outdoor facility MEP and building
services equipment, etc. Also minimize effects on the surrounding community from all facility MEP equipment and
activities as required to meet (1) local applicable codes or (2) Table 1.2-1 of the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-1, and
the 2010 SV Guidelines, Table 1.3-1, whichever is more stringent.

Comply with the 2010 FGI Guidelines for the following noise sources:
·· heliports, A1.3-3.6.2.2;
·· generators, 2.1-8.3.3.1;
·· mechanical equipment, 2.1-8.2.1.1; and
·· building services, A2.2-5.3

Measure and analyze data to determine the exterior noise classification (A, B, C, or D) of the facility site. See the 2010
FGI Guidelines, Categorization of Health Care Facility Sites by Exterior Ambient Sound, Table A1.2a, and the 2010
SV Guidelines, Table 1.3-1.
EQ

Design the building envelope composite STC rating based on the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Categorization of Health
Care Facility Sites by Exterior Ambient Sound, and show conformance with requirements.
For exterior site exposure categories B, C, or D, calculate or measure the sound isolation performance of
representative elements of the exterior building envelope to determine the composite sound transmission class
(STCc) rating for representative façade sections. Measurements should generally conform to ASTM E966, Standard
Guide for Field Measurements of Airborne Sound Insulation of Building Façades and Façade Elements, current
edition.
 759

BEHIND THE INTENT

This credit challenges project teams to address best practices in acoustic design as an indoor environmental quality
imperative that complements other green building practices.
Research by the Center for the Built Environment (CBE) of 34,000 building inhabitants2 showed that LEED
buildings outperform standard design in all areas of indoor environmental quality except acoustics (Figure
1). Acoustic performance typically is considered during the design process, the study found, yet teams are just
beginning to understand the trade-offs with other green building practices, such as open floor planning, highly
efficient HVAC systems, and efficient lighting strategies.

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
EQ
Figure 1. Occupants’ satisfaction in conventional versus LEED-certified buildings. Used with permission from the Center for
the Built Environment, UC Berkeley.

LEED 2009 covered acoustics in the Schools and Healthcare rating systems, partly because it critically affects
learning and healing environments. Now an acoustics credit is available to all new construction projects, challenging
project teams to balance acoustical design strategies with considerations for daylighting, thermal comfort, and other
performance areas that must be considered when planning systems and indoor spaces. In all project types, well-
designed acoustics can enhance the environmental quality of the space by facilitating communication, increasing
productivity, improving the well-being of workers, or aiding in noise control and speech privacy.

2. Huizenga, C., et al. 2005. LEED Post-occupancy Evaluation: Taking Responsibility for the Occupants. cbe.berkeley.edu/research/pdf_files/Huizenga_
Greenbuild2005.pdf (accessed June 12, 2013).
760

The benefits of open collaboration spaces should be balanced with acoustic design. In schools, where
communication between students and teachers affects the learning process, acoustic performance is essential
(see EQ Prerequisite Minimum Acoustic Performance). In Healthcare projects, the acoustic environment affects
patients’ privacy and recuperation. Careful sound isolation supports confidential personal health discussions among
patients, their families, and caregivers; it also allows health care workers to communicate more effectively with each
other. Better acoustics do matter: research links poor acoustic performance to sleep disturbance,3,4 increased blood
pressure and heart rates, and stress.5
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

NEW CONSTRUCTION, DATA CENTERS, WAREHOUSES AND DISTRIBUTION CENTERS, HOSPITALITY

STEP 1. DEFINE ACOUSTIC NEEDS FOR EACH SPACE

Identify occupied spaces and determine the following:
·· Activities or user groups within each space and adjacencies
·· Privacy or sound sensitivity requirements

STEP 2. REVIEW ACOUSTIC CRITERIA

Evaluate how the four performance areas addressed by this credit affect each applicable space:
·· HVAC background noise levels. Engineers or acoustic experts will need to analyze background noise
levels coming from HVAC equipment.
·· Sound isolation. Designers will need to specify materials to meet sound transmission class ratings.
·· Reverberation time. Designers will need to specify sound-absorbing treatments and/or revisit room
size to address reverberation time.
·· Sound reinforcement and masking systems. Designers will need to analyze STI or CIS, sound level
and sound-level coverage for spaces with sound reinforcement systems. Designers will also need to
analyze sound level, loudspeaker coverage, and speech spectra for spaces with masking systems.
Prepare a log or spreadsheet to record pertinent acoustic information for each space.
Determine how the acoustic requirements fit into the design process so that each can be addressed by
EQ

the responsible party at the appropriate time.

STEP 3. ADDRESS HVAC BACKGROUND NOISE

Identify equipment and air distribution elements that could contribute to HVAC background noise
in occupied spaces. The following steps refer to the referenced standard, 2011 HVAC Applications
ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control (“Chapter 48”).
·· When selecting and designing HVAC systems, consider basic acoustic design techniques (e.g., Chapter
48, page 48.8).
·· Consider specific source design considerations (e.g., Chapter 48, pages 48.1–48.41 and 48.8–48.30).
·· Compile acoustic performance data at specific operating points from the HVAC equipment
manufacturer’s data. This information may inform the HVAC background noise criteria used for
compliance.
·· Consider source-receiver paths when locating occupied spaces, and HVAC equipment. For example,
noise-generating HVAC equipment could be placed above a corridor rather than above a conference
room. Review Chapter 48, Table 6, and address each applicable transmission path.

3. Aaron, J.N., et al., “Environmental Noise as a Cause of Sleep Disruption in an Intermediate Respiratory Care Unit,” SLEEP 19(9) (1996): 707–10.
4. Novaes, M.A., et al., “Stressors in ICU: Patients’ Evaluation,” Intensive Care Medicine 23(12): 1282–5.
5. Baker, C.F., “Discomfort to Environmental Noise: Heart Rate Responses of SICU Patients,” Critical Care Nursing Quarterly 15(2) (1992): 75–90
 761

STEP 4. VERIFY HVAC BACKGROUND NOISE

Determine noise criteria (NC), room criteria (RC), A-weighted sound pressure levels, or C-weighted sound
pressure levels for each occupied space through one or more of the following methods (see Further
Explanation, Selecting a Sound Rating Method). Consider sound pressure levels from HVAC equipment
only; plumbing, lighting, and electrical may be excluded.
·· Calculate sound pressure levels per Chapter 48 and follow the steps outlined in the HVAC Noise-
Reduction Design Procedures section of the handbook. Calculations may be done in the design phase.
·· Calculate sound pressure levels per AHRI Standard 885–2008, Procedure for Estimating Occupied
Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets. Follow the steps outlined in
Section 6, Calculation Procedures for Estimating Sound Levels in Occupied Spaces. Calculations may
be done in the design phase.
·· Measure sound pressure levels per Chapter 48. Follow field measurement guidelines from the
Determining Compliance section. Follow guidelines from the Room Noise Measurements sections.
The measurements must be performed postconstruction and should be done in furnished spaces
with HVAC systems operating in typical conditions and while no occupants are present. Noises from
sources other than HVAC systems should be minimized or turned off during testing.
A local standard, procedure, or handbook that is equivalent to one of the above methods may also
be used.
Prepare a narrative that describes the methods followed and a summary report with measurements
or calculations.
Demonstrate compliance with the overall sound pressure limits listed in Chapter 48, page 48.3, Table 1,
or AHRI Standard 885-2008, Table 15, for applicable spaces.

STEP 5. VERIFY NOISE REDUCTION METHODS FOR SOUND TRANSMISSION PATHS

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
In a narrative and associated drawings or details, highlight each transmission path from Chapter 48, Table
6, that is applicable to the project and the specific noise reduction measures selected.

STEP 6. IDENTIFY ADJACENCIES FOR SOUND ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS

Identify occupied spaces and their adjacency combinations. Review Table 1 from the credit requirements
and the local building code to determine the applicable composite sound transmission class
(STCC) rating.
Identify all assemblies (e.g., wall, floor-ceiling, roof-ceiling, door, window) that serve to acoustically
isolate each occupied space.

STEP 7. VERIFY SOUND ISOLATION

EQ
Verify that the assemblies for each occupied space meet the sound isolation requirements. Demonstrate
compliance through published data, calculation, or measurement, as follows:
·· Published data. Select walls, doors, and windows with published manufacturer’s data
·· Calculation. Perform averaging calculations that allow a trade-off between higher STC of walls
and lower STC ratings of doors, windows, and penetrations (see Further Explanation, Determining
Composite Sound Transmission Class). Calculations may be done in the design phase.
·· Measurement. Measure noise isolation class (NIC) for all assemblies per Annex A.3 of ANSI S12.60–
2010 and compare the results with the sound isolation requirements. A NIC rating within 3 points of
the specified STC rating may be considered compliant. Measurements cannot be performed until after
the substantial completion of construction.
Assemblies with similar construction details may be grouped together. Any significant variance in
opening areas, such as window or door ratios, should be evaluated separately.
Compile a list of each occupied space. For each space, list the maximum STC rating, the design STC
rating or measured results, and data or calculations to support the values.

STEP 8. IDENTIFY SPACE REVERBERATION TIME REQUIREMENTS

Use Table 2 in the credit requirements to determine reverberation time requirements for each occupied
space in the project. For spaces that vary by application or are not listed in the table, use criteria from
referenced standards, or use values for the space type with the closest functional use.

STEP 9. IMPLEMENT REVERBERATION TIME MITIGATION STRATEGIES

Use sound-absorptive materials or other strategies to limit the reverberation times for each occupied
space as appropriate for the room type.
762

Consider the following surfaces when specifying materials:

·· Sound-absorptive materials can be applied to any planar surface in the space. Although applying
treatment to the walls is typically effective, a sound-absorptive ceiling is generally more cost-effective.
·· Absorptive wall surfaces or vertical acoustic panels in spaces that require hard surfaces, such as
laboratories
·· Soft or upholstered backs and seats for spaces with seating
·· Window curtains, ceiling baffles, or other acoustic finishes
Determine sound-absorption coefficients for absorptive materials. Use manufacturers’ documentation or
Table 3 for common materials.

TABLE 3. Sound absorption coefficients for common materials

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Coefficient ( ) Coefficient ( )

Material 500HZ 1000HZ 2000HZ Material 500Hz 1000Hz 2000HZ

Walls Floor

Brick, unglazed .03 .04 .05 Concrete or Terrazzo .015 .02 .02

Linoleum, asphalt, rubber, or cork

Brick, unglazed, painted .02 .02 .02 .03 .03 .03
tile on concrete

Plaster, gypsum, or lime,

.02 .03 .04 Wood .10 .07 .06
smooth finish on tile or brick

Plaster, gypsum, or lime,

Wood parquet in asphalt on
rough or smooth finish on .06 .05 .04 .07 .06 .06
concrete
lath

Concrete block, light, porous .31 .29 .39 Carpet, heavy, on concrete .14 .37 .60

Concrete block, dense, Same, on 40 oz hairfelt or foam

.06 .07 .09 .57 .69 .71
painted rubber

Same, with impermeable latex

Gypsum boards. 1/2-inch
.05 .04 .07 backing on 40 oz hairfelt or foam .39 .34 .48
nailed to 2x4s, 16 inches o.c.
rubber

Plywood paneling, 3/8-inch

.17 .09 .10 Marble or glaze tile .01 .01 .02
thick

Large panes of heavy plate

.04 .03 .02 Fabrics
EQ

glass

Light velour, 10 oz per sq yd, hung

Ordinary window glass .18 .12 .07 .11 .17 .24
straight, in contact with walll

Medium velour, 14 oz per sq yd,

Misc .49 .75 .70
draped to half area

Chairs, metal or wood seats, Heavy velour, 18 oz per sq yd,

.22 .39 .38 .55 .72 .70
each, unoccupied draped to half area

STEP 10. VERIFY THAT REVERBERATION TIME REQUIREMENTS ARE MET

Calculate or measure the reverberation time for each occupied space (see Further Explanation,
Reverberation Time).
·· Reverberation time must be verified at 500, 1,000, and 2,000 Hz.
·· Retain calculations and measurements for credit documentation.
·· Spaces with identical size and material treatments may be documented together. To reduce
documentation burden, calculations and measurements can also be based on acoustically critical
spaces or room types, or on worst-case combinations of room assemblies.

STEP 11. SELECT SOUND REINFORCEMENT AND MASKING SYSTEMS, IF NEEDED

Determine whether the project will have any sound reinforcement or masking systems (see Further
Explanation, Sound Reinforcement, and Masking Systems). This credit does not require that sound
reinforcement or masking systems be implemented, but it does require that any installed system meet
specific criteria.
 763

·· For each space using sound reinforcement, select sound reinforcement strategies that meet the
speech intelligibility, sound level, and sound-level coverage credit requirements (see Further
Explanation, Meeting Sound Reinforcement Credit Requirements).
·· For each space using masking systems, select a system that meets the credit requirements for sound
level and system uniformity (see Further Explanation, Selecting a Sound Rating Method).
·· Document the needs that are addressed through a sound reinforcement or masking system, or the
rationale for not including these systems.

SCHOOLS

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ALL CLASSROOMS AND OTHER CORE LEARNING SPACES

See EQ Prerequisite Minimum Acoustic Performance. Spaces addressed for this credit should be
consistent with those addressed for the prerequisite.

STEP 2. REVIEW ACOUSTIC CRITERIA

Review the acoustic design documentation developed for EQ Prerequisite Minimum Acoustic
Performance and append it as necessary for the HVAC background noise and sound isolation
requirements of this credit.
·· HVAC background noise. Using the results from Step 4 of the HVAC background noise section in the
prerequisite, confirm that all classroom and core learning spaces comply with a 35 dBA maximum.
·· Sound isolation. Designers must specify materials to meet sound transmission class ratings.
Prepare a log or spreadsheet to record the pertinent acoustic information for each space.

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
Determine how the acoustic requirements will be integrated into the design process so that they can be
addressed by the responsible party at the appropriate time.

STEP 3. ADDRESS HVAC BACKGROUND NOISE

Follow the step-by-step guidance for HVAC background noise in EQ Prerequisite Minimum Acoustic
Performance, and verify that background noise does not exceed 35 dBA in any applicable space. The
credit threshold will likely require the adoption of a layered strategy that combines several best practices
for low-noise mechanical design. Teams are encouraged to engage mechanical designers or acoustic
experts familiar with the referenced standards who can calculate HVAC background noise levels during
design development.

EQ
STEP 4. IDENTIFY ADJACENCIES
Identify the types of spaces that are adjacent to each core learning space. Review ANSI S12.60–2010,
Section 5.4.2, Table 4, to understand the types of adjacent spaces and determine the applicable required
STC ratings.
·· Review ANSI S12.60–2010, Section 5.4.2.3, to determine which adjacencies require composite wall STC
ratings (which account for doors, windows, and other penetrations).
·· Review Section 5.4.2.4 to identify the STC ratings for interior door assemblies and their associated
window glazing.
·· Windows in core learning spaces must have a minimum STC rating of 35 in lieu of the ratings in
Section 5.4.2.

STEP 5. DESIGN FOR MAXIMIZING SOUND ISOLATION

Identify all assemblies (e.g., wall, floor-ceiling, roof-ceiling, door, window) that serve to acoustically
isolate each core learning space.

STEP 6. VERIFY SOUND ISOLATION

Verify that the assemblies for each core learning space meet the sound isolation requirements listed in
ANSI S12.60–2010, Part 1, Section 5.4.2, Indoor-to-Indoor Attenuation of Airborne Sound and Table 4.
Demonstrate compliance through published data, calculation, or measurement, as follows:
·· Published data. Select walls, doors, and windows with published manufacturer’s data
·· Calculation. If necessary, perform averaging calculations according to Sections 5.4.2.3 and 5.4.2.4 of
the ANSI standard (see Further Explanation, Determining Composite Sound Transmission). Calculations
may be done in the design phase.
764

·· Measurement. Measure noise isolation class (NIC) for all assemblies per Annex A.3 of ANSI
S12.60–2010 and compare with the sound isolation requirements. A NIC rating within 3 points of the
specified STC rating may be considered compliant. Measurements cannot be performed until after the
substantial completion of construction.
Assemblies may be grouped together based on similar construction details. Any significant variance in
opening areas, such as window or door ratios, should be evaluated separately.
Compile a list of each core learning space. For each space, list the maximum STC rating, the design STC
rating or measured results, and data or calculations to support the values.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

HEALTHCARE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY OCCUPIED SPACES

Create a table of all occupied spaces in the project and the function of each space.

STEP 2. SELECT OPTION

Determine whether the project will pursue one or both options.
·· Option 1 includes requirements related to interior spaces and partitions.
·· Option 2 has requirements for interior finishes, the building envelope, and exterior noise sources.
Both Options 1 and 2 may involve multiple design strategies:
·· Separating patient rooms from treatment areas, media areas, and staff areas
·· Including buffer spaces in the building program
·· Using partial-height barriers in open-plan areas and isolating partitions in closed-plan areas
·· Installing sound-absorptive finishes
·· Addressing mechanical system noise and medical equipment noise
·· Installing ambient background noise or electronic masking systems
·· Installing interior vision panels
·· Installing close-fit doors with gaskets where appropriate
Both options reference the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities
(“2010 FGI Guidelines”) and the Sound and Vibration Design Guidelines for Health Care Facilities (“2010
SV Guidelines”) (see Further Explanation, Using 2010 FGI Guidelines and 2010 SV Guidelines).
EQ

Option 1. Speech Privacy, Sound Isolation, and Background Noise

STEP 1. IDENTIFY ADJACENCIES AND ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS

In the table of occupied spaces and functions, note adjacencies. Review the 2010 FGI Guidelines,
Table 1.2-3, to determine the applicable composite sound transmission class (STC) ratings. Consider
adjacencies for interior spaces only; exterior adjacency is addressed elsewhere.

STEP 2. DESIGN FOR SOUND ISOLATION

Identify all demising wall assemblies and floor-ceiling assemblies that acoustically separate each
applicable occupied space, including patient rooms, intensive-care units, examination rooms, treatment
rooms, toilet rooms, consultation rooms, MRI rooms, corridors, and public space.
For all applicable assemblies, use products with sound isolation properties that meet the STC ratings in
the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-3.

STEP 3. VERIFY SOUND ISOLATION

Verify that the assemblies for each occupied space meet the sound isolation requirements. Demonstrate
compliance through published data, calculation, or measurement, as follows:
·· Published data. Select walls, doors, and windows with published manufacturer’s data
·· Calculation. Perform averaging calculations that allow a trade-off between higher STC of walls
and lower STC ratings of doors, windows, and penetrations (see Further Explanation, Determining
Composite Sound Transmission Class). Calculations may be done in the design phase.
 765

·· Measurement. Measure noise isolation class (NIC) for all assemblies per Annex A.3 of ANSI S12.60–
2010 and compare with the sound isolation requirements. A NIC rating within three points of the
specified STC rating may be considered compliant. Measurements cannot be performed after the
substantial completion of construction.
Assemblies may be grouped together based on similar construction details. Any significant variance in
opening areas, such as window or door ratios, should be evaluated separately.
Compile a list of each occupied space. For each space, list the maximum STC rating, the design STC
rating or measured results, and data or calculations to support the values.

STEP 4. IDENTIFY SPEECH PRIVACY REQUIREMENTS

In the table developed for Step 1, identify whether each space is fully enclosed or open to other spaces,
and work with the owner to determine the level of speech privacy desired in each space and required
to comply with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and other privacy
protection statutes.
·· Classify speech privacy goals as “normal,” “confidential,” or “secure” based on the sensitivity of
expected conversations. Open-plan spaces typically permit limited opportunities for speech privacy,
so activities that require speech privacy may be assigned to adjacent enclosed spaces.
·· Enclosed rooms that require confidential levels may include admitting areas, psychiatric and
psychological interviewing and testing rooms, hematology labs, clinical areas, examination rooms,
consultation rooms, and private offices where speech privacy is critical to the services performed.
·· Secure speech privacy, the highest level, is generally defined as the total inaudibility of speech in
adjacent spaces. This level of privacy may be required in special clinical areas, such as hearing test
booths, speech therapy rooms, and special psychiatric suites.
·· Engage an expert familiar with speech privacy to select the speech privacy rating method that will be
used to evaluate compliance and to provide design assistance. Refer to the 2010 FGI Guidelines, page

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
27, Appendix A1.2-6.1.6.1, for further discussion of the four methods (privacy index, articulation index,
speech transmission index, and speech intelligibility index).

STEP 5. DESIGN FOR SPEECH PRIVACY

Two approaches to providing adequate speech privacy are common. The first is to reduce sound
transmission between spaces by installing improved partition assemblies (for enclosed rooms) and
partial-height partitions and sound-absorptive room finishes (for open-plan spaces). The second is to
provide an adequate level of continuous background sound.

STEP 6. VERIFY SPEECH PRIVACY PERFORMANCE

Evaluate each occupied space for speech privacy and compare to the speech privacy goals in the 2010

EQ
FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-4 for the selected method. Seek expert guidance on the appropriate calculation
or site measurement methodology, or review the standards referenced in 2010 FGI Guidelines, page 27,
Appendix A1.2-6.1.6.1.
Retain copies of testing or calculation procedures for documentation.

STEP 7. ADDRESS BACKGROUND NOISE

Identify all equipment that could contribute to background noise in occupied spaces.
·· Requirements of this credit apply to all elements within the project scope that have the potential
to generate audible noise in occupied rooms. Examples include all building mechanical, electrical,
plumbing systems, and air distribution elements.
·· Consider source-receiver paths when locating occupied spaces and HVAC equipment. For example, an
air-handling unit could be placed above a corridor rather than above a patient’s room. Control ambient
noise, including mechanical system noise, by selecting quiet fans that rotate at slow speeds, changing
filters on a regular basis, locating sound attenuators at variable air volume terminal boxes where
needed, installing vibration isolators on rotating and vibrating equipment, providing duct attenuation,
designing ductwork to minimize “cross-talk” from one room to another, and controlling airflow velocity
in the ductwork to minimize turbulence noise.
·· Compile acoustic performance data at the specific operating points from the equipment
manufacturers’ data. This information may inform the background noise criteria used for compliance
(see Further Explanation, Selecting a Sound Rating Method).
·· Because of the sensitive nature of these projects’ occupants, electrical, lighting, and plumbing noise
sources are considered in the background noise requirements for Healthcare but not for the other
BD+C rating systems.
766

STEP 8. SELECT ROOM NOISE RATING METHOD

Review the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-2, to determine the applicable background noise criteria for
each space. The referenced standard lists four measures for background noise: noise criteria (NC),
room criteria (RC), room criteria neutral (RC(N), and A-weighted decibel (dBA). To demonstrate
achievement of the credit, project teams must verify compliance for one metric for each space.
For space types not listed in the table, refer to 2011 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter
48, Table 1 (see Further Explanation, Selecting a Sound Rating Method).

STEP 9. VERIFY HVAC BACKGROUND NOISE

Determine sound pressure levels for each occupied space and verify compliance for each applicable
room type using the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-2. Consider sound pressure levels from HVAC,
plumbing, lighting, and electrical equipment. Demonstrate compliance through calculation or
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

measurement, as follows:
·· Engage an acoustics expert to complete the necessary calculations manually or through computer
simulation. Early calculations, during design, may allow teams to iteratively evaluate alternative or
layered strategies.
·· Consider measuring sound levels if the mechanical designer or acoustics expert on the project team
is familiar with best practice acoustic design and construction strategies. Ensure that the meter
used conforms to credit requirements.

Option 2. Acoustic Finishes and Site Exterior Noise

STEP 1. IDENTIFY SOUND ABSORPTION REQUIREMENTS

Review the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table 1.2-1, to determine the applicable sound absorption criteria for
each space listed in the table created for Step 1.

STEP 2. IDENTIFY SURFACES FOR ACOUSTIC TREATMENT

Catalog the area of planar surfaces in each space and identify locations where absorptive finishes can be
applied.
·· Acoustically absorptive finishes are typically applied to floors, ceilings, or walls as soft or perforated
materials. Fabric-covered furniture or partition systems may be considered part of the permanent
room layout.
·· For spaces with noisy plenum equipment, sound transmission paths that travel through the ceiling
plenum, or partitions that do not extend to the underside of the deck above, consider incorporating
EQ

ceiling materials with ceiling attenuation class (CAC) ratings of 35 or greater.

·· Cushion-backed flooring materials may reduce footfall and cart-rolling noise.
·· Additional acoustic finishes may be applied as window curtains, ceiling baffles, or other elements.
Balance the application of acoustic treatments with other performance criteria. For example, criteria
for daylighting penetration may affect how acoustic ceilings are applied. Areas with stringent sanitation
needs may also restrict the placement of acoustically absorptive materials on the floors or lower walls.

STEP 3. SELECT ACOUSTIC TREATMENTS

Specify and install finish materials with a high noise reduction coefficient (NRC) rating to satisfy the
credit requirements. Typically, acoustically absorptive materials have NRC ratings of 0.70 or higher.
Collect manufacturer’s documentation to verify the NRC of each acoustic finish material. Record the area
of each acoustic finish material for credit documentation.

STEP 4. VERIFY SOUND ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT

Calculate the average sound absorption coefficient (α) for each space type, using Equation 1, and confirm
that each room complies with the applicable sound absorption.
 767

EQUATION 1. Average room sound absorption coefficient

α average =
{ ( NCR ×
1 area 1 ) + ( NCR ×
2 area 2

area total
) + ( NCR ×
n area n )

}
Account for all room surfaces (walls, floors, and ceilings) in the calculation.

STEP 5. IDENTIFY SOURCES OF EXTERIOR NOISE

Early in the design process, assess the project site for exterior noise sources, both on- and off-site. Off-
site sources may include major transit corridors, industry or manufacturing facilities, outdoor venues,
rail lines, and air traffic lanes. On-site sources may include heliports, emergency power generators, and
outdoor mechanical and building services equipment.
Predicted noise sources may also be identified through neighborhood maps or aerial photographs that
show adjacent site uses. Consider marking existing off-site and anticipated on-site noise sources on a
map, where adjacencies to project buildings or residential neighbors can be identified. These zones can
then be highlighted for special consideration for noise mitigation.

STEP 6. DESIGN USING BEST PRACTICES AND REQUIREMENTS

Ensure that the design meets the 2010 SV Guidelines acoustic requirements for heliports, generators,
mechanical equipment, and building services, as described in the credit requirements. Several referenced
sections affect programmatic functions of the project; therefore, teams are encouraged to evaluate

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
criteria early in planning and design. Other sections define criteria for equipment specification and
adjacency limits that must be resolved during design development and construction.
Evaluate each section and define how a combination of architectural and engineering strategies will be
used to satisfy the requirements.

STEP 7. CLASSIFY SITE NOISE EXPOSURE LEVEL

Through observation or measurement, determine the project’s exterior noise exposure category per
2010 FGI Guidelines, Table A1.2-a or the 2010 SV Guidelines, Table 1.3-1. For additional information on
exterior noise exposure categories, see 2010 FGI Guidelines, Section A1.2-6.1.2, and 2010 SV Guidelines,
Section 1.3.
Assign a site classification based on the worst-case conditions, from A (quiet) through D (very noisy),

EQ
through either observation or measurement, as follows:
·· On a site visit, identify development patterns around the project, their approximate sound levels, and
adjacency to major transportation corridors (air, rail, highway).
·· Conduct one-week monitoring of day-night sound levels (in dB) and average hourly nominal maximum
A-weighted sound levels (dBA).
Most teams will be able to classify their sites based on observation. However, teams that wish to claim a
site classification lower than the default category should analyze measured site noise levels.

STEP 8. DESIGN ENVELOPE USING STC PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

Based on the site’s exterior noise exposure category identified in Step 7, determine the required STC
rating for exterior building envelope assemblies according to the 2010 FGI Guidelines, Table A1.2a. To
meet the STC rating performance criteria, consider the following strategies:
·· Select exterior envelope assemblies based on STC ratings provided by manufacturers.
·· Noisy sites may require thicker wall materials and highly insulated fenestration.
·· Wall assembly STC ratings should exceed the STC rating requirement if any low-STC rated assemblies
or elements are used for fenestrations, doors, or other openings.
·· Balance the use of low–STC-rated assemblies and elements with the need to provide daylighting and
views to occupied perimeter spaces.

STEP 9. VERIFY COMPLIANCE

If the project is located on a B, C, or D site, provide calculations or measurements to verify that assembly
STC ratings meet the applicable 2010 FGI Guidelines requirements. Sites categorized as A or Minimal
have limited exterior noise and can skip this step.
768

·· For guidance on calculations, see the 2010 SV Guidelines, Section A1.3, and Further Explanation,
Determining Composite Sound Transmission Class.
·· Conform to the measurement methods outlined in ASTM E966, Standard Guide for Field
Measurements of Airborne Sound Insulation of Building Facades and Facade Elements. Project teams
wishing to pursue this method are encouraged to engage an expert familiar with testing protocol.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

FURTHER EXPLANATION

CALCULATIONS
Reverberation Time
Equation 2 must be calculated separately for each frequency: 500, 1,000, and 2,000 Hz. The calculation should
include all finish materials in the room.

EQUATION 2. Total sound absorption for room

A = ( α S+ α S+ α S+ ...... α nSn )

where
α is the sound absorption coefficient for a material at a specific frequency
S is the total surface area for that material in square feet (or square meters).

Reverberation times must be calculated for all rooms at each of the three frequencies; all must meet the specified
T60 requirement in Table 2 in the credit requirements.

EQUATION 3. Reverberation time (IP)

V
RT = 0.049 ×
EQ

where
V is the room volume in cubic feet
A is the total sound absorption in the room (from Equation 1).

EQUATION 4. Reverberation time (SI)

V
RT = 0.161 ×
A

where
V is the room volume in cubic meters
A is the total sound absorption in the room (from Equation 1).

REVERBERATION TIME MEASUREMENTS

For reverberation time measurements, refer to the following references:
·· ASHRAE Performance Measurement Protocols for Commercial Buildings, Chapter 9.
·· ANSI Standard S12.60–2010, Annex A.4. For all projects except Schools, the reverberation time limits from
Table 2 in the credit requirements should be used in lieu of the limits in the ANSI standard.
 769

DETERMINING COMPOSITE SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS (STC) RATINGS

Composite sound transmission class (STC) rating is a weighted value for the capacity of a partition to attenuate
airborne sound. STC rating is calculated by averaging the transmission loss through an entire assembly.
In design, consider both the acoustic performance and ratio of partition materials. Because sound has a tendency
to travel through the weakest element (that with the lowest STC rating), carefully evaluate the use of penetrations,
openings, or fenestration in assemblies with a high STC rating requirement.
Ensure compliance with the standard through an evaluation of wall and floor sections and specification of tested
window and door assemblies. STC ratings are typically reported by manufacturers on product data sheets and
other documentation (such as the 2010 FGI Guidelines and 2010 SV Guidelines) that show tested results based on
standard wall materials.

SOUND REINFORCEMENT
Sound reinforcement may be needed for meeting, open office, public, or presentation spaces that seat more than 50
people, depending on their function (see Definitions, AV Playback Capabilities, and Definitions, Sound Reinforcement).
For smaller spaces and for spaces with simple geometry, simple amplification systems may meet the credit criteria.
For spaces with unique architecture or “live” acoustic environments, systems with advanced balancing and
signal processing may be required. Balancing the sound reinforcement system helps provide appropriate coverage
throughout the space. The balancing requirements and methodology depend on the type of sound system strategy
implemented and the sound reinforcement system equipment available. Signal-processing equipment can help
improve sound system fidelity and uniformity of coverage.

MEETING SOUND REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
For each space with a sound reinforcement system, verify compliance with the speech intelligibility (the extent to
which a listener can hear and comprehend spoken words over other noise), sound level, and uniformity of coverage
requirements. This involves evaluating the relationship of the room acoustic environment, sound reinforcement
system design and location, background noise level, and the listeners’ locations.

For more information on the performance criteria, see the following:

·· For speech intelligibility, CIS criterion, see the Speech Intelligibility White Paper by 3M.6 The speech
transmission index (STI) varies from 0 (totally unintelligible) to 1.0 (perfectly intelligible). The common
intelligibility scale (CIS) relates to STI with the following equation: CIS = 1 + log (STI).
·· For sound-level and uniformity of coverage, refer to ANSI/INFOCOMM 1M–2009, Audio Coverage Uniformity

EQ
in Enclosed Listener Areas.

Compliance with the criteria can be determined through basic calculations, acoustic modeling software, or with
measurements. If the space is not compliant, consider one or a combination of the following options:
·· Revising the room’s acoustic treatment strategy (typically by increasing the distribution and amount of
treatment)
·· Revising the sound reinforcement strategy (adjusting the type of sound reinforcement system or location and
the type and aiming of loudspeakers)
·· Lowering the background noise level in the room
·· Adjusting the sound output as needed to increase the output level while maintaining uniform coverage

MASKING SYSTEMS
Sound masking is a technology that uses artificially produced sound to cover or mask unwanted environmental
noise. These systems may be appropriate in open-floor layouts where full height partitions do not exist between
workspaces. Sound-masking systems can mitigate the perception that open offices are noisy and distracting places
to work.
Our hearing system tends to notice specific sounds when they are above ambient noise levels. Therefore, very
quiet spaces with isolated areas of activity may be balanced by targeted sound-masking systems.

6. http://multimedia.3m.com/mws/mediawebserver?mwsId=SSSSSufSevTsZxtUoY_vN82eevUqevTSevTSevTSeSSSSSS--&fn=Speech
770

Project teams using sound masking should consider their use as a supplement to architectural finishes or other
passive strategies for sound isolation. Masking systems need to be carefully designed and calibrated so that their
coverage is uniform and even and the sound spectrum (not just overall loudness) is appropriate for masking the
intended environmental noise. A system should not sound “hissy” or “rumbly,” and the level should be low enough
that it does not cause listening fatigue. A system’s use time period also needs to be evaluated. Consider incorporating
“ramping” in the masking system design, whereby the equipment gradually increases noise levels throughout the day
or when a space is occupied.
A commonly applied rule is to control no more than 1,000 square feet (93 square meters) per zone, though
project teams may consult with sound-masking system experts to identify appropriate control strategies.
For more information on sound masking and how it can improve workplaces, see “Sound Matters,” available at
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

gsamatters.com.

MEETING MASKING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Typically, a sound masking system’s specification includes the required frequency spectrum (or spectra), which
could be assessed to make sure that the maximum masking noise levels are at or below 48 dBA. See ASTM E1130 for
an example of a speech spectrum.
Make sure the system will be measured or evaluated after installation to confirm that it operates as designed.
Consider specifying the procedures and reporting methods from ASTM Standard E1573.

SELECTING A SOUND RATING METHOD

The referenced standards for this credit present HVAC background noise level guidelines based on space type. The
guidelines use the following sound rating methods:
·· Noise criteria (NC)
·· Room criteria (RC) or room criteria neutral (RCN)
·· A-weighted decibel (dBA)
·· C-weighted decibel (dBC)
·· RC Mark II rating method
The methods are described in the 2011 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration
Control. Teams must demonstrate compliance with one of the background noise rating methods for each space.
The selection of rating method depends on the project requirements for acoustic quality but may be affected by the
availability of data for HVAC components’ sound levels.
EQ

In each method, sound levels must be calculated or measured across a range of audible frequencies. NC and RC
methods are more sensitive to the balance of sound frequencies, whereas dBA reports the maximum sound level
within a frequency range.

USING 2010 FGI GUIDELINES AND 2010 SV GUIDELINES

The 2010 SV Guidelines are the referenced standard for all acoustics issues in the 2010 FGI Guidelines; they contain
design suggestions and background information regarding acoustic and privacy design for all types of health care
facilities. The guidelines were commissioned by FGI and prepared by the ad hoc Joint Subcommittee on Speech
Privacy and Healthcare Acoustics TC-AA.NS.SC, a technical subcommittee of the Acoustical Society of America, the
Institute of Noise Control Engineers, and the National Council of Acoustical Consultants.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
 771

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

New Construction, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality All projects

Occupied spaces’ sound level values X

HVAC background
Calculation, measurement narrative, or manufacturers’ data X
noise
Noise reduction narrative X

STC ratings for space adjacencies X

Sound isolation
Calculation, measurement narrative, or manufacturers’ data X

Reverberation time criteria for each room X

Reverberation time
Calculation, measurement narrative, or manufacturers’ data X

List of all large conference rooms and auditoriums X

Sound reinforcement Explanation of sound reinforcement methodology (if installed) X

and masking systems
Explanation of sound reinforcement system components and specifications (if installed) X

Explanation of masking system components and specifications narrative (if installed) X

Schools All projects

Background noise See EQ Prerequisite Minimum Acoustic Performancev X

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
STC calculation or measurement method X

Sound isolation List of STC ratings X

STC rating assembly source data X

Healthcare Option 1 Option 2

List of spaces, adjacencies, STC ratings X

Speech privacy and
List of spaces, privacy index values X
sound isolation
Calculation or simulation results, or report of field measurements X

EQ
List of spaces, design criteria, values X
Room noise levels
Lab test reports and simulation results, or report of field measurements X

Documentation of wall, ceiling, and floor finishes with associated NRC

X
values
Acoustical finishes
Calculated average sound absorption coefficients for representative
X
room types

Exterior building envelope STC rating X

Site noise exposure category narrative X

Site exterior noise
Mitigation narrative for each 2010 FGI guideline X

Special neighborhood considerations narrative X

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

Schools
EQ Prerequisite Minimum Acoustic Performance. This credit has additional performance thresholds for
HVAC background noise and additional criteria for STC.
772

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

New Construction, Data Centers, Warehouses and Distribution Centers, Hospitality
This is a new credit.

Schools
·· The background noise level limit has decreased from 40 dBA to 35 dBA.
·· The referenced ANSI S12.60 standard has been updated from 2002 to 2010.
·· AHRI Standard 885–2008 has been added as a referenced standard for background noise.
·· Equivalent local codes may now be used in place of the national codes specified in the credit requirements.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Healthcare
The credit name has changed from Acoustic Environment.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
ASHRAE 2011, HVAC Applications Handbook, Chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control: ashrae.org

AHRI Standard 885–2008: ahrinet.org

ANSI S1.4, Performance Measurement Protocols for Commercial Buildings: ashrae.org

2010 Noise and Vibration Guidelines for Health Care Facilities:

http://speechprivacy.org/joomla//index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=33&Itemid=43

ANSI/ASA S12.60–2010 American National Standard Acoustical Performance Criteria, Design Requirements,
and Guidelines for Schools, Part 1, Permanent Schools: asastore.aip.org

FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities, 2010 edition: www.fgiguidelines.org

ANSI T1.523–2001, Telecom Glossary 2007: ansi.org

E966, Standard Guide for Field Measurements of Airborne Sound Insulation of Building Facades and Facade
Elements: astm.org
EQ

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
classroom or core learning space a space that is regularly occupied and used for educational activities. In such
space, the primary functions are teaching and learning, and good speech communication is critical to students’
academic achievement. (Adapted from ANSI S12.60)

occupied space an enclosed space intended for human activities, excluding those spaces that are intended primarily
for other purposes, such as storage rooms and equipment rooms, and that are only occupied occasionally and for
short periods of time. Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied spaces
based on the duration of the occupancy, individual or multioccupant based on the quantity of occupants, and densely
or nondensely occupied spaces based on the concentration of occupants in the space.
 773

sound-level coverage a set of uniformity criteria that ensure consistent intelligibility and directionality of audible
frequencies for all occupants within a space

speech privacy a condition in which speech is unintelligible to casual listeners (ANSI T1.523–2001)

speech spectra the distribution of acoustic energy as a function of frequency for human speech

ACOUSTIC PERFORMANCE
EQ
 775

Innovation (in)
OVERVIEW
Sustainable design strategies and measures are constantly evolving and improving. New technologies are continually
introduced to the marketplace, and up-to-date scientific research influences building design strategies. The purpose
of this LEED category is to recognize projects for innovative building features and sustainable building practices and
strategies.
Occasionally, a strategy results in building performance that greatly exceeds what is required in an existing LEED
credit. Other strategies may not be addressed by any LEED prerequisite or credit but warrant consideration for
their sustainability benefits. In addition, LEED is most effectively implemented as part of a cohesive team, and this
category addresses the role of a LEED Accredited Professional in facilitating that process.

INNOVATION
IN
IN LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

776
 777

INNOVATION CREDIT

Innovation
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–5 points) Data Centers (1–5 points)
Core and Shell (1–5 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–5 points)
Schools (1-5 points) Hospitality (1–5 points)
Retail (1–5 points) Healthcare (1–5 points)

INTENT

To encourage projects to achieve exceptional or innovative performance.

REQUIREMENTS
Project teams can use any combination of innovation, pilot, and exemplary performance strategies.

OPTION 1. INNOVATION (1 POINT)

INNOVATION
Achieve significant, measurable environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in the LEED green
building rating system.

Identify the following:

·· the intent of the proposed innovation credit;
·· proposed requirements for compliance;

IN
·· proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance; and
·· the design approach or strategies used to meet the requirements.

AND/OR

OPTION 2. PILOT (1 POINT)

Achieve one pilot credit from USGBC’s LEED Pilot Credit Library

AND/OR

OPTION 3. ADDITIONAL STRATEGIES

Innovation (1-3 points)
·· Defined in Option 1 above.
778

Pilot (1–3 points)

·· Meet the requirements of Option 2.

Exemplary Performance (1–2 points)

·· Achieve exemplary performance in an existing LEED v4 prerequisite or credit that allows exemplary
performance, as specified in the LEED Reference Guide, v4 edition. An exemplary performance point is
typically earned for achieving double the credit requirements or the next incremental percentage threshold.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
IN
 779

BEHIND THE INTENT

Sustainable design comes from innovative strategies and thinking. Institutional measures that reward such
thinking—such as the achievement of this credit—benefit our environment. Recognition of exceptional efforts will
spur further innovation.
When project teams innovate and go beyond LEED requirements, they not only achieve measurable
environmental benefits beyond those specified by the LEED rating system, they also have the opportunity to explore
cutting-edge pilot credits and contribute to the development of future LEED credits. When they can demonstrate
that the project exceeds the standard level of performance associated with one or more LEED credits, their
innovations can be adopted by other teams in the future.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY INNOVATIVE STRATEGIES

Innovation may begin at a project’s conception, but it can enter at any step of the process and come
from any member of the project team.
·· During initial meetings or design charrettes, explore opportunities to incorporate innovative strategies,
achieve exemplary performance for existing LEED credits, and develop pilot credits, based on the
project scope.
·· Review the project goals and targeted credits to determine whether the project is likely to meet any
exemplary performance criteria.
·· Identify any environmental strategies included in the project that are not addressed by existing
LEED credits.
·· Discuss pilot credits, green housekeeping, public education, and other opportunities for innovation.

STEP 2. DEVELOP INNOVATION POINT STRATEGY

Projects may earn up to 5 points through a combination of the following:
·· Innovation (up to 4 points). This option is appropriate for strategies that are not addressed by any
existing credits in the LEED rating system under which the project will be certified.
·· Pilot credits (up to 4 points). This option requires project teams to achieve, document, and provide
feedback on pilot credit strategies developed by USGBC members and committees.

INNOVATION
·· Exemplary performance (up to 2 points). This option is achieved by demonstrating performance that
greatly exceeds the level or scope required by existing LEED prerequisites or credits.
°° One point is reserved for Pilot Credits and one for Innovation. To use all five points, projects must
use at least one pilot credit and one innovation credit.

IN
Innovation (up to 4 points)
STEP 1. CONFIRM CREDIT ELIGIBILITY
For innovations that are not addressed by existing LEED credits, confirm that the proposed strategy
meets the following three basic criteria:
·· The project must demonstrate a quantitative improvement in environmental performance by
identifying or establishing a baseline of standard performance and comparing that benchmark with
the final design performance.
·· The strategy must be comprehensive. Measures that address a limited portion of a project or are not
comprehensive in other ways are not eligible. The project team must demonstrate that the proposed
innovation credit applies to the entire project being certified under LEED and has at least two
components (i.e., it is not limited to use of a single product).
·· The strategy must be significantly better than standard sustainable design practices.
Points can also be earned by achieving selected credits from other LEED rating systems.
780

Strategies must demonstrate a comprehensive approach, have significant, measurable environmental

benefits, and be better than standard practice (see Further Explanation, Suggested Topics for Innovation
Credits and Ineligible Strategies).

STEP 2. DEVELOP DOCUMENTATION

Document credit eligibility as outlined above, and note any project-specific strategies.

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT CREDIT

Develop and execute the innovative strategy or program in a manner that yields a meaningful
environmental benefit. Retain documentation and calculations to validate the project team’s approach
and implementation.

Pilot credits (up to 4 points)

STEP 1. SELECT CREDIT

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Select a credit from the LEED Pilot Credit Library on the USGBC website. The Pilot Credit Library
includes credit intent, requirements, submittals, and feedback questions for each pilot credit.
·· Pilot credits open and close at varying intervals. Check the USGBC website for a current list of
available pilot credit strategies.
·· Pilot credits are specific to the rating systems. Review the list on the USGBC website to identify pilot
credits for the applicable rating system.

STEP 2. REGISTER PILOT CREDIT

Register for the selected pilot credit through the Pilot Credit Library.
·· Since pilot credit availability changes over time, register for a credit as soon as the project team
decides to pursue it, rather than waiting until documentation review.
·· Once a project has registered for a pilot credit, the project team may continue to pursue it even if it is
closed to new registrants.

STEP 3. IMPLEMENT CREDIT

Follow the steps to implement the credit as outlined in the pilot credit. Visit the LEEDuser forums for the
selected pilot credit to ask questions or get advice on strategy.

STEP 4. PROVIDE FEEDBACK

Complete the credit’s feedback survey, found on the USGBC website. Include any information that might
be helpful in future revisions of the credit.

STEP 5. DOCUMENT CREDIT

Complete all credit-specific documentation as outlined in the pilot credit.
·· Some pilot credits have documentation forms or calculators.
IN

·· Pilot credits may be attempted in any review stage and can be replaced before the next review if the
initial credit is not accepted.

Exemplary Performance (up to 2 points)

STEP 1. IDENTIFY TARGET EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE CREDITS

During design, review exemplary performance criteria and select credits for which exemplary
performance will be pursued. Credits that allow exemplary performance through a predetermined
approach are noted throughout this reference guide.

STEP 2. CONFIRM IMPLEMENTATION

Document design elements and specifications requirements to ensure that the selected exemplary
performance criteria are met. Provide the required documentation as noted in the base credit.
 781

FURTHER EXPLANATION

SUGGESTED TOPICS FOR INNOVATION CREDITS

Project teams are encouraged to explore the full range of innovative opportunities in their buildings. Refer to
the online Innovation database for examples of successful innovation credits. The examples do not constitute
preapproval of any Innovation strategy, however, and Innovation credit awarded for a project today does not imply
automatic approval for similar strategies in the future. A team seeking formal preapproval should submit a project
credit interpretation request (CIR).

The following example was submitted for an Innovation credit:

Public education. Provide an educational program on the environmental and human health benefits of green building
practices and how building occupants or the public can help improve green performance within the LEED space (such
as recycling and appropriate use of efficient fixtures and equipment). The program must be actively instructional and
include at least two instructional initiatives that have ongoing components, such as a signage program, case study, guided
tours, educational outreach program through periodic events covering green building topics, and/or a website or electronic
newsletter.

INELIGIBLE STRATEGIES
Innovation credits are not awarded for the use of a particular product or design strategy if the technology aids in the
achievement of an existing LEED credit, even if the project is not attempting to earn that credit.
Innovation strategies that are closed pilot credits are not available unless they are listed in the online Innovation
database.
No strategy can achieve more than 1 point under Innovation. That is, a single strategy cannot be double-counted
for both exemplary performance and innovation (or both exemplary performance and a pilot credit, or both a pilot
credit and innovation).
The innovation strategy must be specific to the LEED project under review.

RATING SYSTEM VARIATIONS

Core and Shell
Core and Shell projects pursuing Innovation credits must implement a comprehensive strategy, often applied to the

INNOVATION
whole building, including both the core and shell and any common areas, as well as the tenant spaces.
For example, to earn an Innovation credit for a green housekeeping program, base building management of
the Core and Shell project must either control the cleaning of both the base building and tenant spaces, or it must
enforce the credit requirements through a legally binding sales agreement or tenant lease for areas outside its
control.

IN
CAMPUS
Group Approach
All buildings in the group may be documented as one. Documentation for campus-wide strategies must represent the
total combined performance for all buildings and site areas.

Campus Approach
Eligible. Documentation for campus-wide strategies must represent the total combined performance for all master
site buildings and site areas, but strategies that apply to individual buildings must be documented for every building.
782

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Innovation Pilot credit Exemplary performance

Innovation narrative X

Supporting documentation X X X

Pilot credit registration X

Pilot credit survey X

Pilot credit specific submittals X

Exemplary performance credit and level X

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The maximum number of exemplary performance strategies eligible for IN credits has changed from three to two.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

DEFINITIONS
IN

None.
 783

INNOVATION CREDIT

LEED Accredited
Professional
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1 point) Data Centers (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1 point)
Schools (1 point) Hospitality (1 point)
Retail (1 point) Healthcare (1 point)

INTENT

To encourage the team integration required by a LEED project and to

LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL

streamline the application and certification process.

REQUIREMENTS
At least one principal participant of the project team must be a LEED Accredited Professional (AP) with a specialty
appropriate for the project.

IN
784

BEHIND THE INTENT

A LEED Accredited Professional (LEED AP) with specialty can be a valuable resource in the LEED certification
process. The presence of a LEED AP with specialty helps project team members understand the rating system, the
importance of interactions among the prerequisites and credits, and the LEED application process.

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. ENGAGE LEED AP WITH SPECIALTY

Identify a project team member who is a LEED AP with specialty, or engage a LEED AP with specialty to
support the project and participate in the certification process.
·· Select a team member with a LEED AP Building Design & Construction (LEED AP BD+C) credential.
·· The LEED AP with specialty identified for this credit must have an active credential at the time of
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

certification review (see Further Explanation, Maintaining a LEED Credential).

·· LEED APs without specialty (legacy LEED APs) do not qualify for this credit.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

MAINTAINING A LEED CREDENTIAL

The LEED AP with specialty credential can be maintained through either of the following methods:
·· Retaking and passing the LEED accreditation exam
·· Earning 30 continuing education hours per credentialing period

A credential is considered active (and eligible for this credit) only if the credential holder has completed his or her
credential maintenance through the GBCI Credential Maintenance Program. For more information, visit USGBC’s
website.

CAMPUS
Group Approach
Submit separate documentation for each building.

Campus Approach
Ineligible. Each LEED project may pursue the credit individually.
IN
 785

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation Required

Full name and specialty credential of LEED AP x

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

LEED APs without specialty (legacy LEED APs) are no longer eligible for this credit.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

LEED ACCREDITED PROFESSIONAL

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

DEFINITIONS
None.

IN
 787

RP
REGIONAL PRIORITY
Regional Priority (rp)
OVERVIEW
Because some environmental issues are particular to a locale, volunteers from USGBC chapters and the LEED
International Roundtable have identified distinct environmental priorities within their areas and the credits that
address those issues. These Regional Priority credits encourage project teams to focus on their local environmental
priorities.
USGBC established a process that identified six RP credits for every location and every rating system within
chapter or country boundaries. Participants were asked to determine which environmental issues were most salient
in their chapter area or country. The issues could be naturally occurring (e.g., water shortages) or man-made
(e.g., polluted watersheds) and could reflect environmental concerns (e.g., water shortages) or environmental assets
(e.g., abundant sunlight). The areas, or zones, were defined by a combination of priority issues—for example, an
urban area with an impaired watershed versus an urban area with an intact watershed.
The participants then prioritized credits to address the important issues of given locations. Because each LEED
project type (e.g., a data center) may be associated with different environmental impacts, each rating system has its
own RP credits.
The ultimate goal of RP credits is to enhance the ability of LEED project teams to address critical environmental
issues across the country and around the world.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION RP

788
 789

REGIONAL PRIORITY CREDIT

RP
Regional Priority

REGIONAL PRIORITY
This credit applies to:
New Construction (1–4 points) Data Centers (1–4 points)
Core and Shell (1–4 points) Warehouses and Distribution Centers (1–4 points)
Schools (1–4 points) Hospitality (1–4 points)
Retail (1–4 points) Healthcare (1–4 points)

INTENT

To provide an incentive for the achievement of credits that address

geographically specific environmental, social equity, and public health
priorities.

REQUIREMENTS
Earn up to four of the six Regional Priority credits. These credits have been identified by the USGBC regional
councils and chapters as having additional regional importance for the project’s region. A database of Regional
Priority credits and their geographic applicability is available on the USGBC website, http://www.usgbc.org/rpc.
One point is awarded for each Regional Priority credit achieved, up to a maximum of four.
790

BEHIND THE INTENT

LEED projects are designed, built, and operated in many different contexts. Climate, population density, and local
regulations can differ significantly from one location to another, making certain environmental issues more critical
than others. Examples include water conservation in arid climates versus rainwater management in wet climates.
LEED projects can be more transformative if teams recognize their location’s priority environmental issues and
address them through design, construction, and operation choices. LEED encourages a focus on regional issues
through RP credits—existing LEED credits that USGBC volunteers have determined to be especially important in a
RP

given area. For every location in the U.S., six credits are prioritized. The ultimate intent is to motivate project teams
to earn the credits that address an area’s priority issues.
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

STEP-BY-STEP GUIDANCE

STEP 1. IDENTIFY APPLICABLE RP CREDITS

Review the credits flagged for regional priority in the project’s area (see USGBC’s website). Consider how
achievement of these credits will affect the project.

STEP 2. DETERMINE PERFORMANCE REQUIRED TO EARN RP POINTS

·· For credits with multiple thresholds (e.g., percentage improvement in energy efficiency), points are
awarded at particular levels of achievement.
·· If such a credit is flagged as RP for the project’s location, confirm the threshold the project must meet
to earn the bonus point.

FURTHER EXPLANATION

None.

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Documentation

No additional documentation is required to earn Regional Priority credits. Document compliance for the selected credits, and the related
RP bonus points for their achievement will be awarded automatically.

RELATED CREDIT TIPS

None.

CHANGES FROM LEED 2009

The RP credits for a given region may be different than they were for LEED 2009.
 791

REFERENCED STANDARDS
None.

EXEMPLARY PERFORMANCE
Not available.

RP
DEFINITIONS

REGIONAL PRIORITY
None.
APPENDICES LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

792
 793

APPENDICES
APPENDIX 1. USE TYPES AND CATEGORIES

TABLE 1. Use Types and Categories

Category Use type

Food retail Supermarket

Grocery with produce section

Community-serving retail Convenience store

Farmers market

Hardware store

Pharmacy

Other retail

Services Bank

Family entertainment venue (e.g., theater, sports)

Gym, health club, exercise studio

Hair care

Laundry, dry cleaner

Restaurant, café, diner (excluding those with only drive-thru

service)

Civic and community facilities Adult or senior care (licensed)

Child care (licensed)

Community or recreation center

Cultural arts facility (museum, performing arts)

Education facility (e.g., K—12 school, university, adult

education center, vocational school, community college)

Government office that serves public on-site

Medical clinic or office that treats patients

Place of worship

Police or fire station APPENDICES

Post office

Public library

Public park

Social services center

Community anchor uses (BD+C and ID+C only) Commercial office (100 or more full-time equivalent jobs)

Adapted from Criterion Planners, INDEX neighborhood completeness indicator, 2005.

794

APPENDIX 2. DEFAULT OCCUPANCY COUNTS

Use Table 1 to calculate default occupancy counts. Only use the occupancy estimates if occupancy is unknown.
For the calculation, use gross floor area, not net or leasable floor area. Gross floor area is defined as the sum of
all areas on all floors of a building included within the outside faces of the exterior wall, including common areas,
mechanical spaces, circulation areas, and all floor penetrations that connect one floor to another. To determine gross
floor area, multiply the building footprint (in square feet or square meters) by the number of floors in the building.
Exclude underground or structured parking from the calculation.

TABLE 1. Default Occupancy Numbers

Gross square feet per occupant Gross square meters per occupant

Employees Transients Employees Transients

General office 250 0 23 0

Retail, general 550 130 51 12

Retail or service (e.g., financial, 600 130 56 12

auto)

Restaurant 435 95 40 9

Grocery store 550 115 51 11

Medical office 225 330 21 31

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

R&D or laboratory 400 0 37 0

Warehouse, distribution 2,500 0 232 0

Warehouse, storage 20,000 0 1860 0

Hotel 1,500 700 139 65

Educational, daycare 630 105 59 10

Educational, K–12 1,300 140 121 13

Educational, postsecondary 2,100 150 195 14

Sources:
·· ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1–2004 (Atlanta, GA, 2004).
·· 2001 Uniform Plumbing Code (Los Angeles, CA)
·· California Public Utilities Commission, 2004–2005 Database for Energy Efficiency Resources (DEER) Update
Study (2008).
·· California State University, Capital Planning, Design and Construction Section VI, Standards for Campus
Development Programs (Long Beach, CA, 2002).
·· City of Boulder Planning Department, Projecting Future Employment—How Much Space per Person
(Boulder, 2002).
APPENDICES

·· Metro, 1999 Employment Density Study (Portland, OR 1999).

·· American Hotel and Lodging Association, Lodging Industry Profile Washington, DC, 2008.
·· LEED for Core & Shell Core Committee, personal communication (2003 - 2006).
·· LEED for Retail Core Committee, personal communication (2007)
·· OWP/P, Medical Office Building Project Averages (Chicago, 2008).
·· OWP/P, University Master Plan Projects (Chicago, 2008).
·· U.S. General Services Administration, Childcare Center Design Guide (Washington, DC, 2003).
 795

APPENDIX 3. RETAIL PROCESS LOAD BASELINES

TABLE 1A. Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate

Broiler, underfired Gas Cooking 30% 16,000 Btu/h/ 35% 12,000 Btu/h/ft2
ft2 peak input peak input

Combination ovens, Elec Cooking 40% steam 0.37P+4.5 kW 50% steam mode 0.133P+0.6400 kW
steam mode mode
(P = pan capacity)

Combination ovens, Gas Cooking 20% steam 1,210P+35,810 38% steam mode 200P+6,511 Btu/h
steam mode mode Btu/h

Combination ovens, Elec Cooking 65% 0.1P+1.5 kW 70% convection mode 0.080P+0.4989 kW
convection mode convection
mode

Combination ovens, Gas Cooking 35% 322P+13,563 44% convection mode 150P+5,425 Btu/h
convection mode convection Btu/h
mode

Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW

full-size

Convection oven, Gas Cooking 30% 18,000 Btu/h 46% 12,000 Btu/h
full-size

Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 1.5 kW 71% 1.0 kW

half-size

Conveyor oven, > Gas Cooking 20% 70,000 Btu/h 42% 57,000 Btu/h
25-inch belt

Conveyor oven, ≤ Gas Cooking 20% 45,000 Btu/h 42% 29,000 Btu/h
25-inch belt

Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.05 kW 80% 1.0 kW

Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 14,000 Btu/h 50% 9,000 Btu/h

Griddle (based on Elec Cooking 60% 400 W/ft2 70% 320 W/ft2
3 ft model)

Griddle (based on Gas Cooking 30% 3,500 Btu/h/ 38% 2,650 Btu/h/ft2
3 ft model) ft2

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 21.5V Watts

cabinets (excluding
drawer warmers
and heated display)
0 < V < 13 ft³ (V =
volume)

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 2.0V + 254 Watts

cabinets (excluding
APPENDICES

drawer warmers
and heated display)
13 ≤ V < 28 ft³

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 40 W/ft3 na 3.8V + 203.5 Watts

cabinets (excluding
drawer warmers
and heated display)
28 ft³ ≤ V

Large vat fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW

796

TABLE 1A (CONTINUED). Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate

Large vat fryer Gas Cooking 35% 20,000 Btu/h 50% 12,000 Btu/h

Rack oven, double Gas Cooking 30% 65,000 Btu/h 50% 35,000 Btu/h

Rack oven, single Gas Cooking 30% 43,000 Btu/h 50% 29,000 Btu/h

Range Elec Cooking 70% 80%

Range Gas Cooking 35% na 40% and no standing na

pilots

Steam cooker, Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan
batch cooking

Steam cooker, Gas Cooking 15% 2,500 Btu/h/ 38% 2,100 Btu/h/pan
batch cooking pan

Steam cooker, high Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan
production or cook
to order

Steam cooker, high Gas Cooking 15% 5,000 Btu/h/ 38% 4,300 Btu/h/pan
production or cook pan
to order
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Toaster Elec Cooking na 1.8 kW average na 1.2 kW average

operating operating energy
energy rate rate

Ice machine, IMH Elec Ice 6.89 – na 37.72*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

(ice-making head, 0.0011H lb ice
H = harvest ice), H kWh/100
≥ 450 lb/day lb ice

Ice machine, IMH Elec Ice 10.26 – na 37.72*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

(ice-making head), 0.0086H lb ice
H < 450 lb/day kWh/100
lb ice

Ice machine Elec Ice 8.85 – na 22.95*H-0.258 + 1.00 na

RCU (remote 0.0038H kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit, kWh/100lb
w/o remote ice
compressor), H <
1,000 lb/day

Ice machine Elec Ice 5.10 na 22.95*H-0.258 + 1.00 na

RCU (remote kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit), lb ice
1600 > H ≥ 1000
lb/day

Ice machine Elec Ice 5.10 na -0.00011*H + 4.60 na

RCU (remote kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
condensing unit), lb ice
APPENDICES

H ≥ 1600 lb/day

Ice machine SCU Elec Ice 18.0 – na 48.66*H-0.326 + 0.08 na

(self-contained 0.0469H kWh/100 lb ice
unit), H < 175 lb/day kWh/100
lb ice

Ice machine self- Elec Ice 9.80 na 48.66*H-0.326 + 0.08 na

contained unit, H ≥ kWh/100 kWh/100 lb ice
175 lb/day lb ice
 797

TABLE 1A (CONTINUED). Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 4.0 na 3.68 kWh/100 lb ice na

cooled ice-making kWh/100
head, H ≥ 1436 lb/ lb ice
day (must be on
chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 5.58 – na 5.13 – 0.001H kWh/100 na

cooled ice-making 0.0011H lb ice
head, 500 lb/day < kWh/100
H < 1436 (must be lb ice
on chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 7.80 – na 7.02 – 0.0049H na

cooled ice-making 0.0055H kWh/100 lb ice
head, H < 500 lb/ kWh/100
day (must be on lb ice
chilled loop)

Ice machine Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned

water-cooled once-
through (open
loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 11.4 – na 10.6 – 0.177H kWh/100 na

cooled SCU (self- 0.0190H lb ice
contained unit), H kWh/100
< 200 lb/day (must lb ice
be on chilled loop)

Ice machine, Elec Ice 7.6 na 7.07 kWh/100 lb ice na

water-cooled self- kWh/100
contained unit, H ≥ lb ice
200 lb/day (must
be on chilled loop)

Chest freezer, solid Elec Refrig 0.45V + na ≤ 0.270V + 0.130 kWh/ na

or glass door 0.943 kWh/ day
day

Chest refrigerator, Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.125V + 0.475 kWh/ na

solid or glass door kWh/day day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.607V + 0.893 kWh/ na

freezer 0 < V < kWh/day day
15 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.733V – 1.00 kWh/ na

freezer 15 ≤ V < kWh/day day
30 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.250V + 13.50 kWh/ na

freezer, 30 ≤ V < kWh/day day
50 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.75V + 4.10 na ≤ 0.450V + 3.50 kWh/ na

APPENDICES
freezer, 50 ≤ V ft³ kWh/day day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 na ≤ 0.118V + 1.382 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0 < V kWh/day day
< 15 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 na ≤ 0.140V + 1.050 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 15 ≤ V kWh/day day
< 30 ft³

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 na ≤ 0.088V + 2.625 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 30 ≤ V kWh/day day
< 50 ft³
798

TABLE 1A (CONTINUED). Commercial kitchen appliance prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget (IP units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance Type Fuel Function
Efficiency Idle Rate Efficiency Idle Rate

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.12V + 3.34 na ≤ 0.110V + 1.500 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 50 ≤ kWh/day day
V ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.250V + 1.25 kWh/ na

freezer, 0 < V < kWh/day day
15 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.400V – 1.000 kWh/ na

freezer, 15 ≤ V < kWh/day day
30 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.163V + 6.125 kWh/ na

freezer, 30 ≤ V < kWh/day day
50 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.4V + 1.38 na ≤ 0.158V + 6.333 kWh/ na

freezer, 50 ≤ V ft³ kWh/day day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.089V + 1.411 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0 < V kWh/day day
< 15 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.037V + 2.200 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 15 ≤ V kWh/day day
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

< 30 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.056V + 1.635 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 30 ≤ V kWh/day day
< 50 ft³

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 0.1V + 2.04 na ≤ 0.060V + 1.416 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 50 ≤ kWh/day day
V ft³

Clothes washer Gas Sanitation 1.72 MEF na 2.00 MEF na

Door-type dish Elec Sanitation na 1.0 kW na 0.70 kW

machine, high temp

Door-type dish Elec Sanitation na 0.6 kW na 0.6 kW

machine, low temp

Multitank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.6 kW na 2.25 kW

conveyor dish
machine, high temp

Multitank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 2.0 kW

conveyor dish
machine, low temp

Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish
machine, high temp
APPENDICES

Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 1.6 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish
machine, low temp

Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.9 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, high temp

Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.5 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, low temp

The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use requirements, where applicable, are based on the following test methods:
 799

ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of Griddles

ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open Deep Fat Fryers
ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam Cookers
ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of Convection Ovens
ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range Tops
ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double-Sided Griddles
ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of Combination Ovens
ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of Underfired Broilers
ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing, ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing
Machines
ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Ovens
ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing, Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack Ovens
ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot Food Holding Cabinets
ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large Open Vat Fryers
ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves
ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Toasters
ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice Makers
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with temperature setpoints at 38°F for medium-
temp refrigerators, 0°F for low-temp freezers, and -15°F for ice cream freezers

TABLE 1B. Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Broiler, underfired Gas Cooking 30% 50.5 kW/m2 35% 37.9 kW/m2

Combination oven, Elec Cooking 40% steam 0.37P + 4.5 kW 50% steam mode 0.133P + 0.6400
steam mode (P = pan mode kW
capacity)

Combination oven, Gas Cooking 20% steam (1 210P + 38% steam mode (200P + 6 511)/
steam mode mode 35 810)/3 412 3 412 kW
kW

Combination oven, Elec Cooking 65% 0.1P + 1.5 kW 70% convection mode 0.080P + 0.4989
convection mode convection kW
mode

Combination oven, Gas Cooking 35% (322P + 44% convection mode (150P + 5 425)/
convection mode convection 13 563)/3 412 3 412 kW
mode kW

Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 2.0 kW 71% 1.6 kW

full-size

Convection oven, Gas Cooking 30% 5.3 kW 46% 3.5 kW

full-size

Convection oven, Elec Cooking 65% 1.5 kW 71% 1.0 kW APPENDICES

half-size

Conveyor oven, > 63.5- Gas Cooking 20% 20.5 kW 42% 16.7 kW
cm belt

Conveyor oven, < 63.5- Gas Cooking 20% 13.2 kW 42% 8.5 kW
cm belt

Fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.05 kW 80% 1.0 kW

Fryer Gas Cooking 35% 4.1 kW 50% 2.64 kW

Griddle (based on 90- Elec Cooking 60% 4.3 kW/m2 70% 3.45 kW/m2
cm model)
800

TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Griddle (based on 90- Gas Cooking 30% 11 kW/m2 33% 8.35 kW/m2
cm model)

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (21.5*V)/0.0283

cabinets (excluding kW/m3
drawer warmers and
heated display) 0 < V <
0.368 m3 (V = volume)

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (2.0*V +

cabinets (excluding 254)/0.0283 kW/m3
drawer warmers and
heated display) 0.368 ≤
V < 0.793 m3

Hot food holding Elec Cooking na 1.4 kW/m3 na (3.8*V +

cabinets (excluding 203.5)/0.0283
drawer warmers and kW/m3
heated display) 0.793
m3 ≤ V

Large vat fryer Elec Cooking 75% 1.35 kW 80% 1.1 kW

Large vat fryer Gas Cooking 35% 5.86 kW 50% 3.5 kW

LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Rack oven, double Gas Cooking 30% 19 kW 50% 10.25 kW

Rack oven, single Gas Cooking 30% 12.6 kW 50% 8.5 kW

Range Elec Cooking 70% na 80% na

Range Gas Cooking 35% na 40% and no standing na

pilots

Steam cooker, batch Elec Cooking 26% 200 W/pan 50% 135 W/pan
cooking

Steam cooker, batch Gas Cooking 15% 733 W/pan 38% 615 W/pan
cooking

Steam cooker, high Elec Cooking 26% 330 W/pan 50% 275 W/pan
production or cook to
order

Steam cooker, high Gas Cooking 15% 1.47 kW/pan 38% 1.26 kW/pan
production or cook to
order

Toaster Elec Cooking na 1.8 kW average na 1.2 kW average

operating operating energy
energy rate rate

Ice machine IMH (ice- Elec Ice 0.0015 – na— ≤ 13.52*H-0.298 kWh/100 na
making head, H = ice 5.3464E-07 kg ice
harvest) H ≥ 204 kg/day kWh/kg ice
APPENDICES

Ice machine IMH (ice Elec Ice 0.2262 – na ≤ 13.52*H-0.298 kWh/100 na

making head) ice- 4.18E-04 kg ice
making head, H < 204 kWh/kg ice
kg/day

Ice machine, RCU Elec Ice 0.1951 – na ≤ 111.5835*H-0.258 + 2.205 na

(remote condensing 1.85E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
unit, w/o remote kWh/kg ice
compressor) H < 454
kg/day
 801

TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Ice machine RCU Elec Ice 0.1124 kWh/ na ≤ 111.5835*H-0.258 + 2.205 na

(remote condensing kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
unit) 726 > H ≥ 454
kg/day

Ice machine RCU Elec Ice 0.1124 kWh/ na ≤ -0.00024H + 4.60 na

(remote condensing kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
unit) H ≥ 726 kg/day

Ice machine SCU (self Elec Ice 0.3968 – na 236.59*H-0.326 + 0.176 na

contained unit), H < 79 2.28E-03 kWh/100 kg ice
kg/day kWh/kg ice

Ice machine SCU (self- Elec Ice 0.2161 kWh/ na 236.59*H-0.326 + 0.176 na
contained unit), H ≥ 79 kg ice kWh/100 kg ice
kg/day

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.0882 na ≤ 8.11 kWh/100 kg ice na

cooled ice-making head, kWh/kg ice
H ≥ 651 kg/day (must be
on a chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1230 – na ≤ 11.31 – 0.065H na

cooled ice-making head, 5.35E-05 kWh/100 kg ice
227 ≤ H < 651 kg/day kWh/kg ice
(must be on a chilled
loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1720 – na ≤ 15.48 – 0.0238H na

cooled ice-making head, 2.67E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
H < 227 kg/day (must be kWh/kg ice
on a chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice Banned Banned Banned Banned

cooled once-through
(open loop)

Ice machine water- Elec Ice 0.2513 – na ≤ 23.37 – 0.086H na

cooled SCU (self- 29.23E-04 kWh/100 kg ice
contained unit) H < 91 kWh/kg ice
kg/day (must be on a
chilled loop)

Ice machine, water- Elec Ice 0.1676 kWh/ na 15.57 kWh/100 kg ice na
cooled SCU (self- kg ice
contained unit) H ≥ 91
kg/day (must be on a
chilled loop)

Chest freezer, solid or Elec Refrig 15.90V + na 9.541V + 0.130 kWh/day na

glass door 0.943 kWh/
day

Chest refrigerator, solid Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 4.417V + 0.475 kWh/ na

or glass door 2.04 kWh/ day
APPENDICES
day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 21.449V + 0.893 kWh/ na

freezer, 0 < V < 0.42 m3 kWh/day day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 25.901V – 1.00 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.42 ≤ V < kWh/day day
0.85 m3

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 8.834V + 13.50 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.85 ≤ V < kWh/day day
1.42 m3

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 26.50V + 4.1 na ≤ 15.90V + 3.50 kWh/ na

freezer, 1.42 ≤ V m3 kWh/day day
802

TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 4.169V + 1.382 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0 < V < 3.34 kWh/ day
0.42 m3 day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 4.947V + 1.050 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0.42 ≤ V < 3.34 kWh/ day
0.85 m3 day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 3.109V + 2.625 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0.85 ≤ V < 3.34 kWh/ day
1.42 m3 day

Glass-door reach-in Elec Refrig 4.24V + na ≤ 3.887V + 1.500 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 1.42 ≤ V m3 3.34 kWh/ day
day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 8.834V + 1.25 kWh/ na

freezer, 0 < V < 0.42 m3 kWh/day day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 4.819V – 1.000 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.42 < V < kWh/day day
0.85 m3

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 5.760V + 6.125 kWh/ na

freezer, 0.85 ≤ V < kWh/day day
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

1.42 m3

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 14.13V + 1.38 na ≤ 5.583V + 6.333 kWh/ na

freezer, 1.42 ≤ V m3 kWh/day day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 3.145V + 1.411 kWh/day na

refrigerator, 0 < V < 2.04 kWh/
0.42 m3 day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 1.307V + 2.200 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0.42 ≤ V < 2.04 kWh/ day
0.85 m3 day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 1.979V + 1.635 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 0.85 ≤ V < 2.04 kWh/ day
1.42 m3 day

Solid-door reach-in Elec Refrig 3.53V + na ≤ 2.120V + 1.416 kWh/ na

refrigerator, 1.42 ≤ V m3 2.04 kWh/ day
day

Clothes washer Gas Sanitation 1.72 MEF 2.00 MEF

Door-type dish machine, Elec Sanitation na 1.0 kW na 0.70 kW

high temp

Door-type dish machine, Elec Sanitation na 0.6 kW na 0.6 kW

low temp

Multitank rack conveyor Elec Sanitation na 2.6 kW na 2.25 kW

APPENDICES

dish machine, high temp

Multitank rack conveyor Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 2.0 kW

dish machine, low temp

Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 2.0 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish machine,
high temp
 803

TABLE 1B (CONTINUED). Commercial Kitchen Appliance Prescriptive Measures and Baseline for Energy Cost Budget (SI units)

Baseline energy usage for energy modeling path Levels for prescriptive path

Baseline Baseline Prescriptive Prescriptive

Appliance type Fuel Function
Efficiency idle Rate Efficiency idle Rate

Single-tank rack Elec Sanitation na 1.6 kW na 1.5 kW

conveyor dish machine,
low temp

Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.9 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, high temp

Undercounter dish Elec Sanitation na 0.5 kW na 0.5 kW

machine, low temp

The energy efficiency, idle energy rates, and water use requirements, where applicable, are based on the following test methods:
ASTM F1275 Standard Test Method for Performance of Griddles
ASTM F1361 Standard Test Method for Performance of Open Deep Fat Fryers
ASTM F1484 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Steam Cookers
ASTM F1496 Standard Test Method for Performance of Convection Ovens
ASTM F1521 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Range Tops
ASTM F1605 Standard Test Method for Performance of Double-Sided Griddles
ASTM F1639 Standard Test Method for Performance of Combination Ovens
ASTM F1695 Standard Test Method for Performance of Underfired Broilers
ASTM F1696 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Single-Rack Hot Water Sanitizing, ASTM Door-Type Commercial Dishwashing
Machines
ASTM F1704 Standard Test Method for Capture and Containment Performance of Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM F1817 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Ovens
ASTM F1920 Standard Test Method for Energy Performance of Rack Conveyor, Hot Water Sanitizing, Commercial Dishwashing Machines
ASTM F2093 Standard Test Method for Performance of Rack Ovens
ASTM F2140 Standard Test Method for Performance of Hot Food Holding Cabinets
ASTM F2144 Standard Test Method for Performance of Large Open Vat Fryers
ASTM F2324 Standard Test Method for Prerinse Spray Valves
ASTM F2380 Standard Test Method for Performance of Conveyor Toasters
ARI 810-2007: Performance Rating of Automatic Commercial Ice Makers
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 72–2005: Method of Testing Commercial Refrigerators and Freezers with temperature setpoints at 3°C for
mediumtemp refrigerators, -18°C for low-temp freezers, and -26°C for ice cream freezers.

TABLE 2. Supermarket refrigeration prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget

Prescriptive Baseline for

Item Attribute
Measure Energy Modeling Path

Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010 ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g.
Freezers Addendum g. Table 6.8.1L Table 6.8.1L

Commercial Refrigeration Energy Use Limits ASHRAE 90.1-2010 ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Addendum g.
Equipment Addendum g. Table 6.8.1M Table 6.8.1M

TABLE 3. Walk-in coolers and freezers prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget APPENDICES
804

Baseline for
Item Attribute Prescriptive Measure
Energy Modeling Path

Envelope Freezer insulation R-46 R-36

Cooler insulation R-36 R-20

Automatic closer Yes No

doors

High-efficiency low- 40W/ft (130W/m) of door 40W/ft (130W/m) of door frame (low
or no-heat reach-in frame (low temperature), 17W/ temperature), 17W/ft (55W/m) of door frame
doors ft (55W/m) of door frame (medium temperature)
(medium temperature)

Evaporator Evaporator fan motor Shaded pole and split phase Constant-speed fan
and control motors prohibited; use PSC or
EMC motors

Hot gas defrost No electric defrosting Electric defrosting

Condenser Air-cooled condenser Shaded pole and split phase Cycling one-speed fan
fan motor and motors prohibited; use PSC or
control EMC motors; add condenser
fan controllers

Air-cooled condenser Floating head pressure controls 10°F (-12°C) to 15°F

design approach or ambient subcooling (-9°C) dependent on suction temperature

Lighting Lighting power 0.6 W/sq.ft. 0.6 W/sq.ft.

density (W/sq.ft.) (6.5 W/sq. meter) (6.5 W/sq. meter)
LEED REFERENCE GUIDE FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits na Use an Exceptional Calculation Method if
Freezers attempting to take savings

Commercial Refrigerator and Energy Use Limits na Use an Exceptional Calculation Method if
Freezers attempting to take savings

TABLE 4. Commercial kitchen ventilation prescriptive measures and baseline for energy cost budget

Strategies Prescriptive Measure Baseline

Kitchen hood control ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section 6.5.7.1, except that ASHRAE 90.1-2010 Section 6.5.7.1 and Section G3.1.1
Section 6.5.7.1.3 and Section 6.5.7.1.4 shall apply Exception (d) where applicable
if the total kitchen exhaust airflow rate exceeds
2,000 cfm (960 L/s) (as opposed to 5,000 cfm
(2,400 L/s) noted in the ASHRAE 90.1-2010
requirements)
APPENDICES